Hitachi Single-Chip Microcomputer
H8/3048 Series
H8/3048
HD64F3048, HD6473048, HD6433048
H8/3047
HD6433047
H8/3045
HD6433045
H8/3044
HD6433044
Hardware Manual
ADE-602-073B
Preface
The H8/3048 Series is a series of high-performance microcontrollers that integrate system
supporting functions together with an H8/300H CPU core.
The H8/300H CPU has a 32-bit internal architecture with sixteen 16-bit general registers, and a
concise, optimized instruction set designed for speed. It can address a 16-Mbyte linear address
space.
The on-chip supporting functions include ROM, RAM, a 16-bit integrated timer unit (ITU), a
programmable timing pattern controller (TPC), a watchdog timer (WDT), a serial communication
interface (SCI), an A/D converter, a D/A converter, I/O ports, a direct memory access controller
(DMAC), a refresh controller, and other facilities. Of the two SCI channels, one has been
expanded to support the ISO/IEC7816-3 smart card interface. Functions have also been added to
reduce power consumption in battery-powered applications: individual modules can be placed in
standby, and the frequency of the system clock supplied to the chip can be divided down under
software control.
The address space is divided into eight areas. The data bus width and access cycle length can be
selected independently in each area, simplifying the connection of different types of memory.
Seven operating modes (modes 1 to 7) are provided, offering a choice of data bus width and
address space size.
With these features, the H8/3048 Series can be used to implement compact, high-performance
systems easily.
In addition to its masked-ROM versions, the H8/3048 Series has a ZTAT™*1version with user-
programmable on-chip PROM and an F-ZTAT™*2version with on-chip flash memory that can be
programmed on-board. These versions enable users to respond quickly and flexibly to changing
application specifications.
This manual describes the H8/3048 Series hardware. For details of the instruction set, refer to the
H8/300H Series Programming Manual.
Notes: 1. ZTAT™ (Zero Turn-Around-time) is a trademark of Hitachi, Ltd.
2. F-ZTAT™ (Flexible ZTAT) is a trademark of Hitachi, Ltd.
Contents
Section 1 Overview...................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................................5
1.3 Pin Description ............................................................................................................... 6
1.3.1 Pin Arrangement............................................................................................. 6
1.3.2 Pin Assignments in Each Mode...................................................................... 7
1.3.3 Pin Functions.................................................................................................. 10
Section 2 CPU............................................................................................................... 15
2.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 15
2.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 15
2.1.2 Differences from H8/300 CPU....................................................................... 16
2.2 CPU Operating Modes.................................................................................................... 17
2.3 Address Space................................................................................................................. 18
2.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................................... 19
2.4.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 19
2.4.2 General Registers............................................................................................ 20
2.4.3 Control Registers............................................................................................ 21
2.4.4 Initial CPU Register Values............................................................................ 22
2.5 Data Formats................................................................................................................... 23
2.5.1 General Register Data Formats....................................................................... 23
2.5.2 Memory Data Formats.................................................................................... 25
2.6 Instruction Set................................................................................................................. 26
2.6.1 Instruction Set Overview ................................................................................ 26
2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes................................................................ 27
2.6.3 Tables of Instructions Classified by Function................................................. 28
2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats............................................................................... 38
2.6.5 Notes on Use of Bit Manipulation Instructions.............................................. 39
2.7 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation .................................................. 39
2.7.1 Addressing Modes.......................................................................................... 39
2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation ........................................................................ 42
2.8 Processing States ............................................................................................................46
2.8.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 46
2.8.2 Program Execution State ................................................................................ 47
2.8.3 Exception-Handling State............................................................................... 47
2.8.4 Exception-Handling Sequences...................................................................... 49
2.8.5 Bus-Released State ......................................................................................... 50
2.8.6 Reset State ...................................................................................................... 50
2.8.7 Power-Down State .......................................................................................... 50
2.9 Basic Operational Timing............................................................................................... 51
2.9.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 51
2.9.2 On-Chip Memory Access Timing................................................................... 51
2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing................................................. 53
2.9.4 Access to External Address Space.................................................................. 54
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes........................................................................... 55
3.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 55
3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection.............................................................................. 55
3.1.2 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 56
3.2 Mode Control Register (MDCR).................................................................................... 57
3.3 System Control Register (SYSCR)................................................................................. 58
3.4 Operating Mode Descriptions......................................................................................... 60
3.4.1 Mode 1............................................................................................................ 60
3.4.2 Mode 2............................................................................................................ 60
3.4.3 Mode 3............................................................................................................ 60
3.4.4 Mode 4............................................................................................................ 60
3.4.5 Mode 5............................................................................................................ 60
3.4.6 Mode 6 ........................................................................................................... 60
3.4.7 Mode 7 ........................................................................................................... 61
3.5 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode.......................................................................... 61
3.6 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode.......................................................................... 61
Section 4 Exception Handling.................................................................................. 71
4.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 71
4.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority.......................................................... 71
4.1.2 Exception Handling Operation....................................................................... 71
4.1.3 Exception Vector Table................................................................................... 72
4.2 Reset ............................................................................................................................... 73
4.2.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 73
4.2.2 Reset Sequence............................................................................................... 73
4.2.3 Interrupts after Reset....................................................................................... 76
4.3 Interrupts......................................................................................................................... 77
4.4 Trap Instruction............................................................................................................... 78
4.5 Stack Status after Exception Handling........................................................................... 79
4.6 Notes on Stack Usage..................................................................................................... 80
Section 5 Interrupt Controller................................................................................... 81
5.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 81
5.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 81
5.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 82
5.1.3 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 83
5.1.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 83
5.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 84
5.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR)................................................................. 84
5.2.2 Interrupt Priority Registers A and B (IPRA, IPRB)....................................... 85
5.2.3 IRQ Status Register (ISR) .............................................................................. 92
5.2.4 IRQ Enable Register (IER)............................................................................. 93
5.2.5 IRQ Sense Control Register (ISCR)............................................................... 94
5.3 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................. 95
5.3.1 External Interrupts.......................................................................................... 95
5.3.2 Internal Interrupts ........................................................................................... 96
5.3.3 Interrupt Vector Table..................................................................................... 96
5.4 Interrupt Operation ......................................................................................................... 100
5.4.1 Interrupt Handling Process............................................................................. 100
5.4.2 Interrupt Sequence.......................................................................................... 105
5.4.3 Interrupt Response Time................................................................................. 106
5.5 Usage Notes.................................................................................................................... 107
5.5.1 Contention between Interrupt and Interrupt-Disabling Instruction................ 107
5.5.2 Instructions that Inhibit Interrupts.................................................................. 108
5.5.3 Interrupts during EEPMOV Instruction Execution......................................... 108
5.5.4 Notes on External Interrup to during Use....................................................... 108
Section 6 Bus Controller............................................................................................ 111
6.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 111
6.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 111
6.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 112
6.1.3 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................ 113
6.1.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 113
6.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 114
6.2.1 Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR) ......................................................... 114
6.2.2 Access State Control Register (ASTCR)........................................................ 115
6.2.3 Wait Control Register (WCR)......................................................................... 116
6.2.4 Wait State Controller Enable Register (WCER)............................................. 117
6.2.5 Bus Release Control Register (BRCR)........................................................... 118
6.2.6 Chip Select Control Register (CSCR) ............................................................ 119
6.3 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 121
6.3.1 Area Division.................................................................................................. 121
6.3.2 Chip Select Signals......................................................................................... 123
6.3.3 Data Bus.......................................................................................................... 124
6.3.4 Bus Control Signal Timing............................................................................. 125
6.3.5 Wait Modes..................................................................................................... 133
6.3.6 Interconnections with Memory (Example)..................................................... 139
6.3.7 Bus Arbiter Operation..................................................................................... 141
6.4 Usage Notes.................................................................................................................... 144
6.4.1 Connection to Dynamic RAM and Pseudo-Static RAM................................ 144
6.4.2 Register Write Timing .................................................................................... 144
6.4.3 BREQ Input Timing........................................................................................ 144
6.4.4 Transition to Software Standby Mode............................................................ 146
Section 7 Refresh Controller .................................................................................... 147
7.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 147
7.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 147
7.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 148
7.1.3 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................ 149
7.1.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 149
7.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 150
7.2.1 Refresh Control Register (RFSHCR) ............................................................. 150
7.2.2 Refresh Timer Control/Status Register (RTMCSR) ....................................... 153
7.2.3 Refresh Timer Counter (RTCNT)................................................................... 155
7.2.4 Refresh Time Constant Register (RTCOR) .................................................... 155
7.3 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 156
7.3.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 156
7.3.2 DRAM Refresh Control.................................................................................. 157
7.3.3 Pseudo-Static RAM Refresh Control.............................................................. 172
7.3.4 Interval Timing ............................................................................................... 177
7.4 Interrupt Source.............................................................................................................. 183
7.5 Usage Notes.................................................................................................................... 183
Section 8 DMA Controller........................................................................................ 185
8.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 185
8.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 185
8.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 186
8.1.3 Functional Overview....................................................................................... 187
8.1.4 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................ 188
8.1.5 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 188
8.2 Register Descriptions (Short Address Mode)................................................................. 190
8.2.1 Memory Address Registers (MAR)................................................................ 190
8.2.2 I/O Address Registers (IOAR)........................................................................ 191
8.2.3 Execute Transfer Count Registers (ETCR)..................................................... 191
8.2.4 Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR)....................................................... 193
8.3 Register Descriptions (Full Address Mode)................................................................... 196
8.3.1 Memory Address Registers (MAR)................................................................ 196
8.3.2 I/O Address Registers (IOAR)........................................................................ 196
8.3.3 Execute Transfer Count Registers (ETCR)..................................................... 197
8.3.4 Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR)....................................................... 199
8.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 205
8.4.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 205
8.4.2 I/O Mode......................................................................................................... 207
8.4.3 Idle Mode........................................................................................................ 209
8.4.4 Repeat Mode................................................................................................... 212
8.4.5 Normal Mode.................................................................................................. 215
8.4.6 Block Transfer Mode...................................................................................... 218
8.4.7 DMAC Activation........................................................................................... 223
8.4.8 DMAC Bus Cycle........................................................................................... 225
8.4.9 Multiple-Channel Operation........................................................................... 231
8.4.10 External Bus Requests, Refresh Controller, and DMAC................................ 232
8.4.11 NMI Interrupts and DMAC ............................................................................ 233
8.4.12 Aborting a DMA Transfer .............................................................................. 234
8.4.13 Exiting Full Address Mode............................................................................. 235
8.4.14 DMAC States in Reset State, Standby Modes, and Sleep Mode.................... 236
8.5 Interrupts......................................................................................................................... 237
8.6 Usage Notes.................................................................................................................... 238
8.6.1 Note on Word Data Transfer........................................................................... 238
8.6.2 DMAC Self-Access ........................................................................................ 238
8.6.3 Longword Access to Memory Address Registers........................................... 238
8.6.4 Note on Full Address Mode Setup.................................................................. 238
8.6.5 Note on Activating DMAC by Internal Interrupts.......................................... 239
8.6.6 NMI Interrupts and Block Transfer Mode...................................................... 240
8.6.7 Memory and I/O Address Register Values ..................................................... 240
8.6.8 Bus Cycle when Transfer is Aborted.............................................................. 241
Section 9 I/O Ports....................................................................................................... 243
9.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 243
9.2 Port 1............................................................................................................................... 246
9.2.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 246
9.2.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 247
9.3 Port 2............................................................................................................................... 249
9.3.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 249
9.3.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 250
9.4 Port 3............................................................................................................................... 253
9.4.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 253
9.4.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 253
9.5 Port 4............................................................................................................................... 255
9.5.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 255
9.5.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 256
9.6 Port 5............................................................................................................................... 259
9.6.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 259
9.6.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 259
9.7 Port 6............................................................................................................................... 262
9.7.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 262
9.7.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 262
9.8 Port 7............................................................................................................................... 265
9.8.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 265
9.8.2 Register Description ....................................................................................... 266
9.9 Port 8............................................................................................................................... 267
9.9.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 267
9.9.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 268
9.10 Port 9............................................................................................................................... 272
9.10.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 272
9.10.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 272
9.11 Port A.............................................................................................................................. 276
9.11.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 276
9.11.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 278
9.11.3 Pin Functions.................................................................................................. 279
9.12 Port B.............................................................................................................................. 284
9.12.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 284
9.12.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................... 286
9.12.3 Pin Functions.................................................................................................. 288
Section 10 16-Bit Integrated Timer Unit (ITU)..................................................... 295
10.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 295
10.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 295
10.1.2 Block Diagrams.............................................................................................. 298
10.1.3 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................ 303
10.1.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 304
10.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 307
10.2.1 Timer Start Register (TSTR) .......................................................................... 307
10.2.2 Timer Synchro Register (TSNC).................................................................... 308
10.2.3 Timer Mode Register (TMDR)....................................................................... 310
10.2.4 Timer Function Control Register (TFCR) ...................................................... 313
10.2.5 Timer Output Master Enable Register (TOER).............................................. 315
10.2.6 Timer Output Control Register (TOCR)......................................................... 318
10.2.7 Timer Counters (TCNT)................................................................................. 319
10.2.8 General Registers (GRA, GRB) ..................................................................... 320
10.2.9 Buffer Registers (BRA, BRB) ........................................................................ 321
10.2.10 Timer Control Registers (TCR)...................................................................... 322
10.2.11 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR)................................................................ 324
10.2.12 Timer Status Register (TSR)........................................................................... 326
10.2.13 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)......................................................... 329
10.3 CPU Interface ................................................................................................................. 331
10.3.1 16-Bit Accessible Registers............................................................................ 331
10.3.2 8-Bit Accessible Registers.............................................................................. 333
10.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 335
10.4.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 335
10.4.2 Basic Functions............................................................................................... 336
10.4.3 Synchronization.............................................................................................. 346
10.4.4 PWM Mode .................................................................................................... 348
10.4.5 Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode................................................................... 352
10.4.6 Complementary PWM Mode.......................................................................... 355
10.4.7 Phase Counting Mode..................................................................................... 365
10.4.8 Buffering......................................................................................................... 367
10.4.9 ITU Output Timing......................................................................................... 374
10.5 Interrupts......................................................................................................................... 376
10.5.1 Setting of Status Flags.................................................................................... 376
10.5.2 Clearing of Status Flags.................................................................................. 378
10.5.3 Interrupt Sources and DMA Controller Activation ........................................ 379
10.6 Usage Notes.................................................................................................................... 380
Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller......................................... 395
11.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 395
11.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 395
11.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 396
11.1.3 TPC Pins......................................................................................................... 397
11.1.4 Registers ......................................................................................................... 398
11.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 399
11.2.1 Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR)...................................................... 399
11.2.2 Port A Data Register (PADR)......................................................................... 399
11.2.3 Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR)...................................................... 400
11.2.4 Port B Data Register (PBDR)......................................................................... 400
11.2.5 Next Data Register A (NDRA)....................................................................... 401
11.2.6 Next Data Register B (NDRB) ....................................................................... 403
11.2.7 Next Data Enable Register A (NDERA) ........................................................ 405
11.2.8 Next Data Enable Register B (NDERB)......................................................... 406
11.2.9 TPC Output Control Register (TPCR)............................................................ 407
11.2.10 TPC Output Mode Register (TPMR).............................................................. 410
11.3 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 412
11.3.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 412
11.3.2 Output Timing................................................................................................. 413
11.3.3 Normal TPC Output........................................................................................ 414
11.3.4 Non-Overlapping TPC Output........................................................................ 416
11.3.5 TPC Output Triggering by Input Capture....................................................... 418
11.4 Usage Notes.................................................................................................................... 419
11.4.1 Operation of TPC Output Pins........................................................................ 419
11.4.2 Note on Non-Overlapping Output.................................................................. 419
Section 12 Watchdog Timer........................................................................................ 421
12.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 421
12.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 421
12.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 422
12.1.3 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 422
12.1.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 423
12.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 424
12.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)................................................................................... 424
12.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)........................................................... 425
12.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR) ...................................................... 427
12.2.4 Notes on Register Access ............................................................................... 429
12.3 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 431
12.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation............................................................................. 431
12.3.2 Interval Timer Operation ................................................................................ 432
12.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF).................................................... 433
12.3.4 Timing of Setting of Watchdog Timer Reset Bit (WRST) ............................. 434
12.4 Interrupts......................................................................................................................... 435
12.5 Usage Notes.................................................................................................................... 435
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface........................................................... 437
13.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 437
13.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 437
13.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 439
13.1.3 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................ 440
13.1.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 440
13.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 441
13.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) ......................................................................... 441
13.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)......................................................................... 441
13.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)........................................................................ 442
13.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)........................................................................ 442
13.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR).......................................................................... 443
13.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR)........................................................................ 447
13.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR)........................................................................... 451
13.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR)................................................................................. 455
13.3 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 464
13.3.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 464
13.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode.................................................................. 466
13.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication ..................................................................... 475
13.3.4 Synchronous Operation .................................................................................. 482
13.4 SCI Interrupts.................................................................................................................. 491
13.5 Usage Notes.................................................................................................................... 492
Section 14 Smart Card Interface................................................................................ 497
14.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 497
14.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 497
14.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 498
14.1.3 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................ 499
14.1.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 499
14.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 500
14.2.1 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR)............................................................... 500
14.2.2 Serial Status Register (SSR)........................................................................... 501
14.2.3 Serial Mode Register (SMR).......................................................................... 503
14.2.4 Serial Control Register (SCR)........................................................................ 504
14.3 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 505
14.3.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 505
14.3.2 Pin Connections.............................................................................................. 505
14.3.3 Data Format.................................................................................................... 506
14.3.4 Register Settings............................................................................................. 508
14.3.5 Clock............................................................................................................... 510
14.3.6 Transmitting and Receiving Data ................................................................... 512
14.4 Usage Notes.................................................................................................................... 519
Section 15 A/D Converter............................................................................................ 523
15.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 523
15.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 523
15.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 524
15.1.3 Input Pins........................................................................................................ 525
15.1.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 526
15.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 527
15.2.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD)........................................ 527
15.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR).......................................................... 528
15.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR)....................................................................... 531
15.3 CPU Interface ................................................................................................................. 532
15.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 533
15.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0)............................................................................... 533
15.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1).................................................................................. 535
15.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time .................................................... 537
15.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing........................................................................ 538
15.5 Interrupts......................................................................................................................... 539
15.6 Usage Notes.................................................................................................................... 539
Section 16 D/A Converter............................................................................................ 545
16.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 545
16.1.1 Features........................................................................................................... 545
16.1.2 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 545
16.1.3 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................ 546
16.1.4 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 546
16.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 547
16.2.1 D/A Data Registers 0 and 1 (DADR0/1) ........................................................ 547
16.2.2 D/A Control Register (DACR) ....................................................................... 547
16.2.3 D/A Standby Control Register (DASTCR)..................................................... 549
16.3 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 550
16.4 D/A Output Control........................................................................................................ 551
16.5 Usage Notes.................................................................................................................... 551
Section 17 RAM............................................................................................................. 553
17.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 553
17.1.1 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 553
17.1.2 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 554
17.2 System Control Register (SYSCR)................................................................................. 555
17.3 Operation ........................................................................................................................ 556
Section 18 ROM.............................................................................................................. 557
18.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 557
18.1.1 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 558
18.2 PROM Mode................................................................................................................... 559
18.2.1 PROM Mode Setting ...................................................................................... 559
18.2.2 Socket Adapter and Memory Map.................................................................. 559
18.3 PROM Programming...................................................................................................... 562
18.3.1 Programming and Verification........................................................................ 562
18.3.2 Programming Precautions............................................................................... 567
18.3.3 Reliability of Programmed Data..................................................................... 568
18.4 Flash Memory Overview ................................................................................................ 569
18.4.1 Flash Memory Operation................................................................................ 569
18.4.2 Mode Programming and Flash Memory Address Space................................ 570
18.4.3 Features........................................................................................................... 570
18.4.4 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 572
18.4.5 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................ 573
18.4.6 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 573
18.5 Flash Memory Register Descriptions ............................................................................. 574
18.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register ..................................................................... 574
18.5.2 Erase Block Register 1.................................................................................... 577
18.5.3 Erase Block Register 2.................................................................................... 578
18.5.4 RAM Control Register (RAMCR).................................................................. 580
18.6 On-Board Programming Modes ..................................................................................... 582
18.6.1 Boot Mode...................................................................................................... 582
18.6.2 User Program Mode........................................................................................ 587
18.7 Programming and Erasing Flash Memory...................................................................... 589
18.7.1 Program Mode................................................................................................ 590
18.7.2 Program-Verify Mode..................................................................................... 590
18.7.3 Programming Flowchart and Sample Program............................................... 591
18.7.4 Erase Mode..................................................................................................... 593
18.7.5 Erase-Verify Mode.......................................................................................... 594
18.7.6 Erasing Flowchart and Sample Program ........................................................ 595
18.7.7 Prewrite-Verify Mode..................................................................................... 607
18.7.8 Protect Modes................................................................................................. 607
18.7.9 NMI Input Masking........................................................................................ 610
18.8 Flash Memory Emulation by RAM................................................................................ 611
18.9 PROM Mode................................................................................................................... 613
18.9.1 PROM Mode Setting ...................................................................................... 613
18.9.2 Socket Adapter and Memory Map.................................................................. 614
18.9.3 Operation in PROM Mode.............................................................................. 616
18.10 Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.................................................. 624
Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator............................................................................. 633
19.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 633
19.1.1 Block Diagram................................................................................................ 633
19.2 Oscillator Circuit ............................................................................................................ 634
19.2.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator ..................................................................... 634
19.2.2 External Clock Input....................................................................................... 636
19.3 Duty Adjustment Circuit................................................................................................. 639
19.4 Prescalers........................................................................................................................ 639
19.5 Frequency Divider .......................................................................................................... 639
19.5.1 Register Configuration.................................................................................... 639
19.5.2 Division Control Register (DIVCR)............................................................... 639
19.5.3 Usage Notes.................................................................................................... 640
Section 20 Power-Down State.................................................................................... 641
20.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 641
20.2 Register Configuration.................................................................................................... 643
20.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR)................................................................. 643
20.2.2 Module Standby Control Register (MSTCR)................................................. 645
20.3 Sleep Mode..................................................................................................................... 647
20.3.1 Transition to Sleep Mode................................................................................ 647
20.3.2 Exit from Sleep Mode..................................................................................... 647
20.4 Software Standby Mode ................................................................................................. 648
20.4.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode............................................................ 648
20.4.2 Exit from Software Standby Mode................................................................. 648
20.4.3 Selection of Waiting Time for Exit from Software Standby Mode ................ 649
20.4.4 Sample Application of Software Standby Mode............................................ 650
20.4.5 Note................................................................................................................. 650
20.5 Hardware Standby Mode................................................................................................ 651
20.5.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode........................................................... 651
20.5.2 Exit from Hardware Standby Mode................................................................ 651
20.5.3 Timing for Hardware Standby Mode.............................................................. 651
20.6 Module Standby Function............................................................................................... 652
20.6.1 Module Standby Timing................................................................................. 652
20.6.2 Read/Write in Module Standby...................................................................... 652
20.6.3 Usage Notes.................................................................................................... 652
20.7 System Clock Output Disabling Function...................................................................... 653
Section 21 Electrical Characteristics........................................................................ 649
21.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings........................................................................................... 649
21.2 Electrical Characteristics of Masked ROM and PROM Versions................................... 650
21.2.1 DC Characteristics.......................................................................................... 650
21.2.2 AC Characteristics.......................................................................................... 658
21.2.3 A/D Conversion Characteristics ..................................................................... 666
21.2.4 D/A Conversion Characteristics ..................................................................... 667
21.3 Electrical Characteristics of Flash Memory Version ...................................................... 668
21.3.1 DC Characteristics.......................................................................................... 668
21.3.2 AC Characteristics.......................................................................................... 677
21.3.3 A/D Conversion Characteristics ..................................................................... 683
21.3.4 D/A Conversion Characteristics ..................................................................... 684
21.3.5 Flash Memory Characteristics........................................................................ 685
21.4 Operational Timing......................................................................................................... 686
14
21.4.1 Bus Timing ..................................................................................................... 686
21.4.2 Refresh Controller Bus Timing....................................................................... 690
21.4.3 Control Signal Timing .................................................................................... 695
21.4.4 Clock Timing.................................................................................................. 697
21.4.5 TPC and I/O Port Timing................................................................................ 697
21.4.6 ITU Timing..................................................................................................... 698
21.4.7 SCI Input/Output Timing................................................................................ 699
21.4.8 DMAC Timing................................................................................................ 700
Appendix A Instruction Set............................................................................................ 703
A.1 Instruction List................................................................................................................ 703
A.2 Operation Code Map....................................................................................................... 718
A.3 Number of States Required for Execution...................................................................... 721
Appendix B Internal I/O Register................................................................................. 730
B.1 Addresses........................................................................................................................ 730
B.2 Function.......................................................................................................................... 738
Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams........................................................................ 818
C.1 Port 1 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 818
C.2 Port 2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 819
C.3 Port 3 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 820
C.4 Port 4 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 821
C.5 Port 5 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 822
C.6 Port 6 Block Diagrams.................................................................................................... 823
C.7 Port 7 Block Diagrams.................................................................................................... 827
C.8 Port 8 Block Diagrams.................................................................................................... 828
C.9 Port 9 Block Diagrams.................................................................................................... 831
C.10 Port A Block Diagrams................................................................................................... 835
C.11 Port B Block Diagrams................................................................................................... 839
Appendix D Pin States..................................................................................................... 843
D.1 Port States in Each Mode................................................................................................ 843
D.2 Pin States at Reset........................................................................................................... 846
Appendix E
Timing of Transition to and Reco very from Hardware Standby Mode
.... 849
Appendix F Product Code Lineup............................................................................... 850
Appendix G Package Dimensions................................................................................ 852
Section 1 Overview
1.1 Overview
The H8/3048 Series is a series of microcontrollers (MCUs) that integrate system supporting
functions together with an H8/300H CPU core having an original Hitachi architecture.
The H8/300H CPU has a 32-bit internal architecture with sixteen 16-bit general registers, and a
concise, optimized instruction set designed for speed. It can address a 16-Mbyte linear address
space. Its instruction set is upward-compatible at the object-code level with the H8/300 CPU,
enabling easy porting of software from the H8/300 Series.
The on-chip system supporting functions include ROM, RAM, a 16-bit integrated timer unit
(ITU), a programmable timing pattern controller (TPC), a watchdog timer (WDT), a serial
communication interface (SCI), an A/D converter, a D/A converter, I/O ports, a direct memory
access controller (DMAC), a refresh controller, and other facilities.
The four members of the H8/3048 Series are the H8/3048, the H8/3047, H8/3045, and the
H8/3044. The H8/3048 has 128 kbytes of ROM and 4 kbytes of RAM. The H8/3047 has 96 kbytes
of ROM and 4 kbytes of RAM. The H8/3045 has 64 kbytes of ROM and 2 kbytes of RAM. The
H8/3044 has 32 kbytes of ROM and 2 kbytes of RAM.
Seven MCU operating modes offer a choice of data bus width and address space size. The modes
(modes 1 to 7) include one single-chip mode and six expanded modes.
In addition to the masked-ROM versions of the H8/3048 Series, the H8/3048 has a ZTAT™*1
version with user-programmable on-chip PROM and an F-ZTAT™*2version with on-chip flash
memory that can be programmed on-board. These versions enable users to respond quickly and
flexibly to changing application specifications, growing production volumes, and other conditions.
Table 1-1 summarizes the features of the H8/3048 Series.
Notes: 1. ZTAT (Zero Turn-Around Time) is a trademark of Hitachi, Ltd.
2. F-ZTAT (Flexible ZTAT) is a trademark of Hitachi, Ltd.
1
Table 1-1 Features
Feature Description
CPU Upward-compatible with the H8/300 CPU at the object-code level
General-register machine
• Sixteen 16-bit general registers
(also usable as + eight 16-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers)
High-speed operation (flash memory version)
• Maximum clock rate: 16 MHz
• Add/subtract: 125 ns
• Multiply/divide: 875 ns
High-speed operation (masked ROM and PROM versions)
• Maximum clock rate: 18 MHz
• Add/subtract: 111 ns
• Multiply/divide: 778 ns
16-Mbyte address space
Instruction features
• 8/16/32-bit data transfer, arithmetic, and logic instructions
• Signed and unsigned multiply instructions (8 bits ×8 bits, 16 bits ×16 bits)
• Signed and unsigned divide instructions (16 bits ÷ 8 bits, 32 bits ÷ 16 bits)
• Bit accumulator function
• Bit manipulation instructions with register-indirect specification of bit positions
Memory H8/3048
• ROM: 128 kbytes
• RAM: 4 kbytes
H8/3047
• ROM: 96 kbytes
• RAM: 4 kbytes
H8/3045
• ROM: 64 kbytes
• RAM: 2 kbytes
H8/3044
• ROM: 32 kbytes
• RAM: 2 kbytes
Interrupt • Seven external interrupt pins: NMI, IRQ0to IRQ5
controller • 30 internal interrupts
• Three selectable interrupt priority levels
Bus controller • Address space can be partitioned into eight areas, with independent bus
specifications in each area
• Chip select output available for areas 0 to 7
• 8-bit access or 16-bit access selectable for each area
• Two-state or three-state access selectable for each area
• Selection of four wait modes
• Bus arbitration function
2
Table 1-1 Features (cont)
Feature Description
Refresh DRAM refresh
controller • Directly connectable to 16-bit-wide DRAM
• CAS-before-RAS refresh
• Self-refresh mode selectable
Pseudo-static RAM refresh
• Self-refresh mode selectable
Usable as an interval timer
DMA controller Short address mode
(DMAC) • Maximum four channels available
• Selection of I/O mode, idle mode, or repeat mode
• Can be activated by compare match/input capture A interrupts from ITU
channels 0 to 3, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from SCI
channel 0, or external requests
Full address mode
• Maximum two channels available
• Selection of normal mode or block transfer mode
• Can be activated by compare match/input capture A interrupts from ITU
channels 0 to 3, external requests, or auto-request
16-bit integrated • Five 16-bit timer channels, capable of processing up to 12 pulse outputs or 10
timer unit (ITU) pulse inputs
• 16-bit timer counter (channels 0 to 4)
• Two multiplexed output compare/input capture pins (channels 0 to 4)
• Operation can be synchronized (channels 0 to 4)
• PWM mode available (channels 0 to 4)
• Phase counting mode available (channel 2)
• Buffering available (channels 3 and 4)
• Reset-synchronized PWM mode available (channels 3 and 4)
• Complementary PWM mode available (channels 3 and 4)
• DMAC can be activated by compare match/input capture A interrupts
(channels 0 to 3)
Programmable • Maximum 16-bit pulse output, using ITU as time base
timing pattern • Up to four 4-bit pulse output groups (or one 16-bit group, or two 8-bit groups)
controller (TPC) • Non-overlap mode available
• Output data can be transferred by DMAC
Watchdog • Reset signal can be generated by overflow
timer (WDT), • Reset signal can be output externally
1 channel • Usable as an interval timer
Serial • Selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode
communication • Full duplex: can transmit and receive simultaneously
interface (SCI), • On-chip baud-rate generator
2 channels • Smart card interface functions added (SCI0 only)
3
Table 1-1 Features (cont)
Feature Description
A/D converter • Resolution: 10 bits
• Eight channels, with selection of single or scan mode
• Variable analog conversion voltage range
• Sample-and-hold function
• A/D conversion can be externally triggered
D/A converter • Resolution: 8 bits
• Two channels
• D/A outputs can be sustained in software standby mode
I/O ports • 70 input/output pins
• 8 input-only pins
Operating modes Seven MCU operating modes
Mode Address Space Address Pins Initial Bus Width Max. Bus Width
Mode 1 1 Mbyte A19 to A08 bits 16 bits
Mode 2 1 Mbyte A19 to A016 bits 16 bits
Mode 3 16 Mbytes A23 to A08 bits 16 bits
Mode 4 16 Mbytes A23 to A016 bits 16 bits
Mode 5 1 Mbyte A19 to A08 bits 16 bits
Mode 6 16 Mbytes A23 to A08 bits 16 bits
Mode 7 1 Mbyte — — —
• On-chip ROM is disabled in modes 1 to 4
Power-down • Sleep mode
state • Software standby mode
• Hardware standby mode
• Module standby function
• Programmable system clock frequency division
Other features • On-chip clock pulse generator
Product lineup Model (5-V) Model (3-V) Package ROM
HD64F3048TF HD64F3048VTF 100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B) Flash memory
HD64F3048F HD64F3048VF 100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD6473048TF HD6473048VTF 100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B) PROM
HD6473048F HD6473048VF 100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD6433048TF HD6433048VTF 100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B) Masked ROM
HD6433048F HD6433048VF 100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD6433047TF HD6433047VTF 100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B) Masked ROM
HD6433047F HD6433047VF 100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD6433045TF HD6433045VTF 100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B) Masked ROM
HD6433045F HD6433045VF 100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
HD6433044TF HD6433044VTF 100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B) Masked ROM
HD6433044F HD6433044VF 100-pin QFP (FP-100B)
4
1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 1-1 shows an internal block diagram.
Figure 1-1 Block Diagram
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
CC
CC
CC
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
P3 /D
P3 /D
P3 /D
P3 /D
P3 /D
P3 /D
P3 /D
P3 /D
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P4 /D
P4 /D
P4 /D
P4 /D
P4 /D
P4 /D
P4 /D
P4 /D
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5Port 9
P5 /A
P5 /A
P5 /A
P5 /A
3
2
1
0
19
18
17
16
P2 /A
P2 /A
P2 /A
P2 /A
P2 /A
P2 /A
P2 /A
P2 /A
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P9 /SCK /IRQ
P9 /SCK /IRQ
P9 /RxD
P9 /RxD
P9 /TxD
P9 /TxD
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
5
4
P7 /AN /DA
P7 /AN /DA
P7 /AN
P7 /AN
P7 /AN
P7 /AN
P7 /AN
P7 /AN
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
Port 7
V
AV
AV
REF
CC
SS
PA7/TP7/TIOCB2/A20
PA6/TP6/TIOCA2/A21/CS4
PA5/TP5/TIOCB1/A22/CS5
PA4/TP4/TIOCA1/A23/CS6
PA /TP /TIOCB /TCLKD
PA /TP /TIOCA /TCLKC
PA /TP /TEND /TCLKB
PA /TP /TEND /TCLKA
Port A
3
2
0
0
3
2
1
0
1
0
PB /TP /DREQ /ADTRG
PB6/TP14/DREQ0/CS7
PB /TP /TOCXB
PB /TP /TOCXA
PB /TP /TIOCB
PB /TP /TIOCA
PB /TP /TIOCB
PB /TP /TIOCA
15 17
4
4
4
4
3
3
5
4
13
12
3
2
11
10
1
0
9
8
Port 8
P8 /CS
P8 /CS /IRQ
P8 /CS /IRQ
P8 /CS /IRQ
P8 /RFSH/IRQ
40
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
3
2
1
0
MD
MD
MD
EXTAL
XTAL
ø
STBY
RES
V /RESO
NMI
2
1
0
H8/300H CPU
Clock pulse
generator
Interrupt controller
ROM
(masked ROM,
PROM, or flash
memory)
DMA controller
(DMAC)
Serial communication
interface
(SCI) 2 channels
×
Watchdog timer
(WDT)
Refresh
controller
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Address bus
Data bus (upper)
Data bus (lower)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Port 2
P1 /A
P1 /A
P1 /A
P1 /A
P1 /A
P1 /A
P1 /A
P1 /A
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Port 1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
1
0
P6 /LWR
P6 /HWR
P6 /RD
P6 /AS
P6 /BACK
P6 /BREQ
P6 /WAIT
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAM
16-bit integrated
timer unit
(ITU)
A/D converter
D/A converter
Port 6
Bus controller
Programmable
timing pattern
controller (TPC)
Port B
PP*
Note: *V function is provided only for the flash memory version.
PP
5
1.3 Pin Description
1.3.1 Pin Arrangement
Figure 1-2 shows the pin arrangement of the H8/3048 Series.
Figure 1-2 Pin Arrangement (FP-100B or TFP-100B, Top View)
V
TIOCA /TP /PB
TIOCB /TP /PB
TIOCA /TP /PB
TIOCB /TP /PB
TOCXA /TP /PB
TOCXB /TP /PB
CS7/DREQ /TP /PB
ADTRG/DREQ /TP /PB
V /RESO
V
TxD /P9
TxD /P9
RxD /P9
RxD /P9
IRQ /SCK /P9
IRQ /SCK /P9
D /P4
D /P4
D /P4
D /P4
V
D /P4
D /P4
D /P4
MD
MD
MD
P6 /LWR
P6 /HWR
P6 /RD
P6 /AS
V
XTAL
EXTAL
V
NMI
RES
STBY
ø
P6 /BACK
P6 /BREQ
P6 /WAIT
V
P5 /A
P5 /A
P5 /A
P5 /A
P2 /A
P2 /A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
CC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SS
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
SS
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
2
1
0
2
1
0
3
2
1
0
7
6
PA /TP /TIOCB /A
PA /TP /TIOCA /A /CS4
PA /TP /TIOCB /A /CS5
PA /TP /TIOCA /A /CS6
PA /TP /TIOCB /TCLKD
PA /TP /TIOCA /TCLKC
PA /TP /TEND /TCLKB
PA /TP /TEND /TCLKA
V
P8 /CS
P8 /CS /IRQ
P8 /CS /IRQ
P8 /CS /IRQ
P8 /RFSH/IRQ
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AV
P7 /AN /DA
P7 /AN /DA
P7 /AN
P7 /AN
P7 /AN
P7 /AN
P7 /AN
P7 /AN
V
AV
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
1
0
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D /P4
D /P3
D /P3
D /P3
D /P3
D /P3
D /P3
D /P3
D /P3
V
A /P1
A /P1
A /P1
A /P1
A /P1
A /P1
A /P1
A /P1
V
A /P2
A /P2
A /P2
A /P2
A /P2
A /P2
7
8
9
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SS
0
1
2
3
4
5
Top view
(FP-100B, TFP-100B)
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
10
11
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
6
5
4
3
CC
SS
SS
19
18
17
16
15
14
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
20
21
22
23
SS
SS
REF
CC
0
1
0
3
3
4
4
4
4
2
2
1
1
0
0
PP*
Note: *V function is provided only for the flash memory version.
PP
6
1.3.2 Pin Assignments in Each Mode
Table 1-2 lists the pin assignments in each mode.
Table 1-2 Pin Assignments in Each Mode (FP-100B or TFP-100B)
Pin Name PROM Mode
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7
EPROM Flash
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Notes: 1. In modes 1, 3, 5, and 6 the P40to P47functions of pins P40/D0to P47/D7are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software.
2. In modes 2 and 4 the D0to D7functions of pins P40/D0to P47/D7are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software.
3. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
4. For details about PROM mode see section 18, ROM.
VCC
PB0/TP8/TIOCA3
PB1/TP9/TIOCB3
PB2/TP10/TIOCA4
PB3/TP11/TIOCB4
PB4/TP12/TOCXA4
PB5/TP13/TOCXB4
PB6/TP14/DREQ0/
CS7
PB7/TP15/DREQ1/
ADTRG
RESO
VSS
P90/TxD0
P91/TxD1
P92/RxD0
P93/RxD1
P94/SCK0/IRQ4
P95/SCK1/IRQ5
P40/D0
*
1
P41/D1
*
1
P42/D2
*
1
P43/D3
*
1
VSS
P44/D4
*
1
P45/D5
*
1
P46/D6
*
1
P47/D7
*
1
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
VCC
PB0/TP8/TIOCA3
PB1/TP9/TIOCB3
PB2/TP10/TIOCA4
PB3/TP11/TIOCB4
PB4/TP12/TOCXA4
PB5/TP13/TOCXB4
PB6/TP14/DREQ0/
CS7
PB7/TP15/DREQ1/
ADTRG
RESO
VSS
P90/TxD0
P91/TxD1
P92/RxD0
P93/RxD1
P94/SCK0/IRQ4
P95/SCK1/IRQ5
P40/D0
*
2
P41/D1
*
2
P42/D2
*
2
P43/D3
*
2
VSS
P44/D4
*
2
P45/D5
*
2
P46/D6
*
2
P47/D7
*
2
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
VCC
PB0/TP8/TIOCA3
PB1/TP9/TIOCB3
PB2/TP10/TIOCA4
PB3/TP11/TIOCB4
PB4/TP12/TOCXA4
PB5/TP13/TOCXB4
PB6/TP14/DREQ0/
CS7
PB7/TP15/DREQ1/
ADTRG
RESO
VSS
P90/TxD0
P91/TxD1
P92/RxD0
P93/RxD1
P94/SCK0/IRQ4
P95/SCK1/IRQ5
P40/D0
*
1
P41/D1
*
1
P42/D2
*
1
P43/D3
*
1
VSS
P44/D4
*
1
P45/D5
*
1
P46/D6
*
1
P47/D7
*
1
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
VCC
PB0/TP8/TIOCA3
PB1/TP9/TIOCB3
PB2/TP10/TIOCA4
PB3/TP11/TIOCB4
PB4/TP12/TOCXA4
PB5/TP13/TOCXB4
PB6/TP14/DREQ0/
CS7
PB7/TP15/DREQ1/
ADTRG
RESO
VSS
P90/TxD0
P91/TxD1
P92/RxD0
P93/RxD1
P94/SCK0/IRQ4
P95/SCK1/IRQ5
P40/D0
*
2
P41/D1
*
2
P42/D2
*
2
P43/D3
*
2
VSS
P44/D4
*
2
P45/D5
*
2
P46/D6
*
2
P47/D7
*
2
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
VCC
PB0/TP8/TIOCA3
PB1/TP9/TIOCB3
PB2/TP10/TIOCA4
PB3/TP11/TIOCB4
PB4/TP12/TOCXA4
PB5/TP13/TOCXB4
PB6/TP14/DREQ0/
CS7
PB7/TP15/DREQ1/
ADTRG
RESO
VSS
P90/TxD0
P91/TxD1
P92/RxD0
P93/RxD1
P94/SCK0/IRQ4
P95/SCK1/IRQ5
P40/D0
*
1
P41/D1
*
1
P42/D2
*
1
P43/D3
*
1
VSS
P44/D4
*
1
P45/D5
*
1
P46/D6
*
1
P47/D7
*
1
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
VCC
PB0/TP8/TIOCA3
PB1/TP9/TIOCB3
PB2/TP10/TIOCA4
PB3/TP11/TIOCB4
PB4/TP12/TOCXA4
PB5/TP13/TOCXB4
PB6/TP14/DREQ0/
CS7
PB7/TP15/DREQ1/
ADTRG
RESO
VSS
P90/TxD0
P91/TxD1
P92/RxD0
P93/RxD1
P94/SCK0/IRQ4
P95/SCK1/IRQ5
P40/D0
*
1
P41/D1
*
1
P42/D2
*
1
P43/D3
*
1
VSS
P44/D4
*
1
P45/D5
*
1
P46/D6
*
1
P47/D7
*
1
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
VCC
PB0/TP8/TIOCA3
PB1/TP9/TIOCB3
PB2/TP10/TIOCA4
PB3/TP11/TIOCB4
PB4/TP12/TOCXA4
PB5/TP13/TOCXB4
PB6/TP14/DREQ0
PB7/TP15/DREQ1/
ADTRG
RESO
VSS
P90/TxD0
P91/TxD1
P92/RxD0
P93/RxD1
P94/SCK0/IRQ4
P95/SCK1/IRQ5
P40
P41
P42
P43
VSS
P44
P45
P46
P47
P30
P31
P32
P33
P34
P35
P36
VCC VCC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
VPP VPP
VSS VSS
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
VSS VSS
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
EO0I/O0
EO1I/O1
EO2I/O2
EO3I/O3
EO4I/O4
EO5I/O5
EO6I/O6
Pin
No.
7
Table 1-2 Pin Assignments in Each Mode (FP-100B or TFP-100B) (cont)
Pin Name PROM Mode
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7
EPROM Flash
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Notes: 1. In modes 1, 3, 5, and 6 the P40to P47functions of pins P40/D0to P47/D7are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software.
2. In modes 2 and 4 the D0to D7functions of pins P40/D0to P47/D7are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software.
3. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
4. For details about PROM mode see section 18, ROM.
D15
VCC
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
VSS
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
VSS
P60/WAIT
P61/BREQ
P62/BACK
ø
STBY
RES
NMI
VSS
EXTAL
XTAL
VCC
AS
RD
D15
VCC
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
VSS
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
VSS
P60/WAIT
P61/BREQ
P62/BACK
ø
STBY
RES
NMI
VSS
EXTAL
XTAL
VCC
AS
RD
D15
VCC
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
VSS
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
VSS
P60/WAIT
P61/BREQ
P62/BACK
ø
STBY
RES
NMI
VSS
EXTAL
XTAL
VCC
AS
RD
D15
VCC
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
VSS
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
VSS
P60/WAIT
P61/BREQ
P62/BACK
ø
STBY
RES
NMI
VSS
EXTAL
XTAL
VCC
AS
RD
D15
VCC
P10/A0
P11/A1
P12/A2
P13/A3
P14/A4
P15/A5
P16/A6
P17/A7
VSS
P20/A8
P21/A9
P22/A10
P23/A11
P24/A12
P25/A13
P26/A14
P27/A15
P50/A16
P51/A17
P52/A18
P53/A19
VSS
P60/WAIT
P61/BREQ
P62/BACK
ø
STBY
RES
NMI
VSS
EXTAL
XTAL
VCC
AS
RD
D15
VCC
P10/A0
P11/A1
P12/A2
P13/A3
P14/A4
P15/A5
P16/A6
P17/A7
VSS
P20/A8
P21/A9
P22/A10
P23/A11
P24/A12
P25/A13
P26/A14
P27/A15
P50/A16
P51/A17
P52/A18
P53/A19
VSS
P60/WAIT
P61/BREQ
P62/BACK
ø
STBY
RES
NMI
VSS
EXTAL
XTAL
VCC
AS
RD
P37
VCC
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
VSS
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
P50
P51
P52
P53
VSS
P60
P61
P62
ø
STBY
RES
NMI
VSS
EXTAL
XTAL
VCC
P63
P64
EO7I/O7
VCC VCC
EA0A0
EA1A1
EA2A2
EA3A3
EA4A4
EA5A5
EA6A6
EA7A7
VSS VSS
EA8A8
OE OE
EA10 A10
EA11 A11
EA12 A12
EA13 A13
EA14 A14
CE CE
VCC VCC
VCC VCC
NC NC
NC NC
VSS VSS
EA15 A15
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
VSS VCC
NC RES
EA9A9
VSS VSS
NC
EXTAL
NC XTAL
VCC VCC
NC A16
NC NC
Pin
No.
8
Table 1-2 Pin Assignments in Each Mode (FP-100B or TFP-100B) (cont)
Pin Name PROM Mode
Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7
EPROM Flash
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
Notes: 1. In modes 1, 3, 5, and 6 the P40to P47functions of pins P40/D0to P47/D7are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software.
2. In modes 2 and 4 the D0to D7functions of pins P40/D0to P47/D7are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software.
3. Pins marked NC should be left unconnected.
4. For details about PROM mode see section 18, ROM.
NC VCC
NC NC
VSS VSS
VSS VSS
VSS VSS
VCC VCC
VCC VCC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
VSS VSS
EA16 NC
PGM NC
NC VCC
NC WE
NC NC
VSS VSS
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
Pin
No.
9
HWR
LWR
MD0
MD1
MD2
AVCC
VREF
P70/AN0
P71/AN1
P72/AN2
P73/AN3
P74/AN4
P75/AN5
P76/AN6/DA0
P77/AN7/DA1
AVSS
P80/RFSH/IRQ0
P81/CS3/IRQ1
P82/CS2/IRQ2
P83/CS1/IRQ3
P84/CS0
VSS
PA0/TP0/TEND0/
TCLKA
PA1/TP1/TEND1/
TCLKB
PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/
TCLKC
PA3/TP3/TIOCB0/
TCLKD
PA4/TP4/TIOCA1/
CS6
PA5/TP5/TIOCB1/
CS5
PA6/TP6/TIOCA2/
CS4
PA7/TP7/TIOCB2
HWR
LWR
MD0
MD1
MD2
AVCC
VREF
P70/AN0
P71/AN1
P72/AN2
P73/AN3
P74/AN4
P75/AN5
P76/AN6/DA0
P77/AN7/DA1
AVSS
P80/RFSH/IRQ0
P81/CS3/IRQ1
P82/CS2/IRQ2
P83/CS1/IRQ3
P84/CS0
VSS
PA0/TP0/TEND0/
TCLKA
PA1/TP1/TEND1/
TCLKB
PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/
TCLKC
PA3/TP3/TIOCB0/
TCLKD
PA4/TP4/TIOCA1/
CS6
PA5/TP5/TIOCB1/
CS5
PA6/TP6/TIOCA2/
CS4
PA7/TP7/TIOCB2
HWR
LWR
MD0
MD1
MD2
AVCC
VREF
P70/AN0
P71/AN1
P72/AN2
P73/AN3
P74/AN4
P75/AN5
P76/AN6/DA0
P77/AN7/DA1
AVSS
P80/RFSH/IRQ0
P81/CS3/IRQ1
P82/CS2/IRQ2
P83/CS1/IRQ3
P84/CS0
VSS
PA0/TP0/TEND0/
TCLKA
PA1/TP1/TEND1/
TCLKB
PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/
TCLKC
PA3/TP3/TIOCB0/
TCLKD
PA4/TP4/TIOCA1/
CS6
PA5/TP5/TIOCB1/
CS5
PA6/TP6/TIOCA2/
CS4
A20
HWR
LWR
MD0
MD1
MD2
AVCC
VREF
P70/AN0
P71/AN1
P72/AN2
P73/AN3
P74/AN4
P75/AN5
P76/AN6/DA0
P77/AN7/DA1
AVSS
P80/RFSH/IRQ0
P81/CS3/IRQ1
P82/CS2/IRQ2
P83/CS1/IRQ3
P84/CS0
VSS
PA0/TP0/TEND0/
TCLKA
PA1/TP1/TEND1/
TCLKB
PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/
TCLKC
PA3/TP3/TIOCB0/
TCLKD
PA4/TP4/TIOCA1/
CS6
PA5/TP5/TIOCB1/
CS5
PA6/TP6/TIOCA2/
CS4
A20
HWR
LWR
MD0
MD1
MD2
AVCC
VREF
P70/AN0
P71/AN1
P72/AN2
P73/AN3
P74/AN4
P75/AN5
P76/AN6/DA0
P77/AN7/DA1
AVSS
P80/RFSH/IRQ0
P81/CS3/IRQ1
P82/CS2/IRQ2
P83/CS1/IRQ3
P84/CS0
VSS
PA0/TP0/TEND0/
TCLKA
PA1/TP1/TEND1/
TCLKB
PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/
TCLKC
PA3/TP3/TIOCB0/
TCLKD
PA4/TP4/TIOCA1/
CS6
PA5/TP5/TIOCB1/
CS5
PA6/TP6/TIOCA2/
CS4
PA7/TP7/TIOCB2
HWR
LWR
MD0
MD1
MD2
AVCC
VREF
P70/AN0
P71/AN1
P72/AN2
P73/AN3
P74/AN4
P75/AN5
P76/AN6/DA0
P77/AN7/DA1
AVSS
P80/RFSH/IRQ0
P81/CS3/IRQ1
P82/CS2/IRQ2
P83/CS1/IRQ3
P84/CS0
VSS
PA0/TP0/TEND0/
TCLKA
PA1/TP1/TEND1/
TCLKB
PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/
TCLKC
PA3/TP3/TIOCB0/
TCLKD
PA4/TP4/TIOCA1/
A23/CS6
PA5/TP5/TIOCB1/
A22/CS5
PA6/TP6/TIOCA2/
A21/CS4
A20
P65
P66
MD0
MD1
MD2
AVCC
VREF
P70/AN0
P71/AN1
P72/AN2
P73/AN3
P74/AN4
P75/AN5
P76/AN6/DA0
P77/AN7/DA1
AVSS
P80/IRQ0
P81/IRQ1
P82/IRQ2
P83/IRQ3
P84
VSS
PA0/TP0/TEND0/
TCLKA
PA1/TP1/TEND1/
TCLKB
PA2/TP2/TIOCA0/
TCLKC
PA3/TP3/TIOCB0/
TCLKD
PA4/TP4/TIOCA1
PA5/TP5/TIOCB1
PA6/TP6/TIOCA2
PA7/TP7/TIOCB2
1.3.3 Pin Functions
Table 1-3 summarizes the pin functions.
Table 1-3 Pin Functions
Type Symbol Pin No. I/O Name and Function
Power VCC 1, 35, 68 Input Power: For connection to the power supply.
Connect all VCC pins to the system power
supply.
VSS 11, 22, 44, Input Ground: For connection to ground (0 V).
57, 65, 92 Connect all VSS pins to the 0-V system power
supply.
Clock XTAL 67 Input For connection to a crystal resonator.
For examples of crystal resonator and external
clock input, see section 19, Clock Pulse
Generator.
EXTAL 66 Input For connection to a crystal resonator or input of
an external clock signal. For examples of
crystal resonator and external clock input, see
section 19, Clock Pulse Generator.
ø 61 Output System clock: Supplies the system clock to
external devices.
Operating MD2to MD075 to 73 Input Mode 2 to mode 0: For setting the operating
mode control mode, as follows. Inputs at these pins must not
be changed during operation.
MD2MD1MD0Operating Mode
000—
0 0 1 Mode 1
0 1 0 Mode 2
0 1 1 Mode 3
1 0 0 Mode 4
1 0 1 Mode 5
1 1 0 Mode 6
1 1 1 Mode 7
10
Table 1-3 Pin Functions (cont)
Type Symbol Pin No. I/O Name and Function
System control RES 63 Input Reset input: When driven low, this pin resets
the chip
RESO 10 Output Reset output: Outputs a reset signal to
external devices
(RESO/VPP) Also used as a power supply for on-board
programming of the flash memory version.
STBY 62 Input Standby: When driven low, this pin forces
a transition to hardware standby mode
BREQ 59 Input Bus request: Used by an external bus master
to request the bus right
BACK 60 Output Bus request acknowledge: Indicates that the
bus has been granted to an external bus
master
Interrupts NMI 64 Input Nonmaskable interrupt: Requests a
nonmaskable interrupt
IRQ5to 17, 16, Input Interrupt request 5 to 0: Maskable interrupt
IRQ090 to 87 request pins
Address bus A23 to A097 to 100, Output Address bus: Outputs address signals
56 to 45,
43 to 36
Data bus D15 to D034 to 23, Input/ Data bus: Bidirectional data bus
21 to 18 output
Bus control CS7to CS08, 97 to 99, Output Chip select: Select signals for areas 7 to 0
88 to 91
AS 69 Output Address strobe: Goes low to indicate valid
address output on the address bus
RD 70 Output Read: Goes low to indicate reading from the
external address space
HWR 71 Output High write: Goes low to indicate writing to the
external address space; indicates valid data on
the upper data bus (D15 to D8).
LWR 72 Output Low write: Goes low to indicate writing to the
external address space; indicates valid data on
the lower data bus (D7to D0).
WAIT 58 Input Wait: Requests insertion of wait states in bus
cycles during access to the external address
space
11
Table 1-3 Pin Functions (cont)
Type Symbol Pin No. I/O Name and Function
Refresh RFSH 87 Output Refresh: Indicates a refresh cycle
controller
CS388 Output Row address strobe RAS:Row address
strobe signal for DRAM connected to area 3
RD 70 Output Column address strobe CAS:Column
address
strobe signal for DRAM connected to
area
3; used with 2WE DRAM.
Write enable WE:Write enable signal for
DRAM connected to area 3; used with 2CAS
DRAM.
HWR 71 Output Upper write UW:Write enable signal for
DRAM connected to area 3; used with 2WE
DRAM.
Upper column address strobe UCAS:
Column address strobe signal for DRAM
connected to area 3; used with 2CAS DRAM.
LWR 72 Output Lower write LW:Write enable signal for DRAM
connected to area 3; used with 2WE DRAM.
Lower column address strobe LCAS:
Column address strobe signal for DRAM
connected to area 3; used with 2CAS DRAM.
DREQ1, 9, 8 Input DMA request 1 and 0: DMAC activation
DREQ0requests
TEND1, 94, 93 Output Transfer end 1 and 0: These signals indicate
TEND0that the DMAC has ended a data transfer
TCLKD to 96 to 93 Input Clock input D to A: External clock inputs
TCLKA
TIOCA4 to 4, 2, 99, Input/ Input capture/output compare A4 to A0:
TIOCA097, 95 output GRA4 to GRA0 output compare or input
capture, or PWM output
TIOCB4 to 5, 3, 100, Input/ Input capture/output compare B4 to B0:
TIOCB098, 96 output GRB4 to GRB0 output compare or input
capture, or PWM output
TOCXA46 Output Output compare XA4: PWM output
TOCXB47 Output Output compare XB4: PWM output
DMA
controller
(DMAC)
16-bit
integrated
timer unit
(ITU)
12
Table 1-3 Pin Functions (cont)
Type Symbol Pin No. I/O Name and Function
Programmable TP15 to 9 to 2, Output TPC output 15 to 0: Pulse output
timing pattern TP0100 to 93
controller (TPC)
TxD1, 13, 12 Output Transmit data (channels 0 and 1): SCI data
TxD0output
RxD1, 15, 14 Input Receive data (channels 0 and 1): SCI data
RxD0input
SCK1, 17, 16 Input/ Serial clock (channels 0 and 1): SCI clock
SCK0output input/output
A/D converter AN7to AN085 to 78 Input Analog 7 to 0: Analog input pins
ADTRG 9 Input A/D trigger: External trigger input for starting
A/D conversion
D/A converter DA1, DA085, 84 Output Analog output: Analog output from the
D/A converter
A/D and D/A AVCC 76 Input Power supply pin for the A/D and
converters D/A converters. Connect to the system power
supply (+5 V) when not using the A/D and
D/A converters.
AVSS 86 Input Ground pin for the A/D and D/A converters.
Connect to system ground (0 V).
VREF 77 Input Reference voltage input pin for the A/D and
D/A converters. Connect to the system power
supply (+5 V) when not using the A/D and
D/A converters.
I/O ports P17to P1043 to 36 Input/ Port 1: Eight input/output pins. The direction of
output each pin can be selected in the port 1 data
direction register (P1DDR).
P27to P2052 to 45 Input/ Port 2: Eight input/output pins. The direction of
output each pin can be selected in the port 2 data
direction register (P2DDR).
P37to P3034 to 27 Input/ Port 3: Eight input/output pins. The direction of
output each pin can be selected in the port 3 data
direction register (P3DDR).
P47to P4026 to 23, Input/ Port 4: Eight input/output pins. The
21 to 18 output direction of each pin can be selected in the port
4 data direction register (P4DDR).
Serial com-
munication
interface (SCI)
13
Table 1-3 Pin Functions (cont)
Type Symbol Pin No. I/O Name and Function
I/O ports P53to P5056 to 53 Input/ Port 5: Four input/output pins. The direction of
output each pin can be selected in the port 5 data
direction register (P5DDR).
P66to P6072 to 69, Input/ Port 6: Seven input/output pins. The direction
60 to 58 output of each pin can be selected in the port 6 data
direction register (P6DDR).
P77to P7085 to 78 Input Port 7: Eight input pins
P84to P8091 to 87 Input/ Port 8: Five input/output pins. The direction of
output each pin can be selected in the port 8 data
direction register (P8DDR).
P95to P9017 to 12 Input/ Port 9: Six input/output pins. The direction of
output each pin can be selected in the port 9 data
direction register (P9DDR).
PA7to PA0100 to 93 Input/ Port A: Eight input/output pins. The direction of
output each pin can be selected in the port A data
direction register (PADDR).
PB7to PB09 to 2 Input/ Port B: Eight input/output pins. The direction of
output each pin can be selected in the port B data
direction register (PBDDR).
14
Section 2 CPU
2.1 Overview
The H8/300H CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that
is upward-compatible with the H8/300 CPU. The H8/300H CPU has sixteen 16-bit general
registers, can address a 16-Mbyte linear address space, and is ideal for realtime control.
2.1.1 Features
The H8/300H CPU has the following features.
• Upward compatibility with H8/300 CPU
Can execute H8/300 Series object programs
• General-register architecture
Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers)
• Sixty-two basic instructions
— 8/16/32-bit data transfer and arithmetic and logic instructions
— Multiply and divide instructions
— Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
• Eight addressing modes
— Register direct [Rn]
— Register indirect [@ERn]
— Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:24, ERn)]
— Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @–ERn]
— Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, or @aa:24]
— Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32]
— Program-counter relative [@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)]
— Memory indirect [@@aa:8]
• 16-Mbyte linear address space
15
• High-speed operation
— All frequently-used instructions execute in two to four states
— Maximum clock frequency: 18 MHz/16 MHz (flash memory version)
— 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 111 ns/125 ns (flash memory version)
—8 ×8-bit register-register multiply: 778 ns/875 ns (flash memory version)
— 16 ÷ 8-bit register-register divide: 778 ns/875 ns (flash memory version)
— 16 ×16-bit register-register multiply: 1.221 ns/1.375 ns (flash memory version)
— 32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide: 1.221 ns/1.375 ns (flash memory version)
• Two CPU operating modes
— Normal mode (not available in the H8/3048 Series)
— Advanced mode
• Low-power mode
Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction
2.1.2 Differences from H8/300 CPU
In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8/300H has the following enhancements.
• More general registers
Eight 16-bit registers have been added.
• Expanded address space
— Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space.
— Normal mode supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU.
(Normal mode is not available in the H8/3048 Series.)
• Enhanced addressing
The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-Mbyte address
space.
• Enhanced instructions
— Data transfer, arithmetic, and logic instructions can operate on 32-bit data.
— Signed multiply/divide instructions and other instructions have been added.
16
2.2 CPU Operating Modes
The H8/300H CPU has two operating modes: normal and advanced. Normal mode supports a
maximum 64-kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports up to 16 Mbytes. See figure 2-1.
The H8/3048 Series can be used only in advanced mode. (Information from this point on will
apply to advanced mode unless otherwise stated.)
Figure 2-1 CPU Operating Modes
CPU operating modes
Normal mode
Advanced mode
Maximum 64 kbytes, program
and data areas combined
Maximum 16 Mbytes, program
and data areas combined
17
2.3 Address Space
The maximum address space of the H8/300H CPU is 16 Mbytes. The H8/3048 Series has various
operating modes (MCU modes), some providing a 1-Mbyte address space, the others supporting
the full 16 Mbytes.
Figure 2-2 shows the address ranges of the H8/3048 Series. For further details see section 3.6,
Memory Map in Each Operating Mode.
The 1-Mbyte operating modes use 20-bit addressing. The upper 4 bits of effective addresses are
ignored.
Figure 2-2 Memory Map
H'00000
H'FFFFF
H'000000
H'FFFFFF
a. 1-Mbyte modes b. 16-Mbyte modes
18
2.4 Register Configuration
2.4.1 Overview
The H8/300H CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2-3. There are two types of registers:
general registers and control registers.
Figure 2-3 CPU Internal Registers
ER0
ER1
ER2
ER3
ER4
ER5
ER6
ER7
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
R0H
R1H
R2H
R3H
R4H
R5H
R6H
R7H
R0L
R1L
R2L
R3L
R4L
R5L
R6L
R7L
0707015
(SP)
23 0
PC
7
CCR 6543210
IUIHUNZVC
General Registers (ERn)
Control Registers (CR)
Legend
SP:
PC:
CCR:
I:
UI:
H:
U:
N:
Z:
V:
C:
Stack pointer
Program counter
Condition code register
Interrupt mask bit
User bit or interrupt mask bit
Half-carry flag
User bit
Negative flag
Zero flag
Overflow flag
Carry flag
19
2.4.2 General Registers
The H8/300H CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally
alike and can be used without distinction between data registers and address registers. When a
general register is used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register.
When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or as address registers, they are designated
by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7).
The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R
(R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 16-bit
registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers.
The R registers divide into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and
RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 8-bit
registers.
Figure 2-4 illustrates the usage of the general registers. The usage of each register can be selected
independently.
Figure 2-4 Usage of General Registers
• Address registers
• 32-bit registers • 16-bit registers • 8-bit registers
ER registers
ER0 to ER7
E registers
(extended registers)
E0 to E7
R registers
R0 to R7
RH registers
R0H to R7H
RL registers
R0L to R7L
20
General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register
function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2-5 shows the
stack.
Figure 2-5 Stack
2.4.3 Control Registers
The control registers are the 24-bit program counter (PC) and the 8-bit condition code register
(CCR).
Program Counter (PC): This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU
will execute. The length of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word) or a multiple of 2 bytes, so
the least significant PC bit is ignored. When an instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is
regarded as 0.
Condition Code Register (CCR): This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information,
including the interrupt mask bit (I) and half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and
carry (C) flags.
Bit 7—Interrupt Mask Bit (I): Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. NMI is accepted
regardless of the I bit setting. The I bit is set to 1 at the start of an exception-handling sequence.
Bit 6—User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit (UI): Can be written and read by software using the
LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. This bit can also be used as an interrupt mask
bit. For details see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Free area
Stack area
SP (ER7)
21
Bit 5—Half-Carry Flag (H): When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B, or NEG.B
instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0
otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is
set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.L,
SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or
borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise.
Bit 4—User Bit (U): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC,
and XORC instructions.
Bit 3—Negative Flag (N): Indicates the most significant bit (sign bit) of data.
Bit 2—Zero Flag (Z): Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data.
Bit 1—Overflow Flag (V): Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 at other
times.
Bit 0—Carry Flag (C): Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by:
• Add instructions, to indicate a carry
• Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow
• Shift and rotate instructions, to store the value shifted out of the end bit
The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit manipulation instructions.
Some instructions leave flag bits unchanged. Operations can be performed on CCR by the LDC,
STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used by conditional
branch (Bcc) instructions.
For the action of each instruction on the flag bits, see appendix A.1, Instruction List. For the I and
UI bits, see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
2.4.4 Initial CPU Register Values
In reset exception handling, PC is initialized to a value loaded from the vector table, and the I bit
in CCR is set to 1. The other CCR bits and the general registers are not initialized. In particular,
the stack pointer (ER7) is not initialized. The stack pointer must therefore be initialized by an
MOV.L instruction executed immediately after a reset.
22
2.5 Data Formats
The H8/300H CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit
(longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1,
2, …, 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as
two digits of 4-bit BCD data.
2.5.1 General Register Data Formats
Figures 2-6 and 2-7 show the data formats in general registers.
Figure 2-6 General Register Data Formats (1)
7
RnH
RnL
RnH
RnL
RnH
RnL
1-bit data
1-bit data
4-bit BCD data
4-bit BCD data
Byte data
Byte data
6543210
70
Don’t care
76543210
70
Don’t care
Don’t care
70
43
Lower digitUpper digit
743
Lower digitUpper digit
Don’t care 0
70
Don’t care
MSB LSB
Don’t care 70
MSB LSB
Data Type Data Format
General
Register
23
Figure 2-7 General Register Data Formats (2)
Rn
En
ERn
Word data
Word data
Longword data
15 0
MSB LSB
General
RegisterData Type Data Format
15 0
MSB LSB
31 16
MSB
15 0
LSB
Legend
ERn:
En:
Rn:
RnH:
RnL:
MSB:
LSB:
General register
General register E
General register R
General register RH
General register RL
Most significant bit
Least significant bit
24
2.5.2 Memory Data Formats
Figure 2-8 shows the data formats on memory. The H8/300H CPU can access word data and
longword data on memory, but word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an attempt
is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, no address error occurs but the least
significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access starts at the preceding address. This
also applies to instruction fetches.
Figure 2-8 Memory Data Formats
When ER7 (SP) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word
size or longword size.
76543210Address L
Address L
LSB
MSB
MSB
LSB
70
MSB LSB
1-bit data
Byte data
Word data
Longword data
AddressData Type Data Format
Address 2M
Address 2M + 1
Address 2N
Address 2N + 1
Address 2N + 2
Address 2N + 3
25
2.6 Instruction Set
2.6.1 Instruction Set Overview
The H8/300H CPU has 62 types of instructions, which are classified in table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Instruction Classification
Function Instruction Types
Data transfer MOV, PUSH*1, POP*1, MOVTPE*2, MOVFPE*23
Arithmetic operations ADD, SUB, ADDX, SUBX, INC, DEC, ADDS, SUBS, DAA, DAS, 18
MULXU, MULXS, DIVXU, DIVXS, CMP, NEG, EXTS, EXTU
Logic operations AND, OR, XOR, NOT 4
Shift operations SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR 8
Bit manipulation BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BAND, BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, 14
BIXOR, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST
Branch Bcc*3, JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS 5
System control TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP 9
Block data transfer EEPMOV 1
Total 62 types
Notes: 1. POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn.
PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W Rn, @–SP.
POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, Rn.
PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L Rn, @–SP.
2. Not available in the H8/3048 Series.
3. Bcc is a generic branching instruction.
26
2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes
Table 2-2 indicates the instructions available in the H8/300H CPU.
Table 2-2 Instructions and Addressing Modes
Addressing Modes
@@ @@
(d:16, (d:24, @ERn+/ @ @ @ (d:8, (d:16, @@
Function Instruction #xx Rn @ERn ERn) ERn) @–ERn aa:8 aa:16 aa:24 PC) PC) aa:8 —
MOV BWL BWL BWL BWL BWL BWL B BWL BWL — — — —
POP, PUSH — — — — — — — — — — — — WL
MOVFPE, — — — — — — — B — — — — —
MOVTPE
ADD, CMP BWL BWL — — — — — — — — — — —
SUB WL BWL — — — — — — — — — — —
ADDX, SUBX B B — — — — — — — — — — —
ADDS, SUBS — L — — — — — — — — — — —
INC, DEC — BWL — — — — — — — — — — —
DAA, DAS — B — — — — — — — — — — —
MULXU, — BW — — — — — — — — — — —
MULXS,
DIVXU,
DIVXS
NEG — BWL — — — — — — — — — — —
EXTU, EXTS — WL — — — — — — — — — — —
Logic AND, OR, BWL BWL — — — — — — — — — — —
operations XOR
NOT —BWL— ——— —— —————
Shift instructions — BWL — — — — — — — — — — —
Bit manipulation — B B — — — B — — — — — —
Branch Bcc, BSR — — — — — — — — — oo——
JMP, JSR — — o——— ——o——o—
RTS ——— — — — — — — — — — o
TRAPA — — — — — — — — — — — — o
RTE ——— — — — — — — — — — o
SLEEP — — — — — — — — — — — — o
LDC B B W W W W — W W — — — —
STC — B W W W W — W W — — — —
ANDC, ORC, B — — — — — — — — — — — —
XORC
NOP — — — — — — — — — — — — o
Block data transfer — — — — — — — — — — — — BW
Legend
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Data
transfer
Arithmetic
operations
System
control
27
2.6.3 Tables of Instructions Classified by Function
Tables 2-3 to 2-10 summarize the instructions in each functional category. The operation notation
used in these tables is defined next.
Operation Notation
Rd General register (destination)*
Rs General register (source)*
Rn General register*
ERn General register (32-bit register or address register)
(EAd) Destination operand
(EAs) Source operand
CCR Condition code register
N N (negative) flag of CCR
Z Z (zero) flag of CCR
V V (overflow) flag of CCR
C C (carry) flag of CCR
PC Program counter
SP Stack pointer
#IMM Immediate data
disp Displacement
+ Addition
– Subtraction
×Multiplication
÷Division
∧AND logical
∨OR logical
⊕Exclusive OR logical
→Move
¬ NOT (logical complement)
:3/:8/:16/:24 3-, 8-, 16-, or 24-bit length
Note: *General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0 to
R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit data or address registers (ER0 to ER7).
28
Table 2-3 Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction Size*Function
MOV B/W/L (EAs) →Rd, Rs →(EAd)
Moves data between two general registers or between a general register
and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register.
MOVFPE B (EAs) →Rd
Cannot be used in the H8/3048 Series.
MOVTPE B Rs →(EAs)
Cannot be used in the H8/3048 Series.
POP W/L @SP+ →Rn
Pops a general register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W
@SP+, Rn. Similarly, POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn.
PUSH W/L Rn →@–SP
Pushes a general register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W
Rn, @–SP. Similarly, PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @–SP.
Note: *Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
29
Table 2-4 Arithmetic Operation Instructions
Instruction Size*Function
B/W/L Rd ± Rs →Rd, Rd ± #IMM →Rd
Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on
immediate data and data in a general register. (Immediate byte data cannot
be subtracted from data in a general register. Use the SUBX or ADD
instruction.)
B Rd ± Rs ± C →Rd, Rd ± #IMM ± C →Rd
Performs addition or subtraction with carry or borrow on data in two general
registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register.
B/W/L Rd ± 1 →Rd, Rd ± 2 →Rd
Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte operands can
be incremented or decremented by 1 only.)
L Rd ± 1 →Rd, Rd ± 2 →Rd, Rd ± 4 →Rd
Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register.
B Rd decimal adjust →Rd
Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by
referring to CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data.
MULXU B/W Rd ×Rs →Rd
Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either
8 bits ×8 bits →16 bits or 16 bits ×16 bits →32 bits.
MULXS B/W Rd ×Rs →Rd
Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either
8 bits ×8 bits →16 bits or 16 bits ×16 bits →32 bits.
Note: *Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
ADDX,
SUBX
INC,
DEC
ADD,
SUB
ADDS,
SUBS
DAA,
DAS
30
Table 2-4 Arithmetic Operation Instructions (cont)
Instruction Size*Function
DIVXU B/W Rd ÷ Rs →Rd
Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either
16 bits ÷ 8 bits →8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits →
16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder.
DIVXS B/W Rd ÷ Rs →Rd
Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either
16 bits ÷ 8 bits →8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder, or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits →
16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder.
CMP B/W/L Rd – Rs, Rd – #IMM
Compares data in a general register with data in another general register or
with immediate data, and sets CCR according to the result.
NEG B/W/L 0 – Rd →Rd
Takes the two’s complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general
register.
EXTS W/L Rd (sign extension) →Rd
Extends byte data in the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word data, or
extends word data in the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword data,
by extending the sign bit.
EXTU W/L Rd (zero extension) →Rd
Extends byte data in the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word data, or
extends word data in the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword data,
by padding with zeros.
Note: *Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
31
Table 2-5 Logic Operation Instructions
Instruction Size*Function
AND B/W/L Rd ∧Rs →Rd, Rd ∧#IMM →Rd
Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another general
register or immediate data.
OR B/W/L Rd ∨Rs →Rd, Rd ∨#IMM →Rd
Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another general
register or immediate data.
XOR B/W/L Rd ⊕Rs →Rd, Rd ⊕#IMM →Rd
Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and another
general register or immediate data.
NOT B/W/L ¬ Rd →Rd
Takes the one’s complement of general register contents.
Note: *Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Table 2-6 Shift Instructions
Instruction Size*Function
B/W/L Rd (shift) →Rd
Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents.
B/W/L Rd (shift) →Rd
Performs a logical shift on general register contents.
B/W/L Rd (rotate) →Rd
Rotates general register contents.
B/W/L Rd (rotate) →Rd
Rotates general register contents through the carry bit.
Note: *Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
SHAL,
SHAR
SHLL,
SHLR
ROTL,
ROTR
ROTXL,
ROTXR
32
Table 2-7 Bit Manipulation Instructions
Instruction Size*Function
BSET B 1 →(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 1. The bit
number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower 3 bits of a general
register.
BCLR B 0 →(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 0. The bit
number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower 3 bits of a general
register.
BNOT B ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) →(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit
number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower 3 bits of a general
register.
BTST B ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) →Z
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and sets or
clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate
data or the lower 3 bits of a general register.
BAND B C ∧(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) →C
ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
BIAND B C ∧[¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] →C
ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or
memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Note: *Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
33
Table 2-7 Bit Manipulation Instructions (cont)
Instruction Size*Function
BOR B C ∨(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) →C
ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
BIOR B C ∨[¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] →C
ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or
memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BXOR B C ⊕(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) →C
Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or
memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
BIXOR B C ⊕[¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] →C
Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BLD B (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) →C
Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the
carry flag.
BILD B ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) →C
Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand to the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BST B C →(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or
memory operand.
BIST B C →¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Note: *Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
34
Table 2-8 Branching Instructions
Instruction Size Function
Bcc — Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. The
branching conditions are listed below.
Mnemonic Description Condition
BRA (BT) Always (true) Always
BRN (BF) Never (false) Never
BHI High C ∨Z = 0
BLS Low or same C ∨Z = 1
Bcc (BHS) Carry clear (high or same) C = 0
BCS (BLO) Carry set (low) C = 1
BNE Not equal Z = 0
BEQ Equal Z = 1
BVC Overflow clear V = 0
BVS Overflow set V = 1
BPL Plus N = 0
BMI Minus N = 1
BGE Greater or equal N ⊕V = 0
BLT Less than N ⊕V = 1
BGT Greater than Z ∨(N ⊕V) = 0
BLE Less or equal Z ∨(N ⊕V) = 1
JMP — Branches unconditionally to a specified address
BSR — Branches to a subroutine at a specified address
JSR — Branches to a subroutine at a specified address
RTS — Returns from a subroutine
35
Table 2-9 System Control Instructions
Instruction Size*Function
TRAPA — Starts trap-instruction exception handling
RTE — Returns from an exception-handling routine
SLEEP — Causes a transition to the power-down state
LDC B/W (EAs) →CCR
Moves the source operand contents to the condition code register. The
condition code register size is one byte, but in transfer from memory, data is
read by word access.
STC B/W CCR →(EAd)
Transfers the CCR contents to a destination location. The condition code
register size is one byte, but in transfer to memory, data is written by word
access.
ANDC B CCR ∧#IMM →CCR
Logically ANDs the condition code register with immediate data.
ORC B CCR ∨#IMM →CCR
Logically ORs the condition code register with immediate data.
XORC B CCR ⊕#IMM →CCR
Logically exclusive-ORs the condition code register with immediate data.
NOP — PC + 2 →PC
Only increments the program counter.
Note: *Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
36
Table 2-10 Block Transfer Instruction
Instruction Size Function
EEPMOV.B — if R4L ≠0 then
repeat @ER5+ →@ER6+, R4L – 1 →R4L
until R4L = 0
else next;
EEPMOV.W — if R4 ≠0 then
repeat @ER5+ →@ER6+, R4 – 1 →R4
until R4 = 0
else next;
Transfers a data block according to parameters set in general registers R4L
or R4, ER5, and ER6.
R4L or R4: Size of block (bytes)
ER5: Starting source address
ER6: Starting destination address
Execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the transfer is
completed.
37
2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats
The H8/300H instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an operation
field (OP field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (EA field), and a condition
field (cc).
Operation Field: Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation
to be carried out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first 4 bits of the
instruction. Some instructions have two operation fields.
Register Field: Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, data registers
by 3 bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field.
Effective Address Extension: Eight, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute
address, or a displacement. A 24-bit address or displacement is treated as 32-bit data in which the
first 8 bits are 0 (H'00).
Condition Field: Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions.
Figure 2-9 shows examples of instruction formats.
Figure 2-9 Instruction Formats
op NOP, RTS, etc.
op rn rm
op rn rm
EA (disp)
Operation field only
ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc.
Operation field and register fields
MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm
Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension
BRA d:8
Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field
op cc EA (disp)
38
2.6.5 Notes on Use of Bit Manipulation Instructions
The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read a byte of data, modify a bit in the
byte, then write the byte back. Care is required when these instructions are used to access registers
with write-only bits, or to access ports.
The BCLR instruction can be used to clear flags in the on-chip registers. In an interrupt-handling
routine, for example, if it is known that the flag is set to 1, it is not necessary to read the flag ahead
of time.
2.7 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation
2.7.1 Addressing Modes
The H8/300H CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2-11. Each instruction uses
a subset of these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct
and immediate modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-
counter relative and memory indirect. Bit manipulation instructions use register direct, register
indirect, or absolute (@aa:8) addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET,
BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit
number in the operand.
Table 2-11 Addressing Modes
No. Addressing Mode Symbol
1 Register direct Rn
2 Register indirect @ERn
3 Register indirect with displacement @(d:16, ERn)/@(d:24, ERn)
4 Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+
Register indirect with pre-decrement @–ERn
5 Absolute address @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24
6 Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
7 Program-counter relative @(d:8, PC)/@(d:16, PC)
8 Memory indirect @@aa:8
39
1 Register Direct—Rn: The register field of the instruction code specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit
register containing the operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers.
R0 to R7 and E0 to E7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit
registers.
2 Register Indirect—@ERn: The register field of the instruction code specifies an address
register (ERn), the lower 24 bits of which contain the address of the operand.
3 Register Indirect with Displacement—@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:24, ERn): A 16-bit or 24-bit
displacement contained in the instruction code is added to the contents of an address register
(ERn) specified by the register field of the instruction, and the lower 24 bits of the sum specify the
address of a memory operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added.
4 Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement—@ERn+ or @–ERn:
• Register indirect with post-increment—@ERn+
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) the lower 24 bits
of which contain the address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is
added to the address register contents (32 bits) and the sum is stored in the address register.
The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For word or
longword access, the register value should be even.
• Register indirect with pre-decrement—@–ERn
The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field
in the instruction code, and the lower 24 bits of the result become the address of a memory
operand. The result is also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte
access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For word or longword access, the
resulting register value should be even.
5 Absolute Address—@aa:8, @aa:16, or @aa:24: The instruction code contains the absolute
address of a memory operand. The absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long
(@aa:16), or 24 bits long (@aa:24). For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 16 bits are all
assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF). For a 16-bit absolute address the upper 8 bits are a sign extension. A
24-bit absolute address can access the entire address space. Table 2-12 indicates the accessible
address ranges.
40
Table 2-12 Absolute Address Access Ranges
Absolute
Address 1-Mbyte Modes 16-Mbyte Modes
8 bits (@aa:8) H'FFF00 to H'FFFFF H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF
(1048320 to 1048575) (16776960 to 16777215)
16 bits (@aa:16) H'00000 to H'07FFF, H'000000 to H'007FFF,
H'F8000 to H'FFFFF H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF
(0 to 32767, 1015808 to 1048575) (0 to 32767, 16744448 to 16777215)
24 bits (@aa:24) H'00000 to H'FFFFF H'000000 to H'FFFFFF
(0 to 1048575) (0 to 16777215)
6 Immediate—#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32: The instruction code contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit
(#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an operand.
The instruction codes of the ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data
implicitly. The instruction codes of some bit manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate
data specifying a bit number. The TRAPA instruction code contains 2-bit immediate data
specifying a vector address.
7 Program-Counter Relative—@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC): This mode is used in the Bcc and
BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the instruction code is sign-
extended to 24 bits and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a 24-bit branch address. The
PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction,
so the possible branching range is –126 to +128 bytes (–63 to +64 words) or –32766 to
+32768 bytes (–16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should
be an even number.
8 Memory Indirect—@@aa:8: This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The
instruction code contains an 8-bit absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory
operand contains a branch address. The memory operand is accessed by longword access. The
first byte of the memory operand is ignored, generating a 24-bit branch address. See figure 2-10.
The upper bits of the 8-bit absolute address are assumed to be 0 (H'0000), so the address range is
0 to 255 (H'000000 to H'0000FF). Note that the first part of this range is also the exception vector
area. For further details see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
41
Figure 2-10 Memory-Indirect Branch Address Specification
When a word-size or longword-size memory operand is specified, or when a branch address is
specified, if the specified memory address is odd, the least significant bit is regarded as 0. The
accessed data or instruction code therefore begins at the preceding address. See section 2.5.2,
Memory Data Formats.
2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation
Table 2-13 explains how an effective address is calculated in each addressing mode. In the
1-Mbyte operating modes the upper 4 bits of the calculated address are ignored in order to
generate a 20-bit effective address.
Specified by @aa:8 Reserved
Branch address
42
Table 2-13 Effective Address Calculation
Addressing Mode and
Instruction FormatNo. Effective Address Calculation Effective Address
Register direct (Rn)
1Operand is general
register contents
op rm rn
Register indirect (@ERn)
2
op r
General register contents
31 0 23 0
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16, ERn)/@(d:24, ERn)
3
op r
General register contents
31 0
23 0
disp Sign extension disp
Register indirect with post-increment
or pre-decrement
4
General register contents
31 0 23 0
1, 2, or 4
op r
General register contents
31 0
23 0
1, 2, or 4
op r
1 for a byte operand, 2 for a word
operand, 4 for a longword operand
Register indirect with post-increment
@ERn+
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@–ERn
43
Table 2-13 Effective Address Calculation (cont)
Addressing Mode and
Instruction FormatNo. Effective Address Calculation Effective Address
Absolute address
@aa:8
5
op
Program-counter relative
@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)
70
23 0
abs
23 087
@aa:16
op abs
23 016 15
H'FFFF
Sign
extension
@aa:24
op
23 0
abs
Immediate
#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32
6Operand is immediate data
op disp
23 0
PC contents
disp
op IMM
Sign
extension
44
Table 2-13 Effective Address Calculation (cont)
Addressing Mode and
Instruction FormatNo. Effective Address Calculation Effective Address
8
Legend
r, rm, rn:
op:
disp:
IMM:
abs:
Register field
Operation field
Displacement
Immediate data
Absolute address
Memory indirect @@aa:8
8
op
23 0
abs 23 087
H'0000
0
abs
31 Memory contents
45
2.8 Processing States
2.8.1 Overview
The H8/300H CPU has five processing states: the program execution state, exception-handling
state, power-down state, reset state, and bus-released state. The power-down state includes sleep
mode, software standby mode, and hardware standby mode. Figure 2-11 classifies the processing
states. Figure 2-13 indicates the state transitions.
Figure 2-11 Processing States
Processing states Program execution state
Bus-released state
Reset state
Power-down state
The CPU executes program instructions in sequence
A transient state in which the CPU executes a hardware sequence
(saving PC and CCR, fetching a vector, etc.) in response to a reset,
interrupt, or other exception
The external bus has been released in response to a bus request
signal from a bus master other than the CPU
The CPU and all on-chip supporting modules are initialized and halted
The CPU is halted to conserve power
Sleep mode
Software standby mode
Hardware standby mode
Exception-handling state
46
2.8.2 Program Execution State
In this state the CPU executes program instructions in normal sequence.
2.8.3 Exception-Handling State
The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal
program flow due to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. The CPU fetches a starting address from
the exception vector table and branches to that address. In interrupt and trap exception handling
the CPU references the stack pointer (ER7) and saves the program counter and condition code
register.
Types of Exception Handling and Their Priority: Exception handling is performed for resets,
interrupts, and trap instructions. Table 2-14 indicates the types of exception handling and their
priority. Trap instruction exceptions are accepted at all times in the program execution state.
Table 2-14 Exception Handling Types and Priority
Priority Type of Exception Detection Timing Start of Exception Handling
High Reset Synchronized with clock Exception handling starts immediately
when RES changes from low to high
Interrupt End of instruction When an interrupt is requested,
execution or end of exception handling starts at the end of
exception handling*the current instruction or current
exception-handling sequence
Trap instruction When TRAPA instruction Exception handling starts when a trap
Low is executed (TRAPA) instruction is executed
Note: *Interrupts are not detected at the end of the ANDC, ORC, XORC, and LDC instructions, or
immediately after reset exception handling.
Figure 2-12 classifies the exception sources. For further details about exception sources, vector
numbers, and vector addresses, see section 4, Exception Handling, and section 5, Interrupt
Controller.
47
Figure 2-12 Classification of Exception Sources
Figure 2-13 State Transitions
Exception
sources
Reset
Interrupt
Trap instruction
External interrupts
Internal interrupts (from on-chip supporting modules)
Bus-released state
Exception-handling state
Reset state
Program execution state
Sleep mode
Software standby mode
Hardware standby mode
Power-down state
End of bus release
Bus request
End of bus
release Bus
request
End of
exception
handling
Exception
Interrupt
SLEEP
instruction
with SSBY = 0
SLEEP instruction
with SSBY = 1
NMI, IRQ , IRQ ,
or IRQ interrupt
STBY RES = 1, = 0
RES = 1
01
2
*1*2
Notes: 1.
2.
From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs
whenever goes low.
From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when goes low.
RES
STBY
48
2.8.4 Exception-Handling Sequences
Reset Exception Handling: Reset exception handling has the highest priority. The reset state is
entered when the RES signal goes low. Reset exception handling starts after that, when RES
changes from low to high. When reset exception handling starts the CPU fetches a start address
from the exception vector table and starts program execution from that address. All interrupts,
including NMI, are disabled during the reset exception-handling sequence and immediately after it
ends.
Interrupt Exception Handling and Trap Instruction Exception Handling: When these
exception-handling sequences begin, the CPU references the stack pointer (ER7) and pushes the
program counter and condition code register on the stack. Next, if the UE bit in the system control
register (SYSCR) is set to 1, the CPU sets the I bit in the condition code register to 1. If the UE bit
is cleared to 0, the CPU sets both the I bit and the UI bit in the condition code register to 1. Then
the CPU fetches a start address from the exception vector table and execution branches to that
address.
Figure 2-14 shows the stack after the exception-handling sequence.
Figure 2-14 Stack Structure after Exception Handling
SP–4
SP–3
SP–2
SP–1
SP (ER7)
Before exception
handling starts
SP (ER7)
SP+1
SP+2
SP+3
SP+4
After exception
handling ends
Stack area
CCR
PC
Even
address
Pushed on stack
Legend
CCR:
SP: Condition code register
Stack pointer
Notes: 1.
2.
PC is the address of the first instruction executed after the return from the
exception-handling routine.
Registers must be saved and restored by word access or longword access,
starting at an even address.
49
2.8.5 Bus-Released State
In this state the bus is released to a bus master other than the CPU, in response to a bus request.
The bus masters other than the CPU are the DMA controller, the refresh controller, and an external
bus master. While the bus is released, the CPU halts except for internal operations. Interrupt
requests are not accepted. For details see section 6.3.7, Bus Arbiter Operation.
2.8.6 Reset State
When the RES input goes low all current processing stops and the CPU enters the reset state. The
I bit in the condition code register is set to 1 by a reset. All interrupts are masked in the reset state.
Reset exception handling starts when the RES signal changes from low to high.
The reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. For details see section 12,
Watchdog Timer.
2.8.7 Power-Down State
In the power-down state the CPU stops operating to conserve power. There are three modes: sleep
mode, software standby mode, and hardware standby mode.
Sleep Mode: A transition to sleep mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the
SSBY bit is cleared to 0 in the system control register (SYSCR). CPU operations stop
immediately after execution of the SLEEP instruction, but the contents of CPU registers are
retained.
Software Standby Mode: A transition to software standby mode is made if the SLEEP
instruction is executed while the SSBY bit is set to 1 in SYSCR. The CPU and clock halt and all
on-chip supporting modules stop operating. The on-chip supporting modules are reset, but as long
as a specified voltage is supplied the contents of CPU registers and on-chip RAM are retained.
The I/O ports also remain in their existing states.
Hardware Standby Mode: A transition to hardware standby mode is made when the STBY input
goes low. As in software standby mode, the CPU and all clocks halt and the on-chip supporting
modules are reset, but as long as a specified voltage is supplied, on-chip RAM contents are
retained.
For further information see section 20, Power-Down State.
50
2.9 Basic Operational Timing
2.9.1 Overview
The H8/300H CPU operates according to the system clock (ø). The interval from one rise of the
system clock to the next rise is referred to as a “state.” A memory cycle or bus cycle consists of
two or three states. The CPU uses different methods to access on-chip memory, the on-chip
supporting modules, and the external address space. Access to the external address space can be
controlled by the bus controller.
2.9.2 On-Chip Memory Access Timing
On-chip memory is accessed in two states. The data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and
word access. Figure 2-15 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. Figure 2-16 indicates the pin
states.
Figure 2-15 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle
T state
Bus cycle
Internal address bus
Internal read signal
Internal data bus
(read access)
Internal write signal
Internal data bus
(write access)
ø
1T state
2
Read data
Address
Write data
51
Figure 2-16 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access
T
, , ,AS
ø
1T2
Address bus
D to D
15 0
RD HWR LWR High
Address
High impedance
52
2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing
The on-chip supporting modules are accessed in three states. The data bus is 8 or 16 bits wide,
depending on the register being accessed. Figure 2-17 shows the on-chip supporting module
access timing. Figure 2-18 indicates the pin states.
Figure 2-17 Access Cycle for On-Chip Supporting Modules
Address bus
Internal read signal
Internal data bus
Internal write signal
Address
Internal data bus
ø
T state
Bus cycle
1T state
2T state
3
Read
access
Write
access Write data
Read data
53
Figure 2-18 Pin States during Access to On-Chip Supporting Modules
2.9.4 Access to External Address Space
The external address space is divided into eight areas (areas 0 to 7). Bus-controller settings
determine whether each area is accessed via an 8-bit or 16-bit bus, and whether it is accessed in
two or three states. For details see section 6, Bus Controller.
T
, , ,AS
ø
1T2
Address bus
D to D
15 0
RD HWR LWR High
High impedance
T3
Address
54
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.1 Overview
3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection
The H8/3048 Series has seven operating modes (modes 1 to 7) that are selected by the mode pins
(MD2to MD0) as indicated in table 3-1. The input at these pins determines the size of the address
space and the initial bus mode.
Table 3-1 Operating Mode Selection
Description
Operating Initial Bus On-Chip On-Chip
Mode MD2MD1MD0Address Space Mode*1ROM RAM
— 000 — — — —
Mode 1 0 0 1 Expanded mode 8 bits Disabled Enabled*2
Mode 2 0 1 0 Expanded mode 16 bits Disabled Enabled*2
Mode 3 0 1 1 Expanded mode 8 bits Disabled Enabled*2
Mode 4 1 0 0 Expanded mode 16 bits Disabled Enabled*2
Mode 5 1 0 1 Expanded mode 8 bits Enabled Enabled*2
Mode 6 1 1 0 Expanded mode 8 bits Enabled Enabled*2
Mode 7 1 1 1 Single-chip advanced — Enabled Enabled
mode
Notes: 1. In modes 1 to 6, an 8-bit or 16-bit data bus can be selected on a per-area basis by
settings made in the area bus width control register (ABWCR). For details see
section 6, Bus Controller.
2. If the RAME bit in SYSCR is cleared to 0, these addresses become external addresses.
For the address space size there are two choices: 1 Mbyte or 16 Mbytes. The external data bus is
either 8 or 16 bits wide depending on ABWCR settings. If 8-bit access is selected for all areas, the
external data bus is 8 bits wide. For details see section 6, Bus Controller.
Modes 1 to 4 are externally expanded modes that enable access to external memory and peripheral
devices and disable access to the on-chip ROM. Modes 1 and 2 support a maximum address space
of 1 Mbyte. Modes 3 and 4 support a maximum address space of 16 Mbytes.
Mode Pins
MD2MD1MD0
55
Modes 5 and 6 are externally expanded modes that enable access to external memory and
peripheral devices and also enable access to the on-chip ROM. Mode 5 supports a maximum
address space of 1 Mbyte. Mode 6 supports a maximum address space of 16 Mbytes.
Mode 7 is a single-chip mode that operates using the on-chip ROM, RAM, and registers, and
makes all I/O ports available. Mode 7 supports a 1-Mbyte address space.
The H8/3048 Series can be used only in modes 1 to 7. The inputs at the mode pins must select one
of these seven modes. The inputs at the mode pins must not be changed during operation.
3.1.2 Register Configuration
The H8/3048 Series has a mode control register (MDCR) that indicates the inputs at the mode pins
(MD2to MD0), and a system control register (SYSCR). Table 3-2 summarizes these registers.
Table 3-2 Registers
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FFF1 Mode control register MDCR R Undetermined
H'FFF2 System control register SYSCR R/W H'0B
Note: *The lower 16 bits of the address are indicated.
56
3.2 Mode Control Register (MDCR)
MDCR is an 8-bit read-only register that indicates the current operating mode of the
H8/3048 Series.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bits 5 to 3—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 0.
Bits 2 to 0—Mode Select 2 to 0 (MDS2 to MDS0): These bits indicate the logic levels at pins
MD2to MD0(the current operating mode). MDS2 to MDS0 correspond to MD2to MD0. MDS2
to MDS0 are read-only bits. The mode pin (MD2to MD0) levels are latched into these bits when
MDCR is read.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
0
—
4
—
0
—
3
—
0
—
0
MDS0
—
R
*
2
MDS2
—
R
1
MDS1
—
R
**
Reserved bits Mode select 2 to 0
Bits indicating the current
operating mode
Reserved bits
Note: Determined by pins MD to MD .*20
57
3.3 System Control Register (SYSCR)
SYSCR is an 8-bit register that controls the operation of the H8/3048 Series.
Bit 7—Software Standby (SSBY): Enables transition to software standby mode. (For further
information about software standby mode see section 20, Power-Down State.)
When software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt, this bit remains set to 1. To clear
this bit, write 0.
Bit 7
SSBY Description
0 SLEEP instruction causes transition to sleep mode (Initial value)
1 SLEEP instruction causes transition to software standby mode
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
SSBY
0
R/W
6
STS2
0
R/W
5
STS1
0
R/W
4
STS0
0
R/W
3
UE
1
R/W
0
RAME
1
R/W
2
NMIEG
0
R/W
1
—
1
—
Software standby
Enables transition to software standby mode
User bit enable
Selects whether to use the UI bit in CCR
as a user bit or an interrupt mask bit
NMI edge select
Selects the valid edge
of the NMI input
Reserved bit
RAM enable
Enables or
disables
on-chip RAM
Standby timer select 2 to 0
These bits select the waiting time at
recovery from software standby mode
58
Bits 6 to 4—Standby Timer Select (STS2 to STS0): These bits select the length of time the CPU
and on-chip supporting modules wait for the internal clock oscillator to settle when software
standby mode is exited by an external interrupt. When using a crystal oscillator, set these bits so
that the waiting time will be at least 7 ms at the system clock rate. For further information about
waiting time selection, see section 20.4.3, Selection of Waiting Time for Exit from Software
Standby Mode.
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
STS2 STS1 STS0 Description
000Waiting time = 8,192 states (Initial value)
001Waiting time = 16,384 states
010Waiting time = 32,768 states
011Waiting time = 65,536 states
100Waiting time = 131,072 states
101Waiting time = 1,024 states
1 1 — Illegal setting
Bit 3—User Bit Enable (UE): Selects whether to use the UI bit in the condition code register as a
user bit or an interrupt mask bit.
Bit 3
UE Description
0 UI bit in CCR is used as an interrupt mask bit
1 UI bit in CCR is used as a user bit (Initial value)
Bit 2—NMI Edge Select (NMIEG): Selects the valid edge of the NMI input.
Bit 2
NMIEG Description
0 An interrupt is requested at the falling edge of NMI (Initial value)
1 An interrupt is requested at the rising edge of NMI
Bit 1—Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1.
Bit 0—RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is
initialized by the rising edge of the RES signal. It is not initialized in software standby mode.
Bit 0
RAME Description
0 On-chip RAM is disabled
1 On-chip RAM is enabled (Initial value)
59
3.4 Operating Mode Descriptions
3.4.1 Mode 1
Ports 1, 2, and 5 function as address pins A19 to A0, permitting access to a maximum 1-Mbyte
address space. The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. If at least
one area is designated for 16-bit access in ABWCR, the bus mode switches to 16 bits.
3.4.2 Mode 2
Ports 1, 2, and 5 function as address pins A19 to A0, permitting access to a maximum 1-Mbyte
address space. The initial bus mode after a reset is 16 bits, with 16-bit access to all areas. If all
areas are designated for 8-bit access in ABWCR, the bus mode switches to 8 bits.
3.4.3 Mode 3
Ports 1, 2, and 5 and part of port A function as address pins A23 to A0, permitting access to a
maximum 16-Mbyte address space. The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to
all areas. If at least one area is designated for 16-bit access in ABWCR, the bus mode switches to
16 bits. A23 to A21 are valid when 0 is written in bits 7 to 5 of the bus release control register
(BRCR). (In this mode A20 is always used for address output.)
3.4.4 Mode 4
Ports 1, 2, and 5 and part of port A function as address pins A23 to A0, permitting access to a
maximum 16-Mbyte address space. The initial bus mode after a reset is 16 bits, with 16-bit access
to all areas. If all areas are designated for 8-bit access in ABWCR, the bus mode switches to
8 bits. A23 to A21 are valid when 0 is written in bits 7 to 5 of BRCR. (In this mode A20 is always
used for address output.)
3.4.5 Mode 5
Ports 1, 2, and 5 can function as address pins A19 to A0, permitting access to a maximum 1-Mbyte
address space, but following a reset they are input ports. To use ports 1, 2, and 5 as an address bus,
the corresponding bits in their data direction registers (P1DDR, P2DDR, and P5DDR) must be set
to 1. The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. If at least one area is
designated for 16-bit access in ABWCR, the bus mode switches to 16 bits.
3.4.6 Mode 6
Ports 1, 2, and 5 and part of port A function as address pins A23 to A0, permitting access to a
maximum 16-Mbyte address space, but following a reset they are input ports. To use ports 1, 2,
and 5 as an address bus, the corresponding bits in their data direction registers (P1DDR, P2DDR,
and P5DDR) must be set to 1. For A23 to A21 output, clear bits 7 to 5 of BRCR to 0. (In this mode
A20 is always used for address output.)
The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. If at least one area is
designated for 16-bit access in ABWCR, the bus mode switches to 16 bits.
60
3.4.7 Mode 7
This mode operates using the on-chip ROM, RAM, and registers. All I/O ports are a vailable. Mode 7
supports a 1-Mbyte address space.
3.5 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode
The pin functions of ports 1 to 5 and port A vary depending on the operating mode. Table 3-3
indicates their functions in each operating mode.
Table 3-3 Pin Functions in Each Mode
Port Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7
Port 1 A7to A0A7to A0A7to A0A7to A0P17to P10
*
2P17to P10
*
2P17to P10
Port 2 A15 to A8A15 to A8A15 to A8A15 to A8P27to P20
*
2P27to P20
*
2P27to P20
Port 3 D15 to D8D15 to D8D15 to D8D15 to D8D15 to D8D15 to D8P37to P30
Port 4 P47to P40
*
1D7to D0
*
1P47to P40
*
1D7to D0
*
1P47to P40
*
1P47to P40
*
1P47to P40
Port 5 A19 to A16 A19 to A16 A19 to A16 A19 to A16 P53to P50
*
2P53to P50
*
2P53to P50
Port A PA7to PA4PA7to PA4PA7to PA5
*
3, A20 PA7to PA5
*
3, A20 PA7to PA4PA7to PA5, A20
*
3PA7to PA4
Notes: 1. Initial state. The bus mode can be switched by settings in ABWCR. These pins function
as P47to P40in 8-bit bus mode, and as D7to D0in 16-bit bus mode.
2. Initial state. These pins become address output pins when the corresponding bits in the
data direction registers (P1DDR, P2DDR, P5DDR) are set to 1.
3. Initial state. A20 is always an address output pin. PA7to PA5are switched over to A23 to
A21 output by writing 0 in bits 7 to 5 of BRCR.
3.6 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode
Figure 3-1 shows a memory map of the H8/3048. Figure 3-2 shows a memory map of the
H8/3047. Figure 3-3 shows a memory map of the H8/3044. Figure 3-4 shows a memory map of
the H8/3045. The address space is divided into eight areas.
The initial bus mode differs between modes 1 and 2, and also between modes 3 and 4.
The address locations of the on-chip RAM and on-chip registers differ between the 1-Mbyte modes
(modes 1, 2, 5, and 7) and 16-Mbyte modes (modes 3, 4, and 6). The address range specifiable by
the CPU in the 8- and 16-bit absolute addressing modes (@aa:8 and @aa:16) also dif fers.
61
Figure 3-1 H8/3048 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode
H'00000
H'000FF
H'07FFF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
Modes 1 and 2
(1-Mbyte expanded modes with
on-chip ROM disabled)
H'1FFFF
H'20000
H'3FFFF
H'40000
H'5FFFF
H'60000
H'7FFFF
H'80000
H'9FFFF
H'A0000
H'BFFFF
H'C0000
H'DFFFF
H'E0000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
External address
space
Vector area
On-chip RAM *
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'F8000
H'FEF0F
H'FEF10
H'FFF00
H'FFF0F
H'FFF10
H'FFF1B
H'FFF1C
H'FFFFF
Note: External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip RAM.*
Modes 3 and 4
(16-Mbyte expanded modes with
on-chip ROM disabled)
H'000000
H'0000FF
H'007FFF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
H'1FFFFF
H'200000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
External
address
space
Vector area
On-chip RAM *
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'FF8000
H'FFEF0F
H'FFEF10
H'FFFF00
H'FFFF0F
H'FFFF10
H'FFFF1B
H'FFFF1C
H'FFFFFF
H'3FFFFF
H'400000
H'5FFFFF
H'600000
H'7FFFFF
H'800000
H'9FFFFF
H'A00000
H'BFFFFF
H'C00000
H'DFFFFF
H'E00000
62
Figure 3-1 H8/3048 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (cont)
H'00000
H'000FF
H'07FFF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
Mode 5
(1-Mbyte expanded mode with
on-chip ROM enabled)
Mode 6
(16-Mbyte expanded mode with
on-chip ROM enabled) Mode 7
(single-chip advanced mode)
H'1FFFF
H'20000
H'3FFFF
H'40000
H'5FFFF
H'60000
H'7FFFF
H'80000
H'9FFFF
H'A0000
H'BFFFF
H'C0000
H'DFFFF
H'E0000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
External address
space
Vector area
On-chip ROM
On-chip RAM *
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'F8000
H'FEF0F
H'FEF10
H'FFF00
H'FFF0F
H'FFF10
H'FFF1B
H'FFF1C
H'FFFFF
H'00000
H'000FF
H'07FFF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
Vector area
On-chip ROM
On-chip RAM
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'FEF10
H'FFF00
H'FFF0F
H'FFF1C
H'FFFFF
H'1FFFF
H'F8000
Note: External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip RAM.*
On-chip ROM
H'000000
H'0000FF
H'007FFF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
H'1FFFFF
H'200000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 7
External
address
space
Vector area
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'01FFFF
H'020000
H'FFEF0F
H'FFEF10
H'FFFF00
H'FFFF0F
H'FFFF10
H'FFFF1B
H'FFFF1C
H'FFFFFF
H'3FFFFF
H'400000
H'5FFFFF
H'600000
H'7FFFFF
H'800000
H'9FFFFF
H'A00000
H'BFFFFF
H'C00000
H'DFFFFF
H'E00000
On-chip RAM *
Area 6
H'FF8000
63
Figure 3-2 H8/3047 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode
H'00000
H'000FF
H'07FFF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
Modes 1 and 2
(1-Mbyte expanded modes with
on-chip ROM disabled)
H'1FFFF
H'20000
H'3FFFF
H'40000
H'5FFFF
H'60000
H'7FFFF
H'80000
H'9FFFF
H'A0000
H'BFFFF
H'C0000
H'DFFFF
H'E0000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
External address
space
Vector area
On-chip RAM *
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'F8000
H'FEF0F
H'FEF10
H'FFF00
H'FFF0F
H'FFF10
H'FFF1B
H'FFF1C
H'FFFFF
Note: External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip RAM.*
Modes 3 and 4
(16-Mbyte expanded modes with
on-chip ROM disabled)
H'000000
H'0000FF
H'007FFF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
H'1FFFFF
H'200000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
External
address
space
Vector area
On-chip RAM *
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'FF8000
H'FFEF0F
H'FFEF10
H'FFFF00
H'FFFF0F
H'FFFF10
H'FFFF1B
H'FFFF1C
H'FFFFFF
H'3FFFFF
H'400000
H'5FFFFF
H'600000
H'7FFFFF
H'800000
H'9FFFFF
H'A00000
H'BFFFFF
H'C00000
H'DFFFFF
H'E00000
64
Figure 3-2 H8/3047 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (cont)
H'00000
H'000FF
H'07FFF
H'17FFF
H'18000
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
Mode 5
(1-Mbyte expanded mode with
on-chip ROM enabled)
Mode 6
(16-Mbyte expanded mode with
on-chip ROM enabled) Mode 7
(single-chip advanced mode)
H'3FFFF
H'40000
H'5FFFF
H'60000
H'7FFFF
H'80000
H'9FFFF
H'A0000
H'BFFFF
H'C0000
H'DFFFF
H'E0000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
External address
space
Vector area
On-chip ROM
On-chip RAM
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'F8000
H'FEF0F
H'FEF10
H'FFF00
H'FFF0F
H'FFF10
H'FFF1B
H'FFF1C
H'FFFFF
H'00000
H'000FF
H'07FFF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
Vector area
On-chip ROM
On-chip ROM
Reserved*1
On-chip RAM
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'FEF10
H'FFF00
H'FFF0F
H'FFF1C
H'FFFFF
H'17FFF
H'F8000
Notes:
H'1FFFF
H'20000
Reserved
*1
*2
1.
2. Do not access the reserved area.
External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip RAM.
H'000000
H'0000FF
H'007FFF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
H'1FFFFF
H'200000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 7
External
address
space
Vector area
On-chip RAM*2
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'01FFFF
H'020000
H'FFEF0F
H'FFEF10
H'FFFF00
H'FFFF0F
H'FFFF10
H'FFFF1B
H'FFFF1C
H'FFFFFF
H'3FFFFF
H'400000
H'5FFFFF
H'600000
H'7FFFFF
H'800000
H'9FFFFF
H'A00000
H'BFFFFF
H'C00000
H'DFFFFF
H'E00000
H'017FFF
H'018000
H'FF8000
Area 6
65
Figure 3-3 H8/3044 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode
H'00000
H'000FF
H'07FFF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
Modes 1 and 2
(1-Mbyte expanded modes with
on-chip ROM disabled)
H'1FFFF
H'20000
H'3FFFF
H'40000
H'5FFFF
H'60000
H'7FFFF
H'80000
H'9FFFF
H'A0000
H'BFFFF
H'C0000
H'DFFFF
H'E0000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
External address
space
Vector area
On-chip RAM*2
Reserved*1
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'F8000
H'FEF10
H'FF70F
H'FF710
H'FFF00
H'FFF0F
H'FFF10
H'FFF1B
H'FFF1C
H'FFFFF
Modes 3 and 4
(16-Mbyte expanded modes with
on-chip ROM disabled)
H'000000
H'0000FF
H'007FFF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
H'1FFFFF
H'200000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
External
address
space
Vector area
On-chip RAM*2
Reserved*1
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'FF8000
H'FFEF10
H'FFF70F
H'FFF710
H'FFFF00
H'FFFF0F
H'FFFF10
H'FFFF1B
H'FFFF1C
H'FFFFFF
H'3FFFFF
H'400000
H'5FFFFF
H'600000
H'7FFFFF
H'800000
H'9FFFFF
H'A00000
H'BFFFFF
H'C00000
H'DFFFFF
H'E00000
Notes:1.
2. Do not access the reserved area.
External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip RAM.
66
Figure 3-3 H8/3044 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (cont)
H'00000
H'000FF
H'07FFF
H'08000
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
Mode 5
(1-Mbyte expanded mode with
on-chip ROM enabled)
Mode 6
(16-Mbyte expanded mode with
on-chip ROM enabled) Mode 7
(single-chip advanced mode)
H'1FFFF
H'20000
H'3FFFF
H'40000
H'5FFFF
H'60000
H'7FFFF
H'80000
H'9FFFF
H'A0000
H'BFFFF
H'C0000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
External address
space
Vector area
On-chip ROM
On-chip RAM*2
Reserved*1
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'F8000
H'DFFFF
H'E0000
H'FEF10
H'FF70F
H'FF710
H'FFF00
H'FFF0F
H'FFF10
H'FFF1B
H'FFF1C
H'FFFFF
H'00000
H'000FF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
Vector area
On-chip ROM
On-chip RAM
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'FF710
H'FFF00
H'FFF0F
H'FFF1C
H'FFFFF
H'07FFF
H'F8000
Notes:
Reserved*1
1.
2. Do not access the reserved area.
External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip RAM.
H'000000
H'0000FF
H'007FFF
H'008000
H'01FFFF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
H'1FFFFF
H'200000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
External
address
space
Vector area
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'FFEF10
H'FFF70F
H'FFF710
H'FFFF00
H'FFFF0F
H'FFFF10
H'FFFF1B
H'FFFF1C
H'FFFFFF
H'3FFFFF
H'400000
H'5FFFFF
H'600000
H'7FFFFF
H'800000
H'9FFFFF
H'A00000
H'BFFFFF
H'C00000
H'DFFFFF
H'E00000
On-chip RAM*2
Reserved*1
On-chip ROM
Reserved*1
H'FF8000
67
Figure 3-4 H8/3045 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode
68
H'00000
H'000FF
H'07FFF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
Modes 1 and 2
(1-Mbyte expanded modes with
on-chip ROM disabled)
H'1FFFF
H'20000
H'3FFFF
H'40000
H'5FFFF
H'60000
H'7FFFF
H'80000
H'9FFFF
H'A0000
H'BFFFF
H'C0000
H'DFFFF
H'E0000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
External address
space
Vector area
On-chip RAM*2
Reserved*1
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'F8000
H'FEF10
H'FF70F
H'FF710
H'FFF00
H'FFF0F
H'FFF10
H'FFF1B
H'FFF1C
H'FFFFF
Modes 3 and 4
(16-Mbyte expanded modes with
on-chip ROM disabled)
H'000000
H'0000FF
H'007FFF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
H'1FFFFF
H'200000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
External
address
space
Vector area
On-chip RAM*2
Reserved*1
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'FF8000
H'FFEF10
H'FFF70F
H'FFF710
H'FFFF00
H'FFFF0F
H'FFFF10
H'FFFF1B
H'FFFF1C
H'FFFFFF
H'3FFFFF
H'400000
H'5FFFFF
H'600000
H'7FFFFF
H'800000
H'9FFFFF
H'A00000
H'BFFFFF
H'C00000
H'DFFFFF
H'E00000
Notes:1.
2. Do not access the reserved area.
External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip RAM.
Figure 3-4 H8/3045 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (cont)
69
H'00000
H'000FF
H'07FFF
H'0FFFF
H'10000
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
Mode 5
(1-Mbyte expanded mode with
on-chip ROM enabled)
Mode 6
(16-Mbyte expanded mode with
on-chip ROM enabled) Mode 7
(single-chip advanced mode)
H'1FFFF
H'20000
H'3FFFF
H'40000
H'5FFFF
H'60000
H'7FFFF
H'80000
H'9FFFF
H'A0000
H'BFFFF
H'C0000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
External address
space
Vector area
On-chip ROM
On-chip RAM*2
Reserved*1
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'F8000
H'DFFFF
H'E0000
H'FEF10
H'FF70F
H'FF710
H'FFF00
H'FFF0F
H'FFF10
H'FFF1B
H'FFF1C
H'FFFFF
H'00000
H'000FF
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
Vector area
On-chip ROM
On-chip RAM
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'FF710
H'FFF00
H'FFF0F
H'FFF1C
H'FFFFF
H'07FFF
H'0FFFF
H'F8000
Notes:
Reserved*1
1.
2. Do not access the reserved area.
External addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip RAM.
H'000000
H'0000FF
H'007FFF
H'00FFFF
H'010000
H'01FFFF
H'020000
Memory-indirect
branch addresses
16-bit absolute
addresses
H'1FFFFF
H'200000
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
External
address
space
Vector area
External
address
space
On-chip
registers
8-bit absolute addresses
16-bit absolute addresses
H'FFEF10
H'FFF70F
H'FFF710
H'FFFF1B
H'FFFF1C
H'FFFFFF
H'3FFFFF
H'400000
H'5FFFFF
H'600000
H'7FFFFF
H'800000
H'9FFFFF
H'A00000
H'BFFFFF
H'C00000
H'DFFFFF
H'E00000
On-chip RAM*2
Reserved*1
On-chip ROM
Reserved*1
H'FF8000
Section 4 Exception Handling
4.1 Overview
4.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority
As table 4-1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trap instruction, or interrupt.
Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4-1. If two or more exceptions occur
simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in priority order. Trap instruction exceptions are
accepted at all times in the program execution state.
Table 4-1 Exception Types and Priority
Priority Exception Type Start of Exception Handling
High Reset Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES pin
Interrupt Interrupt requests are handled when execution of the current
instruction or handling of the current exception is completed
Low Trap instruction (TRAPA) Started by execution of a trap instruction (TRAPA)
4.1.2 Exception Handling Operation
Exceptions originate from various sources. Trap instructions and interrupts are handled as follows.
1. The program counter (PC) and condition code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack.
2. The CCR interrupt mask bit is set to 1.
3. A vector address corresponding to the exception source is generated, and program execution
starts from the address indicated in that address.
For a reset exception, steps 2 and 3 above are carried out.
71
4.1.3 Exception Vector Table
The exception sources are classified as shown in figure 4-1. Different vectors are assigned to
different exception sources. Table 4-2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses.
Figure 4-1 Exception Sources
Table 4-2 Exception Vector Table
Exception Source Vector Number Vector Address*1
Reset 0 H'0000 to H'0003
Reserved for system use 1 H'0004 to H'0007
2 H'0008 to H'000B
3 H'000C to H'000F
4 H'0010 to H'0013
5 H'0014 to H'0017
6 H'0018 to H'001B
External interrupt (NMI) 7 H'001C to H'001F
Trap instruction (4 sources) 8 H'0020 to H'0023
9 H'0024 to H'0027
10 H'0028 to H'002B
11 H'002C to H'002F
External interrupt IRQ012 H'0030 to H'0033
External interrupt IRQ113 H'0034 to H'0037
External interrupt IRQ214 H'0038 to H'003B
External interrupt IRQ315 H'003C to H'003F
External interrupt IRQ416 H'0040 to H'0043
External interrupt IRQ517 H'0044 to H'0047
Reserved for system use 18 H'0048 to H'004B
19 H'004C to H'004F
Internal interrupts*220 H'0050 to H'0053
to to
60 H'00F0 to H'00F3
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. For the internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.3.3, Interrupt Vector Table.
Exception
sources
• Reset
• Interrupts
• Trap instruction
External interrupts:
Internal interrupts:
NMI, IRQ to IRQ
30 interrupts from on-chip
supporting modules
0 5
72
4.2 Reset
4.2.1 Overview
A reset is the highest-priority exception. When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and the
chip enters the reset state. A reset initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of the
on-chip supporting modules. Reset exception handling begins when the RES pin changes from
low to high.
The chip can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details see section 12,
Watchdog Timer.
4.2.2 Reset Sequence
The chip enters the reset state when the RES pin goes low.
To ensure that the chip is reset, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 ms at power-up. To reset the
chip during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 10 system clock (ø) cycles. See appendix
D.2, Pin States at Reset, for the states of the pins in the reset state.
When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, the chip starts reset
exception handling as follows.
• The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are
initialized, and the I bit is set to 1 in CCR.
• The contents of the reset vector address (H'0000 to H'0003) are read, and program execution
starts from the address indicated in the vector address.
Figure 4-2 shows the reset sequence in modes 1 and 3. Figure 4-3 shows the reset sequence in
modes 2 and 4. Figure 4-4 shows the reset sequence in mode 6.
73
Figure 4-2 Reset Sequence (Modes 1 and 3)
ø
Address
bus
RES
RD
HWR
D to D
15 8
Vector fetch Internal
processing Prefetch of
first program
instruction
(1), (3), (5), (7)
(2), (4), (6), (8)
(9)
(10)
Note: After a reset, the wait-state controller inserts three wait states in every bus cycle.
Address of reset vector: (1) = H'00000, (3) = H'00001, (5) = H'00002, (7) = H'00003
Start address (contents of reset vector)
Start address
First instruction of program
High
(1) (3) (5) (7) (9)
(2) (4) (6) (8) (10)
LWR,
74
Figure 4-3 Reset Sequence (Modes 2 and 4)
ø
Address bus
RES
RD
HWR
D to D
15 0
Vector fetch Internal
processing Prefetch of first
program instruction
(1), (3)
(2), (4)
(5)
(6)
Note: After a reset, the wait-state controller inserts three wait states in every bus cycle.
High
LWR,
Address of reset vector: (1) = H'000000, (3) = H'000002
Start address (contents of reset vector)
Start address
First instruction of program
(2) (4)
(3)(1) (5)
(6)
75
Figure 4-4 Reset Sequence (Mode 5, 6 and 7)
4.2.3 Interrupts after Reset
If an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, PC and CCR
will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests,
including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. The first instruction of the program is
always executed immediately after the reset state ends. This instruction should initialize the stack
pointer (example: MOV.L #xx:32, SP).
Vector fetch Internal
processing
Prefetch of
first program
instruction
ø
Internal
address bus
RES
Internal
read signal
Internal
write signal
Internal
data bus
(16 bits wide)
(1) (3) (5)
(2) (4) (6)
(1), (3)
(2), (4)
(5)
(6)
Address of reset vector ((1) = H'000000, (2) = H'000002)
Start address (contents of reset vector)
Start address
First instruction of program
76
4.3 Interrupts
Interrupt exception handling can be requested by seven external sources (NMI, IRQ0to IRQ5) and
30 internal sources in the on-chip supporting modules. Figure 4-5 classifies the interrupt sources
and indicates the number of interrupts of each type.
The on-chip supporting modules that can request interrupts are the watchdog timer (WDT),
refresh controller, 16-bit integrated timer unit (ITU), DMA controller (DMAC), serial
communication interface (SCI), and A/D converter. Each interrupt source has a separate vector
address.
NMI is the highest-priority interrupt and is always accepted. Interrupts are controlled by the
interrupt controller. The interrupt controller can assign interrupts other than NMI to two priority
levels, and arbitrate between simultaneous interrupts. Interrupt priorities are assigned in interrupt
priority registers A and B (IPRA and IPRB) in the interrupt controller.
For details on interrupts see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Figure 4-5 Interrupt Sources and Number of Interrupts
Interrupts
External interrupts
Internal interrupts
NMI (1)
IRQ to IRQ (6)
WDT (1)
Refresh controller (1)
ITU (15)
DMAC (4)
SCI (8)
A/D converter (1)
*1
*2
Notes: Numbers in parentheses are the number of interrupt sources.
1.
2.
When the watchdog timer is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt
request at every counter overflow.
When the refresh controller is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt
request at compare match.
0 5
77
4.4 Trap Instruction
Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. If the UE bit is
set to 1 in the system control register (SYSCR), the exception handling sequence sets the I bit to 1
in CCR. If the UE bit is 0, the I and UI bits are both set to 1. The TRAPA instruction fetches a
start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, which is
specified in the instruction code.
78
4.5 Stack Status after Exception Handling
Figure 4-6 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt
exception handling.
Figure 4-6 Stack after Completion of Exception Handling
SP-4
SP-3
SP-2
SP-1
SP (ER7) →
SP (ER7)
SP+1
SP+2
SP+3
SP+4
→
Before exception handling After exception handling
Stack area
CCR
PC
PC
PC
E
H
LEven address
Pushed on stack
Legend
PCE:
PCH:
PCL:
CCR:
SP:
Notes: PC indicates the address of the first instruction that will be executed after return.
Registers must be saved in word or longword size at even addresses.
1.
2.
Bits 23 to 16 of program counter (PC)
Bits 15 to 8 of program counter (PC)
Bits 7 to 0 of program counter (PC)
Condition code register
Stack pointer
79
4.6 Notes on Stack Usage
When accessing word data or longword data, the H8/3048 Series regards the lowest address bit as
0. The stack should always be accessed by word access or longword access, and the value of the
stack pointer (SP, ER7) should always be kept even. Use the following instructions to save
registers:
PUSH.W Rn (or MOV.W Rn, @–SP)
PUSH.L ERn (or MOV.L ERn, @–SP)
Use the following instructions to restore registers:
POP.W Rn (or MOV.W @SP+, Rn)
POP.L ERn (or MOV.L @SP+, ERn)
Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 4-7 shows an example of what
happens when the SP value is odd.
Figure 4-7 Operation when SP Value is Odd
TRAPA instruction executed
CCR
Legend
CCR:
PC:
R1L:
SP:
SP
PC
R1L
PC
SP
SP
MOV. B R1L, @-ER7
SP set to H'FFFEFF Data saved above SP CCR contents lost
Condition code register
Program counter
General register R1L
Stack pointer
Note: The diagram illustrates modes 3 and 4.
H'FFFEFA
H'FFFEFB
H'FFFEFC
H'FFFEFD
H'FFFEFF
80
Section 5 Interrupt Controller
5.1 Overview
5.1.1 Features
The interrupt controller has the following features:
• Interrupt priority registers (IPRs) for setting interrupt priorities
Interrupts other than NMI can be assigned to two priority levels on a module-by-module basis
in interrupt priority registers A and B (IPRA and IPRB).
• Three-level masking by the I and UI bits in the CPU condition code register (CCR)
• Independent vector addresses
All interrupts are independently vectored; the interrupt service routine does not have to
identify the interrupt source.
• Seven external interrupt pins
NMI has the highest priority and is always accepted; either the rising or falling edge can be
selected. For each of IRQ0to IRQ5, sensing of the falling edge or level sensing can be
selected independently.
81
5.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 5-1 shows a block diagram of the interrupt controller.
Figure 5-1 Interrupt Controller Block Diagram
ISCR IER IPRA, IPRB
.
.
.
OVF
TME
ADI
ADIE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CPU
CCR
I
UI
UE
SYSCR
ISCR:
IER:
ISR:
IPRA:
IPRB:
SYSCR:
NMI
input
IRQ input IRQ input
section ISR
Interrupt controller
Priority
decision logic
Interrupt
request
Vector
number
IRQ sense control register
IRQ enable register
IRQ status register
Interrupt priority register A
Interrupt priority register B
System control register
Legend
82
5.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 5-1 lists the interrupt pins.
Table 5-1 Interrupt Pins
Name Abbreviation I/O Function
Nonmaskable interrupt NMI Input Nonmaskable interrupt, rising edge or
falling edge selectable
External interrupt request 5 to 0 IRQ5to IRQ0Input Maskable interrupts, falling edge or
level sensing selectable
5.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 5-2 lists the registers of the interrupt controller.
Table 5-2 Interrupt Controller Registers
Address*1Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FFF2 System control register SYSCR R/W H'0B
H'FFF4 IRQ sense control register ISCR R/W H'00
H'FFF5 IRQ enable register IER R/W H'00
H'FFF6 IRQ status register ISR R/(W)*2H'00
H'FFF8 Interrupt priority register A IPRA R/W H'00
H'FFF9 Interrupt priority register B IPRB R/W H'00
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags.
83
5.2 Register Descriptions
5.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR)
SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls software standby mode, selects the
action of the UI bit in CCR, selects the NMI edge, and enables or disables the on-chip RAM.
Only bits 3 and 2 are described here. For the other bits, see section 3.3, System Control Register
(SYSCR).
SYSCR is initialized to H'0B by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
SSBY
0
R/W
6
STS2
0
R/W
5
STS1
0
R/W
4
STS0
0
R/W
3
UE
1
R/W
0
RAME
1
R/W
2
NMIEG
0
R/W
1
—
1
—
Software standby
Standby timer
select 2 to 0
User bit enable
Selects whether to use the UI bit in
CCR as a user bit or interrupt mask bit
NMI edge select
Selects the NMI input edge
Reserved bit
RAM enable
84
Bit 3—User Bit Enable (UE): Selects whether to use the UI bit in CCR as a user bit or an
interrupt mask bit.
Bit 3
UE Description
0 UI bit in CCR is used as interrupt mask bit
1 UI bit in CCR is used as user bit (Initial value)
Bit 2—NMI Edge Select (NMIEG): Selects the NMI input edge.
Bit 2
NMIEG Description
0 Interrupt is requested at falling edge of NMI input (Initial value)
1 Interrupt is requested at rising edge of NMI input
5.2.2 Interrupt Priority Registers A and B (IPRA, IPRB)
IPRA and IPRB are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control interrupt priority.
85
Interrupt Priority Register A (IPRA): IPRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register in which
interrupt priority levels can be set.
IPRA is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
IPRA7
0
R/W
6
IPRA6
0
R/W
5
IPRA5
0
R/W
4
IPRA4
0
R/W
3
IPRA3
0
R/W
0
IPRA0
0
R/W
2
IPRA2
0
R/W
1
IPRA1
0
R/W
Priority level A7
Selects the priority level of IRQ interrupt requests
Priority level A3
Selects the priority level of WDT and
refresh controller interrupt requests
Priority level A2
Selects the priority level of
ITU channel 0 interrupt requests
Priority level A1
Selects the priority level
of ITU channel 1
interrupt requests
Priority
level A0
Selects the
priority level
of ITU
channel 2
interrupt
requests
Selects the priority level of IRQ interrupt requests
Priority level A6
Selects the priority level of IRQ and IRQ interrupt requests
Priority level A5
Selects the priority level of IRQ and IRQ
interrupt requests
Priority level A4
0
1
23
45
86
Bit 7—Priority Level A7 (IPRA7): Selects the priority level of IRQ0interrupt requests.
Bit 7
IPRA7 Description
0 IRQ0interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value)
1 IRQ0interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority)
Bit 6—Priority Level A6 (IPRA6): Selects the priority level of IRQ1interrupt requests.
Bit 6
IPRA6 Description
0 IRQ1interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value)
1 IRQ1interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority)
Bit 5—Priority Level A5 (IPRA5): Selects the priority level of IRQ2and IRQ3interrupt
requests.
Bit 5
IPRA5 Description
0 IRQ2and IRQ3interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value)
1 IRQ2and IRQ3interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority)
Bit 4—Priority Level A4 (IPRA4): Selects the priority level of IRQ4and IRQ5interrupt requests.
Bit 4
IPRA4 Description
0 IRQ4and IRQ5interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value)
1 IRQ4and IRQ5interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority)
87
Bit 3—Priority Level A3 (IPRA3): Selects the priority level of WDT and refresh controller
interrupt requests.
Bit 3
IPRA3 Description
0 WDT and refresh controller interrupt requests have priority level 0 (Initial value)
(low priority)
1 WDT and refresh controller interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority)
Bit 2—Priority Level A2 (IPRA2): Selects the priority level of ITU channel 0 interrupt requests.
Bit 2
IPRA2 Description
0 ITU channel 0 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value)
1 ITU channel 0 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority)
Bit 1—Priority Level A1 (IPRA1): Selects the priority level of ITU channel 1 interrupt requests.
Bit 1
IPRA1 Description
0 ITU channel 1 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value)
1 ITU channel 1 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority)
Bit 0—Priority Level A0 (IPRA0): Selects the priority level of ITU channel 2 interrupt requests.
Bit 0
IPRA0 Description
0 ITU channel 2 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value)
1 ITU channel 2 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority)
88
Interrupt Priority Register B (IPRB): IPRB is an 8-bit readable/writable register in which
interrupt priority levels can be set.
IPRB is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
IPRB7
0
R/W
6
IPRB6
0
R/W
5
IPRB5
0
R/W
4
—
0
R/W
3
IPRB3
0
R/W
0
—
0
R/W
2
IPRB2
0
R/W
1
IPRB1
0
R/W
Priority level B7
Selects the priority level of ITU channel 3 interrupt requests
Priority level B3
Selects the priority level of SCI
channel 0 interrupt requests
Priority level B2
Selects the priority level of
SCI channel 1 interrupt requests
Priority level B1
Selects the priority level
of A/D converter
interrupt request
Reserved bit
Selects the priority level of ITU channel 4 interrupt requests
Priority level B6
Selects the priority level of DMAC
interrupt requests (channels 0 and 1)
Priority level B5
Reserved bit
89
Bit 7—Priority Level B7 (IPRB7): Selects the priority level of ITU channel 3 interrupt requests.
Bit 7
IPRB7 Description
0 ITU channel 3 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value)
1 ITU channel 3 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority)
Bit 6—Priority Level B6 (IPRB6): Selects the priority level of ITU channel 4 interrupt requests.
Bit 6
IPRB6 Description
0 ITU channel 4 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value)
1 ITU channel 4 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority)
Bit 5—Priority Level B5 (IPRB5): Selects the priority level of DMAC interrupt requests
(channels 0 and 1).
Bit 5
IPRB5 Description
0 DMAC interrupt requests (channels 0 and 1) have priority level 0 (Initial value)
(low priority)
1 DMAC interrupt requests (channels 0 and 1) have priority level 1 (high priority)
Bit 4—Reserved: This bit can be written and read, but it does not affect interrupt priority.
90
Bit 3—Priority Level B3 (IPRB3): Selects the priority level of SCI channel 0 interrupt requests.
Bit 3
IPRB3 Description
0 SCI0 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value)
1 SCI0 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority)
Bit 2—Priority Level B2 (IPRB2): Selects the priority level of SCI channel 1 interrupt requests.
Bit 2
IPRB2 Description
0 SCI1 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value)
1 SCI1 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority)
Bit 1—Priority Level B1 (IPRB1): Selects the priority level of A/D converter interrupt requests.
Bit 1
IPRB1 Description
0 A/D converter interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (Initial value)
1 A/D converter interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority)
Bit 0—Reserved: This bit can be written and read, but it does not affect interrupt priority.
91
5.2.3 IRQ Status Register (ISR)
ISR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of IRQ0to IRQ5interrupt
requests.
ISR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 0.
Bits 5 to 0—IRQ5to IRQ0Flags (IRQ5F to IRQ0F): These bits indicate the status of
IRQ5to IRQ0interrupt requests.
Bits 5 to 0
IRQ5F to IRQ0F Description
0 [Clearing conditions] (Initial value)
0 is written in IRQnF after reading the IRQnF flag when IRQnF = 1.
IRQnSC = 0, IRQn input is high, and interrupt exception handling is carried out.
IRQnSC = 1 and IRQn interrupt exception handling is carried out.
1 [Setting conditions]
IRQnSC = 0 and IRQn input is low.
IRQnSC = 1 and IRQn input changes from high to low.
Note: n = 5 to 0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
0
—
These bits indicate IRQ to IRQ
interrupt request status
Note: Only 0 can be written, to clear flags.*
6
—
0
—
5
IRQ5F
0
R/(W) *
4
IRQ4F
0
R/(W) *
3
IRQ3F
0
R/(W) *
2
IRQ2F
0
R/(W) *
1
IRQ1F
0
R/(W) *
0
IRQ0F
0
R/(W) *
50
IRQ to IRQ flags
50
Reserved bits
92
5.2.4 IRQ Enable Register (IER)
IER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables IRQ0to IRQ5interrupt requests.
IER is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: These bits can be written and read, but they do not enable or disable
interrupts.
Bits 5 to 0—IRQ5to IRQ0Enable (IRQ5E to IRQ0E): These bits enable or disable
IRQ5to IRQ0interrupts.
Bits 5 to 0
IRQ5E to IRQ0E Description
0 IRQ5to IRQ0interrupts are disabled (Initial value)
1 IRQ5to IRQ0interrupts are enabled
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
0
R/W
These bits enable or disable IRQ to IRQ interrupts
6
—
0
R/W
5
IRQ5E
0
R/W
4
IRQ4E
0
R/W
3
IRQ3E
0
R/W
2
IRQ2E
0
R/W
1
IRQ1E
0
R/W
0
IRQ0E
0
R/W
50
IRQ to IRQ enable
50
Reserved bits
93
5.2.5 IRQ Sense Control Register (ISCR)
ISCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects level sensing or falling-edge sensing of the
inputs at pins IRQ5to IRQ0.
ISCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: These bits can be written and read, but they do not select level or
falling-edge sensing.
Bits 5 to 0—IRQ5to IRQ0Sense Control (IRQ5SC to IRQ0SC): These bits select whether
interrupts IRQ5to IRQ0are requested by level sensing of pins IRQ5to IRQ0, or by falling-edge
sensing.
Bits 5 to 0
IRQ5SC to IRQ0SC Description
0 Interrupts are requested when IRQ5to IRQ0inputs are low (Initial value)
1 Interrupts are requested by falling-edge input at IRQ5to IRQ0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
0
R/W
These bits select level sensing or falling-edge
sensing for IRQ to IRQ interrupts
6
—
0
R/W
5
IRQ5SC
0
R/W
4
IRQ4SC
0
R/W
3
IRQ3SC
0
R/W
2
IRQ2SC
0
R/W
1
IRQ1SC
0
R/W
0
IRQ0SC
0
R/W
50
IRQ to IRQ sense control
50
Reserved bits
94
5.3 Interrupt Sources
The interrupt sources include external interrupts (NMI, IRQ0to IRQ5) and 30 internal interrupts.
5.3.1 External Interrupts
There are seven external interrupts: NMI, and IRQ0to IRQ5. Of these, NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, and
IRQ2can be used to exit software standby mode.
NMI: NMI is the highest-priority interrupt and is always accepted, regardless of the states of the
I and UI bits in CCR. The NMIEG bit in SYSCR selects whether an interrupt is requested by the
rising or falling edge of the input at the NMI pin. NMI interrupt exception handling has vector
number 7.
IRQ0to IRQ5Interrupts: These interrupts are requested by input signals at pins IRQ0to IRQ5.
The IRQ0to IRQ5interrupts have the following features.
• ISCR settings can select whether an interrupt is requested by the low level of the input at pins
IRQ0to IRQ5, or by the falling edge.
• IER settings can enable or disable the IRQ0to IRQ5interrupts. Interrupt priority levels can be
assigned by four bits in IPRA (IPRA7 to IPRA4).
• The status of IRQ0to IRQ5interrupt requests is indicated in ISR. The ISR flags can be
cleared to 0 by software.
Figure 5-2 shows a block diagram of interrupts IRQ0to IRQ5.
Figure 5-2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ0to IRQ5
input
Edge/level
sense circuit
IRQnSC
IRQnF
S
R
Q
IRQnE
IRQn interrupt
request
Clear signal
IRQn
Note: n = 5 to 0
95
Figure 5-3 shows the timing of the setting of the interrupt flags (IRQnF).
Figure 5-3 Timing of Setting of IRQnF
Interrupts IRQ0to IRQ5have vector numbers 12 to 17. These interrupts are detected regardless of
whether the corresponding pin is set for input or output. When using a pin for external interrupt
input, clear its DDR bit to 0 and do not use the pin for chip select output, refresh output, or SCI
input or output.
5.3.2 Internal Interrupts
Thirty internal interrupts are requested from the on-chip supporting modules.
• Each on-chip supporting module has status flags for indicating interrupt status, and enable
bits for enabling or disabling interrupts.
• Interrupt priority levels can be assigned in IPRA and IPRB.
• ITU and SCI interrupt requests can activate the DMAC, in which case no interrupt request is
sent to the interrupt controller, and the I and UI bits are disregarded.
5.3.3 Interrupt Vector Table
Table 5-3 lists the interrupt sources, their vector addresses, and their default priority order. In the
default priority order, smaller vector numbers have higher priority. The priority of interrupts other
than NMI can be changed in IPRA and IPRB. The priority order after a reset is the default order
shown in table 5-3.
ø
IRQn
IRQnF
input pin
Note: n = 5 to 0
96
Table 5-3 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Priority
Vector
Interrupt Source Origin Number Vector Address*IPR Priority
NMI External pins 7 H'001C to H'001F — High
IRQ012 H'0030 to H'0033 IPRA7
IRQ113 H'0034 to H0037 IPRA6
IRQ214 H'0038 to H'003B IPRA5
IRQ315 H'003C to H'003F
IRQ416 H'0040 to H'0043 IPRA4
IRQ517 H'0044 to H'0047
Reserved — 18 H'0048 to H'004B
19 H'004C to H'004F
WOVI Watchdog 20 H'0050 to H'0053 IPRA3
(interval timer) timer
CMI Refresh 21 H'0054 to H'0057
(compare match) controller
Reserved — 22 H'0058 to H'005B
23 H'005C to H'005F
IMIA0 ITU channel 0 24 H'0060 to H'0063 IPRA2
(compare match/
input capture A0)
IMIB0 25 H'0064 to H'0067
(compare match/
input capture B0)
OVI0 (overflow 0) 26 H'0068 to H'006B
Reserved — 27 H'006C to H'006F
IMIA1 ITU channel 1 28 H'0070 to H'0073 IPRA1
(compare match/
input capture A1)
IMIB1 29 H'0074 to H'0077
(compare match/
input capture B1)
OVI1 (overflow 1) 30 H'0078 to H'007B
Reserved — 31 H'007C to H'007F Low
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
97
Table 5-3 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Priority (cont)
Vector
Interrupt Source Origin Number Vector Address*IPR Priority
IMIA2 ITU channel 2 32 H'0080 to H'0083 IPRA0 High
(compare match/
input capture A2)
IMIB2 33 H'0084 to H'0087
(compare match/
input capture B2)
OVI2 (overflow 2) 34 H'0088 to H'008B
Reserved — 35 H'008C to H'008F
IMIA3 ITU channel 3 36 H'0090 to H'0093 IPRB7
(compare match/
input capture A3)
IMIB3 37 H'0094 to H'0097
(compare match/
input capture B3)
OVI3 (overflow 3) 38 H'0098 to H'009B
Reserved — 39 H'009C to H'009F
IMIA4 ITU channel 4 40 H'00A0 to H'00A3 IPRB6
(compare match/
input capture A4)
IMIB4 41 H'00A4 to H'00A7
(compare match/
input capture B4)
OVI4 (overflow 4) 42 H'00A8 to H'00AB
Reserved — 43 H'00AC to H'00AF
DEND0A DMAC 44 H'00B0 to H'00B3 IPRB5
DEND0B 45 H'00B4 to H'00B7
DEND1A 46 H'00B8 to H'00BB
DEND1B 47 H'00BC to H'00BF
Reserved — 48 H'00C0 to H'00C3 —
49 H'00C4 to H'00C7
50 H'00C8 to H'00CB
51 H'00CC to H'00CF Low
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
98
Table 5-3 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Priority (cont)
Vector
Interrupt Source Origin Number Vector Address*IPR Priority
ERI0 (receive error 0) SCI channel 0 52 H'00D0 to H'00D3 IPRB3 High
RXI0 (receive 53 H'00D4 to H'00D7
data full 0)
TXI0 (transmit 54 H'00D8 to H'00DB
data empty 0)
TEI0 (transmit end 0) 55 H'00DC to H'00DF
ERI1 (receive error 1) SCI channel 1 56 H'00E0 to H'00E3 IPRB2
RXI1 (receive 57 H'00E4 to H'00E7
data full 1)
TXI1 (transmit 58 H'00E8 to H'00EB
data empty 1)
TEI1 (transmit end 1) 59 H'00EC to H'00EF
ADI (A/D end) A/D 60 H'00F0 to H'00F3 IPRB1 Low
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
99
5.4 Interrupt Operation
5.4.1 Interrupt Handling Process
The H8/3048 Series handles interrupts differently depending on the setting of the UE bit. When
UE = 1, interrupts are controlled by the I bit. When UE = 0, interrupts are controlled by the I and
UI bits. Table 5-4 indicates how interrupts are handled for all setting combinations of the UE, I,
and UI bits.
NMI interrupts are always accepted except in the reset and hardware standby states. IRQ
interrupts and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules have their own enable bits. Interrupt
requests are ignored when the enable bits are cleared to 0.
Table 5-4 UE, I, and UI Bit Settings and Interrupt Handling
SYSCR CCR
UE I UI Description
1 0 — All interrupts are accepted. Interrupts with priority level 1 have higher
priority.
1 — No interrupts are accepted except NMI.
0 0 — All interrupts are accepted. Interrupts with priority level 1 have higher
priority.
1 0 NMI and interrupts with priority level 1 are accepted.
1 No interrupts are accepted except NMI.
UE = 1: Interrupts IRQ0to IRQ5and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules can all be
masked by the I bit in the CPU’s CCR. Interrupts are masked when the I bit is set to 1, and
unmasked when the I bit is cleared to 0. Interrupts with priority level 1 have higher priority. Figure
5-4 is a flowchart showing how interrupts are accepted when UE = 1.
100
Figure 5-4 Process Up to Interrupt Acceptance when UE = 1
Program execution state
Interrupt requested?
NMI
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Priority level 1?
No
IRQ 0
Yes No
IRQ 1
Yes ADI
Yes
No
IRQ 0
Yes No
IRQ 1
Yes ADI
Yes
No
I = 0
Yes
Save PC and CCR
I 1
Branch to interrupt
service routine
←
Pending
Yes
Read vector address
101
• If an interrupt condition occurs and the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller.
• When the interrupt controller receives one or more interrupt requests, it selects the highest-
priority request, following the IPR interrupt priority settings, and holds other requests
pending. If two or more interrupts with the same IPR setting are requested simultaneously, the
interrupt controller follows the priority order shown in table 5-3.
• The interrupt controller checks the I bit. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the selected interrupt
request is accepted. If the I bit is set to 1, only NMI is accepted; other interrupt requests are
held pending.
• When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of
the current instruction has been completed.
• In interrupt exception handling, PC and CCR are saved to the stack area. The PC value that is
saved indicates the address of the first instruction that will be executed after the return from
the interrupt service routine.
• Next the I bit is set to 1 in CCR, masking all interrupts except NMI.
• The vector address of the accepted interrupt is generated, and the interrupt service routine
starts executing from the address indicated by the contents of the vector address.
UE = 0: The I and UI bits in the CPU’s CCR and the IPR bits enable three-level masking of
IRQ0to IRQ5interrupts and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules.
• Interrupt requests with priority level 0 are masked when the I bit is set to 1, and are unmasked
when the I bit is cleared to 0.
• Interrupt requests with priority level 1 are masked when the I and UI bits are both set to 1,
and are unmasked when either the I bit or the UI bit is cleared to 0.
For example, if the interrupt enable bits of all interrupt requests are set to 1, IPRA is set to
H'20, and IPRB is set to H'00 (giving IRQ2and IRQ3interrupt requests priority over other
interrupts), interrupts are masked as follows:
a. If I = 0, all interrupts are unmasked (priority order: NMI > IRQ2> IRQ3>IRQ0…).
b. If I = 1 and UI = 0, only NMI, IRQ2, and IRQ3are unmasked.
c. If I = 1 and UI = 1, all interrupts are masked except NMI.
102
Figure 5-5 shows the transitions among the above states.
Figure 5-5 Interrupt Masking State Transitions (Example)
Figure 5-6 is a flowchart showing how interrupts are accepted when UE = 0.
• If an interrupt condition occurs and the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller.
• When the interrupt controller receives one or more interrupt requests, it selects the highest-
priority request, following the IPR interrupt priority settings, and holds other requests
pending. If two or more interrupts with the same IPR setting are requested simultaneously, the
interrupt controller follows the priority order shown in table 5-3.
• The interrupt controller checks the I bit. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the selected interrupt
request is accepted regardless of its IPR setting, and regardless of the UI bit. If the I bit is set
to 1 and the UI bit is cleared to 0, only NMI and interrupts with priority level 1 are accepted;
interrupt requests with priority level 0 are held pending. If the I bit and UI bit are both set to
1, only NMI is accepted; all other interrupt requests are held pending.
• When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of
the current instruction has been completed.
• In interrupt exception handling, PC and CCR are saved to the stack area. The PC value that is
saved indicates the address of the first instruction that will be executed after the return from
the interrupt service routine.
• The I and UI bits are set to 1 in CCR, masking all interrupts except NMI.
• The vector address of the accepted interrupt is generated, and the interrupt service routine
starts executing from the address indicated by the contents of the vector address.
All interrupts are
unmasked Only NMI, IRQ , and
IRQ are unmasked
Exception handling,
or I 1, UI 1
a. b. 2
3
All interrupts are
masked except NMI
c.
UI 0I 0 Exception handling,
or UI 1
I 0
I 1, UI 0
←← ←←
←
←
←←
103
Figure 5-6 Process Up to Interrupt Acceptance when UE = 0
Program execution state
Interrupt requested?
NMI
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Priority level 1?
No
IRQ 0
Yes No
IRQ 1
Yes ADI
Yes
No
IRQ 0
Yes No
IRQ 1
Yes ADI
Yes
No
I = 0
Yes
No
I = 0
Yes
UI = 0
Yes
No
Save PC and CCR
I 1, UI 1
←
Pending
Branch to interrupt
service routine
Yes
←
Read vector address
104
5.4.2 Interrupt Sequence
Figure 5-7 shows the interrupt sequence in mode 2 when the program code and stack are in an
external memory area accessed in two states via a 16-bit bus.
Figure 5-7 Interrupt Sequence (Mode 2, Two-State Access,
Stack in External Memory)
ø
Address
bus
Interrupt
request
signal
RD
HWR
D to D
15 0
(1)
(2), (4)
(3)
(5)
(7)
Note: Mode 2, with program code and stack in external memory area accessed in two states via 16-bit bus.
LWR,
Interrupt level
decision and wait
for end of instruction
Interrupt accepted
Instruction
prefetch Internal
processing Stack Vector fetch Internal
processing
Prefetch of
interrupt
service routine
instruction
High
Instruction prefetch address (not executed;
return address, same as PC contents)
Instruction code (not executed)
Instruction prefetch address (not executed)
SP – 2
SP – 4
(6), (8)
(9), (11)
(10), (12)
(13)
(14)
PC and CCR saved to stack
Vector address
Starting address of interrupt service routine (contents of
vector address)
Starting address of interrupt service routine; (13) = (10), (12)
First instruction of interrupt service routine
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
105
5.4.3 Interrupt Response Time
Table 5-5 indicates the interrupt response time from the occurrence of an interrupt request until the
first instruction of the interrupt service routine is executed.
Table 5-5 Interrupt Response Time
External Memory
8-Bit Bus 16-Bit Bus
No. Item 2 States 3 States 2 States 3 States
1 Interrupt priority 2*12*12*12*12*1
decision
2 Maximum number 1 to 23 1 to 27 1 to 31*41 to 23 1 to 25*4
of states until end of
current instruction
3 Saving PC and CCR 4 8 12*446
*
4
to stack
4 Vector fetch 4 8 12*446
*
4
5 Instruction prefetch*248 12
*
446
*
4
6 Internal processing*344 4 4 4
Total 19 to 41 31 to 57 43 to 73 19 to 41 25 to 49
Notes: 1. 1 state for internal interrupts.
2. Prefetch after the interrupt is accepted and prefetch of the first instruction in the interrupt
service routine.
3. Internal processing after the interrupt is accepted and internal processing after prefetch.
4. The number of states increases if wait states are inserted in external memory access.
On-Chip
Memory
106
5.5 Usage Notes
5.5.1 Contention between Interrupt and Interrupt-Disabling Instruction
When an instruction clears an interrupt enable bit to 0 to disable the interrupt, the interrupt is not
disabled until after execution of the instruction is completed. If an interrupt occurs while a BCLR,
MOV, or other instruction is being executed to clear its interrupt enable bit to 0, at the instant
when execution of the instruction ends the interrupt is still enabled, so its interrupt exception
handling is carried out. If a higher-priority interrupt is also requested, however, interrupt exception
handling for the higher-priority interrupt is carried out, and the lower-priority interrupt is ignored.
This also applies to the clearing of an interrupt flag.
Figure 5-8 shows an example in which an IMIEA bit is cleared to 0 in TIER of the ITU.
Figure 5-8 Contention between Interrupt and Interrupt-Disabling Instruction
This type of contention will not occur if the interrupt is masked when the interrupt enable bit or
flag is cleared to 0.
IMIA exception handlingTIER write cycle by CPU
ø
TIER address
Internal
address bus
Internal
write signal
IMIEA
IMIA
IMFA interrupt
signal
107
5.5.2 Instructions that Inhibit Interrupts
The LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions inhibit interrupts. When an interrupt occurs,
after determining the interrupt priority, the interrupt controller requests a CPU interrupt. If the
CPU is currently executing one of these interrupt-inhibiting instructions, however, when the
instruction is completed the CPU always continues by executing the next instruction.
5.5.3 Interrupts during EEPMOV Instruction Execution
The EEPMOV.B and EEPMOV.W instructions differ in their reaction to interrupt requests.
When the EEPMOV.B instruction is executing a transfer, no interrupts are accepted until the
transfer is completed, not even NMI.
When the EEPMOV.W instruction is executing a transfer, interrupt requests other than NMI are
not accepted until the transfer is completed. If NMI is requested, NMI exception handling starts at
a transfer cycle boundary. The PC value saved on the stack is the address of the next instruction.
Programs should be coded as follows to allow for NMI interrupts during EEPMOV.W execution:
L1: EEPMOV.W
MOV.W R4,R4
BNE L1
5.5.4 Notes on External Interrupts during Use
If the IRQnF flag is at IRQnF = 1, after reading the IRQnF flag if the IRQnF flag writes 0 clear
status is reached. However, there are times when clear status occurs in error and interrupt
processing is not executed when the IRQnF flag is at 0 although IRQnF = 1 was not attained. This
occurs in when the following conditions are fulfilled.
• Setting conditions
1. When using multiple external interrupts (IRQa, IRQb)
2. IRQaF flag clears because 0 is written, and IRQbF flag clears by the hardware.
3. IRQaF flag clears and bit operation command is being used for the IRQ status resistor (ISR)
or the ISR is being read in bytes; IRQaF flag's bits clear and other bit values read in bits are
written in bytes.
• Occurrence conditions
1. When IRQaF = 1, for the IRQaF flag to clear, ISR resistor read is executed. Thereafter
interrupt processing is carried out and IRQbF flag clears.
108
2. IRQaF flag clear and IRQbF flag generation compete (IRQaF flag setting).
(The ISR read needed for IRQaF flag clear was at IRQbF = 0 but in the time taken for ISR
write, IRQbF = 1 was reached.)
In all of the setting conditions 1 to 3 and occurrence conditions 1 and 2 are generated, IRQbF
clears in error during ISR write for occurrence condition 2 and interrupt processing is not carried
out. However, if IRQbF flag reaches 0 between occurrence conditions 1 and 2, IRQbF flag does
not clear in error.
Figure 5-9 IRQnF Flag When Interrupt Processing Is Not Conducted
In this situation, conduct one of the following countermeasures.
Countermeasure 1
When IRQaF flag clears, do not use the bit computation command, read the ISR in bytes. When
IRQaF only is 0 write all other bits as 1 in bytes.
For example, if a = 0
MOV.B @ISR,R0L
MOV.B #HFE,R0L
Read
1Write
0
Read
1Write
1IRQb
Execution
Read
1Write
0
Read
0Write
0
Clear in error
Occurrence condition 1
IRQaF
IRQbF
Occurrence condition 2
109
MOV.B R0L,@ISR
Countermeasure 2
During IRQb interrupt processing, carry out IRQb Fflag clear dummy processing.
For example, if b = 1
IRQB MOV.B #HFD,R0L
MOV.B R0L,@ISR
·
·
·
110
Section 6 Bus Controller
6.1 Overview
The H8/3048 Series has an on-chip bus controller that divides the address space into eight areas
and can assign different bus specifications to each. This enables different types of memory to be
connected easily.
A bus arbitration function of the bus controller controls the operation of the DMA controller
(DMAC) and refresh controller. The bus controller can also release the bus to an external device.
6.1.1 Features
Features of the bus controller are listed below.
• Independent settings for address areas 0 to 7
— 128-kbyte areas in 1-Mbyte modes; 2-Mbyte areas in 16-Mbyte modes.
— Chip select signals (CS0to CS7) can be output for areas 0 to 7.
— Areas can be designated for 8-bit or 16-bit access.
— Areas can be designated for two-state or three-state access.
• Four wait modes
— Programmable wait mode, pin auto-wait mode, and pin wait modes 0 and 1 can be
selected.
— Zero to three wait states can be inserted automatically.
• Bus arbitration function
— A built-in bus arbiter grants the bus right to the CPU, DMAC, refresh controller, or an
external bus master.
111
6.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 6-1 shows a block diagram of the bus controller.
Figure 6-1 Block Diagram of Bus Controller
0
CS to CS
ABWCR
ASTCR
WCER
CSCR
Chip select
control signals
BACK
BREQ
WAIT
Internal
address bus Area
decoder
Bus control
circuit
Wait-state
controller
Internal data bus
Legend
ABWCR:
ASTCR:
WCER:
WCR:
BRCR:
CSCR:
Bus width control register
Access state control register
Wait state controller enable register
Wait control register
Bus release control register
Chip select control register
CPU bus request signal
DMAC bus request signal
Refresh controller bus request signal
CPU bus acknowledge signal
DMAC bus acknowledge signal
Refresh controller bus acknowledge signal
Internal signals
WCR
BRCR
Bus arbiter
7
Bus mode control signal
Bus size control signal
Access state control signal
Wait request signal
Internal signals
112
6.1.3 Input/Output Pins
Table 6-1 summarizes the bus controller’s input/output pins.
Table 6-1 Bus Controller Pins
Name Abbreviation I/O Function
Chip select 0 to 7 CS0to CS7Output Strobe signals selecting areas 0 to 7
Address strobe AS Output Strobe signal indicating valid address output on the
address bus
Read RD Output Strobe signal indicating reading from the external
address space
High write HWR Output Strobe signal indicating writing to the external
address space, with valid data on the upper data
bus (D15 to D8)
Low write LWR Output Strobe signal indicating writing to the external
address space, with valid data on the lower data
bus (D7to D0)
Wait WAIT Input Wait request signal for access to external three-
state-access areas
Bus request BREQ Input Request signal for releasing the bus to an external
device
Bus acknowledge BACK Output Acknowledge signal indicating the bus is released
to an external device
6.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 6-2 summarizes the bus controller’s registers.
Table 6-2 Bus Controller Registers
Initial Value
Address*Name R/W Modes 1, 3, 5, 6 Modes 2, 4, 7
H'FFEC Bus width control register ABWCR R/W H'FF H'00
H'FFED Access state control register ASTCR R/W H'FF H'FF
H'FFEE Wait control register WCR R/W H'F3 H'F3
H'FFEF Wait state controller enable WCER R/W H'FF H'FF
register
H'FFF3 Bus release control register BRCR R/W H'FE H'FE
H'FF5F Chip select control register CSCR R/W H'0F H'0F
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
Abbrevi-
ation
113
6.2 Register Descriptions
6.2.1 Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR)
ABWCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects 8-bit or 16-bit access for each area.
When ABWCR contains H'FF (selecting 8-bit access for all areas), the chip operates in 8-bit bus
mode: the upper data bus (D15 to D8) is valid, and port 4 is an input/output port. When at least one
bit is cleared to 0 in ABWCR, the chip operates in 16-bit bus mode with a 16-bit data bus (D15 to
D0). In modes 1, 3, 5, and 6 ABWCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby
mode. In modes 2, 4, and 7 ABWCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby
mode. ABWCR is not initialized in software standby mode.
Bits 7 to 0—Area 7 to 0 Bus Width Control (ABW7 to ABW0): These bits select 8-bit access
or 16-bit access to the corresponding address areas.
Bits 7 to 0
ABW7 to ABW0 Description
0 Areas 7 to 0 are 16-bit access areas
1 Areas 7 to 0 are 8-bit access areas
ABWCR specifies the bus width of external memory areas. The bus width of on-chip memory and
registers is fixed and does not depend on ABWCR settings. These settings are therefore
meaningless in single-chip mode (mode 7).
Bit
Read/Write
7
ABW7
1
0
R/W
6
ABW6
1
0
R/W
5
ABW5
1
0
R/W
4
ABW4
1
0
R/W
3
ABW3
1
0
R/W
0
ABW0
1
0
R/W
2
ABW2
1
0
R/W
1
ABW1
1
0
R/W
Bits selecting bus width for each area
Initial
value Mode 1, 3, 5, 6
Mode 2, 4, 7
114
6.2.2 Access State Control Register (ASTCR)
ASTCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether each area is accessed in two
states or three states.
ASTCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bits 7 to 0—Area 7 to 0 Access State Control (AST7 to AST0): These bits select whether the
corresponding area is accessed in two or three states.
Bits 7 to 0
AST7 to AST0 Description
0 Areas 7 to 0 are accessed in two states
1 Areas 7 to 0 are accessed in three states (Initial value)
ASTCR specifies the number of states in which external areas are accessed. On-chip memory and
registers are accessed in a fixed number of states that does not depend on ASTCR settings. These
settings are therefore meaningless in single-chip mode (mode 7).
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
AST7
1
R/W
6
AST6
1
R/W
5
AST5
1
R/W
4
AST4
1
R/W
3
AST3
1
R/W
0
AST0
1
R/W
2
AST2
1
R/W
1
AST1
1
R/W
Bits selecting number of states for access to each area
115
6.2.3 Wait Control Register (WCR)
WCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the wait mode for the wait-state controller
(WSC) and specifies the number of wait states.
WCR is initialized to H'F3 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bits 3 and 2—Wait Mode Select 1 and 0 (WMS1/0): These bits select the wait mode.
Bit 3 Bit 2
WMS1 WMS0 Description
0 0 Programmable wait mode (Initial value)
1 No wait states inserted by wait-state controller
1 0 Pin wait mode 1
1 Pin auto-wait mode
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
WMS1
0
R/W
0
WC0
1
R/W
2
WMS0
0
R/W
1
WC1
1
R/W
Wait count 1/0
These bits select the
number of wait states
inserted
Reserved bits
Wait mode select 1/0
These bits select the wait mode
116
Bits 1 and 0—Wait Count 1 and 0 (WC1/0): These bits select the number of wait states inserted
in access to external three-state-access areas.
Bit 1 Bit 0
WC1 WC0 Description
0 0 No wait states inserted by wait-state controller
1 1 state inserted
1 0 2 states inserted
1 3 states inserted (Initial value)
6.2.4 Wait State Controller Enable Register (WCER)
WCER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables wait-state control of external
three-state-access areas by the wait-state controller.
WCER is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bits 7 to 0—Wait-State Controller Enable 7 to 0 (WCE7 to WCE0): These bits enable or
disable wait-state control of external three-state-access areas.
Bits 7 to 0
WCE7 to WCE0 Description
0 Wait-state control disabled (pin wait mode 0)
1 Wait-state control enabled (Initial value)
Since WCER enables or disables wait-state control of external three-state-access areas, these
settings are meaningless in single-chip mode (mode 7).
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
WCE7
1
R/W
6
WCE6
1
R/W
5
WCE5
1
R/W
4
WCE4
1
R/W
3
WCE3
1
R/W
0
WCE0
1
R/W
2
WCE2
1
R/W
1
WCE1
1
R/W
Wait-state controller enable 7 to 0
These bits enable or disable wait-state control
117
6.2.5 Bus Release Control Register (BRCR)
BRCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables address output on bus lines A23 to A21
and enables or disables release of the bus to an external device.
BRCR is initialized to H'FE by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 7—Address 23 Enable (A23E): Enables PA4to be used as the A23 address output pin.
Writing 0 in this bit enables A23 address output from PA4. In modes other than 3, 4, and 6 this bit
cannot be modified and PA4has its ordinary input/output functions.
Bit 7
A23E Description
0PA
4
is the A23 address output pin
1PA
4
is the PA4/TP4/TIOCA1input/output pin (Initial value)
Bit 6—Address 22 Enable (A22E): Enables PA5to be used as the A22 address output pin.
Writing 0 in this bit enables A22 address output from PA5. In modes other than 3, 4, and 6 this bit
cannot be modified and PA5has its ordinary input/output functions.
Bit 6
A22E Description
0PA
5
is the A22 address output pin
1PA
5
is the PA5/TP5/TIOCB1input/output pin (Initial value)
Bit
Initial value
7
A23E
1
—
R/W
6
A22E
1
—
R/W
5
A21E
1
—
R/W
4
—
1
—
—
3
—
1
—
—
0
BRLE
0
R/W
R/W
2
—
1
—
—
1
—
1
—
—
Bus release enable
Enables or disables
release of the bus to
an external device
Reserved bitsAddress 23 to 21 enable
These bits enable PA to
PA to be used for A to
A address output
6
4
21 23
Read/
Write Mode 1, 2, 5, 7
Mode 3, 4, 6
118
Bit 5—Address 21 Enable (A21E): Enables PA6to be used as the A21 address output pin.
Writing 0 in this bit enables A21 address output from PA6. In modes other than 3, 4, and 6 this bit
cannot be modified and PA6has its ordinary input/output functions.
Bit 5
A21E Description
0PA
6
is the A21 address output pin
1PA
6
is the PA6/TP6/TIOCA2input/output pin (Initial value)
Bits 4 to 1—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bit 0—Bus Release Enable (BRLE): Enables or disables release of the bus to an external device.
Bit 0
BRLE Description
0 The bus cannot be released to an external device; BREQ and BACK (Initial value)
can be used as input/output pins
1 The bus can be released to an external device
6.2.6 Chip Select Control Register (CSCR)
CSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables output of chip select signals
(CS7to CS4).
If a chip select signal (CS7to CS4) output is selected in this register, the corresponding pin
functions as a chip select signal (CS7to CS4) output, this function taking priority over other
functions. CSCR cannot be modified in single-chip mode.
CSCR is initialized to H'0F by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
CS7E
0
R/W
6
CS6E
0
R/W
5
CS5E
0
R/W
4
CS4E
0
R/W
3
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
Chip select 7 to 4 enable
These bits enable or disable
chip select signal output
Reserved bits
119
Bits 7 to 4—Chip Select 7 to 4 Enable (CS7E to CS4E): These bits enable or disable output of
the corresponding chip select signal.
Bit n
CSnE Description
0 Output of chip select signal CSnis disabled (Initial value)
1 Output of chip select signal CSnis enabled
Note: n = 7 to 4
Bits 3 to 0—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
120
6.3 Operation
6.3.1 Area Division
The external address space is divided into areas 0 to 7. Each area has a size of 128 kbytes in the
1-Mbyte modes, or 2 Mbytes in the 16-Mbyte modes. Figure 6-2 shows a general view of the
memory map.
Figure 6-2 Access Area Map for Modes 1 to 6
H'00000 Area 0 (128 kbytes)
Area 1 (128 kbytes)
Area 2 (128 kbytes)
Area 3 (128 kbytes)
Area 4 (128 kbytes)
Area 5 (128 kbytes)
Area 6 (128 kbytes)
Area 7 (128 kbytes)
On-chip RAM
External address space
On-chip registers
* *1, 2
*1
a.
Notes: The on-chip ROM, on-chip RAM, and on-chip registers have a fixed bus width and are accessed in a
fixed number of states.
When the RAME bit is cleared to 0 in SYSCR, this area conforms to the specifications of area 7.
This external address area conforms to the specifications of area 7.
1.
2.
3.
*3
H'1FFFF
H'20000
H'3FFFF
H'40000
H'5FFFF
H'60000
H'7FFFF
H'80000
H'9FFFF
H'A0000
H'BFFFF
H'C0000
H'DFFFF
H'E0000
H'FFFFF
b.
H'000000 Area 0 (2 Mbytes)
Area 1 (2 Mbytes)
Area 2 (2 Mbytes)
Area 3 (2 Mbytes)
Area 4 (2 Mbytes)
Area 5 (2 Mbytes)
Area 6 (2 Mbytes)
Area 7 (2 Mbytes)
On-chip RAM
External address space
On-chip registers
* *1, 2
*1
*3
H'1FFFFF
H'200000
H'3FFFFF
H'400000
H'5FFFFF
H'600000
H'7FFFFF
H'800000
H'9FFFFF
H'A00000
H'BFFFFF
H'C00000
H'DFFFFF
H'E00000
H'FFFFFF
H'000000
H'1FFFFF
H'200000
H'3FFFFF
H'400000
H'5FFFFF
H'600000
H'7FFFFF
H'800000
H'9FFFFF
H'A00000
H'BFFFFF
H'C00000
H'DFFFFF
H'E00000
H'FFFFFF
H'00000
Area 1 (128 kbytes)
Area 2 (128 kbytes)
Area 3 (128 kbytes)
Area 4 (128 kbytes)
Area 5 (128 kbytes)
Area 6 (128 kbytes)
* *1, 2
H'1FFFF
H'20000
H'3FFFF
H'40000
H'5FFFF
H'60000
H'7FFFF
H'80000
H'9FFFF
H'A0000
H'BFFFF
H'C0000
H'DFFFF
H'E0000
H'FFFFF
1-Mbyte modes with
on-chip ROM disabled
(modes 1 and 2)
16-Mbyte modes with
on-chip ROM disabled
(modes 3 and 4)
c. 1-Mbyte mode with
on-chip ROM enabled
(mode 5)
Area 7 (128 kbytes)
On-chip RAM
External address space*3
On-chip registers*1
On-chip ROM
Area 0 (128 kbytes)
*1
Area 1 (2 Mbytes)
Area 2 (2 Mbytes)
Area 3 (2 Mbytes)
Area 4 (2 Mbytes)
Area 5 (2 Mbytes)
Area 6 (2 Mbytes)
* *1, 2
d. 16-Mbyte mode with
on-chip ROM enabled
(mode 6)
Area 7 (2 Mbytes)
On-chip RAM
External address space*3
On-chip registers*1
On-chip ROM
Area 0 (2 Mbytes)
*1
121
Chip select signals (CS0to CS7) can be output for areas 0 to 7. The bus specifications for each
area can be selected in ABWCR, ASTCR, WCER, and WCR as shown in table 6-3.
Table 6-3 Bus Specifications
ABWCR ASTCR WCER WCR Bus Specifications
Bus Access
ABWn ASTn WCEn WMS1 WMS0 Width States Wait Mode
0 0 ———162 Disabled
1 0 — — 16 3 Pin wait mode 0
100163Programmable wait mode
1 16 3 Disabled
1 0 16 3 Pin wait mode 1
1 16 3 Pin auto-wait mode
1 0 — — — 8 2 Disabled
1 0 — — 8 3 Pin wait mode 0
10083Programmable wait mode
1 8 3 Disabled
1083Pin wait mode 1
1 8 3 Pin auto-wait mode
Note: n = 0 to 7
122
6.3.2 Chip Select Signals
For each of areas 0 to 7, the H8/3048 Series can output a chip select signal (CS0to CS7) that goes
low to indicate when the area is selected. Figure 6-3 shows the output timing of a CSnsignal
(n = 0 to 7).
Output of CS0to CS3:Output of CS0to CS3is enabled or disabled in the data direction register
(DDR) of the corresponding port.
In the expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled, a reset leaves pin CS0in the output state and
pins CS1to CS3in the input state. To output chip select signals CS1to CS3, the corresponding
DDR bits must be set to 1. In the expanded modes with on-chip ROM enabled, a reset leaves pins
CS0to CS3in the input state. To output chip select signals CS0to CS3, the corresponding DDR
bits must be set to 1. For details see section 9, I/O Ports.
Output of CS4to CS7:Output of CS4to CS7is enabled or disabled in the chip select control
register (CSCR). A reset leaves pins CS4to CS7in the input state. To output chip select signals
CS4to CS7, the corresponding CSCR bits must be set to 1. For details see section 9, I/O Ports.
Figure 6-3 CSnOutput Timing (n = 0 to 7)
When the on-chip ROM, on-chip RAM, and on-chip registers are accessed, CS0and CS7remain
high. The CSnsignals are decoded from the address signals. They can be used as chip select
signals for SRAM and other devices.
Address
bus
n
External address in area n
ø
CS
123
6.3.3 Data Bus
The H8/3048 Series allows either 8-bit access or 16-bit access to be designated for each of
areas 0 to 7. An 8-bit-access area uses the upper data bus (D15 to D8). A 16-bit-access area uses
both the upper data bus (D15 to D8) and lower data bus (D7to D0).
In read access the RD signal applies without distinction to both the upper and lower data bus. In
write access the HWR signal applies to the upper data bus, and the LWR signal applies to the
lower data bus.
Table 6-4 indicates how the two parts of the data bus are used under different access conditions.
Table 6-4 Access Conditions and Data Bus Usage
Access Read/ Valid Upper Data Bus Lower Data Bus
Area Size Write Address Strobe (D15 to D8)(D
7
to D0)
— Read — RD Valid Invalid
Write — HWR Undetermined data
Byte Read Even RD Valid Invalid
Odd Invalid Valid
Write Even HWR Valid Undetermined data
Odd LWR Undetermined data Valid
Word Read — RD Valid Valid
Write — HWR, LWR Valid Valid
Note: Undetermined data means that unpredictable data is output.
Invalid means that the bus is in the input state and the input is ignored.
8-bit-access
area
16-bit-access
area
124
6.3.4 Bus Control Signal Timing
8-Bit, Three-State-Access Areas: Figure 6-4 shows the timing of bus control signals for an 8-bit,
three-state-access area. The upper address bus (D15 to D8) is used to access these areas. The LWR
pin is always high. Wait states can be inserted.
Figure 6-4 Bus Control Signal Timing for 8-Bit, Three-State-Access Area
ø
Address bus
CS
AS
RD
D to D
D to D
HWR
LWR
D to D
D to D
n
15 8
7 0
15 8
7 0
T
1 T
2 T
3
Read
access
Write
access
Bus cycle
External address in area n
Valid
Invalid
High
Valid
Undetermined data
Note: n = 7 to 0
125
8-Bit, Two-State-Access Areas: Figure 6-5 shows the timing of bus control signals for an 8-bit,
two-state-access area. The upper address bus (D15 to D8) is used to access these areas. The LWR
pin is always high. Wait states cannot be inserted.
Figure 6-5 Bus Control Signal Timing for 8-Bit, Two-State-Access Area
ø
Address bus
CS
AS
RD
D to D
D to D
HWR
LWR
D to D
D to D
15 8
7 0
15 8
7 0
n
T
1 T
2
Read
access
Write
access
High
Bus cycle
External address in area n
Valid
Invalid
Valid
Undetermined data
Note: n = 7 to 0
126
16-Bit, Three-State-Access Areas: Figures 6-6 to 6-8 show the timing of bus control signals for a
16-bit, three-state-access area. In these areas, the upper address bus (D15 to D8) is used to access
even addresses and the lower address bus (D7to D0) is used to access odd addresses. Wait states
can be inserted.
Figure 6-6 Bus Control Signal Timing for 16-Bit, Three-State-Access Area (1)
(Byte Access to Even Address)
ø
Address bus
CS
AS
RD
D to D
D to D
HWR
LWR
D to D
D to D
n
15 8
7 0
15 8
7 0
T
1 T
2 T
3
Read
access
Write
access
Bus cycle
Even external address in area n
Valid
Invalid
Valid
Undetermined data
High
Note: n = 7 to 0
127
Figure 6-7 Bus Control Signal Timing for 16-Bit, Three-State-Access Area (2)
(Byte Access to Odd Address)
ø
Address bus
CS
AS
RD
D to D
D to D
HWR
LWR
D to D
D to D
n
15 8
7 0
15 8
7 0
T
1 T
2 T
3
Read
access
Write
access
Bus cycle
Odd external address in area n
Invalid
Valid
Undetermined data
Valid
High
Note: n = 7 to 0
128
Figure 6-8 Bus Control Signal Timing for 16-Bit, Three-State-Access Area (3)
(Word Access)
ø
Address bus
CS
AS
RD
D to D
D to D
HWR
LWR
D to D
D to D
n
15 8
7 0
15 8
7 0
T
1 T
2 T
3
Read
access
Bus cycle
External address in area n
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Write
access
Note: n = 7 to 0
129
16-Bit, Two-State-Access Areas: Figures 6-9 to 6-11 show the timing of bus control signals for a
16-bit, two-state-access area. In these areas, the upper address bus (D15 to D8) is used to access
even addresses and the lower address bus (D7to D0) is used to access odd addresses. Wait states
cannot be inserted.
Figure 6-9 Bus Control Signal Timing for 16-Bit, Two-State-Access Area (1)
(Byte Access to Even Address)
ø
Address bus
CS
AS
RD
D to D
D to D
HWR
LWR
D to D
D to D
15 8
7 0
15 8
7 0
n
T
1 T
2
Read
access
Write
access
Valid
Undetermined data
High
Valid
Invalid
Bus cycle
Even external address in area n
Note: n = 7 to 0
130
Figure 6-10 Bus Control Signal Timing for 16-Bit, Two-State-Access Area (2)
(Byte Access to Odd Address)
ø
Address bus
CS
AS
RD
D to D
D to D
HWR
LWR
D to D
D to D
15 8
7 0
15 8
7 0
n
T
1 T
2
Read
access Invalid
Valid
High
Bus cycle
Odd external address in area n
Write
access
Undetermined data
Valid
Note: n = 7 to 0
131
Figure 6-11 Bus Control Signal Timing for 16-Bit, Two-State-Access Area (3)
(Word Access)
ø
Address bus
CS
AS
RD
D to D
D to D
HWR
LWR
D to D
D to D
15 8
7 0
15 8
7 0
n
T
1 T
2
Read
access
Write
access
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Bus cycle
External address in area n
Note: n = 7 to 0
132
6.3.5 Wait Modes
Four wait modes can be selected as shown in table 6-5.
Table 6-5 Wait Mode Selection
ASTCR WCER WCR
ASTn Bit WCEn Bit WMS1 Bit WMS0 Bit WSC Control Wait Mode
0 — — — Disabled No wait states
1 0 — — Disabled Pin wait mode 0
1 0 0 Enabled Programmable wait mode
1 Enabled No wait states
1 0 Enabled Pin wait mode 1
1 Enabled Pin auto-wait mode
Note: n = 7 to 0
133
Wait Mode in Areas Where Wait-State Controller is Disabled
External three-state access areas in which the wait-state controller is disabled (ASTn = 1, WCEn =
0) operate in pin wait mode 0. The other wait modes are unavailable. The settings of bits WMS1
and WMS0 are ignored in these areas.
Pin Wait Mode 0: Wait states can only be inserted by WAIT pin control. During access to an
external three-state-access area, if the WAIT pin is low at the fall of the system clock (ø) in the T2
state, a wait state (TW) is inserted. If the WAIT pin remains low, wait states continue to be
inserted until the WAIT signal goes high. Figure 6-12 shows the timing.
Figure 6-12 Pin Wait Mode 0
ø
pin
Address bus
Data bus
AS
RD
HWR
Data bus
,LWR
T
1 T
2 T
W T
W T
3
Inserted by signal
Write data
**
Read data
Read
access
Write
access
External address
WAIT
WAIT
Note: Arrows indicate time of sampling of the pin.*WAIT
*
134
Wait Modes in Areas Where Wait-State Controller is Enabled
External three-state access areas in which the wait-state controller is enabled (ASTn = 1, WCEn =
1) can operate in pin wait mode 1, pin auto-wait mode, or programmable wait mode, as selected
by bits WMS1 and WMS0. Bits WMS1 and WMS0 apply to all areas, so all areas in which the
wait-state controller is enabled operate in the same wait mode.
Pin Wait Mode 1: In all accesses to external three-state-access areas, the number of wait states
(TW) selected by bits WC1 and WC0 are inserted. If the WAIT pin is low at the fall of the system
clock (ø) in the last of these wait states, an additional wait state is inserted. If the WAIT pin
remains low, wait states continue to be inserted until the WAIT signal goes high.
Pin wait mode 1 is useful for inserting four or more wait states, or for inserting different numbers
of wait states for different external devices.
If the wait count is 0, this mode operates in the same way as pin wait mode 0.
Figure 6-13 shows the timing when the wait count is 1 (WC1 = 0, WC0 = 1) and one additional
wait state is inserted by WAIT input.
Figure 6-13 Pin Wait Mode 1
Address bus
Data bus
AS
RD
HWR,LWR
T
1 T
2 T
W T
W T
3
Write data
*
Read data
*
Read
access
Write
access
Note: Arrows indicate time of sampling of the pin.*WAIT
ø
pinWAIT
Data bus
External address
Write data
Inserted by
wait count Inserted by
signalWAIT
135
Pin Auto-Wait Mode: If the WAIT pin is low, the number of wait states (TW) selected by bits
WC1 and WC0 are inserted.
In pin auto-wait mode, if the WAIT pin is low at the fall of the system clock (ø) in the T2state, the
number of wait states (TW) selected by bits WC1 and WC0 are inserted. No additional wait states
are inserted even if the WAIT pin remains low. Pin auto-wait mode can be used for an easy
interface to low-speed memory, simply by routing the chip select signal to the WAIT pin.
Figure 6-14 shows the timing when the wait count is 1.
Figure 6-14 Pin Auto-Wait Mode
ø
Address bus
Data bus
AS
RD
HWR
Data bus
,LWR
T
1 T
2 T
3 T
1 T
2 T
W T
3
**
Read data Read data
Write data Write data
Read
access
Write
access
Note: Arrows indicate time of sampling of the pin.*WAIT
External address External address
WAIT
136
Programmable Wait Mode: The number of wait states (TW) selected by bits WC1 and WC0 are
inserted in all accesses to external three-state-access areas. Figure 6-15 shows the timing when the
wait count is 1 (WC1 = 0, WC0 = 1).
Figure 6-15 Programmable Wait Mode
T
1 T
2 T
W T
3
ø
Address bus
AS
RD
HWR,
Data bus
Data bus
External address
Read data
Write data
Read
access
Write
access
LWR
137
Example of Wait State Control Settings: A reset initializes ASTCR and WCER to H'FF and
WCR to H'F3, selecting programmable wait mode and three wait states for all areas. Software can
select other wait modes for individual areas by modifying the ASTCR, WCER, and WCR settings.
Figure 6-16 shows an example of wait mode settings.
Figure 6-16 Wait Mode Settings (Example)
76543210
0
0
—
0
0
—
0
1
—
0
1
—
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit:
ASTCR H'0F:
WCER H'33:
WCR H'F3:
Area 0
Area 1
Area 2
Area 3
Area 4
Area 5
Area 6
Area 7
3-state-access area,
programmable wait mode
(3 states inserted)
3-state-access area,
programmable wait mode
(3 states inserted)
3-state-access area,
pin wait mode 0
3-state-access area,
pin wait mode 0
2-state-access area,
no wait states inserted
2-state-access area,
no wait states inserted
2-state-access area,
no wait states inserted
2-state-access area,
no wait states inserted
Note: Wait states cannot be inserted in areas designated for two-state access by ASTCR.
138
6.3.6 Interconnections with Memory (Example)
For each area, the bus controller can select two- or three-state access and an 8- or 16-bit data bus
width. In three-state-access areas, wait states can be inserted in a variety of modes, simplifying the
connection of both high-speed and low-speed devices.
Figure 6-18 shows an example of interconnections between the H8/3048 Series and memory.
Figure 6-17 shows a memory map for this example.
A 256-kword ×16-bit EPROM is connected to area 0. This device is accessed in three states via a
16-bit bus.
Two 32-kword ×8-bit SRAM devices (SRAM1 and SRAM2) are connected to area 1. These
devices are accessed in two states via a 16-bit bus.
One 32-kword ×8-bit SRAM (SRAM3) is connected to area 2. This device is accessed via an
8-bit bus, using three-state access with an additional wait state inserted in pin auto-wait mode.
Figure 6-17 Memory Map (Example)
H'000000
H'07FFFF
H'1FFFFF
H'200000
H'20FFFF
H'210000
H'3FFFFF
H'400000
H'FFFFFF
On-chip RAM
On-chip registers
EPROM
Not used
SRAM 1, 2
Not used
SRAM 3
Area 0
16-bit, three-state-access area
Area 1
16-bit, two-state-access area
Area 2
8-bit, three-state-access area
(one auto-wait state)
H'407FFF
H'5FFFFF
Not used
139
Figure 6-18 Interconnections with Memory (Example)
EPROM
A to A
I/O to I/O
I/O to I/O
CE
OE
17
15
7
0
8
0
A to A
18 1
SRAM1 (even addresses)
A to A
I/O to I/O
CS
OE
WE
14
7
0
0
A to A
15 1
SRAM2 (odd addresses)
A to A
I/O to I/O
CS
OE
WE
14
7
0
0
A to A
15 1
SRAM3
A to A
I/O to I/O
CS
OE
WE
14
7
0
0
A to A
14 0
H8/3048 Series
CS
CS
CS
0
1
2
WAIT
RD
HWR
LWR
A to A
23 0
D to D
D to D
15 8
7 0
140
6.3.7 Bus Arbiter Operation
The bus controller has a built-in bus arbiter that arbitrates between different bus masters. There are
four bus masters: the CPU, DMA controller (DMAC), refresh controller, and an external bus
master. When a bus master has the bus right it can carry out read, write, or refresh access. Each
bus master uses a bus request signal to request the bus right. At fixed times the bus arbiter
determines priority and uses a bus acknowledge signal to grant the bus to a bus master, which can
then operate using the bus.
The bus arbiter checks whether the bus request signal from a bus master is active or inactive, and
returns an acknowledge signal to the bus master if the bus request signal is active. When two or
more bus masters request the bus, the highest-priority bus master receives an acknowledge signal.
The bus master that receives an acknowledge signal can continue to use the bus until the
acknowledge signal is deactivated.
The bus master priority order is:
(High) External bus master > refresh controller > DMAC > CPU (Low)
The bus arbiter samples the bus request signals and determines priority at all times, but it does not
always grant the bus immediately, even when it receives a bus request from a bus master with
higher priority than the current bus master. Each bus master has certain times at which it can
release the bus to a higher-priority bus master.
CPU: The CPU is the lowest-priority bus master. If the DMAC, refresh controller, or an external
bus master requests the bus while the CPU has the bus right, the bus arbiter transfers the bus right
to the bus master that requested it. The bus right is transferred at the following times:
• The bus right is transferred at the boundary of a bus cycle. If word data is accessed by two
consecutive byte accesses, however, the bus right is not transferred between the two byte
accesses.
• If another bus master requests the bus while the CPU is performing internal operations, such
as executing a multiply or divide instruction, the bus right is transferred immediately. The
CPU continues its internal operations.
• If another bus master requests the bus while the CPU is in sleep mode, the bus right is
transferred immediately.
141
DMAC: When the DMAC receives an activation request, it requests the bus right from the bus
arbiter. If the DMAC is bus master and the refresh controller or an external bus master requests
the bus, the bus arbiter transfers the bus right from the DMAC to the bus master that requested the
bus. The bus right is transferred at the following times.
The bus right is transferred when the DMAC finishes transferring 1 byte or 1 word. A DMAC
transfer cycle consists of a read cycle and a write cycle. The bus right is not transferred between
the read cycle and the write cycle.
There is a priority order among the DMAC channels. For details see section 8.4.9, Multiple-
Channel Operation.
Refresh Controller: When a refresh cycle is requested, the refresh controller requests the bus
right from the bus arbiter. When the refresh cycle is completed, the refresh controller releases the
bus. For details see section 7, Refresh Controller.
External Bus Master: When the BRLE bit is set to 1 in BRCR, the bus can be released to an
external bus master. The external bus master has highest priority, and requests the bus right from
the bus arbiter by driving the BREQ signal low. Once the external bus master gets the bus, it
keeps the bus right until the BREQ signal goes high. While the bus is released to an external bus
master, the H8/3048 Series holds the address bus and data bus control signals (AS, RD, HWR,
and LWR) in the high-impedance state, holds the chip select signals high (CSn: n = 7 to 0), and
holds the BACK pin in the low output state.
The bus arbiter samples the BREQ pin at the rise of the system clock (ø). If BREQ is low, the bus
is released to the external bus master at the appropriate opportunity. The BREQ signal should be
held low until the BACK signal goes low.
When the BREQ pin is high in two consecutive samples, the BACK signal is driven high to end
the bus-release cycle.
142
Figure 6-19 shows the timing when the bus right is requested by an external bus master during a
read cycle in a two-state-access area. There is a minimum interval of two states from when the
BREQ signal goes low until the bus is released.
Figure 6-19 External-Bus-Released State (Two-State-Access Area, During Read Cycle)
ø
Data bus
AS
HWR
BREQ
BACK
RD,
LWR,
T
1 T
2
Address
21 3456
High
CPU cycles External bus released CPU cycles
Minimum 2 cycles
High-impedance
High-impedance
High-impedance
High-impedance
1
2
3
4, 5
6
Low signal is sampled at rise of T state.
signal goes low at end of CPU read cycle, releasing bus right to external bus master.
pin continues to be sampled while bus is released to external bus master.
High signal is sampled twice consecutively.
signal goes high, ending bus-release cycle.
BREQ
BREQ
BREQ
BREQ
BACK 1
Address
bus
CSn
High level
n = 7 to 0
143
6.4 Usage Notes
6.4.1 Connection to Dynamic RAM and Pseudo-Static RAM
A different bus control signal timing applies when dynamic RAM or pseudo-static RAM is
connected to area 3. For details see section 7, Refresh Controller.
6.4.2 Register Write Timing
ABWCR, ASTCR, and WCER Write Timing: Data written to ABWCR, ASTCR, or WCER
takes effect starting from the next bus cycle. Figure 6-20 shows the timing when an instruction
fetched from area 0 changes area 0 from three-state access to two-state access.
Figure 6-20 ASTCR Write Timing
ø
T
1 T
2 T
3 T
1 T
2 T
3 T
1 T
2
ASTCR address
3-state access to area 0 2-state access
to area 0
Address
bus
144
DDR Write Timing: Data written to a data direction register (DDR) to change a CSnpin from
CSnoutput to generic input, or vice versa, takes effect starting from the T3state of the DDR write
cycle. Figure 6-21 shows the timing when the CS1pin is changed from generic input to CS1
output.
Figure 6-21 DDR Write Timing
BRCR Write Timing: Data written to switch between A23, A22, or A21 output and generic input
or output takes effect starting from the T3state of the BRCR write cycle. Figure 6-22 shows the
timing when a pin is changed from generic input to A23, A22, or A21 output.
Figure 6-22 BRCR Write Timing
ø
CS1
T
1 T
2 T
3
P8DDR address
High impedance
Address
bus
ø
A to A
23
T
1 T
2 T
3
BRCR address
High impedance
Address
bus
21
145
6.4.3 BREQ Input Timing
After driving the BREQ pin low, hold it low until BACK goes low. If BREQ returns to the high
level before BACK goes low, the bus arbiter may operate incorrectly.
To terminate the external-bus-released state, hold the BREQ signal high for at least three states.
If BREQ is high for too short an interval, the bus arbiter may operate incorrectly.
6.4.4 Transition To Software Standby Mode
If contention occurs between a transition to software standby mode and a bus request from an
external bus master, the bus may be released for one state just before the transition to software
standby mode (see figure 6-23). When using software standby mode, clear the BRLE bit to 0 in
BRCR before executing the SLEEP instruction.
Figure 6-23 Contention between Bus-Released State and Software Standby Mode
146
ø
Address bus
Strobe
BREQ
BACK
Bus-released state Software standby mode
Section 7 Refresh Controller
7.1 Overview
The H8/3048 Series has an on-chip refresh controller that enables direct connection of 16-bit-wide
DRAM or pseudo-static RAM (PSRAM).
DRAM or pseudo-static RAM can be directly connected to area 3 of the external address space.
A maximum 128 kbytes can be connected in modes 1, 2 and 5 (1-Mbyte modes). A maximum
2 Mbytes can be connected in modes 3, 4, and 6 (16-Mbyte modes).
Systems that do not need to refresh DRAM or pseudo-static RAM can use the refresh controller as
an 8-bit interval timer.
When the refresh controller is not used, it can be independently halted to conserve power. For
details see section 20.6, Module Standby Function.
7.1.1 Features
The refresh controller can be used for one of three functions: DRAM refresh control, pseudo-static
RAM refresh control, or 8-bit interval timing. Features of the refresh controller are listed below.
Features as a DRAM Refresh Controller
• Enables direct connection of 16-bit-wide DRAM
• Selection of 2CAS or 2WE mode
• Selection of 8-bit or 9-bit column address multiplexing for DRAM address input
Examples:
— 1-Mbit DRAM: 8-bit row address ×8-bit column address
— 4-Mbit DRAM: 9-bit row address ×9-bit column address
— 4-Mbit DRAM: 10-bit row address ×8-bit column address
•CAS-before-RAS refresh control
• Software-selectable refresh interval
• Software-selectable self-refresh mode
• Wait states can be inserted
Features as a Pseudo-Static RAM Refresh Controller
•RFSH signal output for refresh control
• Software-selectable refresh interval
• Software-selectable self-refresh mode
• Wait states can be inserted
147
Features as an Interval Timer
• Refresh timer counter (RTCNT) can be used as an 8-bit up-counter
• Selection of seven counter clock sources: ø/2, ø/8, ø/32, ø/128, ø/512, ø/2048, ø/4096
• Interrupts can be generated by compare match between RTCNT and the refresh time constant
register (RTCOR)
7.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 7-1 shows a block diagram of the refresh controller.
Figure 7-1 Block Diagram of Refresh Controller
ø/2, ø/8, ø/32,
ø/128, ø/512,
ø/2048, ø/4096
RTCNT
RTCOR
RTMCSR
RFSHCR
Legend
RTCNT:
RTCOR:
RTMCSR:
RFSHCR:
Refresh signal
Clock selector
Comparator CMI interrupt
Bus interface
Internal data bus
Module data bus
Refresh timer counter
Refresh time constant register
Refresh timer control/status register
Refresh control register
Control logic
148
7.1.3 Input/Output Pins
Table 7-1 summarizes the refresh controller’s input/output pins.
Table 7-1 Refresh Controller Pins
Signal
Pin Name Abbr. I/O Function
RFSH Refresh RFSH Output Goes low during refresh cycles; used
to refresh DRAM and PSRAM
HWR Upper write/upper column UW/UCAS Output Connects to the UW pin of 2WE
address strobe DRAM or UCAS pin of 2CAS DRAM
LWR Lower write/lower column LW/LCAS Output Connects to the LW pin of 2WE DRAM
address strobe or LCAS pin of 2CAS DRAM
RD Column address strobe/ CAS/WE Output Connects to the CAS pin of 2WE
write enable DRAM or WE pin of 2CAS DRAM
CS3Row address strobe RAS Output Connects to the RAS pin of DRAM
7.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 7-2 summarizes the refresh controller’s registers.
Table 7-2 Refresh Controller Registers
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FFAC Refresh control register RFSHCR R/W H'02
H'FFAD Refresh timer control/status register RTMCSR R/W H'07
H'FFAE Refresh timer counter RTCNT R/W H'00
H'FFAF Refresh time constant register RTCOR R/W H'FF
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
149
7.2 Register Descriptions
7.2.1 Refresh Control Register (RFSHCR)
RFSHCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the operating mode of the refresh
controller.
RFSHCR is initialized to H'02 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
SRFMD
0
R/W
6
PSRAME
0
R/W
5
DRAME
0
R/W
4
CAS/WE
0
R/W
3
M9/M8
0
R/W
0
RCYCE
0
R/W
2
RFSHE
0
R/W
1
—
1
—
Self-refresh mode
Selects self-refresh mode
PSRAM enable and DRAM enable
These bits enable or disable connection of pseudo-static RAM and DRAM
Strobe mode select
Selects 2CAS or 2WE strobing of DRAM
Address multiplex mode select
Selects the number of column address bits
Refresh pin enable
Enables refresh signal output
from the refresh pin
Refresh cycle
enable
Enables or
disables
insertion of
refresh cycles
Reserved bit
150
Bit 7—Self-Refresh Mode (SRFMD): Specifies DRAM or pseudo-static RAM self-refresh
during software standby mode. When PSRAME = 1 and DRAME = 0, after the SRFMD bit is set
to 1, pseudo-static RAM can be self-refreshed when the H8/3048 Series enters software standby
mode. When PSRAME = 0 and DRAME = 1, after the SRFMD bit is set to 1, DRAM can be self-
refreshed when the H8/3048 Series enters software standby mode. In either case, the normal
access state resumes on exit from software standby mode.
Bit 7
SRFMD Description
0 DRAM or PSRAM self-refresh is disabled in software standby mode (Initial value)
1 DRAM or PSRAM self-refresh is enabled in software standby mode
Bit 6—PSRAM Enable (PSRAME) and Bit 5—DRAM Enable (DRAME): These bits enable
or disable connection of pseudo-static RAM and DRAM to area 3 of the external address space.
When DRAM or pseudo-static RAM is connected, the bus cycle and refresh cycle of area 3
consist of three states, regardless of the setting in the access state control register (ASTCR). If
AST3 = 0 in ASTCR, wait states cannot be inserted.
When the PSRAME or DRAME bit is set to 1, bits 0, 2, 3, and 4 in RFSHCR and registers
RTMCSR, RTCNT, and RTCOR are write-disabled, except that the CMF flag in RTMCSR can be
cleared by writing 0.
Bit 6 Bit 5
PSRAME DRAME Description
0 0 Can be used as an interval timer (Initial value)
(DRAM and PSRAM cannot be directly connected)
1 DRAM can be directly connected
1 0 PSRAM can be directly connected
1 Illegal setting
151
Bit 4—Strobe Mode Select (CAS/WE): Selects 2CAS or 2WE mode. The setting of this bit is
valid when PSRAME = 0 and DRAME = 1. This bit is write-disabled when the PSRAME or
DRAME bit is set to 1.
Bit 4
CAS/WE Description
02WE mode (Initial value)
12CAS mode
Bit 3—Address Multiplex Mode Select (M9/M8): Selects 8-bit or 9-bit column addressing.
The setting of this bit is valid when PSRAME = 0 and DRAME = 1. This bit is write-disabled
when the PSRAME or DRAME bit is set to 1.
Bit 3
M9/M8 Description
0 8-bit column address mode (Initial value)
1 9-bit column address mode
Bit 2—Refresh Pin Enable (RFSHE): Enables or disables refresh signal output from the
RFSH pin. This bit is write-disabled when the PSRAME or DRAME bit is set to 1.
Bit 2
RFSHE Description
0 Refresh signal output at the RFSH pin is disabled (Initial value)
(the RFSH pin can be used as a generic input/output port)
1 Refresh signal output at the RFSH pin is enabled
Bit 1—Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1.
Bit 0—Refresh Cycle Enable (RCYCE): Enables or disables insertion of refresh cycles.
The setting of this bit is valid when PSRAME = 1 or DRAME = 1. When PSRAME = 0 and
DRAME = 0, refresh cycles are not inserted regardless of the setting of this bit.
Bit 0
RCYCE Description
0 Refresh cycles are disabled (Initial value)
1 Refresh cycles are enabled for area 3
152
7.2.2 Refresh Timer Control/Status Register (RTMCSR)
RTMCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the clock source for RTCNT. It also
enables or disables interrupt requests when the refresh controller is used as an interval timer.
Bits 7 and 6 are initialized by a reset and in standby mode. Bits 5 to 3 are initialized by a reset and
in hardware standby mode, but retain their previous values on transition to software standby mode.
Bit 7—Compare Match Flag (CMF): This status flag indicates that the RTCNT and RTCOR
values have matched.
Bit 7
CMF Description
0 [Clearing condition]
Cleared by reading CMF when CMF = 1, then writing 0 in CMF
1 [Setting condition]
When RTCNT = RTCOR
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
CMF
0
R/(W)
6
CMIE
0
R/W
5
CKS2
0
R/W
4
CKS1
0
R/W
3
CKS0
0
R/W
0
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
Compare match flag
Status flag indicating that RTCNT has matched RTCOR
Reserved bitsClock select 2 to 0
These bits select an
internal clock source
for input to RTCNT
Note: Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.*
*
Compare match interrupt enable
Enables or disables the CMI interrupt requested by CMF
153
Bit 6—Compare Match Interrupt Enable (CMIE): Enables or disables the CMI interrupt
requested when the CMF flag is set to 1 in RTMCSR. The CMIE bit is always cleared to 0 when
PSRAME = 1 or DRAME = 1.
Bit 6
CMIE Description
0 The CMI interrupt requested by CMF is disabled (Initial value)
1 The CMI interrupt requested by CMF is enabled
Bits 5 to 3—Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits select an internal clock source for
input to RTCNT. When used for refresh control, the refresh controller outputs a refresh request at
periodic intervals determined by compare match between RTCNT and RTCOR. When used as an
interval timer, the refresh controller generates CMI interrupts at periodic intervals determined by
compare match. These bits are write-disabled when the PSRAME bit or DRAME bit is set to 1.
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3
CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Description
0 0 0 Clock input is disabled (Initial value)
1 ø/2 clock source
1 0 ø/8 clock source
1 ø/32 clock source
1 0 0 ø/128 clock source
1 ø/512 clock source
1 0 ø/2048 clock source
1 ø/4096 clock source
Bits 2 to 0—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
154
7.2.3 Refresh Timer Counter (RTCNT)
RTCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter.
RTCNT is an up-counter that is incremented by an internal clock selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0
in RTMCSR. When RTCNT matches RTCOR (compare match), the CMF flag is set to 1 and
RTCNT is cleared to H'00.
RTCNT is write-disabled when the PSRAME bit or DRAME bit is set to 1. RTCNT is initialized
to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode.
7.2.4 Refresh Time Constant Register (RTCOR)
RTCOR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that determines the interval at which RTCNT is
compare matched.
RTCOR and RTCNT are constantly compared. When their values match, the CMF flag is set to 1
in RTMCSR, and RTCNT is simultaneously cleared to H'00.
RTCOR is write-disabled when the PSRAME bit or DRAME bit is set to 1. RTCOR is initialized
to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it retains its previous
value.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
155
7.3 Operation
7.3.1 Overview
One of three functions can be selected for the H8/3048 Series refresh controller: interfacing to
DRAM connected to area 3, interfacing to pseudo-static RAM connected to area 3, or interval
timing. Table 7-3 summarizes the register settings when these three functions are used.
Table 7-3 Refresh Controller Settings
Usage
Register Settings DRAM Interface PSRAM Interface Interval Timer
RFSHCR SRFMD Selects self-refresh mode Cleared to 0
PSRAME Cleared to 0 Set to 1 Cleared to 0
DRAME Set to 1 Cleared to 0 Cleared to 0
CAS/WE Selects 2CAS or — —
2WE mode
M9/M8 Selects column — —
addressing mode
RFSHE Selects RFSH signal output Cleared to 0
RCYCE Selects insertion of refresh cycles —
RTCOR Refresh interval setting Interrupt interval setting
RTMCSR CKS2 to CKS0
CMF Set to 1 when RTCNT = RTCOR
CMIE Cleared to 0 Enables or disables
interrupt requests
P8DDR P81DDR Set to 1 (CS3output) Set to 0 or 1
ABWCR ABW3 Cleared to 0 — —
DRAM Interface: To set up area 3 for connection to 16-bit-wide DRAM, initialize RTCOR,
RTMCSR, and RFSHCR in that order, clearing bit PSRAME to 0 and setting bit DRAME to 1.
Set bit P81DDR to 1 in the port 8 data direction register (P8DDR) to enable CS3output. In
ABWCR, make area 3 a 16-bit-access area.
Pseudo-Static RAM Interface: To set up area 3 for connection to pseudo-static RAM, initialize
RTCOR, RTMCSR, and RFSHCR in that order, setting bit PSRAME to 1 and clearing bit
DRAME to 0. Set bit P81DDR to 1 in P8DDR to enable CS3output.
156
Interval Timer: When PSRAME = 0 and DRAME = 0, the refresh controller operates as an
interval timer. After setting RTCOR, select an input clock in RTMCSR and set the CMIE bit to 1.
CMI interrupts will be requested at compare match intervals determined by RTCOR and bits
CKS2 to CKS0 in RTMCSR.
When setting RTCOR, RTMCSR, and RFSHCR, make sure that PSRAME = 0 and DRAME = 0.
Writing is disabled when either of these bits is set to 1.
7.3.2 DRAM Refresh Control
Refresh Request Interval and Refresh Cycle Execution: The refresh request interval is
determined by the settings of RTCOR and bits CKS2 to CKS0 in RTMCSR. Figure 7-2 illustrates
the refresh request interval.
Figure 7-2 Refresh Request Interval (RCYCE = 1)
Refresh requests are generated at regular intervals as shown in figure 7-2, but the refresh cycle is
not actually executed until the refresh controller gets the bus right.
Table 7-4 summarizes the relationship among area 3 settings, DRAM read/write cycles, and
refresh cycles.
RTCOR
H'00
RTCNT
Refresh request
157
Table 7-4 Area 3 Settings, DRAM Access Cycles, and Refresh Cycles
Area 3 Settings Read/Write Cycle by CPU or DMAC Refresh Cycle
2-state-access area • 3 states • 3 states
(AST3 = 0) • Wait states cannot be inserted • Wait states cannot be inserted
3-state-access area • 3 states • 3 states
(AST3 = 1) • Wait states can be inserted • Wait states can be inserted
To insert refresh cycles, set the RCYCE bit to 1 in RFSHCR. Figure 7-3 shows the state
transitions for execution of refresh cycles.
When the first refresh request occurs after exit from the reset state or standby mode, the refresh
controller does not execute a refresh cycle, but goes into the refresh request pending state. Note
this point when using a DRAM that requires a refresh cycle for initialization.
When a refresh request occurs in the refresh request pending state, the refresh controller acquires
the bus right, then executes a refresh cycle. If another refresh request occurs during execution of
the refresh cycle, it is ignored.
Figure 7-3 State Transitions for Refresh Cycle Execution
Refresh
request*
Refresh
request*
Exit from reset or standby mode
Refresh request pending state
Requesting bus right
Executing refresh cycle
Refresh request
Refresh request
Bus granted
End of refresh
cycle
Note: A refresh request is ignored if it occurs while the refresh controller is requesting the
bus right or executing a refresh cycle.
*
*
158
Address Multiplexing: Address multiplexing depends on the setting of the M9/M8 bit in
RFSHCR, as described in table 7-5. Figure 7-4 shows the address output timing. Address output is
multiplexed only in area 3.
Table 7-5 Address Multiplexing
Address Pins A23 to A10 A9A8A7A6A5A4A3A2A1A0
Address signals during row A23 to A10 A9A8A7A6A5A4A3A2A1A0
address output
M9/M8 = 0 A23 to A10 A9A9A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A0
M9/M8 = 1 A23 to A10 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A0
Figure 7-4 Multiplexed Address Output (Example without Wait States)
Address signals during
column address output
ø
A to A , A
A to A
23 9 0
8 1
T
1 T
2 T
3
A to A
Row address
8 1 A to A
Column address
16 9
A to A , A
23 9 0
Address
bus
ø
A to A , A
A to A
23 10 0
9 1
T
1 T
2 T
3
A to A
Row address
9 1 A to A
Column address
18 10
A to A , A
23 10 0
Address
bus
a. M9/ = 0M8
b. M9/ = 1M8
159
2CAS and 2WE Modes: The CAS/WE bit in RFSHCR can select two control modes for 16-bit-
wide DRAM: one using UCAS and LCAS; the other using UW and LW. These DRAM pins
correspond to H8/3048 Series pins as shown in table 7-6.
Table 7-6 DRAM Pins and H8/3048 Series Pins
DRAM Pin
H8/3048 Series Pin CAS/WE = 0 (2WE Mode) CAS/WE = 1 (2CAS Mode)
HWR UW UCAS
LWR LW LCAS
RD CAS WE
CS3RAS RAS
Figure 7-5 (1) shows the interface timing for 2WE DRAM. Figure 7-5 (2) shows the interface
timing for 2CAS DRAM.
Figure 7-5 DRAM Control Signal Output Timing (1) (2WE Mode)
ø
( )
CS
RAS
3
( )
RD
CAS
( )
HWR
UW
( )
LWR
LW
RFSH
AS
Read cycle Write cycle Refresh cycle*
Row Column Row Column Area 3 top address
Note: 16-bit access*
Address
bus
160
Figure 7-5 DRAM Control Signal Output Timing (2) (2CAS Mode)
Refresh Cycle Priority Order: When there are simultaneous bus requests, the priority order is:
(High) External bus master > refresh controller > DMA controller > CPU (Low)
For details see section 6.3.7, Bus Arbiter Operation.
Wait State Insertion: When bit AST3 is set to 1 in ASTCR, bus controller settings can cause wait
states to be inserted into bus cycles and refresh cycles. For details see section 6.3.5, Wait Modes.
ø
( )
CS
RAS
3
( )
HWR
UCAS
( )
LWR
LCAS
( )
RD
WE
RFSH
AS
Read cycle Write cycle Refresh cycle*
Row Column Row Column Area 3 top address
Note: 16-bit access*
Address
bus
161
Self-Refresh Mode: Some DRAM devices have a self-refresh function. After the SRFMD bit is
set to 1 in RFSHCR, when a transition to software standby mode occurs, the CAS and RAS
outputs go low in that order so that the DRAM self-refresh function can be used. On exit from
software standby mode, the CAS and RAS outputs both go high.
Table 7-7 shows the pin states in software standby mode. Figure 7-6 shows the signal output
timing.
Table 7-7 Pin States in Software Standby Mode (1) (PSRAME = 0, DRAME = 1)
Software Standby Mode
SRFMD = 0 SRFMD = 1 (self-refresh mode)
Signal CAS/WE = 0 CAS/WE = 1 CAS/WE = 0 CAS/WE = 1
HWR High-impedance High-impedance High Low
LWR High-impedance High-impedance High Low
RD High-impedance High-impedance Low High
CS3High High Low Low
RFSH High High Low Low
162
Figure 7-6 Signal Output Timing in Self-Refresh Mode (PSRAME = 0, DRAME = 1)
ø
CS (RAS)
RD (CAS)
HWR (UW)
LWR (LW)
RFSH
3
High
High
ø
CS (RAS)
RD (WE)
RFSH
3
Software
standby mode
High-impedance
Oscillator
settling time
a. 2 mode (SRFMD = 1)
b. 2 mode (SRFMD = 1)
Software
standby mode
High-impedance
Oscillator
settling time
WE
CAS
Address
bus
Address
bus
HWR
(UCAS)
LWR
(LCAS)
163
Operation in Power-Down State: The refresh controller operates in sleep mode. It does not
operate in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode RTCNT is initialized, but RFSHCR,
RTMCSR bits 5 to 3, and RTCOR retain their settings prior to the transition to software standby
mode.
Example 1: Connection to 2WE 1-Mbit DRAM (1-Mbyte Mode): Figure 7-7 shows typical
interconnections to a 2WE 1-Mbit DRAM, and the corresponding address map. Figure 7-8 shows
a setup procedure to be followed by a program for this example. After power-up the DRAM must
be refreshed to initialize its internal state. Initialization takes a certain length of time, which can
be measured by using an interrupt from another timer module, or by counting the number of times
RTMCSR bit 7 (CMF) is set. Note that no refresh cycle is executed for the first refresh request
after exit from the reset state or standby mode (the first time the CMF flag is set; see figure 7-3).
When using this example, check the DRAM device characteristics carefully and use a procedure
that fits them.
Figure 7-7 Interconnections and Address Map for 2WE 1-Mbit DRAM (Example)
H8/3048 Series A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CS
RD
HWR
LWR
3
D to D
015
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAS
CAS
UW
LW
OE
I/O to I/O
15 0
H'60000
H'7FFFF
a. Interconnections (example)
DRAM area Area 3 (1-Mbyte mode)
b. Address map
2 1-Mbit DRAM with
16-bit organization
WE
×
164
Figure 7-8 Setup Procedure for 2WE 1-Mbit DRAM (1-Mbyte Mode)
Set area 3 for 16-bit access
Set P8 DDR to 1 for output
Set RTCOR
Set bits CKS2 to CKS0 in RTMCSR
Write H'23 in RFSHCR
Wait for DRAM to be initialized
DRAM can be accessed
CS
13
165
Example 2: Connection to 2WE 4-Mbit DRAM (16-Mbyte Mode): Figure 7-9 shows typical
interconnections to a single 2WE 4-Mbit DRAM, and the corresponding address map. Figure 7-10
shows a setup procedure to be followed by a program for this example.
The DRAM in this example has 10-bit row addresses and 8-bit column addresses. Its address area
is H'600000 to H'67FFFF.
Figure 7-9 Interconnections and Address Map for 2WE 4-Mbit DRAM (Example)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CS
RD
HWR
LWR
3
D to D
015
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAS
CAS
UW
LW
OE
I/O to I/O
15 0
A
A
18
17 A
A9
8
H'600000
H'67FFFF
H'680000
H'7FFFFF
H8/3048 Series
2 4-Mbit DRAM with 10-bit
row address, 8-bit column address,
and 16-bit organization
a. Interconnections (example)
b. Address map
DRAM area
Not used Area 3 (16-Mbyte mode)
WE
×
166
Figure 7-10 Setup Procedure for 2WE 4-Mbit DRAM with 10-Bit Row Address and
8-Bit Column Address (16-Mbyte Mode)
Set area 3 for 16-bit access
Set P8 DDR to 1 for output
Set RTCOR
Set bits CKS2 to CKS0 in RTMCSR
Write H'23 in RFSHCR
Wait for DRAM to be initialized
DRAM can be accessed
CS
13
167
Example 3: Connection to 2CAS 4-Mbit DRAM (16-Mbyte Mode): Figure 7-11 shows typical
interconnections to a single 2CAS 4-Mbit DRAM, and the corresponding address map.
Figure 7-12 shows a setup procedure to be followed by a program for this example.
The DRAM in this example has 9-bit row addresses and 9-bit column addresses. Its address area is
H'600000 to H'67FFFF.
Figure 7-11 Interconnections and Address Map for 2CAS 4-Mbit DRAM (Example)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CS
HWR
LWR
RD
3
D to D
0
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAS
UCAS
LCAS
WE
OE
I/O to I/O
15 015
H'600000
H'67FFFF
H'680000
H'7FFFFF
H8/3048 Series
2 4-Mbit DRAM with 9-bit
row address, 9-bit column address,
and 16-bit organization
CAS
×
a. Interconnections (example)
b. Address map
DRAM area
Not used Area 3 (16-Mbyte mode)
168
Figure 7-12 Setup Procedure for 2CAS 4-Mbit DRAM with 9-Bit Row Address and
9-Bit Column Address (16-Mbyte Mode)
Set area 3 for 16-bit access
Set P8 DDR to 1 for output
Set RTCOR
Set bits CKS2 to CKS0 in RTMCSR
Write H'3B in RFSHCR
Wait for DRAM to be initialized
DRAM can be accessed
CS
13
169
Example 4: Connection to Multiple 4-Mbit DRAM Chips (16-Mbyte Mode): Figure 7-13
shows an example of interconnections to two 2CAS 4-Mbit DRAM chips, and the corresponding
address map. Up to four DRAM chips can be connected to area 3 by decoding upper address bits
A19 and A20.
Figure 7-14 shows a setup procedure to be followed by a program for this example. The DRAM
in this example has 9-bit row addresses and 9-bit column addresses. Both chips must be refreshed
simultaneously, so the RFSH pin must be used.
Figure 7-13 Interconnections and Address Map for Multiple 2CAS 4-Mbit DRAM Chips
(Example)
H'600000
H'67FFFF
H'680000
H'6FFFFF
H'700000
H'7FFFFF
A to A
RAS
UCAS
LCAS
WE
OE
I/O to I/O
15 0
80
No. 1
A to A
RAS
UCAS
LCAS
I/O to I/O
15 0
80
No. 2
WE
OE
A
A to A
19
9 1
CS
HWR
LWR
RD
RFSH
3
D to D
15 0
H8/3048 Series
2 4-Mbit DRAM with 9-bit
row address, 9-bit column
address, and 16-bit organization
a. Interconnections (example)
b. Address map
No. 1
DRAM area
No. 2
DRAM area
Not used
Area 3 (16-Mbyte mode)
CAS
×
170
Figure 7-14 Setup Procedure for Multiple 2CAS 4-Mbit DRAM Chips with 9-Bit
Row Address and 9-Bit Column Address (16-Mbyte Mode)
Set area 3 for 16-bit access
Set P8 DDR to 1 for CS output
13
Set RTCOR
Set bits CKS2 to CKS0 in RTMCSR
Write H'3F in RFSHCR
Wait for DRAM to be initialized
DRAM can be accessed
171
7.3.3 Pseudo-Static RAM Refresh Control
Refresh Request Interval and Refresh Cycle Execution: The refresh request interval is
determined as in a DRAM interface, by the settings of RTCOR and bits CKS2 to CKS0 in
RTMCSR. The numbers of states required for pseudo-static RAM read/write cycles and refresh
cycles are the same as for DRAM (see table 7-4). The state transitions are as shown in figure 7-3.
Pseudo-Static RAM Control Signals: Figure 7-15 shows the control signals for pseudo-static
RAM read, write, and refresh cycles.
Figure 7-15 Pseudo-Static RAM Control Signal Output Timing
ø
CS
RD
HWR
LWR
RFSH
AS
3
Read cycle Write cycle *Refresh cycle
Area 3 top address
Note: 16-bit access*
Address
bus
172
Refresh Cycle Priority Order: When there are simultaneous bus requests, the priority order is:
(High) External bus master > refresh controller > DMA controller > CPU (Low)
For details see section 6.3.7, Bus Arbiter Operation.
Wait State Insertion: When bit AST3 is set to 1 in ASTCR, the wait state controller (WSC) can
insert wait states into bus cycles and refresh cycles. For details see section 6.3.5, Wait Modes.
Self-Refresh Mode: Some pseudo-static RAM devices have a self-refresh function. After the
SRFMD bit is set to 1 in RFSHCR, when a transition to software standby mode occurs, the
H8/3048 Series’ CS3output goes high and its RFSH output goes low so that the pseudo-static
RAM self-refresh function can be used. On exit from software standby mode, the RFSH output
goes high.
Table 7-8 shows the pin states in software standby mode. Figure 7-16 shows the signal output
timing.
Table 7-8 Pin States in Software Standby Mode (2) (PSRAME = 1, DRAME = 0)
Software Standby Mode
Signal SRFMD = 0 SRFMD = 1 (Self-Refresh Mode)
CS3High High
RD High-impedance High-impedance
HWR High-impedance High-impedance
LWR High-impedance High-impedance
RFSH High Low
173
Figure 7-16 Signal Output Timing in Self-Refresh Mode (PSRAME = 1, DRAME = 0)
Operation in Power-Down State: The refresh controller operates in sleep mode. It does not
operate in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode RTCNT is initialized, but RFSHCR,
RTMCSR bits 5 to 3, and RTCOR retain their settings prior to the transition to software standby
mode.
ø
CS
RD
HWR
LWR
RFSH
3High
Software standby mode Oscillator
settling time
High-impedance
High-impedance
High-impedance
High-impedance
Address
bus
174
Example: Pseudo-static RAM may have separate OE and RFSH pins, or these may be combined
into a single OE/RFSH pin. Figure 7-17 shows an example of a circuit for generating an
OE/RFSH signal. Check the device characteristics carefully, and design a circuit that fits them.
Figure 7-18 shows a setup procedure to be followed by a program.
Figure 7-17 Interconnection to Pseudo-Static RAM with OE/RFSH Signal (Example)
H8/3048 Series PSRAM
RD
RFSH
OE RFSH/
175
Figure 7-18 Setup Procedure for Pseudo-Static RAM
Set P8 DDR to 1 for CS output
13
Set RTCOR
Set bits CKS2 to CKS0 in RTMCSR
Write H'47 in RFSHCR
Wait for PSRAM to be initialized
PSRAM can be accessed
176
7.3.4 Interval Timing
To use the refresh controller as an interval timer, clear the PSRAME and DRAME both to 0. After
setting RTCOR, select a clock source with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in RTMCSR, and set the CMIE bit
to 1.
Timing of Setting of Compare Match Flag and Clearing by Compare Match: The CMF flag
in RTCSR is set to 1 by a compare match signal output when the RTCOR and RTCNT values
match. The compare match signal is generated in the last state in which the values match (when
RTCNT is updated from the matching value to a new value). Accordingly, when RTCNT and
RTCOR match, the compare match signal is not generated until the next counter clock pulse.
Figure 7-19 shows the timing.
Figure 7-19 Timing of Setting of CMF Flag
Operation in Power-Down State: The interval timer function operates in sleep mode. It does not
operate in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode RTCNT and RTMCSR bits 7 and 6
are initialized, but RTMCSR bits 5 to 3 and RTCOR retain their settings prior to the transition to
software standby mode.
ø
RTCNT
RTCOR
CMF flag
N H'00
N
Compare
match signal
177
Contention between RTCNT Write and Counter Clear: If a counter clear signal occurs in the
T3state of an RTCNT write cycle, clearing of the counter takes priority and the write is not
performed. See figure 7-20.
Figure 7-20 Contention between RTCNT Write and Clear
ø
Address bus
RTCNT
T
1 T
2 T
3
RTCNT address
N H'00
RTCNT write cycle by CPU
Internal
write signal
Counter
clear signal
178
Contention between RTCNT Write and Increment: If an increment pulse occurs in the T3state
of an RTCNT write cycle, writing takes priority and RTCNT is not incremented. See figure 7-21.
Figure 7-21 Contention between RTCNT Write and Increment
T
1 T
2 T
3
RTCNT address
NM
ø
Address bus
RTCNT
RTCNT write cycle by CPU
Internal
write signal
RTCNT
input clock
Counter write data
179
Contention between RTCOR Write and Compare Match: If a compare match occurs in the T3
state of an RTCOR write cycle, writing takes priority and the compare match signal is inhibited.
See figure 7-22.
Figure 7-22 Contention between RTCOR Write and Compare Match
RTCNT Operation at Internal Clock Source Switchover: Switching internal clock sources may
cause RTCNT to increment, depending on the switchover timing. Table 7-9 shows the relation
between the time of the switchover (by writing to bits CKS2 to CKS0) and the operation of
RTCNT.
The RTCNT input clock is generated from the internal clock source by detecting the falling edge
of the internal clock. If a switchover is made from a high clock source to a low clock source, as in
case No. 3 in table 7-9, the switchover will be regarded as a falling edge, an RTCNT clock pulse
will be generated, and RTCNT will be incremented.
T
1 T
2 T
3
RTCNT address
NM
N N + 1
ø
Address bus
RTCNT
RTCOR
RTCOR write cycle by CPU
Internal
write signal
Compare
match signal
Inhibited
RTCOR write data
180
Table 7-9 Internal Clock Switchover and RTCNT Operation
CKS2 to CKS0
No. Write Timing RTCNT Operation
1 Low →low switchover*1
2 Low →high switchover*2
Notes: 1. Including switchovers from a low clock source to the halted state, and from the halted
state to a low clock source.
2. Including switchover from the halted state to a high clock source.
Old clock
source
New clock
source
RTCNT N N + 1
CKS bits rewritten
RTCNT
clock
Old clock
source
New clock
source
RTCNT N N + 1
CKS bits rewritten
N + 2
RTCNT
clock
181
Table 7-9 Internal Clock Switchover and RTCNT Operation (cont)
CKS2 to CKS0
No. Write Timing RTCNT Operation
3 High →low switchover*1
4 High →high switchover
Notes: 1. Including switchover from a high clock source to the halted state.
2. The switchover is regarded as a falling edge, causing RTCNT to increment.
Old clock
source
New clock
source
RTCNT
clock
RTCNT N N + 1
CKS bits rewritten
N + 2
2*
Old clock
source
New clock
source
RTCNT
clock
RTCNT N N + 1
CKS bits rewritten
N + 2
182
7.4 Interrupt Source
Compare match interrupts (CMI) can be generated when the refresh controller is used as an
interval timer. Compare match interrupt requests are masked/unmasked with the CMIE bit of
RTMCSR.
7.5 Usage Notes
When using the DRAM or pseudo-static RAM refresh function, note the following points:
• With the refresh controller, if directly connected DRAM or PSRAM is disconnected*, the
P80/RFSH/IRQ0pin and the P81/CS3/IRQ1pin may both become low-level outputs
simultaneously.
Note: * When the DRAM enable bit (DRAME) or PSRAM enable bit (PSRAME) in the refresh
control register (RFSHCR) is cleared to 0 after being set to 1.
Figure 7-23 Operation when DRAM/PSRAM Connection is Switched
• Refresh cycles are not executed while the bus is released, during software standby mode, and
when a bus cycle is greatly prolonged by insertion of wait states. When these conditions
occur, other means of refreshing are required.
• If refresh requests occur while the bus is released, the first request is held and one refresh
cycle is executed after the bus-released state ends. Figure 7-24 shows the bus cycles in this
case.
Address bus Area 3 start address
P80/RFSH/IRQ0
P81/CS3/IRQ1
183
Figure 7-24 Refresh Cycles when Bus is Released
• If a bus cycle is prolonged by insertion of wait states, the first refresh request is held, as in the
bus-released state.
• If there is contention with a bus request from an external bus master when making a transition
to software standby mode, a one-state bus-released state may occur immediately before the
transition to software standby mode (see figure 7-25).
When using software standby mode, clear the BRLE bit to 0 in BRCR before executing the
SLEEP instruction.
When making a transition to self-refresh mode, the strobe waveform output may not be
guaranteed due to the same kind of contention. This, too, can be prevented by clearing the
BRLE bit to 0 in BRCR.
Figure 7-25 Contention between Bus-Released State and Software Standby Mode
184
ø
RFSH
BACK
Refresh
request
Bus-released state Refresh cycle CPU cycle Refresh cycle
ø
Address bus
External bus
released state Software standby mode
Strobe
BREQ
BACK
Section 8 DMA Controller
8.1 Overview
The H8/3048 Series has an on-chip DMA controller (DMAC) that can transfer data on up to four
channels.
When the DMA controller is not used, it can be independently halted to conserve power. For
details see section 20.6, Module Standby Function.
8.1.1 Features
DMAC features are listed below.
• Selection of short address mode or full address mode
Short address mode
— 8-bit source address and 24-bit destination address, or vice versa
— Maximum four channels available
— Selection of I/O mode, idle mode, or repeat mode
Full address mode
— 24-bit source and destination addresses
— Maximum two channels available
— Selection of normal mode or block transfer mode
• Directly addressable 16-Mbyte address space
• Selection of byte or word transfer
• Activation by internal interrupts, external requests, or auto-request (depending on transfer
mode)
— 16-bit integrated timer unit (ITU) compare match/input capture interrupts (four)
— Serial communication interface (SCI channel 0) transmit-data-empty/receive-data-full
interrupts
— External requests
— Auto-request
185
8.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 8-1 shows a DMAC block diagram.
Figure 8-1 Block Diagram of DMAC
IMIA0
IMIA1
IMIA2
IMIA3
TXI0
RXI0
DREQ0
DREQ1
TEND0
TEND1
DEND0A
DEND0B
DEND1A
DEND1B
DTCR0A
DTCR0B
DTCR1A
DTCR1B
Control logic
Data buffer
Address buffer
Arithmetic-logic unit
MAR0A
MAR0B
MAR1A
MAR1B
IOAR0A
IOAR0B
IOAR1A
IOAR1B
ETCR0A
ETCR0B
ETCR1A
ETCR1B
Internal address bus
Internal
interrupts
Interrupt
signals
Internal data bus
Module data bus
Legend
DTCR:
MAR:
IOAR:
ETCR:
Data transfer control register
Memory address register
I/O address register
Execute transfer count register
Channel
0A
Channel
0B
Channel
1A
Channel
1B
Channel
0
Channel
1
186
8.1.3 Functional Overview
Table 8-1 gives an overview of the DMAC functions.
Table 8-1 DMAC Functional Overview
Address
Reg. Length
Destina-
Transfer Mode Activation Source tion
• Compare match/input 24 8
capture A interrupts
from ITU channels
0 to 3
• Transmit-data-empty
interrupt from SCI
channel 0
• Receive-data-full 8 24
interrupt from SCI
channel 0
• External request 24 8
• Auto-request 24 24
• External request
• Compare match/ 24 24
input capture A
interrupts from ITU
channels 0 to 3
• External request
I/O mode
• Transfers one byte or one word
per request
• Increments or decrements the
memory address by 1 or 2
• Executes 1 to 65,536 transfers
Idle mode
• Transfers one byte or one word
per request
• Holds the memory address fixed
• Executes 1 to 65,536 transfers
Repeat mode
• Transfers one byte or one word
per request
• Increments or decrements the
memory address by 1 or 2
• Executes a specified number (1 to
255) of transfers, then returns to
the initial state and continues
Normal mode
• Auto-request
—Retains the transfer request
internally
—Executes a specified number
(1 to 65,536) of transfers
continuously
—Selection of burst mode or
cycle-steal mode
• External request
—Transfers one byte or one word
per request
—Executes 1 to 65,536 transfers
Block transfer
• Transfers one block of a specified
size per request
• Executes 1 to 65,536 transfers
• Allows either the source or
destination to be a fixed block
area
• Block size can be 1 to 255 bytes
or words
Short
address
mode
Full
address
mode
187
8.1.4 Input/Output Pins
Table 8-2 lists the DMAC pins.
Table 8-2 DMAC Pins
Abbrevia- Input/
Channel Name tion Output Function
0 DMA request 0 DREQ0Input External request for DMAC channel 0
Transfer end 0 TEND0Output Transfer end on DMAC channel 0
1 DMA request 1 DREQ1Input External request for DMAC channel 1
Transfer end 1 TEND1Output Transfer end on DMAC channel 1
Note: External requests cannot be made to channel A in short address mode.
8.1.5 Register Configuration
Table 8-3 lists the DMAC registers.
188
Table 8-3 DMAC Registers
Channel Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
0 H'FF20 Memory address register 0AR MAR0AR R/W Undetermined
H'FF21 Memory address register 0AE MAR0AE R/W Undetermined
H'FF22 Memory address register 0AH MAR0AH R/W Undetermined
H'FF23 Memory address register 0AL MAR0AL R/W Undetermined
H'FF26 I/O address register 0A IOAR0A R/W Undetermined
H'FF24 Execute transfer count register 0AH ETCR0AH R/W Undetermined
H'FF25 Execute transfer count register 0AL ETCR0AL R/W Undetermined
H'FF27 Data transfer control register 0A DTCR0A R/W H'00
H'FF28 Memory address register 0BR MAR0BR R/W Undetermined
H'FF29 Memory address register 0BE MAR0BE R/W Undetermined
H'FF2A Memory address register 0BH MAR0BH R/W Undetermined
H'FF2B Memory address register 0BL MAR0BL R/W Undetermined
H'FF2E I/O address register 0B IOAR0B R/W Undetermined
H'FF2C Execute transfer count register 0BH ETCR0BH R/W Undetermined
H'FF2D Execute transfer count register 0BL ETCR0BL R/W Undetermined
H'FF2F Data transfer control register 0B DTCR0B R/W H'00
1 H'FF30 Memory address register 1AR MAR1AR R/W Undetermined
H'FF31 Memory address register 1AE MAR1AE R/W Undetermined
H'FF32 Memory address register 1AH MAR1AH R/W Undetermined
H'FF33 Memory address register 1AL MAR1AL R/W Undetermined
H'FF36 I/O address register 1A IOAR1A R/W Undetermined
H'FF34 Execute transfer count register 1AH ETCR1AH R/W Undetermined
H'FF35 Execute transfer count register 1AL ETCR1AL R/W Undetermined
H'FF37 Data transfer control register 1A DTCR1A R/W H'00
H'FF38 Memory address register 1BR MAR1BR R/W Undetermined
H'FF39 Memory address register 1BE MAR1BE R/W Undetermined
H'FF3A Memory address register 1BH MAR1BH R/W Undetermined
H'FF3B Memory address register 1BL MAR1BL R/W Undetermined
H'FF3E I/O address register 1B IOAR1B R/W Undetermined
H'FF3C Execute transfer count register 1BH ETCR1BH R/W Undetermined
H'FF3D Execute transfer count register 1BL ETCR1BL R/W Undetermined
H'FF3F Data transfer control register 1B DTCR1B R/W H'00
Note: *The lower 16 bits of the address are indicated.
189
8.2 Register Descriptions (Short Address Mode)
In short address mode, transfers can be carried out independently on channels A and B. Short
address mode is selected by bits DTS2A and DTS1A in data transfer control register A (DTCRA)
as indicated in table 8-4.
Table 8-4 Selection of Short and Full Address Modes
Bit 2 Bit 1
Channel DTS2A DTS1A Description
0 1 1 DMAC channel 0 operates as one channel in full address mode
Other than above DMAC channels 0A and 0B operate as two independent channels
in short address mode
1 1 1 DMAC channel 1 operates as one channel in full address mode
Other than above DMAC channels 1A and 1B operate as two independent channels
in short address mode
8.2.1 Memory Address Registers (MAR)
A memory address register (MAR) is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies a source or
destination address. The transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source.
An MAR consists of four 8-bit registers designated MARR, MARE, MARH, and MARL. All bits
of MARR are reserved: they cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
An MAR functions as a source or destination address register depending on how the DMAC is
activated: as a destination address register if activation is by a receive-data-full interrupt from the
serial communication interface (SCI) (channel 0), and as a source address register otherwise.
The MAR value is incremented or decremented each time one byte or word is transferred,
automatically updating the source or destination memory address. For details, see section 8.2.4,
Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR).
The MARs are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
31
1
—
Source or destination address
30
1
—
29
1
—
28
1
—
27
1
—
26
1
—
25
1
—
24
1
—
23
R/W
22
R/W
21
R/W
20
R/W
19
R/W
18
R/W
17
R/W
16
R/W
15
R/W
14
R/W
13
R/W
12
R/W
11
R/W
10
R/W
9
R/W
8
R/W
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
0
R/W
MARR MARE MARH MARL
Undetermined
190
8.2.2 I/O Address Registers (IOAR)
An I/O address register (IOAR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies a source or
destination address. The IOAR value is the lower 8 bits of the address. The upper 16 address bits
are all 1 (H'FFFF).
An IOAR functions as a source or destination address register depending on how the DMAC is
activated: as a source address register if activation is by a receive-data-full interrupt from the SCI
(channel 0), and as a destination address register otherwise.
The IOAR value is held fixed. It is not incremented or decremented when a transfer is executed.
The IOARs are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode.
8.2.3 Execute Transfer Count Registers (ETCR)
An execute transfer count register (ETCR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the
number of transfers to be executed. These registers function in one way in I/O mode and idle
mode, and another way in repeat mode.
• I/O mode and idle mode
In I/O mode and idle mode, ETCR functions as a 16-bit counter. The count is decremented by
1 each time one transfer is executed. The transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Source or destination address
Undetermined
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
R/W
12
R/W
10
R/W
8
R/W
6
R/W
0
R/W
4
R/W
2
R/W
Transfer counter
Undetermined
15
R/W
13
R/W
11
R/W
9
R/W
7
R/W
1
R/W
5
R/W
3
R/W
191
• Repeat mode
In repeat mode, ETCRH functions as an 8-bit transfer counter and ETCRL holds the initial
transfer count. ETCRH is decremented by 1 each time one transfer is executed. When ETCRH
reaches H'00, the value in ETCRL is reloaded into ETCRH and the same operation is repeated.
The ETCRs are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
Transfer counter
ETCRH
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
Initial count
ETCRL
192
8.2.4 Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR)
A data transfer control register (DTCR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the
operation of one DMAC channel.
The DTCRs are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bit 7—Data Transfer Enable (DTE): Enables or disables data transfer on a channel. When the
DTE bit is set to 1, the channel waits for a transfer to be requested, and executes the transfer when
activated as specified by bits DTS2 to DTS0. When DTE is 0, the channel is disabled and does not
accept transfer requests. DTE is set to 1 by reading the register when DTE is 0, then writing 1.
Bit 7
DTE Description
0 Data transfer is disabled. In I/O mode or idle mode, DTE is cleared to 0 (Initial value)
when the specified number of transfers have been completed.
1 Data transfer is enabled
If DTIE is set to 1, a CPU interrupt is requested when DTE is cleared to 0.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
DTE
0
R/W
6
DTSZ
0
R/W
5
DTID
0
R/W
4
RPE
0
R/W
3
DTIE
0
R/W
0
DTS0
0
R/W
2
DTS2
0
R/W
1
DTS1
0
R/W
Data transfer enable
Enables or disables
data transfer
Data transfer interrupt enable
Enables or disables the CPU interrupt
at the end of the transfer
Data transfer select
These bits select the data
transfer activation source
Data transfer size
Selects byte or
word size
Data transfer
increment/decrement
Selects whether to
increment or decrement
the memory address
register
Repeat enable
Selects repeat
mode
193
Bit 6—Data Transfer Size (DTSZ): Selects the data size of each transfer.
Bit 6
DTSZ Description
0 Byte-size transfer (Initial value)
1 Word-size transfer
Bit 5—Data Transfer Increment/Decrement (DTID): Selects whether to increment or
decrement the memory address register (MAR) after a data transfer in I/O mode or repeat mode.
Bit 5
DTID Description
0 MAR is incremented after each data transfer
• If DTSZ = 0, MAR is incremented by 1 after each transfer
• If DTSZ = 1, MAR is incremented by 2 after each transfer
1 MAR is decremented after each data transfer
• If DTSZ = 0, MAR is decremented by 1 after each transfer
• If DTSZ = 1, MAR is decremented by 2 after each transfer
MAR is not incremented or decremented in idle mode.
Bit 4—Repeat Enable (RPE): Selects whether to transfer data in I/O mode, idle mode, or repeat
mode.
Bit 4 Bit 3
RPE DTIE Description
0 0 I/O mode (Initial value)
1
1 0 Repeat mode
1 Idle mode
Operations in these modes are described in sections 8.4.2, I/O Mode, 8.4.3, Idle Mode, and 8.4.4,
Repeat Mode.
194
Bit 3—Data Transfer Interrupt Enable (DTIE): Enables or disables the CPU interrupt (DEND)
requested when the DTE bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 3
DTIE Description
0 The DEND interrupt requested by DTE is disabled (Initial value)
1 The DEND interrupt requested by DTE is enabled
Bits 2 to 0—Data Transfer Select (DTS2, DTS1, DTS0): These bits select the data transfer
activation source. Some of the selectable sources differ between channels A and B.*
Note: * Refer to 8-3-4, Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR).
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DTS2 DTS1 DTS0 Description
0 0 0 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU (Initial value)
channel 0
1 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU channel 1
1 0 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU channel 2
1 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU channel 3
100Transmit-data-empty interrupt from SCI channel 0
1 Receive-data-full interrupt from SCI channel 0
1 0 Falling edge of DREQ input (channel B)
Transfer in full address mode (channel A)
1 Low level of DREQ input (channel B)
Transfer in full address mode (channel A)
The same internal interrupt can be selected as an activation source for two or more channels at
once. In that case the channels are activated in a priority order, highest-priority channel first. For
the priority order, see section 8.4.9, Multiple-Channel Operation.
When a channel is enabled (DTE = 1), its selected DMAC activation source cannot generate a
CPU interrupt.
195
8.3 Register Descriptions (Full Address Mode)
In full address mode the A and B channels operate together. Full address mode is selected as
indicated in table 8-4.
8.3.1 Memory Address Registers (MAR)
A memory address register (MAR) is a 32-bit readable/writable register. MARA functions as the
source address register of the transfer, and MARB as the destination address register.
An MAR consists of four 8-bit registers designated MARR, MARE, MARH, and MARL. All bits
of MARR are reserved: they cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
The MAR value is incremented or decremented each time one byte or word is transferred,
automatically updating the source or destination memory address. For details, see section 8.3.4,
Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR).
The MARs are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode.
8.3.2 I/O Address Registers (IOAR)
The I/O address registers (IOARs) are not used in full address mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
31
1
—
Source or destination address
30
1
—
29
1
—
28
1
—
27
1
—
26
1
—
25
1
—
24
1
—
23
R/W
22
R/W
21
R/W
20
R/W
19
R/W
18
R/W
17
R/W
16
R/W
15
R/W
14
R/W
13
R/W
12
R/W
11
R/W
10
R/W
9
R/W
8
R/W
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
0
R/W
MARR MARE MARH MARL
Undetermined
196
8.3.3 Execute Transfer Count Registers (ETCR)
An execute transfer count register (ETCR) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the
number of transfers to be executed. The functions of these registers differ between normal mode
and block transfer mode.
• Normal mode
ETCRA
ETCRB: Is not used in normal mode.
In normal mode ETCRA functions as a 16-bit transfer counter. The count is decremented by 1
each time one transfer is executed. The transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. ETCRB is
not used.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
R/W
12
R/W
10
R/W
8
R/W
6
R/W
0
R/W
4
R/W
2
R/W
Transfer counter
Undetermined
15
R/W
13
R/W
11
R/W
9
R/W
7
R/W
1
R/W
5
R/W
3
R/W
197
• Block transfer mode
ETCRA
ETCRB
In block transfer mode, ETCRAH functions as an 8-bit block size counter. ETCRAL holds the
initial block size. ETCRAH is decremented by 1 each time one byte or word is transferred. When
the count reaches H'00, ETCRAH is reloaded from ETCRAL. Blocks consisting of an arbitrary
number of bytes or words can be transferred repeatedly by setting the same initial block size value
in ETCRAH and ETCRAL.
In block transfer mode ETCRB functions as a 16-bit block transfer counter. ETCRB is
decremented by 1 each time one block is transferred. The transfer ends when the count reaches
H'0000.
The ETCRs are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
Block size counter
ETCRAH
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
Initial block size
ETCRAL
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
R/W
12
R/W
10
R/W
8
R/W
6
R/W
0
R/W
4
R/W
2
R/W
Block transfer counter
Undetermined
15
R/W
13
R/W
11
R/W
9
R/W
7
R/W
1
R/W
5
R/W
3
R/W
198
8.3.4 Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR)
The data transfer control registers (DTCRs) are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control the
operation of the DMAC channels. A channel operates in full address mode when bits DTS2A and
DTS1A are both set to 1 in DTCRA. DTCRA and DTCRB have different functions in full address
mode.
DTCRA
DTCRA is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
DTE
0
R/W
6
DTSZ
0
R/W
5
SAID
0
R/W
4
SAIDE
0
R/W
3
DTIE
0
R/W
0
DTS0A
0
R/W
2
DTS2A
0
R/W
1
DTS1A
0
R/W
Data transfer enable
Enables or disables
data transfer
Enables or disables the
CPU interrupt at the end
of the transfer
Data transfer size
Selects byte or
word size
Source address
increment/decrement Data transfer select
2A and 1A
These bits must both be
set to 1
Data transfer
interrupt enable
Source address increment/
decrement enable
These bits select whether
the source address register
(MARA) is incremented,
decremented, or held fixed
during the data transfer
Selects block
transfer mode
Data transfer
select 0A
199
Bit 7—Data Transfer Enable (DTE): Together with the DTME bit in DTCRB, this bit enables or
disables data transfer on the channel. When the DTME and DTE bits are both set to 1, the channel
is enabled. If auto-request is specified, data transfer begins immediately. Otherwise, the channel
waits for transfers to be requested. When the specified number of transfers have been completed,
the DTE bit is automatically cleared to 0. When DTE is 0, the channel is disabled and does not
accept transfer requests. DTE is set to 1 by reading the register when DTE is 0, then writing 1.
Bit 7
DTE Description
0 Data transfer is disabled (DTE is cleared to 0 when the specified number (Initial value)
of transfers have been completed)
1 Data transfer is enabled
If DTIE is set to 1, a CPU interrupt is requested when DTE is cleared to 0.
Bit 6—Data Transfer Size (DTSZ): Selects the data size of each transfer.
Bit 6
DTSZ Description
0 Byte-size transfer (Initial value)
1 Word-size transfer
Bit 5—Source Address Increment/Decrement (SAID) and Bit 4—Source Address
Increment/Decrement Enable (SAIDE): These bits select whether the source address register
(MARA) is incremented, decremented, or held fixed during the data transfer.
Bit 5 Bit 4
SAID SAIDE Description
0 0 MARA is held fixed (Initial value)
1 MARA is incremented after each data transfer
• If DTSZ = 0, MARA is incremented by 1 after each transfer
• If DTSZ = 1, MARA is incremented by 2 after each transfer
1 0 MARA is held fixed
1 MARA is decremented after each data transfer
• If DTSZ = 0, MARA is decremented by 1 after each transfer
• If DTSZ = 1, MARA is decremented by 2 after each transfer
200
Bit 3—Data Transfer Interrupt Enable (DTIE): Enables or disables the CPU interrupt (DEND)
requested when the DTE bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 3
DTIE Description
0 The DEND interrupt requested by DTE is disabled (Initial value)
1 The DEND interrupt requested by DTE is enabled
Bits 2 and 1—Data Transfer Select 2A and 1A (DTS2A, DTS1A): A channel operates in full
address mode when DTS2A and DTS1A are both set to 1.
Bit 0—Data Transfer Select 0A (DTS0A): Selects normal mode or block transfer mode.
Bit 0
DTS0A Description
0 Normal mode (Initial value)
1 Block transfer mode
Operations in these modes are described in sections 8.4.5, Normal Mode, and 8.4.6, Block
Transfer Mode.
201
DTCRB
DTCRB is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bit 7—Data Transfer Master Enable (DTME): Together with the DTE bit in DTCRA, this bit
enables or disables data transfer. When the DTME and DTE bits are both set to 1, the channel is
enabled. When an NMI interrupt occurs DTME is cleared to 0, suspending the transfer so that the
CPU can use the bus. The suspended transfer resumes when DTME is set to 1 again. For further
information on operation in block transfer mode, see section 8.6.6, NMI Interrupts and Block
Transfer Mode.
DTME is set to 1 by reading the register while DTME = 0, then writing 1.
Bit 7
DTME Description
0 Data transfer is disabled (DTME is cleared to 0 when an NMI interrupt (Initial value)
occurs)
1 Data transfer is enabled
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
DTME
0
R/W
6
—
0
R/W
5
DAID
0
R/W
4
DAIDE
0
R/W
3
TMS
0
R/W
0
DTS0B
0
R/W
2
DTS2B
0
R/W
1
DTS1B
0
R/W
Data transfer master enable
Enables or disables data
transfer, together with
the DTE bit, and is cleared
to 0 by an interrupt
Reserved bit
Destination address
increment/decrement Data transfer select
2B to 0B
These bits select the data
transfer activation source
Transfer mode select
Destination address
increment/decrement enable
These bits select whether
the destination address
register (MARB) is incremented,
decremented, or held fixed
during the data transfer
Selects whether the
block area is the source
or destination in block
transfer mode
202
Bit 6—Reserved: Although reserved, this bit can be written and read.
Bit 5—Destination Address Increment/Decrement (DAID) and Bit 4—Destination Address
Increment/Decrement Enable (DAIDE): These bits select whether the destination address
register (MARB) is incremented, decremented, or held fixed during the data transfer.
Bit 5 Bit 4
DAID DAIDE Description
0 0 MARB is held fixed (Initial value)
1 MARB is incremented after each data transfer
• If DTSZ = 0, MARB is incremented by 1 after each data transfer
• If DTSZ = 1, MARB is incremented by 2 after each data transfer
1 0 MARB is held fixed
1 MARB is decremented after each data transfer
• If DTSZ = 0, MARB is decremented by 1 after each data transfer
• If DTSZ = 1, MARB is decremented by 2 after each data transfer
Bit 3—Transfer Mode Select (TMS): Selects whether the source or destination is the block area
in block transfer mode.
Bit 3
TMS Description
0 Destination is the block area in block transfer mode (Initial value)
1 Source is the block area in block transfer mode
203
Bits 2 to 0—Data Transfer Select 2B to 0B (DTS2B, DTS1B, DTS0B): These bits select the
data transfer activation source. The selectable activation sources differ between normal mode and
block transfer mode.
Normal mode
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DTS2B DTS1B DTS0B Description
0 0 0 Auto-request (burst mode) (Initial value)
1 Cannot be used
1 0 Auto-request (cycle-steal mode)
1 Cannot be used
1 0 0 Cannot be used
1 Cannot be used
1 0 Falling edge of DREQ
1 Low level input at DREQ
Block transfer mode
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DTS2B DTS1B DTS0B
Description
0 0 0 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU channel 0 (Initial value)
1 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU channel 1
1 0 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU channel 2
1 Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU channel 3
100
Cannot be used
1
Cannot be used
1 0 Falling edge of DREQ
1
Cannot be used
The same internal interrupt can be selected to activate two or more channels. The channels are
activated in a priority order, highest priority first. For the priority order, see section 8.4.9, DMAC
Multiple-Channel Operation.
204
8.4 Operation
8.4.1 Overview
Table 8-5 summarizes the DMAC modes.
Table 8-5 DMAC Modes
Transfer Mode Activation Notes
Short address Compare match/input
mode capture A interrupt from
ITU channels 0 to 3
Transmit-data-empty
and receive-data-full
interrupts from SCI
channel 0
External request
Normal mode Auto-request
External request
Block transfer mode Compare match/input
capture A interrupt from
ITU channels 0 to 3
External request
A summary of operations in these modes follows.
I/O Mode: One byte or word is transferred per request. A designated number of these transfers
are executed. A CPU interrupt can be requested at completion of the designated number of
transfers. One 24-bit address and one 8-bit address are specified. The transfer direction is
determined automatically from the activation source.
Idle Mode: One byte or word is transferred per request. A designated number of these transfers
are executed. A CPU interrupt can be requested at completion of the designated number of
transfers. One 24-bit address and one 8-bit address are specified. The addresses are held fixed. The
transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source.
Repeat Mode: One byte or word is transferred per request. A designated number of these
transfers are executed. When the designated number of transfers are completed, the initial address
and counter value are restored and operation continues. No CPU interrupt is requested. One 24-bit
address and one 8-bit address are specified. The transfer direction is determined automatically
from the activation source.
Full address
mode
• Up to four channels
can operate
independently
• Only the B channels
support external
requests
• A and B channels are
paired; up to two
channels are
available
• Burst mode or cycle-
steal mode can be
selected for auto-
requests
I/O mode
Idle mode
Repeat mode
205
Normal Mode
• Auto-request
The DMAC is activated by register setup alone, and continues executing transfers until the
designated number of transfers have been completed. A CPU interrupt can be requested at
completion of the transfers. Both addresses are 24-bit addresses.
— Cycle-steal mode
The bus is released to another bus master after each byte or word is transferred.
— Burst mode
Unless requested by a higher-priority bus master, the bus is not released until the
designated number of transfers have been completed.
• External request
One byte or word is transferred per request. A designated number of these transfers are
executed. A CPU interrupt can be requested at completion of the designated number of
transfers. Both addresses are 24-bit addresses.
Block Transfer Mode: One block of a specified size is transferred per request. A designated
number of block transfers are executed. At the end of each block transfer, one address is restored
to its initial value. When the designated number of blocks have been transferred, a CPU interrupt
can be requested. Both addresses are 24-bit addresses.
206
8.4.2 I/O Mode
I/O mode can be selected independently for each channel.
One byte or word is transferred at each transfer request in I/O mode. A designated number of
these transfers are executed. One address is specified in the memory address register (MAR), the
other in the I/O address register (IOAR). The direction of transfer is determined automatically
from the activation source. The transfer is from the address specified in IOAR to the address
specified in MAR if activated by an SCI channel 0 receive-data-full interrupt, and from the
address specified in MAR to the address specified in IOAR otherwise.
Table 8-6 indicates the register functions in I/O mode.
Table 8-6 Register Functions in I/O Mode
Function
Activated by
SCI 0 Receive-
Data-Full Other
Register Interrupt Activation Initial Setting Operation
Destination Source Destination or Incremented or
address address source address decremented
register register once per transfer
Source Destination Source or Held fixed
address address destination
register register address
Transfer counter Number of
Decremented transfers once per
transfer until
H'0000 is
reached and
transfer ends
Legend
MAR: Memory address register
IOAR: I/O address register
ETCR: Execute transfer count register
MAR and IOAR specify the source and destination addresses. MAR specifies a 24-bit source or
destination address, which is incremented or decremented as each byte or word is transferred.
IOAR specifies the lower 8 bits of a fixed address. The upper 16 bits are all 1s. IOAR is not
incremented or decremented.
Figure 8-2 illustrates how I/O mode operates.
23 0
MAR
All 1s IOAR
23 0
15 0
ETCR
7
207
Figure 8-2 Operation in I/O Mode
The transfer count is specified as a 16-bit value in ETCR. The ETCR value is decremented by 1 at
each transfer. When the ETCR value reaches H'0000, the DTE bit is cleared and the transfer ends.
If the DTIE bit is set to 1, a CPU interrupt is requested at this time. The maximum transfer count
is 65,536, obtained by setting ETCR to H'0000.
Transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture A interrupts from ITU
channels 0 to 3, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from SCI channel 0, and
external request signals.
For the detailed settings see section 8.2.4, Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR).
Address T
Address B
Transfer
Legend
L = initial setting of MAR
N = initial setting of ETCR
Address T = L
Address B = L + (–1) • (2 • N – 1)
DTID
IOAR
1 byte or word is
transferred per request
DTSZ
208
Figure 8-3 shows a sample setup procedure for I/O mode.
Figure 8-3 I/O Mode Setup Procedure (Example)
8.4.3 Idle Mode
Idle mode can be selected independently for each channel.
One byte or word is transferred at each transfer request in idle mode. A designated number of
these transfers are executed. One address is specified in the memory address register (MAR), the
other in the I/O address register (IOAR). The direction of transfer is determined automatically
from the activation source. The transfer is from the address specified in IOAR to the address
specified in MAR if activated by an SCI channel 0 receive-data-full interrupt, and from the
address specified in MAR to the address specified in IOAR otherwise.
Table 8-7 indicates the register functions in idle mode.
Set source and
destination addresses
Set transfer count
Read DTCR
Set DTCR
I/O mode
I/O mode setup
1
2
3
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set the source and destination addresses
in MAR and IOAR. The transfer direction is
determined automatically from the activation
source.
Set the transfer count in ETCR.
Read DTCR while the DTE bit is cleared to 0.
Set the DTCR bits as follows.
Select the DMAC activation source with bits
DTS2 to DTS0.
Set or clear the DTIE bit to enable or disable
the CPU interrupt at the end of the transfer.
Clear the RPE bit to 0 to select I/O mode.
Select MAR increment or decrement with the
DTID bit.
Select byte size or word size with the DTSZ bit.
Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable the transfer.
•
•
•
•
•
•
209
Table 8-7 Register Functions in Idle Mode
Function
Activated by
SCI 0 Receive-
Data-Full Other
Register Interrupt Activation Initial Setting Operation
Destination Source Destination or Held fixed
address address source address
register register
Source Destination Source or Held fixed
address address destination
register register address
Transfer counter Number of
Decremented transfers once per
transfer until
H'0000 is
reached and
transfer ends
Legend
MAR: Memory address register
IOAR: I/O address register
ETCR: Execute transfer count register
MAR and IOAR specify the source and destination addresses. MAR specifies a 24-bit source or
destination address. IOAR specifies the lower 8 bits of a fixed address. The upper 16 bits are all
1s. MAR and IOAR are not incremented or decremented.
Figure 8-4 illustrates how idle mode operates.
Figure 8-4 Operation in Idle Mode
23 0
MAR
All 1s IOAR
23 0
15 0
ETCR
7
Transfer
1 byte or word is
transferred per request
IOARMAR
210
The transfer count is specified as a 16-bit value in ETCR. The ETCR value is decremented by 1 at
each transfer. When the ETCR value reaches H'0000, the DTE bit is cleared, the transfer ends, and
a CPU interrupt is requested. The maximum transfer count is 65,536, obtained by setting ETCR to
H'0000.
Transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture A interrupts from ITU
channels 0 to 3, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from SCI channel 0, and
external request signals.
For the detailed settings see section 8.2.4, Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR).
Figure 8-5 shows a sample setup procedure for idle mode.
Figure 8-5 Idle Mode Setup Procedure (Example)
Set source and
destination addresses
Set transfer count
Read DTCR
Set DTCR
Idle mode
Idle mode setup
1
2
3
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set the source and destination addresses
in MAR and IOAR. The transfer direction is deter-
mined automatically from the activation source.
Set the transfer count in ETCR.
Read DTCR while the DTE bit is cleared to 0.
Set the DTCR bits as follows.
Select the DMAC activation source with bits
DTS2 to DTS0.
Set the DTIE and RPE bits to 1 to select idle mode.
Select byte size or word size with the DTSZ bit.
Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable the transfer.
•
•
•
•
211
8.4.4 Repeat Mode
Repeat mode is useful for cyclically transferring a bit pattern from a table to the programmable
timing pattern controller (TPC) in synchronization, for example, with ITU compare match. Repeat
mode can be selected for each channel independently.
One byte or word is transferred per request in repeat mode, as in I/O mode. A designated number
of these transfers are executed. One address is specified in the memory address register (MAR),
the other in the I/O address register (IOAR). At the end of the designated number of transfers,
MAR and ETCR are restored to their original values and operation continues. The direction of
transfer is determined automatically from the activation source. The transfer is from the address
specified in IOAR to the address specified in MAR if activated by an SCI channel 0 receive-data-
full interrupt, and from the address specified in MAR to the address specified in IOAR otherwise.
Table 8-8 indicates the register functions in repeat mode.
Table 8-8 Register Functions in Repeat Mode
Function
Activated by
SCI 0 Receive-
Data-Full Other
Register Interrupt Activation Initial Setting Operation
Destination Source Destination or Incremented or
address address source address decremented at
register register each transfer until
ETCRH reaches
H'0000, then restored
to initial value
Source Destination Source or Held fixed
address address destination
register register address
T ransfer counter Number of Decremented once
transfers per transfer until
H'0000 is reached,
then reloaded from
ETCRL
Initial transfer count Number of Held fixed
transfers
Legend
MAR: Memory address register
IOAR: I/O address register
ETCR: Execute transfer count register
23 0
MAR
All 1s IOAR
23 0
70
ETCRH
7
70
ETCRL
212
In repeat mode ETCRH is used as the transfer counter while ETCRL holds the initial transfer
count. ETCRH is decremented by 1 at each transfer until it reaches H'00, then is reloaded from
ETCRL. MAR is also restored to its initial value, which is calculated from the DTSZ and DTID
bits in DTCR. Specifically, MAR is restored as follows:
MAR ←MAR – (–1)DTID · 2DTSZ · ETCRL
ETCRH and ETCRL should be initially set to the same value.
In repeat mode transfers continue until the CPU clears the DTE bit to 0. After DTE is cleared to 0,
if the CPU sets DTE to 1 again, transfers resume from the state at which DTE was cleared. No
CPU interrupt is requested.
As in I/O mode, MAR and IOAR specify the source and destination addresses. MAR specifies a
24-bit source or destination address. IOAR specifies the lower 8 bits of a fixed address. The upper
16 bits are all 1s. IOAR is not incremented or decremented.
Figure 8-6 illustrates how repeat mode operates.
Figure 8-6 Operation in Repeat Mode
Address T
Address B
Transfer
1 byte or word is
transferred per request
Legend
L = initial setting of MAR
N = initial setting of ETCRH and ETCRL
Address T = L
Address B = L + (–1) • (2 • N – 1)
DTID DTSZ
IOAR
213
The transfer count is specified as an 8-bit value in ETCRH and ETCRL. The maximum transfer
count is 255, obtained by setting both ETCRH and ETCRL to H'FF.
Transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture A interrupts from ITU
channels 0 to 3, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from SCI channel 0, and
external request signals.
For the detailed settings see section 8.2.4, Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR).
Figure 8-7 shows a sample setup procedure for repeat mode.
Figure 8-7 Repeat Mode Setup Procedure (Example)
Set source and
destination addresses
Set transfer count
Read DTCR
Set DTCR
Repeat mode
Repeat mode
1
2
3
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set the source and destination addresses in MAR
and IOAR. The transfer direction is determined
automatically from the activation source.
Set the transfer count in both ETCRH and ETCRL.
Read DTCR while the DTE bit is cleared to 0.
Select byte size or word size with the DTSZ bit.
Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable the transfer.
•
•
•
•
•
Select the DMAC activation source with bits
DTS2 to DTS0.
Clear the DTIE bit to 0 and set the RPE bit to 1
to select repeat mode.
Select MAR increment or decrement with the DTID bit.
Set the DTCR bits as follows.
214
8.4.5 Normal Mode
In normal mode the A and B channels are combined. One byte or word is transferred per request.
A designated number of these transfers are executed. Addresses are specified in MARA and
MARB. Table 8-9 indicates the register functions in I/O mode.
Table 8-9 Register Functions in Normal Mode
Register Function Initial Setting Operation
Source address Source address Incremented or
register decremented once per
transfer, or held fixed
Destination Destination Incremented or
address register address decremented once per
transfer, or held fixed
Transfer counter Number of Decremented once per
transfers transfer
Legend
MARA: Memory address register A
MARB: Memory address register B
ETCRA: Execute transfer count register A
The source and destination addresses are both 24-bit addresses. MARA specifies the source
address. MARB specifies the destination address. MARA and MARB can be independently
incremented, decremented, or held fixed as data is transferred.
The transfer count is specified as a 16-bit value in ETCRA. The ETCRA value is decremented by
1 at each transfer. When the ETCRA value reaches H'0000, the DTE bit is cleared and the transfer
ends. If the DTIE bit is set, a CPU interrupt is requested at this time. The maximum transfer count
is 65,536, obtained by setting ETCRA to H'0000.
Figure 8-8 illustrates how normal mode operates.
23 0
MARA
15 0
ETCRA
23 0
MARB
215
Figure 8-8 Operation in Normal Mode
Transfers can be requested (activated) by an external request or auto-request. An auto-requested
transfer is activated by the register settings alone. The designated number of transfers are executed
automatically. Either cycle-steal or burst mode can be selected. In cycle-steal mode the DMAC
releases the bus temporarily after each transfer. In burst mode the DMAC keeps the bus until the
transfers are completed, unless there is a bus request from a higher-priority bus master.
For the detailed settings see section 8.3.4, Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR).
Address T
Address B
Transfer
Legend
L
L
N
T
B
T
B
SAID
DAID
Address T
Address B
A
B
A
A
B
B
= initial setting of MARA
= initial setting of MARB
= initial setting of ETCRA
= L
= L + SAIDE • (–1) • (2 • N – 1)
= L
= L + DAIDE • (–1) • (2 • N – 1)
A
A
B
B
DTSZ
DTSZ
A
A
B
B
216
Figure 8-9 shows a sample setup procedure for normal mode.
Figure 8-9 Normal Mode Setup Procedure (Example)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Set the initial source address in MARA.
Set the initial destination address in MARB.
Set the transfer count in ETCRA.
Set the DTCRB bits as follows.
Set the DTCRA bits as follows.
Read DTCRB with DTME cleared to 0.
Normal mode
Normal mode
Set initial source address
Set initial destination address
Set transfer count
Set DTCRB (1)
Set DTCRA (1)
Read DTCRB
Set DTCRB (2)
Read DTCRA
Set DTCRA (2)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Clear the DTME bit to 0.
Set the DAID and DAIDE bits to select whether
MARB is incremented, decremented, or held fixed.
Select the DMAC activation source with bits
DTS2B to DTS0B.
Clear the DTE bit to 0.
Select byte or word size with the DTSZ bit.
Set the SAID and SAIDE bits to select whether
MARA is incremented, decremented, or held fixed.
Set or clear the DTIE bit to enable or disable the
CPU interrupt at the end of the transfer.
Clear the DTS0A bit to 0 and set the DTS2A
and DTS1A bits to 1 to select normal mode.
Set the DTME bit to 1 in DTCRB.
Read DTCRA with DTE cleared to 0.
Set the DTE bit to 1 in DTCRA to enable the transfer.
Note: Carry out settings 1 to 9 with the DEND interrupt masked in the CPU.
If an NMI interrupt occurs during the setup procedure, it may clear the DTME bit to 0, in
217
8.4.6 Block Transfer Mode
In block transfer mode the A and B channels are combined. One block of a specified size is
transferred per request. A designated number of block transfers are executed. Addresses are
specified in MARA and MARB. The block area address can be either held fixed or cycled.
Table 8-10 indicates the register functions in block transfer mode.
Table 8-10 Register Functions in Block Transfer Mode
Register Function Initial Setting Operation
Source address Source address Incremented or
register decremented once per
transfer, or held fixed
Destination Destination Incremented or
address register address decremented once per
transfer, or held fixed
Block size counter Block size Decremented once per
transfer until H'00 is
reached, then reloaded
from ETCRAL
Initial block size Block size Held fixed
Block transfer Number of block Decremented once per
counter transfers block transfer until H'0000
is reached and the
transfer ends
Legend
MARA: Memory address register A
MARB: Memory address register B
ETCRA: Execute transfer count register A
ETCRB: Execute transfer count register B
The source and destination addresses are both 24-bit addresses. MARA specifies the source
address. MARB specifies the destination address. MARA and MARB can be independently
incremented, decremented, or held fixed as data is transferred. One of these registers operates as a
block area register: even if it is incremented or decremented, it is restored to its initial value at the
end of each block transfer. The TMS bit in DTCRB selects whether the block area is the source or
destination.
23 0
MARA
70
ETCRAH
70
ETCRAL
23 0
MARB
15 0
ETCRB
218
If M (1 to 255) is the size of the block transferred at each request and N (1 to 65,536) is the
number of blocks to be transferred, then ETCRAH and ETCRAL should initially be set to M and
ETCRB should initially be set to N.
Figure 8-10 illustrates how block transfer mode operates. In this figure, bit TMS is cleared to 0,
meaning the block area is the destination.
Figure 8-10 Operation in Block Transfer Mode
T
B
Transfer
Legend
L
L
M
N
T
B
T
B
Address T
M bytes or words are
transferred per request
Address B
A
A
Block 1
Block N
B
B
Block area
Block 2
= initial setting of MARA
= initial setting of MARB
= initial setting of ETCRAH and ETCRAL
= initial setting of ETCRB
= L
= L + SAIDE • (–1) • (2 • M – 1)
= L
= L + DAIDE • (–1) • (2 • M – 1)
A
A
B
B
A
B
A
A
B
B
SAID
DAID
DTSZ
DTSZ
219
When activated by a transfer request, the DMAC executes a burst transfer. During the transfer
MARA and MARB are updated according to the DTCR settings, and ETCRAH is decremented.
When ETCRAH reaches H'00, it is reloaded from ETCRAL to restore the initial value. The
memory address register of the block area is also restored to its initial value, and ETCRB is
decremented. If ETCRB is not H'0000, the DMAC then waits for the next transfer request.
ETCRAH and ETCRAL should be initially set to the same value.
The above operation is repeated until ETCRB reaches H'0000, at which point the DTE bit is
cleared to 0 and the transfer ends. If the DTIE bit is set to 1, a CPU interrupt is requested at this
time.
Figure 8-11 shows examples of a block transfer with byte data size when the block area is the
destination. In (a) the block area address is cycled. In (b) the block area address is held fixed.
Transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture A interrupts from ITU
channels 0 to 3, and by external request signals.
For the detailed settings see section 8.3.4, Data Transfer Control Registers (DTCR).
220
Figure 8-11 Block Transfer Mode Flowcharts (Examples)
Start
(DTE = DTME = 1)
Transfer requested?
Get bus
MARA = MARA + 1
Read from MARA address
Write to MARB address
MARB = MARB + 1
ETCRAH = ETCRAH – 1
ETCRAH = H'00
Release bus
Clear DTE to 0 and end transfer
ETCRAH = ETCRAL
MARB = MARB – ETCRAL
ETCRB = ETCRB – 1
ETCRB = H'0000
Start
(DTE = DTME = 1)
Transfer requested?
Get bus
MARA = MARA + 1
Read from MARA address
Write to MARB address
ETCRAH = ETCRAH – 1
ETCRAH = H'00
Release bus
Clear DTE to 0 and end transfer
ETCRB = ETCRB – 1
ETCRB = H'0000
ETCRAH = ETCRAL
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
a. DTSZ = TMS = 0
SAID = DAID = 0
SAIDE = DAIDE = 1
b. DTSZ = TMS = 0
SAID = 0
SAIDE = 1
DAIDE = 0
221
Figure 8-12 shows a sample setup procedure for block transfer mode.
Figure 8-12 Block Transfer Mode Setup Procedure (Example)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Block transfer mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Set source address
Set destination address
Set block transfer count
Set block size
Set DTCRB (1)
Set DTCRA (1)
Read DTCRB
Set DTCRB (2)
Read DTCRA
Set DTCRA (2)
Block transfer mode
Set the source address in MARA.
Set the destination address in MARB.
Set the block transfer count in ETCRB.
Set the block size (number of bytes or words)
in both ETCRAH and ETCRAL.
Set the DTCRB bits as follows.
Set the DTCRA bits as follows.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Clear the DTME bit to 0.
Set the DAID and DAIDE bits to select whether
MARB is incremented, decremented, or held fixed.
Set or clear the TMS bit to make the block area
the source or destination.
Select the DMAC activation source with bits
DTS2B to DTS0B.
Clear the DTE to 0.
Select byte size or word size with the DTSZ bit.
Set the SAID and SAIDE bits to select whether
MARA is incremented, decremented, or held fixed.
Set or clear the DTIE bit to enable or disable the
CPU interrupt at the end of the transfer.
Set bits DTS2A to DTS0A all to 1 to select
block transfer mode.
Read DTCRB with DTME cleared to 0.
Set the DTME bit to 1 in DTCRB.
Read DTCRA with DTE cleared to 0.
Set the DTE bit to 1 in DTCRA to enable
the transfer.
Note: Carry out settings 1 to 10 with the DEND interrupt masked in the CPU.
If an NMI interrupt occurs during the setup procedure, it may clear the DTME bit to 0, in
which case the transfer will not start.
222
8.4.7 DMAC Activation
The DMAC can be activated by an internal interrupt, external request, or auto-request. The
available activation sources differ depending on the transfer mode and channel as indicated in
table 8-11.
Table 8-11 DMAC Activation Sources
Short Address Mode
Channels Channels
Activation Source 0A and 1A 0B and 1B Normal Block
IMIA0 oo×o
IMIA1 oo×o
IMIA2 oo×o
IMIA3 oo×o
TXI0 oo××
RXI0 oo××
External Falling edge ×ooo
requests of DREQ
Low input at ×oo×
DREQ
Auto-request ××o×
Activation by Internal Interrupts: When an interrupt request is selected as a DMAC activation
source and the DTE bit is set to 1, that interrupt request is not sent to the CPU. It is not possible
for an interrupt request to activate the DMAC and simultaneously generate a CPU interrupt.
When the DMAC is activated by an interrupt request, the interrupt request flag is cleared
automatically. If the same interrupt is selected to activate two or more channels, the interrupt
request flag is cleared when the highest-priority channel is activated, but the transfer request is
held pending on the other channels in the DMAC, which are activated in their priority order.
Full Address Mode
Internal
interrupts
223
Activation by External Request: If an external request (DREQ pin) is selected as an activation
source, the DREQ pin becomes an input pin and the corresponding TEND pin becomes an output
pin, regardless of the port data direction register (DDR) settings. The DREQ input can be level-
sensitive or edge-sensitive.
In short address mode and normal mode, an external request operates as follows. If edge sensing is
selected, one byte or word is transferred each time a high-to-low transition of the DREQ input is
detected. If the next edge is input before the transfer is completed, the next transfer may not be
executed. If level sensing is selected, the transfer continues while DREQ is low, until the transfer
is completed. The bus is released temporarily after each byte or word has been transferred,
however. If the DREQ input goes high during a transfer, the transfer is suspended after the current
byte or word has been transferred. When DREQ goes low, the request is held internally until one
byte or word has been transferred. The TEND signal goes low during the last write cycle.
In block transfer mode, an external request operates as follows. Only edge-sensitive transfer
requests are possible in block transfer mode. Each time a high-to-low transition of the DREQ
input is detected, a block of the specified size is transferred. The TEND signal goes low during the
last write cycle in each block.
Activation by Auto-Request: The transfer starts as soon as enabled by register setup, and
continues until completed. Cycle-steal mode or burst mode can be selected.
In cycle-steal mode the DMAC releases the bus temporarily after transferring each byte or word.
Normally, DMAC cycles alternate with CPU cycles.
In burst mode the DMAC keeps the bus until the transfer is completed, unless there is a higher-
priority bus request. If there is a higher-priority bus request, the bus is released after the current
byte or word has been transferred.
224
8.4.8 DMAC Bus Cycle
Figure 8-13 shows an example of the timing of the basic DMAC bus cycle. This example shows a
word-size transfer from a 16-bit two-state access area to an 8-bit three-state access area. When the
DMAC gets the bus from the CPU, after one dead cycle (Td), it reads from the source address and
writes to the destination address. During these read and write operations the bus is not released
even if there is another bus request. DMAC cycles comply with bus controller settings in the same
way as CPU cycles.
Figure 8-13 DMA Transfer Bus Timing (Example)
ø
RD
HWR
LWR
T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
dT
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
3 T
1 T
2 T
3 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2
CPU cycle DMAC cycle (word transfer) CPU cycle
Source
address Destination address
Address
bus
225
Figure 8-14 shows the timing when the DMAC is activated by low input at a DREQ pin. This
example shows a word-size transfer from a 16-bit two-state access area to another 16-bit two-state
access area. The DMAC continues the transfer while the DREQ pin is held low.
Figure 8-14 Bus Timing of DMA Transfer Requested by Low DREQ Input
ø
DREQ
RD
HWR
TEND
T
1 T
2 T
3 T
dT
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
d T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2
LWR,
CPU cycle DMAC cycle CPU cycle DMAC cycle
(last transfer cycle) CPU cycle
Source
address Destination
address Source
address Destination
address
Address
bus
226
Figure 8-15 shows an auto-requested burst-mode transfer. This example shows a transfer of three
words from a 16-bit two-state access area to another 16-bit two-state access area.
Figure 8-15 Burst DMA Bus Timing
When the DMAC is activated from a DREQ pin there is a minimum interval of four states from
when the transfer is requested until the DMAC starts operating. The DREQ pin is not sampled
during the time between the transfer request and the start of the transfer. In short address mode
and normal mode, the pin is next sampled at the end of the read cycle. In block transfer mode, the
pin is next sampled at the end of one block transfer.
T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2
ø
RD
,
CPU cycle DMAC cycle
Source
address Destination
address
CPU cyc
T
d
Address
bus
HWR
LWR
227
Figure 8-16 shows the timing when the DMAC is activated by the falling edge of DREQ in normal
mode.
Figure 8-16 Timing of DMAC Activation by Falling Edge of DREQ in Normal Mode
ø
DREQ
RD
HWR
T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
d T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
d T
1 T
2
LWR,
CPU cycle DMAC cycle CPU
cycle DMAC cycle
Minimum 4 states Next sampling point
Address
bus
228
Figure 8-17 shows the timing when the DMAC is activated by level-sensitive low DREQ input in
normal mode.
Figure 8-17 Timing of DMAC Activation by Low DREQ Level in Normal Mode
DREQ
RD
HWR
ø
LWR,
T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
d T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1
CPU cycle DMAC cycle CPU cycle
Minimum 4 states Next sampling point
Address
bus
229
Figure 8-18 shows the timing when the DMAC is activated by the falling edge of DREQ in block
transfer mode.
Figure 8-18 Timing of DMAC Activation by Falling Edge of DREQ in Block Transfer Mode
ø
DREQ
RD
HWR
TEND
T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
d T
1 T
2
DMAC cycle DMAC cycleCPU cycle
Next sampling
Minimum 4 states
End of 1 block transfer
LWR
,
Address
bus
230
8.4.9 DMAC Multiple-Channel Operation
The DMAC channel priority order is: channel 0 > channel 1 and channel A > channel B.
Table 8-12 shows the complete priority order.
Table 8-12 Channel Priority Order
Short Address Mode Full Address Mode Priority
Channel 0A Channel 0 High
Channel 0B
Channel 1A Channel 1
Channel 1B Low
If transfers are requested on two or more channels simultaneously, or if a transfer on one channel
is requested during a transfer on another channel, the DMAC operates as follows.
1. When a transfer is requested, the DMAC requests the bus right. When it gets the bus right, it
starts a transfer on the highest-priority channel at that time.
2. Once a transfer starts on one channel, requests to other channels are held pending until that
channel releases the bus.
3. After each transfer in short address mode, and each externally-requested or cycle-steal
transfer in normal mode, the DMAC releases the bus and returns to step 1. After releasing the
bus, if there is a transfer request for another channel, the DMAC requests the bus again.
4. After completion of a burst-mode transfer, or after transfer of one block in block transfer
mode, the DMAC releases the bus and returns to step 1. If there is a transfer request for a
higher-priority channel or a bus request from a higher-priority bus master, however, the
DMAC releases the bus after completing the transfer of the current byte or word. After
releasing the bus, if there is a transfer request for another channel, the DMAC requests the bus
again.
Figure 8-19 shows the timing when channel 0A is set up for I/O mode and channel 1 for burst
mode, and a transfer request for channel 0A is received while channel 1 is active.
231
Figure 8-19 Timing of Multiple-Channel Operations
8.4.10 External Bus Requests, Refresh Controller, and DMAC
During a DMA transfer, if the bus right is requested by an external bus request signal (BREQ) or
by the refresh controller, the DMAC releases the bus after completing the transfer of the current
byte or word. If there is a transfer request at this point, the DMAC requests the bus right again.
Figure 8-20 shows an example of the timing of insertion of a refresh cycle during a burst transfer
on channel 0.
Figure 8-20 Bus Timing of Refresh Controller and DMAC
ø
RD
T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
d T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
d T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2
,
DMAC cycle
(channel 1) CPU
cycle DMAC cycle
(channel 0A) CPU
cycle DMAC cycle
(channel 1)
Address
bus
HWR
LWR
ø
RD
HWR LWR,
T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
d T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2 T
1 T
2
DMAC cycle (channel 0) DMAC cycle (channel 0)
Refresh
cycle
Address
bus
232
8.4.11 NMI Interrupts and DMAC
NMI interrupts do not affect DMAC operations in short address mode.
If an NMI interrupt occurs during a transfer in full address mode, the DMAC suspends operations.
In full address mode, a channel is enabled when its DTE and DTME bits are both set to 1. NMI
input clears the DTME bit to 0. After transferring the current byte or word, the DMAC releases
the bus to the CPU. In normal mode, the suspended transfer resumes when the CPU sets the
DTME bit to 1 again. Check that the DTE bit is set to 1 and the DTME bit is cleared to 0 before
setting the DTME bit to 1.
Figure 8-21 shows the procedure for resuming a DMA transfer in normal mode on channel 0 after
the transfer was halted by NMI input.
Figure 8-21 Procedure for Resuming a DMA Transfer Halted by NMI (Example)
For information about NMI interrupts in block transfer mode, see section 8.6.6, NMI Interrupts
and Block Transfer Mode.
Resuming DMA transfer
in normal mode
DTE = 1
DTME = 0
Set DTME to 1
DMA transfer continues End
1.
2. Check that DTE = 1 and DTME = 0.
Read DTCRB while DTME = 0,
then write 1 in the DTME bit.
2
No
Yes
1
233
8.4.12 Aborting a DMA Transfer
When the DTE bit in an active channel is cleared to 0, the DMAC halts after transferring the
current byte or word. The DMAC starts again when the DTE bit is set to 1. In full address mode,
the DTME bit can be used for the same purpose. Figure 8-22 shows the procedure for aborting a
DMA transfer by software.
Figure 8-22 Procedure for Aborting a DMA Transfer
DMA transfer abort
Set DTCR
DMA transfer aborted
1
1. Clear the DTE bit to 0 in DTCR.
To avoid generating an interrupt when
aborting a DMA transfer, clear the DTIE
bit to 0 simultaneously.
234
8.4.13 Exiting Full Address Mode
Figure 8-23 shows the procedure for exiting full address mode and initializing the pair of
channels. To set the channels up in another mode after exiting full address mode, follow the setup
procedure for the relevant mode.
Figure 8-23 Procedure for Exiting Full Address Mode (Example)
Exiting full address mode
Halt the channel
Initialize DTCRB
Initialize DTCRA
Initialized and halted
1
2
3
1.
2.
3.
Clear the DTE bit to 0 in DTCRA, or wait
for the transfer to end and the DTE bit
to be cleared to 0.
Clear all DTCRB bits to 0.
Clear all DTCRA bits to 0.
235
8.4.14 DMAC States in Reset State, Standby Modes, and Sleep Mode
When the chip is reset or enters hardware or software standby mode, the DMAC is initialized and
halts. DMAC operations continue in sleep mode. Figure 8-24 shows the timing of a cycle-steal
transfer in sleep mode.
Figure 8-24 Timing of Cycle-Steal Transfer in Sleep Mode
ø
Address bus
RD
HWR LWR,
2 T
d
T T
2 1 T
2
T d T
1
T 2 T
1
T 2
T
1
T
CPU cycle DMAC cycle DMAC cycle
Sleep mode
d
T
236
8.5 Interrupts
The DMAC generates only DMA-end interrupts. Table 8-13 lists the interrupts and their priority.
Table 8-13 DMAC Interrupts
Description
Interrupt Short Address Mode Full Address Mode Interrupt Priority
DEND0A End of transfer on channel 0A End of transfer on channel 0 High
DEND0B End of transfer on channel 0B —
DEND1A End of transfer on channel 1A End of transfer on channel 1
DEND1B End of transfer on channel 1B — Low
Each interrupt is enabled or disabled by the DTIE bit in the corresponding data transfer control
register (DTCR). Separate interrupt signals are sent to the interrupt controller.
The interrupt priority order among channels is channel 0 > channel 1 and channel A > channel B.
Figure 8-25 shows the DMA-end interrupt logic. An interrupt is requested whenever DTE = 0 and
DTIE = 1.
Figure 8-25 DMA-End Interrupt Logic
The DMA-end interrupt for the B channels (DENDB) is unavailable in full address mode. The
DTME bit does not affect interrupt operations.
DTE
DTIE
DMA-end interrupt
237
8.6 Usage Notes
8.6.1 Note on Word Data Transfer
Word data cannot be accessed starting at an odd address. When word-size transfer is selected, set
even values in the memory and I/O address registers (MAR and IOAR).
8.6.2 DMAC Self-Access
The DMAC itself cannot be accessed during a DMAC cycle. DMAC registers cannot be specified
as source or destination addresses.
8.6.3 Longword Access to Memory Address Registers
A memory address register can be accessed as longword data at the MARR address.
Example
MOV.L #LBL, ER0
MOV.L ER0, @MARR
Four byte accesses are performed. Note that the CPU may release the bus between the second byte
(MARE) and third byte (MARH).
Memory address registers should be written and read only when the DMAC is halted.
8.6.4 Note on Full Address Mode Setup
Full address mode is controlled by two registers: DTCRA and DTCRB. Care must be taken to
prevent the B channel from operating in short address mode during the register setup. The enable
bits (DTE and DTME) should not be set to 1 until the end of the setup procedure.
238
8.6.5 Note on Activating DMAC by Internal Interrupts
When using an internal interrupt to activate the DMAC, make sure that the interrupt selected as
the activating source does not occur during the interval after it has been selected but before the
DMAC has been enabled. The on-chip supporting module that will generate the interrupt should
not be activated until the DMAC has been enabled. If the DMAC must be enabled while the on-
chip supporting module is active, follow the procedure in figure 8-26.
Figure 8-26 Procedure for Enabling DMAC while On-Chip Supporting
Module is Operating (Example)
If the DTE bit is set to 1 but the DTME bit is cleared to 0, the DMAC is halted and the selected
activating source cannot generate a CPU interrupt. If the DMAC is halted by an NMI interrupt, for
example, the selected activating source cannot generate CPU interrupts. To terminate DMAC
operations in this state, clear the DTE bit to 0 to allow CPU interrupts to be requested. To continue
DMAC operations, carry out steps 2 and 4 in figure 8-26 before and after setting the DTME bit
to 1.
Enabling of DMAC
Selected interrupt
requested?
Interrupt hand-
ling by CPU
Clear selected interrupt’s
enable bit to 0
Enable DMAC
Set selected interrupt’s
enable bit to 1
1
2
3
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
While the DTE bit is cleared to 0,
interrupt requests are sent to the
CPU.
Clear the interrupt enable bit to 0
in the interrupt-generating on-chip
supporting module.
Enable the DMAC.
Enable the DMAC-activating
interrupt.
DMAC operates
Yes
No
239
When an ITU interrupt activates the DMAC, make sure the next interrupt does not occur before
the DMA transfer ends. If one ITU interrupt activates two or more channels, make sure the next
interrupt does not occur before the DMA transfers end on all the activated channels. If the next
interrupt occurs before a transfer ends, the channel or channels for which that interrupt was
selected may fail to accept further activation requests.
8.6.6 NMI Interrupts and Block Transfer Mode
If an NMI interrupt occurs in block transfer mode, the DMAC operates as follows.
• When the NMI interrupt occurs, the DMAC finishes transferring the current byte or word,
then clears the DTME bit to 0 and halts. The halt may occur in the middle of a block.
It is possible to find whether a transfer was halted in the middle of a block by checking the
block size counter. If the block size counter does not have its initial value, the transfer was
halted in the middle of a block.
• If the transfer is halted in the middle of a block, the activating interrupt flag is cleared to 0.
The activation request is not held pending.
• While the DTE bit is set to 1 and the DTME bit is cleared to 0, the DMAC is halted and does
not accept activating interrupt requests. If an activating interrupt occurs in this state, the
DMAC does not operate and does not hold the transfer request pending internally. Neither is a
CPU interrupt requested.
For this reason, before setting the DTME bit to 1, first clear the enable bit of the activating
interrupt to 0. Then, after setting the DTME bit to 1, set the interrupt enable bit to 1 again.
See section 8.6.5, Note on Activating DMAC by Internal Interrupts.
• When the DTME bit is set to 1, the DMAC waits for the next transfer request. If it was halted
in the middle of a block transfer, the rest of the block is transferred when the next transfer
request occurs. Otherwise, the next block is transferred when the next transfer request occurs.
8.6.7 Memory and I/O Address Register Values
Table 8-14 indicates the address ranges that can be specified in the memory and I/O address
registers (MAR and IOAR).
240
Table 8-14 Address Ranges Specifiable in MAR and IOAR
1-Mbyte Mode 16-Mbyte Mode
MAR H'00000 to H'FFFFF H'000000 to H'FFFFFF
(0 to 1048575) (0 to 16777215)
IOAR H'FFF00 to H'FFFFF H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF
(1048320 to 1048575) (16776960 to 16777215)
MAR bits 23 to 20 are ignored in 1-Mbyte mode.
8.6.8 Bus Cycle when Transfer is Aborted
When a transfer is aborted by clearing the DTE bit or suspended by an NMI that clears the DTME
bit, if this halts a channel for which the DMAC has a transfer request pending internally, a dead
cycle may occur. This dead cycle does not update the halted channel’s address register or counter
value. Figure 8-27 shows an example in which an auto-requested transfer in cycle-steal mode on
channel 0 is aborted by clearing the DTE bit in channel 0.
Figure 8-27 Bus Timing at Abort of DMA Transfer in Cycle-Steal Mode
ø
Address bus
RD
HWR,LWR
CPU cycle DMAC cycle CPU cycle DMAC
cycle CPU cycle
DTE bit is
cleared
T1T2TdT1T2T1T2T1T2T3TdTdT1T2
241
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1 Overview
The H8/3048 Series has 10 input/output ports (ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, A, and B) and one input
port (port 7). Table 9-1 summarizes the port functions. The pins in each port are multiplexed as
shown in table 9-1.
Each port has a data direction register (DDR) for selecting input or output, and a data register
(DR) for storing output data. In addition to these registers, ports 2, 4, and 5 have an input pull-up
MOS control register (PCR) for switching input pull-up MOS transistors on and off.
Ports 1 to 6 and port 8 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. Ports 9, A, and B can
drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. Ports 1 to 6 and 8 to B can drive a darlington pair.
Ports 1, 2, 5, and B can drive LEDs (with 10-mA current sink). Pins P82to P80, PA7to PA0, and
PB3to PB0have Schmitt-trigger input circuits.
For block diagrams of the ports see appendix C, I/O Port Block Diagrams.
243
Table 9-1 Port Functions
Port Description Pins Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7
Port 1 • 8-bit I/O port P17to P10/ Address output pins (A7to A0) Address output (A7to Generic
• Can drive LEDs A7to A0A0) and generic input input/
DDR = 0: output
generic input
DDR = 1:
address output
Port 2 • 8-bit I/O port P27to P20/ Address output pins (A15 to A8) Address output (A15 to Generic
• Input pull-up A15 to A8A8) and generic input input/
MOS DDR = 0: output
• Can drive LEDs generic input
DDR = 1:
address output
Port 3 • 8-bit I/O port P37to P30/ Data input/output (D15 to D8) Generic
D15 to D8input/
output
Port 4 • 8-bit I/O port P47to P40/ Data input/output (D7to D0) and 8-bit generic input/output Generic
• Input pull-up D7to D08-bit bus mode: generic input/output input/
MOS 16-bit bus mode: data input/output output
Port 5 • 4-bit I/O port P53to P50/ Address output (A19 to A16) Address output (A19 to Generic
• Input pull-up A19 to A16 A16) and 4-bit generic input/
MOS input DDR = 0: output
• Can drive LEDs generic input
DDR = 1:
address output
Port 6 • 7-bit I/O port P66/LWR, Bus control signal output (LWR, HWR, RD, AS) Generic
P65/HWR, input/
P64/RD,output
P63/AS
P62/BACK, Bus control signal input/output (BACK, BREQ, WAIT) and
P61/BREQ, 3-bit generic input/output
P60/WAIT
Port 7 • 8-bit I/O port P77/AN7/DA1, Analog input (AN7, AN6) to A/D converter, analog output (DA1, DA0)
P76/AN6/DA0from D/A converter, and generic input
P75to P70/ Analog input (AN5to AN0) to A/D converter, and generic input
AN5to AN0
Port 8 • 5-bit I/O port P84/CS0DDR = 0: generic input Generic
•P8
2to P80have DDR = 1 (reset value): CS0output input/
Schmitt inputs output
P83/CS1/IRQ3, IRQ3to IRQ1input, CS1to CS3output, and generic input
P82/CS2/IRQ2, DDR = 0 (reset value): generic input
P81/CS3/IRQ1DDR = 1: CS1to CS3output
P80/RFSH/IRQ0IRQ0input, RFSH output, and generic input/output
IRQ3to
IRQ0
input and
generic
input/
output
244
245
Table 9-1 Port Functions (cont)
Port Description Pins Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7
Port 9 • 6-bit I/O port P95/SCK1/IRQ5, Input and output (SCK1, SCK0, RxD1, RxD0, TxD1, TxD0) for serial
P94/SCK0/IRQ4, communication interfaces 1 and 0 (SCI1/0), IRQ5and IRQ4input, and
P93/RxD1, 6-bit generic input/output
P92/RxD0,
P91/TxD1,
P90/TxD0
Port A • 8-bit I/O port PA7/TP7/ Output (TP7) Address output TPC output Address TPC
• Schmitt inputs TIOCB2/A20 from pro- (A20) (TP7), ITU output output
grammable input or (A20) (TP7),
timing pattern output ITU input
controller (TPC), (TIOCB2), or output
input or output and generic
(TIOCB2),
(TIOCB2) for input/output and
16-bit integrated generic
timer unit input/
(ITU), and output
generic input/
output
PA6/TP6/ TPC output TPC output TPC output TPC output TPC
TIOCA2/A21/CS4(TP6to TP4), (TP6to TP4), (TP6to TP4), (TP6to TP4), output
PA5/TP5/ ITU input and ITU input and ITU input ITU input (TP6to
TIOCB1/A22/CS5output (TIOCA2, output (TIOCA2, and output and output TP4), ITU
PA4/TP4/ TIOCB1, TIOCB1, (TIOCA2, (TIOCA2, input and
TIOCA1/A23/CS6TIOCA1), CS4to TIOCA1), TIOCB1, TIOCB1, output
CS6output, and address output TIOCA1), TIOCA1), (TIOCA2,
generic input/ (A23 to A21), CS4to CS6 address TIOCB1,
output CS4to CS6output, and output TIOCA1),
output, generic (A23 to A21), and
and generic input/output CS4to CS6generic
input/output output, and input/
generic output
input/output
PA3/TP3/ TPC output (TP3to TP0), output (TEND1, TEND0) from DMA controller
TIOCB0/TCLKD, (DMAC), ITU input and output (TCLKD, TCLKC, TCLKB, TCLKA,
PA2/TP2/ TIOCB0, TIOCA0), and generic input/output
TIOCA0/TCLKC,
PA1/TP1/
TEND1/TCLKB,
PA0/TP0/
TEND0/TCLKA
Port B PB7/TP15/ TPC output (TP15), DMAC input (DREQ1), trigger input (ADTRG) to A/D
DREQ1/ADTRG, converter, and generic input/output
PB6/TP14/ TPC output (TP14), DMAC input (DREQ0), CS7output,
TPC output
DREQ0,/CS7and generic input/output (TP14),
DMAC
input
(DREQ0),
and generic
input/
output
• 8-bit I/O port
• Can drive LEDs
•PB
3to PB0
have Schmitt
inputs
Table 9-1 Port Functions (cont)
Port Description Pins Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7
Port B PB5/TP13/ TPC output (TP13 to TP8), ITU input and output (TOCXB4, TOCXA4,
TOCXB4, TIOCB4, TIOCA4, TIOCB3, TIOCA3), and generic input/output
PB4/TP12/
TOCXA4,
PB3/TP11/TIOCB4,
PB2/TP10/TIOCA4,
PB1/TP9/TIOCB3,
PB0/TP8/TIOCA3
9.2 Port 1
9.2.1 Overview
Port 1 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-1. The pin
functions differ between the expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled, expanded modes with
on-chip ROM enabled, and single-chip mode. In modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip
ROM disabled), they are address bus output pins (A7to A0).
In modes 5 and 6 (expanded modes with on-chip ROM enabled), settings in the port 1 data
direction register (P1DDR) can designate pins for address bus output (A7to A0) or generic input.
In mode 7 (single-chip mode), port 1 is a generic input/output port.
When DRAM is connected to area 3, A7to A0output row and column addresses in read and write
cycles. For details see section 7, Refresh Controller.
Pins in port 1 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
darlington transistor pair.
Figure 9-1 Port 1 Pin Configuration
Port 1
P1 /A
P1 /A
P1 /A
P1 /A
P1 /A
P1 /A
P1 /A
P1 /A
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P1 (input/output)
P1 (input/output)
P1 (input/output)
P1 (input/output)
P1 (input/output)
P1 (input/output)
P1 (input/output)
P1 (input/output)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
A (output)
A (output)
A (output)
A (output)
A (output)
A (output)
A (output)
A (output)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Port 1 pins Mode 7Modes 1 to 4
P1 (input)/A (output)
P1 (input)/A (output)
P1 (input)/A (output)
P1 (input)/A (output)
P1 (input)/A (output)
P1 (input)/A (output)
P1 (input)/A (output)
P1 (input)/A (output)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Modes 5 and 6
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
• 8-bit I/O port
• Can drive LEDs
•PB
3to PB0
have Schmitt
inputs
246
9.2.2 Register Descriptions
Table 9-2 summarizes the registers of port 1.
Table 9-2 Port 1 Registers
Initial Value
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Modes 1 to 4 Modes 5 to 7
H'FFC0 Port 1 data direction register P1DDR W H'FF H'00
H'FFC2 Port 1 data register P1DR R/W H'00 H'00
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR): P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select
input or output for each pin in port 1.
Modes 1 to 4 (Expanded Modes with On-Chip ROM Disabled): P1DDR values are fixed at 1
and cannot be modified. Port 1 functions as an address bus.
Modes 5 and 6 (Expanded Modes with On-Chip ROM Enabled): A pin in port 1 becomes an
address output pin if the corresponding P1DDR bit is set to 1, and a generic input pin if this bit is
cleared to 0.
Mode 7 (Single-Chip Mode): Port 1 functions as an input/output port. A pin in port 1 becomes an
output pin if the corresponding P1DDR bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0.
Bit
Modes
1 to 4 Initial value
Read/Write
Initial value
Read/Write
Modes
5 to 7
7
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
7
6
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
6
5
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
5
4
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
4
3
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
3
2
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
2
1
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
1
0
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
0
Port 1 data direction 7 to 0
These bits select input or
output for port 1 pins
247
In modes 5 to 7, P1DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when
read.
P1DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its previous setting. If a P1DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output
state in software standby mode.
Port 1 Data Register (P1DR): P1DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores port 1
output data. When this register is read, the pin logic level of a pin is read for bits for which the
P1DDR setting is 0, and the P1DR value is read for bits for which the P1DDR setting is 1.
P1DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its previous setting.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P1
0
R/W
Port 1 data 7 to 0
These bits store data for port 1 pins
7
6
P1
0
R/W
6
5
P1
0
R/W
5
4
P1
0
R/W
4
3
P1
0
R/W
3
2
P1
0
R/W
2
1
P1
0
R/W
1
0
P1
0
R/W
0
248
9.3 Port 2
9.3.1 Overview
Port 2 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-2. The pin
functions differ according to the operating mode.
In modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled), port 2 consists of address bus
output pins (A15 to A8). In modes 5 and 6 (expanded modes with on-chip ROM enabled), settings
in the port 2 data direction register (P2DDR) can designate pins for address bus output (A15 to A8)
or generic input. In mode 7 (single-chip mode), port 2 is a generic input/output port.
When DRAM is connected to area 3, A9and A8output row and column addresses in read and
write cycles. For details see section 7, Refresh Controller.
Port 2 has software-programmable built-in pull-up MOS. Pins in port 2 can drive one TTL load
and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington transistor pair.
Figure 9-2 Port 2 Pin Configuration
Port 2
P2 /A
P2 /A
P2 /A
P2 /A
P2 /A
P2 /A
P2 /A
P2 /A
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P2 (input/output)
P2 (input/output)
P2 (input/output)
P2 (input/output)
P2 (input/output)
P2 (input/output)
P2 (input/output)
P2 (input/output)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
A (output)
A (output)
A (output)
A (output)
A (output)
A (output)
A (output)
A (output)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Port 2 pins Mode 7Modes 1 to 4
P2 (input)/A (output)
P2 (input)/A (output)
P2 (input)/A (output)
P2 (input)/A (output)
P2 (input)/A (output)
P2 (input)/A (output)
P2 (input)/A (output)
P2 (input)/A (output)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Modes 5 and 6
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
249
9.3.2 Register Descriptions
Table 9-3 summarizes the registers of port 2.
Table 9-3 Port 2 Registers
Initial Value
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Modes 1 to 4 Modes 5 to 7
H'FFC1 Port 2 data direction register P2DDR W H'FF H'00
H'FFC3 Port 2 data register P2DR R/W H'00 H'00
H'FFD8 Port 2 input pull-up MOS P2PCR R/W H'00 H'00
control register
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR): P2DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select
input or output for each pin in port 2.
Modes 1 to 4 (Expanded Modes with On-Chip ROM Disabled): P2DDR values are fixed at 1
and cannot be modified. Port 2 functions as an address bus.
Modes 5 and 6 (Expanded Modes with On-Chip ROM Enabled): Following a reset, port 2 is
an input port. A pin in port 2 becomes an address output pin if the corresponding P2DDR bit is set
to 1, and a generic input port if this bit is cleared to 0.
Mode 7 (Single-Chip Mode): Port 2 functions as an input/output port. A pin in port 2 becomes an
output port if the corresponding P2DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0.
Bit
Modes
1 to 4 Initial value
Read/Write
Initial value
Read/Write
Modes
5 to 7
7
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
7
6
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
6
5
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
5
4
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
4
3
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
3
2
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
2
1
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
1
0
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
0
Port 2 data direction 7 to 0
These bits select input or
output for port 2 pins
250
In modes 5 to 7, P2DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when
read.
P2DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its previous setting. If a P2DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output
state in software standby mode.
Port 2 Data Register (P2DR): P2DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data
for pins P27to P20. When a bit in P2DDR is set to 1, if port 2 is read the value of the
corresponding P2DR bit is returned. When a bit in P2DDR is cleared to 0, if port 2 is read the
corresponding pin level is read.
P2DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its previous setting.
Port 2 Input Pull-Up MOS Control Register (P2PCR): P2PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable
register that controls the MOS input pull-up transistors in port 2.
In modes 5 to 7, when a P2DDR bit is cleared to 0 (selecting generic input), if the corresponding
bit from P27PCR to P20PCR is set to 1, the input pull-up MOS is turned on.
P2PCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its previous setting.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P2
0
R/W
Port 2 data 7 to 0
These bits store data for port 2 pins
7
6
P2
0
R/W
6
5
P2
0
R/W
5
4
P2
0
R/W
4
3
P2
0
R/W
3
2
P2
0
R/W
2
1
P2
0
R/W
1
0
P2
0
R/W
0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P2 PCR
0
R/W
Port 2 input pull-up MOS control 7 to 0
These bits control input pull-up
transistors built into port 2
7
6
P2 PCR
0
R/W
6
5
P2 PCR
0
R/W
5
4
P2 PCR
0
R/W
4
3
P2 PCR
0
R/W
3
2
P2 PCR
0
R/W
2
1
P2 PCR
0
R/W
1
0
P2 PCR
0
R/W
0
251
Table 9-4 summarizes the states of the input pull-up transistors.
Table 9-4 Input Pull-Up MOS States (Port 2)
Mode Reset Hardware Standby Mode Software Standby Mode Other Modes
1 Off Off Off Off
2
3
4
5 Off Off On/off On/off
6
7
Legend
Off: The input pull-up MOS is always off.
On/off: The input pull-up MOS is on if P2PCR = 1 and P2DDR = 0. Otherwise, it is off.
252
9.4 Port 3
9.4.1 Overview
Port 3 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-3. Port 3 is a data
bus in modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes) and a generic input/output port in mode 7 (single-chip
mode).
Pins in port 3 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
darlington transistor pair.
Figure 9-3 Port 3 Pin Configuration
9.4.2 Register Descriptions
Table 9-5 summarizes the registers of port 3.
Table 9-5 Port 3 Registers
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FFC4 Port 3 data direction register P3DDR W H'00
H'FFC6 Port 3 data register P3DR R/W H'00
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port 3
P3 /D
P3 /D
P3 /D
P3 /D
P3 /D
P3 /D
P3 /D
P3 /D
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P3 (input/output)
P3 (input/output)
P3 (input/output)
P3 (input/output)
P3 (input/output)
P3 (input/output)
P3 (input/output)
P3 (input/output)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D (input/output)
D (input/output)
D (input/output)
D (input/output)
D (input/output)
D (input/output)
D (input/output)
D (input/output)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Port 3 pins Mode 7Modes 1 to 6
253
Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR): P3DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select
input or output for each pin in port 3.
Modes 1 to 6 (Expanded Modes): Port 3 functions as a data bus. P3DDR is ignored.
Mode 7 (Single-Chip Mode): Port 3 functions as an input/output port. A pin in port 3 becomes an
output port if the corresponding P3DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0.
P3DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read.
P3DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its previous setting. If a P3DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output
state in software standby mode.
Port 3 Data Register (P3DR): P3DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data
for pins P37to P30. When a bit in P3DDR is set to 1, if port 3 is read the value of the
corresponding P3DR bit is returned. When a bit in P3DDR is cleared to 0, if port 3 is read the
corresponding pin level is read.
P3DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its previous setting.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P3 DDR
0
W
Port 3 data direction 7 to 0
These bits select input or output for port 3 pins
7
6
P3 DDR
0
W
6
5
P3 DDR
0
W
5
4
P3 DDR
0
W
4
3
P3 DDR
0
W
3
2
P3 DDR
0
W
2
1
P3 DDR
0
W
1
0
P3 DDR
0
W
0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P3
0
R/W
Port 3 data 7 to 0
These bits store data for port 3 pins
7
6
P3
0
R/W
6
5
P3
0
R/W
5
4
P3
0
R/W
4
3
P3
0
R/W
3
2
P3
0
R/W
2
1
P3
0
R/W
1
0
P3
0
R/W
0
254
9.5 Port 4
9.5.1 Overview
Port 4 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-4. The pin
functions differ according to the operating mode.
In modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes), when the bus width control register (ABWCR) designates
areas 0 to 7 all as 8-bit-access areas, the chip operates in 8-bit bus mode and port 4 is a generic
input/output port. When at least one of areas 0 to 7 is designated as a 16-bit-access area, the chip
operates in 16-bit bus mode and port 4 becomes part of the data bus. In mode 7 (single-chip
mode), port 4 is a generic input/output port.
Port 4 has software-programmable built-in pull-up MOS.
Pins in port 4 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
darlington transistor pair.
Figure 9-4 Port 4 Pin Configuration
Port 4
P4 /D
P4 /D
P4 /D
P4 /D
P4 /D
P4 /D
P4 /D
P4 /D
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P4 (input/output)/D7 (input/output)
P4 (input/output)/D6 (input/output)
P4 (input/output)/D5 (input/output)
P4 (input/output)/D4 (input/output)
P4 (input/output)/D3 (input/output)
P4 (input/output)/D2 (input/output)
P4 (input/output)/D1 (input/output)
P4 (input/output)/D0 (input/output)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Port 4 pins Modes 1 to 6
P4 (input/output)
P4 (input/output)
P4 (input/output)
P4 (input/output)
P4 (input/output)
P4 (input/output)
P4 (input/output)
P4 (input/output)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mode 7
255
9.5.2 Register Descriptions
Table 9-6 summarizes the registers of port 4.
Table 9-6 Port 4 Registers
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FFC5 Port 4 data direction register P4DDR W H'00
H'FFC7 Port 4 data register P4DR R/W H'00
H'FFDA Port 4 input pull-up MOS P4PCR R/W H'00
control register
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port 4 Data Direction Register (P4DDR): P4DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select
input or output for each pin in port 4.
Modes 1 to 6 (Expanded Modes): When all areas are designated as 8-bit-access areas, selecting
8-bit bus mode, port 4 functions as a generic input/output port. A pin in port 4 becomes an output
port if the corresponding P4DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0.
When at least one area is designated as a 16-bit-access area, selecting 16-bit bus mode, port 4
functions as part of the data bus.
Mode 7 (Single-Chip Mode): Port 4 functions as an input/output port. A pin in port 4 becomes an
output port if the corresponding P4DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0.
P4DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read.
P4DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its previous setting.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P4 DDR
0
W
Port 4 data direction 7 to 0
These bits select input or output for port 4 pins
7
6
P4 DDR
0
W
6
5
P4 DDR
0
W
5
4
P4 DDR
0
W
4
3
P4 DDR
0
W
3
2
P4 DDR
0
W
2
1
P4 DDR
0
W
1
0
P4 DDR
0
W
0
256
ABWCR and P4DDR are not initialized in software standby mode. When port 4 functions as a
generic input/output port, if a P4DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output
state in software standby mode.
Port 4 Data Register (P4DR): P4DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data
for pins P47to P40. When a bit in P4DDR is set to 1, if port 4 is read the value of the
corresponding P4DR bit is returned. When a bit in P4DDR is cleared to 0, if port 4 is read the
corresponding pin level is read.
P4DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its previous setting.
Port 4 Input Pull-Up MOS Control Register (P4PCR): P4PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable
register that controls the MOS input pull-up transistors in port 4.
In mode 7 (single-chip mode), and in 8-bit bus mode in modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes), when a
P4DDR bit is cleared to 0 (selecting generic input), if the corresponding P4PCR bit is set to 1, the
input pull-up MOS transistor is turned on.
P4PCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its previous setting.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P4
0
R/W
Port 4 data 7 to 0
These bits store data for port 4 pins
7
6
P4
0
R/W
6
5
P4
0
R/W
5
4
P4
0
R/W
4
3
P4
0
R/W
3
2
P4
0
R/W
2
1
P4
0
R/W
1
0
P4
0
R/W
0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P4 PCR
0
R/W
Port 4 input pull-up MOS control 7 to 0
These bits control input pull-up MOS transistors built into port 4
7
6
P4 PCR
0
R/W
6
5
P4 PCR
0
R/W
5
4
P4 PCR
0
R/W
4
3
P4 PCR
0
R/W
3
2
P4 PCR
0
R/W
2
1
P4 PCR
0
R/W
1
0
P4 PCR
0
R/W
0
257
Table 9-7 summarizes the states of the input pull-ups MOS in the 8-bit and 16-bit bus modes.
Table 9-7 Input Pull-Up MOS Transistor States (Port 4)
Hardware Software
Mode Reset Standby Mode Standby Mode Other Modes
1 to 6 8-bit bus mode Off Off On/off On/off
16-bit bus mode Off Off
7 On/off On/off
Legend
Off: The input pull-up MOS transistor is always off.
On/off: The input pull-up MOS transistor is on if P4PCR = 1 and P4DDR = 0. Otherwise, it is off.
258
9.6 Port 5
9.6.1 Overview
Port 5 is a 4-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-5. The pin functions
differ depending on the operating mode.
In modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled), port 5 consists of address output
pins (A19 to A16). In modes 5 and 6 (expanded modes with on-chip ROM enabled), settings in the
port 5 data direction register (P5DDR) designate pins for address bus output (A19 to A16) or
generic input. In mode 7 (single-chip mode), port 5 is a generic input/output port.
Port 5 has software-programmable built-in pull-up MOS transistors.
Pins in port 5 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive an LED or
a darlington transistor pair.
Figure 9-5 Port 5 Pin Configuration
9.6.2 Register Descriptions
Table 9-8 summarizes the registers of port 5.
Table 9-8 Port 5 Registers
Initial Value
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Modes 1 to 4 Modes 5 to 7
H'FFC8 Port 5 data direction register P5DDR W H'FF H'F0
H'FFCA Port 5 data register P5DR R/W H'F0 H'F0
H'FFDB Port 5 input pull-up MOS P5PCR R/W H'F0 H'F0
control register
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port 5
P5 /A
P5 /A
P5 /A
P5 /A
3
2
1
0
19
18
17
16
A (output)
A (output)
A (output)
A (output)
19
18
17
16
P5 (input)/A (output)
P5 (input)/A (output)
P5 (input)/A (output)
P5 (input)/A (output)
3
2
1
0
Port 5
pins Modes 1 to 4 Modes 5 and 6
P5 (input/output)
P5 (input/output)
P5 (input/output)
P5 (input/output)
3
2
1
0
Mode 7
19
18
17
16
259
Port 5 Data Direction Register (P5DDR): P5DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select
input or output for each pin in port 5.
Modes 1 to 4 (Expanded Modes with On-Chip ROM Disabled): P5DDR values are fixed at 1
and cannot be modified. Port 5 functions as an address bus. The reserved bits (bits 7 to 4) are also
fixed at 1.
Modes 5 and 6 (Expanded Modes with On-Chip ROM Enabled): Following a reset, port 5 is an
input port. A pin in port 5 becomes an address output pin if the corresponding P5DDR bit is set to
1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0.
Mode 7 (Single-Chip Mode): Port 5 functions as an input/output port. A pin in port 5 becomes an
output port if the corresponding P5DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0.
P5DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read.
P5DDR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its previous setting, so if a P5DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its
output state in software standby mode.
Port 5 Data Register (P5DR):
P5DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for
pins P53to P50. When a bit in P5DDR is set to 1, if port 5 is read the value of the corresponding P5DR
bit is returned. When a bit in P5DDR is cleared to 0, if port 5 is read the corresponding pin lev el is read.
Bit
Modes
1 to 4 Initial value
Read/Write
Initial value
Read/Write
Modes
5 to 7
7
—
1
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
1
—
3
P5 DDR
1
—
0
W
3
2
P5 DDR
1
—
0
W
2
1
P5 DDR
1
—
0
W
1
0
P5 DDR
1
—
0
W
0
Reserved bits Port 5 data direction 3 to 0
These bits select input or
output for port 5 pins
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
P5
0
R/W
3
2
P5
0
R/W
2
1
P5
0
R/W
1
0
P5
0
R/W
0
Reserved bits These bits store data
for port 5 pins
Port 5 data 3 to 0
260
Bits 7 to 4 are reserved. They cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
P5DR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its previous setting.
Port 5 Input Pull-Up MOS Control Register (P5PCR): P5PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable
register that controls the MOS input pull-up MOS transistors in port 5.
In modes 5 to 7, when a P5DDR bit is cleared to 0 (selecting generic input), if the corresponding
bit from P53PCR to P50PCR is set to 1, the input pull-up MOS transistor is turned on.
P5PCR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its previous setting.
Table 9-9 summarizes the states of the input pull-ups MOS in each mode.
Table 9-9 Input Pull-Up MOS Transistor States (Port 5)
Mode Reset Hardware Standby Mode Software Standby Mode Other Modes
1 Off Off Off Off
2
3
4
5 Off Off On/off On/off
6
7
Legend
Off: The input pull-up MOS transistor is always off.
On/off: The input pull-up MOS transistor is on if P5PCR = 1 and P5DDR = 0. Otherwise, it is off.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
P5 PCR
0
R/W
3
2
P5 PCR
0
R/W
2
1
P5 PCR
0
R/W
1
0
P5 PCR
0
R/W
0
Reserved bits These bits control input pull-up MOS
transistors built into port 5
Port 5 input pull-up MOS control 3 to 0
261
9.7 Port 6
9.7.1 Overview
Port 6 is a 7-bit input/output port that is also used for input and output of bus control signals
(LWR, HWR, RD, AS, BACK, BREQ, and WAIT). When DRAM is connected to area 3, LWR,
HWR, and RD also function as LW, UW, and CAS, or LCAS, UCAS, and WE, respectively. For
details see section 7, Refresh Controller.
Figure 9-6 shows the pin configuration of port 6. In modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes) the pin
functions are LWR, HWR, RD, AS, P62/BACK, P61/BREQ, and P60/WAIT. See table 9-11 for
the method of selecting the pin states. In mode 7 (single-chip mode) port 6 is a generic
input/output port.
Pins in port 6 can drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
darlington transistor pair.
Figure 9-6 Port 6 Pin Configuration
9.7.2 Register Descriptions
Table 9-10 summarizes the registers of port 6.
Table 9-10 Port 6 Registers
Initial Value
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Mode 1 to 5 Mode 6, 7
H'FFC9 Port 6 data direction register P6DDR W H’F8 H'80
H'FFCB Port 6 data register P6DR R/W H’80 H'80
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port 6
P6 /
P6 /
P6 /
P6 /
P6 /
P6 /
P6 /
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LWR
HWR
RD
AS
BACK
BREQ
WAIT
Port 6 pins
P6
P6
P6
2
1
0
LWR
HWR
RD
AS
BACK
BREQ
WAIT
Modes 1 to 6
(expanded modes)
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
(output)
(input)
(input)
P6
P6
P6
P6
P6
P6
P6
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mode 7
(single-chip mode)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)
(input/output)/
(input/output)/
(input/output)/
262
Port 6 Data Direction Register (P6DDR): P6DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select
input or output for each pin in port 6.
Modes 1 to 6 (Expanded Modes): P66to P63function as bus control output pins (LWR, HWR,
RD, AS). P62to P60are generic input/output pins, functioning as output port when bits P62DDR
to P60DDR are set to 1 and input port when these bits are cleared to 0.
Mode 7 (Single-Chip Mode): Port 6 is a generic input/output port. A pin in port 6 becomes an
output port if the corresponding P6DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 7 is reserved.
P6DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read.
P6DDR is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its previous setting. If a P6DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output
state in software standby mode.
Port 6 Data Register (P6DR): P6DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data
for pins P66to P60. When a bit in P6DDR is set to 1, if port 6 is read the value of the
corresponding P6DR bit is returned. When a bit in P6DDR is cleared to 0, if port 6 is read the
corresponding pin level is read.
Bit 7 is reserved, cannot be modified, and always read as 1.
P6DR is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its previous setting.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
P6 DDR
0
W
6
5
P6 DDR
0
W
5
4
P6 DDR
0
W
4
3
P6 DDR
0
W
3
2
P6 DDR
0
W
2
1
P6 DDR
0
W
1
0
P6 DDR
0
W
0
Port 6 data direction 6 to 0
These bits select input or output for port 6 pins
Reserved bit
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
P6
0
R/W
6
5
P6
0
R/W
5
4
P6
0
R/W
4
3
P6
0
R/W
3
2
P6
0
R/W
2
1
P6
0
R/W
1
0
P6
0
R/W
0
Reserved bit Port 6 data 6 to 0
These bits store data for port 6 pins
263
Table 9-11 Port 6 Pin Functions in Modes 1 to 6
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
P66/LWR Functions as follows regardless of P66DDR
P66DDR 0 1
Pin function LWR output
P65/HWR Functions as follows regardless of P65DDR
P65DDR 0 1
Pin function HWR output
P64/RD Functions as follows regardless of P64DDR
P64DDR 0 1
Pin function RD output
P63/AS Functions as follows regardless of P63DDR
P63DDR 0 1
Pin function AS output
P62/BACK Bit BRLE in BRCR and bit P62DDR select the pin function as follows
BRLE 0 1
P62DDR 0 1 —
Pin function P62input P62output BACK output
P61/BREQ Bit BRLE in BRCR and bit P61DDR select the pin function as follows
BRLE 0 1
P61DDR 0 1 —
Pin function P61input P61output BREQ input
P60/WAIT Bits WCE7 to WCE0 in WCER, bit WMS1 in WCR, and bit P60DDR select the
pin function as follows
WCER All 1s Not all 1s
WMS1 0 1 —
P60DDR 0 1 0*0*
Pin function P60input P60output WAIT input
Note: *Do not set bit P60DDR to 1.
264
9.8 Port 7
9.8.1 Overview
Port 7 is an 8-bit input port that is also used for analog input to the A/D converter and analog
output from the D/A converter. The pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 9-7
shows the pin configuration of port 7.
Figure 9-7 Port 7 Pin Configuration
Port 7
P7 (input)/AN (input)/DA (output)
P7 (input)/AN (input)/DA (output)
P7 (input)/AN (input)
P7 (input)/AN (input)
P7 (input)/AN (input)
P7 (input)/AN (input)
P7 (input)/AN (input)
P7 (input)/AN (input)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Port 7 pins
1
0
265
9.8.2 Register Description
Table 9-12 summarizes the port 7 register. Port 7 is an input-only port, so it has no data direction
register.
Table 9-12 Port 7 Data Register
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FFCE Port 7 data register P7DR R Undetermined
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port 7 Data Register (P7DR)
When port 7 is read, the pin levels are always read.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
0
P7
—
R
*
Note: *
0
1
P7
—
R
*
1
2
P7
—
R
*
2
3
P7
—
R
*
3
4
P7
—
R
*
4
5
P7
—
R
*
5
6
P7
—
R
*
6
7
P7
—
R
*
7
70
Determined by pins P7 to P7 .
266
9.9 Port 8
9.9.1 Overview
Port 8 is a 5-bit input/output port that is also used for CS3to CS0output, RFSH output, and IRQ3
to IRQ0input. Figure 9-8 shows the pin configuration of port 8.
In modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes), port 8 can provide CS3to CS0output, RFSH output, and IRQ3
to IRQ0input. See table 9-14 for the selection of pin functions in expanded modes.
In mode 7 (single-chip mode), port 8 can provide IRQ3to IRQ0input. See table 9-15 for the
selection of pin functions in single-chip mode.
The IRQ3to IRQ0functions are selected by IER settings, regardless of whether the pin is used for
input or output. For details see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Pins in port 8 can drive one TTL load and a 90-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
darlington transistor pair.
Pins P82to P80have Schmitt-trigger inputs.
Figure 9-8 Port 8 Pin Configuration
Port 8
P8 /
P8 / /
P8 / /
P8 / /
P8 / /
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
Port 8 pins
CS
CS
CS
CS
RFSH
3
2
1
IRQ
IRQ
IRQ
IRQ
0
P8 (input)/ (output)
P8 (input)/ (output)/ (input)
P8 (input)/ (output)/ (input)
P8 (input)/ (output)/ (input)
P8 (input/output)/ (output)/ (input)
4
3
2
1
0
Pin functions in modes 1 to 6
(expanded modes)
0
1
2
3
CS
CS
CS
CS
RFSH
3
2
1
IRQ
IRQ
IRQ
IRQ
0
P8 /(input/output)
P8 /(input/output)/ (input)
P8 /(input/output)/ (input)
P8 /(input/output)/ (input)
P8 /(input/output)/ (input)
4
3
2
1
0
Pin functions in mode 7
(single-chip mode)
IRQ
IRQ
IRQ
IRQ
3
2
1
0
267
9.9.2 Register Descriptions
Table 9-13 summarizes the registers of port 8.
Table 9-13 Port 8 Registers
Initial Value
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Mode 1 to 4 Mode 5 to 7
H'FFCD Port 8 data direction P8DDR W H'F0 H'E0
register
H'FFCF Port 8 data register P8DR R/W H'E0 H'E0
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port 8 Data Direction Register (P8DDR): P8DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select
input or output for each pin in port 8.
Modes 1 to 6 (Expanded Modes): When bits in P8DDR bit are set to 1, P84to P81become CS0
to CS3output pins. When bits in P8DDR are cleared to 0, the corresponding pins become input
ports. In modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled), following a reset only CS0
is output. The other three pins are input ports. In modes 5 and 6 (expanded modes with on-chip
ROM enabled), following a reset all four pins are input ports.
When the refresh controller is enabled, P80is used unconditionally for RFSH output. When the
refresh controller is disabled, P80becomes a generic input/output port according to the P8DDR
setting. For details see table 9-15.
Mode 7 (Single-Chip Mode): Port 8 is a generic input/output port. A pin in port 8 becomes an
output port if the corresponding P8DDR bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0.
P8DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read.
7
—
1
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
1
—
4
P8 DDR
1
W
0
W
4
3
P8 DDR
0
W
0
W
3
2
P8 DDR
0
W
0
W
2
1
P8 DDR
0
W
0
W
1
0
P8 DDR
0
W
0
W
0
Reserved bits Port 8 data direction 4 to 0
These bits select input or
output for port 8 pins
Bit
Modes
1 to 4 Initial value
Read/Write
Initial value
Read/Write
Modes
5 to 7
268
P8DDR is initialized to H'E0 or H'F0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. The reset value
depends on the operating mode. In software standby mode P8DDR retains its previous setting. If a
P8DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode.
Port 8 Data Register (P8DR): P8DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data
for pins P84to P80. When a bit in P8DDR is set to 1, if port 8 is read the value of the
corresponding P8DR bit is returned. When a bit in P8DDR is cleared to 0, if port 8 is read the
corresponding pin level is read.
Bits 7 to 5 are reserved. They cannot be modified and always are read as 1.
P8DR is initialized to H'E0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its previous setting.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
P8
0
R/W
4
3
P8
0
R/W
3
2
P8
0
R/W
2
1
P8
0
R/W
1
0
P8
0
R/W
0
Reserved bits Port 8 data 4 to 0
These bits store data
for port 8 pins
269
Table 9-14 Port 8 Pin Functions in Modes 1 to 6
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
P84/CS0Bit P84DDR selects the pin function as follows
P84DDR 0 1
Pin function P84input CS0output
P83/CS1/IRQ3Bit P83DDR selects the pin function as follows
P83DDR 0 1
Pin function P83input CS1output
IRQ3input
P82/CS2/IRQ2Bit P82DDR selects the pin function as follows
P82DDR 0 1
Pin function P82input CS2output
IRQ2input
P81/CS3/IRQ1Bit P81DDR selects the pin function as follows
P81DDR 0 1
Pin function P81input CS3output
IRQ1input
P80/RFSH/IRQ0Bit RFSHE in RFSHCR and bit P80DDR select the pin function as follows
RFSHE 0 1
P80DDR 0 1 —
Pin function P80input P80output RFSH output
IRQ0input
270
Table 9-15 Port 8 Pin Functions in Mode 7
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
P84Bit P84DDR selects the pin function as follows
P84DDR 0 1
Pin function P84input P84output
P83/IRQ3Bit P83DDR selects the pin function as follows
P83DDR 0 1
Pin function P83input P83output
IRQ3input
P82/IRQ2Bit P82DDR selects the pin function as follows
P82DDR 0 1
Pin function P82input P82output
IRQ2input
P81/IRQ1Bit P81DDR selects the pin function as follows
P81DDR 0 1
Pin function P81input P81output
IRQ1input
P80/IRQ0Bit P80DDR select the pin function as follows
P80DDR 0 1
Pin function P80input P80output
IRQ0input
271
9.10 Port 9
9.10.1 Overview
Port 9 is a 6-bit input/output port that is also used for input and output (TxD0, TxD1, RxD0, RxD1,
SCK0, SCK1) by serial communication interface channels 0 and 1 (SCI0 and SCI1), and for IRQ5
and IRQ4input. See table 9-17 for the selection of pin functions.
The IRQ5and IRQ4functions are selected by IER settings, regardless of whether the pin is used
for input or output. For details see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Port 9 has the same set of pin functions in all operating modes. Figure 9-9 shows the pin
configuration of port 9.
Pins in port 9 can drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a
darlington transistor pair.
Figure 9-9 Port 9 Pin Configuration
9.10.2 Register Descriptions
Table 9-16 summarizes the registers of port 9.
Table 9-16 Port 9 Registers
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FFD0 Port 9 data direction register P9DDR W H'C0
H'FFD2 Port 9 data register P9DR R/W H'C0
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port 9
P9 (input/output)/SCK
P9 (input/output)/SCK
P9 (input/output)/RxD (input)
P9 (input/output)/RxD (input)
P9 (input/output)/TxD (output)
P9 (input/output)/TxD (output)
5
4
3
2
1
0
Port 9 pins
1
0
(input/output)/IRQ (input)
(input/output)/IRQ (input)
5
4
1
0
1
0
272
Port 9 Data Direction Register (P9DDR): P9DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select
input or output for each pin in port 9.
A pin in port 9 becomes an output port if the corresponding P9DDR bit is set to 1, and an input
port if this bit is cleared to 0.
P9DDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read.
P9DDR is initialized to H'C0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its previous setting. If a P9DDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output
state in software standby mode.
Port 9 Data Register (P9DR): P9DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data
for pins P95to P90. When a bit in P9DDR is set to 1, if port 9 is read the value of the
corresponding P9DR bit is returned. When a bit in P9DDR is cleared to 0, if port 9 is read the
corresponding pin level is read.
Bits 7 and 6 are reserved. They cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
P9DR is initialized to H'C0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its previous setting.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
P9 DDR
0
W
5
4
P9 DDR
0
W
4
3
P9 DDR
0
W
3
2
P9 DDR
0
W
2
1
P9 DDR
0
W
1
0
P9 DDR
0
W
0
Reserved bits Port 9 data direction 5 to 0
These bits select input or
output for port 9 pins
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
P9
0
R/W
4
P9
0
R/W
4
3
P9
0
R/W
3
2
P9
0
R/W
2
1
P9
0
R/W
1
0
P9
0
R/W
0
Reserved bits Port 9 data 5 to 0
These bits store data
for port 9 pins
5
273
Table 9-17 Port 9 Pin Functions
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
P95/SCK1/IRQ5Bit C/Ain SMR of SCI1, bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR of SCI1, and bit P95DDR
select the pin function as follows
CKE1 0 1
C/A01—
CKE0 0 1 — —
P95DDR 0 1 — — —
Pin function P95P95SCK1output SCK1output SCK1input
input output
IRQ5input
P94/SCK0/IRQ4Bit C/Ain SMR of SCI0, bits CKE0 and CKE1 in SCR of SCI0, and bit P94DDR
select the pin function as follows
CKE1 0 1
C/A01—
CKE0 0 1 — —
P94DDR 0 1 — — —
Pin function P94P94SCK0output SCK0output SCK0input
input output
IRQ4input
P93/RxD1Bit RE in SCR of SCI1 and bit P93DDR select the pin function as follows
RE 0 1
P93DDR 0 1 —
Pin function P93input P93output RxD1input
P92/RxD0Bit RE in SCR of SCI0, bit SMIF in SCMR, and bit P92DDR select the pin
function as follows
SMIF 0 1
RE 0 1 —
P92DDR 0 1 — —
Pin function P92input P92output RxD0input RxD0input
274
Table 9-17 Port 9 Pin Functions (cont)
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
P91/TxD1Bit TE in SCR of SCI1 and bit P91DDR select the pin function as follows
TE 0 1
P91DDR 0 1 —
Pin function P91input P91output TxD1output
P90/TxD0Bit TE in SCR of SCI0, bit SMIF in SCMR, and bit P90DDR select the pin
function as follows
SMIF 0 1
TE 0 1 —
P90DDR 0 1 — —
Pin function P90input P90output TxD0output TxD0output*
Note: *Functions as the TxD0output pin, but there are two states: one in
which the pin is driven, and another in which the pin is at high-
impedance.
275
9.11 Port A
9.11.1 Overview
Port A is an 8-bit input/output port that is also used for output (TP7to TP0) from the programmable
timing pattern controller (TPC), input and output (TIOCB2, TIOCA2, TIOCB1, TIOCA1, TIOCB0,
TIOCA0, TCLKD, TCLKC, TCLKB, TCLKA) by the 16-bit integrated timer unit (ITU), output
(TEND1, TEND0) from the DMA controller (DMAC), CS4to CS6output, and address output (A23
to A20). A reset or hardware standby lea ves port A as an input port, except that in modes 3, 4, and
6, one pin is always used for A20 output. Usage of pins for TPC, ITU, and DMAC input and output
is described in the sections on those modules. For output of address bits A23 to A21 in modes 3, 4,
and 6, see section 6.2.5, Bus Release Control Register (BRCR). F or output of CS 4to CS6in modes
1 to 6, see section 6.3.2, Chip Select Signals. Pins not assigned to any of these functions are
available for generic input/output. Figure 9-10 shows the pin configuration of port A.
Pins in port A can drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. They can also drive a darlington
transistor pair. Port A has Schmitt-trigger inputs.
276
Figure 9-10 Port A Pin Configuration
Port A
PA /TP /TIOCB /A
PA /TP /TIOCA /A21/CS4 (output)
PA /TP /TIOCB /A22/CS5 (output)
PA /TP /TIOCA /A23/CS6 (output)
PA /TP /TIOCB /TCLKD
PA /TP /TIOCA /TCLKC
PA /TP /TEND /TCLKB
PA /TP /TEND /TCLKA
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Port A pins
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
PA (input/output)/TP (output)/TIOCB (input/output)
PA (input/output)/TP (output)/TIOCA (input/output)/CS4(output)
PA (input/output)/TP (output)/TIOCB (input/output)/CS5(output)
PA (input/output)/TP (output)/TIOCA (input/output)/CS6(output)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Pin functions in modes 1, 2, and 5
PA (input/output)/TP (output)/TIOCB (input/output)/TCLKD (input)
PA (input/output)/TP (output)/TIOCA (input/output)/TCLKC (input)
PA (input/output)/TP (output)/TEND (output)/TCLKB (input)
PA (input/output)/TP (output)/TEND (output)/TCLKA (input)
Pin functions in mode 7
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2
2
1
1
0
0
1
0
A20
PA (input/output)/TP (output)/TIOCA (input/output)/A (output)/CS4(output)
PA (input/output)/TP (output)/TIOCB (input/output)/A (output)/CS5(output)
PA (input/output)/TP (output)/TIOCA (input/output)/A (output)/CS6(output)
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Pin functions in modes 3, 4, and 6
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2
1
1
0
0
PA (input/output)/TP (output)/TEND (output)/TCLKA (input)
PA (input/output)/TP (output)/TIOCB (input/output)/TCLKD (input)
PA (input/output)/TP (output)/TIOCA (input/output)/TCLKC (input)
PA (input/output)/TP (output)/TEND (output)/TCLKB (input)
PA7 (input/output)/TP7 (output)/TIOCB2 (input/output)
PA6 (input/output)/TP6 (output)/TIOCA2 (input/output)
PA5 (input/output)/TP5 (output)/TIOCB1 (input/output)
PA4 (input/output)/TP4 (output)/TIOCA1 (input/output)
PA3 (input/output)/TP3 (output)/TIOCB0 (input/output)/TCLKD (input)
PA2 (input/output)/TP2 (output)/TIOCA0 (input/output)/TCLKC (input)
PA1 (input/output)/TP1 (output)/TEND1 (output)/TCLKB (input)
PA0 (input/output)/TP0 (output)/TEND0 (output)/TCLKA (input)
1
0
20
21
22
23
277
9.11.2 Register Descriptions
Table 9-18 summarizes the registers of port A.
Table 9-18 Port A Registers
Initial Value
Address*Name R/W Modes 1, 2, 5 and 7 Modes 3, 4, and 6
H'FFD1 Port A data direction PADDR W H'00 H'80
register
H'FFD3 Port A data register PADR R/W H'00 H'00
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR): PADDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select
input or output for each pin in port A. When pins are used for TPC output, the corresponding
PADDR bits must also be set.
A pin in port A becomes an output pin if the corresponding PADDR bit is set to 1, and an input
pin if this bit is cleared to 0. In modes 3, 4, and 6, PA7DDR is fixed at 1 and PA7functions as an
address output pin.
PADDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read.
PADDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode in modes 1, 2, 5, and 7.
It is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode in modes 3, 4, and 6. In software
standby mode it retains its previous setting. If a PADDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin
maintains its output state in software standby mode.
Abbre-
viation
7
PA DDR
1
—
0
W
Port A data direction 7 to 0
These bits select input or output for port A pins
7
6
PA DDR
0
W
0
W
6
5
PA DDR
0
W
0
W
5
4
PA DDR
0
W
0
W
4
3
PA DDR
0
W
0
W
3
2
PA DDR
0
W
0
W
2
1
PA DDR
0
W
0
W
1
0
PA DDR
0
W
0
W
0
Bit
Modes
3, 4,
and 6 Initial value
Read/Write
Initial value
Read/Write
Modes
1, 2, 5,
and 7
278
Port A Data Register (PADR): PADR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data
for pins PA7to PA0. When a bit in PADDR is set to 1, if port A is read the value of the
corresponding PADR bit is returned. When a bit in PADDR is cleared to 0, if port A is read the
corresponding pin lev el is read.
PADR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its previous setting.
9.11.3 Pin Functions
Table 9-19 describes the selection of pin functions.
Table 9-19 Port A Pin Functions
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
PA7/TP7/ The mode setting, ITU channel 2 settings (bit PWM2 in TMDR and bits IOB2 to
TIOCB2/A20 IOB0 in TIOR2), bit NDER7 in NDERA, and bit PA7DDR in PADDR select the pin
function as follows
Mode 1, 2, 5, 7 3, 4, 6
ITU channel 2
settings (1) in table below (2) in table below —
PA7DDR — 0 1 1 —
NDER7 — — 0 1 —
Pin function TIOCB2output PA7PA7TP7A20
input output output output
TIOCB2input*
Note: *TIOCB2input when IOB2 = 1 and PWM2 = 0.
ITU channel 2
settings (2) (1) (2)
IOB2 0 1
IOB1 0 0 1 —
IOB0 0 1 — —
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
0
PA
0
R/W
0
1
PA
0
R/W
1
2
PA
0
R/W
2
3
PA
0
R/W
3
4
PA
0
R/W
4
5
PA
0
R/W
5
6
PA
0
R/W
6
7
PA
0
R/W
7
Port A data 7 to 0
These bits store data for port A pins
279
Table 9-19 Port A Pin Functions (cont)
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
PA6/TP6/ The mode setting, bit A21E in BRCR, bit CS4E in CSCR, ITU channel 2 settings (bit
TIOCA2/ PWM2 in TMDR and bits IOA2 to IOA0 in TIOR2), bit NDER6 in NDERA, and bit
A21/CS4PA6DDR in PADDR select the pin function as follows
Mode 1, 2, 5 3, 4, 6 7
CS4E 0 1 0 1 —
A21E——10——
ITU (1) in (2) in table — (1) in (2) in table — — (1) in (2) in table
channel 2 table below table below table below
settings below below below
PA6DDR— 011— — 011—— — 011
NDER6——01———01————01
Pin TIOCA2PA6PA6TP6CS4TIOCA2PA6PA6TP6A21 CS4TIOCA2PA6PA6TP6
function output input
output output output
output input
output output output output
output input
output output
TIOCA2input*TIOCA2input*TIOCA2input*
Note: *TIOCA2input when IOA2 = 1.
ITU channel 2
settings (2) (1) (2) (1)
PWM2 0 1
IOA2 0 1 —
IOA1 0 0 1 — —
IOA0 0 1 — — —
PA5/TP5/ The mode setting, bit A22E in BRCR, bit CS5E in CSCR, ITU channel 1 settings (bit
TIOCB1/ PWM1 in TMDR and bits IOB2 to IOB0 in TIOR1), bit NDER5 in NDERA, and bit
A22/CS5PA5DDR in PADDR select the pin function as follows
Mode 1, 2, 5 3, 4, 6 7
CS5E 0 1 0 1 —
A22E——10——
ITU (1) in (2) in table — (1) in (2) in table — — (1) in (2) in table
channel 1 table below table below table below
settings below below below
PA5DDR— 011— — 011—— — 011
NDER5——01———01————01
Pin TIOCB1PA5PA5TP5CS5TIOCB1PA5PA5TP5A22 CS5TIOCB1PA5PA5TP5
function output input
output output output
output input
output output output output
output input
output output
TIOCB1input*TIOCB1input*TIOCB1input*
Note: *TIOCB1input when IOB2 = 1 and PWM1 = 0.
ITU channel 1
settings (2) (1) (2)
IOB2 0 1
IOB1 0 0 1 —
IOB0 0 1 — —
280
Table 9-19 Port A Pin Functions (cont)
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
PA4/TP4/ The mode setting, bit A23E in BRCR, bit CS6E in CSCR, ITU channel 1 settings (bit
TIOCA1/ PWM1 in TMDR and bits IOA2 to IOA0 in TIOR1), bit NDER4 in NDERA, and bit
A23/CS6PA4DDR in PADDR select the pin function as follows
Mode 1, 2, 5 3, 4, 6 7
CS6E 0 1 0 1 —
A23E——10——
ITU (1) in (2) in table — (1) in (2) in table — — (1) in (2) in table
channel 2 table below table below table below
settings below below below
PA4DDR— 011— — 011—— — 011
NDER4——01———01————01
Pin TIOCA1PA4PA4TP4CS6TIOCA1PA4PA4TP4A23 CS6TIOCA1PA4PA4TP4
function output input
output output output
output input
output output output output
output input
output output
TIOCA1input*TIOCA1input*TIOCA1input*
Note: *TIOCA1 input when IOA2 = 1.
ITU channel 1
settings (2) (1) (2) (1)
PWM1 0 1
IOA2 0 1 —
IOA1 0 0 1 — —
IOA0 0 1 — — —
PA3/TP3/ ITU channel 0 settings (bit PWM0 in TMDR and bits IOB2 to IOB0 in TIOR0), bits
TIOCB0/ TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR4 to TCR0, bit NDER3 in NDERA, and bit PA3DDR in PADDR
TCLKD select the pin function as follows
ITU channel 0
settings (1) in table below (2) in table below
PA3DDR — 0 1 1
NDER3 — — 0 1
Pin function TIOCB0output PA3input PA3output TP3output
TIOCB0input*1
TCLKD input*2
Notes: 1. TIOCB0input when IOB2 = 1 and PWM0 = 0.
2. TCLKD input when TPSC2 = TPSC1 = TPSC0 = 1 in any of TCR4 to TCR0.
ITU channel 0
settings (2) (1) (2)
IOB2 0 1
IOB1 0 0 1 —
IOB0 0 1 — —
281
Table 9-19 Port A Pin Functions (cont)
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
PA2/TP2/ ITU channel 0 settings (bit PWM0 in TMDR and bits IOA2 to IOA0 in TIOR0), bits
TIOCA0/ TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR4 to TCR0, bit NDER2 in NDERA, and bit PA2DDR in PADDR
TCLKC select the pin function as follows
ITU channel 0
settings (1) in table below (2) in table below
PA2DDR — 0 1 1
NDER2 — — 0 1
Pin function TIOCA0output PA2input PA2output TP2output
TIOCA0input*1
TCLKC input*2
Notes: 1. TIOCA0input when IOA2 = 1.
2. TCLKC input when TPSC2 = TPSC1 = 1 and TPSC0 = 0 in any of TCR4 to
TCR0.
ITU channel 0
settings (2) (1) (2) (1)
PWM0 0 1
IOA2 0 1 —
IOA1 0 0 1 — —
IOA0 0 1 — — —
282
Table 9-19 Port A Pin Functions (cont)
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
PA1/TP1/ DMAC channel 1 settings (bits DTS2/1/0A and DTS2/1/0B in DTCR1A and DTCR1B),
TCLKB/ bit NDER1 in NDERA, and bit PA1DDR in PADDR select the pin function as follows
TEND1
DMAC
channel 1
settings (1) in table below (2) in table below
PA1DDR — 0 1 1
NDER1 — — 0 1
Pin function TEND1output
PA1input PA1output TP1output
TCLKB input*
Note: *TCLKB input when MDF = 1 in TMDR, or when TPSC2 = 1, TPSC1 = 0, and
TPSC0 = 1 in any of TCR4 to TCR0.
DMAC
channel 1
settings (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1)
DTS2A, DTS1A
Not both 1 Both 1
DTS0A — 0 0 1 1 1
DTS2B 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1
DTS1B — 0 1 — — — 0 1
PA0/TP0/ DMAC channel 0 settings (bits DTS2/1/0A and DTS2/1/0B in DTCR0A and DTCR0B),
TCLKA/ bit NDER0 in NDERA, and bit PA0DDR in PADDR select the pin function as follows
TEND0
DMAC
channel 0
settings (1) in table below (2) in table below
PA0DDR — 0 1 1
NDER0 — — 0 1
Pin function TEND0output PA0input PA0output TP0output
TCLKA input*
Note: *TCLKA input when MDF = 1 in TMDR, or when TPSC2 = 1 and TPSC1 = 0 in
any of TCR4 to TCR0.
DMAC
channel 0
settings (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1)
DTS2A, DTS1A
Not both 1 Both 1
DTS0A — 0 0 1 1 1
DTS2B 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1
DTS1B — 0 1 — — — 0 1
283
9.12 Port B
9.12.1 Overview
Port B is an 8-bit input/output port that is also used for output (TP15 to TP8) from the
programmable timing pattern controller (TPC), input/output (TIOCB4, TIOCB3, TIOCA4,
TIOCA3) and output (TOCXB4, TOCXA4) by the 16-bit integrated timer unit (ITU), input
(DREQ1, DREQ0) to the DMA controller (DMAC), ADTRG input to the A/D converter, and CS7
output. A reset or hardware standby leaves port B as an input port. Usage of pins for TPC, ITU,
DMAC, and A/D converter input and output is described in the sections on those modules. For
output of CS7in modes 1 to 6, see section 6.3.2, Chip Select Signals. Pins not assigned to any of
these functions are available for generic input/output. Figure 9-11 shows the pin configuration of
port B.
Pins in port B can drive one TTL load and a 30-pF capacitive load. They can also drive an LED or
darlington transistor pair. Pins PB3to PB0have Schmitt-trigger inputs.
284
Figure 9-11 Port B Pin Configuration
Port B
PB7/TP15/DREQ1/ADTRG
PB6/TP14/DREQ0/CS7
PB5/TP13/TOCXB4
PB4/TP12/TOCXA4
PB3/TP11/TIOCB4
PB2/TP10/TIOCA4
PB1/TP9/TIOCB3
PB0/TP8/TIOCA3
Port B pins
PB7 (input/output)/TP15 (output)/DREQ1 (input)/ADTRG (input)
PB6 (input/output)/TP14 (output)/DREQ0 (input)/CS7 (output)
PB5 (input/output)/TP13 (output)/TOCXB4 (output)
PB4 (input/output)/TP12 (output)/TOCXA4 (output)
PB3 (input/output)/TP11 (output)/TIOCB4 (input/output)
PB2 (input/output)/TP10 (output)/TIOCA4 (input/output)
PB1 (input/output)/TP9 (output)/TIOCB3 (input/output)
PB0 (input/output)/TP8 (output)/TIOCA3 (input/output)
Pin functions in modes 1 to 6
PB7 (input/output)/TP15 (output)/DREQ1 (input)/ADTRG (input)
PB6 (input/output)/TP14 (output)/DREQ0 (input)
PB5 (input/output)/TP13 (output)/TOCXB4 (output)
PB4 (input/output)/TP12 (output)/TOCXA4 (output)
PB3 (input/output)/TP11 (output)/TIOCB4 (input/output)
PB2 (input/output)/TP10 (output)/TIOCA4 (input/output)
PB1 (input/output)/TP9 (output)/TIOCB3 (input/output)
PB0 (input/output)/TP8 (output)/TIOCA3 (input/output)
Pin functions in mode 7
285
9.12.2 Register Descriptions
Table 9-20 summarizes the registers of port B.
Table 9-20 Port B Registers
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FFD4 Port B data direction register PBDDR W H'00
H'FFD6 Port B data register PBDR R/W H'00
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR): PBDDR is an 8-bit write-only register that can select
input or output for each pin in port B. When pins are used for TPC output, the corresponding
PBDDR bits must also be set.
A pin in port B becomes an output pin if the corresponding PBDDR bit is set to 1, and an input
pin if this bit is cleared to 0.
PBDDR is a write-only register. Its value cannot be read. All bits return 1 when read.
PBDDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode
it retains its previous setting. If a PBDDR bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output
state in software standby mode.
286
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
PB DDR
0
W
Port B data direction 7 to 0
These bits select input or output for port B pins
7
6
PB DDR
0
W
6
5
PB DDR
0
W
5
4
PB DDR
0
W
4
3
PB DDR
0
W
3
2
PB DDR
0
W
2
1
PB DDR
0
W
1
0
PB DDR
0
W
0
Port B Data Register (PBDR): PBDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data
for pins PB7 to PB0. When a bit in PBDDR is set to 1, if port B is read the value of the
corresponding PBDR bit is returned. When a bit in PBDDR is cleared to 0, if port B is read the
corresponding pin level is read.
PBDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. In software standby mode it
retains its previous setting.
287
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
0
PB
0
R/W
0
1
PB
0
R/W
1
2
PB
0
R/W
2
3
PB
0
R/W
3
4
PB
0
R/W
4
5
PB
0
R/W
5
6
PB
0
R/W
6
7
PB
0
R/W
7
Port B data 7 to 0
These bits store data for port B pins
9.12.3 Pin Functions
Table 9-21 describes the selection of pin functions.
Table 9-21 Port B Pin Functions
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
DMAC channel 1 settings (bits DTS2/1/0A and DTS2/1/0B in DTCR1A and DTCR1B),
bit TRGE in ADCR, bit NDER15 in NDERB, and bit PB7DDR in PBDDR select the
pin function as follows
PB7DDR 0 1 1
NDER15 — 0 1
Pin function PB7input PB7output TP15 output
DREQ1input*1
ADTRG input*2
Notes: 1. DREQ1input under DMAC channel 1 settings (1) in the table below.
2. ADTRG input when TRGE = 1.
DMAC
channel
1 settings (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1)
DTS2A, DTS1A
Not both 1 Both 1
DTS0A — 00111
DTS2B 01101011
DTS1B — 0 1 — — — 0 1
288
PB7/
TP15/
DREQ1/
ADTRG
Table 9-21 Port B Pin Functions (cont)
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
Bit CS7E in CSCR, DMAC channel 0 settings (bits DTS2/1/0A and DTS2/1/0B in
DTCR0A and DTCR0B), bit NDER14 in NDERB, and bit PB6DDR in PBDDR select the
pin function as follows
PB6DDR 0 1 1 —
CS7E 0 0 0 1
NDER14 — 0 1 —
Pin function PB6input PB6output TP14 output —
DREQ0input*CS7output
Note: *DREQ0input under DMAC channel 0 settings (1) in the table below.
DMAC
channel 0
settings (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1)
DTS2A, DTS1A
Not both 1 Both 1
DTS0A — 00111
DTS2B 01101011
DTS1B — 0 1 — — — 0 1
ITU channel 4 settings (bit CMD1 in TFCR and bit EXB4 in TOER), bit NDER13 in
NDERB, and bit PB5DDR in PBDDR select the pin function as follows
EXB4,
CMD1 Not both 1 Both 1
PB5DDR 0 1 1 —
NDER13 — 0 1 —
Pin function PB5input PB5output TP13 output TOCXB4output
ITU channel 4 settings (bit CMD1 in TFCR and bit EXA4 in TOER), bit NDER12 in
NDERB, and bit PB4DDR in PBDDR select the pin function as follows
EXA4,
CMD1 Not both 1 Both 1
PB4DDR 0 1 1 —
NDER12 — 0 1 —
Pin function PB4input PB4output TP12 output TOCXA4output
PB6/
TP14/
DREQ0/
CS7
PB5/
TP13/
TOCXB4
PB4/
TP12/
TOCXA4
289
Table 9-21 Port B Pin Functions (cont)
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
ITU channel 4 settings (bit PWM4 in TMDR, bit CMD1 in TFCR, bit EB4 in TOER, and
bits IOB2 to IOB0 in TIOR4), bit NDER11 in NDERB, and bit PB3DDR in PBDDR select
the pin function as follows
ITU
channel 4
settings (1) in table below (2) in table below
PB3DDR — 0 1 1
NDER11 — — 0 1
Pin function TIOCB4output PB3input PB3output
TP11 output
TIOCB4input*
Note: *TIOCB4input when CMD1 = PWM4 = 0 and IOB2 = 1.
ITU
channel 4
settings (2) (2) (1) (2) (1)
EB4 0 1
CMD1 — 0 1
IOB2 — 0001—
IOB1 — 0 0 1 — —
IOB0 — 0 1 — — —
PB3/
TP11/
TIOCB4
290
Table 9-21 Port B Pin Functions (cont)
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
ITU channel 4 settings (bit CMD1 in TFCR, bit EA4 in TOER, bit PWM4 in TMDR, and
bits IOA2 to IOA0 in TIOR4), bit NDER10 in NDERB, and bit PB2DDR in PBDDR select
the pin function as follows
ITU
channel 4
settings (1) in table below (2) in table below
PB2DDR — 0 1 1
NDER10 — — 0 1
Pin function TIOCA4output PB2input PB2output
TP10 output
TIOCA4input*
Note: *TIOCA4input when CMD1 = PWM4 = 0 and IOA2 = 1.
ITU
channel 4
settings (2) (2) (1) (2) (1)
EA4 0 1
CMD1 — 0 1
PWM4 — 0 1 —
IOA2 — 0001——
IOA1 — 0 0 1 — — —
IOA0 — 0 1 ————
PB2/
TP10/
TIOCA4
291
Table 9-21 Port B Pin Functions (cont)
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
ITU channel 3 settings (bit PWM3 in TMDR, bit CMD1 in TFCR, bit EB3 in TOER, and
bits IOB2 to IOB0 in TIOR3), bit NDER9 in NDERB, and bit PB1DDR in PBDDR select
the pin function as follows
ITU
channel 3
settings (1) in table below (2) in table below
PB1DDR — 0 1 1
NDER9 — — 0 1
Pin function TIOCB3output PB1input PB1output TP9output
TIOCB3input*
Note: *TIOCB3input when CMD1 = PWM3 = 0 and IOB2 = 1.
ITU
channel 3
settings (2) (2) (1) (2) (1)
EB3 0 1
CMD1 — 0 1
IOB2 — 0001—
IOB1 — 0 0 1 — —
IOB0 — 0 1 — — —
PB1/TP9/
TIOCB3
292
Table 9-21 Port B Pin Functions (cont)
Pin Pin Functions and Selection Method
ITU channel 3 settings (bit CMD1 in TFCR, bit EA3 in TOER, bit PWM3 in TMDR, and
bits IOA2 to IOA0 in TIOR3), bit NDER8 in NDERB, and bit PB0DDR in PBDDR select
the pin function as follows
ITU
channel 3
settings (1) in table below (2) in table below
PB0DDR — 0 1 1
NDER8 — — 0 1
Pin function TIOCA3output PB0input PB0output TP8output
TIOCA3input*
Note: *TIOCA3input when CMD1 = PWM3 = 0 and IOA2 = 1.
ITU
channel 3
settings (2) (2) (1) (2) (1)
EA3 0 1
CMD1 — 0 1
PWM3 — 0 1 —
IOA2 — 0001——
IOA1 — 0 0 1 — — —
IOA0 — 0 1 ————
PB0/TP8/
TIOCA3
293
Section 10 16-Bit Integrated Timer Unit (ITU)
10.1 Overview
The H8/3048 Series has a built-in 16-bit integrated timer unit (ITU) with five 16-bit timer
channels.
When the ITU is not used, it can be independently halted to conserve power. For details see
section 20.6, Module Standby Function.
10.1.1 Features
ITU features are listed below.
• Capability to process up to 12 pulse outputs or 10 pulse inputs
• Ten general registers (GRs, two per channel) with independently-assignable output compare
or input capture functions
• Selection of eight counter clock sources for each channel:
Internal clocks: ø, ø/2, ø/4, ø/8
External clocks: TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD
• Five operating modes selectable in all channels:
— Waveform output by compare match
Selection of 0 output, 1 output, or toggle output (only 0 or 1 output in channel 2)
— Input capture function
Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges (selectable)
— Counter clearing function
Counters can be cleared by compare match or input capture
— Synchronization
Two or more timer counters (TCNTs) can be preset simultaneously, or cleared
simultaneously by compare match or input capture. Counter synchronization enables
synchronous register input and output.
295
— PWM mode
PWM output can be provided with an arbitrary duty cycle. With synchronization, up to
five-phase PWM output is possible
• Phase counting mode selectable in channel 2
Two-phase encoder output can be counted automatically.
• Three additional modes selectable in channels 3 and 4
— Reset-synchronized PWM mode
If channels 3 and 4 are combined, three-phase PWM output is possible with three pairs of
complementary waveforms.
— Complementary PWM mode
If channels 3 and 4 are combined, three-phase PWM output is possible with three pairs of
non-overlapping complementary waveforms.
— Buffering
Input capture registers can be double-buffered. Output compare registers can be updated
automatically.
• High-speed access via internal 16-bit bus
The 16-bit timer counters, general registers, and buffer registers can be accessed at high speed
via a 16-bit bus.
• Fifteen interrupt sources
Each channel has two compare match/input capture interrupts and an overflow interrupt. All
interrupts can be requested independently.
• Activation of DMA controller (DMAC)
Four of the compare match/input capture interrupts from channels 0 to 3 can start the DMAC.
• Output triggering of programmable timing pattern controller (TPC)
Compare match/input capture signals from channels 0 to 3 can be used as TPC output
triggers.
296
Table 10-1 summarizes the ITU functions.
Table 10-1 ITU Functions
Item Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4
Clock sources Internal clocks: ø, ø/2, ø/4, ø/8
External clocks: TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD, selectable independently
General registers GRA0, GRB0 GRA1, GRB1 GRA2, GRB2 GRA3, GRB3 GRA4, GRB4
(output compare/input
capture registers)
Buffer registers — — — BRA3, BRB3 BRA4, BRB4
Input/output pins TIOCA0, TIOCA1, TIOCA2, TIOCA3, TIOCA4,
TIOCB0TIOCB1TIOCB2TIOCB3TIOCB4
Output pins ————TOCXA4,
TOCXB4
Counter clearing function GRA0/GRB0 GRA1/GRB1 GRA2/GRB2 GRA3/GRB3 GRA4/GRB4
compare compare compare compare compare
match or match or match or match or match or
input capture input capture input capture input capture input capture
0ooooo
1ooooo
Toggle oo—oo
Input capture function ooooo
Synchronization ooooo
PWM mode ooooo
Reset-synchronized — — — oo
PWM mode
Complementary PWM — — — oo
mode
Phase counting mode — — o——
Buffering — — — oo
DMAC activation GRA0 compare GRA1 compare GRA2 compare GRA3 compare —
match or match or match or match or
input capture input capture input capture input capture
Interrupt sources Three sources Three sources Three sources Three sources Three sources
• Compare • Compare • Compare • Compare • Compare
match/input match/input match/input match/input match/input
capture A0 capture A1 capture A2 capture A3 capture A4
• Compare • Compare • Compare • Compare • Compare
match/input match/input match/input match/input match/input
capture B0 capture B1 capture B2 capture B3 capture B4
• Overflow • Overflow • Overflow • Overflow • Overflow
Legend
o: Available
—: Not available
Compare
match output
297
10.1.2 Block Diagrams
ITU Block Diagram (Overall): Figure 10-1 is a block diagram of the ITU.
Figure 10-1 ITU Block Diagram (Overall)
16-bit timer channel 4
16-bit timer channel 3
16-bit timer channel 2
16-bit timer channel 1
16-bit timer channel 0
Module data bus
Bus interface
On-chip data bus
IMIA0 to IMIA4
IMIB0 to IMIB4
OVI0 to OVI4
TCLKA to TCLKD
ø, ø/2, ø/4, ø/8
TOCXA4, TOCXB4
Clock selector
Control logic
TIOCA0 to TIOCA4
TIOCB0 to TIOCB4
TOER
TOCR
TSTR
TSNC
TMDR
TFCR
TOER:
TOCR:
TSTR:
TSNC:
TMDR:
Legend Timer output master enable register (8 bits)
Timer output control register (8 bits)
Timer start register (8 bits)
Timer synchro register (8 bits)
Timer mode register (8 bits)
298
Block Diagram of Channels 0 and 1: ITU channels 0 and 1 are functionally identical. Both have
the structure shown in figure 10-2.
Figure 10-2 Block Diagram of Channels 0 and 1 (for Channel 0)
Clock selector
Comparator
Control logic
TCLKA to TCLKD
ø, ø/2, ø/4, ø/8
TIOCA0
TIOCB0
IMIA0
IMIB0
OVI0
TCNT
GRA
GRB
TCR
TIOR
TIER
TSR
Module data bus
Legend
TCNT:
GRA, GRB: Timer counter (16 bits)
General registers A and B (input capture/output compare registers) (16 bits 2)×
299
Block Diagram of Channel 2: Figure 10-3 is a block diagram of channel 2. This is the channel
that provides only 0 output and 1 output.
Figure 10-3 Block Diagram of Channel 2
Clock selector
Comparator
Control logic
TCLKA to TCLKD
ø, ø/2, ø/4, ø/8
TIOCA2
TIOCB2
IMIA2
IMIB2
OVI2
TCNT2
GRA2
GRB2
TCR2
TIOR2
TIER2
TSR2
Module data bus
Legend
TCNT2:
GRA2, GRB2: Timer counter 2 (16 bits)
General registers A2 and B2 (input capture/output compare registers)
(16 bits 2)×
300
Block Diagrams of Channels 3 and 4: Figure 10-4 is a block diagram of channel 3. Figure 10-5
is a block diagram of channel 4.
Figure 10-4 Block Diagram of Channel 3
TCNT3
BRA3
Legend
TCNT3:
GRA3, GRB3:
BRA3, BRB3:
Timer counter 3 (16 bits)
General registers A3 and B3 (input capture/output compare registers)
(16 bits 2)
Buffer registers A3 and B3 (input capture/output compare buffer registers)
Clock selector
Comparator
Control logic
GRA3
BRB3
GRB3
TCR3
TIOR3
TIER3
TSR3
TCLKA to
TCLKD
ø, ø/2,
ø/4, ø/8
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
Module data bus
IMIA3
IMIB3
OVI3
×
301
Figure 10-5 Block Diagram of Channel 4
TCNT4
BRA4
Legend
TCNT4:
GRA4, GRB4:
BRA4, BRB4:
Timer counter 4 (16 bits)
General registers A4 and B4 (input capture/output compare registers)
(16 bits 2)
Buffer registers A4 and B4 (input capture/output compare buffer registers)
Clock selector
Comparator
Control logic
GRA4
BRB4
GRB4
TCR4
TIOR4
TIER4
TSR4
Module data bus
TCLKA to
TCLKD
ø, ø/2,
ø/4, ø/8
×
TOCXA4
TOCXB4
TIOCA4
TIOCB4
IMIA4
IMIB4
OVI4
302
10.1.3 Input/Output Pins
Table 10-2 summarizes the ITU pins.
Table 10-2 ITU Pins
Abbre- Input/
Channel Name viation Output Function
Common Clock input A TCLKA Input External clock A input pin
(phase-A input pin in phase counting mode)
Clock input B TCLKB Input External clock B input pin
(phase-B input pin in phase counting mode)
Clock input C TCLKC Input External clock C input pin
Clock input D TCLKD Input External clock D input pin
0 Input capture/output TIOCA0Input/ GRA0 output compare or input capture pin
compare A0 output PWM output pin in PWM mode
Input capture/output TIOCB0Input/ GRB0 output compare or input capture pin
compare B0 output
1 Input capture/output TIOCA1Input/ GRA1 output compare or input capture pin
compare A1 output PWM output pin in PWM mode
Input capture/output TIOCB1Input/ GRB1 output compare or input capture pin
compare B1 output
2 Input capture/output TIOCA2Input/ GRA2 output compare or input capture pin
compare A2 output PWM output pin in PWM mode
Input capture/output TIOCB2Input/ GRB2 output compare or input capture pin
compare B2 output
3 Input capture/output TIOCA3Input/ GRA3 output compare or input capture pin
compare A3 output PWM output pin in PWM mode, comple-
mentary PWM mode, or reset-synchronized
PWM mode
Input capture/output TIOCB3Input/ GRB3 output compare or input capture pin
compare B3 output PWM output pin in complementary PWM
mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode
4 Input capture/output TIOCA4Input/ GRA4 output compare or input capture pin
compare A4 output PWM output pin in PWM mode, comple-
mentary PWM mode, or reset-synchronized
PWM mode
Input capture/output TIOCB4Input/ GRB4 output compare or input capture pin
compare B4 output PWM output pin in complementary PWM
mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode
Output compare XA4 TOCXA4Output PWM output pin in complementary PWM
mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode
Output compare XB4 TOCXB4Output PWM output pin in complementary PWM
mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode
303
10.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 10-3 summarizes the ITU registers.
Table 10-3 ITU Registers
Abbre- Initial
Channel Address*1Name viation R/W Value
Common H'FF60 Timer start register TSTR R/W H'E0
H'FF61 Timer synchro register TSNC R/W H'E0
H'FF62 Timer mode register TMDR R/W H'80
H'FF63 Timer function control register TFCR R/W H'C0
H'FF90 Timer output master enable register TOER R/W H'FF
H'FF91 Timer output control register TOCR R/W H'FF
0 H'FF64 Timer control register 0 TCR0 R/W H'80
H'FF65 Timer I/O control register 0 TIOR0 R/W H'88
H'FF66 Timer interrupt enable register 0 TIER0 R/W H'F8
H'FF67 Timer status register 0 TSR0 R/(W)*2H'F8
H'FF68 Timer counter 0 (high) TCNT0H R/W H'00
H'FF69 Timer counter 0 (low) TCNT0L R/W H'00
H'FF6A General register A0 (high) GRA0H R/W H'FF
H'FF6B General register A0 (low) GRA0L R/W H'FF
H'FF6C General register B0 (high) GRB0H R/W H'FF
H'FF6D General register B0 (low) GRB0L R/W H'FF
1 H'FF6E Timer control register 1 TCR1 R/W H'80
H'FF6F Timer I/O control register 1 TIOR1 R/W H'88
H'FF70 Timer interrupt enable register 1 TIER1 R/W H'F8
H'FF71 Timer status register 1 TSR1 R/(W)*2H'F8
H'FF72 Timer counter 1 (high) TCNT1H R/W H'00
H'FF73 Timer counter 1 (low) TCNT1L R/W H'00
H'FF74 General register A1 (high) GRA1H R/W H'FF
H'FF75 General register A1 (low) GRA1L R/W H'FF
H'FF76 General register B1 (high) GRB1H R/W H'FF
H'FF77 General register B1 (low) GRB1L R/W H'FF
Notes: 1. The lower 16 bits of the address are indicated.
2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags.
304
Table 10-3 ITU Registers (cont)
Abbre- Initial
Channel Address*1Name viation R/W Value
2 H'FF78 Timer control register 2 TCR2 R/W H'80
H'FF79 Timer I/O control register 2 TIOR2 R/W H'88
H'FF7A Timer interrupt enable register 2 TIER2 R/W H'F8
H'FF7B Timer status register 2 TSR2 R/(W)*2H'F8
H'FF7C Timer counter 2 (high) TCNT2H R/W H'00
H'FF7D Timer counter 2 (low) TCNT2L R/W H'00
H'FF7E General register A2 (high) GRA2H R/W H'FF
H'FF7F General register A2 (low) GRA2L R/W H'FF
H'FF80 General register B2 (high) GRB2H R/W H'FF
H'FF81 General register B2 (low) GRB2L R/W H'FF
3 H'FF82 Timer control register 3 TCR3 R/W H'80
H'FF83 Timer I/O control register 3 TIOR3 R/W H'88
H'FF84 Timer interrupt enable register 3 TIER3 R/W H'F8
H'FF85 Timer status register 3 TSR3 R/(W)*2H'F8
H'FF86 Timer counter 3 (high) TCNT3H R/W H'00
H'FF87 Timer counter 3 (low) TCNT3L R/W H'00
H'FF88 General register A3 (high) GRA3H R/W H'FF
H'FF89 General register A3 (low) GRA3L R/W H'FF
H'FF8A General register B3 (high) GRB3H R/W H'FF
H'FF8B General register B3 (low) GRB3L R/W H'FF
H'FF8C Buffer register A3 (high) BRA3H R/W H'FF
H'FF8D Buffer register A3 (low) BRA3L R/W H'FF
H'FF8E Buffer register B3 (high) BRB3H R/W H'FF
H'FF8F Buffer register B3 (low) BRB3L R/W H'FF
Notes: 1. The lower 16 bits of the address are indicated.
2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags.
305
Table 10-3 ITU Registers (cont)
Abbre- Initial
Channel Address*1Name viation R/W Value
4 H'FF92 Timer control register 4 TCR4 R/W H'80
H'FF93 Timer I/O control register 4 TIOR4 R/W H'88
H'FF94 Timer interrupt enable register 4 TIER4 R/W H'F8
H'FF95 Timer status register 4 TSR4 R/(W)*2H'F8
H'FF96 Timer counter 4 (high) TCNT4H R/W H'00
H'FF97 Timer counter 4 (low) TCNT4L R/W H'00
H'FF98 General register A4 (high) GRA4H R/W H'FF
H'FF99 General register A4 (low) GRA4L R/W H'FF
H'FF9A General register B4 (high) GRB4H R/W H'FF
H'FF9B General register B4 (low) GRB4L R/W H'FF
H'FF9C Buffer register A4 (high) BRA4H R/W H'FF
H'FF9D Buffer register A4 (low) BRA4L R/W H'FF
H'FF9E Buffer register B4 (high) BRB4H R/W H'FF
H'FF9F Buffer register B4 (low) BRB4L R/W H'FF
Notes: 1. The lower 16 bits of the address are indicated.
2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags.
306
10.2 Register Descriptions
10.2.1 Timer Start Register (TSTR)
TSTR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that starts and stops the timer counter (TCNT) in
channels 0 to 4.
TSTR is initialized to H'E0 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bits 7 to 5—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bit 4—Counter Start 4 (STR4): Starts and stops timer counter 4 (TCNT4).
Bit 4
STR4 Description
0 TCNT4 is halted (Initial value)
1 TCNT4 is counting
Bit 3—Counter Start 3 (STR3): Starts and stops timer counter 3 (TCNT3).
Bit 3
STR3 Description
0 TCNT3 is halted (Initial value)
1 TCNT3 is counting
Bit 2—Counter Start 2 (STR2): Starts and stops timer counter 2 (TCNT2).
Bit 2
STR2 Description
0 TCNT2 is halted (Initial value)
1 TCNT2 is counting
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
STR4
0
R/W
3
STR3
0
R/W
2
STR2
0
R/W
1
STR1
0
R/W
0
STR0
0
R/W
Reserved bits Counter start 4 to 0
These bits start and
stop TCNT4 to TCNT0
307
Bit 1—Counter Start 1 (STR1): Starts and stops timer counter 1 (TCNT1).
Bit 1
STR1 Description
0 TCNT1 is halted (Initial value)
1 TCNT1 is counting
Bit 0—Counter Start 0 (STR0): Starts and stops timer counter 0 (TCNT0).
Bit 0
STR0 Description
0 TCNT0 is halted (Initial value)
1 TCNT0 is counting
10.2.2 Timer Synchro Register (TSNC)
TSNC is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether channels 0 to 4 operate
independently or synchronously. Channels are synchronized by setting the corresponding bits to 1.
TSNC is initialized to H'E0 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bits 7 to 5—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bit 4—Timer Sync 4 (SYNC4): Selects whether channel 4 operates independently or
synchronously.
Bit 4
SYNC4 Description
0 Channel 4’s timer counter (TCNT4) operates independently (Initial value)
TCNT4 is preset and cleared independently of other channels
1 Channel 4 operates synchronously
TCNT4 can be synchronously preset and cleared
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
SYNC4
0
R/W
3
SYNC3
0
R/W
2
SYNC2
0
R/W
1
SYNC1
0
R/W
0
SYNC0
0
R/W
Reserved bits Timer sync 4 to 0
These bits synchronize
channels 4 to 0
308
Bit 3—Timer Sync 3 (SYNC3): Selects whether channel 3 operates independently or
synchronously.
Bit 3
SYNC3 Description
0 Channel 3’s timer counter (TCNT3) operates independently (Initial value)
TCNT3 is preset and cleared independently of other channels
1 Channel 3 operates synchronously
TCNT3 can be synchronously preset and cleared
Bit 2—Timer Sync 2 (SYNC2): Selects whether channel 2 operates independently or
synchronously.
Bit 2
SYNC2 Description
0 Channel 2’s timer counter (TCNT2) operates independently (Initial value)
TCNT2 is preset and cleared independently of other channels
1 Channel 2 operates synchronously
TCNT2 can be synchronously preset and cleared
Bit 1—Timer Sync 1 (SYNC1): Selects whether channel 1 operates independently or
synchronously.
Bit 1
SYNC1 Description
0 Channel 1’s timer counter (TCNT1) operates independently (Initial value)
TCNT1 is preset and cleared independently of other channels
1 Channel 1 operates synchronously
TCNT1 can be synchronously preset and cleared
Bit 0—Timer Sync 0 (SYNC0): Selects whether channel 0 operates independently or
synchronously.
Bit 0
SYNC0 Description
0 Channel 0’s timer counter (TCNT0) operates independently (Initial value)
TCNT0 is preset and cleared independently of other channels
1 Channel 0 operates synchronously
TCNT0 can be synchronously preset and cleared
309
10.2.3 Timer Mode Register (TMDR)
TMDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects PWM mode for channels 0 to 4. It also
selects phase counting mode and the overflow flag (OVF) setting conditions for channel 2.
TMDR is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bit 7—Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1.
Bit 6—Phase Counting Mode Flag (MDF): Selects whether channel 2 operates normally or in
phase counting mode.
Bit 6
MDF Description
0 Channel 2 operates normally (Initial value)
1 Channel 2 operates in phase counting mode
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
MDF
0
R/W
5
FDIR
0
R/W
4
PWM4
0
R/W
3
PWM3
0
R/W
0
PWM0
0
R/W
2
PWM2
0
R/W
1
PWM1
0
R/W
Reserved bit
PWM mode 4 to 0
These bits select PWM
mode for channels 4 to 0
Phase counting mode flag
Selects phase counting mode for channel 2
Flag direction
Selects the setting condition for the overflow
flag (OVF) in timer status register 2 (TSR2)
310
When MDF is set to 1 to select phase counting mode, TCNT2 operates as an up/down-counter and
pins TCLKA and TCLKB become counter clock input pins. TCNT2 counts both rising and falling
edges of TCLKA and TCLKB, and counts up or down as follows.
Counting Direction Down-Counting Up-Counting
TCLKA pin High Low Low High
TCLKB pin Low High High Low
In phase counting mode channel 2 operates as above regardless of the external clock edges
selected by bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 and the clock source selected by bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in
TCR2. Phase counting mode takes precedence over these settings.
The counter clearing condition selected by the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR2 and the compare
match/input capture settings and interrupt functions of TIOR2, TIER2, and TSR2 remain effective
in phase counting mode.
Bit 5—Flag Direction (FDIR): Designates the setting condition for the OVF flag in TSR2. The
FDIR designation is valid in all modes in channel 2.
Bit 5
FDIR Description
0 OVF is set to 1 in TSR2 when TCNT2 overflows or underflows (Initial value)
1 OVF is set to 1 in TSR2 when TCNT2 overflows
Bit 4—PWM Mode 4 (PWM4): Selects whether channel 4 operates normally or in PWM mode.
Bit 4
PWM4 Description
0 Channel 4 operates normally (Initial value)
1 Channel 4 operates in PWM mode
When bit PWM4 is set to 1 to select PWM mode, pin TIOCA4becomes a PWM output pin. The
output goes to 1 at compare match with GRA4, and to 0 at compare match with GRB4.
If complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode is selected by bits CMD1 and
CMD0 in TFCR, the CMD1 and CMD0 setting takes precedence and the PWM4 setting is
ignored.
311
Bit 3—PWM Mode 3 (PWM3): Selects whether channel 3 operates normally or in PWM mode.
Bit 3
PWM3 Description
0 Channel 3 operates normally (Initial value)
1 Channel 3 operates in PWM mode
When bit PWM3 is set to 1 to select PWM mode, pin TIOCA3becomes a PWM output pin. The
output goes to 1 at compare match with GRA3, and to 0 at compare match with GRB3.
If complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode is selected by bits CMD1 and
CMD0 in TFCR, the CMD1 and CMD0 setting takes precedence and the PWM3 setting is
ignored.
Bit 2—PWM Mode 2 (PWM2): Selects whether channel 2 operates normally or in PWM mode.
Bit 2
PWM2 Description
0 Channel 2 operates normally (Initial value)
1 Channel 2 operates in PWM mode
When bit PWM2 is set to 1 to select PWM mode, pin TIOCA2becomes a PWM output pin. The
output goes to 1 at compare match with GRA2, and to 0 at compare match with GRB2.
Bit 1—PWM Mode 1 (PWM1): Selects whether channel 1 operates normally or in PWM mode.
Bit 1
PWM1 Description
0 Channel 1 operates normally (Initial value)
1 Channel 1 operates in PWM mode
When bit PWM1 is set to 1 to select PWM mode, pin TIOCA1becomes a PWM output pin. The
output goes to 1 at compare match with GRA1, and to 0 at compare match with GRB1.
312
Bit 0—PWM Mode 0 (PWM0): Selects whether channel 0 operates normally or in PWM mode.
Bit 0
PWM0 Description
0 Channel 0 operates normally (Initial value)
1 Channel 0 operates in PWM mode
When bit PWM0 is set to 1 to select PWM mode, pin TIOCA0becomes a PWM output pin. The
output goes to 1 at compare match with GRA0, and to 0 at compare match with GRB0.
10.2.4 Timer Function Control Register (TFCR)
TFCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects complementary PWM mode, reset-
synchronized PWM mode, and buffering for channels 3 and 4.
TFCR is initialized to H'C0 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
CMD1
0
R/W
4
CMD0
0
R/W
3
BFB4
0
R/W
0
BFA3
0
R/W
2
BFA4
0
R/W
1
BFB3
0
R/W
Reserved bits
Combination mode 1/0
These bits select complementary
PWM mode or reset-synchronized
PWM mode for channels 3 and 4
Buffer mode B4 and A4
These bits select buffering of
general registers (GRB4 and
GRA4) by buffer registers
(BRB4 and BRA4) in channel 4
Buffer mode B3 and A3
These bits select buffering
of general registers (GRB3
and GRA3) by buffer
registers (BRB3 and BRA3)
in channel 3
313
Bits 5 and 4—Combination Mode 1 and 0 (CMD1, CMD0): These bits select whether channels
3 and 4 operate in normal mode, complementary PWM mode, or reset-synchronized PWM mode.
Bit 5 Bit 4
CMD1 CMD0 Description
0 0 Channels 3 and 4 operate normally (Initial value)
1
1 0 Channels 3 and 4 operate together in complementary PWM mode
1 Channels 3 and 4 operate together in reset-synchronized PWM mode
Before selecting reset-synchronized PWM mode or complementary PWM mode, halt the timer
counter or counters that will be used in these modes.
When these bits select complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode, they take
precedence over the setting of the PWM mode bits (PWM4 and PWM3) in TMDR. Settings of
timer sync bits SYNC4 and SYNC3 in TSNC are valid in complementary PWM mode and reset-
synchronized PWM mode, however. When complementary PWM mode is selected, channels 3
and 4 must not be synchronized (do not set bits SYNC3 and SYNC4 both to 1 in TSNC).
Bit 3—Buffer Mode B4 (BFB4): Selects whether GRB4 operates normally in channel 4, or
whether GRB4 is buffered by BRB4.
Bit 3
BFB4 Description
0 GRB4 operates normally (Initial value)
1 GRB4 is buffered by BRB4
Bit 2—Buffer Mode A4 (BFA4): Selects whether GRA4 operates normally in channel 4, or
whether GRA4 is buffered by BRA4.
Bit 2
BFA4 Description
0 GRA4 operates normally (Initial value)
1 GRA4 is buffered by BRA4
314
Bit 1—Buffer Mode B3 (BFB3): Selects whether GRB3 operates normally in channel 3, or
whether GRB3 is buffered by BRB3.
Bit 1
BFB3 Description
0 GRB3 operates normally (Initial value)
1 GRB3 is buffered by BRB3
Bit 0—Buffer Mode A3 (BFA3): Selects whether GRA3 operates normally in channel 3, or
whether GRA3 is buffered by BRA3.
Bit 0
BFA3 Description
0 GRA3 operates normally (Initial value)
1 GRA3 is buffered by BRA3
10.2.5 Timer Output Master Enable Register (TOER)
TOER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables output settings for channels 3
and 4.
TOER is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in standby mode.
Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
EXB4
1
R/W
4
EXA4
1
R/W
3
EB3
1
R/W
0
EA3
1
R/W
2
EB4
1
R/W
1
EA4
1
R/W
Reserved bits
Master enable TOCXA4, TOCXB4
These bits enable or disable output
settings for pins TOCXA4 and TOCXB4
Master enable TIOCA3, TIOCB3 , TIOCA4, TIOCB4
These bits enable or disable output settings for pins
TIOCA3, TIOCB3 , TIOCA4, and TIOCB4
315
Bit 5—Master Enable TOCXB4 (EXB4): Enables or disables ITU output at pin TOCXB4.
Bit 5
EXB4 Description
0 TOCXB4output is disabled regardless of TFCR settings (TOCXB4operates as a generic
input/output pin).
If XTGD = 0, EXB4 is cleared to 0 when input capture A occurs in channel 1.
1 TOCXB4is enabled for output according to TFCR settings (Initial value)
Bit 4—Master Enable TOCXA4 (EXA4): Enables or disables ITU output at pin TOCXA4.
Bit 4
EXA4 Description
0 TOCXA4output is disabled regardless of TFCR settings (TOCXA4operates as a generic
input/output pin).
If XTGD = 0, EXA4 is cleared to 0 when input capture A occurs in channel 1.
1 TOCXA4is enabled for output according to TFCR settings (Initial value)
Bit 3—Master Enable TIOCB3 (EB3): Enables or disables ITU output at pin TIOCB3.
Bit 3
EB3 Description
0 TIOCB3output is disabled regardless of TIOR3 and TFCR settings (TIOCB3operates as
a generic input/output pin).
If XTGD = 0, EB3 is cleared to 0 when input capture A occurs in channel 1.
1 TIOCB3is enabled for output according to TIOR3 and TFCR settings (Initial value)
316
Bit 2—Master Enable TIOCB4 (EB4): Enables or disables ITU output at pin TIOCB4.
Bit 2
EB4 Description
0 TIOCB4output is disabled regardless of TIOR4 and TFCR settings (TIOCB4operates as
a generic input/output pin).
If XTGD = 0, EB4 is cleared to 0 when input capture A occurs in channel 1.
1 TIOCB4is enabled for output according to TIOR4 and TFCR settings (Initial value)
Bit 1—Master Enable TIOCA4 (EA4): Enables or disables ITU output at pin TIOCA4.
Bit 1
EA4 Description
0 TIOCA4output is disabled regardless of TIOR4, TMDR, and TFCR settings (TIOCA4
operates as a generic input/output pin).
If XTGD = 0, EA4 is cleared to 0 when input capture A occurs in channel 1.
1 TIOCA4is enabled for output according to TIOR4, TMDR, and (Initial value)
TFCR settings
Bit 0—Master Enable TIOCA3 (EA3): Enables or disables ITU output at pin TIOCA3.
Bit 0
EA3 Description
0 TIOCA3output is disabled regardless of TIOR3, TMDR, and TFCR settings (TIOCA3
operates as a generic input/output pin).
If XTGD = 0, EA3 is cleared to 0 when input capture A occurs in channel 1.
1 TIOCA3is enabled for output according to TIOR3, TMDR, and (Initial value)
TFCR settings
317
10.2.6 Timer Output Control Register (TOCR)
TOCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects externally triggered disabling of output in
complementary PWM mode and reset-synchronized PWM mode, and inverts the output levels.
The settings of the XTGD, OLS4, and OLS3 bits are valid only in complementary PWM mode
and reset-synchronized PWM mode. These settings do not affect other modes.
TOCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in standby mode.
Bits 7 to 5—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bit 4—External Trigger Disable (XTGD): Selects externally triggered disabling of ITU output
in complementary PWM mode and reset-synchronized PWM mode.
Bit 4
XTGD Description
0 Input capture A in channel 1 is used as an external trigger signal in complementary PWM
mode and reset-synchronized PWM mode.
When an external trigger occurs, bits 5 to 0 in TOER are cleared to 0, disabling ITU
output.
1 External triggering is disabled (Initial value)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
XTGD
1
R/W
3
—
1
—
0
OLS3
1
R/W
2
—
1
—
1
OLS4
1
R/W
Reserved bits Output level select 3, 4
These bits select output
levels in complementary
PWM mode and reset-
synchronized PWM mode
External trigger disable
Selects externally triggered disabling of output in
complementary PWM mode and reset-synchronized
PWM mode
Reserved bits
318
Bits 3 and 2—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bit 1—Output Level Select 4 (OLS4): Selects output levels in complementary PWM mode and
reset-synchronized PWM mode.
Bit 1
OLS4 Description
0 TIOCA3, TIOCA4, and TIOCB4outputs are inverted
1 TIOCA3, TIOCA4, and TIOCB4outputs are not inverted (Initial value)
Bit 0—Output Level Select 3 (OLS3): Selects output levels in complementary PWM mode and
reset-synchronized PWM mode.
Bit 0
OLS3 Description
0 TIOCB3, TOCXA4, and TOCXB4outputs are inverted
1 TIOCB3, TOCXA4, and TOCXB4outputs are not inverted (Initial value)
10.2.7 Timer Counters (TCNT)
TCNT is a 16-bit counter. The ITU has five TCNTs, one for each channel.
Channel Abbreviation Function
0 TCNT0 Up-counter
1 TCNT1
2 TCNT2 Phase counting mode: up/down-counter
Other modes: up-counter
3 TCNT3
4 TCNT4
Each TCNT is a 16-bit readable/writable register that counts pulse inputs from a clock source. The
clock source is selected by bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
0
R/W
12
0
R/W
10
0
R/W
8
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
15
0
R/W
13
0
R/W
11
0
R/W
9
0
R/W
7
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
Complementary PWM mode: up/down-counter
Other modes: up-counter
319
TCNT0 and TCNT1 are up-counters. TCNT2 is an up/down-counter in phase counting mode and
an up-counter in other modes. TCNT3 and TCNT4 are up/down-counters in complementary PWM
mode and up-counters in other modes.
TCNT can be cleared to H'0000 by compare match with GRA or GRB or by input capture to GRA
or GRB (counter clearing function) in the same channel.
When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000), the OVF flag is set to 1 in TSR of the
corresponding channel.
When TCNT underflows (changes from H'0000 to H'FFFF), the OVF flag is set to 1 in TSR of the
corresponding channel.
The TCNTs are linked to the CPU by an internal 16-bit bus and can be written or read by either
word access or byte access.
Each TCNT is initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in standby mode.
10.2.8 General Registers (GRA, GRB)
The general registers are 16-bit registers. The ITU has 10 general registers, two in each channel.
Channel Abbreviation Function
0 GRA0, GRB0 Output compare/input capture register
1 GRA1, GRB1
2 GRA2, GRB2
3 GRA3, GRB3
4 GRA4, GRB4
A general register is a 16-bit readable/writable register that can function as either an output
compare register or an input capture register. The function is selected by settings in TIOR.
When a general register is used as an output compare register, its value is constantly compared
with the TCNT value. When the two values match (compare match), the IMFA or IMFB flag is set
to 1 in TSR. Compare match output can be selected in TIOR.
Output compare/input capture register; can be buffered by buffer
registers BRA and BRB
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
320
When a general register is used as an input capture register, rising edges, falling edges, or both
edges of an external input capture signal are detected and the current TCNT value is stored in the
general register. The corresponding IMFA or IMFB flag in TSR is set to 1 at the same time. The
valid edge or edges of the input capture signal are selected in TIOR.
TIOR settings are ignored in PWM mode, complementary PWM mode, and reset-synchronized
PWM mode.
General registers are linked to the CPU by an internal 16-bit bus and can be written or read by
either word access or byte access.
General registers are initialized to the output compare function (with no output signal) by a reset
and in standby mode. The initial value is H'FFFF.
10.2.9 Buffer Registers (BRA, BRB)
The buffer registers are 16-bit registers. The ITU has four buffer registers, two each in channels 3
and 4.
Channel Abbreviation Function
3 BRA3, BRB3 Used for buffering
4 BRA4, BRB4 • When the corresponding GRA or GRB functions as an output
compare register, BRA or BRB can function as an output compare
buffer register: the BRA or BRB value is automatically transferred
to GRA or GRB at compare match
• When the corresponding GRA or GRB functions as an input
capture register, BRA or BRB can function as an input capture
buffer register: the GRA or GRB value is automatically transferred
to BRA or BRB at input capture
A buffer register is a 16-bit readable/writable register that is used when buffering is selected.
Buffering can be selected independently by bits BFB4, BFA4, BFB3, and BFA3 in TFCR.
The buffer register and general register operate as a pair. When the general register functions as an
output compare register, the buffer register functions as an output compare buffer register. When
the general register functions as an input capture register, the buffer register functions as an input
capture buffer register.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
321
The buffer registers are linked to the CPU by an internal 16-bit bus and can be written or read by
either word or byte access.
Buffer registers are initialized to H'FFFF by a reset and in standby mode.
10.2.10 Timer Control Registers (TCR)
TCR is an 8-bit register. The ITU has five TCRs, one in each channel.
Channel Abbreviation Function
0 TCR0
1 TCR1
2 TCR2
3 TCR3
4 TCR4
Each TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the timer counter clock source, selects
the edge or edges of external clock sources, and selects how the counter is cleared.
TCR is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bit 7—Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1.
TCR controls the timer counter. The TCRs in all channels are
functionally identical. When phase counting mode is selected in
channel 2, the settings of bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 and TPSC2 to
TPSC0 in TCR2 are ignored.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
CCLR1
0
R/W
5
CCLR0
0
R/W
4
CKEG1
0
R/W
3
CKEG0
0
R/W
0
TPSC0
0
R/W
2
TPSC2
0
R/W
1
TPSC1
0
R/W
Timer prescaler 2 to 0
These bits select the
counter clock
Reserved bit
Clock edge 1/0
These bits select external clock edges
Counter clear 1/0
These bits select the counter clear source
322
Bits 6 and 5—Counter Clear 1/0 (CCLR1, CCLR0): These bits select how TCNT is cleared.
Bit 6 Bit 5
CCLR1 CCLR0 Description
0 0 TCNT is not cleared (Initial value)
1 TCNT is cleared by GRA compare match or input capture*1
1 0 TCNT is cleared by GRB compare match or input capture*1
1 Synchronous clear: TCNT is cleared in synchronization with other
synchronized timers*2
Notes: 1. TCNT is cleared by compare match when the general register functions as an output
compare register, and by input capture when the general register functions as an input
capture register.
2. Selected in TSNC.
Bits 4 and 3—Clock Edge 1/0 (CKEG1, CKEG0): These bits select external clock input edges
when an external clock source is used.
Bit 4 Bit 3
CKEG1 CKEG0 Description
0 0 Count rising edges (Initial value)
1 Count falling edges
1 — Count both edges
When channel 2 is set to phase counting mode, bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR2 are ignored.
Phase counting takes precedence.
323
Bits 2 to 0—Timer Prescaler 2 to 0 (TPSC2 to TPSC0): These bits select the counter clock
source.
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 Function
0 0 0 Internal clock: ø (Initial value)
1 Internal clock: ø/2
1 0 Internal clock: ø/4
1 Internal clock: ø/8
1 0 0 External clock A: TCLKA input
1 External clock B: TCLKB input
1 0 External clock C: TCLKC input
1 External clock D: TCLKD input
When bit TPSC2 is cleared to 0 an internal clock source is selected, and the timer counts only
falling edges. When bit TPSC2 is set to 1 an external clock source is selected, and the timer counts
the edge or edges selected by bits CKEG1 and CKEG0.
When channel 2 is set to phase counting mode (MDF = 1 in TMDR), the settings of bits TPSC2 to
TPSC0 in TCR2 are ignored. Phase counting takes precedence.
10.2.11 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR)
TIOR is an 8-bit register. The ITU has five TIORs, one in each channel.
Channel Abbreviation Function
0 TIOR0
1 TIOR1
2 TIOR2
3 TIOR3
4 TIOR4
TIOR controls the general registers. Some functions differ in PWM
mode. TIOR3 and TIOR4 settings are ignored when complementary
PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode is selected in
channels 3 and 4.
324
Each TIOR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the output compare or input capture
function for GRA and GRB, and specifies the functions of the TIOCA and TIOCB pins. If the
output compare function is selected, TIOR also selects the type of output. If input capture is
selected, TIOR also selects the edge or edges of the input capture signal.
TIOR is initialized to H'88 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bit 7—Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1.
Bits 6 to 4—I/O Control B2 to B0 (IOB2 to IOB0): These bits select the GRB function.
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Function
0 0 0 No output at compare match (Initial value)
1 0 output at GRB compare match*1
1 0 1 output at GRB compare match*1
1 Output toggles at GRB compare match
(1 output in channel 2)*1, *2
1 0 0 GRB captures rising edge of input
1 GRB captures falling edge of input
1 0 GRB captures both edges of input
1
Notes: 1. After a reset, the output is 0 until the first compare match.
2. Channel 2 output cannot be toggled by compare match. This setting selects 1 output
instead.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
IOB2
0
R/W
5
IOB1
0
R/W
4
IOB0
0
R/W
3
—
1
—
0
IOA0
0
R/W
2
IOA2
0
R/W
1
IOA1
0
R/W
I/O control A2 to A0
These bits select GRA
functions
Reserved bit
I/O control B2 to B0
These bits select GRB functions
Reserved bit
GRB is an output
compare register
GRB is an input
capture register
325
Bit 3—Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1.
Bits 2 to 0—I/O Control A2 to A0 (IOA2 to IOA0): These bits select the GRA function.
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Function
0 0 0 No output at compare match (Initial value)
1 0 output at GRA compare match*1
1 0 1 output at GRA compare match*1
1 Output toggles at GRA compare match
(1 output in channel 2)*1, *2
1 0 0 GRA captures rising edge of input
1 GRA captures falling edge of input
1 0 GRA captures both edges of input
1
Notes: 1. After a reset, the output is 0 until the first compare match.
2. Channel 2 output cannot be toggled by compare match. This setting selects 1 output
instead.
10.2.12 Timer Status Register (TSR)
TSR is an 8-bit register. The ITU has five TSRs, one in each channel.
Channel Abbreviation Function
0 TSR0 Indicates input capture, compare match, and overflow status
1 TSR1
2 TSR2
3 TSR3
4 TSR4
GRA is an output
compare register
GRA is an input
capture register
326
Each TSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register containing flags that indicate TCNT overflow or
underflow and GRA or GRB compare match or input capture. These flags are interrupt sources
and generate CPU interrupts if enabled by corresponding bits in TIER.
TSR is initialized to H'F8 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bits 7 to 3—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bit 2—Overflow Flag (OVF): This status flag indicates TCNT overflow or underflow.
Bit 2
OVF Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF
1 [Setting condition]
TCNT overflowed from H'FFFF to H'0000, or underflowed from H'0000 to H'FFFF*
Notes: *TCNT underflow occurs when TCNT operates as an up/down-counter. Underflow occurs
only under the following conditions:
1. Channel 2 operates in phase counting mode (MDF = 1 in TMDR)
2. Channels 3 and 4 operate in complementary PWM mode (CMD1 = 1 and CMD0 = 0 in
TFCR)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—*
2
OVF
0
R/(W)
Reserved bits
Note: Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.*
*
1
IMFB
0
R/(W) *
0
IMFA
0
R/(W)
Overflow flag
Status flag indicating
overflow or underflow
Input capture/compare match flag B
Status flag indicating GRB compare
match or input capture
Input capture/compare match flag A
Status flag indicating GRA compare
match or input capture
327
Bit 1—Input Capture/Compare Match Flag B (IMFB): This status flag indicates GRB
compare match or input capture events.
Bit 1
IMFB Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
Read IMFB when IMFB = 1, then write 0 in IMFB
1 [Setting conditions]
TCNT = GRB when GRB functions as an output compare register.
TCNT value is transferred to GRB by an input capture signal, when GRB functions as
an input capture register.
Bit 0—Input Capture/Compare Match Flag A (IMFA): This status flag indicates GRA
compare match or input capture events.
Bit 0
IMFA Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
Read IMFA when IMFA = 1, then write 0 in IMFA.
DMAC activated by IMIA interrupt (channels 0 to 3 only).
1 [Setting conditions]
TCNT = GRA when GRA functions as an output compare register.
TCNT value is transferred to GRA by an input capture signal, when GRA functions
as an input capture register.
328
10.2.13 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)
TIER is an 8-bit register. The ITU has five TIERs, one in each channel.
Channel Abbreviation Function
0 TIER0 Enables or disables interrupt requests.
1 TIER1
2 TIER2
3 TIER3
4 TIER4
Each TIER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables and disables overflow interrupt
requests and general register compare match and input capture interrupt requests.
TIER is initialized to H'F8 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bits 7 to 3—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
2
OVIE
0
R/W
1
IMIEB
0
R/W
0
IMIEA
0
R/W
Reserved bits
Overflow interrupt enable
Enables or disables OVF
interrupts
Input capture/compare match
interrupt enable B
Enables or disables IMFB interrupts
Input capture/compare match
interrupt enable A
Enables or disables IMFA
interrupts
329
Bit 2—Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): Enables or disables the interrupt requested by the
OVF flag in TSR when OVF is set to 1.
Bit 2
OVIE Description
0 OVI interrupt requested by OVF is disabled (Initial value)
1 OVI interrupt requested by OVF is enabled
Bit 1—Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable B (IMIEB): Enables or disables the
interrupt requested by the IMFB flag in TSR when IMFB is set to 1.
Bit 1
IMIEB Description
0 IMIB interrupt requested by IMFB is disabled (Initial value)
1 IMIB interrupt requested by IMFB is enabled
Bit 0—Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable A (IMIEA): Enables or disables the
interrupt requested by the IMFA flag in TSR when IMFA is set to 1.
Bit 0
IMIEA Description
0 IMIA interrupt requested by IMFA is disabled (Initial value)
1 IMIA interrupt requested by IMFA is enabled
330
10.3 CPU Interface
10.3.1 16-Bit Accessible Registers
The timer counters (TCNTs), general registers A and B (GRAs and GRBs), and buffer registers A
and B (BRAs and BRBs) are 16-bit registers, and are linked to the CPU by an internal 16-bit data
bus. These registers can be written or read a word at a time, or a byte at a time.
Figures 10-6 and 10-7 show examples of word access to a timer counter (TCNT). Figures 10-8,
10-9, 10-10, and 10-11 show examples of byte access to TCNTH and TCNTL.
Figure 10-6 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Writes to TCNT, Word)
Figure 10-7 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Reads TCNT, Word)
On-chip data bus
CPU
H
L Bus interface
H
LModule
data bus
TCNTH TCNTL
On-chip data bus
CPU
H
L Bus interface
H
LModule
data bus
TCNTH TCNTL
331
Figure 10-8 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Writes to TCNT, Upper Byte)
Figure 10-9 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Writes to TCNT, Lower Byte)
Figure 10-10 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Reads TCNT, Upper Byte)
On-chip data bus
CPU
H
L Bus interface
H
LModule
data bus
TCNTH TCNTL
On-chip data bus
CPU
H
L Bus interface
H
LModule
data bus
TCNTH TCNTL
On-chip data bus
CPU
H
L Bus interface
H
LModule
data bus
TCNTH TCNTL
332
Figure 10-11 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Reads TCNT, Lower Byte)
10.3.2 8-Bit Accessible Registers
The registers other than the timer counters, general registers, and buffer registers are 8-bit
registers. These registers are linked to the CPU by an internal 8-bit data bus.
Figures 10-12 and 10-13 show examples of byte read and write access to a TCR.
If a word-size data transfer instruction is executed, two byte transfers are performed.
Figure 10-12 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Writes to TCR)
On-chip data bus
CPU
H
L Bus interface
H
LModule
data bus
TCNTH TCNTL
On-chip data bus
CPU
H
L Bus interface
H
LModule
data bus
TCR
333
Figure 10-13 Access to Timer Counter (CPU Reads TCR)
On-chip data bus
CPU
H
L Bus interface
H
LModule
data bus
TCR
334
10.4 Operation
10.4.1 Overview
A summary of operations in the various modes is given below.
Normal Operation: Each channel has a timer counter and general registers. The timer counter
counts up, and can operate as a free-running counter, periodic counter, or external event counter.
General registers A and B can be used for input capture or output compare.
Synchronous Operation: The timer counters in designated channels are preset synchronously.
Data written to the timer counter in any one of these channels is simultaneously written to the
timer counters in the other channels as well. The timer counters can also be cleared synchronously
if so designated by the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in the TCRs.
PWM Mode: A PWM waveform is output from the TIOCA pin. The output goes to 1 at compare
match A and to 0 at compare match B. The duty cycle can be varied from 0% to 100% depending
on the settings of GRA and GRB. When a channel is set to PWM mode, its GRA and GRB
automatically become output compare registers.
Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode: Channels 3 and 4 are paired for three-phase PWM output with
complementary waveforms. (The three phases are related by having a common transition point.)
When reset-synchronized PWM mode is selected GRA3, GRB3, GRA4, and GRB4 automatically
function as output compare registers, TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCA4, TOCXA4, TIOCB4, and
TOCXB4function as PWM output pins, and TCNT3 operates as an up-counter. TCNT4 operates
independently, and is not compared with GRA4 or GRB4.
Complementary PWM Mode: Channels 3 and 4 are paired for three-phase PWM output with
non-overlapping complementary waveforms. When complementary PWM mode is selected
GRA3, GRB3, GRA4, and GRB4 automatically function as output compare registers, and
TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCA4, TOCXA4, TIOCB4, and TOCXB4function as PWM output pins.
TCNT3 and TCNT4 operate as up/down-counters.
Phase Counting Mode: The phase relationship between two clock signals input at TCLKA and
TCLKB is detected and TCNT2 counts up or down accordingly. When phase counting mode is
selected TCLKA and TCLKB become clock input pins and TCNT2 operates as an up/down-
counter.
335
Buffering
• If the general register is an output compare register
When compare match occurs the buffer register value is transferred to the general register.
• If the general register is an input capture register
When input capture occurs the TCNT value is transferred to the general register, and the
previous general register value is transferred to the buffer register.
• Complementary PWM mode
The buffer register value is transferred to the general register when TCNT3 and TCNT4
change counting direction.
• Reset-synchronized PWM mode
The buffer register value is transferred to the general register at GRA3 compare match.
10.4.2 Basic Functions
Counter Operation: When one of bits STR0 to STR4 is set to 1 in the timer start register
(TSTR), the timer counter (TCNT) in the corresponding channel starts counting. The counting can
be free-running or periodic.
• Sample setup procedure for counter
Figure 10-14 shows a sample procedure for setting up a counter.
336
Figure 10-14 Counter Setup Procedure (Example)
1. Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR to select the counter clock source. If an external clock
source is selected, set bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR to select the desired edge(s) of the
external clock signal.
2. For periodic counting, set CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR to have TCNT cleared at GRA
compare match or GRB compare match.
3. Set TIOR to select the output compare function of GRA or GRB, whichever was selected in
step 2.
4. Write the count period in GRA or GRB, whichever was selected in step 2.
5. Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer counter.
Counter setup
Select counter clock
Type of counting?
Periodic counting
No
Yes
Select counter clear source
Select output compare
register function
Set period
Start counter
Free-running counting
Start counter
Periodic counter Free-running counter
1
2
3
4
55
337
• Free-running and periodic counter operation
A reset leaves the counters (TCNTs) in ITU channels 0 to 4 all set as free-running counters. A
free-running counter starts counting up when the corresponding bit in TSTR is set to 1. When
the count overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, the OVF flag is set to 1 in TSR. If the
corresponding OVIE bit is set to 1 in TIER, a CPU interrupt is requested. After the overflow,
the counter continues counting up from H'0000. Figure 10-15 illustrates free-running
counting.
Figure 10-15 Free-Running Counter Operation
When a channel is set to have its counter cleared by compare match, in that channel TCNT
operates as a periodic counter. Select the output compare function of GRA or GRB, set bit
CCLR1 or CCLR0 in TCR to have the counter cleared by compare match, and set the count
period in GRA or GRB. After these settings, the counter starts counting up as a periodic
counter when the corresponding bit is set to 1 in TSTR. When the count matches GRA or
GRB, the IMFA or IMFB flag is set to 1 in TSR and the counter is cleared to H'0000. If the
corresponding IMIEA or IMIEB bit is set to 1 in TIER, a CPU interrupt is requested at this
time. After the compare match, TCNT continues counting up from H'0000. Figure 10-16
illustrates periodic counting.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
H'0000
STR0 to
STR4 bit
OVF
Time
338
Figure 10-16 Periodic Counter Operation
• TCNT count timing
— Internal clock source
Bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR select the system clock (ø) or one of three internal clock
sources obtained by prescaling the system clock (ø/2, ø/4, ø/8).
Figure 10-17 shows the timing.
Figure 10-17 Count Timing for Internal Clock Sources
TCNT value
GR
H'0000
STR bit
IMF
Time
Counter cleared by general
register compare match
ø
TCNT input
TCNT
Internal
clock
N – 1 N N + 1
339
— External clock source
Bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR select an external clock input pin (TCLKA to TCLKD),
and its valid edge or edges are selected by bits CKEG1 and CKEG0. The rising edge,
falling edge, or both edges can be selected.
The pulse width of the external clock signal must be at least 1.5 system clocks when a
single edge is selected, and at least 2.5 system clocks when both edges are selected.
Shorter pulses will not be counted correctly.
Figure 10-18 shows the timing when both edges are detected.
Figure 10-18 Count Timing for External Clock Sources (when Both Edges are Detected)
ø
TCNT input
TCNT
External
clock input
N – 1 N N + 1
340
Waveform Output by Compare Match: In ITU channels 0, 1, 3, and 4, compare match A or B
can cause the output at the TIOCA or TIOCB pin to go to 0, go to 1, or toggle. In channel 2 the
output can only go to 0 or go to 1.
• Sample setup procedure for waveform output by compare match
Figure 10-19 shows a sample procedure for setting up waveform output by compare match.
Figure 10-19 Setup Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match (Example)
• Examples of waveform output
Figure 10-20 shows examples of 0 and 1 output. TCNT operates as a free-running counter, 0
output is selected for compare match A, and 1 output is selected for compare match B. When
the pin is already at the selected output level, the pin level does not change.
Output setup
Select waveform
output mode
Set output timing
Start counter
Waveform output
Select the compare match output mode (0, 1, or
toggle) in TIOR. When a waveform output mode
is selected, the pin switches from its generic input/
output function to the output compare function
(TIOCA or TIOCB). An output compare pin outputs
Set a value in GRA or GRB to designate the
compare match timing.
Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer
counter.
1
2
3
0 until the first compare match occurs.
1.
2.
3.
341
Figure 10-20 0 and 1 Output (Examples)
Figure 10-21 shows examples of toggle output. TCNT operates as a periodic counter, cleared
by compare match B. Toggle output is selected for both compare match A and B.
Figure 10-21 Toggle Output (Example)
Time
H'FFFF
GRB
TIOCB
TIOCA
GRA
No change
No change
No change
No change
1 output
0 output
TCNT value
H'0000
GRB
TIOCB
TIOCA
GRA
TCNT value
Time
Counter cleared by compare match with GRB
Toggle
output
Toggle
output
H'0000
342
• Output compare timing
The compare match signal is generated in the last state in which TCNT and the general
register match (when TCNT changes from the matching value to the next value). When the
compare match signal is generated, the output value selected in TIOR is output at the output
compare pin (TIOCA or TIOCB). When TCNT matches a general register, the compare
match signal is not generated until the next counter clock pulse.
Figure 10-22 shows the output compare timing.
Figure 10-22 Output Compare Timing
Input Capture Function: The TCNT value can be captured into a general register when a
transition occurs at an input capture/output compare pin (TIOCA or TIOCB). Capture can take
place on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges. The input capture function can be used to
measure pulse width or period.
• Sample setup procedure for input capture
Figure 10-23 shows a sample procedure for setting up input capture.
N + 1N
N
ø
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
GR
Compare
match signal
TIOCA,
TIOCB
343
Figure 10-23 Setup Procedure for Input Capture (Example)
• Examples of input capture
Figure 10-24 illustrates input capture when the falling edge of TIOCB and both edges of
TIOCA are selected as capture edges. TCNT is cleared by input capture into GRB.
Figure 10-24 Input Capture (Example)
Input selection
Select input-capture input
Start counter
Input capture
Set TIOR to select the input capture function of a
general register and the rising edge, falling edge,
or both edges of the input capture signal. Clear the
port data direction bit to 0 before making these
TIOR settings.
Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer
counter.
1
2
1.
2.
H'0005
H'0180
Time
H'0180
H'0160
H'0005
H'0000
TIOCB
TIOCA
GRA
GRB
Counter cleared by TIOCB
input (falling edge)
TCNT value
H'0160
344
• Input capture signal timing
Input capture on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected by settings in
TIOR. Figure 10-25 shows the timing when the rising edge is selected. The pulse width of the
input capture signal must be at least 1.5 system clocks for single-edge capture, and 2.5 system
clocks for capture of both edges.
Figure 10-25 Input Capture Signal Timing
N
N
ø
Input-capture input
Internal input
capture signal
TCNT
GRA, GRB
345
10.4.3 Synchronization
The synchronization function enables two or more timer counters to be synchronized by writing
the same data to them simultaneously (synchronous preset). With appropriate TCR settings, two or
more timer counters can also be cleared simultaneously (synchronous clear). Synchronization
enables additional general registers to be associated with a single time base. Synchronization can
be selected for all channels (0 to 4).
Sample Setup Procedure for Synchronization: Figure 10-26 shows a sample procedure for
setting up synchronization.
Figure 10-26 Setup Procedure for Synchronization (Example)
Setup for synchronization
Synchronous preset
Set the SYNC bits to 1 in TSNC for the channels to be synchronized.
When a value is written in TCNT in one of the synchronized channels, the same value is
simultaneously written in TCNT in the other channels (synchronized preset).
1.
2.
2
3
1
5
4
5
Select synchronization
Synchronous preset
Write to TCNT
Synchronous clear
Clearing
synchronized to this
channel?
Select counter clear source
Start counter
Counter clear Synchronous clear
Start counter
Select counter clear source
Yes
No
Set the CCLR1 or CCLR0 bit in TCR to have the counter cleared by compare match or input capture.
Set the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR to have the counter cleared synchronously.
Set the STR bits in TSTR to 1 to start the synchronized counters.
3.
4.
5.
346
Example of Synchronization: Figure 10-27 shows an example of synchronization. Channels 0, 1,
and 2 are synchronized, and are set to operate in PWM mode. Channel 0 is set for counter clearing
by compare match with GRB0. Channels 1 and 2 are set for synchronous counter clearing. The
timer counters in channels 0, 1, and 2 are synchronously preset, and are synchronously cleared by
compare match with GRB0. A three-phase PWM waveform is output from pins TIOCA0,
TIOCA1, and TIOCA2. For further information on PWM mode, see section 10.4.4, PWM Mode.
Figure 10-27 Synchronization (Example)
Time
TIOCA1
TIOCA0
GRA2
GRA1
GRB2
GRA0
GRB1
GRB0
Value of TCNT0 to TCNT2 Cleared by compare match with GRB0
H'0000
347
10.4.4 PWM Mode
In PWM mode GRA and GRB are paired and a PWM waveform is output from the TIOCA pin.
GRA specifies the time at which the PWM output changes to 1. GRB specifies the time at which
the PWM output changes to 0. If either GRA or GRB is selected as the counter clear source, a
PWM waveform with a duty cycle from 0% to 100% is output at the TIOCA pin. PWM mode can
be selected in all channels (0 to 4).
Table 10-4 summarizes the PWM output pins and corresponding registers. If the same value is set
in GRA and GRB, the output does not change when compare match occurs.
Table 10-4 PWM Output Pins and Registers
Channel Output Pin 1 Output 0 Output
0 TIOCA0GRA0 GRB0
1 TIOCA1GRA1 GRB1
2 TIOCA2GRA2 GRB2
3 TIOCA3GRA3 GRB3
4 TIOCA4GRA4 GRB4
348
Sample Setup Procedure for PWM Mode: Figure 10-28 shows a sample procedure for setting
up PWM mode.
Figure 10-28 Setup Procedure for PWM Mode (Example)
PWM mode 1. Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR to
select the counter clock source. If an
external clock source is selected, set
bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR to
select the desired edge(s) of the
external clock signal.
PWM mode
Select counter clock 1
Select counter clear source 2
Set GRA 3
Set GRB 4
Select PWM mode 5
Start counter 6
2. Set bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR
to select the counter clear source.
3. Set the time at which the PWM
waveform should go to 1 in GRA.
4. Set the time at which the PWM
waveform should go to 0 in GRB.
5. Set the PWM bit in TMDR to select
PWM mode. When PWM mode is
selected, regardless of the TIOR
contents, GRA and GRB become
output compare registers specifying
the times at which the PWM output
goes to 1 and 0. The TIOCA pin
automatically becomes the PWM
output pin. The TIOCB pin conforms
to the settings of bits IOB1 and IOB0
in TIOR. If TIOCB output is not
desired, clear both IOB1 and IOB0 to 0.
6. Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start
the timer counter.
349
Examples of PWM Mode: Figure 10-29 shows examples of operation in PWM mode. In PWM
mode TIOCA becomes an output pin. The output goes to 1 at compare match with GRA, and to 0
at compare match with GRB.
In the examples shown, TCNT is cleared by compare match with GRA or GRB. Synchronized
operation and free-running counting are also possible.
Figure 10-29 PWM Mode (Example 1)
TCNT value Counter cleared by compare match with GRA
Time
GRA
GRB
TIOCA
a. Counter cleared by GRA
TCNT value Counter cleared by compare match with GRB
Time
GRB
GRA
TIOCA
b. Counter cleared by GRB
H'0000
H'0000
350
Figure 10-30 shows examples of the output of PWM waveforms with duty cycles of 0% and
100%. If the counter is cleared by compare match with GRB, and GRA is set to a higher value
than GRB, the duty cycle is 0%. If the counter is cleared by compare match with GRA, and GRB
is set to a higher value than GRA, the duty cycle is 100%.
Figure 10-30 PWM Mode (Example 2)
TCNT value Counter cleared by compare match with GRB
Time
GRB
GRA
TIOCA
a. 0% duty cycle
TCNT value Counter cleared by compare match with GRA
Time
GRA
GRB
TIOCA
b. 100% duty cycle
Write to GRA Write to GRA
Write to GRB Write to GRB
H'0000
H'0000
351
10.4.5 Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode
In reset-synchronized PWM mode channels 3 and 4 are combined to produce three pairs of
complementary PWM waveforms, all having one waveform transition point in common.
When reset-synchronized PWM mode is selected TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCA4, TOCXA4,
TIOCB4, and TOCXB4automatically become PWM output pins, and TCNT3 functions as an up-
counter.
Table 10-5 lists the PWM output pins. Table 10-6 summarizes the register settings.
Table 10-5 Output Pins in Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode
Channel Output Pin Description
3 TIOCA3PWM output 1
TIOCB3PWM output 1´ (complementary waveform to PWM output 1)
4 TIOCA4PWM output 2
TOCXA4PWM output 2´ (complementary waveform to PWM output 2)
TIOCB4PWM output 3
TOCXB4PWM output 3´ (complementary waveform to PWM output 3)
Table 10-6 Register Settings in Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode
Register Setting
TCNT3 Initially set to H'0000
TCNT4 Not used (operates independently)
GRA3 Specifies the count period of TCNT3
GRB3 Specifies a transition point of PWM waveforms output from TIOCA3and TIOCB3
GRA4 Specifies a transition point of PWM waveforms output from TIOCA4and TOCXA4
GRB4 Specifies a transition point of PWM waveforms output from TIOCB4and TOCXB4
352
Sample Setup Procedure for Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode: Figure 10-31 shows a sample
procedure for setting up reset-synchronized PWM mode.
Figure 10-31 Setup Procedure for Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode (Example)
Reset-synchronized PWM mode 1. Clear the STR3 bit in TSTR to 0 to
halt TCNT3. Reset-synchronized
PWM mode must be set up while
TCNT3 is halted.
Stop counter 1
Select counter clock 2
Select counter clear source 3
Select reset-synchronized
PWM mode 4
Set TCNT 5
Set general registers 6
2. Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR to
select the counter clock source for
channel 3. If an external clock source
is selected, select the external clock
edge(s) with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0
in TCR.
3. Set bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR3
to select GRA3 compare match as
the counter clear source.
4. Set bits CMD1 and CMD0 in TFCR to
select reset-synchronized PWM mode.
TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCA4, TIOCB4,
TOCXA4, and TOCXB4 automatically
become PWM output pins.
5. Preset TCNT3 to H'0000. TCNT4
need not be preset.
Start counter 7
6. GRA3 is the waveform period register.
Set the waveform period value in
GRA3. Set transition times of the
PWM output waveforms in GRB3,
GRA4, and GRB4. Set times within
the compare match range of TCNT3.
353
Example of Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode: Figure 10-32 shows an example of operation in
reset-synchronized PWM mode. TCNT3 operates as an up-counter in this mode. TCNT4 operates
independently, detached from GRA4 and GRB4. When TCNT3 matches GRA3, TCNT3 is
cleared and resumes counting from H'0000. The PWM outputs toggle at compare match of
TCNT3 with GRB3, GRA4, and GRB4 respectively, and all toggle when the counter is cleared.
Figure 10-32 Operation in Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode (Example)
(when OLS3 = OLS4 = 1)
For the settings and operation when reset-synchronized PWM mode and buffer mode are both
selected, see section 10.4.8, Buffering.
TCNT3 value Counter cleared at compare match with GRA3
Time
GRA3
GRB3
GRA4
GRB4
H'0000
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TIOCA4
TOCXA4
TIOCB4
TOCXB4
354
10.4.6 Complementary PWM Mode
In complementary PWM mode channels 3 and 4 are combined to output three pairs of
complementary, non-overlapping PWM waveforms.
When complementary PWM mode is selected TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCA4, TOCXA4, TIOCB4,
and TOCXB4automatically become PWM output pins, and TCNT3 and TCNT4 function as
up/down-counters.
Table 10-7 lists the PWM output pins. Table 10-8 summarizes the register settings.
Table 10-7 Output Pins in Complementary PWM Mode
Channel Output Pin Description
3 TIOCA3PWM output 1
TIOCB3PWM output 1´ (non-overlapping complementary waveform to PWM
output 1)
4 TIOCA4PWM output 2
TOCXA4PWM output 2´ (non-overlapping complementary waveform to PWM
output 2)
TIOCB4PWM output 3
TOCXB4PWM output 3´ (non-overlapping complementary waveform to PWM
output 3)
Table 10-8 Register Settings in Complementary PWM Mode
Register Setting
TCNT3 Initially specifies the non-overlap margin (difference to TCNT4)
TCNT4 Initially set to H'0000
GRA3 Specifies the upper limit value of TCNT3 minus 1
GRB3 Specifies a transition point of PWM waveforms output from TIOCA3and TIOCB3
GRA4 Specifies a transition point of PWM waveforms output from TIOCA4and TOCXA4
GRB4 Specifies a transition point of PWM waveforms output from TIOCB4and TOCXB4
355
Setup Procedure for Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 10-33 shows a sample procedure for
setting up complementary PWM mode.
Figure 10-33 Setup Procedure for Complementary PWM Mode (Example)
Complementary PWM mode 1. Clear bits STR3 and STR4 to 0 in
TSTR to halt the timer counters.
Complementary PWM mode must be
set up while TCNT3 and TCNT4 are
halted.
Complementary PWM mode
Stop counting 1
Select counter clock 2
Select complementary
PWM mode 3
Set TCNTs 4
Set general registers 5
Start counters 6
2. Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR to
select the same counter clock source
for channels 3 and 4. If an external
clock source is selected, select the
external clock edge(s) with bits
CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. Do not
select any counter clear source
with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR.
3. Set bits CMD1 and CMD0 in TFCR
to select complementary PWM mode.
TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCA4, TIOCB4,
TOCXA4, and TOCXB4 automatically
become PWM output pins.
4. Clear TCNT4 to H'0000. Set the
non-overlap margin in TCNT3. Do not
set TCNT3 and TCNT4 to the same
value.
5. GRA3 is the waveform period
register. Set the upper limit value of
TCNT3 minus 1 in GRA3. Set
transition times of the PWM output
waveforms in GRB3, GRA4, and
GRB4. Set times within the compare
match range of TCNT3 and TCNT4.
T X (X: initial setting of GRB3,
GRA4, or GRB4. T: initial setting of
TCNT3)
≤
6. Set bits STR3 and STR4 in TSTR to
1 to start TCNT3 and TCNT4.
Note: After exiting complementary PWM mode, to resume operating in complementary
PWM mode, follow the entire setup procedure from step 1 again.
356
Clearing Procedure for Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 10-34 shows the steps to clear
complementary PWM mode.
Figure 10-34 Clearing Procedure for Complementary PWM Mode
Complementary PWM mode 1. Clear the CMD1 bit of TFCR to 0 to
set channels 3 and 4 to normal
operating mode.
Normal operating mode
Clear complementary PWM mode 1
Stop counter operation 2
2. After setting channels 3 and 4 to
normal operating mode, wait at least
one counter clock period, then clear
bits STR3 and STR4 of TSTR to 0 to
stop counter operation of TCNT3 and
TCNT4.
357
Examples of Complementary PWM Mode: Figure 10-35 shows an example of operation in
complementary PWM mode. TCNT3 and TCNT4 operate as up/down-counters, counting down
from compare match between TCNT3 and GRA3 and counting up from the point at which
TCNT4 underflows. During each up-and-down counting cycle, PWM waveforms are generated by
compare match with general registers GRB3, GRA4, and GRB4. Since TCNT3 is initially set to a
higher value than TCNT4, compare match events occur in the sequence TCNT3, TCNT4, TCNT4,
TCNT3.
Figure 10-35 Operation in Complementary PWM Mode (Example 1, OLS3 = OLS4 = 1)
TCNT3 and
TCNT4 values Down-counting starts at compare
match between TCNT3 and GRA3
Time
GRA3
GRB3
GRA4
GRB4
H'0000
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
TIOCA4
TOCXA4
TIOCB4
TOCXB4
TCNT3
TCNT4
Up-counting starts when
TCNT4 underflows
358
Figure 10-36 shows examples of waveforms with 0% and 100% duty cycles (in one phase) in
complementary PWM mode. In this example the outputs change at compare match with GRB3, so
waveforms with duty cycles of 0% or 100% can be output by setting GRB3 to a value larger than
GRA3. The duty cycle can be changed easily during operation by use of the buffer registers. For
further information see section 10.4.8, Buffering.
Figure 10-36 Operation in Complementary PWM Mode (Example 2, OLS3 = OLS4 = 1)
TCNT3 and
TCNT4 values
Time
GRA3
GRB3
TIOCA3
TIOCB30% duty cycle
a. 0% duty cycle
TCNT3 and
TCNT4 values
Time
GRA3
GRB3
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
100% duty cycle
b. 100% duty cycle
H'0000
H'0000
359
In complementary PWM mode, TCNT3 and TCNT4 overshoot and undershoot at the transitions
between up-counting and down-counting. The setting conditions for the IMFA bit in channel 3 and
the OVF bit in channel 4 differ from the usual conditions. In buffered operation the buffer transfer
conditions also differ. Timing diagrams are shown in figures 10-37 and 10-38.
Figure 10-37 Overshoot Timing
TCNT3
GRA3
IMFA
Buffer transfer
signal (BR to GR)
GR
N – 1 N N + 1 N N – 1
N
Set to 1
Flag not set
No buffer transfer
Buffer transfer
360
Figure 10-38 Undershoot Timing
In channel 3, IMFA is set to 1 only during up-counting. In channel 4, OVF is set to 1 only when an
underflow occurs. When buffering is selected, buffer register contents are transferred to the
general register at compare match A3 during up-counting, and when TCNT4 underflows.
General Register Settings in Complementary PWM Mode: When setting up general registers
for complementary PWM mode or changing their settings during operation, note the following
points.
• Initial settings
Do not set values from H'0000 to T – 1 (where T is the initial value of TCNT3). After the
counters start and the first compare match A3 event has occurred, however, settings in this
range also become possible.
• Changing settings
Use the buffer registers. Correct waveform output may not be obtained if a general register is
written to directly.
• Cautions on changes of general register settings
Figure 10-39 shows six correct examples and one incorrect example.
TCNT4
OVF
Buffer transfer
signal (BR to GR)
GR
H'0001 H'0000 H'FFFF H'0000
Set to 1
Flag not set
No buffer transfer
Buffer transfer
Underflow Overflow
361
Figure 10-39 Changing a General Register Setting by Buffer Transfer (Example 1)
— Buffer transfer at transition from up-counting to down-counting
If the general register value is in the range from GRA3 – T + 1 to GRA3, do not transfer a
buffer register value outside this range. Conversely, if the general register value is outside
this range, do not transfer a value within this range. See figure 10-40.
Figure 10-40 Changing a General Register Setting by Buffer Transfer (Caution 1)
GRA3
GR
H'0000
BR
GR
Not allowed
GRA3 + 1
GRA3
GRA3 – T + 1
GRA3 – T
Illegal changes
TCNT3
TCNT4
362
— Buffer transfer at transition from down-counting to up-counting
If the general register value is in the range from H'0000 to T – 1, do not transfer a buffer
register value outside this range. Conversely, when a general register value is outside this
range, do not transfer a value within this range. See figure 10-41.
Figure 10-41 Changing a General Register Setting by Buffer Transfer (Caution 2)
T
T – 1
H'0000
H'FFFF
Illegal changes
TCNT3
TCNT4
363
— General register settings outside the counting range (H'0000 to GRA3)
Waveforms with a duty cycle of 0% or 100% can be output by setting a general register to
a value outside the counting range. When a buffer register is set to a value outside the
counting range, then later restored to a value within the counting range, the counting
direction (up or down) must be the same both times. See figure 10-42.
Figure 10-42 Changing a General Register Setting by Buffer Transfer (Example 2)
Settings can be made in this way by detecting GRA3 compare match or TCNT4
underflow before writing to the buffer register. They can also be made by using GRA3
compare match to activate the DMAC.
0% duty cycle 100% duty cycle
Write during down-counting Write during up-counting
GRA3
GR
H'0000
Output pin
Output pin
BR
GR
364
10.4.7 Phase Counting Mode
In phase counting mode the phase difference between two external clock inputs (at the TCLKA
and TCLKB pins) is detected, and TCNT2 counts up or down accordingly.
In phase counting mode, the TCLKA and TCLKB pins automatically function as external clock
input pins and TCNT2 becomes an up/down-counter, regardless of the settings of bits TPSC2 to
TPSC0, CKEG1, and CKEG0 in TCR2. Settings of bits CCLR1, CCLR0 in TCR2, and settings in
TIOR2, TIER2, TSR2, GRA2, and GRB2 are valid. The input capture and output compare
functions can be used, and interrupts can be generated.
Phase counting is available only in channel 2.
Sample Setup Procedure for Phase Counting Mode: Figure 10-43 shows a sample procedure
for setting up phase counting mode.
Figure 10-43 Setup Procedure for Phase Counting Mode (Example)
Phase counting mode
Select phase counting mode
Select flag setting condition
Start counter
1
2
3
Phase counting mode
1.
2.
3.
Set the MDF bit in TMDR to 1 to select
phase counting mode.
Select the flag setting condition with
the FDIR bit in TMDR.
Set the STR2 bit to 1 in TSTR to start
the timer counter.
365
Example of Phase Counting Mode: Figure 10-44 shows an example of operations in phase
counting mode. Table 10-9 lists the up-counting and down-counting conditions for TCNT2.
In phase counting mode both the rising and falling edges of TCLKA and TCLKB are counted.
The phase difference between TCLKA and TCLKB must be at least 1.5 states, the phase overlap
must also be at least 1.5 states, and the pulse width must be at least 2.5 states. See figure 10-45.
Figure 10-44 Operation in Phase Counting Mode (Example)
Table 10-9 Up/Down Counting Conditions
Counting Direction Up-Counting Down-Counting
TCLKB High Low High Low
TCLKA Low High Low High
Figure 10-45 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode
TCNT2 value
Counting up Counting down
Time
TCLKB
TCLKA
TCLKA
TCLKB
Phase
difference Phase
difference Pulse width Pulse width
Overlap Overlap
Phase difference and overlap:
Pulse width: at least 1.5 states
at least 2.5 states
366
10.4.8 Buffering
Buffering operates differently depending on whether a general register is an output compare
register or an input capture register, with further differences in reset-synchronized PWM mode
and complementary PWM mode. Buffering is available only in channels 3 and 4. Buffering
operations under the conditions mentioned above are described next.
• General register used for output compare
The buffer register value is transferred to the general register at compare match. See
figure 10-46.
Figure 10-46 Compare Match Buffering
• General register used for input capture
The TCNT value is transferred to the general register at input capture. The previous general
register value is transferred to the buffer register.
See figure 10-47.
Figure 10-47 Input Capture Buffering
Compare match signal
Comparator TCNTGRBR
Input capture signal
BR GR TCNT
367
• Complementary PWM mode
The buffer register value is transferred to the general register when TCNT3 and TCNT4
change counting direction. This occurs at the following two times:
— When TCNT3 compare matches GRA3
— When TCNT4 underflows
• Reset-synchronized PWM mode
The buffer register value is transferred to the general register at compare match A3.
Sample Buffering Setup Procedure: Figure 10-48 shows a sample buffering setup procedure.
Figure 10-48 Buffering Setup Procedure (Example)
Buffering
Select general register functions
Set buffer bits
Start counters
Buffered operation
11.
2.
3.
2
3
Set TIOR to select the output compare or input
capture function of the general registers.
Set bits BFA3, BFA4, BFB3, and BFB4 in TFCR
to select buffering of the required general registers.
Set the STR bits to 1 in TSTR to start the timer
counters.
368
Examples of Buffering: Figure 10-49 shows an example in which GRA is set to function as an
output compare register buffered by BRA, TCNT is set to operate as a periodic counter cleared by
GRB compare match, and TIOCA and TIOCB are set to toggle at compare match A and B.
Because of the buffer setting, when TIOCA toggles at compare match A, the BRA value is
simultaneously transferred to GRA. This operation is repeated each time compare match A occurs.
Figure 10-50 shows the transfer timing.
Figure 10-49 Register Buffering (Example 1: Buffering of Output Compare Register)
GRB
H'0250
H'0200
H'0100
H'0000
BRA
GRA
TIOCB
TIOCA
TCNT value Counter cleared by compare match B
Time
Toggle
output
Toggle
output
Compare match A
H'0200
H'0250
H'0100
H'0200 H'0100
H'0200
H'0200
369
Figure 10-50 Compare Match and Buffer Transfer Timing (Example)
ø
TCNT
BR
GR
Compare
match signal
Buffer transfer
signal
n n + 1
nN
N
370
Figure 10-51 shows an example in which GRA is set to function as an input capture register
buffered by BRA, and TCNT is cleared by input capture B. The falling edge is selected as the
input capture edge at TIOCB. Both edges are selected as input capture edges at TIOCA. Because
of the buffer setting, when the TCNT value is captured into GRA at input capture A, the previous
GRA value is simultaneously transferred to BRA. Figure 10-52 shows the transfer timing.
Figure 10-51 Register Buffering (Example 2: Buffering of Input Capture Register)
H'0180
H'0160
H'0005
H'0000
TIOCB
TIOCA
GRA
BRA
GRB
H'0005
H'0160
H'0005
H'0180
TCNT value Counter cleared by
input capture B
Time
Input capture A
H'0160
371
Figure 10-52 Input Capture and Buffer Transfer Timing (Example)
ø
TCNT
GR
BR
TIOC pin
Input capture
signal
n n + 1 N
n
M
N + 1
N
n
M
m
n
M
372
Figure 10-53 shows an example in which GRB3 is buffered by BRB3 in complementary PWM
mode. Buffering is used to set GRB3 to a higher value than GRA3, generating a PWM waveform
with 0% duty cycle. The BRB3 value is transferred to GRB3 when TCNT3 matches GRA3, and
when TCNT4 underflows.
Figure 10-53 Register Buffering (Example 3: Buffering in Complementary PWM Mode)
TCNT3 and
TCNT4 values
Time
GRA3
H'0999
H'0000
TCNT3
TCNT4
GRB3
H'1FFF
BRB3
GRB3
TIOCA3
TIOCB3
H'0999
H'0999 H'0999
H'1FFF H'0999
H'1FFF H'1FFF H'0999
373
10.4.9 ITU Output Timing
The ITU outputs from channels 3 and 4 can be disabled by bit settings in TOER or by an external
trigger, or inverted by bit settings in TOCR.
Timing of Enabling and Disabling of ITU Output by TOER: In this example an ITU output is
disabled by clearing a master enable bit to 0 in TOER. An arbitrary value can be output by
appropriate settings of the data register (DR) and data direction register (DDR) of the
corresponding input/output port. Figure 10-54 illustrates the timing of the enabling and disabling
of ITU output by TOER.
Figure 10-54 Timing of Disabling of ITU Output by Writing to TOER (Example)
ø
Address bus
TOER
ITU output pin
TOER address
Timer output I/O port
Generic input/outputITU output
T
1 T
2 T
3
374
Timing of Disabling of ITU Output by External Trigger: If the XTGD bit is cleared to 0 in
TOCR in reset-synchronized PWM mode or complementary PWM mode, when an input capture
A signal occurs in channel 1, the master enable bits are cleared to 0 in TOER, disabling ITU
output. Figure 10-55 shows the timing.
Figure 10-55 Timing of Disabling of ITU Output by External Trigger (Example)
Timing of Output Inversion by TOCR: The output levels in reset-synchronized PWM mode and
complementary PWM mode can be inverted by inverting the output level select bits (OLS4 and
OLS3) in TOCR. Figure 10-56 shows the timing.
Figure 10-56 Timing of Inverting of ITU Output Level by Writing to TOCR (Example)
ø
TIOCA1 pin
TOER
ITU output I/O port ITU output I/O port
Generic
input/output Generic
input/output
ITU outputITU output
Input capture
signal
ITU output
pins
NNH'C0 H'C0
N: Arbitrary setting (H'C1 to H'FF)
ø
Address bus
TOCR
ITU output pin
TOCR address
Inverted
T
1 T
2 T
3
375
10.5 Interrupts
The ITU has two types of interrupts: input capture/compare match interrupts, and overflow
interrupts.
10.5.1 Setting of Status Flags
Timing of Setting of IMFA and IMFB at Compare Match: IMFA and IMFB are set to 1 by a
compare match signal generated when TCNT matches a general register (GR). The compare
match signal is generated in the last state in which the values match (when TCNT is updated from
the matching count to the next count). Therefore, when TCNT matches a general register, the
compare match signal is not generated until the next timer clock input. Figure 10-57 shows the
timing of the setting of IMFA and IMFB.
Figure 10-57 Timing of Setting of IMFA and IMFB by Compare Match
ø
TCNT
GR
IMF
IMI
TCNT input
clock
Compare
match signal
N N + 1
N
376
Timing of Setting of IMFA and IMFB by Input Capture: IMFA and IMFB are set to 1 by an
input capture signal. The TCNT contents are simultaneously transferred to the corresponding
general register. Figure 10-58 shows the timing.
Figure 10-58 Timing of Setting of IMFA and IMFB by Input Capture
Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF): OVF is set to 1 when TCNT overflows from H'FFFF
to H'0000 or underflows from H'0000 to H'FFFF. Figure 10-59 shows the timing.
Input capture
signal
N
N
ø
IMF
TCNT
GR
IMI
377
Figure 10-59 Timing of Setting of OVF
10.5.2 Clearing of Status Flags
If the CPU reads a status flag while it is set to 1, then writes 0 in the status flag, the status flag is
cleared. Figure 10-60 shows the timing.
Figure 10-60 Timing of Clearing of Status Flags
Overflow
signal
H'FFFF H'0000
ø
TCNT
OVF
OVI
ø
Address
IMF, OVF
TSR write cycle
TSR address
T1T2T3
378
10.5.3 Interrupt Sources and DMA Controller Activation
Each ITU channel can generate a compare match/input capture A interrupt, a compare match/input
capture B interrupt, and an overflow interrupt. In total there are 15 interrupt sources, all
independently vectored. An interrupt is requested when the interrupt request flag and interrupt
enable bit are both set to 1.
The priority order of the channels can be modified in interrupt priority registers A and B (IPRA
and IPRB). For details see section 5, Interrupt Controller.
Compare match/input capture A interrupts in channels 0 to 3 can activate the DMA controller
(DMAC). When the DMAC is activated a CPU interrupt is not requested.
Table 10-10 lists the interrupt sources.
Table 10-10 ITU Interrupt Sources
Interrupt DMAC
Channel Source Description Activatable Priority*
0 IMIA0 Compare match/input capture A0 Yes High
IMIB0 Compare match/input capture B0 No
OVI0 Overflow 0 No
1 IMIA1 Compare match/input capture A1 Yes
IMIB1 Compare match/input capture B1 No
OVI1 Overflow 1 No
2 IMIA2 Compare match/input capture A2 Yes
IMIB2 Compare match/input capture B2 No
OVI2 Overflow 2 No
3 IMIA3 Compare match/input capture A3 Yes
IMIB3 Compare match/input capture B3 No
OVI3 Overflow 3 No
4 IMIA4 Compare match/input capture A4 No
IMIB4 Compare match/input capture B4 No
OVI4 Overflow 4 No Low
Note: *The priority immediately after a reset is indicated. Inter-channel priorities can be changed
by settings in IPRA and IPRB.
379
10.6 Usage Notes
This section describes contention and other matters requiring special attention during ITU
operations.
Contention between TCNT Write and Clear: If a counter clear signal occurs in the T3state of a
TCNT write cycle, clearing of the counter takes priority and the write is not performed. See
figure 10-61.
Figure 10-61 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear
ø
Address bus
Internal write signal
TCNT write cycle
TCNT address
T1T2T3
380
Contention between TCNT Word Write and Increment: If an increment pulse occurs in the T3
state of a TCNT word write cycle, writing takes priority and TCNT is not incremented. See
figure 10-62.
Figure 10-62 Contention between TCNT Word Write and Increment
ø
Address bus
Internal write signal
TCNT input clock
TCNT N
TCNT address
M
TCNT write data
TCNT word write cycle
T1T2T3
381
Contention between TCNT Byte Write and Increment: If an increment pulse occurs in the T2
or T3state of a TCNT byte write cycle, writing takes priority and TCNT is not incremented. The
TCNT byte that was not written retains its previous value. See figure 10-63, which shows an
increment pulse occurring in the T2state of a byte write to TCNTH.
Figure 10-63 Contention between TCNT Byte Write and Increment
ø
Address bus
Internal write signal
TCNT input clock
TCNTH
TCNTL
TCNTH byte write cycle
T1T2T3
N
TCNTH address
M
TCNT write data
XXX + 1
382
Contention between General Register Write and Compare Match: If a compare match occurs
in the T3state of a general register write cycle, writing takes priority and the compare match
signal is inhibited. See figure 10-64.
Figure 10-64 Contention between General Register Write and Compare Match
ø
Address bus
Internal write signal
TCNT
GR
Compare match signal
General register write cycle
T1T2T3
N
GR address
M
N N + 1
General register write data
Inhibited
383
Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow or Underflow: If an overflow occurs in the T3
state of a TCNT write cycle, writing takes priority and the counter is not incremented. OVF is
set to 1.The same holds for underflow. See figure 10-65.
Figure 10-65 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow
ø
Address bus
Internal write signal
TCNT input clock
Overflow signal
TCNT
OVF
H'FFFF
TCNT address
M
TCNT write data
TCNT write cycle
T1T2T3
384
Contention between General Register Read and Input Capture: If an input capture signal
occurs during the T3state of a general register read cycle, the value before input capture is read.
See figure 10-66.
Figure 10-66 Contention between General Register Read and Input Capture
ø
Address bus
Internal read signal
Input capture signal
GR
Internal data bus
GR address
X
General register read cycle
T1T2T3
XM
385
Contention between Counter Clearing by Input Capture and Counter Increment: If an input
capture signal and counter increment signal occur simultaneously, the counter is cleared according
to the input capture signal. The counter is not incremented by the increment signal. The value
before the counter is cleared is transferred to the general register. See figure 10-67.
Figure 10-67 Contention between Counter Clearing by Input Capture and
Counter Increment
ø
Input capture signal
Counter clear signal
TCNT input clock
TCNT
GR N
N H'0000
386
Contention between General Register Write and Input Capture: If an input capture signal
occurs in the T3state of a general register write cycle, input capture takes priority and the write to
the general register is not performed. See figure 10-68.
Figure 10-68 Contention between General Register Write and Input Capture
Note on Waveform Period Setting: When a counter is cleared by compare match, the counter is
cleared in the last state at which the TCNT value matches the general register value, at the time
when this value would normally be updated to the next count. The actual counter frequency is
therefore given by the following formula:
f =
(f: counter frequency. ø: system clock frequency. N: value set in general register.)
ø
Address bus
Internal write signal
Input capture signal
TCNT
GR M
GR address
General register write cycle
T1T2T3
M
ø
(N + 1)
387
Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture: If a buffer register is used for
input capture buffering and an input capture signal occurs in the T3state of a write cycle, input
capture takes priority and the write to the buffer register is not performed.
See figure 10-69.
Figure 10-69 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture
ø
Address bus
Internal write signal
Input capture signal
GR
BR
BR address
Buffer register write cycle
T1T2T3
NX
MN
TCNT value
388
Note on Synchronous Preset: When channels are synchronized, if a TCNT value is modified by
byte write access, all 16 bits of all synchronized counters assume the same value as the counter
that was addressed.
(Example) When channels 2 and 3 are synchronized
Note on Setup of Reset-Synchronized PWM Mode and Complementary PWM Mode: When
setting bits CMD1 and CMD0 in TFCR, take the following precautions:
• Write to bits CMD1 and CMD0 only when TCNT3 and TCNT4 are stopped.
• Do not switch directly between reset-synchronized PWM mode and complementary PWM
mode. First switch to normal mode (by clearing bit CMD1 to 0), then select reset-
synchronized PWM mode or complementary PWM mode.
• Byte write to channel 2 or byte write to channel 3
TCNT2
TCNT3
W
Y
X
Z
TCNT2
TCNT3
A
A
X
X
TCNT2
TCNT3
Y
Y
A
A
W d it t h l 2 d it t h l 3
Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte
Upper byte Lower byte
Write A to upper byte
of channel 2
Write A to lower byte
of channel 3
389
390
ITU Operating Modes
Table 10-11 (a) ITU Operating Modes (Channel 0)
Register Settings
TSNC TMDR TFCR TOCR TOER TIOR0 TCR0
Reset-
Comple- Synchro- Output
Synchro- mentary nized Buffer- Level Master Clear Clock
Operating Mode nization MDF FDIR PWM PWM PWM ing XTGD Select Enable IOA IOB Select Select
Synchronous preset SYNC0 = 1 — — o——————oooo
PWM mode o— — PWM0 = 1 — — — — — — — o*oo
Output compare A o— — PWM0 = 0 — — — — — — IOA2 = 0 ooo
Other bits
unrestricted
Output compare B o——o——————oIOB2 = 0 oo
Other bits
unrestricted
Input capture A o— — PWM0 = 0 — — — — — — IOA2 = 1 ooo
Other bits
unrestricted
Input capture B o— — PWM0 = 0 — — — — — — oIOB2 = 1 oo
Other bits
unrestricted
Counter By compare o——o——————ooCCLR1 = 0 o
clearing match/input CCLR0 = 1
capture A
By compare o——o——————ooCCLR1 = 1 o
match/input CCLR0 = 0
capture B
Syn- SYNC0 = 1 — — o——————ooCCLR1 = 1 o
chronous CCLR0 = 1
clear
Legend: oSetting available (valid). — Setting does not affect this mode.
Note: *The input capture function cannot be used in PWM mode. If compare match A and compare match B occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited.
391
Table 10-11 (b) ITU Operating Modes (Channel 1)
Register Settings
TSNC TMDR TFCR TOCR TOER TIOR1 TCR1
Reset-
Comple- Synchro- Output
Synchro- mentary nized Buffer- Level Master Clear Clock
Operating Mode nization MDF FDIR PWM PWM PWM ing XTGD Select Enable IOA IOB Select Select
Synchronous preset SYNC1 = 1 — — o——————oooo
PWM mode o— — PWM1 = 1 — — — — — — — o*1oo
Output compare A o— — PWM1 = 0 — — — — — — IOA2 = 0 ooo
Other bits
unrestricted
Output compare B o——o——————oIOB2 = 0 oo
Other bits
unrestricted
Input capture A o— — PWM1 = 0 — — — o*2— — IOA2 = 1 ooo
Other bits
unrestricted
Input capture B o— — PWM1 = 0 — — — — — — oIOB2 = 1 oo
Other bits
unrestricted
Counter By compare o——o——————ooCCLR1 = 0 o
clearing match/input CCLR0 = 1
capture A
By compare o——o——————ooCCLR1 = 1 o
match/input CCLR0 = 0
capture B
Syn- SYNC1 = 1 — — o——————ooCCLR1 = 1 o
chronous CCLR0 = 1
clear
Legend: oSetting available (valid). — Setting does not affect this mode.
Notes: 1. The input capture function cannot be used in PWM mode. If compare match A and compare match B occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited.
2. Valid only when channels 3 and 4 are operating in complementary PWM mode or reset-synchronized PWM mode.
392
Table 10-11 (c) ITU Operating Modes (Channel 2)
Register Settings
TSNC TMDR TFCR TOCR TOER TIOR2 TCR2
Reset-
Comple- Synchro- Output
Synchro- mentary nized Buffer- Level Master Clear Clock
Operating Mode nization MDF FDIR PWM PWM PWM ing XTGD Select Enable IOA IOB Select Select
Synchronous preset SYNC2 = 1 o—o——————oooo
PWM mode oo— PWM2 = 1 — — — — — — — o*oo
Output compare A oo— PWM2 = 0 — — — — — — IOA2 = 0 ooo
Other bits
unrestricted
Output compare B oo—o——————oIOB2 = 0 oo
Other bits
unrestricted
Input capture A oo— PWM2 = 0 — — — — — — IOA2 = 1 ooo
Other bits
unrestricted
Input capture B oo— PWM2 = 0 — — — — — — oIOB2 = 1 oo
Other bits
unrestricted
Counter By compare oo—o——————ooCCLR1 = 0 o
clearing match/input CCLR0 = 1
capture A
By compare oo—o——————ooCCLR1 = 1 o
match/input CCLR0 = 0
capture B
Syn- SYNC2 = 1 o—o——————ooCCLR1 = 1 o
chronous CCLR0 = 1
clear
Phase counting oMDF = 1 oo ——————ooo—
mode
Legend: oSetting available (valid). — Setting does not affect this mode.
Note: *The input capture function cannot be used in PWM mode. If compare match A and compare match B occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited.
393
Table 10-11 (d) ITU Operating Modes (Channel 3)
Register Settings
TSNC TMDR TFCR TOCR TOER TIOR3 TCR3
Comple- Reset- Output
Synchro- mentary Synchro- Level Master Clear Clock
Operating Mode nization MDF FDIR PWM PWM nized PWM Buffering XTGD Select Enable IOA IOB Select Select
Synchronous preset SYNC3 = 1 — —
oo
*
3oo
——
o
*
1oooo
PWM mode
o
— — PWM3 = 1 CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0
o
——
o
—
o
*
2oo
Output compare A
o
— — PWM3 = 0 CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0
o
——
o
IOA2 = 0
oo o
Other bits
unrestricted
Output compare B
o
——
o
CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0
o
——
oo
IOB2 = 0
oo
Other bits
unrestricted
Input capture A
o
— — PWM3 = 0 CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0
o
— — EA3 ignored IOA2 = 1
oo o
Other bits Other bits
unrestricted unrestricted
Input capture B
o
— — PWM3 = 0 CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0
o
— — EB3 ignored
o
IOA2 = 1
oo
Other bits Other bits
unrestricted unrestricted
Counter By compare
o
——
o
Illegal setting:
o*4o
——
o
*
1oo
CCLR1 = 0
o
clearing match/input CMD1 = 1 CCLR0 = 1
capture A CMD0 = 0
By compare
o
——
o
CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0
o
——
o
*
1oo
CCLR1 = 1
o
match/input CCLR0 = 0
capture B
Syn- SYNC3 = 1 — —
o
Illegal setting:
oo
——
o
*
1oo
CCLR1 = 1
o
chronous CMD1 = 1 CCLR0 = 1
clear CMD0 = 0
Complementary
o*3
— — — CMD1 = 1 CMD1 = 1
oo
*
6
oo
— — CCLR1 = 0
o*5
PWM mode CMD0 = 0 CMD0 = 0 CCLR0 = 0
Reset-synchronized
o
— — — CMD1 = 1 CMD1 = 1
oo
*
6
oo
— — CCLR1 = 0
o
PWM mode CMD0 = 1 CMD0 = 1 CCLR0 = 1
Buffering
o
——
oo o
BFA3 = 1 — —
o*1oooo
(BRA) Other bits
unrestricted
Buffering
o
——
oo o
BFB3 = 1 — —
o*1oooo
(BRB) Other bits
unrestricted
Legend: oSetting available (valid). — Setting does not affect this mode.
Notes: 1. Master enable bit settings are valid only during waveform output.
2. The input capture function cannot be used in PWM mode. If compare match A and compare match B occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited.
3. Do not set both channels 3 and 4 for synchronous operation when complementary PWM mode is selected.
4. The counter cannot be cleared by input capture A when reset-synchronized PWM mode is selected.
5. In complementary PWM mode, select the same clock source for channels 3 and 4.
6. Use the input capture A function in channel 1.
394
Table 10-11 (e) ITU Operating Modes (Channel 4)
Register Settings
TSNC TMDR TFCR TOCR TOER TIOR4 TCR4
Comple- Reset- Output
Synchro- mentary Synchro- Level Master Clear Clock
Operating Mode nization MDF FDIR PWM PWM nized PWM Buffering XTGD Select Enable IOA IOB Select Select
Synchronous preset SYNC4 = 1 — —
oo
*
3oo
——
o
*
1oooo
PWM mode
o
— — PWM4 = 1 CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0
o
——
o
—
o
*
2oo
Output compare A
o
— — PWM4 = 0 CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0
o
——
o
IOA2 = 0
oo o
Other bits
unrestricted
Output compare B
o
——
o
CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0
o
——
oo
IOB2 = 0
oo
Other bits
unrestricted
Input capture A
o
— — PWM4 = 0 CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0
o
— — EA4 ignored IOA2 = 1
oo o
Other bits Other bits
unrestricted unrestricted
Input capture B
o
— — PWM4 = 0 CMD1 = 0 CMD1 = 0
o
— — EB4 ignored
o
IOB2 = 1
oo
Other bits Other bits
unrestricted unrestricted
Counter By compare
o
——
o
Illegal setting:
o*4o
——
o
*
1oo
CCLR1 = 0
o
clearing match/input CMD1 = 1 CCLR0 = 1
capture A CMD0 = 0
By compare
o
——
o
Illegal setting:
o*4o
——
o
*
1oo
CCLR1 = 1
o
match/input CMD1 = 1 CCLR0 = 0
capture B CMD0 = 0
Syn- SYNC4 = 1 — —
o
Illegal setting:
o*4o
——
o
*
1oo
CCLR1 = 1
o
chronous CMD1 = 1 CCLR0 = 1
clear CMD0 = 0
Complementary
o*3
— — — CMD1 = 1 CMD1 = 1
oooo
— — CCLR1 = 0
o*5
PWM mode CMD0 = 0 CMD0 = 0 CCLR0 = 0
Reset-synchronized
o
— — — CMD1 = 1 CMD1 = 1
oooo
——
o
*
6o
*
6
PWM mode CMD0 = 1 CMD0 = 1
Buffering
o
——
oo o
BFA4 = 1 — —
o*1oooo
(BRA) Other bits
unrestricted
Buffering
o
——
oo o
BFB4 = 1 — —
o*1oooo
(BRB) Other bits
unrestricted
Legend: oSetting available (valid). — Setting does not affect this mode.
Notes: 1. Master enable bit settings are valid only during waveform output.
2. The input capture function cannot be used in PWM mode. If compare match A and compare match B occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited.
3. Do not set both channels 3 and 4 for synchronous operation when complementary PWM mode is selected.
4. When reset-synchronized PWM mode is selected, TCNT4 operates independently and the counter clearing function is available. Waveform output is not affected.
5. In complementary PWM mode, select the same clock source for channels 3 and 4.
6. TCR4 settings are valid in reset-synchronized PWM mode, but TCNT4 operates independently, without affecting waveform output.
Section 11 Programmable Timing Pattern Controller
11.1 Overview
The H8/3048 Series has a built-in programmable timing pattern controller (TPC) that provides
pulse outputs by using the 16-bit integrated timer unit (ITU) as a time base. The TPC pulse
outputs are divided into 4-bit groups (group 3 to group 0) that can operate simultaneously and
independently.
11.1.1 Features
TPC features are listed below.
• 16-bit output data
Maximum 16-bit data can be output. TPC output can be enabled on a bit-by-bit basis.
• Four output groups
Output trigger signals can be selected in 4-bit groups to provide up to four different 4-bit
outputs.
• Selectable output trigger signals
Output trigger signals can be selected for each group from the compare-match signals of four
ITU channels.
• Non-overlap mode
A non-overlap margin can be provided between pulse outputs.
• Can operate together with the DMA controller (DMAC)
The compare-match signals selected as trigger signals can activate the DMAC for sequential
output of data without CPU intervention.
395
11.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 11-1 shows a block diagram of the TPC.
Figure 11-1 TPC Block Diagram
PADDR
NDERA
TPMR
PBDDR
NDERB
TPCR
Internal
data bus
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Control logic
ITU compare match signals
Pulse output
pins, group 3
PBDR
PADR
Legend
TPMR:
TPCR:
NDERB:
NDERA:
PBDDR:
PADDR:
NDRB:
NDRA:
PBDR:
PADR:
Pulse output
pins, group 2
Pulse output
pins, group 1
Pulse output
pins, group 0
TPC output mode register
TPC output control register
Next data enable register B
Next data enable register A
Port B data direction register
Port A data direction register
Next data register B
Next data register A
Port B data register
Port A data register
NDRB
NDRA
396
11.1.3 TPC Pins
Table 11-1 summarizes the TPC output pins.
Table 11-1 TPC Pins
Name Symbol I/O Function
TPC output 0 TP0Output Group 0 pulse output
TPC output 1 TP1Output
TPC output 2 TP2Output
TPC output 3 TP3Output
TPC output 4 TP4Output Group 1 pulse output
TPC output 5 TP5Output
TPC output 6 TP6Output
TPC output 7 TP7Output
TPC output 8 TP8Output Group 2 pulse output
TPC output 9 TP9Output
TPC output 10 TP10 Output
TPC output 11 TP11 Output
TPC output 12 TP12 Output Group 3 pulse output
TPC output 13 TP13 Output
TPC output 14 TP14 Output
TPC output 15 TP15 Output
397
11.1.4 Registers
Table 11-2 summarizes the TPC registers.
Table 11-2 TPC Registers
Address*1Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FFD1 Port A data direction register PADDR W H'00
H'FFD3 Port A data register PADR R/(W)*2H'00
H'FFD4 Port B data direction register PBDDR W H'00
H'FFD6 Port B data register PBDR R/(W)*2H'00
H'FFA0 TPC output mode register TPMR R/W H'F0
H'FFA1 TPC output control register TPCR R/W H'FF
H'FFA2 Next data enable register B NDERB R/W H'00
H'FFA3 Next data enable register A NDERA R/W H'00
H'FFA5/ Next data register A NDRA R/W H'00
H'FFA7*3
H'FFA4 Next data register B NDRB R/W H'00
H'FFA6*3
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Bits used for TPC output cannot be written.
3. The NDRA address is H'FFA5 when the same output trigger is selected for TPC output
groups 0 and 1 by settings in TPCR. When the output triggers are different, the NDRA
address is H'FFA7 for group 0 and H'FFA5 for group 1. Similarly, the address of NDRB
is H'FFA4 when the same output trigger is selected for TPC output groups 2 and 3 by
settings in TPCR. When the output triggers are different, the NDRB address is H'FFA6
for group 2 and H'FFA4 for group 3.
398
11.2 Register Descriptions
11.2.1 Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR)
PADDR is an 8-bit write-only register that selects input or output for each pin in port A.
Port A is multiplexed with pins TP7to TP0. Bits corresponding to pins used for TPC output must
be set to 1. For further information about PADDR, see section 9.11, Port A.
11.2.2 Port A Data Register (PADR)
PADR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores TPC output data for groups 0 and 1, when
these TPC output groups are used.
For further information about PADR, see section 9.11, Port A.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
PA DDR
0
W
Port A data direction 7 to 0
These bits select input or
output for port A pins
7
6
PA DDR
0
W
6
5
PA DDR
0
W
5
4
PA DDR
0
W
4
3
PA DDR
0
W
3
2
PA DDR
0
W
2
1
PA DDR
0
W
1
0
PA DDR
0
W
0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
0
PA
0
R/(W)
0
1
PA
0
R/(W)
1
2
PA
0
R/(W)
2
3
PA
0
R/(W)
3
4
PA
0
R/(W)
4
5
PA
0
R/(W)
5
6
PA
0
R/(W)
6
7
PA
0
R/(W)
7
Port A data 7 to 0
These bits store output data
for TPC output groups 0 and 1
********
Note: Bits selected for TPC output by NDERA settings become read-only bits.*
399
11.2.3 Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR)
PBDDR is an 8-bit write-only register that selects input or output for each pin in port B.
Port B is multiplexed with pins TP15 to TP8. Bits corresponding to pins used for TPC output must
be set to 1. For further information about PBDDR, see section 9.12, Port B.
11.2.4 Port B Data Register (PBDR)
PBDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores TPC output data for groups 2 and 3, when
these TPC output groups are used.
For further information about PBDR, see section 9.12, Port B.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
PB DDR
0
W
Port B data direction 7 to 0
These bits select input or
output for port B pins
7
6
PB DDR
0
W
6
5
PB DDR
0
W
5
4
PB DDR
0
W
4
3
PB DDR
0
W
3
2
PB DDR
0
W
2
1
PB DDR
0
W
1
0
PB DDR
0
W
0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
0
PB
0
R/(W)
0
1
PB
0
R/(W)
1
2
PB
0
R/(W)
2
3
PB
0
R/(W)
3
4
PB
0
R/(W)
4
5
PB
0
R/(W)
5
6
PB
0
R/(W)
6
7
PB
0
R/(W)
7
Port B data 7 to 0
These bits store output data
for TPC output groups 2 and 3
********
Note: Bits selected for TPC output by NDERB settings become read-only bits.*
400
11.2.5 Next Data Register A (NDRA)
NDRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the next output data for TPC output groups
1 and 0 (pins TP7to TP0). During TPC output, when an ITU compare match event specified in
TPCR occurs, NDRA contents are transferred to the corresponding bits in PADR. The address of
NDRA differs depending on whether TPC output groups 0 and 1 have the same output trigger or
different output triggers.
NDRA is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Same Trigger for TPC Output Groups 0 and 1: If TPC output groups 0 and 1 are triggered by
the same compare match event, the NDRA address is H'FFA5. The upper 4 bits belong to group 1
and the lower 4 bits to group 0. Address H'FFA7 consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be
modified and are always read as 1.
Address H'FFA5
Address H'FFA7
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
NDR7
0
R/W
6
NDR6
0
R/W
5
NDR5
0
R/W
4
NDR4
0
R/W
3
NDR3
0
R/W
2
NDR2
0
R/W
1
NDR1
0
R/W
0
NDR0
0
R/W
Next data 3 to 0
These bits store the next output
data for TPC output group 0
Next data 7 to 4
These bits store the next output
data for TPC output group 1
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
0
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
7
—
1
—
Reserved bits
401
Different Triggers for TPC Output Groups 0 and 1: If TPC output groups 0 and 1 are triggered
by different compare match events, the address of the upper 4 bits of NDRA (group 1) is H'FFA5
and the address of the lower 4 bits (group 0) is H'FFA7. Bits 3 to 0 of address H'FFA5 and bits 7
to 4 of address H'FFA7 are reserved bits that cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Address H'FFA5
Address H'FFA7
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
NDR7
0
R/W
6
NDR6
0
R/W
5
NDR5
0
R/W
4
NDR4
0
R/W
3
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
Reserved bitsNext data 7 to 4
These bits store the next output
data for TPC output group 1
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
NDR3
0
R/W
2
NDR2
0
R/W
1
NDR1
0
R/W
0
NDR0
0
R/W
Next data 3 to 0
These bits store the next output
data for TPC output group 0
Reserved bits
402
11.2.6 Next Data Register B (NDRB)
NDRB is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the next output data for TPC output groups
3 and 2 (pins TP15 to TP8). During TPC output, when an ITU compare match event specified in
TPCR occurs, NDRB contents are transferred to the corresponding bits in PBDR. The address of
NDRB differs depending on whether TPC output groups 2 and 3 have the same output trigger or
different output triggers.
NDRB is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Same Trigger for TPC Output Groups 2 and 3: If TPC output groups 2 and 3 are triggered by
the same compare match event, the NDRB address is H'FFA4. The upper 4 bits belong to group 3
and the lower 4 bits to group 2. Address H'FFA6 consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be
modified and are always read as 1.
Address H'FFA4
Address H'FFA6
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
NDR15
0
R/W
6
NDR14
0
R/W
5
NDR13
0
R/W
4
NDR12
0
R/W
3
NDR11
0
R/W
2
NDR10
0
R/W
1
NDR9
0
R/W
0
NDR8
0
R/W
Next data 11 to 8
These bits store the next output
data for TPC output group 2
Next data 15 to 12
These bits store the next output
data for TPC output group 3
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
NDR15
0
R/W
6
NDR14
0
R/W
5
NDR13
0
R/W
4
NDR12
0
R/W
3
NDR11
0
R/W
2
NDR10
0
R/W
1
NDR9
0
R/W
0
NDR8
0
R/W
Next data 11 to 8
These bits store the next output
data for TPC output group 2
Next data 15 to 12
These bits store the next output
data for TPC output group 3
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
0
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
7
—
1
—
Reserved bits
403
Different Triggers for TPC Output Groups 2 and 3: If TPC output groups 2 and 3 are triggered
by different compare match events, the address of the upper 4 bits of NDRB (group 3) is H'FFA4
and the address of the lower 4 bits (group 2) is H'FFA6. Bits 3 to 0 of address H'FFA4 and bits 7
to 4 of address H'FFA6 are reserved bits that cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Address H'FFA4
Address H'FFA6
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
NDR15
0
R/W
6
NDR14
0
R/W
5
NDR13
0
R/W
4
NDR12
0
R/W
3
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
Reserved bitsNext data 15 to 12
These bits store the next output
data for TPC output group 3
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
NDR11
0
R/W
2
NDR10
0
R/W
1
NDR9
0
R/W
0
NDR8
0
R/W
Next data 11 to 8
These bits store the next output
data for TPC output group 2
Reserved bits
404
11.2.7 Next Data Enable Register A (NDERA)
NDERA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables TPC output groups 1 and 0
(TP7to TP0) on a bit-by-bit basis.
If a bit is enabled for TPC output by NDERA, then when the ITU compare match event selected in
the TPC output control register (TPCR) occurs, the NDRA value is automatically transferred to
the corresponding PADR bit, updating the output value. If TPC output is disabled, the bit value is
not transferred from NDRA to PADR and the output value does not change.
NDERA is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bits 7 to 0—Next Data Enable 7 to 0 (NDER7 to NDER0): These bits enable or disable TPC
output groups 1 and 0 (TP7to TP0) on a bit-by-bit basis.
Bits 7 to 0
NDER7 to NDER0 Description
0 TPC outputs TP7to TP0are disabled (Initial value)
(NDR7 to NDR0 are not transferred to PA7to PA0)
1 TPC outputs TP7to TP0are enabled
(NDR7 to NDR0 are transferred to PA7to PA0)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
0
NDER0
0
R/W
1
NDER1
0
R/W
2
NDER2
0
R/W
3
NDER3
0
R/W
4
NDER4
0
R/W
5
NDER5
0
R/W
6
NDER6
0
R/W
7
NDER7
0
R/W
Next data enable 7 to 0
These bits enable or disable
TPC output groups 1 and 0
405
11.2.8 Next Data Enable Register B (NDERB)
NDERB is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables TPC output groups 3 and 2
(TP15 to TP8) on a bit-by-bit basis.
If a bit is enabled for TPC output by NDERB, then when the ITU compare match event selected in
the TPC output control register (TPCR) occurs, the NDRB value is automatically transferred to
the corresponding PBDR bit, updating the output value. If TPC output is disabled, the bit value is
not transferred from NDRB to PBDR and the output value does not change.
NDERB is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bits 7 to 0—Next Data Enable 15 to 8 (NDER15 to NDER8): These bits enable or disable TPC
output groups 3 and 2 (TP15 to TP8) on a bit-by-bit basis.
Bits 7 to 0
NDER15 to NDER8 Description
0 TPC outputs TP15 to TP8are disabled (Initial value)
(NDR15 to NDR8 are not transferred to PB7to PB0)
1 TPC outputs TP15 to TP8are enabled
(NDR15 to NDR8 are transferred to PB7to PB0)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
0
NDER8
0
R/W
1
NDER9
0
R/W
2
NDER10
0
R/W
3
NDER11
0
R/W
4
NDER12
0
R/W
5
NDER13
0
R/W
6
NDER14
0
R/W
7
NDER15
0
R/W
Next data enable 15 to 8
These bits enable or disable
TPC output groups 3 and 2
406
11.2.9 TPC Output Control Register (TPCR)
TPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects output trigger signals for TPC outputs on a
group-by-group basis.
TPCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
G3CMS1
1
R/W
6
G3CMS0
1
R/W
5
G2CMS1
1
R/W
4
G2CMS0
1
R/W
3
G1CMS1
1
R/W
0
G0CMS0
1
R/W
2
G1CMS0
1
R/W
1
G0CMS1
1
R/W
Group 3 compare
match select 1 and 0
These bits select
the compare match
event that triggers
TPC output group 3
(TP to TP )
Group 2 compare
match select 1 and 0
These bits select
the compare match
event that triggers
TPC output group 2
(TP to TP )
Group 1 compare
match select 1 and 0
These bits select
the compare match
event that triggers
TPC output group 1
(TP to TP )
Group 0 compare
match select 1 and 0
These bits select
the compare match
event that triggers
TPC output group 0
(TP to TP )
15 12
11 8
74
30
407
Bits 7 and 6—Group 3 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G3CMS1, G3CMS0): These bits
select the compare match event that triggers TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12).
Bit 7 Bit 6
G3CMS1 G3CMS0 Description
0 0 TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in ITU
channel 0
1 TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in ITU
channel 1
1 0 TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by compare match in ITU
channel 2
1 TPC output group 3 (TP15 to TP12) is triggered by (Initial value)
compare match in ITU channel 3
Bits 5 and 4—Group 2 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G2CMS1, G2CMS0): These bits
select the compare match event that triggers TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8).
Bit 5 Bit 4
G2CMS1 G2CMS0 Description
0 0 TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8) is triggered by compare match in ITU
channel 0
1 TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8) is triggered by compare match in ITU
channel 1
1 0 TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8) is triggered by compare match in ITU
channel 2
1 TPC output group 2 (TP11 to TP8) is triggered by (Initial value)
compare match in ITU channel 3
408
Bits 3 and 2—Group 1 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G1CMS1, G1CMS0): These bits
select the compare match event that triggers TPC output group 1 (TP7to TP4).
Bit 3 Bit 2
G1CMS1 G1CMS0 Description
0 0 TPC output group 1 (TP7to TP4) is triggered by compare match in ITU
channel 0
1 TPC output group 1 (TP7to TP4) is triggered by compare match in ITU
channel 1
1 0 TPC output group 1 (TP7to TP4) is triggered by compare match in ITU
channel 2
1 TPC output group 1 (TP7to TP4) is triggered by (Initial value)
compare match in ITU channel 3
Bits 1 and 0—Group 0 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G0CMS1, G0CMS0): These bits
select the compare match event that triggers TPC output group 0 (TP3to TP0).
Bit 1 Bit 0
G0CMS1 G0CMS0 Description
0 0 TPC output group 0 (TP3to TP0) is triggered by compare match in ITU
channel 0
1 TPC output group 0 (TP3to TP0) is triggered by compare match in ITU
channel 1
1 0 TPC output group 0 (TP3to TP0) is triggered by compare match in ITU
channel 2
1 TPC output group 0 (TP3to TP0) is triggered by (Initial value)
compare match in ITU channel 3
409
11.2.10 TPC Output Mode Register (TPMR)
TPMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects normal or non-overlapping TPC output for
each group.
The output trigger period of a non-overlapping TPC output waveform is set in general register B
(GRB) in the ITU channel selected for output triggering. The non-overlap margin is set in general
register A (GRA). The output values change at compare match A and B. For details see
section 11.3.4, Non-Overlapping TPC Output.
TPMR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
G3NOV
0
R/W
0
G0NOV
0
R/W
2
G2NOV
0
R/W
1
G1NOV
0
R/W
Group 3 non-overlap
Selects non-overlapping TPC
output for group 3 (TP to TP )
Reserved bits
Group 2 non-overlap
Selects non-overlapping TPC
output for group 2 (TP to TP )
Group 1 non-overlap
Selects non-overlapping TPC
output for group 1 (TP to TP )
Group 0 non-overlap
Selects non-overlapping TPC
output for group 0 (TP to TP )
15 12
11 8
74
30
410
Bit 3—Group 3 Non-Overlap (G3NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping TPC output for
group 3 (TP15 to TP12).
Bit 3
G3NOV Description
0 Normal TPC output in group 3 (output values change at (Initial value)
compare match A in the selected ITU channel)
1 Non-overlapping TPC output in group 3 (independent 1 and 0 output at
compare match A and B in the selected ITU channel)
Bit 2—Group 2 Non-Overlap (G2NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping TPC output for
group 2 (TP11 to TP8).
Bit 2
G2NOV Description
0 Normal TPC output in group 2 (output values change at (Initial value)
compare match A in the selected ITU channel)
1 Non-overlapping TPC output in group 2 (independent 1 and 0 output at
compare match A and B in the selected ITU channel)
Bit 1—Group 1 Non-Overlap (G1NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping TPC output for
group 1 (TP7to TP4).
Bit 1
G1NOV Description
0 Normal TPC output in group 1 (output values change at (Initial value)
compare match A in the selected ITU channel)
1 Non-overlapping TPC output in group 1 (independent 1 and 0 output at
compare match A and B in the selected ITU channel)
Bit 0—Group 0 Non-Overlap (G0NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping TPC output for
group 0 (TP3to TP0).
Bit 0
G0NOV Description
0 Normal TPC output in group 0 (output values change at (Initial value)
compare match A in the selected ITU channel)
1 Non-overlapping TPC output in group 0 (independent 1 and 0 output at
compare match A and B in the selected ITU channel)
411
11.3 Operation
11.3.1 Overview
When corresponding bits in PADDR or PBDDR and NDERA or NDERB are set to 1, TPC output
is enabled. The TPC output initially consists of the corresponding PADR or PBDR contents.
When a compare-match event selected in TPCR occurs, the corresponding NDRA or NDRB bit
contents are transferred to PADR or PBDR to update the output values.
Figure 11-2 illustrates the TPC output operation. Table 11-3 summarizes the TPC operating
conditions.
Figure 11-2 TPC Output Operation
Table 11-3 TPC Operating Conditions
NDER DDR Pin Function
0 0 Generic input port
1 Generic output port
1 0 Generic input port (but the DR bit is a read-only bit, and when compare
match occurs, the NDR bit value is transferred to the DR bit)
1 TPC pulse output
Sequential output of up to 16-bit patterns is possible by writing new output data to NDRA and
NDRB before the next compare match. For information on non-overlapping operation, see
section 11.3.4, Non-Overlapping TPC Output.
DDR NDER
QQ
TPC output pin
DR NDR
C
QD QDInternal
data bus
Output trigger signal
412
11.3.2 Output Timing
If TPC output is enabled, NDRA/NDRB contents are transferred to PADR/PBDR and output when
the selected compare match event occurs. Figure 11-3 shows the timing of these operations for the
case of normal output in groups 2 and 3, triggered by compare match A.
Figure 11-3 Timing of Transfer of Next Data Register Contents and Output (Example)
ø
TCNT
GRA
Compare
match A signal
NDRB
PBDR
TP to TP
815
N
N
n
m
m
N + 1
n
n
413
11.3.3 Normal TPC Output
Sample Setup Procedure for Normal TPC Output: Figure 11-4 shows a sample procedure for
setting up normal TPC output.
Figure 11-4 Setup Procedure for Normal TPC Output (Example)
Normal TPC output
Set next TPC output data
Compare match? No
Yes
Set next TPC output data
ITU setup
Port and
TPC setup
ITU setup 10
11
9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Set TIOR to make GRA an output compare
register (with output inhibited).
Set the TPC output trigger period.
Select the counter clock source with bits
TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Select the counter
clear source with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0.
Enable the IMFA interrupt in TIER.
The DMAC can also be set up to transfer
data to the next data register.
Set the initial output values in the DR bits
of the input/output port pins to be used for
TPC output.
Set the DDR bits of the input/output port
pins to be used for TPC output to 1.
Set the NDER bits of the pins to be used for
TPC output to 1.
Select the ITU compare match event to be
used as the TPC output trigger in TPCR.
Set the next TPC output values in the NDR bits.
Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the
timer counter.
At each IMFA interrupt, set the next output
values in the NDR bits.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select GR functions
Set GRA value
Select counting operation
Select interrupt request
Start counter
Set initial output data
Select port output
Enable TPC output
Select TPC output trigger
414
Example of Normal TPC Output (Example of Five-Phase Pulse Output): Figure 11-5 shows
an example in which the TPC is used for cyclic five-phase pulse output.
Figure 11-5 Normal TPC Output Example (Five-Phase Pulse Output)
GRA
H'0000
NDRB
PBDR
TP15
TP14
TP13
TP12
TP11
•
•
•
•
Time
80
TCNT
TCNT value
C0 40 60 20 30 10 18 08 88 80 C0
Compare match
The ITU channel to be used as the output trigger channel is set up so that GRA is an output compare
register and the counter will be cleared by compare match A. The trigger period is set in GRA.
The IMIEA bit is set to 1 in TIER to enable the compare match A interrupt.
H'F8 is written in PBDDR and NDERB, and bits G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0 are set in
TPCR to select compare match in the ITU channel set up in step 1 as the output trigger.
Output data H'80 is written in NDRB.
The timer counter in this ITU channel is started. When compare match A occurs, the NDRB contents
are transferred to PBDR and output. The compare match/input capture A (IMFA) interrupt service routine
writes the next output data (H'C0) in NDRB.
Five-phase overlapping pulse output (one or two phases active at a time) can be obtained by writing
H'40, H'60, H'20, H'30, H'10, H'18, H'08, H'88… at successive IMFA interrupts. If the DMAC is set for
activation by this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without loading the CPU.
00
80 C0 40 60 20 30 10 18 08 88 80 C0 40
415
11.3.4 Non-Overlapping TPC Output
Sample Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping TPC Output: Figure 11-6 shows a sample
procedure for setting up non-overlapping TPC output.
Figure 11-6 Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping TPC Output (Example)
Non-overlapping
TPC output
Set next TPC output data
Compare match A? No
Yes
Set next TPC output data
Start counter
ITU setup
Port and
TPC setup
ITU setup
Set initial output data
Set up TPC output
Enable TPC transfer
Select TPC transfer trigger
Select non-overlapping groups
1
2
3
4
12
10
11
5
6
7
8
9
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Set TIOR to make GRA and GRB output
compare registers (with output inhibited).
Set the TPC output trigger period in GRB
and the non-overlap margin in GRA.
Select the counter clock source with bits
TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Select the counter
clear source with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0.
Enable the IMFA interrupt in TIER.
The DMAC can also be set up to transfer
data to the next data register.
Set the initial output values in the DR bits
of the input/output port pins to be used for
TPC output.
Set the DDR bits of the input/output port pins
to be used for TPC output to 1.
Set the NDER bits of the pins to be used for
TPC output to 1.
In TPCR, select the ITU compare match
event to be used as the TPC output trigger.
In TPMR, select the groups that will operate
in non-overlap mode.
Set the next TPC output values in the NDR
bits.
Set the STR bit to 1 in TSTR to start the timer
counter.
At each IMFA interrupt, write the next output
value in the NDR bits.
Select GR functions
Set GR values
Select counting operation
Select interrupt requests
416
Example of Non-Overlapping TPC Output (Example of Four-Phase Complementary Non-
Overlapping Output): Figure 11-7 shows an example of the use of TPC output for four-phase
complementary non-overlapping pulse output.
Figure 11-7 Non-Overlapping TPC Output Example (Four-Phase Complementary
Non-Overlapping Pulse Output)
GRB
H'0000
NDRB
PBDR
TP15
TP14
TP13
TP12
TP11
TP10
TP9
TP8
Time
95
00
65
95
59 56 95 65
05 65 41 59 50 56 14 95 05 65
TCNT
H'FF is written in PBDDR and NDERB, and bits G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0 are set
TCNT value
Non-overlap margin
The output trigger ITU channel is set up so that GRA and GRB are output compare registers and the
counter will be cleared by compare match B. The TPC output trigger period is set in GRB. The non-
overlap margin is set in GRA. The IMIEA bit is set to 1 in TIER to enable IMFA interrupts.
This operation example is described below.
•
•
•
•
Bits G3NOV and G2NOV are set to 1 in TPMR to select non-overlapping output. Output data H'95 is
written in NDRB.
The timer counter in this ITU channel is started. When compare match B occurs, outputs change from
in TPCR to select compare match in the ITU channel set up in step 1 as the output trigger.
1 to 0. When compare match A occurs, outputs change from 0 to 1 (the change from 0 to 1 is delayed
by the value of GRA). The IMFA interrupt service routine writes the next output data (H'65) in NDRB.
Four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output can be obtained by writing H'59, H'56, H'95…
at successive IMFA interrupts. If the DMAC is set for activation by this interrupt, pulse output can be
obtained without loading the CPU.
GRA
417
11.3.5 TPC Output Triggering by Input Capture
TPC output can be triggered by ITU input capture as well as by compare match. If GRA functions
as an input capture register in the ITU channel selected in TPCR, TPC output will be triggered by
the input capture signal. Figure 11-8 shows the timing.
Figure 11-8 TPC Output Triggering by Input Capture (Example)
ø
TIOC pin
Input capture
signal
NDR
DR N
N
M
418
11.4 Usage Notes
11.4.1 Operation of TPC Output Pins
TP0to TP15 are multiplexed with ITU, DMAC, address bus, and other pin functions. When ITU,
DMAC, or address output is enabled, the corresponding pins cannot be used for TPC output. The
data transfer from NDR bits to DR bits takes place, however, regardless of the usage of the pin.
Pin functions should be changed only under conditions in which the output trigger event will not
occur.
11.4.2 Note on Non-Overlapping Output
During non-overlapping operation, the transfer of NDR bit values to DR bits takes place as
follows.
1. NDR bits are always transferred to DR bits at compare match A.
2. At compare match B, NDR bits are transferred only if their value is 0. Bits are not transferred
if their value is 1.
Figure 11-9 illustrates the non-overlapping TPC output operation.
Figure 11-9 Non-Overlapping TPC Output
DDR NDER
QQ
TPC output pin
DR NDR
C
QD QD
Compare match A
Compare match B
Internal
data bus
419
Therefore, 0 data can be transferred ahead of 1 data by making compare match B occur before
compare match A. NDR contents should not be altered during the interval from compare match B
to compare match A (the non-overlap margin).
This can be accomplished by having the IMFA interrupt service routine write the next data in
NDR, or by having the IMFA interrupt activate the DMAC. The next data must be written before
the next compare match B occurs.
Figure 11-10 shows the timing relationships.
Figure 11-10 Non-Overlapping Operation and NDR Write Timing
Compare
match A
Compare
match B
NDR write
NDR
NDR write
DR
0/1 output 0/1 output0 output 0 output
Do not write
to NDR in this
interval
Do not write
to NDR in this
interval
Write to NDR
in this interval
Write to NDR
in this interval
420
Section 12 Watchdog Timer
12.1 Overview
The H8/3048 Series has an on-chip watchdog timer (WDT). The WDT has two selectable
functions: it can operate as a watchdog timer to supervise system operation, or it can operate as an
interval timer. As a watchdog timer, it generates a reset signal for the chip if a system crash allows
the timer counter (TCNT) to overflow before being rewritten. In interval timer operation, an
interval timer interrupt is requested at each TCNT overflow.
12.1.1 Features
WDT features are listed below.
• Selection of eight counter clock sources
ø/2, ø/32, ø/64, ø/128, ø/256, ø/512, ø/2048, or ø/4096
• Interval timer option
• Timer counter overflow generates a reset signal or interrupt.
The reset signal is generated in watchdog timer operation. An interval timer interrupt is
generated in interval timer operation.
• Watchdog timer reset signal resets the entire chip internally, and can also be output externally.
The reset signal generated by timer counter overflow during watchdog timer operation resets
the entire chip internally. An external reset signal can be output from the RESO pin to reset
other system devices simultaneously.
421
12.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 12-1 shows a block diagram of the WDT.
Figure 12-1 WDT Block Diagram
12.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 12-1 describes the WDT output pin.
Table 12-1 WDT Pin
Name Abbreviation I/O Function
Reset output RESO Output*External output of the watchdog timer reset signal
Note: *Open-drain output.
ø/2
ø/32
ø/64
ø/128
ø/256
ø/512
ø/2048
ø/4096
TCNT
TCSR
RSTCSR
Reset control
Interrupt signal
Reset
(internal, external)
(interval timer) Interrupt
control
Overflow
Clock Clock
selector
Read/
write
control
Internal
data bus
Internal clock sources
Legend
TCNT:
TCSR:
RSTCSR:
Timer counter
Timer control/status register
Reset control/status register
422
12.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 12-2 summarizes the WDT registers.
Table 12-2 WDT Registers
Address*1
Write*2Read Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FFA8 H'FFA8 Timer control/status register TCSR R/(W)*3H'18
H'FFA9 Timer counter TCNT R/W H'00
H'FFAA H'FFAB Reset control/status register RSTCSR R/(W)*3H'3F
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Write word data starting at this address.
3. Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag.
423
12.2 Register Descriptions
12.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)
TCNT is an 8-bit readable and writable* up-counter.
When the TME bit is set to 1 in TCSR, TCNT starts counting pulses generated from an internal
clock source selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR. When the count overflows (changes from
H'FF to H'00), the OVF bit is set to 1 in TCSR. TCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset and when
the TME bit is cleared to 0.
Note: * TCNT is write-protected by a password. For details see section 12.2.4, Notes on Register
Access.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
424
12.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)
TCSR is an 8-bit readable and writable*1 register. Its functions include selecting the timer mode
and clock source.
Bits 7 to 5 are initialized to 0 by a reset and in standby mode. Bits 2 to 0 are initialized to 0 by a
reset. In software standby mode bits 2 to 0 are not initialized, but retain their previous values.
Notes: 1. TCSR differs from other registers in being more difficult to write. For details see
section 12.2.4, Notes on Register Access.
2. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
OVF
0
R/(W)
6
WT/IT
0
R/W
5
TME
0
R/W
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
CKS0
0
R/W
2
CKS2
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Overflow flag
Status flag indicating overflow
Clock select
These bits select the
TCNT clock source
Timer mode select
Selects the mode
Timer enable
Selects whether TCNT runs or halts
Reserved bits
*2
425
Bit 7—Overflow Flag (OVF): This status flag indicates that the timer counter has overflowed
from H'FF to H'00.
Bit 7
OVF Description
0 [Clearing condition]
Cleared by reading OVF when OVF = 1, then writing 0 in OVF (Initial value)
1 [Setting condition]
Set when TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00
Bit 6—Timer Mode Select (WT/IT): Selects whether to use the WDT as a watchdog timer or
interval timer. If used as an interval timer, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt request
when TCNT overflows. If used as a watchdog timer, the WDT generates a reset signal when
TCNT overflows.
Bit 6
WT/IT Description
0 Interval timer: requests interval timer interrupts (Initial value)
1 Watchdog timer: generates a reset signal
Bit 5—Timer Enable (TME): Selects whether TCNT runs or is halted.
When WT/IT = 1, clear the SYSCR software standby bit (SSBY) to 0, then set the TME to 1.
When SSBY is set to 1, clear TME to 0.
Bit 5
TME Description
0 TCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted (Initial value)
1 TCNT is counting and CPU interrupt requests are enabled
Bits 4 and 3—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
426
Bits 2 to 0—Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2/1/0): These bits select one of eight internal clock
sources, obtained by prescaling the system clock (ø), for input to TCNT.
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Description
0 0 0 ø/2 (Initial value)
1 ø/32
1 0 ø/64
1 ø/128
1 0 0 ø/256
1 ø/512
1 0 ø/2048
1 ø/4096
12.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)
RSTCSR is an 8-bit readable and writable*1 register that indicates when a reset signal has been
generated by watchdog timer overflow, and controls external output of the reset signal.
Bits 7 and 6 are initialized by input of a reset signal at the RES pin. They are not initialized by
reset signals generated by watchdog timer overflow.
Notes: 1. RSTCSR differs from other registers in being more difficult to write. For details see
section 12.2.4, Notes on Register Access.
2. Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
WRST
0
R/(W)
6
RSTOE
0
R/W
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
*
Watchdog timer reset
Indicates that a reset signal has been generated
Reserved bits
Reset output enable
Enables or disables external output of the reset signal
2
427
Bit 7—Watchdog Timer Reset (WRST): During watchdog timer operation, this bit indicates that
TCNT has overflowed and generated a reset signal. This reset signal resets the entire chip
internally. If bit RSTOE is set to 1, this reset signal is also output (low) at the RESO pin to
initialize external system devices.
Bit 7
WRST Description
0 [Clearing conditions]
Cleared to 0 by reset signal input at RES pin (Initial value)
Cleared by reading WRST when WRST = 1, then writing 0 in WRST
1 [Setting condition]
Set when TCNT overflow generates a reset signal during watchdog timer operation
Bit 6—Reset Output Enable (RSTOE): Enables or disables external output at the RESO pin of
the reset signal generated if TCNT overflows during watchdog timer operation.
Bit 6
RSTOE Description
0 Reset signal is not output externally (Initial value)
1 Reset signal is output externally
Bits 5 to 0—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
428
12.2.4 Notes on Register Access
The watchdog timer’s TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR registers differ from other registers in being
more difficult to write. The procedures for writing and reading these registers are given below.
Writing to TCNT and TCSR: These registers must be written by a word transfer instruction.
They cannot be written by byte instructions. Figure 12-2 shows the format of data written to
TCNT and TCSR. TCNT and TCSR both have the same write address. The write data must be
contained in the lower byte of the written word. The upper byte must contain H'5A (password for
TCNT) or H'A5 (password for TCSR). This transfers the write data from the lower byte to TCNT
or TCSR.
Figure 12-2 Format of Data Written to TCNT and TCSR
15 8 7 0
H'5A Write dataAddress H'FFA8*
15 8 7 0
H'A5 Write dataAddress H'FFA8*
TCNT write
TCSR write
Note: Lower 16 bits of the address.*
429
Writing to RSTCSR: RSTCSR must be written by a word transfer instruction. It cannot be
written by byte transfer instructions. Figure 12-3 shows the format of data written to RSTCSR. To
write 0 in the WRST bit, the write data must have H'A5 in the upper byte and H'00 in the lower
byte. The H'00 in the lower byte clears the WRST bit in RSTCSR to 0. To write to the RSTOE bit,
the upper byte must contain H'5A and the lower byte must contain the write data. Writing this
word transfers a write data value into the RSTOE bit.
Figure 12-3 Format of Data Written to RSTCSR
Reading TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR: These registers are read like other registers. Byte access
instructions can be used. The read addresses are H'FFA8 for TCSR, H'FFA9 for TCNT, and
H'FFAB for RSTCSR, as listed in table 12-3.
Table 12-3 Read Addresses of TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR
Address*Register
H'FFA8 TCSR
H'FFA9 TCNT
H'FFAB RSTCSR
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
15 8 7 0
H'A5 H'00Address H'FFAA*
15 8 7 0
H'5A Write dataAddress H'FFAA*
Writing 0 in WRST bit
Writing to RSTOE bit
Note: Lower 16 bits of the address.*
430
12.3 Operation
Operations when the WDT is used as a watchdog timer and as an interval timer are described
below.
12.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation
Figure 12-4 illustrates watchdog timer operation. To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the
WT/IT and TME bits to 1 in TCSR. Software must prevent TCNT overflow by rewriting the
TCNT value (normally by writing H'00) before overflow occurs. If TCNT fails to be rewritten and
overflows due to a system crash etc., the chip is internally reset for a duration of 518 states.
The watchdog reset signal can be externally output from the RESO pin to reset external system
devices. The reset signal is output externally for 132 states. External output can be enabled or
disabled by the RSTOE bit in RSTCSR.
A watchdog reset has the same vector as a reset generated by input at the RES pin. Software can
distinguish a RES reset from a watchdog reset by checking the WRST bit in RSTCSR.
If a RES reset and a watchdog reset occur simultaneously, the RES reset takes priority.
Figure 12-4 Watchdog Timer Operation
H'FF
H'00
RESO
WDT overflow
Start H'00 written
in TCNT Reset
TME set to 1
H'00 written
in TCNT
Internal
reset signal
518 states
132 states
TCNT count
value
OVF = 1
431
12.3.2 Interval Timer Operation
Figure 12-5 illustrates interval timer operation. To use the WDT as an interval timer, clear bit
WT/IT to 0 and set bit TME to 1 in TCSR. An interval timer interrupt request is generated at each
TCNT overflow. This function can be used to generate interval timer interrupts at regular intervals.
Figure 12-5 Interval Timer Operation
TCNT
count value
Time t
Interval
timer
interrupt
Interval
timer
interrupt
Interval
timer
interrupt
Interval
timer
interrupt
WT/ = 0
TME = 1
IT
H'FF
H'00
432
12.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF)
Figure 12-6 shows the timing of setting of the OVF flag in TCSR. The OVF flag is set to 1 when
TCNT overflows. At the same time, a reset signal is generated in watchdog timer operation, or an
interval timer interrupt is generated in interval timer operation.
Figure 12-6 Timing of Setting of OVF
ø
TCNT
Overflow signal
OVF
H'FF H'00
433
12.3.4 Timing of Setting of Watchdog Timer Reset Bit (WRST)
The WRST bit in RSTCSR is valid when bits WT/IT and TME are both set to 1 in TCSR.
Figure 12-7 shows the timing of setting of WRST and the internal reset timing. The WRST bit is
set to 1 when TCNT overflows and OVF is set to 1. At the same time an internal reset signal is
generated for the entire chip. This internal reset signal clears OVF to 0, but the WRST bit remains
set to 1. The reset routine must therefore clear the WRST bit.
Figure 12-7 Timing of Setting of WRST Bit and Internal Reset
ø
TCNT
Overflow signal
OVF
WRST
H'FF H'00
WDT internal
reset
434
12.4 Interrupts
During interval timer operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI). The
interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF bit is set to 1 in TCSR.
12.5 Usage Notes
Contention between TCNT Write and Increment: If a timer counter clock pulse is generated
during the T3state of a write cycle to TCNT, the write takes priority and the timer count is not
incremented. See figure 12-8.
Figure 12-8 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment
Changing CKS2 to CKS0 Values: Halt TCNT by clearing the TME bit to 0 in TCSR before
changing the values of bits CKS2 to CKS0.
ø
TCNT
TCNT NM
Counter write data
T
3
T
2
T
1
Write cycle: CPU writes to TCNT
Internal write
signal
TCNT input
clock
435
Section 13 Serial Communication Interface
13.1 Overview
The H8/3048 Series has a serial communication interface (SCI) with two independent channels.
The two channels are functionally identical. The SCI can communicate in asynchronous or
synchronous mode. It also has a multiprocessor communication function for serial communication
among two or more processors.
When the SCI is not used, it can be halted to conserve power. Each SCI channel can be halted
independently. For details see section 20.6, Module Standby Function.
Channel 0 (SCI0) also has a smart card interface function conforming to the ISO/IEC7816-3
(Identification Card) standard. This function supports serial communication with a smart card. For
details, see section 14, Smart Card Interface.
13.1.1 Features
SCI features are listed below.
• Selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode for serial communication
a. Asynchronous mode
Serial data communication is synchronized one character at a time. The SCI can communicate
with a universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART), asynchronous communication
interface adapter (ACIA), or other chip that employs standard asynchronous serial
communication. It can also communicate with two or more other processors using the
multiprocessor communication function. There are twelve selectable serial data
communication formats.
— Data length: 7 or 8 bits
— Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits
— Parity bit: even, odd, or none
— Multiprocessor bit: 1 or 0
— Receive error detection: parity, overrun, and framing errors
— Break detection: by reading the RxD level directly when a framing error occurs
437
b. Synchronous mode
Serial data communication is synchronized with a clock signal. The SCI can communicate
with other chips having a synchronous communication function. There is one serial data
communication format.
— Data length: 8 bits
— Receive error detection: overrun errors
• Full duplex communication
The transmitting and receiving sections are independent, so the SCI can transmit and receive
simultaneously. The transmitting and receiving sections are both double-buffered, so serial
data can be transmitted and received continuously.
• Built-in baud rate generator with selectable bit rates
• Selectable transmit/receive clock sources: internal clock from baud rate generator, or external
clock from the SCK pin.
• Four types of interrupts
Transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and receive-error interrupts are
requested independently. The transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from SCI0
can activate the DMA controller (DMAC) to transfer data.
438
13.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 13-1 shows a block diagram of the SCI.
Figure 13-1 SCI Block Diagram
RxD
TxD
SCK
RDR
RSR
TDR
TSR
SSR
SCR
SMR
BRR
Module data bus
Bus interface
Internal
data bus
Transmit/
receive control
Baud rate
generator
ø
ø/4
ø/16
ø/64
ClockParity generate
Parity check
TEI
TXI
RXI
ERI
Legend
External clock
RSR:
RDR:
TSR:
TDR:
SMR:
SCR:
SSR:
BRR:
Receive shift register
Receive data register
Transmit shift register
Transmit data register
Serial mode register
Serial control register
Serial status register
Bit rate register
439
13.1.3 Input/Output Pins
The SCI has serial pins for each channel as listed in table 13-1.
Table 13-1 SCI Pins
Channel Name Abbreviation I/O Function
0 Serial clock pin SCK0Input/output SCI0clock input/output
Receive data pin RxD0Input SCI0receive data input
Transmit data pin TxD0Output SCI0transmit data output
1 Serial clock pin SCK1Input/output SCI1clock input/output
Receive data pin RxD1Input SCI1receive data input
Transmit data pin TxD1Output SCI1transmit data output
13.1.4 Register Configuration
The SCI has internal registers as listed in table 13-2. These registers select asynchronous or
synchronous mode, specify the data format and bit rate, and control the transmitter and receiver
sections.
Table 13-2 Registers
Channel Address*1Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
0 H'FFB0 Serial mode register SMR R/W H'00
H'FFB1 Bit rate register BRR R/W H'FF
H'FFB2 Serial control register SCR R/W H'00
H'FFB3 Transmit data register TDR R/W H'FF
H'FFB4 Serial status register SSR R/(W)*2H'84
H'FFB5 Receive data register RDR R H'00
1 H'FFB8 Serial mode register SMR R/W H'00
H'FFB9 Bit rate register BRR R/W H'FF
H'FFBA Serial control register SCR R/W H'00
H'FFBB Transmit data register TDR R/W H'FF
H'FFBC Serial status register SSR R/(W)*2H'84
H'FFBD Receive data register RDR R H'00
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags.
440
13.2 Register Descriptions
13.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR)
RSR is the register that receives serial data.
The SCI loads serial data input at the RxD pin into RSR in the order received, LSB (bit 0) first,
thereby converting the data to parallel data. When 1 byte has been received, it is automatically
transferred to RDR. The CPU cannot read or write RSR directly.
13.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)
RDR is the register that stores received serial data.
When the SCI finishes receiving 1 byte of serial data, it transfers the received data from RSR into
RDR for storage. RSR is then ready to receive the next data. This double buffering allows data to
be received continuously.
RDR is a read-only register. Its contents cannot be modified by the CPU. RDR is initialized to
H'00 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bit
Read/Write
7
—
6
—
5
—
4
—
3
—
0
—
2
—
1
—
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
0
R
6
0
R
5
0
R
4
0
R
3
0
R
0
0
R
2
0
R
1
0
R
441
13.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
TSR is the register that transmits serial data.
The SCI loads transmit data from TDR into TSR, then transmits the data serially from the TxD
pin, LSB (bit 0) first. After transmitting one data byte, the SCI automatically loads the next
transmit data from TDR into TSR and starts transmitting it. If the TDRE flag is set to 1 in SSR,
however, the SCI does not load the TDR contents into TSR. The CPU cannot read or write TSR
directly.
13.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)
TDR is an 8-bit register that stores data for serial transmission.
When the SCI detects that TSR is empty, it moves transmit data written in TDR from TDR into
TSR and starts serial transmission. Continuous serial transmission is possible by writing the next
transmit data in TDR during serial transmission from TSR.
The CPU can always read and write TDR. TDR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in standby
mode.
Bit
Read/Write
7
—
6
—
5
—
4
—
3
—
0
—
2
—
1
—
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
442
13.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)
SMR is an 8-bit register that specifies the SCI serial communication format and selects the clock
source for the baud rate generator.
The CPU can always read and write SMR. SMR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby
mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
C/A
0
R/W
6
CHR
0
R/W
5
PE
0
R/W
4
O/E
0
R/W
3
STOP
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
2
MP
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Communication mode
Selects asynchronous or synchronous mode
Clock select 1/0
These bits select the
baud rate generator’s
clock source
Character length
Selects character length in asynchronous mode
Parity enable
Selects whether a parity bit is added
Parity mode
Selects even or odd parity
Stop bit length
Selects the stop bit length
Multiprocessor mode
Selects the multiprocessor
function
443
Bit 7—Communication Mode (C/A): Selects whether the SCI operates in asynchronous or
synchronous mode.
Bit 7
C/ADescription
0 Asynchronous mode (Initial value)
1 Synchronous mode
Bit 6—Character Length (CHR): Selects 7-bit or 8-bit data length in asynchronous mode. In
synchronous mode the data length is 8 bits regardless of the CHR setting.
Bit 6
CHR Description
0 8-bit data (Initial value)
1 7-bit data*
Note: *When 7-bit data is selected, the MSB (bit 7) in TDR is not transmitted.
Bit 5—Parity Enable (PE): In asynchronous mode, this bit enables or disables the addition of a
parity bit to transmit data, and the checking of the parity bit in receive data. In synchronous mode
the parity bit is neither added nor checked, regardless of the PE setting.
Bit 5
PE Description
0 Parity bit not added or checked (Initial value)
1 Parity bit added and checked*
Note: *When PE is set to 1, an even or odd parity bit is added to transmit data according to the
even or odd parity mode selected by the O/Ebit, and the parity bit in receive data is
checked to see that it matches the even or odd mode selected by the O/Ebit.
444
Bit 4—Parity Mode (O/E): Selects even or odd parity. The O/Ebit setting is valid in
asynchronous mode when the PE bit is set to 1 to enable the adding and checking of a parity bit.
The O/Esetting is ignored in synchronous mode, or when parity adding and checking is disabled
in asynchronous mode.
Bit 4
O/EDescription
0 Even parity*1(Initial value)
1 Odd parity*2
Notes: 1. When even parity is selected, the parity bit added to transmit data makes an even
number of 1s in the transmitted character and parity bit combined. Receive data must
have an even number of 1s in the received character and parity bit combined.
2. When odd parity is selected, the parity bit added to transmit data makes an odd number
of 1s in the transmitted character and parity bit combined. Receive data must have an
odd number of 1s in the received character and parity bit combined.
Bit 3—Stop Bit Length (STOP): Selects one or two stop bits in asynchronous mode. This setting
is used only in asynchronous mode. In synchronous mode no stop bit is added, so the STOP bit
setting is ignored.
Bit 3
STOP Description
0 One stop bit*1(Initial value)
1 Two stop bits*2
Notes: 1. One stop bit (with value 1) is added at the end of each transmitted character.
2. Two stop bits (with value 1) are added at the end of each transmitted character.
In receiving, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless of the STOP bit setting. If the second
stop bit is 1 it is treated as a stop bit. If the second stop bit is 0 it is treated as the start bit of the
next incoming character.
445
Bit 2—Multiprocessor Mode (MP): Selects a multiprocessor format. When a multiprocessor
format is selected, parity settings made by the PE and O/Ebits are ignored. The MP bit setting is
valid only in asynchronous mode. It is ignored in synchronous mode.
For further information on the multiprocessor communication function, see section 13.3.3,
Multiprocessor Communication.
Bit 2
MP Description
0 Multiprocessor function disabled (Initial value)
1 Multiprocessor format selected
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1/0): These bits select the clock source of the on-chip
baud rate generator. Four clock sources are available: ø, ø/4, ø/16, and ø/64.
For the relationship between the clock source, bit rate register setting, and baud rate, see
section 13.2.8, Bit Rate Register (BRR).
Bit 1 Bit 0
CKS1 CKS0 Description
0 0 ø (Initial value)
0 1 ø/4
1 0 ø/16
1 1 ø/64
446
13.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR)
SCR enables the SCI transmitter and receiver, enables or disables serial clock output in
asynchronous mode, enables or disables interrupts, and selects the transmit/receive clock source.
The CPU can always read and write SCR. SCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby
mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
TIE
0
R/W
6
RIE
0
R/W
5
TE
0
R/W
4
RE
0
R/W
3
MPIE
0
R/W
0
CKE0
0
R/W
2
TEIE
0
R/W
1
CKE1
0
R/W
Transmit interrupt enable
Enables or disables transmit-data-empty interrupts (TXI)
Clock enable 1/0
These bits select the
SCI clock source
Receive interrupt enable
Enables or disables receive-data-full interrupts (RXI) and
receive-error interrupts (ERI)
Transmit enable
Enables or disables the transmitter
Receive enable
Enables or disables the receiver
Multiprocessor interrupt enable
Enables or disables multiprocessor
interrupts
Transmit-end interrupt enable
Enables or disables transmit-
end interrupts (TEI)
447
Bit 7—Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE): Enables or disables the transmit-data-empty interrupt
(TXI) requested when the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1 due to transfer of serial transmit data from
TDR to TSR.
Bit 7
TIE Description
0 Transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) is disabled*(Initial value)
1 Transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) is enabled
Note: *TXI interrupt requests can be cleared by reading the value 1 from the TDRE flag, then
clearing it to 0; or by clearing the TIE bit to 0.
Bit 6—Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE): Enables or disables the receive-data-full interrupt (RXI)
requested when the RDRF flag is set to 1 in SSR due to transfer of serial receive data from RSR to
RDR; also enables or disables the receive-error interrupt (ERI).
Bit 6
RIE Description
0
Receive-data-full (RXI) and receive-error (ERI) interrupt requests are disabled
(Initial value)
1
Receive-data-full (RXI) and receive-error (ERI) interrupt requests are enabled
Note: *RXI and ERI interrupt requests can be cleared by reading the value 1 from the RDRF, FER,
PER, or ORER flag, then clearing it to 0; or by clearing the RIE bit to 0.
Bit 5—Transmit Enable (TE): Enables or disables the start of SCI serial transmitting operations.
Bit 5
TE Description
0 Transmitting disabled*1(Initial value)
1 Transmitting enabled*2
Notes: 1. The TDRE bit is locked at 1 in SSR.
2. In the enabled state, serial transmitting starts when the TDRE bit in SSR is cleared to 0
after writing of transmit data into TDR. Select the transmit format in SMR before setting
the TE bit to 1.
448
Bit 4—Receive Enable (RE): Enables or disables the start of SCI serial receiving operations.
Bit 4
RE Description
0 Receiving disabled*1(Initial value)
1 Receiving enabled*2
Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags. These
flags retain their previous values.
2. In the enabled state, serial receiving starts when a start bit is detected in asynchronous
mode, or serial clock input is detected in synchronous mode. Select the receive format
in SMR before setting the RE bit to 1.
Bit 3—Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (MPIE): Enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts.
The MPIE setting is valid only in asynchronous mode, and only if the MP bit is set to 1 in SMR.
The MPIE setting is ignored in synchronous mode or when the MP bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 3
MPIE Description
0 Multiprocessor interrupts are disabled (normal receive operation) (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
The MPIE bit is cleared to 0.
MPB = 1 in received data.
1 Multiprocessor interrupts are enabled*
Receive-data-full interrupts (RXI), receive-error interrupts (ERI), and setting of the RDRF,
FER, and ORER status flags in SSR are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit
set to 1 is received.
Note: *The SCI does not transfer receive data from RSR to RDR, does not detect receive errors,
and does not set the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR. When it receives data in which
MPB = 1, the SCI sets the MPB bit to 1 in SSR, automatically clears the MPIE bit to 0,
enables RXI and ERI interrupts (if the RIE bit is set to 1 in SCR), and allows the FER and
ORER flags to be set.
449
Bit 2—Transmit-End Interrupt Enable (TEIE): Enables or disables the transmit-end interrupt
(TEI) requested if TDR does not contain new transmit data when the MSB is transmitted.
Bit 2
TEIE Description
0 Transmit-end interrupt requests (TEI) are disabled*(Initial value)
1 Transmit-end interrupt requests (TEI) are enabled*
Note: *TEI interrupt requests can be cleared by reading the value 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR,
then clearing the TDRE flag to 0, thereby also clearing the TEND flag to 0; or by clearing
the TEIE bit to 0.
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Enable 1 and 0 (CKE1/0): These bits select the SCI clock source and
enable or disable clock output from the SCK pin. Depending on the settings of CKE1 and CKE0,
the SCK pin can be used for generic input/output, serial clock output, or serial clock input.
The CKE0 setting is valid only in asynchronous mode, and only when the SCI is internally
clocked (CKE1 = 0). The CKE0 setting is ignored in synchronous mode, or when an external
clock source is selected (CKE1 = 1). Select the SCI operating mode in SMR before setting the
CKE1 and CKE0 bits. For further details on selection of the SCI clock source, see table 13-9 in
section 13.3, Operation.
Bit 1 Bit 0
CKE1 CKE0 Description
0 0 Asynchronous mode Internal clock, SCK pin available for generic
input/output *1
Synchronous mode Internal clock, SCK pin used for serial clock output *1
0 1 Asynchronous mode Internal clock, SCK pin used for clock output *2
Synchronous mode Internal clock, SCK pin used for serial clock output
1 0 Asynchronous mode External clock, SCK pin used for clock input *3
Synchronous mode External clock, SCK pin used for serial clock input
1 1 Asynchronous mode External clock, SCK pin used for clock input *3
Synchronous mode External clock, SCK pin used for serial clock input
Notes: 1. Initial value
2. The output clock frequency is the same as the bit rate.
3. The input clock frequency is 16 times the bit rate.
450
13.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR)
SSR is an 8-bit register containing multiprocessor bit values, and status flags that indicate SCI
operating status.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
TDRE
1
R/(W)
6
RDRF
0
R/(W)
5
ORER
0
R/(W)
4
FER
0
R/(W)
3
PER
0
R/(W)
0
MPBT
0
R/W
2
TEND
1
R
1
MPB
0
R
Transmit data register empty
Status flag indicating that transmit data has been transferred from TDR into
TSR and new data can be written in TDR
Multiprocessor
bit transfer
Value of multi-
processor bit to
be transmitted
Receive data register full
Status flag indicating that data has been received and stored in RDR
Overrun error
Status flag indicating detection of a receive overrun error
Framing error
Status flag indicating detection of a receive
framing error
Parity error
Status flag indicating detection of
a receive parity error
Transmit end
Status flag indicating end of
transmission
*
Note: Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.*
****
Multiprocessor bit
Stores the received
multiprocessor bit value
451
The CPU can always read and write SSR, but cannot write 1 in the TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER,
and FER flags. These flags can be cleared to 0 only if they have first been read while set to 1. The
TEND and MPB flags are read-only bits that cannot be written.
SSR is initialized to H'84 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bit 7—Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE): Indicates that the SCI has loaded transmit data
from TDR into TSR and the next serial transmit data can be written in TDR.
Bit 7
TDRE Description
0 TDR contains valid transmit data
[Clearing conditions]
Software reads TDRE while it is set to 1, then writes 0.
The DMAC writes data in TDR.
1 TDR does not contain valid transmit data (Initial value)
[Setting conditions]
The chip is reset or enters standby mode.
The TE bit in SCR is cleared to 0.
TDR contents are loaded into TSR, so new data can be written in TDR.
Bit 6—Receive Data Register Full (RDRF): Indicates that RDR contains new receive data.
Bit 6
RDRF Description
0 RDR does not contain new receive data (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
The chip is reset or enters standby mode.
Software reads RDRF while it is set to 1, then writes 0.
The DMAC reads data from RDR.
1 RDR contains new receive data
[Setting condition]
When serial data is received normally and transferred from RSR to RDR.
Note: The RDR contents and RDRF flag are not affected by detection of receive errors or by
clearing of the RE bit to 0 in SCR. They retain their previous values. If the RDRF flag is still
set to 1 when reception of the next data ends, an overrun error occurs and receive data is
lost.
452
Bit 5—Overrun Error (ORER): Indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to an
overrun error.
Bit 5
ORER Description
0 Receiving is in progress or has ended normally (Initial value)*1
[Clearing conditions]
The chip is reset or enters standby mode.
Software reads ORER while it is set to 1, then writes 0.
1 A receive overrun error occurred*2
[Setting condition]
Reception of the next serial data ends when RDRF = 1.
Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 in SCR does not affect the ORER flag, which retains its
previous value.
2. RDR continues to hold the receive data before the overrun error, so subsequent receive
data is lost. Serial receiving cannot continue while the ORER flag is set to 1. In
synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled.
Bit 4—Framing Error (FER): Indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to a framing
error in asynchronous mode.
Bit 4
FER Description
0 Receiving is in progress or has ended normally (Initial value)*1
[Clearing conditions]
The chip is reset or enters standby mode.
Software reads FER while it is set to 1, then writes 0.
1 A receive framing error occurred*2
[Setting condition]
The stop bit at the end of receive data is checked and found to be 0.
Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 in SCR does not affect the FER flag, which retains its previous
value.
2. When the stop bit length is 2 bits, only the first bit is checked. The second stop bit is not
checked. When a framing error occurs the SCI transfers the receive data into RDR but
does not set the RDRF flag. Serial receiving cannot continue while the FER flag is set
to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled.
453
Bit 3—Parity Error (PER): Indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to a parity error
in asynchronous mode.
Bit 3
PER Description
0 Receiving is in progress or has ended normally*1(Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
The chip is reset or enters standby mode.
Software reads PER while it is set to 1, then writes 0.
1 A receive parity error occurred*2
[Setting condition]
The number of 1s in receive data, including the parity bit, does not match the even or
odd parity setting of O/Ein SMR.
Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 in SCR does not affect the PER flag, which retains its previous
value.
2. When a parity error occurs the SCI transfers the receive data into RDR but does not set
the RDRF flag. Serial receiving cannot continue while the PER flag is set to 1. In
synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled.
Bit 2—Transmit End (TEND): Indicates that when the last bit of a serial character was
transmitted TDR did not contain new transmit data, so transmission has ended. The TEND flag is
a read-only bit and cannot be written.
Bit 2
TEND Description
0 Transmission is in progress
[Clearing conditions]
Software reads TDRE while it is set to 1, then writes 0 in the TDRE flag.
The DMAC writes data in TDR.
1 End of transmission (Initial value)
[Setting conditions]
The chip is reset or enters standby mode.
The TE bit is cleared to 0 in SCR.
TDRE is 1 when the last bit of a serial character is transmitted.
454
Bit 1—Multiprocessor Bit (MPB): Stores the value of the multiprocessor bit in receive data
when a multiprocessor format is used in asynchronous mode. MPB is a read-only bit and cannot
be written.
Bit 1
MPB Description
0 Multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 0*(Initial value)
1 Multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 1
Note: *If the RE bit is cleared to 0 when a multiprocessor format is selected, MPB retains its
previous value.
Bit 0—Multiprocessor Bit Transfer (MPBT): Stores the value of the multiprocessor bit added to
transmit data when a multiprocessor format is selected for transmitting in asynchronous mode.
The MPBT setting is ignored in synchronous mode, when a multiprocessor format is not selected,
or when the SCI is not transmitting.
Bit 0
MPBT Description
0 Multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 0 (Initial value)
1 Multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 1
13.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR)
BRR is an 8-bit register that, together with the CKS1 and CKS0 bits in SMR that select the baud
rate generator clock source, determines the serial communication bit rate.
The CPU can always read and write BRR. BRR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in standby
mode. The two SCI channels have independent baud rate generator control, so different values can
be set in the two channels.
Table 13-3 shows examples of BRR settings in asynchronous mode. Table 13-4 shows examples
of BRR settings in synchronous mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
455
Table 13-3 Examples of Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode
ø (MHz)
2 2.097152 2.4576 3
Bit Rate Error Error Error Error
(bits/s) n N (%) n N (%) n N (%) n N (%)
110 1 141 0.03 1 148 –0.04 1 174 –0.26 1 212 0.03
150 1 103 0.16 1 108 0.21 1 127 0 1 155 0.16
300 0 207 0.16 0 217 0.21 0 255 0 1 77 0.16
600 0 103 0.16 0 108 0.21 0 127 0 0 155 0.16
1200 0 51 0.16 0 54 –0.70 0 63 0 0 77 0.16
2400 0 25 0.16 0 26 1.14 0 31 0 0 38 0.16
4800 0 12 0.16 0 13 –2.48 0 15 0 0 19 –2.34
9600 0 6 –6.99 0 6 –2.48 0 7 0 0 9 –2.34
19200 0 2 8.51 0 2 13.78 0 3 0 0 4 –2.34
31250 0 1 0 0 1 4.86 0 1 22.88 0 2 0
38400 0 1 –18.62 0 1 –14.67 0 1 0 — — —
ø (MHz)
3.6864 4 4.9152 5
Bit Rate Error Error Error Error
(bits/s) n N (%) n N (%) n N (%) n N (%)
110 2 64 0.70 2 70 0.03 2 86 0.31 2 88 –0.25
150 1 191 0 1 207 0.16 1 255 0 2 64 0.16
300 1 95 0 1 103 0.16 1 127 0 1 129 0.16
600 0 191 0 0 207 0.16 0 255 0 1 64 0.16
1200 0 95 0 0 103 0.16 0 127 0 0 129 0.16
2400 0 47 0 0 51 0.16 0 63 0 0 64 0.16
4800 0 23 0 0 25 0.16 0 31 0 0 32 –1.36
9600 0 11 0 0 12 0.16 0 15 0 0 15 1.73
19200 0 5 0 0 6 –6.99 0 7 0 0 7 1.73
31250 — — — 0 3 0 0 4 –1.70 0 4 0
38400 0 2 0 0 2 8.51 0 3 0 0 3 1.73
456
Table 13-3 Examples of Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (cont)
ø (MHz)
6 6.144 7.3728 8
Bit Rate Error Error Error Error
(bits/s) n N (%) n N (%) n N (%) n N (%)
110 2 106 –0.44 2 108 0.08 2 130 –0.07 2 141 0.03
150 2 77 0.16 2 79 0 2 95 0 2 103 0.16
300 1 155 0.16 1 159 0 1 191 0 1 207 0.16
600 1 77 0.16 1 79 0 1 95 0 1 103 0.16
1200 0 155 0.16 0 159 0 0 191 0 0 207 0.16
2400 0 77 0.16 0 79 0 0 95 0 0 103 0.16
4800 0 38 0.16 0 39 0 0 47 0 0 51 0.16
9600 0 19 –2.34 0 19 0 0 23 0 0 25 0.16
19200 0 9 –2.34 0 9 0 0 11 0 0 12 0.16
31250 0 5 0 0 5 2.40 0 6 5.33 0 7 0
38400 0 4 –2.34 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 –6.99
ø (MHz)
9.8304 10 12 12.288
Bit Rate Error Error Error Error
(bits/s) n N (%) n N (%) n N (%) n N (%)
110 2 174 –0.26 2 177 –0.25 2 212 0.03 2 217 0.08
150 2 127 0 2 129 0.16 2 155 0.16 2 159 0
300 1 255 0 2 64 0.16 2 77 0.16 2 79 0
600 1 127 0 1 129 0.16 1 155 0.16 1 159 0
1200 0 255 0 1 64 0.16 1 77 0.16 1 79 0
2400 0 127 0 0 129 0.16 0 155 0.16 0 159 0
4800 0 63 0 0 64 0.16 0 77 0.16 0 79 0
9600 0 31 0 0 32 –1.36 0 38 0.16 0 39 0
19200 0 15 0 0 15 1.73 0 19 –2.34 0 19 0
31250 0 9 –1.70 0 9 0 0 11 0 0 11 2.40
38400 0 7 0 0 7 1.73 0 9 –2.34 0 9 0
457
Table 13-3 Examples of Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (cont)
ø (MHz)
13 14 14.7456 16
Bit Rate Error Error Error Error
(bits/s) n N (%) n N (%) n N (%) n N (%)
110 2 230 –0.08 2 248 –0.17 3 64 0.70 3 70 0.03
150 2 168 0.16 2 181 0.16 2 191 0 2 207 0.16
300 2 84 –0.43 2 90 0.16 2 95 0 2 103 0.16
600 1 168 0.16 1 181 0.16 1 191 0 1 207 0.16
1200 1 84 –0.43 1 90 0.16 1 95 0 1 103 0.16
2400 0 168 0.16 0 181 0.16 0 191 0 0 207 0.16
4800 0 84 –0.43 0 90 0.16 0 95 0 0 103 0.16
9600 0 41 0.76 0 45 –0.93 0 47 0 0 51 0.16
19200 0 20 0.76 0 22 –0.93 0 23 0 0 25 0.16
31250 0 12 0.00 0 13 0 0 14 –1.70 0 15 0
38400 0 10 –3.82 0 10 3.57 0 11 0 0 12 0.16
Table 13-3 Examples of Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Asynchronous Mode (cont)
ø (MHz)
18
Bit Rate Error
(bits/s) n N (%)
110 3 79 –0.12
150 2 233 0.16
300 2 116 0.16
600 1 233 0.16
1200 1 116 0.16
2400 0 233 0.16
4800 0 116 0.16
9600 0 58 –0.69
19200 0 28 1.02
31250 0 17 0.00
38400 0 14 –2.34
458
Table 13-4 Examples of Bit Rates and BRR Settings in Synchronous Mode
ø (MHz)
2 4 8 10131618
nNnNnNnNnNnNnN
110 3 70————————————
250 2 124 2 249 3 124 — — 3 202 3 249 — —
500 1 249 2 124 2 249 — — 3 101 3 124 3 140
1 k 1 124 1 249 2 124 — — 2 202 2 249 3 69
2.5 k 0 199 1 99 1 199 1 249 2 80 2 99 2 112
5 k 0 99 0 199 1 99 1 124 1 162 1 199 1 224
10 k 0 49 0 99 0 199 0 249 1 80 1 99 1 112
25 k 0 19 0 39 0 79 0 99 0 129 0 159 0 179
50 k 0 9 0 19 0 39 0 49 0 64 0 79 0 89
100 k 0 4 0 9 0 19 0 24 — — 0 39 0 44
250 k 0 1 0 3 0 7 0 9 0 12 0 15 0 17
500 k 0 0*010304——0708
1 M 0 0*01————0304
2 M 0 0*————01——
2.5 M — — 0 0*——————
4 M 0 0*——
Note: Settings with an error of 1% or less are recommended.
Legend
Blank: No setting available
—: Setting possible, but error occurs
*: Continuous transmit/receive not possible
The BRR setting is calculated as follows:
Asynchronous mode:
N = ×106– 1
Synchronous mode:
N = ×106– 1
B: Bit rate (bits/s)
N: BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤N ≤255)
ø: System clock frequency (MHz)
n: Baud rate generator clock source (n = 0, 1, 2, 3)
(For the clock sources and values of n, see the following table.)
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
ø
64 ×22n–1 ×B
ø
8 ×22n–1 ×B
459
SMR Settings
n Clock Source CKS1 CKS0
0ø 0 0
1 ø/4 0 1
2 ø/16 1 0
3 ø/64 1 1
The bit rate error in asynchronous mode is calculated as follows.
Error (%) = –1 ×100
ø ×106
(N + 1) ×B ×64 ×22n–1
460
Table 13-5 indicates the maximum bit rates in asynchronous mode for various system clock
frequencies. Tables 13-6 and 13-7 indicate the maximum bit rates with external clock input.
Table 13-5 Maximum Bit Rates for Various Frequencies (Asynchronous Mode)
Settings
ø (MHz) Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) n N
2 62500 0 0
2.097152 65536 0 0
2.4576 76800 0 0
3 93750 0 0
3.6864 115200 0 0
4 125000 0 0
4.9152 153600 0 0
5 156250 0 0
6 187500 0 0
6.144 192000 0 0
7.3728 230400 0 0
8 250000 0 0
9.8304 307200 0 0
10 312500 0 0
12 375000 0 0
12.288 384000 0 0
14 437500 0 0
14.7456 460800 0 0
16 500000 0 0
17.2032 537600 0 0
18 562500 0 0
461
Table 13-6 Maximum Bit Rates with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode)
ø (MHz) External Input Clock (MHz) Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s)
2 0.5000 31250
2.097152 0.5243 32768
2.4576 0.6144 38400
3 0.7500 46875
3.6864 0.9216 57600
4 1.0000 62500
4.9152 1.2288 76800
5 1.2500 78125
6 1.5000 93750
6.144 1.5360 96000
7.3728 1.8432 115200
8 2.0000 125000
9.8304 2.4576 153600
10 2.5000 156250
12 3.0000 187500
12.288 3.0720 192000
14 3.5000 218750
14.7456 3.6864 230400
16 4.0000 250000
17.2032 4.3008 268800
18 4.5000 281250
462
Table 13-7 Maximum Bit Rates with External Clock Input (Synchronous Mode)
ø (MHz) External Input Clock (MHz) Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s)
2 0.3333 333333.3
4 0.6667 666666.7
6 1.0000 1000000.0
8 1.3333 1333333.3
10 1.6667 1666666.7
12 2.0000 2000000.0
14 2.3333 2333333.3
16 2.6667 2666666.7
18 3.0000 3000000.0
463
13.3 Operation
13.3.1 Overview
The SCI has an asynchronous mode in which characters are synchronized individually, and a
synchronous mode in which communication is synchronized with clock pulses. Serial
communication is possible in either mode. Asynchronous or synchronous mode and the
communication format are selected in SMR, as shown in table 13-8. The SCI clock source is
selected by the C/Abit in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR, as shown in table 13-9.
Asynchronous Mode
• Data length is selectable: 7 or 8 bits.
• Parity and multiprocessor bits are selectable. So is the stop bit length (1 or 2 bits). These
selections determine the communication format and character length.
• In receiving, it is possible to detect framing errors, parity errors, overrun errors, and the break
state.
• An internal or external clock can be selected as the SCI clock source.
— When an internal clock is selected, the SCI operates using the on-chip baud rate generator,
and can output a serial clock signal with a frequency matching the bit rate.
— When an external clock is selected, the external clock input must have a frequency
16 times the bit rate. (The on-chip baud rate generator is not used.)
Synchronous Mode
• The communication format has a fixed 8-bit data length.
• In receiving, it is possible to detect overrun errors.
• An internal or external clock can be selected as the SCI clock source.
— When an internal clock is selected, the SCI operates using the on-chip baud rate generator,
and outputs a serial clock signal to external devices.
— When an external clock is selected, the SCI operates on the input serial clock. The on-chip
baud rate generator is not used.
464
Table 13-8 SMR Settings and Serial Communication Formats
SCI Communication Format
Multi- Stop
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 2 Bit 5 Bit 3 Data processor Parity Bit
C/ACHR MP PE STOP Mode Length Bit Bit Length
00000 8-bit data Absent Absent 1 bit
00001 2 bits
00010 Present 1 bit
00011 2 bits
01000 7-bit data Absent 1 bit
01001 2 bits
01010 Present 1 bit
01011 2 bits
001—0 8-bit data Present Absent 1 bit
001—1 2 bits
011—0 7-bit data 1 bit
011—1 2 bits
1 ———— Synchronous 8-bit data Absent None
mode
Table 13-9 SMR and SCR Settings and SCI Clock Source Selection
SMR SCR Settings
Bit 7 Bit 1 Bit 0
C/ACKE1 CKE0 Mode Clock Source SCK Pin Function
0 0 0 Asynchronous mode Internal SCI does not use the SCK pin
0 0 1 Outputs a clock with frequency
matching the bit rate
0 1 0 External
01 1
1 0 0 Synchronous mode Internal Outputs the serial clock
10 1
1 1 0 External Inputs the serial clock
11 1
SMR Settings
Asynchronous
mode
Asynchronous
mode (multi-
processor
format)
SCI Transmit/Receive Clock
Inputs a clock with frequency
16 times the bit rate
465
13.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode each transmitted or received character begins with a start bit and ends with
a stop bit. Serial communication is synchronized one character at a time.
The transmitting and receiving sections of the SCI are independent, so full duplex communication
is possible. The transmitter and receiver are both double buffered, so data can be written and read
while transmitting and receiving are in progress, enabling continuous transmitting and receiving.
Figure 13-2 shows the general format of asynchronous serial communication. In asynchronous
serial communication the communication line is normally held in the mark (high) state. The SCI
monitors the line and starts serial communication when the line goes to the space (low) state,
indicating a start bit. One serial character consists of a start bit (low), data (LSB first), parity bit
(high or low), and stop bit (high), in that order.
When receiving in asynchronous mode, the SCI synchronizes at the falling edge of the start bit.
The SCI samples each data bit on the eighth pulse of a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit
rate. Receive data is latched at the center of each bit.
Figure 13-2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example: 8-Bit Data with
Parity and 2 Stop Bits)
Serial data 0 1 1
1Idle (mark) state
1
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1
(LSB) (MSB)
Start
bit Transmit or receive data Parity
bit Stop
bit
One unit of data (character or frame)
1 bit 7 bits or 8 bits 1 bit or
no bit 1 bit or
2 bits
466
Communication Formats: Table 13-10 shows the 12 communication formats that can be selected
in asynchronous mode. The format is selected by settings in SMR.
Table 13-10 Serial Communication Formats (Asynchronous Mode)
123456789101112
8-bit data
STOP
8-bit data
8-bit data
8-bit data
7-bit data
7-bit data
7-bit data
7-bit data
8 bit data
8 bit data
7-bit data
7-bit data
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
STOP
STOP
P
STOP
P
STOP
STOP
STOP STOP
STOP
STOP STOP
STOP
P
P
MPB
STOP STOP
STOP
MPB
MPB
MPB
STOP STOP
Legend
S:
STOP:
P:
MPB:
Start bit
Stop bit
Parity bit
Multiprocessor bit
CHR PE MP STOP
SMR Settings
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Serial Communication Format and Frame Length
STOP
467
Clock: An internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input
from the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI transmit/receive clock. The clock source is selected
by the C/Abit in SMR and bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR. See table 13-9.
When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, it must have a frequency equal to 16 times the
desired bit rate.
When the SCI operates on an internal clock, it can output a clock signal at the SCK pin. The
frequency of this output clock is equal to the bit rate. The phase is aligned as in figure 13-3 so that
the rising edge of the clock occurs at the center of each transmit data bit.
Figure 13-3 Phase Relationship between Output Clock and Serial Data
(Asynchronous Mode)
Transmitting and Receiving Data
SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode): Before transmitting or receiving, clear the TE and RE
bits to 0 in SCR, then initialize the SCI as follows.
When changing the communication mode or format, always clear the TE and RE bits to 0 before
following the procedure given below. Clearing TE to 0 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and initializes
TSR. Clearing RE to 0, however, does not initialize the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags and
RDR, which retain their previous contents.
When an external clock is used, the clock should not be stopped during initialization or
subsequent operation. SCI operation becomes unreliable if the clock is stopped.
Figure 13-4 is a sample flowchart for initializing the SCI.
0 D0D1D2D3D4D5D6D70/1 1 1
1 frame
468
Figure 13-4 Sample Flowchart for SCI Initialization
Clear TE and RE bits
to 0 in SCR
Transmitting or receiving
No
Yes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the communication format in SMR.
Write the value corresponding to the bit rate in BRR.
This step is not necessary when an external clock is used.
Select communication
format in SMR
1
Set value in BRR
2
3
Set TE or RE bit to 1 in SCR
Set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and
MPIE bits as necessary 4
1 bit interval
elapsed?
Wait
Wait for at least the interval required to transmit or receive
1 bit, then set the TE or RE bit to 1 in SCR. Set the RIE,
TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits as necessary. Setting the TE
or RE bit enables the SCI to use the TxD or RxD pin.
Start of initialization
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits
in SCR (leaving TE and
RE bits cleared to 0)
Select the clock source in SCR. Clear the RIE, TIE, TEIE,
MPIE, TE, and RE bits to 0. If clock output is selected in
asynchronous mode, clock output starts immediately after
the setting is made in SCR.
469
Transmitting Serial Data (Asynchronous Mode): Figure 13-5 shows a sample flowchart for
transmitting serial data and indicates the procedure to follow.
Figure 13-5 Sample Flowchart for Transmitting Serial Data
Start transmitting
Read TDRE flag in SSR
TDRE = 1?
Write transmit data
in TDR and clear TDRE
flag to 0 in SSR
All data
transmitted?
End
1
2
3
No
Yes
No
Yes
SCI initialization: the transmit data output function
of the TxD pin is selected automatically.
SCI status check and transmit data write: read SSR,
check that the TDRE flag is 1, then write transmit data
in TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0.
Read TEND flag in SSR
TEND = 1? No
Yes
Output break
signal? No
Yes
Clear TE bit to 0 in SCR
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clear DR bit to 0,
set DDR bit to 1
Initialize
To continue transmitting serial data: after checking
that the TDRE flag is 1, indicating that data can be
written, write data in TDR, then clear the TDRE
flag to 0. When the DMAC is activated by a transmit-
-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) to write data in TDR,
the TDRE flag is checked and cleared automatically.
To output a break signal at the end of serial transmission:
set the DDR bit to 1 and clear the DR bit to 0
(DDR and DR are I/O port registers), then clear the
TE bit to 0 in SCR.
470
In transmitting serial data, the SCI operates as follows.
• The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. When the TDRE flag is cleared to 0 the SCI
recognizes that TDR contains new data, and loads this data from TDR into TSR.
• After loading the data from TDR into TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmitting. If the TIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, the SCI requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt
(TXI) at this time.
Serial transmit data is transmitted in the following order from the TxD pin:
— Start bit: One 0 bit is output.
— Transmit data: 7 or 8 bits are output, LSB first.
— Parity bit or multiprocessor bit: One parity bit (even or odd parity) or one multiprocessor
bit is output. Formats in which neither a parity bit nor a
multiprocessor bit is output can also be selected.
— Stop bit: One or two 1 bits (stop bits) are output.
— Mark state: Output of 1 bits continues until the start bit of the next
transmit data.
• The SCI checks the TDRE flag when it outputs the stop bit. If the TDRE flag is 0, the SCI
loads new data from TDR into TSR, outputs the stop bit, then begins serial transmission of
the next frame. If the TDRE flag is 1, the SCI sets the TEND flag to 1 in SSR, outputs the
stop bit, then continues output of 1 bits in the mark state. If the TEIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, a
transmit-end interrupt (TEI) is requested at this time.
Figure 13-6 shows an example of SCI transmit operation in asynchronous mode.
Figure 13-6 Example of SCI Transmit Operation in Asynchronous Mode
(8-Bit Data with Parity and 1 Stop Bit)
1Start
bit
0 D0 D1 D7 0/1
Stop
bit
1
Data Parity
bit Start
bit
0 D0 D1 D7 0/1
Stop
bit
1
Data Parity
bit 1
Idle (mark)
state
TDRE
TEND
TXI
interrupt
request
TXI interrupt handler
writes data in TDR and
clears TDRE flag to 0
1 frame
TEI interrupt request
TXI
interrupt
request
471
Receiving Serial Data (Asynchronous Mode): Figure 13-7 shows a sample flowchart for
receiving serial data and indicates the procedure to follow.
Figure 13-7 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Serial Data (1)
Start receiving
Read RDRF flag in SSR
RDRF = 1?
Read receive data
from RDR, and clear
RDRF flag to 0 in SSR
PER FER
ORER = 1?
Clear RE bit to 0 in SCR
Finished
receiving?
End
Error handling
(continued on next page)
1
4
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
1.
2, 3.
4.
5.
SCI initialization: the receive data function of
the RxD pin is selected automatically.
Receive error handling and break
detection: if a receive error occurs, read the
ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to identify
the error. After executing the necessary error
handling, clear the ORER, PER, and FER
flags all to 0. Receiving cannot resume if any
of the ORER, PER, and FER flags remains
set to 1. When a framing error occurs, the
RxD pin can be read to detect the break state.
SCI status check and receive data read: read
SSR, check that RDRF is set to 1, then read
receive data from RDR and clear the RDRF
flag to 0. Notification that the RDRF flag has
changed from 0 to 1 can also be given by the
RXI interrupt.
To continue receiving serial data: check the
RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear the RDRF
flag to 0 before the stop bit of the current
frame is received. If the DMAC is activated
by an RXI interrupt to read the RDR value,
the RDRF flag is cleared automatically.
Read ORER, PER,
and FER flags in SSR 2
5
Initialize
∨∨ 3
472
Figure 13-7 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Serial Data (2)
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Framing error handling
PER = 1?
ORER = 1?
Overrun error handling
FER = 1?
Break?
Error handling
Parity error handling
Clear ORER, PER, and
FER flags to 0 in SSR
Clear RE bit to 0 in SCR
End
3
473
In receiving, the SCI operates as follows.
• The SCI monitors the receive data line. When it detects a start bit, the SCI synchronizes
internally and starts receiving.
• Receive data is stored in RSR in order from LSB to MSB.
• The parity bit and stop bit are received.
After receiving, the SCI makes the following checks:
— Parity check: The number of 1s in the receive data must match the even or odd parity
setting of the O/Ebit in SMR.
— Stop bit check: The stop bit value must be 1. If there are two stop bits, only the first stop
bit is checked.
— Status check: The RDRF flag must be 0 so that receive data can be transferred from
RSR into RDR.
If these checks all pass, the RDRF flag is set to 1 and the received data is stored in RDR. If one of
the checks fails (receive error), the SCI operates as indicated in table 13-11.
Note: When a receive error occurs, further receiving is disabled. In receiving, the RDRF flag is
not set to 1. Be sure to clear the error flags to 0.
• When the RDRF flag is set to 1, if the RIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, a receive-data-full interrupt
(RXI) is requested. If the ORER, PER, or FER flag is set to 1 and the RIE bit in SCR is also
set to 1, a receive-error interrupt (ERI) is requested.
Table 13-11 Receive Error Conditions
Receive Error Abbreviation Condition Data Transfer
Overrun error ORER Receiving of next data ends Receive data not transferred
while RDRF flag is still set to from RSR to RDR
1 in SSR
Framing error FER Stop bit is 0 Receive data transferred
from RSR to RDR
Parity error PER Parity of receive data differs Receive data transferred
from even/odd parity setting from RSR to RDR
in SMR
474
Figure 13-8 shows an example of SCI receive operation in asynchronous mode.
Figure 13-8 Example of SCI Receive Operation (8-Bit Data with Parity and One Stop Bit)
13.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication
The multiprocessor communication function enables several processors to share a single serial
communication line. The processors communicate in asynchronous mode using a format with an
additional multiprocessor bit (multiprocessor format).
In multiprocessor communication, each receiving processor is addressed by an ID. A serial
communication cycle consists of an ID-sending cycle that identifies the receiving processor, and a
data-sending cycle. The multiprocessor bit distinguishes ID-sending cycles from data-sending
cycles.
The transmitting processor starts by sending the ID of the receiving processor with which it wants
to communicate as data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. Next the transmitting processor sends
transmit data with the multiprocessor bit cleared to 0.
Receiving processors skip incoming data until they receive data with the multiprocessor bit set
to 1. When they receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1, receiving processors compare the
data with their IDs. The receiving processor with a matching ID continues to receive further
incoming data. Processors with IDs not matching the received data skip further incoming data
until they again receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. Multiple processors can send and
receive data in this way.
Figure 13-9 shows an example of communication among different processors using a
multiprocessor format.
1Start
bit
0D0 D1 D7 0/1
Stop
bit
1
Data Parity
bit Start
bit
0D0 D1 D7 0/1
Stop
bit
1
Data Parity
bit 1
Idle (mark)
state
RDRF
FER
1 frame Framing error,
ERI request
RXI interrupt handler
reads data in RDR and
clears RDRF flag to 0
RXI
request
475
Communication Formats: Four formats are available. Parity-bit settings are ignored when a
multiprocessor format is selected. For details see table 13-10.
Clock: See the description of asynchronous mode.
Figure 13-9 Example of Communication among Processors using Multiprocessor Format
(Sending Data H'AA to Receiving Processor A)
Transmitting
processor
Receiving
processor A
Serial communication line
Receiving
processor B Receiving
processor C Receiving
processor D
(ID = 01) (ID = 02) (ID = 03) (ID = 04)
Serial data H'01 H'AA
(MPB = 1) (MPB = 0)
ID-sending cycle: receiving
processor address Data-sending cycle:
data sent to receiving
processor specified by ID
Legend
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
476
Transmitting and Receiving Data
Transmitting Multiprocessor Serial Data: Figure 13-10 shows a sample flowchart for
transmitting multiprocessor serial data and indicates the procedure to follow.
Figure 13-10 Sample Flowchart for Transmitting Multiprocessor Serial Data
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Initialize
Start transmitting
Read TDRE flag in SSR
TDRE = 1?
Write transmit data in
TDR and set MPBT bit in SSR
Clear TDRE flag to 0
All data transmitted?
Read TEND flag in SSR
TEND = 1?
1
2
3
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
SCI initialization: the transmit data
output function of the TxD pin is
selected automatically.
SCI status check and transmit data
write: read SSR, check that the TDRE
flag is 1, then write transmit
data in TDR. Also set the MPBT flag to
0 or 1 in SSR. Finally, clear the TDRE
flag to 0.
To continue transmitting serial data:
after checking that the TDRE flag is 1,
indicating that data can be
written, write data in TDR, then clear
the TDRE flag to 0. When the DMAC
is activated by a transmit-data-empty
interrupt request (TXI) to write data in
TDR, the TDRE flag is checked and
cleared automatically.
To output a break signal at the end of
serial transmission: set the DDR bit to
1 and clear the DR bit to 0 (DDR and
DR are I/O port registers), then clear
the TE bit to 0 in SCR.
Output break signal?
Clear DR bit to 0, set DDR bit to 1
Clear TE bit to 0 in SCR
End
477
In transmitting serial data, the SCI operates as follows.
• The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. When the TDRE flag is cleared to 0 the SCI
recognizes that TDR contains new data, and loads this data from TDR into TSR.
• After loading the data from TDR into TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmitting. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1, the SCI requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt
(TXI) at this time.
Serial transmit data is transmitted in the following order from the TxD pin:
— Start bit: One 0 bit is output.
— Transmit data: 7 or 8 bits are output, LSB first.
— Multiprocessor bit: One multiprocessor bit (MPBT value) is output.
— Stop bit: One or two 1 bits (stop bits) are output.
— Mark state: Output of 1 bits continues until the start bit of the next transmit data.
• The SCI checks the TDRE flag when it outputs the stop bit. If the TDRE flag is 0, the SCI
loads data from TDR into TSR, outputs the stop bit, then begins serial transmission of the
next frame. If the TDRE flag is 1, the SCI sets the TEND flag in SSR to 1, outputs the stop
bit, then continues output of 1 bits in the mark state. If the TEIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, a
transmit-end interrupt (TEI) is requested at this time.
Figure 13-11 shows an example of SCI transmit operation using a multiprocessor format.
Figure 13-11 Example of SCI Transmit Operation (8-Bit Data with Multiprocessor Bit and
One Stop Bit)
1Start
bit
0 D0 D1 D7 0/1
Stop
bit
1
Data
Multi-
processor
bit
Start
bit
0 D0 D1 D7 0/1
Stop
bit
1
Data 1
Idle (mark)
state
TDRE
TEND
TXI
request TXI interrupt handler
writes data in TDR and
clears TDRE flag to 0
1 frame
TEI request
Multi-
processor
bit
TXI
request
478
Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data: Figure 13-12 shows a sample flowchart for receiving
multiprocessor serial data and indicates the procedure to follow.
Figure 13-12 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data (1)
Initialize
Start receiving
Read RDRF flag in SSR
RDRF = 1?
Read receive data from RDR
Read ORER and FER flags in SSR
FER ORER = 1
Read RDRF flag in SSR
∨
RDRF = 1?
Read receive data from RDR
Finished receiving?
Clear RE bit to 0 in SCR
Error handling
(continued on next page)
End
1
2
4
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SCI initialization: the receive data function
of the RxD pin is selected automatically.
ID receive cycle: set the MPIE bit to 1 in SCR.
SCI status check and ID check: read SSR,
check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read
data from RDR and compare with the
processor’s own ID. If the ID does not match,
set the MPIE bit to 1 again and clear the
RDRF flag to 0. If the ID matches, clear the
RDRF flag to 0.
SCI status check and data receiving: read
SSR, check that the RDRF flag is set to 1,
then read data from RDR.
Receive error handling and break detection:
if a receive error occurs, read the
ORER and FER flags in SSR to identify the error.
After executing the necessary error handling,
clear the ORER and FER flags both to 0.
Receiving cannot resume while either the ORER
or FER flag remains set to 1. When a framing
error occurs, the RxD pin can be read to detect
the break state.
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
3
Set MPIE bit to 1 in SCR
Read ORER and FER flags in SSR
Yes
FER ORER = 1
∨
Own ID?
No
No
479
Figure 13-12 Sample Flowchart for Receiving Multiprocessor Serial Data (2)
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Error handling
ORER = 1?
Overrun error handling
FER = 1?
Break?
Framing error handling
Clear ORER, PER, and FER
flags to 0 in SSR
Clear RE bit to 0 in SCR
End
5
480
Figure 13-13 shows an example of SCI receive operation using a multiprocessor format.
Figure 13-13 Example of SCI Receive Operation (8-Bit Data with Multiprocessor Bit and
One Stop Bit)
1Start
bit
0D0 D1 D7 1
Stop
bit
1
Data (ID1) MPB Start
bit
0D0 D1 D7 0
Stop
bit
1
Data (data1) MPB 1
Idle (mark)
state
MPIE
RDRF
RDR value ID1
RXI request
(multiprocessor
interrupt)
MPB detection
MPIE= 0
MPB detection
MPIE= 0
RXI handler reads
RDR data and clears
RDRF flag to 0
Not own ID, so
MPIE bit is set
to 1 again
No RXI request,
RDR not updated
a. Own ID does not match data
1Start
bit
0D0 D1 D7 1
Stop
bit
1
Data (ID2) MPB Start
bit
0D0 D1 D7 0
Stop
bit
1
Data (data2) MPB 1
Idle (mark)
state
MPIE
RDRF
RDR value ID2
RXI request
(multiprocessor
interrupt)
RXI interrupt handler
reads RDR data and
clears RDRF flag to 0
Own ID, so receiving
continues, with data
received by RXI
interrupt handler
MPIE bit is set
to 1 again
b. Own ID matches data
Data 2
481
13.3.4 Synchronous Operation
In synchronous mode, the SCI transmits and receives data in synchronization with clock pulses.
This mode is suitable for high-speed serial communication.
The SCI transmitter and receiver share the same clock but are otherwise independent, so full
duplex communication is possible. The transmitter and receiver are also double buffered, so
continuous transmitting or receiving is possible by reading or writing data while transmitting or
receiving is in progress.
Figure 13-14 shows the general format in synchronous serial communication.
Figure 13-14 Data Format in Synchronous Communication
In synchronous serial communication, each data bit is placed on the communication line from one
falling edge of the serial clock to the next. Data is guaranteed valid at the rise of the serial clock.
In each character, the serial data bits are transmitted in order from LSB (first) to MSB (last). After
output of the MSB, the communication line remains in the state of the MSB. In synchronous mode
the SCI receives data by synchronizing with the rise of the serial clock.
Communication Format: The data length is fixed at 8 bits. No parity bit or multiprocessor bit
can be added.
Clock: An internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input
from the SCK pin can be selected by clearing or setting the CKE1 bit in SCR. See table 13-9.
When the SCI operates on an internal clock, it outputs the clock signal at the SCK pin. Eight clock
pulses are output per transmitted or received character.
When the SCI operates on an internal clock, the serial clock outputs the clock signal at the SCK
pin. Eight clock pulses are output per transmitted or received character. When the SCI is not
transmitting or receiving, the clock signal remains in the high state. However, when receiving
only, overrun error may occur or the serial clock continues output until the RE bit clears at 0.
When transmitting or receiving in single characters, select the external clock.
Serial clock
Serial data Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7
LSB MSB
Don’t care Don’t care
One unit (character or frame) of serial data
Transfer direction
* *
Note: High except in continuous transmitting or receiving*
482
Transmitting and Receiving Data
SCI Initialization (Synchronous Mode): Before transmitting or receiving, clear the TE and
RE bits to 0 in SCR, then initialize the SCI as follows.
When changing the communication mode or format, always clear the TE and RE bits to 0 before
following the procedure given below. Clearing the TE bit to 0 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and
initializes TSR. Clearing the RE bit to 0, however, does not initialize the RDRF, PER, FER, and
ORE flags and RDR, which retain their previous contents.
Figure 13-15 is a sample flowchart for initializing the SCI.
Figure 13-15 Sample Flowchart for SCI Initialization
Clear TE and RE
bits to 0 in SCR
1 bit interval
elapsed?
Start transmitting or receiving
No
Yes
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the clock source in SCR. Clear the RIE, TIE, TEIE,
MPIE, TE, and RE bits to 0.
Select the communication format in SMR.
Write the value corresponding to the bit rate in BRR.
This step is not necessary when an external clock is used.
1
2
Set RIE, TIE, TEIE, MPIE,
CKE1, and CKE0 bits in SCR
(leaving TE and RE bits
cleared to 0)
3
Set TE or RE to 1 in SCR
Set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and
MPIE bits as necessary 4
Wait
Wait for at least the interval required to transmit or receive
one bit, then set the TE or RE bit to 1 in SCR. Also set
the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits as necessary.
Setting the TE or RE bit enables the SCI to use the
TxD or RxD pin.
Start of initialization
Set value in BRR
Select communication
format in SMR
483
Transmitting Serial Data (Synchronous Mode): Figure 13-16 shows a sample flowchart for
transmitting serial data and indicates the procedure to follow.
Figure 13-16 Sample Flowchart for Serial Transmitting
Start transmitting
Read TDRE flag in SSR
TDRE = 1?
Write transmit data in
TDR and clear TDRE flag
to 0 in SSR
End
1
2
3
No
Yes
No
Yes
SCI initialization: the transmit data output function
of the TxD pin is selected automatically. After setting
TE bit to 1, output 1 from frame one transmission is
possible.
SCI status check and transmit data write: read SSR,
check that the TDRE flag is 1, then write transmit
data in TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0.
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
Yes
1.
2.
3.
Initialize
Clear TE bit to 0 in SCR
To continue transmitting serial data: after checking
that the TDRE flag is 1, indicating that data can be
written, write data in TDR, then clear the TDRE flag
to 0. When the DMAC is activated by a transmit-
data-empty interrupt request (TXI) to write data in
TDR, the TDRE flag is checked and cleared
automatically.
All data
transmitted?
TEND = 1?
484
In transmitting serial data, the SCI operates as follows.
• The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. When the TDRE flag is cleared to 0 the SCI
recognizes that TDR contains new data, and loads this data from TDR into TSR.
• After loading the data from TDR into TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmitting. If the TIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, the SCI requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt
(TXI) at this time.
If clock output is selected, the SCI outputs eight serial clock pulses. If an external clock
source is selected, the SCI outputs data in synchronization with the input clock. Data is output
from the TxD pin in order from LSB (bit 0) to MSB (bit 7).
• The SCI checks the TDRE flag when it outputs the MSB (bit 7). If the TDRE flag is 0, the
SCI loads data from TDR into TSR and begins serial transmission of the next frame. If the
TDRE flag is 1, the SCI sets the TEND flag to 1 in SSR, and after transmitting the MSB,
holds the TxD pin in the MSB state. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1, a transmit-end
interrupt (TEI) is requested at this time.
• After the end of serial transmission, the SCK pin is held in a constant state.
485
Figure 13-17 shows an example of SCI transmit operation.
Figure 13-17 Example of SCI Transmit Operation
Transmit
direction
Serial clock
Serial data
TDRE
TEND
Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7
TXI interrupt handler
writes data in TDR
and clears TDRE
flag to 0
TXI
request TEI
request
1 frame
TXI
request
486
Receiving Serial Data: Figure 13-18 shows a sample flowchart for receiving serial data and
indicates the procedure to follow. When switching from asynchronous mode to synchronous
mode, make sure that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are cleared to 0. If the FER or PER flag is
set to 1 the RDRF flag will not be set and both transmitting and receiving will be disabled.
Figure 13-18 Sample Flowchart for Serial Receiving (1)
Start receiving
Read RDRF flag in SSR
Read receive data
from RDR, and clear
RDRF flag to 0 in SSR
Read ORER flag in SSR
Clear RE bit to 0 in SCR
End
Error handling
continued on next page
1
4
5
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
3
1.
2, 3.
4.
5.
SCI initialization: the receive data function of
the RxD pin is selected automatically.
Receive error handling: if a receive error
occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR, then after
executing the necessary error handling, clear
the ORER flag to 0. Neither transmitting nor
receiving can resume while the ORER flag
remains set to 1.
SCI status check and receive data read: read
SSR, check that the RDRF flag is set to 1,
then read receive data from RDR and clear
the RDRF flag to 0. Notification that the RDRF
flag has changed from 0 to 1 can also be
given by the RXI interrupt.
To continue receiving serial data: check the
RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear the RDRF
flag to 0 before the MSB (bit 7) of the current
frame is received. If the DMAC is activated
by a receive-data-full interrupt request (RXI)
to read RDR, the RDRF flag is cleared
automatically.
Initialize
No
RDRF = 1?
ORER = 1?
Finished
receiving?
2
487
Figure 13-18 Sample Flowchart for Serial Receiving (2)
In receiving, the SCI operates as follows.
• The SCI synchronizes with serial clock input or output and initializes internally.
• Receive data is stored in RSR in order from LSB to MSB.
After receiving the data, the SCI checks that the RDRF flag is 0 so that receive data can be
transferred from RSR to RDR. If this check passes, the RDRF flag is set to 1 and the received
data is stored in RDR. If the check does not pass (receive error), the SCI operates as indicated
in table 13-11.
• After setting the RDRF flag to 1, if the RIE bit is set to 1 in SCR, the SCI requests a receive-
data-full interrupt (RXI). If the ORER flag is set to 1 and the RIE bit in SCR is also set to 1,
the SCI requests a receive-error interrupt (ERI).
3
End
Error handling
Overrun error handling
Clear ORER flag to 0 in SSR
488
Figure 13-19 shows an example of SCI receive operation.
Figure 13-19 Example of SCI Receive Operation
Transmitting and Receiving Serial Data Simultaneously (Synchronous Mode): Figure 13-20
shows a sample flowchart for transmitting and receiving serial data simultaneously and indicates
the procedure to follow.
Serial clock
Serial data Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7
RXI
request
Receive direction
RDRF
ORER
RXI interrupt
handler reads
data in RDR
and clears
RDRF flag to 0
Overrun error,
ERI request
1 frame
RXI
request
489
Figure 13-20 Sample Flowchart for Serial Transmitting
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Initialize
Start transmitting and receiving
Read TDRE flag in SSR
TDRE = 1?
Write transmit data in TDR and
clear TDRE flag to 0 in SSR
RDRF = 1?
Read RDRF flag in SSR
Read receive data from RDR
and clear RDRF flag to 0 in SSR
Read ORER flag in SSR
ORER = 1?
End of transmitting and
receiving?
1
2
5
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SCI initialization: the transmit data
output function of the TxD pin and
receive data input function of the
RxD pin are selected, enabling
simultaneous transmitting and
receiving.
SCI status check and transmit
data write: read SSR, check that
the TDRE flag is 1, then write
transmit data in TDR and clear
the TDRE flag to 0.
Error handling
Note: *When switching from transmitting or receiving to simultaneous
transmitting and receiving, clear the TE and RE bits both to 0,
then set the TE and RE bits both to 1.
Clear TE and RE bits to 0 in SCR
End
Notification that the TDRE flag has
changed from 0 to 1 can also be
given by the TXI interrupt.
Receive error handling: if a receive
error occurs, read the ORER flag in
SSR, then after executing the neces-
sary error handling, clear the ORER
flag to 0.
Neither transmitting nor receiving
can resume while the ORER flag
remains set to 1.
SCI status check and receive
data read: read SSR, check that
the RDRF flag is 1, then read
receive data from RDR and clear
the RDRF flag to 0. Notification
that the RDRF flag has changed
from 0 to 1 can also be given
by the RXI interrupt.
To continue transmitting and
receiving serial data: check the
RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear
the RDRF flag to 0 before the
MSB (bit 7) of the current frame
is received. Also check that
the TDRE flag is set to 1, indicat-
ing that data can be written, write
data in TDR, then clear the TDRE
flag to 0 before the MSB (bit 7) of
the current frame is transmitted.
When the DMAC is activated by
a transmit-data-empty interrupt
request (TXI) to write data in TDR,
the TDRE flag is checked and
cleared automatically. When the
DMAC is activated by a receive-
data-full interrupt request (RXI) to
read RDR, the RDRF flag is
cleared automatically.
4
490
13.4 SCI Interrupts
The SCI has four interrupt request sources: TEI (transmit-end interrupt), ERI (receive-error
interrupt), RXI (receive-data-full interrupt), and TXI (transmit-data-empty interrupt). Table 13-12
lists the interrupt sources and indicates their priority. These interrupts can be enabled and disabled
by the TIE, TEIE, and RIE bits in SCR. Each interrupt request is sent separately to the interrupt
controller.
The TXI interrupt is requested when the TDRE flag is set to 1 in SSR. The TEI interrupt is
requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 in SSR. The TXI interrupt request can activate the
DMAC to transfer data. Data transfer by the DMAC automatically clears the TDRE flag to 0. The
TEI interrupt request cannot activate the DMAC.
The RXI interrupt is requested when the RDRF flag is set to 1 in SSR. The ERI interrupt is
requested when the ORER, PER, or FER flag is set to 1 in SSR. The RXI interrupt request can
activate the DMAC to transfer data. Data transfer by the DMAC automatically clears the RDRF
flag to 0. The ERI interrupt request cannot activate the DMAC.
The DMAC can be activated by interrupts from SCI channel 0.
Table 13-12 SCI Interrupt Sources
Interrupt Description Priority
ERI Receive error (ORER, FER, or PER) High
RXI Receive data register full (RDRF)
TXI Transmit data register empty (TDRE)
TEI Transmit end (TEND) Low
491
13.5 Usage Notes
Note the following points when using the SCI.
TDR Write and TDRE Flag: The TDRE flag in SSR is a status flag indicating the loading of
transmit data from TDR into TSR. The SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 when it transfers data from
TDR to TSR.
Data can be written into TDR regardless of the state of the TDRE flag. If new data is written in
TDR when the TDRE flag is 0, the old data stored in TDR will be lost because this data has not
yet been transferred to TSR. Before writing transmit data in TDR, be sure to check that the TDRE
flag is set to 1.
Simultaneous Multiple Receive Errors: Table 13-13 indicates the state of SSR status flags when
multiple receive errors occur simultaneously. When an overrun error occurs the RSR contents are
not transferred to RDR, so receive data is lost.
Table 13-13 SSR Status Flags and Transfer of Receive Data
Receive Data
Transfer
RDRF ORER FER PER RSR →RDR Receive Errors
1100×Overrun error
0010oFraming error
0001oParity error
1110×Overrun error + framing error
1101×Overrun error + parity error
0011oFraming error + parity error
1111×Overrun error + framing error + parity error
Notes: o: Receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR.
×Receive data is not transferred from RSR to RDR.
SSR Status Flags
492
Break Detection and Processing: Break signals can be detected by reading the RxD pin directly
when a framing error (FER) is detected. In the break state the input from the RxD pin consists of
all 0s, so the FER flag is set and the parity error flag (PER) may also be set. In the break state the
SCI receiver continues to operate, so if the FER flag is cleared to 0 it will be set to 1 again.
Sending a Break Signal: When the TE bit is cleared to 0 the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, the
level and direction (input or output) of which are determined by DR and DDR bits. This feature
can be used to send a break signal.
After the serial transmitter is initialized, the DR value substitutes for the mark state until the TE
bit is set to 1 (the TxD pin function is not selected until the TE bit is set to 1). The DDR and DR
bits should therefore both be set to 1 beforehand.
To send a break signal during serial transmission, clear the DR bit to 0, then clear the TE bit to 0.
When the TE bit is cleared to 0 the transmitter is initialized, regardless of its current state, so the
TxD pin becomes an output port outputting the value 0.
Receive Error Flags and Transmitter Operation (Synchronous Mode Only): When a receive
error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1 the SCI will not start transmitting, even if the TDRE
flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 when starting to transmit. Note that
clearing the RE bit to 0 does not clear the receive error flags to 0.
Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode and Receive Margin: In asynchronous
mode the SCI operates on a base clock with 16 times the bit rate frequency. In receiving, the SCI
synchronizes internally with the fall of the start bit, which it samples on the base clock. Receive
data is latched at the rising edge of the eighth base clock pulse. See figure 13-21.
493
Figure 13-21 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode
The receive margin in asynchronous mode can therefore be expressed as in equation (1).
...................(1)
M: Receive margin (%)
N: Ratio of clock frequency to bit rate (N = 16)
D: Clock duty cycle (D = 0 to 1.0)
L: Frame length (L = 9 to 12)
F: Absolute deviation of clock frequency
From equation (1), if F = 0 and D = 0.5 the receive margin is 46.875%, as given by equation (2).
D = 0.5, F = 0
M = {0.5 – 1/(2 ×16)} ×100%
= 46.875%.................................................................................................(2)
This is a theoretical value. A reasonable margin to allow in system designs is 20% to 30%.
Internal
base clock
Receive data
(RxD)
Synchronization
sampling timing
Data sampling
timing
0715 0 715 0
D0D1
8 clocks
16 clocks
Start bit
M = | (0.5 – ) – (L – 0.5) F – (1 + F) | 100%
1
2N
| D – 0.5 |
N×
494
Restrictions on Usage of DMAC
To have the DMAC read RDR, be sure to select the SCI receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) as the
activation source with bits DTS2 to DTS0 in DTCR.
Restrictions on Usage of the Serial Clock
When transmitting data using the serial clock as an external clock, after clearing SSR of TDRE,
maintain the space between each frame of the lead of the transmission clock (start-up edge) at five
states or more (see Figure 13-22). This condition is also needed for continuous transmission. If it
is not fulfilled, operational error will occur.
Figure 13-22 Serial Clock Transmission (Example)
Ensure that t ≥ 5 states.
SCK
TDRE
TXD
t*t*
Continuous transmission
X0 X1 X2 X3 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3X4 X5 X6 X7
Note:*
495
Section 14 Smart Card Interface
14.1 Overview
As an extension of its serial communication interface functions, SCI0 supports a smart card (IC
card) interface conforming to the ISO/IEC7816-3 (Identification Card) standard. Switchover
between normal serial communication and the smart card interface is controlled by a register
setting.
14.1.1 Features
Features of the smart-card interface supported by the H8/3048 Series are listed below.
• Asynchronous communication
— Data length: 8 bits
— Parity bits generated and checked
— Error signal output in receive mode (parity error)
— Error signal detect and automatic data retransmit in transmit mode
— Supports both direct convention and inverse convention
• Built-in baud rate generator with selectable bit rates
• Three types of interrupts
Transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, and receive-error interrupts are requested
independently. The transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts can activate the DMA
controller (DMAC) to transfer data.
497
14.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 14-1 shows a block diagram of the smart card interface.
Figure 14-1 Smart Card Interface Block Diagram
Module data bus Internal
data
bus
BRR
SCMR
Baud rate
generator
Transmit/receive
control
RDR
TSRRSR
Bus interface
SSR
SCR
SMR
TDR
Legend
SCMR:
RSR:
RDR:
TSR:
TDR:
SMR:
SCR:
SSR:
BRR:
Smart card mode register
Receive shift register
Receive data register
Transmit shift register
Transmit data register
Serial mode register
Serial control register
Serial status register
Bit rate register
ø
ø/4
ø/16
ø/64
TXI
Clock
Parity generate
Parity check
RxD0
TxD0
SCK0
RXI
ERI
498
14.1.3 Input/Output Pins
Table 14-1 lists the smart card interface pins.
Table 14-1 Smart Card Interface Pins
Name Abbreviation I/O Function
Serial clock pin SCK0Output Clock output
Receive data pin RxD0Input Receive data input
Transmit data pin TxD0Output Transmit data output
14.1.4 Register Configuration
The smart card interface has the internal registers listed in table 14-2. BRR, TDR, and RDR have
their normal serial communication interface functions, as described in section 13, Serial
Communication Interface.
Table 14-2 Registers
Address*1Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FFB0 Serial mode register SMR R/W H'00
H'FFB1 Bit rate register BRR R/W H'FF
H'FFB2 Serial control register SCR R/W H'00
H'FFB3 Transmit data register TDR R/W H'FF
H'FFB4 Serial status register SSR R/(W)*2F'84
H'FFB5 Receive data register RDR R H'00
H'FFB6 Smart card mode register SCMR R/W H'F2
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags.
499
14.2 Register Descriptions
This section describes the new or modified registers and bit functions in the smart card interface.
14.2.1 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR)
SCMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects smart card interface functions.
SCMR is initialized to H'F2 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bit 3—Smart Card Data Transfer Direction (SDIR): Selects the serial/parallel conversion
format.
Bit 3
SDIR Description
0 TDR contents are transmitted LSB-first (Initial value)
Received data is stored LSB-first in RDR
1 TDR contents are transmitted MSB-first
Received data is stored MSB-first in RDR
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
SDIR
0
R/W
0
SMIF
0
R/W
2
SINV
0
R/W
1
—
1
—
Reserved bits
Smart card data transfer direction
Selects the serial/parallel conversion format
Smart card data invert
Inverts data logic levels
Smart card interface
mode select
Enables or disables
the smart card
interface function
Reserved bits
500
Bit 2—Smart Card Data Inverter (SINV): Inverts data logic levels. This function is used in
combination with bit 3 to communicate with inverse-convention cards. SINV does not affect the
logic level of the parity bit. For parity settings, see section 14.3.4, Register Settings.
Bit 2
SINV Description
0 Unmodified TDR contents are transmitted (Initial value)
Received data is stored unmodified in RDR
1 Inverted TDR contents are transmitted
Received data is inverted before storage in RDR
Bit 1—Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1.
Bit 0—Smart Card Interface Mode Select (SMIF): Enables the smart card interface function.
Bit 0
SMIF Description
0 Smart card interface function is disabled (Initial value)
1 Smart card interface function is enabled
14.2.2 Serial Status Register (SSR)
The function of SSR bit 4 is modified in the smart card interface. This change also causes a
modification to the setting conditions for bit 2 (TEND).
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
7
TDRE
1
R/(W)*
6
RDRF
0
R/(W)*
5
ORER
0
R/(W)*
4
ERS
0
R/(W)*
3
PER
0
R/(W)*
0
MPBT
0
R/W
2
TEND
1
R
1
MPB
0
R
Error signal status (ERS)
Status flag indicating that an
error signal has been received
Transmit end
Status flag indicating
end of transmission
501
Bits 7 to 5: These bits operate as in normal serial communication. For details see section 13,
Serial Communication Interface.
Bit 4—Error Signal Status (ERS): In smart card interface mode, this flag indicates the status of
the error signal sent from the receiving device to the transmitting device. The smart card interface
does not detect framing errors.
Bit 4
ERS Description
0 Indicates normal data transmission, with no error signal returned (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
The chip is reset or enters standby mode.
Software reads ERS while it is set to 1, then writes 0.
1 Indicates that the receiving device sent an error signal reporting a parity error
[Setting condition]
A low error signal was sampled.
Note: Clearing the TE bit to 0 in SCR does not affect the ERS flag, which retains its previous value.
Bits 3 to 0: These bits operate as in normal serial communication. For details see section 13,
Serial Communication Interface. The setting conditions for transmit end (TEND, bit 2), however,
are modified as follows.
Bit 2
TEND Description
0 Transmission is in progress
[Clearing conditions]
Software reads TDRE while it is set to 1, then writes 0 in the TDRE flag.
The DMAC writes data in TDR.
1 End of transmission (Initial value)
[Setting conditions]
The chip is reset or enters standby mode.
The TE bit and FER/ERS bit are both cleared to 0 in SCR.
TDRE is 1 and FER/ERS is 0 at a time 2.5 etu after the last bit of a 1-byte serial
character is transmitted (normal transmission)
Note: An etu (elementary time unit) is the time needed to transmit one bit.
502
14.2.3 Serial Mode Register (SMR)
Bit 7 of SMR has a different function in smart card interface mode. The related serial control
register (SCR) changes from bit 1 to bit 0. However, this function does not exist in the flash
memory version.
Bit 7-GSM Mode (GM): Set at 0 when using the regular smart card interface. In GSM mode, set
to 1. When transmission is complete, initially the TEND flag set timing appears followed by clock
output restriction mode. Clock output restriction mode comprises serial control register bit 1 and
bit 0.
Bit 7
GM Description
0 Using the regular smart card interface mode
• The TEND flag is set 12.5 etu after the beginning of the start bit (Initial value)
• Clock output on/off control only
1 Using the GSM mode smart card interface mode
• The TEND flag is set 11.0 etu after the beginning of the start bit
• Clock output on/off and fixed-high/fixed-low control
Bits 6 to 0—Operate in the same way as for the normal SCI.
For details, see section 13.2.5, Serial Mode Register (SMR).
503
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
GM
0
R/W
6
CHR
0
R/W
5
PR
0
R/W
4
O/E
0
R/W
3
STOP
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
2
MP
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
14.2.4 Serial Control Register (SCR)
Bits 1 and 0 have different functions in smart card interface mode. However, this function does not
exist in the flash memory version.
Bits 7 to 2—Operate in the same way as for the normal SCI.
For details, see section 13.2.6, Serial Control Register (SCR).
Bits 1 and 0—Clock Enable (CKE1, CKE0): Setting enable or disable for the SCI clock
selection and clock output from the SCK pin. In smart card interface mode, it is possible to switch
between enabling and disabling of the normal clock output, and specify a fixed high level or fixed
low level for the clock output.
SMR SCR
Bit 7 Bit 1 Bit 0
GM CKE1 CKE0 Description
0 0 0 The internal clock/SCK0 pin functions as an I/O port (Initial value)
0 0 1 The internal clock/SCK0 pin functions as the clock output
1 0 0 The internal clock/SCK0 pin is fixed at low-level output
1 0 1 The internal clock/SCK0 pin functions as the clock output
1 1 0 The internal clock/SCK0 pin is fixed at high-level output
1 1 1 The internal clock/SCK0 pin functions as the clock output
504
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
TIE
0
R/W
6
RIE
0
R/W
5
TE
0
R/W
4
RE
0
R/W
3
MPIE
0
R/W
0
CKE0
0
R/W
2
TEIE
0
R/W
1
CKE1
0
R/W
14.3 Operation
14.3.1 Overview
The main features of the smart-card interface are as follows.
• One frame consists of eight data bits and a parity bit.
• In transmitting, a guard time of at least two elementary time units (2 etu) is provided between
the end of the parity bit and the start of the next frame. (An elementary time unit is the time
required to transmit one bit.)
• In receiving, if a parity error is detected, a low error signal is output for 1 etu, beginning 10.5
etu after the start bit.
• In transmitting, if an error signal is received, after at least 2 etu, the same data is
automatically transmitted again.
• Only asynchronous communication is supported. There is no synchronous communication
function.
14.3.2 Pin Connections
Figure 14-2 shows a pin connection diagram for the smart card interface.
In communication with a smart card, data is transmitted and received over the same signal line.
The TxD0and RxD0pins should both be connected to this line. The data transmission line should
be pulled up to VCC through a resistor.
If the smart card uses the clock generated by the smart card interface, connect the SCK0output pin
to the card’s CLK input. If the card uses its own internal clock, this connection is unnecessary.
The reset signal should be output from one of the H8/3048 Series’ generic ports.
In addition to these pin connections, power and ground connections will normally also be
necessary.
505
Figure 14-2 Smart Card Interface Connection Diagram
Note: A loop-back test can be performed by setting both RE and TE to 1 without connecting a
smart card.
14.3.3 Data Format
Figure 14-3 shows the data format of the smart card interface. In receive mode, parity is checked
once per frame. If a parity error is detected, an error signal is returned to the transmitting device to
request retransmission. In transmit mode, the error signal is sampled and the same data is
retransmitted if the error signal is low.
Figure 14-3 Smart Card Interface Data Format
H8/3048 Series
Chip
Card-processing device
Smart card
TxD0
RxD0
SCK0
Px (port)
I/O
CLK
RST
Data line
VCC
Clock line
Reset line
Ds
Parity error
D0 D1 D2 D3
Output from transmitting device
Output from
receiving device
D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE
Ds
No parity error
D0 D1 D2 D3
Output from transmitting device
D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp
Ds:
D0 to D7:
Dp:
DE:
Start bit
Data bits
Parity bit
Error signal
506
The operating sequence is as follows.
1. When not in use, the data line is in the high-impedance state, and is pulled up to the high level
through a resistor.
2. To start transmitting a frame of data, the transmitting device transmits a low start bit (Ds),
followed by eight data bits (D0 to D7) and a parity bit (Dp).
3. Next, in the smart card interface, the transmitting device returns the data line to the high-
impedance state. The data line is pulled up to the high level through a resistor.
4. The receiving device performs a parity check. If there is no parity error, the receiving device
waits to receive the next data. If a parity error is present, the receiving device outputs a low
error signal (DE) to request retransmission of the data. After outputting the error signal for a
designated interval, the receiving device returns the signal line to the high-impedance state.
The signal line is pulled back up to the high level through the pull-up resistor.
5. If the transmitting device does not receive an error signal, it proceeds to transmit the next
data. If it receives an error signal, it returns to step 2 and transmits the same data again.
507
14.3.4 Register Settings
Table 14-3 shows a bit map of the registers used in the smart card interface. Bits indicated as 0 or
1 should always be set to the indicated value. The settings of the other bits will be described in
this section.
Table 14-3 Register Settings in Smart Card Interface
Register Address*1Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
SMR H'FFB0 GM 0 1 O/E1 0 CKS1 CKS0
BRR H'FFB1 BRR7 BRR6 BRR5 BRR4 BRR3 BRR2 BRR1 BRR0
SCR H'FFB2 TIE RIE TE RE 0 0 CKE1*2CKE0
TDR H'FFB3 TDR7 TDR6 TDR5 TDR4 TDR3 TDR2 TDR1 TDR0
SSR H'FFB4 TDRE RDRF ORER ERS PER TEND 0 0
RDR H'FFB5 RDR7 RDR6 RDR5 RDR4 RDR3 RDR2 RDR1 RDR0
SCMR H'FFB6 — — — — SDIR SINV — SMIF
Notes: — Unused bit.
1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. When the GM of the SMR is set at 0, be sure the CKE1 bit is 0.
Serial Mode Register (SMR) Settings: In regular smart card interface mode, set the GM bit at 0.
In regular smart card mode, clear the GM bit to 0. In GSM mode, set the GM bit to 1. Clear the
O/Ebit to 0 if the smart card uses the direct convention. Set the O/Ebit to 1 if the smart card uses
the inverse convention. Bits CKS1 and CKS0 select the clock source of the built-in baud rate
generator. See section 14.3.5, Clock.
Bit Rate Register (BRR) Settings: This register sets the bit rate. Equations for calculating the
setting are given in section 14.3.5, Clock.
Serial Control Register (SCR): The TIE, RIE, TE, and RE bits have their normal serial
communication functions. For details, see section 13, Serial Communication Interface. The CKE1
and CKE0 bits select clock output. When the GM bit of the SMR is cleared to 0, to disable clock
output, clear this bit to 00. To enable clock output, set this bit to 01. When the GM bit of the SMR
is set to 1, clock output is enabled. Clock output is fixed at high or low.
Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR): If the smart card follows the direct convention, clear the
SDIR and SINV bits to 0. If the smart card follows the indirect convention, set the SDIR and
SINV bits to 1. To use the smart card interface, set the SMIF bit to 1.
508
The register settings and examples of starting character waveforms are shown below for two smart
cards, one following the direct convention and one the inverse convention.
Direct convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E= 0)
In the direct convention, state Z corresponds to logic level 1, and state A to logic level 0.
Characters are transmitted and received LSB-first. In the example above the first character data is
H'3B. The parity bit is 1, following the even parity rule designated for smart cards.
Inverse convention (SDIR = SINV = O/E= 1)
In the inverse convention, state A corresponds to the logic level 1, and state Z to the logic level 0.
Characters are transmitted and received MSB-first. In the example above the first character data is
H'3F. Following the even parity rule designated for smart cards, the parity bit logic level is 0,
corresponding to state Z.
In the H8/3048 Series, the SINV bit inverts only the data bits D7 to D0. The parity bit is not
inverted, so the O/Ebit in SMR must be set to odd parity mode. This applies in both transmitting
and receiving.
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp
AZZAZZZAAZ(Z) (Z) State
Ds D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Dp
AZZAAAAAAZ(Z) (Z) State
509
14.3.5 Clock
As its serial communication clock, the smart card interface can use only the internal clock
generated by the on-chip baud rate generator. The bit rate can be selected by setting the bit rate
register (BRR) and bits CKS1 and CKS0 in the serial mode register (SMR). The bit rate can be
calculated from the equation given below. Table 14-5 lists some examples of bit rate settings.
If bit CKE0 is set to 1, a clock signal with a frequency equal to 372 times the bit rate is output
from the SCK0pin.
B = ×106
where, N: BRR setting (0 ≤N ≤255)
B: Bit rate (bits/s)
ø: System clock frequency (MHz)*
n: See table 14-4
Table 14-4 n-Values of CKS1 and CKS0 Settings
n CKS1 CKS0
000
101
210
311
Note: * If the gear function is used to divide the system clock frequenc y, use the divided frequency
to calculate the bit rate. The equation abov e applies directly to 1/1 frequenc y division.
Table 14-5 Bit Rates (bits/s) for Different BRR Settings (when n = 0)
ø (MHz)
N 7.1424 10.00 10.7136 13.00 14.2848 16.00 18.00
0 9600.0 13440.9 14400.0 17473.1 19200.0 21505.4 24193.5
1 4800.0 6720.4 7200.0 8736.6 9600.0 10752.7 12096.8
2 3200.0 4480.3 4800.0 5824.4 6400.0 7168.5 8064.5
Note: Bit rates are rounded off to one decimal place.
ø
1488 ×22n–1 ×(N + 1)
510
The following equation calculates the bit rate register (BRR) setting from the system clock
frequency and bit rate. N is an integer from 0 to 255, specifying the value with the smaller error.
N = ×106– 1
Table 14-6 BRR Settings for Typical Bit Rate (bits/s) (when n = 0)
ø (MHz)
7.1424 10.00 10.7136 13.00 14.2848 16.00 18.00
Bit/s N Error N Error N Error N Error N Error N Error N Error
9600 0 0.00 1 30.00 1 25.00 1 8.99 1 0.00 1 12.01 2 15.99
Table 14-7 Maximum Bit Rates for Various Frequencies (Smart Card Interface)
ø (MHz) Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) N n
7.1424 9600 0 0
10 13441 0 0
10.7136 14400 0 0
13 17473 0 0
14.2848 19200 0 0
16 21505 0 0
18 24194 0 0
The bit rate error is calculated from the following equation.
Error (%) = ×106–1 ×100
ø
1488 ×22n–1 ×B
ø
1488 ×22n – 1 ×B ×(N + 1)
511
14.3.6 Transmitting and Receiving Data
Initialization: Before transmitting or receiving data, initialize the smart card interface by the
procedure below. Initialization is also necessary when switching from transmit mode to receive
mode or from receive mode to transmit mode.
1. Clear the TE and RE bits to 0 in the serial control register (SCR).
2. Clear the ERS, PER, and ORER error flags to 0 in the serial status register (SSR).
3. Set the parity mode bit (O/E) and baud rate generator clock source select bits (CKS1 and
CKS0) as required in the serial mode register (SMR). At the same time, clear the C/A, CHR,
and MP bits to 0, and set the STOP and PE bits to 1.
4. Set the SMIF, SDIR, and SINV bits as required in the smart card mode register (SMR). When
the SMIF bit is set to 1, the TxD0and RxD0pins switch from their I/O port functions to their
serial communication interface functions, and are placed in the high-impedance state.
5. Set a value corresponding to the desired bit rate in the bit rate register (BRR).
6. Set clock enable bit 0 (CKE0) as required in the serial control register (SCR). Write 0 in the
TIE, RIE, TE, RE, MPIE, TEIE, and CKE1 bits. If bit CKE0 is set to 1, a serial clock will be
output from the SCK0pin.
7. Wait for at least the interval required to transmit or receive one bit, then set the TIE, RIE, TE,
and RE bits as necessary in SCR. Do not set TE and RE both to 1, except when performing a
loop-back test.
Transmitting Serial Data: The transmitting procedure in smart card mode is different from the
normal SCI procedure, because of the need to sample the error signal and retransmit. Figure 14-4
shows a flowchart for transmitting, and figure 14-5 shows the relation between a transmit
operation and the internal registers.
1. Initialize the smart card interface by the procedure given above in Initialization.
2. Check that the ERS error flag is cleared to 0 in SSR.
3. Check that the TEND flag is set to 1 in SSR. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until this check passes.
4. Write transmit data in TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. The data will be transmitted and the
TEND flag will be cleared to 0.
5. To continue transmitting data, return to step 2.
6. To terminate transmission, clear the TE bit to 0.
This procedure may include interrupt handling and DMA transfer.
If the TIE bit is set to 1 to enable interrupt requests, when transmission is completed and the
512
TEND flag is set to 1, a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) is requested. If the RIE bit is set to 1
to enable interrupt requests, when a transmit error occurs and the ERS flag is set to 1, a
transmit/receive-error interrupt (ERI) is requested.
The timing of TEND flag setting depends on the GM bit in SMR. The timing is shown in figure
14-6.
If the TXI interrupt activates the DMAC, the number of bytes designated in the DMAC can be
transmitted automatically, including automatic retransmit.
For details, see Interrupt Operations and Data Transfer by DMAC in this section.
Figure 14-4 Transmit Flowchart (Example)
FER/ERS = 0 ?
TEND = 1 ?
FER/ERS = 0 ?
TEND = 1 ?
All data
transmitted ?
Initialize
Write data in TDR and clear
TDRE flag to 0 in SSR
Clear TE bit to 0
Start
Error handling
Error handling
Start transmitting
End
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
513
Figure 14-5 Relation Between Transmit Operation and Internal Registers
Figure 14-6 TEND Flag Occurrence Timing
514
TDR TSR
(shift register)
(1) Data write
(2) Transfer from
TDR to TSR
(3) Serial data output
Data 1
Data 1
Data 1
Data 1 ; Data remains in TDR
I/O signal line output
In case of normal transmission: TEND flag is set
In case of transmit error: ERS flag is set
Steps (2) and (3) above are repeated until the TEND flag is set
Data 1
Note: When the ERS flag is set, it should be cleared until transfer of the last bit (D7 in LSB-first
transmission, D0 in MSB-first transmission) of the next transfer data to be transmitted has
been completed.
I/O data
Guard
GM = 1
GM = 0
TXI
(TEND interrupt)
DS Da Db Dc Dd De
12.5 etu
11.0 etu
Df Dg Dh Dp DE
Receiving Serial Data: The receiving procedure in smart card mode is the same as the normal
SCI procedure. Figure 14-7 shows a flowchart for receiving.
1. Initialize the smart card interface by the procedure given in Initialization at the beginning of
this section.
2. Check that the ORER and PER error flags are cleared to 0 in SSR. If either flag is set, carry
out the necessary error handling, then clear both the ORER and PER flags to 0.
3. Check that the RDRF flag is set to 1. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until this check passes.
4. Read receive data from RDR.
5. To continue receiving data, clear the RDRF flag to 0 and return to step 2.
6. To terminate receiving, clear the RE bit to 0.
Figure 14-7 Receive Flowchart (Example)
515
ORER = 0 and
PER = 0 ?
RDRF = 1 ?
All data received ?
Initialize
Read RDR and clear RDRF
flag to 0 in SSR
Clear RE bit to 0
Start
Error handling
Start receiving
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
This procedure may include interrupt handling and DMA transfer.
If the RIE bit is set to 1 to enable interrupt requests, when receiving is completed and the RDRF
flag is set to 1, a receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) is requested. If a receive error occurs, either the
ORER or PER flag is set to 1 and a transmit/receive-error interrupt (ERI) is requested.
If the RXI interrupt activates the DMAC, the number of bytes designated in the DMAC will be
transferred, skipping receive data in which an error occurred.
For details, see Interrupt Operations and Data Transfer by DMAC below.
When a parity error occurs and PER is set to 1, the receive data is transferred to RDR, so the
erroneous data can be read.
Switching Modes: To switch from receive mode to transmit mode, check that receiving
operations have completed, then initialize the smart card interface, clearing RE to 0 and setting TE
to 1. Completion of receive operations is indicated by the RDRF, PER, or ORER flag.
To switch from transmit mode to receive mode, check that transmitting operations have
completed, then initialize the smart card interface, clearing TE to 0 and setting RE to 1.
Completion of transmit operations can be verified from the TEND flag.
Fixing Clock Output: When the GM bit of the SMR is set to 1, clock output is fixed by CKE1
and CKE0 of SCR. In this case, the clock pulse can be set at minimum value.
Figure 14-8 shows clock output fixed timing: CKE0 is restricted with GM = 1 and CKE1 = 1.
Figure 14-8 Clock Output Fixed Timing
Interrupt Operations: The smart card interface has three interrupt sources: transmit-data-empty
(TXI), transmit/receive-error (ERI), and receive-data-full (RXI). The transmit-end interrupt
request (TEI) is not available in smart card mode.
516
SCR write
(CKE0 = 1)
SCR write
(CKE0 = 0)
SCK
Specified pulse width Specified pulse width
CKE1 value
A TXI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 in SSR. An RXI interrupt is requested
when the RDRF flag is set to 1 in SSR. An ERI interrupt is requested when the ORER, PER, or
ERS flag is set to 1 in SSR. These relationships are shown in table 14-8.
Table 14-8 Smart Card Mode Operating States and Interrupt Sources
Interrupt DMAC
Operating State Flag Mask Bit Source Activation
Transmit mode Normal operation TEND TIE TXI Available
Error ERS RIE ERI Not available
Receive mode Normal operation RDRF RIE RXI Available
Error PER, ORER RIE ERI Not available
Data Transfer by DMAC: The DMA C can be used to transmit and receive in smart card mode, as
in normal SCI operations. In transmit mode, when the TEND flag is set to 1 in SSR, the TDRE flag
is set simultaneously, generating a TXI interrupt. If TXI is designated in advance as a DMAC
activation source, the DMAC will be acti vated by the TXI request and will transfer the next transmit
data. This data transfer by the DMAC automatically clears the TDRE and TEND flags to 0. When an
error occurs, the SCI automatically retransmits the same data, keeping TEND cleared to 0 so that the
DMAC is not activated. The SCI and DMAC will therefore automatically transmit the designated
number of bytes, including retransmission when an error occurs. When an error occurs the ERS flag
is not cleared automatically, so the RIE bit should be set to 1 to enable the error to generate an ERI
request, and the ERI interrupt handler should clear ERS.
When using the DMAC to transmit or receive, first set up and enable the DMAC, then make SCI
settings. DMAC settings are described in section 8, DMA Controller.
In receive operations, when the RDRF flag is set to 1 in SSR, an RXI interrupt is requested. If
RXI is designated in advance as a DMAC activation source, the DMAC will be activated by the
RXI request and will transfer the received data. This data transfer by the DMAC automatically
clears the RDRF flag to 0. When an error occurs, the RDRF flag is not set and an error flag is set
instead. The DMAC is not activated. The ERI interrupt request is directed to the CPU. The ERI
interrupt handler should clear the error flags.
Examples of Operation in GSM Mode
When switching between smart card interface mode and software standby mode, use the following
procedures to maintain the clock duty cycle.
• Switching from smart card interface mode to software standby mode
1. Set the P94 data register (DR) and data direction register (DDR) to the values for the
fixed output state in software standby mode.
517
2. Write 0 to the TE and RE bits in the serial control register (SCR) to stop transmit/receive
operations. At the same time, set the CKE1 bit to the value for the fixed output state in
software standby mode.
3. Write 0 to the CKE0 bit in SCR to stop the clock.
4. Wait for one serial clock cycle. During this period, the duty cycle is preserved and clock
output is fixed at the specified level.
5. Write H'00 to the serial mode register (SMR) and smart card mode register (SCMR).
6. Make the transition to the software standby state.
• Returning from software standby mode to smart card interface mode
1. Clear the software standby state.
2. Set the CKE1 bit in SCR to the value for the fixed output state at the start of software
standby (the current P94 pin state).
3. Set smart card interface mode and output the clock. Clock signal generation is started
with the normal duty cycle.
Figure 14.9 Procedure for Stopping and Restarting the Clock
Use the following procedure to secure the clock duty cycle after powering on.
1. The initial state is port input and high impedance. Use pull-up or pull-down resistors to fix
the potential.
2. Fix at the output specified by the CKE1 bit in SCR.
3. Set SMR and SCMR, and switch to smart card interface mode operation.
4. Set the CKE0 bit in SCR to 1 to start clock output.
(1)(2)(3) (1) (2)(3)(4) (5)(6)
Normal operation Normal operation
Software standby
mode
518
14.4 Usage Notes
When using the SCI as a smart card interface, note the following points.
Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Mode and Receive Margin: In smart card
mode the SCI operates on a base clock with 372 times the bit rate frequency. In receiving, the SCI
synchronizes internally with the fall of the start bit, which it samples on the base clock. Receive
data is latched at the rising edge of the 186th base clock pulse. See figure 14-10.
Figure 14-10 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Smart Card Mode
372 clocks
186 clocks
185 185
Internal
base clock
Receive data
(RxD)
Synchronization
sampling timing
Data sampling
timing
0
D1D0
37137100
Start
bit
519
The receive margin can therefore be expressed as follows.
Receive margin in smart card mode:
M = |0.5 – – (L – 0.5) F – (1 + F) |×100%
M: Receive margin (%)
N: Ratio of clock frequency to bit rate (N = 372)
D: Clock duty cycle (D = 0 to 1.0)
L: Frame length (L = 10)
F: Absolute deviation of clock frequency
From this equation, if F = 0 and D = 0.5 the receive margin is as follows.
D = 0.5, F = 0
M = {0.5 – 1/(2 ×372)} ×100%
= 49.866%
1
2N
|D – 0.5 |
N
520
Retransmission: Retransmission is described below for the separate cases of transmit mode and
receive mode.
Retransmission when SCI is in Receive Mode (See Figure 14-11):
(1) The SCI checks the received parity bit. If it detects an error, it automatically sets the PER flag
to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to the enable state, an ERI interrupt is requested. The PER
flag should be cleared to 0 in SSR before the next parity bit sampling timing.
(2) The RDRF bit in SSR is not set to 1 for the error frame.
(3) If an error is not detected when the parity bit is checked, the PER flag is not set in SSR.
(4) If an error is not detected when the parity bit is checked, receiving operations are assumed to
have ended normally, and the RDRF bit is automatically set to 1 in SSR. If the RIE bit in SCR
is set to the enable state, an RXI interrupt is requested. If RXI is enabled as a DMA transfer
activation source, the RDR contents can be read automatically. When the DMAC reads the
RDR data, it automatically clears RDRF to 0.
(5) When a normal frame is received, at the error signal transmit timing, the data pin is held in
the high-impedance state.
Figure 14-11 Retransmission in SCI Receive Mode
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp Ds
(DE) D0 D1 D2 D3 D4
Frame n
RDRF
(2) (4)
(1) (3)
PER
Retransmitted frame Frame n + 1
521
Retransmission when SCI is in Transmit Mode (See Figure 14-12):
(6) After transmitting one frame, if the receiving device returns an error signal, the SCI sets the
ERS flag to 1 in SSR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to the enable state, an ERI interrupt is
requested. The ERS flag should be cleared to 0 in SSR before the next parity bit sampling
timing.
(7) The TEND bit in SSR is not set for the frame in which the error signal was received,
indicating an error.
(8) If no error signal is returned from the receiving device, the ERS flag is not set in SSR.
(9) If no error signal is returned from the receiving device, transmission of the frame, including
retransmission, is assumed to be complete, and the TEND bit is set to 1 in SSR. If the TIE bit
in SCR is set to the enable state, a TXI interrupt is requested. If TXI is enabled as a DMA
transfer activation source, the next data can be written in TDR automatically. When the
DMAC writes data in TDR, it automatically clears the TDRE bit to 0.
Figure 14-12 Retransmission in SCI Transmit Mode
Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp DE Ds D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Dp Ds
(DE) D0 D1 D2 D3 D4
Frame n
(9)
(7)
Transfer from
TDR to TSR
Transfer from TDR to TSRTransfer from TDR to TSR
TDRE
TEND
ERS
(6) (8)
Retransmitted frame Frame n + 1
522
Section 15 A/D Converter
15.1 Overview
The H8/3048 Series includes a 10-bit successive-approximations A/D converter with a selection of
up to eight analog input channels.
When the A/D converter is not used, it can be halted independently to conserve power. For details
see section 20.6, Module Standby Function.
15.1.1 Features
A/D converter features are listed below.
• 10-bit resolution
• Eight input channels
• Selectable analog conversion voltage range
The analog voltage conversion range can be programmed by input of an analog reference
voltage at the VREF pin.
• High-speed conversion
Conversion time: maximum 7.4 µs per channel (with 18 MHz system clock)
• Two conversion modes
Single mode: A/D conversion of one channel
Scan mode: continuous conversion on one to four channels
• Four 16-bit data registers
A/D conversion results are transferred for storage into data registers corresponding to the
channels.
• Sample-and-hold function
• A/D conversion can be externally triggered
• A/D interrupt requested at end of conversion
At the end of A/D conversion, an A/D end interrupt (ADI) can be requested.
523
15.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 15-1 shows a block diagram of the A/D converter.
Figure 15-1 A/D Converter Block Diagram
Module data bus
Bus interface
On-chip
data bus
ADDRA
ADDRB
ADDRC
ADDRD
ADCSR
ADCR
Successive-
approximations register
10-bit D/A
AV
V
AV
CC
REF
SS
Analog
multi-
plexer
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Sample-and-
hold circuit
Comparator
+
–
Control circuit
ADTRG
ø/8
ø/16
ADI
Legend
ADCR:
ADCSR:
ADDRA:
ADDRB:
ADDRC:
ADDRD:
A/D control register
A/D control/status register
A/D data register A
A/D data register B
A/D data register C
A/D data register D
524
15.1.3 Input Pins
Table 15-1 summarizes the A/D converter’s input pins. The eight analog input pins are divided
into two groups: group 0 (AN0to AN3), and group 1 (AN4to AN7). AVCC and AVSS are the
power supply for the analog circuits in the A/D converter. VREF is the A/D conversion reference
voltage.
Table 15-1 A/D Converter Pins
Abbrevi-
Pin Name ation I/O Function
Analog power supply pin AVCC Input Analog power supply
Analog ground pin AVSS Input Analog ground and reference voltage
Reference voltage pin VREF Input Analog reference voltage
Analog input pin 0 AN0Input Group 0 analog inputs
Analog input pin 1 AN1Input
Analog input pin 2 AN2Input
Analog input pin 3 AN3Input
Analog input pin 4 AN4Input Group 1 analog inputs
Analog input pin 5 AN5Input
Analog input pin 6 AN6Input
Analog input pin 7 AN7Input
A/D external trigger input pin ADTRG Input External trigger input for starting A/D conversion
525
15.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 15-2 summarizes the A/D converter’s registers.
Table 15-2 A/D Converter Registers
Address*1Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FFE0 A/D data register A (high) ADDRAH R H'00
H'FFE1 A/D data register A (low) ADDRAL R H'00
H'FFE2 A/D data register B (high) ADDRBH R H'00
H'FFE3 A/D data register B (low) ADDRBL R H'00
H'FFE4 A/D data register C (high) ADDRCH R H'00
H'FFE5 A/D data register C (low) ADDRCL R H'00
H'FFE6 A/D data register D (high) ADDRDH R H'00
H'FFE7 A/D data register D (low) ADDRDL R H'00
H'FFE8 A/D control/status register ADCSR R/(W)*2H'00
H'FFE9 A/D control register ADCR R/W H'7E
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address
2. Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag.
526
15.2 Register Descriptions
15.2.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD)
The four A/D data registers (ADDRA to ADDRD) are 16-bit read-only registers that store the
results of A/D conversion.
An A/D conversion produces 10-bit data, which is transferred for storage into the A/D data
register corresponding to the selected channel. The upper 8 bits of the result are stored in the
upper byte of the A/D data register. The lower 2 bits are stored in the lower byte. Bits 5 to 0 of an
A/D data register are reserved bits that are always read as 0. Table 15-3 indicates the pairings of
analog input channels and A/D data registers.
The CPU can always read and write the A/D data registers. The upper byte can be read directly,
but the lower byte is read through a temporary register (TEMP). For details see section 15.3, CPU
Interface.
The A/D data registers are initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in standby mode.
Table 15-3 Analog Input Channels and A/D Data Registers
Analog Input Channel
Group 0 Group 1 A/D Data Register
AN0AN4ADDRA
AN1AN5ADDRB
AN2AN6ADDRC
AN3AN7ADDRD
Bit
ADDRn
Initial value
14
AD8
0
R
12
AD6
0
R
10
AD4
0
R
8
AD2
0
R
6
AD0
0
R
0
—
0
R
4
—
0
R
2
—
0
R
15
AD9
0
R
13
AD7
0
R
11
AD5
0
R
9
AD3
0
R
7
AD1
0
R
1
—
0
R
5
—
0
R
3
—
0
R
A/D conversion data
10-bit data giving an
A/D conversion result
Reserved bits
Read/Write
(n = A to D)
527
15.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)
ADCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the mode and controls the A/D converter.
ADCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
ADF
0
R/(W)
6
ADIE
0
R/W
5
ADST
0
R/W
4
SCAN
0
R/W
3
CKS
0
R/W
0
CH0
0
R/W
2
CH2
0
R/W
1
CH1
0
R/W
*
Note: Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.*
A/D end flag
Indicates end of A/D conversion
A/D interrupt enable
Enables and disables A/D end interrupts
A/D start
Starts or stops A/D conversion
Scan mode
Selects single mode or scan mode
Clock select
Selects the A/D conversion time
Channel select 2 to 0
These bits select analog
input channels
528
Bit 7—A/D End Flag (ADF): Indicates the end of A/D conversion.
Bit 7
ADF Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
Cleared by reading ADF while ADF = 1, then writing 0 in ADF
1 [Setting conditions]
Single mode: A/D conversion ends
Scan mode: A/D conversion ends in all selected channels
Bit 6—A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE): Enables or disables the interrupt (ADI) requested at the
end of A/D conversion.
Bit 6
ADIE Description
0 A/D end interrupt request (ADI) is disabled (Initial value)
1 A/D end interrupt request (ADI) is enabled
Bit 5—A/D Start (ADST): Starts or stops A/D conversion. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during
A/D conversion. It can also be set to 1 by external trigger input at the ADTRG pin.
Bit 5
ADST Description
0 A/D conversion is stopped (Initial value)
1 Single mode: A/D conversion starts; ADST is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion
ends.
Scan mode: A/D conversion starts and continues, cycling among the selected channels,
until ADST is cleared to 0 by software, by a reset, or by a transition to standby mode.
529
Bit 4—Scan Mode (SCAN): Selects single mode or scan mode. For further information on
operation in these modes, see section 15.4, Operation. Clear the ADST bit to 0 before switching
the conversion mode.
Bit 4
SCAN Description
0 Single mode (Initial value)
1 Scan mode
Bit 3—Clock Select (CKS): Selects the A/D conversion time. Clear the ADST bit to 0 before
switching the conversion time.
Bit 3
CKS Description
0 Conversion time = 266 states (maximum) (Initial value)
1 Conversion time = 134 states (maximum)
Bits 2 to 0—Channel Select 2 to 0 (CH2 to CH0): These bits and the SCAN bit select the analog
input channels. Clear the ADST bit to 0 before changing the channel selection.
Group
Selection Channel Selection Description
CH2 CH1 CH0 Single Mode Scan Mode
000 AN
0
(Initial value) AN0
1AN
1AN0, AN1
10 AN
2AN0to AN2
1AN
3AN0to AN3
100 AN
4AN4
1AN
5AN4, AN5
10 AN
6AN4to AN6
1AN
7AN4to AN7
530
15.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR)
ADCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables external triggering of A/D
conversion. ADCR is initialized to H'7F by a reset and in standby mode.
Bit 7—Trigger Enable (TRGE): Enables or disables external triggering of A/D conversion.
Bit 7
TRGE Description
0 A/D conversion cannot be externally triggered (Initial value)
1 A/D conversion starts at the falling edge of the external trigger signal (ADTRG)
Bits 6 to 0—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
TRGE
0
R/W
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
Trigger enable
Enables or disables external triggering of A/D conversion
Reserved bits
531
15.3 CPU Interface
ADDRA to ADDRD are 16-bit registers, but they are connected to the CPU by an 8-bit data bus.
Therefore, although the upper byte can be be accessed directly by the CPU, the lower byte is read
through an 8-bit temporary register (TEMP).
An A/D data register is read as follows. When the upper byte is read, the upper-byte value is
transferred directly to the CPU and the lower-byte value is transferred into TEMP. Next, when the
lower byte is read, the TEMP contents are transferred to the CPU.
When reading an A/D data register, always read the upper byte before the lower byte. It is possible
to read only the upper byte, but if only the lower byte is read, incorrect data may be obtained.
Figure 15-2 shows the data flow for access to an A/D data register.
Figure 15-2 A/D Data Register Access Operation (Reading H'AA40)
Upper-byte read
Bus interface Module data bus
CPU
(H'AA)
ADDRnH
(H'AA) ADDRnL
(H'40)
Lower-byte read
Bus interface Module data bus
CPU
(H'40)
ADDRnH
(H'AA) ADDRnL
(H'40)
TEMP
(H'40)
TEMP
(H'40)
(n = A to D)
(n = A to D)
532
15.4 Operation
The A/D converter operates by successive approximations with 10-bit resolution. It has two
operating modes: single mode and scan mode.
15.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0)
Single mode should be selected when only one A/D conversion on one channel is required. A/D
conversion starts when the ADST bit is set to 1 by software, or by external trigger input. The
ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion and is automatically cleared to 0 when
conversion ends.
When conversion ends the ADF bit is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is also set to 1, an ADI interrupt is
requested at this time. To clear the ADF flag to 0, first read ADCSR, then write 0 in ADF.
When the mode or analog input channel must be switched during analog conversion, to prevent
incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After making
the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1 to start A/D conversion again. The ADST bit can be
set at the same time as the mode or channel is changed.
Typical operations when channel 1 (AN1) is selected in single mode are described next.
Figure 15-3 shows a timing diagram for this example.
1. Single mode is selected (SCAN = 0), input channel AN1is selected (CH2 = CH1 = 0,
CH0 = 1), the A/D interrupt is enabled (ADIE = 1), and A/D conversion is started
(ADST = 1).
2. When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred into ADDRB. At the same time
the ADF flag is set to 1, the ADST bit is cleared to 0, and the A/D converter becomes idle.
3. Since ADF = 1 and ADIE = 1, an ADI interrupt is requested.
4. The A/D interrupt handling routine starts.
5. The routine reads ADCSR, then writes 0 in the ADF flag.
6. The routine reads and processes the conversion result (ADDRB).
7. Execution of the A/D interrupt handling routine ends. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1,
A/D conversion starts again and steps 2 to 7 are repeated.
533
Figure 15-3 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Single Mode, Channel 1 Selected)
ADIE
ADST
ADF
State of channel 0
(AN )
Set
Set Set
Clear Clear
Idle
Idle
Idle
Idle
A/D conversion (1)
A/D conversion (2)
Idle
Read conversion result
A/D conversion result (1) Read conversion result
A/D conversion result (2)
Note: Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software.
0
1
2
3
A/D conversion
starts
*
*
*
*
*
*
ADDRA
ADDRB
ADDRC
ADDRD
State of channel 1
(AN )
State of channel 2
(AN )
State of channel 3
(AN )
Idle
534
15.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1)
Scan mode is useful for monitoring analog inputs in a group of one or more channels. When the
ADST bit is set to 1 by software or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on the first
channel in the group (AN0when CH2 = 0, AN4when CH2 = 1). When two or more channels are
selected, after conversion of the first channel ends, conversion of the second channel (AN1or
AN5) starts immediately. A/D conversion continues cyclically on the selected channels until the
ADST bit is cleared to 0. The conversion results are transferred for storage into the A/D data
registers corresponding to the channels.
When the mode or analog input channel selection must be changed during analog conversion, to
prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After
making the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1. A/D conversion will start again from the
first channel in the group. The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the mode or channel
selection is changed.
Typical operations when three channels in group 0 (AN0to AN2) are selected in scan mode are
described next. Figure 15-4 shows a timing diagram for this example.
1. Scan mode is selected (SCAN = 1), scan group 0 is selected (CH2 = 0), analog input channels
AN0to AN2are selected (CH1 = 1, CH0 = 0), and A/D conversion is started (ADST = 1).
2. When A/D conversion of the first channel (AN0) is completed, the result is transferred into
ADDRA. Next, conversion of the second channel (AN1) starts automatically.
3. Conversion proceeds in the same way through the third channel (AN2).
4. When conversion of all selected channels (AN0to AN2) is completed, the ADF flag is set to 1
and conversion of the first channel (AN0) starts again. If the ADIE bit is set to 1, an ADI
interrupt is requested at this time.
5. Steps 2 to 4 are repeated as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is
cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion
starts again from the first channel (AN0).
535
Figure 15-4 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Scan Mode,
Channels AN0to AN2Selected)
ADST
ADF
State of channel 0
(AN )
0
1
2
3
Continuous A/D conversion
Set Clear*1
Clear*1
Idle
A/D conversion (1)
Idle
Idle
Idle
A/D conversion (4) Idle
A/D conversion (2)
Idle
A/D conversion (5)
Idle
A/D conversion (3)
Idle
Idle
Transfer A/D conversion result (1) A/D conversion result (4)
A/D conversion result (2)
A/D conversion result (3)
1.
2.
A/D conversion time
Notes:
*2
*1
ADDRA
ADDRB
ADDRC
ADDRD
State of channel 1
(AN )
State of channel 2
(AN )
State of channel 3
(AN )
Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software.
Data currently being converted is ignored.
536
15.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time
The A/D converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog
input at a time tDafter the ADST bit is set to 1, then starts conversion. Figure 15-5 shows the A/D
conversion timing. Table 15-4 indicates the A/D conversion time.
As indicated in figure 15-5, the A/D conversion time includes tDand the input sampling time. The
length of tDvaries depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. The total conversion
time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 15-4.
In scan mode, the values given in table 15-4 apply to the first conversion. In the second and
subsequent conversions the conversion time is fixed at 256 states when CKS = 0 or 128 states
when CKS = 1.
Figure 15-5 A/D Conversion Timing
ø
Address bus
Write signal
Input sampling
timing
ADF
(1)
(2)
tDtSPL
tCONV
Legend
(1):
(2):
t :
t :
t :
D
SPL
CONV
ADCSR write cycle
ADCSR address
Synchronization delay
Input sampling time
A/D conversion time
537
Table 15-4 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)
CKS = 0 CKS = 1
Symbol Min Typ Max Min Typ Max
Synchronization delay tD10—176 —9
Input sampling time tSPL —63——31—
A/D conversion time tCONV 259 — 266 131 — 134
Note: Values in the table are numbers of states.
15.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing
A/D conversion can be externally triggered. When the TRGE bit is set to 1 in ADCR, external
trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A high-to-low transition at the ADTRG pin sets the
ADST bit to 1 in ADCSR, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both single and scan
modes, are the same as if the ADST bit had been set to 1 by software. Figure 15-6 shows the
timing.
Figure 15-6 External Trigger Input Timing
ø
ADTRG
Internal trigger
signal
ADST
A/D conversion
538
15.5 Interrupts
The A/D converter generates an interrupt (ADI) at the end of A/D conversion. The ADI interrupt
request can be enabled or disabled by the ADIE bit in ADCSR.
15.6 Usage Notes
When using the A/D converter, note the following points:
1. Analog Input Voltage Range: During A/D conversion, the voltages input to the analog input
pins should be in the range AVSS ≤ANn≤VREF.
2. Relationships of AVCC and AVSS to VCC and VSS: AVCC, AVSS, VCC, and VSS should be
related as follows: AVSS = VSS. AVCC and AVSS must not be left open, even if the A/D
converter is not used.
3. VREF Programming Range: The reference voltage input at the VREF pin should be in the
range VREF ≤AVCC.
4. Analog voltage
When using an A/D converter, make the following voltage settings.
(1) VCC ≥AVCC - 0.3V
(2) AVCC ≥VREF ≥ANn ≥AVSS = VSS
(N = 0 to 7)
Note: Restriction for the ZTATTM version only; The S Mask version of ZTATTM, the Flash
Memory version and Mask ROM version can be used regularly without restriction.
Failure to observe points 1, 2, 3, and 4 above may degrade chip reliability.
5. Note on Board Design: In board layout, separate the digital circuits from the analog circuits
as much as possible. Particularly avoid layouts in which the signal lines of digital circuits
cross or closely approach the signal lines of analog circuits. Induction and other effects may
cause the analog circuits to operate incorrectly, or may adversely affect the accuracy of A/D
conversion.
The analog input signals (AN0to AN7), analog reference voltage (VREF), and analog supply
voltage (AVCC) must be separated from digital circuits by the analog ground (AVSS). The
analog ground (AVSS) should be connected to a stable digital ground (VSS) at one point on
the board.
539
6. Note on Noise: To prevent damage from surges and other abnormal voltages at the analog
input pins (AN0to AN7) and analog reference voltage pin (VREF), connect a protection circuit
like the one in figure 15-7 between AVCC and AVSS. The bypass capacitors connected to
AVCC and VREF and the filter capacitors connected to AN0to AN7must be connected to
AVSS. If filter capacitors like the ones in figure 15-7 are connected, the voltage values input to
the analog input pins (AN0to AN7) will be smoothed, which may give rise to error. Error can
also occur if A/D conversion is frequently performed in scan mode so that the current that
charges and discharges the capacitor in the sample-and-hold circuit of the A/D converter
becomes greater than that input to the analog input pins via input impedance Rin. The circuit
constants should therefore be selected carefully.
Figure 15-7 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit
540
AVCC
*1*1
VREF
AN0 to AN7
AVSS
Notes: 1. Numeric values are approximate.
2. Rin: input impedance
Rin*2100 Ω
0.1 µF
0.01 µF10 µF
Figure 15-8 Analog Input Pin Equivalent Circuit
Table 15-5 Analog Input Pin Ratings
Item min max Unit
Analog input capacitance — 20 pF
Allowable signal-source impedance — 10*kΩ
Note: *When VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V and ø≤12 MHz.
7. A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions: A/D conversion accuracy in the H8/3048 Series is
defined as follows:
• Resolution:..................Digital output code length of A/D converter
• Offset error:.................Deviation from ideal A/D conversion characteristic of analog input
voltage required to raise digital output from minimum voltage value
0000000000 to 0000000001 (figure 15-10)
• Full-scale error:...........Deviation from ideal A/D conversion characteristic of analog input
voltage required to raise digital output from 1111111110 to
1111111111 (figure 15-10)
• Quantization error:......Intrinsic error of the A/D converter; 1/2 LSB (figure 15-9)
• Nonlinearity error:......Deviation from ideal A/D conversion characteristic in range from zero
volts to full scale, exclusive of offset error, full-scale error, and
quantization error.
• Absolute accuracy:......Deviation of digital value from analog input value, including offset
error, full-scale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error.
20 pF
To A/D converterAN0 to AN7
10 kΩ
541
Note: Numeric values are approximate.
Figure 15-9 A/D Converter Accuracy Definitions (1)
111
110
101
100
011
010
001
000 1/8 2/8 3/8 4/8 5/8 6/8 7/8 FS
Quantization error
Analog input
voltage
Digital
output
Ideal A/D conversion
characteristic
542
Figure 15-10 A/D Converter Accuracy Definitions (2)
8. Allowable Signal-Source Impedance: The analog inputs of the H8/3048 Series are designed
to assure accurate conversion of input signals with a signal-source impedance not exceeding
10 kΩ. The reason for this rating is that it enables the input capacitor in the sample-and-hold
circuit in the A/D converter to charge within the sampling time. If the sensor output
impedance exceeds 10 kΩ, charging may be inadequate and the accuracy of A/D conversion
cannot be guaranteed.
If a large external capacitor is provided in scan mode, then the internal 10-kΩinput resistance
becomes the only significant load on the input. In this case the impedance of the signal source
is not a problem.
A large external capacitor, however, acts as a low-pass filter. This may make it impossible to
track analog signals with high dv/dt (e.g. a variation of 5 mV/µs) (figure 15-11). To convert
high-speed analog signals or to use scan mode, insert a low-impedance buffer.
9. Effect on Absolute Accuracy: Attaching an external capacitor creates a coupling with ground,
so if there is noise on the ground line, it may degrade absolute accuracy. The capacitor must
be connected to an electrically stable ground, such as AVSS.
If a filter circuit is used, be careful of interference with digital signals on the same board, and
make sure the circuit does not act as an antenna.
543
FS
Offset error
Nonlinearity
error
Actual A/D conversion
characteristic
Analog input
voltage
Digital
output
Ideal A/D
conversion
characteristic
Full-scale
error
Figure 15-11 Analog Input Circuit (Example)
Equivalent circuit of
A/D converter
H8/3048 Series
20 pF
Cin =
15 pF
10 kΩ
Up to 10 kΩ
Low-pass
filter
Up to 0.1 µF
Sensor output impedance
Sensor
input
544
Section 16 D/A Converter
16.1 Overview
The H8/3048 Series includes a D/A converter with two channels.
16.1.1 Features
D/A converter features are listed below.
• Eight-bit resolution
• Two output channels
• Conversion time: maximum 10 µs (with 20-pF capacitive load)
• Output voltage: 0 V to VREF
• D/A outputs can be sustained in software standby mode
16.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 16-1 shows a block diagram of the D/A converter.
Figure 16-1 D/A Converter Block Diagram
DADR0
DADR1
DACR
DASTCR
V
AV
DA
DA
AV
REF
CC
SS
0
1
Legend
DACR:
DADR0:
DADR1:
DASTCR:
8-bit D/A
Module data bus
Bus interface
On-chip
data bus
Control circuit
D/A control register
D/A data register 0
D/A data register 1
D/A standby control register
545
16.1.3 Input/Output Pins
Table 16-1 summarizes the D/A converter’s input and output pins.
Table 16-1 D/A Converter Pins
Pin Name Abbreviation I/O Function
Analog power supply pin AVCC Input Analog power supply
Analog ground pin AVSS Input Analog ground and reference voltage
Analog output pin 0 DA0Output Analog output, channel 0
Analog output pin 1 DA1Output Analog output, channel 1
Reference voltage input pin VREF Input Analog reference voltage
16.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 16-2 summarizes the D/A converter’s registers.
Table 16-2 D/A Converter Registers
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FFDC D/A data register 0 DADR0 R/W H'00
H'FFDD D/A data register 1 DADR1 R/W H'00
H'FFDE D/A control register DACR R/W H'1F
H'FF5C D/A standby control register DASTCR R/W H'FE
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address
546
16.2 Register Descriptions
16.2.1 D/A Data Registers 0 and 1 (DADR0/1)
The D/A data registers (DADR0 and DADR1) are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store the
data to be converted. When analog output is enabled, the D/A data register values are constantly
converted and output at the analog output pins.
The D/A data registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in standby mode.
16.2.2 D/A Control Register (DACR)
DACR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the operation of the D/A converter.
DACR is initialized to H'1F by a reset and in standby mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
DAOE1
0
R/W
6
DAOE0
0
R/W
5
DAE
0
R/W
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
D/A output enable 1
D/A output enable 0
D/A enable
Controls D/A conversion and analog output
Controls D/A conversion and analog output
Controls D/A conversion
547
Bit 7—D/A Output Enable 1 (DAOE1): Controls D/A conversion and analog output.
Bit 7
DAOE1 Description
0DA
1
analog output is disabled
1 Channel-1 D/A conversion and DA1analog output are enabled
Bit 6—D/A Output Enable 0 (DAOE0): Controls D/A conversion and analog output.
Bit 6
DAOE0 Description
0DA
0
analog output is disabled
1 Channel-0 D/A conversion and DA0analog output are enabled
Bit 5—D/A Enable (DAE): Controls D/A conversion, together with bits DAOE0 and DAOE1.
When the DAE bit is cleared to 0, analog conversion is controlled independently in channels 0
and 1. When the DAE bit is set to 1, analog conversion is controlled together in channels 0 and 1.
Output of the conversion results is always controlled independently by DAOE0 and DAOE1.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5
DAOE1 DAOE0 DAE Description
0 0 — D/A conversion is disabled in channels 0 and 1
0 1 0 D/A conversion is enabled in channel 0
D/A conversion is disabled in channel 1
0 1 1 D/A conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1
1 0 0 D/A conversion is disabled in channel 0
D/A conversion is enabled in channel 1
1 0 1 D/A conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1
1 1 — D/A conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1
When the DAE bit is set to 1, even if bits DAOE0 and DAOE1 in DACR and the ADST bit in
ADCSR are cleared to 0, the same current is drawn from the analog power supply as during A/D
and D/A conversion.
Bits 4 to 0—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
548
16.2.3 D/A Standby Control Register (DASTCR)
DASTCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables D/A output in software
standby mode.
DASTCR is initialized to H'FE by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bits 7 to 1—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bit 0—D/A Standby Enable (DASTE): Enables or disables D/A output in software standby
mode.
Bit 0
DASTE Description
0 D/A output is disabled in software standby mode (Initial value)
1 D/A output is enabled in software standby mode
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
DASTE
0
R/W
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
Reserved bits D/A standby enable
Enables or disables D/A output
in software standby mode
549
16.3 Operation
The D/A converter has two built-in D/A conversion circuits that can perform conversion
independently.
D/A conversion is performed constantly while enabled in DACR. If the DADR0 or DADR1 value
is modified, conversion of the new data begins immediately. The conversion results are output
when bits DAOE0 and DAOE1 are set to 1.
An example of D/A conversion on channel 0 is given next. Timing is indicated in figure 16-2.
1. Data to be converted is written in DADR0.
2. Bit DAOE0 is set to 1 in DACR. D/A conversion starts and DA0becomes an output pin. The
converted result is output after the conversion time. The output value is (DADR0
contents/256) ×VREF. Output of this conversion result continues until the value in DADR0 is
modified or the DAOE0 bit is cleared to 0.
3. If the DADR0 value is modified, conversion starts immediately, and the result is output after
the conversion time.
4. When the DAOE0 bit is cleared to 0, DA0becomes an input pin.
Figure 16-2 Example of D/A Converter Operation
DADR0
write cycle DACR
write cycle DADR0
write cycle DACR
write cycle
Address
bus
DADR0
DAOE0
DA
ø
0
Conversion data 1 Conversion data 2
High-impedance state Conversion
result 1
Conversion
result 2
tDCONV tDCONV
Legend
t : D/A conversion time
DCONV
550
16.4 D/A Output Control
In the H8/3048 Series, D/A converter output can be enabled or disabled in software standby mode.
When the DASTE bit is set to 1 in DASTCR, D/A converter output is enabled in software standby
mode. The D/A converter registers retain the values they held prior to the transition to software
standby mode.
When D/A output is enabled in software standby mode, the reference supply current is the same as
during normal operation.
16.5 Usage Notes
When using an D/A converter, note the following.
(1) VCC ≥AVCC – 0.3V
(2) AVCC ≥VREF ≥ANn ≥AVSS = VSS
(N = 0 to 7)
Note: Restriction for the ZTATTM version only; The S Mask version of ZTATTM, the Flash
Memory version and Mask ROM version can be used regularly without restriction.
551
Section 17 RAM
17.1 Overview
The H8/3048 and H8/3047 have 4 kbytes of high-speed static RAM on-chip. The H8/3045 and
H8/3044 have 2 kbytes. The RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus. The CPU
accesses both byte data and word data in two states, making the RAM useful for rapid data
transfer.
The on-chip RAM of the H8/3048 and H8/3047 is assigned to addresses H'FEF10 to H'FFF0F in
modes 1, 2, 5, and 7, and to addresses H'FFEF10 to H'FFFF0F in modes 3, 4, and 6. The on-chip
RAM of the H8/3045 and H8/3044 are assigned to addresses H'FF710 to H'FFF0F in modes 1, 2,
5, and 7, and to addresses H'FFF710 to H'FFFF0F in modes 3, 4, and 6. The RAM enable bit
(RAME) in the system control register (SYSCR) can enable or disable the on-chip RAM.
17.1.1 Block Diagram
Figure 17-1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip RAM.
Figure 17-1 RAM Block Diagram
H'FEF10*
H'FEF12*
H'FFF0E*
H'FEF11*
H'FEF13*
H'FFF0F*
On-chip data bus (upper 8 bits)
On-chip data bus (lower 8 bits)
Bus interface SYSCR
On-chip RAM
Even addresses Odd addresses
Legend
SYSCR: System control register
Note: *This example is of the H8/3048 operating in mode 7. The lower 20 bits of the address
are shown.
553
17.1.2 Register Configuration
The on-chip RAM is controlled by SYSCR. Table 17-1 gives the address and initial value of
SYSCR.
Table 17-1 System Control Register
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FFF2 System control register SYSCR R/W H'0B
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
554
17.2 System Control Register (SYSCR)
One function of SYSCR is to enable or disable access to the on-chip RAM. The on-chip RAM is
enabled or disabled by the RAME bit in SYSCR. For details about the other bits, see section 3.3,
System Control Register (SYSCR).
Bit 0—RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is
initialized at the rising edge of the input at the RES pin. It is not initialized in software standby
mode.
Bit 0
RAME Description
0 On-chip RAM is disabled
1 On-chip RAM is enabled (Initial value)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
SSBY
0
R/W
6
STS2
0
R/W
5
STS1
0
R/W
4
STS0
0
R/W
3
UE
1
R/W
2
NMIEG
0
R/W
1
—
1
—
0
RAME
1
R/W
Software standby
Standby timer select 2 to 0
User bit enable
NMI edge select
Reserved bit
RAM enable
Enables or
disables
on-chip RAM
555
17.3 Operation
When the RAME bit is set to 1, the on-chip RAM is enabled. Accesses to addresses H'FEF10 to
H'FFF0F in the H8/3048 and H8/3047 in modes 1, 2, 5, and 7, addresses H'FFEF10 to H'FFFF0F
in the H8/3048 and H8/3047 in modes 3, 4, and 6, addresses H'FF710 to H'FFF0F in the H8/3045
and H8/3044 in modes 1, 2, 5, and 7, and addresses H'FFF710 to H'FFFF0F in the H8/3045 and
H8/3044 in modes 3, 4, and 6 are directed to the on-chip RAM. In modes 1 to 6 (expanded
modes), when the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the off-chip address space is accessed. In mode 7
(single-chip mode), when the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip RAM is not accessed: read
access always results in H'FF data, and write access is ignored.
Since the on-chip RAM is connected to the CPU by an internal 16-bit data bus, it can be written
and read by word access. It can also be written and read by byte access. Byte data is accessed in
two states using the upper 8 bits of the data bus. Word data starting at an even address is accessed
in two states using all 16 bits of the data bus.
556
Section 18 ROM
18.1 Overview
The H8/3048 has 128 kbytes of on-chip ROM, the H8/3047 has 96 kbytes, the H8/3045 has
64 kbytes and the H8/3044 has 32 kbytes. The ROM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus.
The CPU accesses both byte data and word data in two states, enabling rapid data transfer.
The mode pins (MD2to MD0) can be set to enable or disable the on-chip ROM as indicated in
table 18-1.
Table 18-1 Operating Mode and ROM
Mode Pins
Mode MD2MD1MD0On-Chip ROM
Mode 1 (1-Mbyte expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) 0 0 1
Mode 2 (1-Mbyte expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) 0 1 0
Mode 3 (16-Mbyte expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) 0 1 1
Mode 4 (16-Mbyte expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) 1 0 0
Mode 5 (1-Mbyte expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) 1 0 1 Enabled
Mode 6 (16-Mbyte expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) 1 1 0
Mode 7 (single-chip mode) 1 1 1
The PROM version (H8/3048-ZTAT) and the flash memory version (H8/3048F-ZTAT) can be set
to PROM mode and programmed with a general-purpose PROM programmer.
Disabled
(external
address area)
557
18.1.1 Block Diagram
Figure 18-1 shows a block diagram of the ROM.
Figure 18-1 ROM Block Diagram (H8/3048, Mode 7)
H'0000
H'0002
H'1FFFE
H'0001
H'0003
H'1FFFF
On-chip data bus (upper 8 bits)
On-chip data bus (lower 8 bits)
On-chip ROM
Even addresses Odd addresses
Bus interface
558
18.2 PROM Mode
18.2.1 PROM Mode Setting
In PROM mode, the H8/3048 version with on-chip PROM suspends its microcontroller functions,
enabling the on-chip PROM to be programmed. The programming method is the same as for the
HN27C101, except that page programming is not supported. Table 18-2 indicates how to select
PROM mode.
Table 18-2 Selecting PROM Mode
Pins Setting
Three mode pins (MD2, MD1, MD0) Low
STBY pin
P51and P50High
18.2.2 Socket Adapter and Memory Map
The PROM is programmed using a general-purpose PROM programmer with a socket adapter to
convert to 32 pins. Table 18-3 lists the socket adapter for each package option. Figure 18-2 shows
the pin assignments of the socket adapter. Figure 18-3 shows a memory map in PROM mode.
Table 18-3 Socket Adapter —Preliminary—
Microcontroller Package Socket Adapter
H8/3048 100-pin QFP (FP-100B) HS3042ESHS1H
100-pin TQFP (TFP-100B) HS3042ESNS1H
The size of the H8/3048 PROM is 128 kbytes. Figure 18-3 shows a memory map in PROM mode.
H'FF data should be specified for unused address areas in the on-chip PROM.
When programming the H8/3048 with a PROM programmer, set the address range to H'00000 to
H'1FFFF.
559
Figure 18-2 Socket Adapter Pin Assignments
H8/3048
FP-100B, TFP-100B
10
64
58
87
88
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
77
76
1
35
68
73
74
75
62
86
11
22
44
57
65
92
Pin
RESO
NMI
P6
P8
P8
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P5
P5
V
AV
V
V
V
MD
MD
MD
STBY
AV
V
V
V
V
V
V
0
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
REF
CC
CC
CC
CC
0
1
2
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
Pin
V
EA
EA
EA
PGM
EO
EO
EO
EO
EO
EO
EO
EO
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
OE
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
CE
V
V
PROM Socket
HN27C101 (32 Pins)
1
26
3
2
31
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
27
24
23
25
4
28
29
22
32
16
Legend
V :
EO to EO :
EA to EA :
OE:
CE:
PGM:
Programming voltage (12.5 V)
Data input/output
Address input
Output enable
Chip enable
Program
PP
CC
SS
PP
Note: Pins not shown in this diagram should be left open.
This figure shows pin assignments, and does not show the entire socket adapter circuit. When undertaking a new design,
board design (power supply voltage stabilization, noise countermeasures, etc.) as a high-speed CMOS LSI is necessary.
9
15
16
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
7
16
0
0
560
Figure 18-3 H8/3048 Memory Map in PROM Mode
On-chip PROM
H'00000 H'00000
H'1FFFF H'1FFFF
Address in
MCU mode Address in
PROM mode
561
18.3 PROM Programming
Table 18-4 indicates how to select the program, verify, and other modes in PROM mode.
Table 18-4 Mode Selection in PROM Mode
Pins
Mode CE OE PGM VPP VCC EO7to EO0EA16 to EA0
Program L H L VPP VCC Data input Address input
Verify L L H VPP VCC Data output Address input
Program inhibited L L L VPP VCC High impedance Address input
LHH
HLL
HHH
Legend
L: Low voltage level
H: High voltage level
VPP:V
PP voltage level
VCC:V
CC voltage level
Read/write specifications are the same as for the standard HN27C101 EPROM, except that page
programming is not supported. Do not select page programming mode. A PROM programmer that
supports only page-programming mode cannot be used. When selecting a PROM programmer,
check that it supports a byte-at-a-time high-speed programming mode. Be sure to set the address
range to H'00000 to H'1FFFF.
18.3.1 Programming and Verification
An efficient, high-speed programming procedure can be used to program and verify PROM data.
This procedure programs the chip quickly without subjecting it to voltage stress and without
sacrificing data reliability. Unused address areas contain H'FF data. Figure 18-4 shows the basic
high-speed programming flowchart. Tables 18-5 and 18-6 list the electrical characteristics of the
chip during programming. Figure 18-5 shows a timing chart.
562
Figure 18-4 High-Speed Programming Flowchart
Start
Set programming/verification mode
V = 6.0 V ± 0.25 V, V = 12.5 V ± 0.3 V
CC PP
Address = 0
→
PW
Verification OK?
Program with t = 0.2n ms
OPW
Last address?
Set read mode
V = 5.0 V ± 0.25 V, V = V
CC PP CC
All addresses
read?
End
Fail
n 25<
Address + 1 address→
No Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Program with t = 0.2 ms ± 5%
n = 0
n + 1 n
Yes
Yes
563
Table 18-5 DC Characteristics
(Conditions: VCC = 6.0 V ± 0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ± 0.3 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta= 25°C ± 5°C)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
Input high EO7to EO0, VIH 2.4 — VCC + 0.3 V
voltage EA16 to EA0,
OE, CE, PGM
Input low EO7to EO0, VIL –0.3 — 0.8 V
voltage EA16 to EA0,
OE, CE, PGM
Output high EO7to EO0VOH 2.4 — — V IOH = –200 µA
voltage
Output low EO7to EO0VOL — — 0.45 V IOL = 1.6 mA
voltage
Input leakage EO7to EO0, |ILI| ——2 µA V
in = 5.25 V/0.5 V
current EA16 to EA0,
OE, CE, PGM
VCC current ICC ——40 mA
V
PP current IPP ——40 mA
564
Table 18-6 AC Characteristics
(Conditions: VCC = 6.0 V ± 0.25 V, VPP = 12.5 V ± 0.3 V, Ta= 25°C ± 5°C)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
Address setup time tAS 2 — — µs Figure 18-5*1
OE setup time tOES 2—— µs
Data setup time tDS 2—— µs
Address hold time tAH 0—— µs
Data hold time tDH 2—— µs
Data output disable time tDF*2— — 130 ns
VPP setup time tVPS 2—— µs
Programming pulse width tPW 0.19 0.20 0.21 ms
PGM pulse width for overwrite tOPW*30.19 — 5.25 ms
programming
VCC setup time tVCS 2—— µs
CE setup time tCES 2—— µs
Data output delay time tOE 0 — 150 ns
Notes: 1. Input pulse level: 0.8 V to 2.2 V
Input rise time and fall time ≤20 ns
Timing reference levels: 1.0 V and 2.0 V for input; 0.8 V and 2.0 V for output
2. tDF is defined at the point where the output is in the open state and the output level
cannot be read.
3. tOPW is defined by the value given in the flowchart.
565
Figure 18-5 PROM Program/Verify Timing
Address
Data
VPP
VCC
CE
PGM
OE
VPP
VCC
VCC
VCC
Program Verify
Input data Output data
tAS
tDS
tVPS
tVCS
tCES
tPW
tOPW*
tDH
tOES tOE
tDF
tAH
Note: t is defined by the value given in the flowchart.*OPW
+1
566
18.3.2 Programming Precautions
• Program with the specified voltages and timing.
The programming voltage (VPP) in PROM mode is 12.5 V.
Applied voltages in excess of the rated values can permanently destroy the chip. Be
particularly careful about the PROM programmer’s overshoot characteristics.
If the PROM programmer is set to Hitachi HN27C101 specifications, VPP will be 12.5 V.
• Before programming, check that the chip is correctly mounted in the PROM programmer.
Overcurrent damage to the chip can result if the index marks on the PROM programmer,
socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned.
• Don’t touch the socket adapter or chip while programming. Touching either of these can
cause contact faults and write errors.
• Select the programming mode carefully. The chip cannot be programmed in page
programming mode.
• The H8/3048 PROM size is 128 kbytes. Set the address range to H'00000 to H'1FFFF.
567
18.3.3 Reliability of Programmed Data
A highly effective way to improve data retention characteristics is to bake the programmed chips
at 150°C, then screen them for data errors. This procedure quickly eliminates chips with PROM
memory cells prone to early failure.
Figure 18-6 shows the recommended screening procedure.
Figure 18-6 Recommended Screening Procedure
If a series of programming errors occurs while the same PROM programmer is in use, stop
programming and check the PROM programmer and socket adapter for defects. Please inform
Hitachi of any abnormal conditions noted during or after programming or in screening of program
data after high-temperature baking.
Install
Program chip and verify programmed data
Bake chip for 24 to 48 hours at
125°C to 150°C with power off
Read and check program
568
18.4 Flash Memory Overview
18.4.1 Flash Memory Operation
Table 18-7 illustrates the principle of operation of the H8/3048F’s on-chip flash memory.
Like EPROM, flash memory is programmed by applying a high gate-to-drain voltage that draws
hot electrons generated in the vicinity of the drain into a floating gate. The threshold voltage of a
programmed memory cell is therefore higher than that of an erased cell. Cells are erased by
grounding the gate and applying a high voltage to the source, causing the electrons stored in the
floating gate to tunnel out. After erasure, the threshold voltage drops. A memory cell is read like
an EPROM cell, by driving the gate to the high level and detecting the drain current, which
depends on the threshold voltage. Erasing must be done carefully, because if a memory cell is
overerased, its threshold voltage may become negative, causing the cell to operate incorrectly.
Section 18.7.6, Erasing Flowchart and Sample Program shows an optimal erase control flowchart
and sample program.
Table 18-7 Principle of Memory Cell Operation
Program Erase Read
Memory
cell
Memory
array
Vd
Vg = VPP
Vd
Vg = VPP
Vd 0 V
Vd
Vg = VPP
Vd 0 V
Vd
Vg = VPP
Vd 0 V
Vd
Vg = VPP
Vd
Vg = VPP
Vd 0 V
569
18.4.2 Mode Programming and Flash Memory Address Space
As its on-chip ROM, the H8/3048F has 128 kbytes of flash memory. The flash memory is
connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus. The CPU accesses both byte data and word data in
two states.
The flash memory is assigned to addresses H'00000 to H'1FFFF on the memory map. The mode
pins enable either on-chip flash memory or external memory to be selected for this area. Table
18-8 summarizes the mode pin settings and usage of the flash memory area.
Table 18-8 Mode Pin Settings and Flash Memory Area
Mode Pin Setting
Mode MD2MD1MD0Flash Memory Area Usage
Mode 0 0 0 0 Illegal setting
Mode 1 0 0 1 External memory area
Mode 2 0 1 0 External memory area
Mode 3 0 1 1 External memory area
Mode 4 1 0 0 External memory area
Mode 5 1 0 1 On-chip flash memory area
Mode 6 1 1 0 On-chip flash memory area
Mode 7 1 1 1 On-chip flash memory area
18.4.3 Features
Features of the flash memory are listed below.
• Five flash memory operating modes
The flash memory has five operating modes: program mode, program-verify mode, erase
mode, erase-verify mode, and prewrite-verify mode.
• Block erase designation
Blocks to be erased in the flash memory address space can be selected by bit settings. The
address space includes a large-block area (eight blocks with sizes from 12 kbytes to 16 kbytes)
and a small-block area (eight 512-byte blocks).
• Program and erase time
Programming one byte of flash memory typically takes 50 µs. Erasing all blocks (128 kbytes)
typically takes 1 s.
570
• Erase-program cycles
Flash memory contents can be erased and reprogrammed up to 100 times.
• On-board programming modes
These modes can be used to program, erase, and verify flash memory contents. There are two
modes: boot mode, and user programming mode.
• Automatic bit-rate alignment
In boot-mode data transfer, the H8/3048F aligns its bit rate automatically to the host bit rate
(9600 bps, 4800 bps and 2400 bps).
• Flash memory emulation by RAM
Part of the RAM area can be overlapped onto flash memory, to emulate flash memory updates
in real time.
• PROM mode
As an alternative to on-board programming, the flash memory can be programmed and erased
in PROM mode, using a general-purpose PROM programmer.
• Protect modes
Flash memory can be program-, erase-, and/or verify-protected in hardware and software
protect modes.
571
18.4.4 Block Diagram
Figure 18-7 shows a block diagram of the flash memory.
Figure 18-7 Flash Memory Block Diagram
FLMCR
EBR1
EBR2
H'00000
H'00002
H'00004
H'1FFFC
H'1FFFE
H'00001
H'00003
H'00005
H'1FFFD
H'1FFFF
MD2
MD1
MD0
Internal data bus (upper)
Internal data bus (lower)
Bus interface and control section Operating
mode
On-chip flash memory
(128 kbytes)
Upper byte
(even address) Lower byte
(odd address)
Legend
FLMCR:
EBR1:
EBR2:
Flash memory control register
Erase block register 1
Erase block register 2
8
8
572
18.4.5 Input/Output Pins
Flash memory is controlled by the pins listed in table 18-9.
Table 18-9 Flash Memory Pins
Pin Name Abbreviation Input/Output Function
Programming power VPP Power supply Apply 12.0 V
Mode 2 MD2Input H8/3048F operating mode
programming
Mode 1 MD1Input H8/3048F operating mode
programming
Mode 0 MD0Input H8/3048F operating mode
programming
Transmit data TXD1Output Serial transmit data output
Receive data RXD1Input Serial receive data input
The transmit data and receive data pins are used in boot mode.
18.4.6 Register Configuration
The flash memory is controlled by the registers listed in table 18-10.
Table 18-10 Flash Memory Registers
Address Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FF40 Flash memory control FLMCR R/W*2H'00*1
register
H'FF42 Erase block register 1 EBR1 R/W*2H'00*1
H'FF43 Erase block register 2 EBR2 R/W*2H'00*1
H'FF48 RAM control register RAMCR R/W H'70
Notes: 1. The initial value is H'00 in modes 5, 6, and 7 (on-chip flash memory enabled).
2. In modes 1, 2, 3, and 4 (on-chip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be
modified and is always read as H'FF.
573
18.5 Flash Memory Register Descriptions
18.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register
The flash memory control register (FLMCR) is an eight-bit register that controls the flash memory
operating modes. Transitions to program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, and erase-
verify mode are made by setting bits in this register. FLMCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in
the standby modes, and when 12 V is not applied to VPP. When 12 V is applied to VPP, a reset or
entry to a standby mode initializes FLMCR to H'80.
Bit
Initial value
R/W
7
0
VPP EV
6543210
0000000
R
R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W
—— PV E P
Reserved bits
Erase mode
Designates transition
to or exit from erase
mode
Program mode
Designates
transition to
or exit from
program mode
****
*
Program-verify mode
Designates transition to
or exit from program-verify
mode
Erase-verify mode
Designates transition to
or exit from erase-verify
mode
Programming power
Status flag indicating the
power to VPP
VPP enable
Disables or enables 12-V
application to VPP pin
V E
PP
Note: *The initial value is H'00 in modes 5, 6, and 7 (on-chip flash memory enabled). In modes
1, 2, 3, and 4 (on-chip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be modified and is
always read as H'FF.
574
Bit 7—Programming Power (VPP): Programming power bit (VPP) detects VPP, and level is
displayed as “1” or “0.” The permissible output currents for impressed high voltage VH are given
in 21.3.1, “DC Characteristics.” The value of VH ranges from VCC + 2 V to 11.4 V. If a voltage in
excess of VH is applied, “1” is displayed; otherwise “0” is displayed.
This bit restricts the hardware protect functions during write and erase operations for the flash
memory. For details on hardware protect, see 18.7.8, “Protect Modes.” For notes on VPP usage,
see 10.10, “Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.”
Bit 7
VPP Description
0 [Clear conditions] (Initial value)
This is the regular operational mode when a voltage exceeding
VH is not applied to the VPP pin. The flash memory cannot be
written or erased. “Hardware Protect” is displayed.
1 [Set conditions]
This is the operational mode when a voltage exceeding VH is
applied to the VPP pin. The flash memory can be written and
erased. “Hardware Protect Disabled” is displayed*.
Note: For correct write and erase functions, the setting should be VPP = 12.0 V to 0.6 V (11.4 V to
12.6 V).
Bit 6—VPP Enable (VPPE): Disables or enables 12-V application to the VPP pin. After this bit is
set, it is necessary to wait for at least 5 µs for the internal power supply to stabilize; programming
and erasing cannot be performed until stabilization is complete. After this bit is cleared, it is
necessary to wait for the flash memory read setup time (tFRS) in order to read flash memory.
Bit 6
VPPE Description
0V
PP pin 12-V power supply is disabled (Initial value)
1V
PP pin 12-V supply is enabled
Note: The power supply system used for the flash memory is switched by means of the VppE bit.
After switching, operation is not guaranteed during the period before the power supply
system stabilizes. It is therefore prohibited to fetch from flash memory and execute an
instruction that sets or resets the VppE bit.
575
Bits 5 to 4—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 0.
Bit 3—Erase-Verify Mode (EV)*1: Selects transition to or exit from erase-verify mode.
Bit 3
EV Description
0 Exit from erase-verify mode (Initial value)
1 Transition to erase-verify mode
Bit 2—Erase-Verify Mode (PV)*1: Selects transition to or exit from program-verify mode.
Bit 2
PV Description
0 Exit from program-verify mode (Initial value)
1 Transition to program-verify mode
Bit 1—Erase Mode (E)*1, *2: Selects transition to or exit from erase mode.
Bit 1
E Description
0 Exit from erase mode (Initial value)
1 Transition to erase mode
Bit 0—Program Mode (P)*1, *2: Selects transition to or exit from program mode.
Bit 0
P Description
0 Exit from program mode (Initial value)
1 Transition to program mode
Notes: 1. Do not set two or more of these bits simultaneously. Do not turn off power supply
(VCC–VPP) while a bit is set.
2. For each bit setting procedure, follow the algorithm described in section 18.7,
Programming and Erasing Flash Memory. For the notes on programming and erasing,
refer to section 18.10, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.
Particularly, be sure to set the watchdog timer beforehand to prevent program runaway,
when the E or P bit is set.
576
18.5.2 Erase Block Register 1
Erase block register 1 (EBR1) is an eight-bit register that designates large flash-memory blocks
for programming and erasure. EBR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in the standby modes, when
12 V is applied to VPP while the VPPE bit is 0, and when 12 V is not applied to VPP. When a bit
in EBR1 is set to 1, the corresponding block is selected and can be programmed and erased.
Figure 18-8 shows a block map.
Note: *The initial value is H'00 in modes 5, 6, and 7 (on-chip flash memory enabled). In modes
1, 2, 3, and 4 (on-chip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be modified and is
always read as H'FF.
Bits 7 to 0—Large Block 7 to 0 (LB7 to LB0): These bits select large blocks (LB7 to LB0) to be
programmed and erased.
Bits 7 to 0
LB7 to LB0 Description
0 Block LB7 to LB0 is not selected (Initial value)
1 Block LB7 to LB0 is selected
Bit
Initial value
R/W
7
0
LB3
6543210
0000000
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
LB6 LB5 LB4 LB2 LB1 LB0
****
*
***
LB7
R/W*
577
18.5.3 Erase Block Register 2
Erase block register 2 (EBR2) is an eight-bit register that designates small flash-memory blocks
for programming and erasure. EBR2 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in the standby modes, when
12 V is applied to VPP while the VPPE bit is 0, and when 12 V is not applied to VPP. When a bit
in EBR2 is set to 1, the corresponding block is selected and can be programmed and erased.
Figure 18-8 shows a block map.
Note: *The initial value is H'00 in modes 5, 6, and 7 (on-chip flash memory enabled). In modes
1, 2, 3, and 4 (on-chip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be modified and is
always read as H'FF.
Bits 7 to 0—Small Block 7 to 0 (SB7 to SB0): These bits select small blocks (SB7 to SB0) to be
programmed and erased.
Bits 7 to 0
SB7 to SB0 Description
0 Block SB7 to SB0 is not selected (Initial value)
1 Block SB7 to SB0 is selected
Bit
Initial value
R/W
7
0
SB7 SB3
6543210
0000000
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
SB6 SB5 SB4 SB2 SB1 SB0
****
*
****
578
Figure 18-8 Erase Block Map
Bit Addresses
LB0
LB1
LB2
LB3
LB4
LB5
LB6
LB7
SB0
SB1
SB2
SB3
SB4
SB5
SB6
SB7
H'00000–H'03FFF
H'04000–H'07FFF
H'08000–H'0BFFF
H'0C000–H'0FFFF
H'10000–H'13FFF
H'14000–H'17FFF
H'18000–H'1BFFF
H'1C000-H'1EFFF
H'1F000–H'1F1FF
H'1F200–H'1F3FF
H'1F400–H'1F5FF
H'1F600–H'1F7FF
H'1F800–H'1F9FF
H'1FA00–H'1FBFF
H'1FC00–H'1FDFF
H'1FE00–H'1FFFF
16 kbytes
16 kbytes
16 kbytes
16 kbytes
16 kbytes
16 kbytes
16 kbytes
12 kbytes
512 bytes
512 bytes
512 bytes
512 bytes
512 bytes
512 bytes
512 bytes
512 bytes
Large block
area
(124 kbytes)
Small block
area
(4 kbytes)
H'00000
H'03FFF
H'04000
H'07FFF
H'08000
H'0BFFF
H'0C000
H'0FFFF
H'10000
H'13FFF
H'14000
H'17FFF
H'18000
H'1BFFF
H'1C000
H'1F1FF
H'1F200
H'1F3FF
H'1F400
H'1F5FF
H'1F600
H'1F7FF
H'1F800
H'1F9FF
H'1FA00
H'1FBFF
H'1FC00
H'1FDFF
H'1FE00
H'1FFFF
H'1EFFF
H'1F000
579
18.5.4 RAM Control Register (RAMCR)
The RAM control register (RAMCR) enables flash-memory updates to be emulated in RAM, and
indicates flash memory errors.
Bit 7—Flash Memory Error (FLER): Indicates that an error occurred while flash memory was
being programmed or erased. When bit 7 is set, flash memory is placed in an error-protect
mode.*1
Bit 7
FLER Description
0 Flash memory is not write/erase-protected (Initial value)
(is not in error protect mode*1)
[Clearing conditions]
Reset or hardware standby mode
1 Indicates that an error occurred while flash memory was being programmed or
erased, and error protection*1is in effect
[Setting conditions]
Flash memory was read*2while being programmed or erased (including vector or
instruction fetch, but not including reading of a RAM area overlapped onto flash
memory).
A hardware exception-handling sequence (other than a reset, trace exception,
invalid instruction, trap instruction, or zero-divide exception) was executed just
before programming or erasing.
The SLEEP instruction (for transition to sleep mode or software standby mode) was
executed during programming or erasing.
A bus was released during programming or erasing.
Notes: 1. For details, see section 18.7.8, Protect Modes.
2. The read data has undetermined values.
Bit
Initial value
R/W
7
0
FLER RAMS
6543210
1110000
R—— — R/W R/W R/W R/W
——— RAM2 RAM1 RAM0
580
Bits 6 to 4—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bit 3—RAM Select (RAMS): Is used with bits 2 to 0 to reassign an area to RAM (see table 18-
11). When bit 3 is set, all flash-memory blocks are protected from programming and erasing,
regardless of the values of bits 2 to 0.
It is initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby
mode.
Bits 2 to 0—RAM2 to RAM0: These bits are used with bit 3 to reassign an area to RAM (see
table 18-11). They are initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not initialized
in software standby mode.
Table 18-11 RAM Area Reassignment
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
RAM Area RAMS RAM2 RAM1 RAM0
H'FFF000 to H'FFF1FF 0 0/1 0/1 0/1
H'01F000 to H'01F1FF 1000
H'01F200 to H'01F3FF 1001
H'01F400 to H'01F5FF 1010
H'01F600 to H'01F7FF 1011
H'01F800 to H'01F9FF 1100
H'01FA00 to H'01FBFF 1101
H'01FC00 to H'01FDFF 1110
H'01FE00 to H'01FFFF 1111
581
18.6 On-Board Programming Modes
When an on-board programming mode is selected, the on-chip flash memory can be programmed,
erased, and verif ied. There are two on-board programming modes: boot mode, and user program
mode. These modes are selected by inputs at the mode pins (MD2to MD0) and VPP pin. Table 18-
12 indicates how to select the on-board programming modes. For information about turning VPP on
and off, see note (4) in section 18.10, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.
Table 18-12 On-Board Programming Mode Selection
Mode Selections VPP MD2MD1MD0Notes
Boot mode Mode 5 12 V 12 V 0 1
Mode 6 12 V 1 0
Mode 7 12 V 1 1
Mode 5 1 0 1
Mode 6 1 1 0
Mode 7 1 1 1
18.6.1 Boot Mode
To use boot mode, a user program for programming and erasing the flash memory must be
provided in advance on the host machine (which may be a personal computer). Serial
communication interface 1 (SCI1) is used in asynchronous mode (see figure 18-9). If the
H8/3048F is placed in boot mode, after it comes out of reset, a built-in boot program is activated.
This program starts by measuring the low period of data transmitted from the host and setting the
bit rate register (BRR) accordingly. The H8/3048F’s built-in serial communication interface
(SCI) can then be used to download the user program from the host machine. The user program is
stored in on-chip RAM.
After the program has been stored, execution branches to address H'FF300 in modes 5 and 6 and
H'FFF300 in mode 7 in the on-chip RAM, and the program stored on RAM is executed to
program and erase the flash memory. Figure 18-10 shows the boot-mode execution procedure.
Figure 18-9 Boot-Mode System Configuration
User
program
mode
0: VIL
1: VIH
HOST
Receive data to be programmed
Transmit verification data
H8/3048F
RXD1
TXD1
SCI1
582
Boot-Mode Execution Procedure: Figure 18-10 shows the boot-mode execution procedure.
Figure 18-10 Boot Mode Flowchart
Start
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
Program H8/3048F pins for
boot mode, and resets.
After completing bit rate adjustment,
H8/3048F transmits one H'00 byte to the
host to indicate completion.
Host transmits H'00 data
continuously at desired bit rate.
The host confirms that bit rate
adjustment was completed successfully,
then transmits one H'55 byte.
After receiving the H'55 byte,
H8/3048F branches to boot program
area in RAM.
H8/3048F branches to RAM boot area
H'FFF300 to H'FFFEFF, then checks
the flash memory user area data.
H8/3048F confirms that all blocks
of the flash memory are in H'FF, then
transmits one H'AA byte to the host.
H8/3048F receives two bytes of
the program byte number (N)
downloaded to the internal RAM. *1
H8/3048F downloads user program
to RAM. *2
No
Yes
H8/3048F computes the length of bytes
downloaded (N = N-1).
H8/3048F branches to RAM area H'F7E0,
and user program downloaded to
the RAM is executed.
Erase all blocks of
the flash memory.
Does all data = H'FF? *4No
Yes
H8/3048F measures H'00 low period
for data transmitted from the host.
H8/3048F computes the bit rate, then
sets the value in the bit rate register.
Is the number of bytes
N = 0?
1. Program the H8/3048F pins for boot mode, and start the
H8/3048F from a reset.
2. Set the host's data format to 8 bits + 1 stop bit, select the
desired bit rate (2400, 4800 or 9600), and transmit H'00
data continuously.
3. H8/3048F measures the duration of repeat when the RDX
pin is "Low," then computes the bit rate of the serial
transmission from the host.
4. After H8/3048F completes SCI bit rate adjustment, one byte
of H'00 data is transmitted to indicate completion.
5. On receiving one byte from H8/3048F to indicate
completion of bit rate adjustment, the host confirms regular
reception then transmits one byte of H'55. H8/3048F
transmits H'AA to indicate regular reception.
6. After H8/3048F receives H'55, it branches to boot program
area H'FFF300 to H'FFFEFF.
7. When H8/3048F branches to boot program area H'FFF300
to H'FFFEFF, it confirms that data written to the flash
memory is saved. If data is already written, all blocks are
erased.
8. H8/3048F transmits one byte of H'AA. Then the host
transmits the byte length of the user program downloaded
to H8/3048F. The byte length must be sent as two-byte
data, most significant byte first and least significant byte
second. Then user-specified programs should be
transmitted in order. The byte length received by H8/3048F
or the user program is verified, and one byte each is
transmitted in order to the host (echo back).
9. H8/3048F writes the received user program to area
H'FFF300 to H'FFFEFF on the internal RAM.
10. H8/3048F branches to the internal RAM FFF300, and the
written user program is executed.
Notes: 1. The user can use 3072 bytes of RAM. The number of
bytes transferred must not exceed 3072 bytes. Be
sure to transmit the byte length in two bytes, most
significant byte first and least significant byte second.
For example, if the byte length of the program to be
transferred is 256 bytes, (H'0100), transmit H'01 as
the most significant byte, followed by H'00 as the
least significant byte.
2. The part of the user program that controls the flash
memory should be coded according to the flash
memory program/erase algorithms given later.
3. If a memory cell malfunctions and cannot be erased,
the H8/3048F transmits one H'FF byte to report an
erase error, halts erasing, and halts further
operations.
4. The allotted boot program area is H'FFF300 to
H'FFFEFF.
583
Automatic Alignment of SCI Bit Rate
Figure 18-11 Measurement of Low Period in Data Transmitted from Host
When started in boot mode, the H8/3048F measures the low period in asynchronous SCI data
transmitted from the host (figure 18-11). The data format is eight data bits, one stop bit, and no
parity bit. From the measured lo w period (nine bits), the H8/3048F computes the host’s
transmission bit rate. After aligning its o wn bit rate, the H8/3048F sends the host one byte of H'00
data to indicate that bit-rate alignment is completed. The host should check that this alignment-
completed indication is recei ved normally, then transmit one H'55 byte. If the host does not receive
a normal alignment-completed indication, the H8/3048F should be reset, then restarted in boot
mode to measure the low period again. There may be some alignment error between the host’s and
H8/3048F’s bit rates, depending on the host’s bit rate and the H8/3048F’s system clock frequency.
To hav e the SCI operate normally, set the host’s bit rate to a value 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps*1. Table
18-13 lists typical host bit rates and indicates the clock-frequency ranges o ver which the H8/3048F
can align its bit rate automatically. Boot mode should be used within these frequency ranges.*2
Table 18-13 System Clock Frequencies Permitting Automatic Bit-Rate Alignment by
H8/3048F
System Clock Frequencies Permitting
Host Bit Rate*1Automatic Bit-Rate Alignment by H8/3048F
9600 bps 8 MHz to 16 MHz
4800 bps 4 MHz to 16 MHz
2400 bps 2 MHz to 16 MHz
Notes: 1. Host bit rate settings are 2400, 4800, and 9600 bps; no other settings should be used.
2. Although the H8/3048F may perform automatic bit-rate alignment with combinations
of bit rate and system clock other than those shown in table 18-13, there may be a
discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the H8/3048F, preventing subsequent
transfer from being performed normally. Boot mode execution should therefore be
confined to the range of combinations shown in table 18-13.
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Start
bit Stop
bit
This low period (9 bits) is measured (H'00 data)
High for at
least 1 bit
584
RAM Area Allocation in Boot Mode: In boot mode, the H'3F0 bytes from H'FEF10 to H'FF2FF
in modes 5 and 7, and from H'FFEF10 to H'FFF2FF in mode 6 are reserved for use by the boot
program. The user program is transferred into the area from H'FF300 to H'FFEFF, in modes 5 and
7, and from H'FFF300 to H'FFFEFF in mode 6 (H'C00 bytes). The boot program area is used
during the transition to execution of the user program transferred into RAM.
Figure 18-12 RAM Areas in Boot Mode
Notes on Use of Boot Mode
1. When the H8/3048F comes out of reset in boot mode, it measures the low period of the input
at the SCI1’s RXD1pin. The reset should end with RXD1high. After the reset ends, it takes
about 100 states for the H8/3048F to get ready to measure the low period of the RXD1input.
2. In boot mode, if any data has been programmed into the flash memory (if all data are not
H'FF), all flash memory blocks are erased. Boot mode is for use when user program mode is
unavailable, e.g. the first time on-board programming is performed, or if the update program
activated in user program mode is accidentally erased.
3. Interrupts cannot be used while the flash memory is being programmed or erased.
User program
transfer area
(H'C00 bytes)
Boot
program
area*1*1
H'FEF10
H'FF300
H'FFF0F
User program
transfer area
(H'C00 bytes)
Reserved*2Reserved*2
Boot
program
area
H'FFEF10
H'FFF300
H'FFFF0F
H'FFF00 H'FFFF00
H'FFEFF H'FFFEFF
Modes 5 and 7 Mode 6
585
Notes: 1. This area is unavailable until the user program transferred into RAM enters execution state
(branch to H'FF300 in modes 5 and 7, and H'FFF300 in mode 6). After branching to the user
program area, the boot program is retained in the boot program area (H'FEF10 to H'FF2FF in
modes 5 and 7, and H'FFEF10 to H'FFF2FF in mode 6).
2. Do not use reversed areas.
4. The RXD1and TXD1lines should be pulled up on-board.
5. Before branching to the user program (at address H'F300 in the RAM area), the H8/3048F
terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip SCI (channel 1) (by clearing the RE
and TE bits in serial control register (SCR) to 0 in channel 1), but the auto-aligned bit rate
remains set in bit rate register BRR1. The transmit data pin (TXD1) is in the high output state
(in port 9, the P91DDR bit in port 9 data direction register P9DDR and P91DR bit in port 9
data register are set to 1).
When the branch to the user program occurs, the contents of general registers in the CPU are
undetermined. After the branch, the user program should begin by initializing general
registers, especially the stack pointer (SP), which is used implicitly in subroutine calls and at
other times. The stack pointer must be set to provide a stack area for use by the user program.
The other on-chip registers do not have specific initialization requirements.
6. Transition to boot mode are shown in Figure 18-12, “RAM Areas in Boot Mode.” This is
possible after applying 12 V to pins MD2and VPP and restarting. In this case, H8/3048F reset
is erased (startup with Low →High) timing*1, mode pin status latches the personal computer
internally to maintain boot mode. Boot mode can be erased if the 12 V applied to the MD2
pin and the VPP pin is erased, then reset is erased*1. However, please note the following.
• When transferring from boot mode to regular mode (VPP ≠ 12 V, MD2≠ 12 V), before
transfer the erase must be carried out by the reset input personal computer internal boot
mode RES pin. After VPP interrupt, erase reset. The time needed until reset vector lead is
flash memory read setup (tFRS) *2.
• While in boot mode, if the 12 V applied to the MD2pin is erased, as long as reset input
from the RES pin does not occur, the personal computer internal boot mode status will be
maintained and boot mode will continue. In boot mode, if watchdog timer reset occur, the
personal computer internal boot mode is not erased, and despite mode pin status the
internal boot program restarts.
• When transferring to boot mode (reset erase timing) or during boot mode operation,
program voltage VPP should be within the range 12 V to 0.6 V. If this range is exceeded,
boot mode will not operate correctly. In addition, during boot program operation or
writing and erasing the flash memory, do not interrupt VPP*2.
7. During reset (when RES pin input is Low), if MD2pin input changes from 0 V to 12 V or
vice versa, by instantaneous transfer to 5 V input, the personal computer switches to
operation mode. As a result, the address port or bus control output signal (AS,RD,HWR,
LWR) status changes, so do not these pins as output signals during reset, as the personal
computer internal section needs to be shut down.
586
8. Regarding 12 V application to the VPP and MD2pins, insure that peak overshoot does not
exceed the maximum rating of 13 V. Also, be sure to connect bypass capacitors to the Vpp
and MD2pins*1.
Notes: 1. Mode pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (tMDS) with respect to
the reset release timing. When 12 V is applied to or disconnected from the MD2pin, a
delay occurs in the fall and rise waveforms due to the influence of the pull-up/pull-
down resistor connected to the MD2pin, etc. For reset release timing, therefore, this
delay must be confirmed with the actual waveform on the board.
2. For notes on applying and cutting VPP, refer to 18.10, section (4) of “Programming
and Erasing Flash Memory.”
18.6.2 User Program Mode
When set to user program mode, the H8/3048F can erase and program its flash memory by
executing a user program. On-board updates of the on-chip flash memory can be carried out by
providing on-board circuits for supplying VPP and data, and storing an update program in part of
the program area.
To select user program mode, select a mode that enables the on-chip ROM (mode 5, 6, or 7) and
apply 12 V to the VPP pin. In this mode, the on-chip peripheral modules operate as they normally
would in mode 5, 6, or 7, except for the flash memory. A watchdog timer overflow, however,
cannot output a reset signal while 12 V is applied to VPP. The watchdog timer’s reset output
enable bit (RSTOE) should not be set to 1.
587
The flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased, so the update program must
either be stored in external memory, or transferred temporarily to the RAM area and executed in
RAM.
User Program Mode Execution Procedure: Figure 18-13 shows the procedure for user program
mode execution in RAM.
Figure 18-13 User Program Mode Operation (Example)
Transfer on-board update
program into RAM
Store user application programs
Set MD2 to MD0 to 101, 110, or 111
Apply 0 to 5 V to MD2
VPP = 12 V
(user program mode)
Wait 5 to 10 µs
Update flash memory
Execute user application program
Execute on-board update
program in RAM
1
2
Set VPPE bit
4
3
5
Procedure
1. The user stores application programs in
flash memory. One of these is an on-
board update program that will execute
steps 3 to 5 below.
2. Pin inputs are set up for user program
mode.
3. A reset starts the CPU, which transfers
the on-board update program into RAM.
4. Following a branch to the program in
RAM, the on-board update program is
executed.
VPPE bit in FLMCR is set to update
flash memory.
Wait 5 to 10µs to stabilize internal
power supply.
Update program is executed.
5. After the on-board update ends, clear
the VPPE bit then a branch is made to
the updated user application program
and this program is executed.
After clearing the VPPE bit, before the
flash memory program executes, flash
memory read setup time (tPRS) is
needed.
588
Note: To prevent microcontroller errors caused by accidental programming or erasing, apply 12 V to VPP
only when the flash memory is programmed or erased, or when flash memory is emulated by RAM;
do not apply 12 V to the VPP pin during normal operation. While 12 V is applied, the watchdog
timer should be running and enabled to halt runaway program execution, so that program runaway
will not lead to overprogramming or overerasing. For further information about turning VPP on and
off, see section 18-10, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.
18.7 Programming and Erasing Flash Memory
The H8/3048F’s on-chip flash memory is programmed and erased by software, using the CPU.
The flash memory operating modes and state transition diagram are shown in figure 18-14.
Program/erase modes comprise program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, erase-verify
mode, and prewrite-verify mode. Transitions to these modes can be made by setting the P, E, PV,
and EV bits in the flash memory control register (FLMCR). Transition to the prewrite-verify
mode can also be made by clearing all the bits in FLMCR.
The flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. The program that controls
the programming and erasing of the flash memory must be stored and executed in on-chip RAM
or in external memory. A description of each mode is given below, with recommended flowcharts
and sample programs for programming and erasing. High-reliability programming and erasing
algorithms are used, which double the programming or erase processing time for each step.
Section 18.10, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions, gives further notes on
programming and erasing.
Figure 18-14 Flash Memory Program/Erase Operating Mode State Transition Diagram
589
Normal ROM access mode
VPPE= 0
VPP off
EV= 0
Flash memory
program/erase
operations
Note: Do not perform simultaneous setting/clearing of the P, E, PV, and EV bits.
E= 0
EV= 1
E= 1
PV= 0
P= 0 PV= 1
P= 1
Program mode Program-verify
mode Erase-verify
mode
Erase mode
VPP= 12 V and
VPPE= 1
Prewrite-verify mode
18.7.1 Program Mode
To write data into the flash memory, follow the programming algorithm shown in figure 18-15.
This programming algorithm can write data without subjecting the device to voltage stress or
impairing the reliability of programmed data.
To program data, first set the VPPE bit in FLMCR, wait 5 to 10 µs, then designate the blocks to be
programmed by erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2), and write the data to the address to
be programmed, as in writing to RAM. The flash memory latches the address and data in an
address latch and data latch. Next set the P bit in FLMCR, selecting program mode. The
programming duration is the time during which the P bit is set. A software timer should be used to
provide an initial programming duration of 15.8 µs or less. Programming for too long a time, due
to program runaway for example, can cause device damage. Before selecting program mode, set
up the watchdog timer so as to prevent overprogramming.
18.7.2 Program-Verify Mode
In program-verify mode, after data has been programmed in program mode, the data is read to
check that it has been programmed correctly.
After the programming time has elapsed, exit programming mode (clear the P bit to 0) and select
program-verify mode (set the PV bit to 1). In program-verify mode, a program-verify voltage is
applied to the memory cells at the latched address. If the flash memory is read in this state, the
data at the latched address will be read. After selecting program-verify mode, wait 4 µs before
reading, then compare the programmed data with the verify data. If they agree, exit program-
verify mode and program the next address. If they do not agree, select program mode again and
repeat the same program and program-verify sequence. Do not repeat the program and program-
verify sequence more than 6 times for the same bit. (When a bit is programmed repeatedly, set a
loop counter so that the total programming time will not exceed 1 ms.)
590
18.7.3 Programming Flowchart and Sample Program
Flowchart for Programming One Byte
Figure 18-15 Programming Flowchart
591
Write data to flash memory (flash
memory latches write address
and data)*1
Start
n = 1
Enable watchdog timer
Wait initial value setting x = 15 µs
*2
Select program mode
(P bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (x) µs
Clear P bit
Disable watchdog timer
Select program-verify mode
(PV bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (tVS1) µs
Verify (read memory)*3No good
OK
Clear PV bit
End (1-byte data programmed)
Programming ends
Clear PV bit
Programming error
n≥ N?
n + 1
Double the programming
time (x × 2 → x)
→ n
No
Yes
Verify ends
Set erase block register
(set bit of block to be programmed to 1)
Wait (z) µs
V E
PP
Clear bit
Clear erase block register
(clear bit of programmed block to 0)
V E
PP
Clear bit
Set V E bit
(V E bit = 1 in FLMCR)
PP
Clear erase block register
(clear bit of block to be
programmed to 0)
PP
Notes: 1. Write the data to be programmed using a
byte transfer instruction.
2. Set the watchdog timer overflow interval
by setting CKS2 and CKS1 to 0 and
CKS0 to 1.
3. Read to verify data from the memory
using a byte transfer instruction.
4. tVS1:4 µs
z: 5 to 10 µs
N: 6 (set N so that total programming
time does not exceed 1 ms)
5. Programming time x, which is determined
by the initial time ×2n–1 (n = 1 to 6),
increases in proportion to n. Thus, set the
initial time to 15.8 µs or less to make total
programming time 1 ms or less.
Sample Program for Programming One Byte: This program uses the following registers.
R0: Program-verify fail counter
R1: Program-verify timing loop counter
ER2: Stores the address to be programmed as long word data. Valid addresses are H'00000000
to H'0001FFFF.
R3H: Stores data to be programmed as byte data
R4: Sets and clears TCSR and FLMCR
E4: Stores the initial program loop counter value
R5: Clears FLMCR
E5: Stores the program loop counter value
Arbitrary data can be programmed at an arbitrary address by setting the address in ER2 and the
data in R3H.
The values of #a, #b, and #g depend on the clock frequency. They can be calculated as indicated
under table 18-14.
FLMCR: .EQU FFFF40
EBR1: .EQU FFFF42
EBR2: .EQU FFFF43
TCSR: .EQU FFFFA8
PRGM: MOV.W #0001, R0 ; Program-verify fail count
MOV.W #g, R1 ; Set program loop counter
MOV.W #4140, R4 ;
MOV.B R4L, @FLMCR:8 ; Set VPPE bit
LOOP0: DEC.W #1, R1 ;
BPL LOOP0
MOV.B #**, R0H ;
MOV.B R0H, @EBR*:8 ; Set EBR*
MOV.B R3H, @ER2 ; Dummy write
MOV.W #a, E4 ; Set initial program loop counter value
PRGMS: MOV.W #A579, R4 ; Start watchdog timer
MOV.W R4, @TCSR:16 ;
MOV:W E4, E5 ; Set program loop counter
MOV.W #4140, R4 ;
MOV.B R4H, @FLMCR:8 ; Set P bit
LOOP1: DEC.W #1, E5 ; Program
BPL LOOP1 ;
MOV.B R4L, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear P bit
MOV.W #A500, R4 ;
MOV.W R4, @TCSR:16 ; Stop watchdog timer
MOV:W #b , R1 ; Set program-verify loop counter
MOV.B #44, R4H ;
MOV.B R4H, @FLMCR:8 ; Set PV bit
LOOP2: DEC.W #1, R1 ; Wait
BPL LOOP2 ;
MOV.B @ER2, R1H ; Read programmed address
592
CMP.B R3H, R1H ; Compare programmed data with read data
BEQ PVOK ; Program-verify decision
PVNG: MOV.B #40, R5H ;
MOV.B R5H, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear PV bit
CMP.B #06, R0L ; Program-verify executed 6 times?
BEQ NGEND ; If program-verify executed 6 times, branch
to NGEND
INC.B R0L ; Program-verify fail count + 1 →R0L
SHLL.W E4 ; Double program loop counter value
BRA PRGMS ; Program again
PVOK: MOV.W #4000, R5 ;
MOV.B R5H, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear PV bit
MOV.B R5L, @EBR*:8 ;Clear EBR*
MOV.B R5L, @FLMCR:8 ;Clear VPPE bit
..................One byte programmed
NGEND: MOV.W #4000, R5 ;
MOV.B R5L, @EBR*:8 ;Clear EBR*
MOV.B R5L, @FLMCR:8 ;Clear VPPE bit
Programming error
18.7.4 Erase Mode
To erase the flash memory, follow the erasing algorithm shown in figure 18-16. This erasing
algorithm can erase data without subjecting the device to voltage stress or impairing the reliability
of programmed data.
To erase flash memory, before starting to erase, first place all memory data in all blocks to be
erased in the programmed state (program all memory data to H'00). If all memory data is not in
the programmed state, follow the sequence described later to program the memory data to zero.
To select the flash memory areas to be erased, first set the VPPE bit in the flash memory control
register (FLMCR), wait 5 to 10 µs, and set up erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1 and EBR2).
Next set the E bit in FLMCR, selecting erase mode. The erase time is the time during which the
E bit is set. To prevent overerasing, use a software timer to divide the erase time. Overerasing,
due to program runaway for example, can give memory cells a negative threshold voltage and
cause them to operate incorrectly. Before selecting erase mode, set up the watchdog timer so as to
prevent overerasing.
593
18.7.5 Erase-Verify Mode
In program-verify mode, after data has been erased, it is read to check that it has been erased
correctly. After the erase time has elapsed, exit erase mode (clear the E bit to 0), select erase-
verify mode (set the EV bit to 1), and wait 4 µs. Before reading data in erase-verify mode, write
H'FF dummy data to the address to be read. This dummy write applies an erase-verify voltage to
the memory cells at the latched address. If the flash memory is read in this state, the data at the
latched address will be read. After the dummy write, wait 2 µs before reading. If the read data
has been successfully erased, perform the dummy write, wait 2 µs, and erase-verify for the next
address. If the read data has not been erased, select erase mode again and repeat the same erase
and erase-verify sequence through the last address, until all memory data has been erased to 1. Do
not repeat the erase and erase-verify sequence more than 602 times, however.
594
18.7.6 Erasing Flowchart and Sample Program
Flowchart for Erasing One Block
Figure 18-16 Erasing Flowchart
Start
Write 0 data in all addresses
to be erased (prewrite)*1
n = 1
Set erase block register
(set bit of block to be erased to 1)
Enable watchdog timer
Wait initial value setting x = 6.25 ms
*2
Select erase mode
(E bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Clear E bit
Disable watchdog timer
Set top address in block
as verify address
Select erase-verify mode
(EV bit = 1)
Wait (tVS1) µs
Dummy write to verify address*3
(flash memory latches address)
Verify (read memory)*4
Last address?
Address + 1 → address Yes
OK
No
No good
No
No
Yes
Yes
Clear EV bit
Clear erase block register
(clear bit of erased block to 0)
End of block erase
Clear EV bit
Erase error
n≥ N?
n≥ 5?
Erase-verify ends
Erasing ends
n + 1
Double the erase time
(x × 2 → x)
→ n
Wait (z) µs
V E
PP
Set bit
( bit = 1 in FLMCR)
V E
PP
Clear bit V E
PP
Clear bit
Wait (x) ms
V E
PP
Wait (tVS2) µs
Clear erase block register
(clear bit of block to be
erased to 0)
Notes: 1. Program all addresses to be
erased by following the prewrite
flowchart.
2. Set the watchdog timer overflow
interval to the value indicated in
table 18-15.
3. For the erase-verify dummy
write, write H'FF using a byte
transfer instruction.
4. Read to verify data from the
memory using a byte transfer
instruction.
5. tVS1:4 µs
z: 5 to 10 µs
tVS2:2 µs
N: 602
6. The erase time x is successively
incremented by the initial set
value ×2n–1 (n = 1, 2, 3, 4). An
initial value of 6.25 ms or less
should be set, and the time for
one erasure should be 50 ms or
less.
595
Prewrite Flowchart
Figure 18-17 Prewrite Flowchart
End of prewrite
n≥ N?
n + 1
Double
the programming
time (x × 2 → x)
→ n
No
Start
Address = top address
Wait initial value setting x = 15 µs
Write H'00 to flash memory
(flash memory latches
write address and write data)
Enable watchdog timer*2
*1
Select program mode
(set P bit to 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (x) µs
Clear P bit
Disable watchdog timer
Wait (tVS1) µs
Prewrite verify*3
(read data = H'00?)
Last address?
No good
No
Yes
Programming ends
Programming error
Address + 1 → address
OK Yes
Set erase block register
(set bit of block to be erased to 1)
Wait (z) µs
n = 1
V E
PP
Clear bit
Clear erase block register
(clear bit of block to be erased to 0)
V E
PP
Set bit
( bit = 1 in FLMCR)
V E
PP
Clear erase block register
(clear bit of block to be erased to 0)
Clear VPPE bit
Notes: 1. Use a byte transfer instruction.
2. Set the watchdog timer overflow
interval by setting CKS2 = 0,
CKS1 = 0 and CKS0 = 0.
3. In prewrite-verify mode P, E, PV,
and EV are all cleared to 0 and
12 V is applied to VPP. Use a byte
transfer instruction.
4. tVS1:4 µs
z: 5 to 10 µs
N: 6 (set N so that total
programming time does not
exceed 1 ms)
596
Sample Program for Erasing One Block: This program uses the following registers.
R0: Prewrite-verify and erase-verify fail counter
ER1: Stores address used in prewrite
ER2: Stores address used in prewrite and erase-verify
ER3: Stores address used in erase-verify
ER4: Timing loop counter
R5: Sets appropriate registers
R6: Sets appropriate registers
The values of #a, #c, #d, #e, #f, #g, and #h, in the program depend on the clock frequency. They
can be calculated as indicated in tables 18-14 and 18-15.
FLMCR: .EQU FFFF40
EBR1: .EQU FFFF42
EBR2: .EQU FFFF43
TCSR: .EQU FFFFA8
;#BLKSTR is top address of block to be erased
;#BLKEND is last address of block to be erased
MOV.L #BLKSTR:32, ER1 ; ER1: top address of block to be erased
MOV.L #BLKEND:32, ER2 ; ER2: last address of block to be erased
;Execute prewrite
PREWRT: MOV.W #g, R4 ; Set wait counter
MOV.W #4140, R6 ;
MOV.B R6L, @FLMCR:8 ; Set VPPE bit
LOOPR0: DEC.W #1, R4 ;
BPL LOOPR0 ;
;SET EBR1 or EBR2 bit of block to be erased
MOV.B #**, R5H ;
MOV.B R5H, @EBR* ; Set EBR*
PREWRN: SUB.B R0H, R0H ; R0: prewrite-verify fail count
MOV.W #a, E4 ; Set initial prewrite loop counter value
PREWRS: MOV.B #00, R5H ; Write #00 data
MOV.B R5H, @ER1 ;
MOV.W #A579, R5 ; Start watchdog timer
MOV.W R5, @TCSR:16 ;
MOV.W E4, R4 ; Set prewrite loop counter
MOV.W #4140, R6 ;
MOV.B R6H, @FLMCR:8 ; Set P bit
LOOPR1: DEC.W #1, R4 ; Prewrite
BPL LOOPR1 ;
MOV.B R6L, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear P bit
MOV.W #A500, R5 ; Stop watchdog timer
MOV.W R5, @TCSR:16 ;
MOV.W #c , R5 ; Set prewrite-verify loop counter
597
LOOPR2: DEC.W #1, R5 ; Wait
BPL LOOPR2 ;
MOV.B @ER1, R5H ; Read data = H'00?
BEQ PWVFOK ; If read data = H'00, branch to PWVFOK
CMP.B #05, R0H ; Prewrite-verify executed 6 times?
BEQ ABEND1 ; If prewrite-verify executed 6 times, branch
to ABEND1
SHLL.W E4 ; Double prewrite loop counter value
INC.B R0H ; Prewrite-verify fail count + 1 →R0H
BRA PREWRS ; Prewrite again
PWVFOK: CMP.L ER2, ER1 ; Last address?
BEQ ERASES ;
INC.L #1, ER1 ; Address + 1 →R1
BRA PREWRN ; If not last address, prewrite next address
;Execute erase
ERASES: SUB.W R0, R0 ; R0: erase-verify fail count
MOV.L #BLKSTR:32,ER3 ; ER3: top address of block to be erased
MOV.W #d, E4 ; Set initial erase loop counter value
ERASE: CMP.W #025A, R0 ;
R0 = H'025A? (erase-verify fail count = 603?)
BEQ ABEND2 ; If R0 = H'025A, branch to ABEND2
INC.W #1, R0 ; Erase-verify fail count + 1 →R0
MOV.W E4, R4 ;
MOV.W #f, R5 ; Start watchdog timer
MOV.W R5, @TCSR:16 ;
MOV.B #42, R5H ; Set E bit
MOV.B R5H, @FLMCR:8 ;
LOOPE: PUSH.L ER5
POP.L ER5
PUSH.L ER5
POP.L ER5
PUSH.L ER5
POP.L ER5
DEC.W #1, R4 ; Erase
BPL LOOPE ;
MOV.B #40, R5H ;
MOV.B R5H, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear E bit
MOV.W #A500, R5 ;
MOV.W R5, @TCSR:16 ; Stop watchdog timer
;Execute erase-verify
MOV.B #48, R5H ;
MOV.B R5H, @FLMCR:8 ; Set EV bit
MOV.W #e , R4 ; R4: erase-verify loop counter
LOOPEV: DEC.W #1, R4 ;
BPL LOOPEV ; Wait
EVR2: MOV.B #FF, @ER3 ; Dummy write
MOV.W #h, R4 ; R4: erase-verify loop counter
598
LOOPDW: DEC.W #1, R4 ;
BPL LOOPDW ; Wait
MOV.B @ER3+, R4H ; Read
CMP.B #FF, R4H ; Read data = H’FF?
BNE RERASE ; If read data ≠H’FF, branch to RERASE
CMP.L ER2, ER3 ; Last address in block?
BGT EVR2 ; If not last address in block, erase-verify
next address
BRA OKEND, ; Branch to OKEND
RERASE: MOV.W #4000, R5 ;
MOV.B R5H, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear EV bit
DEC.L #1, ER3 ; Erase-verify address – 1 →R3
CMP.W #0004, R0 ;
BGE KEEP ; Erase executed 4 times?
SHLL.W E4 ; Double erase loop counter value
KEEP: BRA ERASE ; Erase again
OKEND: MOV.W #4000, R5 ;
MOV.B R5H, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear EV bit
MOV.W #0000, R5 ;
MOV.W R5, @EBR1:16 ; Clear EBR1 and EBR2
MOV.B R5L, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear VPPE bit
............................. One block erased
ABEND1: MOV.W #0000, R5 ;
MOV.W R5, @EBR1:16 ; Clear EBR1 and EBR2
MOV.B R5L, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear VPPE bit
Programming error
ABEND2: MOV.W #0000, R5 ;
MOV.W R5, @EBR1:16 ; Clear EBR1 and EBR2
MOV.B R5L, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear VPPE bit
Erase error
599
Flowchart for Erasing Multiple Blocks
Figure 18-18 Multiple-Block Erase Flowchart
Start
Write 0 data to all addresses to be
erased (prewrite)*1
n = 1
Set erase block registers
(set bits of blocks to be erased to 1)
Enable watchdog timer
Wait initial value setting x = 6.25 ms
*2
Select erase mode (E bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (x) ms
Clear E bit
Disable watchdog timer
Select erase-verify mode
(EV bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Wait (tVS1) µs
Set top address of block as
verify address
Dummy write to verify address
(flash memory latches address)
3*
Erase-verify
next block
Verify
*4
(read memory)
Last
address in block?
Address + 1 → address
Clear EBR bit of erase-verified block
All erased blocks
verified?
Clear EV bit
All blocks erased?
(EBR1 = EBR2 = 0?)
End of erase n≥ N?
Erase error
n + 1 → n
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No good
OK
Erasing ends
All erased blocks
verified?
Erase-verify next block
Yes
No
Yes
V E
PP
Clear bit
Clear erase block registers
(clear bits of blocks to be erased to 0)
n ≥ 4?
Wait (tVS2) µs
Wait (z) µs
V E
PP
Clear bit
PP PP
Set V E bit
(V E bit = 1 in FLMCR)
Double the erase time (x × 2 → x)
Notes: 1. Program all addresses to be erased by
following the prewrite flowchart.
2. Set the watchdog timer overflow interval to
the value indicated in table 18-15.
3. For the erase-verify dummy write, write H'FF
with a byte transfer instruction.
4. When erasing two or more blocks, clear the
bits of erased blocks in the erase block
register, so that only unerased blocks will be
erased again.
5. tVS1:4 µs
z: 5 to 10 µs
tVS2:2 µs
N: 602
6. The erase time x is successively
incremented by the initial set value
×2n–1 (n = 1, 2, 3, 4). An initial
value of 10 ms or less should be
set, and the time for one erasure
should be 50 ms or less.
600
Sample Program for Erasing Multiple Blocks: This program uses the following registers.
R0, R6: Specifies blocks to be erased (set as explained below)
R1H: Prewrite-verify fail counter
R1L: Used to test bits 0 to 15 of R0
ER2: Specifies address where address used in prewrite and erase-verify is stored
ER3: Stores address used in prewrite and erase-verify
ER4: Stores address used in prewrite and erase-verify
ER5: Sets appropriate registers
E0, E1: Timing loop counter
E6: Erase-verify fail counter
Arbitrary blocks can be erased by setting bits in R6.
A bit map of R6 and an example setting for erasing specific blocks are shown next.
Example: to erase blocks LB2, SB7, and SB0
R6 is set as follows:
MOV.W #0481, R6
MOV.W R6, @EBR1
The values of #a, #c, #d, #e, #f, #g, and #h in the program depend on the clock frequency. They
can be calculated as indicated in tables 18-14 and 18-15.
For #RAMSTR in the program, substitute the starting destination address in RAM, to be used
when this program is moved from flash memory into RAM.
LB7 LB6 LB5 LB4 LB3 LB2 LB1 LB0 SB7 SB6 SB5 SB4 SB3 SB2 SB1 SB0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Bit
R6
Corresponds to EBR1 Corresponds to EBR2
LB7 LB6 LB5 LB4 LB3 LB2 LB1 LB0 SB7 SB6 SB5 SB4 SB3 SB2 SB1 SB0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Bit
R6
Corresponds to EBR1 Corresponds to EBR2
Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
601
FLMCR: .EQU FFFF40
EBR1: .EQU FFFF42
EBR2: .EQU FFFF43
TCSR: .EQU FFFFA8
;Set R0 value
START: MOV.W #FFFF, R6 ;
Select blocks to be erased (R6: EBR1/EBR2)
MOV.W R6, R0 ; R0: EBR1/EBR2
SUB.W R1, R1 ; R1L: used to test R1-th bit in R0
;#RAMSTR is starting destination address to which program is transferred in RAM
;Set #RAMSTR to even number
MOV.L #RAMSTR:32, ER2 ; Starting transfer destination address
ADD.L #ERVADR:32, ER2 ; #RAMSTR + #ERVADR →ER2
SUB.L #START:32, ER2 ; ER2: address of data area used in RAM
PRETST: CMP.B #10, R1L ; R1L = #10?
BEQ ERASES ;
If finished checking all R0 bits, branch to ERASES
CMP.B #08, R1L ;
BCC BC0 ;
BTST R1L, R0H ;
BNE PREWRT ;
BRA PWADD1 ;
BC0: BTST R1L, R0L ; Test R1-th bit in R0
BNE PREWRT ;
If R1-th bit in R0 is 1, branch to PREWRT
PWADD1: INC.B R1L ; R1L + 1 →R1L
MOV.L @ER2+, ER3 ; Dummy-increment ER2
BRA PRETST
;Execute prewrite
PREWRT: MOV.L @ER2+, ER3 ; ER3: prewrite starting address
MOV.L @ER2, ER4 ; ER4: top address of next block
MOV.W #g, E5 ; Wait counter
MOV.W #4140, R5 ;
MOV.B R5L, @FLMCR:8 ; Set VPPE bit
LOOPR0 DEC.W #1, E5 ;
BPL LOOPR0 ;
MOV.W R6, @EBR1:16 ; Set EBR (R6: EBR1/EBR2)
PREW: MOV.B #01, R1H ; Prewrite-verify fail count
MOV.W #a, E0 ; Set initial prewrite loop counter value
PREWRS: MOV.B #00, R5H ;Write #00 data
MOV.B R5H, @ER3 ;
MOV.W #A579, E5 ;
MOV.W E5, @TCSR:16 ; Start watchdog timer
MOV.W E0, E1 ; Set program loop counter
MOV.W #4140, R5 ;
MOV.B R5H, @FLMCR:8 ; Set P bit
602
LOOPR1: DEC.W #1, E1 ; Program
BPL LOOPR1 ;
MOV.B R5L, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear P bit
MOV.W #A500, R5 ;
MOV.W R5, @TCSR:16 ; Stop watchdog timer
MOV.W #c, R5 ; Prewrite-verify loop counter
LOOPR2: DEC.W #1, R5 ;
BPL LOOPR2 ;
MOV.B @ER3, R5H ; Read data = #'00?
BEQ PWVFOK ; If read data = #'00, branch to PWVFOK
PWVFNG: CMP.B #06, R1H ; Prewrite-verify executed 6 times?
BEQ ABEND1 ;
If prewrite-verify executed 6 times, branch to ABEND1
INC.B R1H ; Prewrite-verify fail count + 1 →R1H
SHLL.W E0 ; Double prewrite loop counter value
BRA PREWRS ; Prewrite again
PWVFOK: INC.L #1, ER3 ; Address + 1 →ER3
CMP.L ER4, ER3 ; Last address?
BEQ PWADD2 ;
BRA PREW ;
PWADD2: INC.B R1L ; Used to test (R1L + 1)–th bit in R0
BRA PRETST ; Branch to PRETST
;Execute erase
ERASES: MOV.W R6, @EBR1:16 ; Set EBR1/EBR2
SUB.W E6, E6 ; E6: erase-verify fail count
MOV.W #d, E0 ; Set initial erase loop counter value
ERASE: MOV.W #f , R5 ;
MOV.W R5, @TCSR:16 ; Start watchdog timer
MOV.W E0, E1 ; Set erase-loop counter
MOV.W #4240, R5 ;
MOV.B R5H, @FLMCR:8 ; Set E bit
LOOPE: PUSH.L ER5
POP.L ER5
PUSH.L ER5
POP.L ER5
PUSH.L ER5
POP.L ER5
DEC.W #1, E1 ; Erase
BPL LOOPE
MOV.B R5L, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear E bit
MOV.W #A500, R5 ;
MOV.W R5, @TCSR:16 ; Stop watchdog timer
603
;Execute erase-verify
EVR: MOV.W R6, R0 ; R0: EBR1/EBR2
SUB.W R1, R1 ; R1: used to test R1-th bit in R0
;#RAMSTR is starting destination address to which program is transferred in RAM
MOV.L #RAMSTR:32, ER2 ; Starting transfer destination address (RAM)
ADD.L #ERVADR:32, ER2 ; #RAMSTR + #ERVADR →ER2
SUB.L #START:32, ER2 ; ER2: address of data area used in RAM
MOV.B #48, R5H ;
MOV.B R5H, @FLMCR:8 ; Set EV bit
MOV.W #e , R5 ; R5: set erase-verify loop counter
LOOPEV: DEC.W #1, R5 ; Program
BPL LOOPEV ; Wait
EBRTST: CMP.B #10, R1L ; R1L = #10?
BEQ HANTEI ;
If finished checking all R0 bits, branch to HANTEI
CMP.B #08, R1L ;
BCC BC1 ;
BTST R1L, R0H ;Test R1-th bit in R0H (EBR1)
BNE ERSEVF ;
BRA ADD01 ;
BC1: BTST R1L, R0L ; Test R1-th bit in R0L (EBR2)
BNE ERSEVF ; If R1-th bit in R0 is 1, branch to ERSEVF
ADD01: INC.B R1L ; R1L + 1 →R1L
MOV.L @ER2+, ER3 ; Dummy-increment R2
BRA EBRTST ;
ERSEVF: MOV.L @ER2+, ER3 ;
ER3: top address of block to be erase-verified
MOV.L @ER2, ER4 ; ER4: top address of next block
EVR2: MOV.B #FF, R5H ;
MOV.B R5H, @ER3 ; Dummy write
MOV.W #h , R5 ; R5: erase-verify loop counter
LOOPDW: DEC.W #1, R5 ;
BPL LOOPDW ; Wait
MOV.B @ER3+, R5L ; Read
CMP.B #FF, R5L ; Read data = #FF?
BNE ADD02 ; If read data ≠#FF, branch to ADD02
CMP.L ER4, ER3 ; Last address in block?
BNE EVR2 ; If not last address in block, branch to EVR2
CMP.B #08, R1L ;
BCC BC2 ;
BCLR R1L, R0H ; Clear R1L-th bit in R0H (EBR1)
BRA ADD02 ;
BC2: BCLR R1L, R0L ; Clear R1L-th bit in R0L (EBR2)
ADD02: INC.B R1L ; R1L + 1 →R1L
BRA EBRTST ; Erase-verify next erased block
604
HANTEI: MOV.W #4000, R5 ;
MOV.B R5H, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear EV bit
MOV.W R0, @EBR1:16 ; Clear bit of erased block to 0
BEQ EOWARI ;
If EBR1/EBR2 is all 0, erasing ended normally
CMP.W #025A, E6 ; E6 = 025A? (erase-verify fail count = 602?)
BEQ ABEND2 ; If E6 = 025A, branch to ABEND2
INC.W #1, E6 ; Erase-verify fail count + 1 →E6
CMP.W #0004, E6 ;
BGE KEEP ; Erase executed 4-times?
SHLL.W E0 ; Double erase loop counter value
KEEP: BRA ERASE ; Erase again
;———————<Block address table used in erase-verify>———————————————————————
.ALIGN2
ERVADR: .DATA.L 00000000 ; #0000 LB0
.DATA.L 00004000 ; #4000 LB1
.DATA.L 00008000 ; #8000 LB2
.DATA.L 0000C000 ; #C000 LB3
.DATA.L 00010000 ; #10000 LB4
.DATA.L 00014000 ; #14000 LB5
.DATA.L 00018000 ; #18000 LB6
.DATA.L 0001C000 ; #1C000 LB7
.DATA.L 0001F000 ; #1F000 SB0
.DATA.L 0001F200 ; #1F200 SB1
.DATA.L 0001F400 ; #1F400 SB2
.DATA.L 0001F600 ; #1F600 SB3
.DATA.L 0001F800 ; #1F800 SB4
.DATA.L 0001FA00 ; #1FA00 SB5
.DATA.L 0001FC00 ; #1FC00 SB6
.DATA.L 0001FE00 ; #1FE00 SB7
.DATA.L 00020000 ; #20000 FLASH AREA END ADDRESS
EOWARI: MOV.B #00, R5L ;
MOV.B R5L, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear VPPE bit
Erase end
ABEND1: MOV.W #0000, R5 ;
MOV.W R5, @EBR1:16 ; Clear EBR1 and EBR2
MOV.B R5L, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear VPPE bit
Programming error
ABEND2: MOV.W #0000, R5 ;
MOV.W R5, @EBR1:16 ; Clear EBR1 and EBR2
MOV.B R5L, @FLMCR:8 ; Clear VPPE bit
Erase error
605
Loop Counter Values in Programs and Watchdog Timer Overflow Interval Settings: The
values of a to h in the programs depend on the clock frequency. Table 18-14 indicates the values
for 10 MHz. Values for other frequencies can be calculated as shown below, but use the settings
in table 18-15 for the value off.
Table 18-14 Loop Counter Values in Program (10 MHz)
Variable
Clock Frequency a (f) b (f) c (f) d (f) e (f) g (f) h (f)
f = 10 MHz Hexadecimal H'0019 H'0007 H'0007 H'03B3 H'0007 H'0009 H'0004
Decimal 25 7 7 947 7 9 4
Comments Program tVS1 tVS2 Erase tVS1 z tVS2
at write at pre-write at erase
Formula:
a (f) to h (f) =×{a (f = 10) toh(f = 10)}
Examples for 16 MHz:
a (f) =×25 = 40 ≈H'0028
b (f) =×7 = 11.2 ≈H'000C
c (f) =×7 = 11.2 ≈H'000C
d (f) =×947 = 1515.2 ≈H'05EC
e (f) =×7 = 11.2 ≈H'000C
g (f) =×9 = 14.4 ≈H'000F
h (f) =×4 = 6.4 ≈H'0007
Table 18-15 Watchdog Timer Overflow Interval Settings
Variable
Clock Frequency f
10 MHz ≤frequency ≤16 MHz H'A57F
2 MHz ≤frequency < 10 MHz H'A57E
1 MHz ≤frequency < 2 MHz H'A57D
Note: The watchdog timer (WDT) set value is calculated based on the number of instructions
including write time and erase time from start to stop of WDT operation. In this program
example, therefore, no more instructions should be added between the start and stop of
WDT operation.
Clock frequency f [MHz]
10
16
10
16
10
16
10
16
10
16
10
16
10
16
10
606
18.7.7 Prewrite-Verify Mode
Prewrite-verify mode is a verify mode used after writing 0 to all bits to equalize their threshold
voltages before erasure.
To program all bits, write H'00 in accordance with the algorithm shown in figure 18-17. Use this
procedure to set all data in the flash memory to H'00 after programming. After the necessary
programming time has elapsed, exit program mode (by clearing the P bit to 0) and select prewrite-
verify mode (leave the P, E, PV, and EV bits all cleared to 0). In prewrite-verify mode, a prewrite-
verify voltage is applied to the memory cells at the read address. If the flash memory is read in
this state, the data at the read address will be read. After selecting prewrite-verify mode, wait 4 µs
before reading.
Note: For a sample prewriting program, see the sample erasing program.
18.7.8 Protect Modes
Flash memory can be protected from programming and erasing by software or hardware methods.
These two protection modes are described below.
Software Protection: Prevents transitions to program mode and erase mode even if the P or E bit
is set in the flash memory control register (FLMCR). Details are as follows.
Function
Protection Description Program Erase Verify*1
Block Individual blocks can be erase and Disabled Disabled Enabled
protect program-protected by the erase block
registers (EBR1 and EBR2). If EBR1 and
EBR2 are both set to H'00, all blocks are
erase- and program-protected.
Emulation When the RAMS bit is set in the RAM Disabled*2Disabled*3Enabled*2
protect control register (RAMCR), all blocks are
protected from both programming and
erasing.
Notes: 1. Three modes: program-verify, erase-verify, and prewrite-verify.
2. Except in RAM areas overlapped onto flash memory.
3. All blocks are erase-disabled. It is not possible to specify individual blocks.
607
Hardware Protection: Suspends or disables the programming and erasing of flash memory, and
resets the flash memory control register (FLMCR) and erase block registers (EBR1 and EBR2).
The error-protect function permits the P and E bits to be set, but prevents transitions to program
mode and erase mode. Details of hardware protection are as follows.
Function
Protection Description Program Erase Verify*1
Programing When VPP is not applied, FLMCR, EBR1, Disabled Disabled*2Disabled
voltage (VPP) and EBR2 are initialized, disabling
protect programming and erasing. To obtain this
protection, VPP should not exceed VCC.*3
Reset and When a reset occurs (including a watchdog Disabled Disabled*2Disabled
standby timer reset) or standby mode is entered,
protect FLMCR, EBR1, and EBR2 are initialized,
disabling programming and erasing.
Note that RES input does not ensure a
reset unless the RES pin is held low for
at least 20 ms at power-up (to enable
the oscillator to settle), or at least 10
system clock cycles (ø) during operation.
Error protect If an operational error is detected during Disabled Disabled*2Enabled
programming or erasing of flash memory
(FLER = 1), the FLMCR, EBR1, and EBR2
settings are preserved, but programming
or erasing is aborted immediately.
This type of protection can be cleared
only by a reset or hardware standby.
Notes: 1. Program-verify, erase-verify, and prewrite-verify modes.
2. All blocks are erase-disabled. It is not possible to specify individual blocks.
3. For details, see section 18.10, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions.
Error Protect: This protection mode is entered if one of the error conditions that set the FLER bit
in RAMCR is detected while flash memory is being programmed or erased (while the P bit or E
bit is set in FLMCR). These conditions can occur if microcontroller operations do not follow the
programming or erasing algorithm. Error protect is a flash-memory state. It does not affect other
microcontroller operations.
In this state the settings of the flash memory control register (FLMCR) and erase block registers
(EBR1 and EBR2) are preserved,* but program mode or erase mode is terminated as soon as the
error is detected. While the FLER bit is set, it is not possible to enter program mode or erase
mode, even by setting the P bit or E bit in FLMCR again. The PV and EV bits in FLMCR remain
valid, however. Transitions to verify modes are possible in the error-protect state.
608
The error-protect state can be cleared only by a reset or entry to hardware standby mode.
Note: * It is possible to write to these registers. Note that a transition to software standby mode
initializes these registers.
Figure 18-19 Flash Memory State Transitions in Modes 5, 6 and 7 (On-Chip ROM
Enabled) when Programming Voltage (VPP) is Applied
The purpose of error-protect mode is to prevent overprogramming or overerasing damage to flash
memory by detecting abnormal conditions that occur if the programming or erasing algorithm is
not followed, or if a program crashes while the flash memory is being programmed or erased.
This protection function does not cover abnormal conditions other than the setting conditions of
the flash memory error bit (FLER), however. Also, if too much time elapses before the error-
protect state is reached, the flash memory may already have been damaged. This function
accordingly does not offer foolproof protection from damage to flash memory.
To prevent abnormal operations, when programming voltage (VPP) is applied, follow the
programming and erasing algorithms correctly, and keep microcontroller operations under
constant internal and external supervision, using the watchdog timer for example. If a transition to
error-protect mode occurs, the flash memory may contain incorrect data due to errors in
P = 1 or E = 1 P = 0 and E = 0
Error occurs
RES = 0 or STBY = 0
or software standby
RES = 1 and STBY = 1
and not software standby
RES = 0 or
STBY = 0
Error occurs
(software standby)
RES = 0 or
STBY = 0
Software
standby
Software standby
cleared
RES = 0 or
STBY = 0
RD:
VF:
PR:
ER:
RD:
VF:
PR:
ER:
INIT.:
Memory read enabled
Verify read enabled
Programming enabled
Erase enabled
Memory read disabled
Verify read disabled
Programming disabled
Erase disabled
Initialized state of registers (FLMCR, EBR1, EBR2)
Memory read
or verify mode
Program mode
or erase mode
Reset or standby
(hardware protect)
Error-protect mode
(software standby)
Error-protect mode
RD VF PR ER
FLER = 0
RD VF PR ER
FLER = 0
RD VF PR ER
FLER = 1
RD VF PR ER
INIT.
FLER = 1
RD VF PR ER
INIT.
FLER = 0
609
programming or erasing, or it may contain data that has been insufficiently programmed or erased
because of the suspension of these operations. Boot mode should be used to recover to a normal
state.
If the memory contains overerased memory cells, boot mode may not operate correctly. This is
because the H8/3048F’s built-in boot program is located in part of flash memory, and will not read
correctly if memory cells have been overerased.
18.7.9 NMI Input Masking
NMI input is disabled when flash memory is being programmed or erased (when the P or E bit is
set in FLMCR). NMI input is also disabled while the boot program is executing in boot mode,
until the branch to the on-chip RAM area takes place.*1There are three reasons for this.
• NMI input during programming or erasing might cause a violation of the programming or
erasing algorithm. Normal operation could not be assured.
• In the NMI exception-handling sequence during programming or erasing, the vector would
not be read correctly.*2The result might be a program runaway.
• If NMI input occurred during boot program execution, the normal boot-mode sequence could
not be executed.
NMI input is also disabled in the error-protect state while the P or E bit remains set in the flash
memory control register (FLMCR).
NMI requests should be disabled externally whenever VPP is applied.
Notes: 1. The disabled state lasts until the branch to the boot program area in on-chip RAM
(addresses H'FFEF10 to H'FFF2FF) that takes place as soon as the transfer of the user
program is completed. After the branch to the RAM area, NMI input is enabled except
during programming or erasing. NMI interrupt requests must therefore be disabled
externally until the user program has completed initial programming (including the
vector table and the NMI interrupt-handling program).
2. The vector may not be read correctly for the following two reasons.
• If flash memory is read while being programmed or erased (while the P or E bit is
set in FLMCR), correct read data will not be obtained. Undetermined values are
returned.
• If the NMI entry in the vector table has not been programmed yet, NMI exception
handling will not be executed correctly.
610
18.8 Flash Memory Emulation by RAM
Erasing and programming flash memory takes time, which can make it difficult to tune parameters
and other data in real time. If necessary, real-time updates of flash memory can be emulated by
overlapping the small-block flash-memory area with part of the RAM (H'FFF000 to H'FFF1FF).
This RAM reassignment is performed using bits 3 to 0 of the RAM control register (RAMCR).
After a flash memory area has been overlapped by RAM, it can be accessed from two address
areas: the overlapped flash memory area, and the original RAM area (H'FFF000 to H'FFF1FF).
Table 18-16 indicates how to reassign RAM.
RAM Control Register (RAMCR)
Note: *Bit 7 and bits 3 to 0 are initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are
not initialized in software standby mode.
Table 18-16 RAM Area Reassignment
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
RAM Area RAMS RAM2 RAM1 RAM0
H'FFF000 to H'FFF1FF 0 0/1 0/1 0/1
H'01F000 to H'01F1FF 1000
H'01F200 to H'01F3FF 1001
H'01F400 to H'01F5FF 1010
H'01F600 to H'01F7FF 1011
H'01F800 to H'01F9FF 1100
H'01FA00 to H'01FBFF 1101
H'01FC00 to H'01FDFF 1110
H'01FE00 to H'01FFFF 1111
Bit
Initial value
R/W
7
0
FLER RAMS
6543210
110000
R — — — R/W R/W R/W R/W
——— RAM2 RAM1 RAM0
*1
611
Example of Emulation of Real-Time Flash-Memory Update
Figure 18-20 Example of RAM Overlap
H'FFF000
H'01F9FF
H'01FA00
H'01FBFF
H'01FDFF
H'01FE00
H'01FFFF
H'FFF1FF
H'FFF200
H'FFFF0F
Flash memory
address space
Small-block
area (SB5)
Overlapped by RAM
H'01F000
On-chip RAM
area
H'FFEF10
Procedure
1. Set the RAME bit to 1 in SYSCR
to enable the on-chip RAM.
2. Overlap part of RAM (H'FFF000 to
H'FFF1FF) onto the area requiring
real-time update (SB5).
(Set RAMCR bits 3 to 0 to 1101.)
3. Perform real-time updates in the
overlapping RAM.
4. After finalization of the update
data, clear the RAM overlap (by
clearing the RAMS bit).
5. Program the data written in RAM
addresses H'FFF000 to H'FFF1FF
into the flash memory area.
Notes: 1. When part of RAM (H'FFF000 to H'FFF1FF) is overlapped onto a small-block area in flash
memory, the overlapped flash memory area cannot be accessed. Access is enabled when
the overlap is cleared.
2. When the RAMS bit is set to 1, all flash memory blocks are write-protected and erase-
protected, regardless of the values of bits RAM2 to RAM0. In this state, no transition to
program or erase mode will take place if the P or E bit is set in the flash memory control
register (FLMCR). To actually program or erase a flash memory area, the RAMS bit must
be cleared to 0.
612
18.9 Flash Memory PROM Mode
18.9.1 PROM Mode Setting
The on-chip flash memory of the H8/3048F can be programmed and erased not only in the on-
board programming modes but also in PROM mode, using a general-purpose PROM programmer.
Table 18-17 indicates how to select PROM mode. Be sure to use the indicated socket adapter in
PROM mode.
Table 18-17 Selecting PROM Mode
Pins Setting
Mode pins: MD2, MD1, MD0Low
P80, P81, and P92
STBY and HWR High
P50, P51, and P82
RES Power-on reset circuit
XTAL and EXTAL Oscillator circuit
613
18.9.2 Socket Adapter and Memory Map
Programs can be written and verified by attaching a special 100-pin/32-pin socket adapter to the
PROM programmer. Table 18-18 gives ordering information for the socket adapter. Figure 18-21
shows a memory map in PROM mode. Figure 18-22 shows the socket adapter pin
interconnections.
Table 18-18 Socket Adapter
Microcontroller Package Socket Adapter
HD64F3048F 100-pin plastic QFP (FP-100B) HS3048ESHF1H
HD64F3048VF
HD64F3048TF 100-pin plastic TQFP (TFP-100B) HS3048ESNF1H
HD64F3048VTF
Figure 18-21 Memory Map in PROM Mode
Note: * The FP-100B and TFP-100B pin pitch is only 0.5 mm. Use an appropriate tool when
inserting the device in the IC socket and removing it. For example, the tool listed in
table 18-19 can be used.
Table 18-19
Manufacturer Part Number
ENPLAS CORPORATION HP-100 (vacuum pen)
H8/3048F
H'00000
H'1FFFF
H'000000
H'01FFFF
On-chip ROM area
MCU mode PROM mode
614
Figure 18-22 Wiring of Socket Adapter
H8/3048F
Pin Name
FP-100B, TFP-100B
10
64
69
58
90
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53, 54, 89
62, 71
76, 77
1, 35, 68
86
11, 22, 44
57, 65, 92
63
66, 67
Other pins
1
26
2
3
31
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
27
24
23
25
4
28
29
22
32
16
HN28F101 (32 Pins)
Pin No.
Pin Name
VPP
A9
A16
A15
WE
I/O0
I/O1
I/O2
I/O3
I/O4
I/O5
I/O6
I/O7
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
OE
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
CE
VCC
VSS
Socket Adapter Pin No.
RESO
NMI
P63
P60
P83
P30
P31
P32
P33
P34
P35
P36
P37
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
P50, P51, P82
STBY, HWR
MD0, MD1, MD2,
P80, P81
AVCC, VREF
VCC
AVSS
VSS
RES
EXTAL, XTAL
NC (OPEN)
Power-on
reset circuit
Oscillator circuit
Legend
VPP:
I/O7
to I/O0:
A16 to A0:
OE:
CE:
WE:
Programming
power supply
Data input/output
Address input
Output enable
Chip enable
Write enable
Note: This figure shows pin assignments, and does not show the entire socket adapter circuit. When undertaking a new
design, board design (power supply voltage stabilization, noise countermeasures, etc.) and operating timing design
as a high-speed CMOS LSI are necessary.
73 to 75
87, 88, 14 , P92
615
18.9.3 Operation in PROM Mode
The program/erase/verify specifications in PROM mode are the same as for the standard
HN28F101 flash memory. Table 18-20 indicates how to select the various operating modes. The
H8/3048F does not have a device recognition code, so the programmer cannot read the device
name automatically.
Table 18-20 Operating Mode Selection in PROM Mode
Pins
Mode VPP VCC CE OE WE I/O7to I/O0A16 to A0
Read Read VCC VCC L L H Data output Address input
Output VCC VCC L H H High impedance
disable
Standby VCC VCC H X X High impedance
Read VPP VCC L L H Data output
Output VPP VCC L H H High impedance
disable
Standby VPP VCC H X X High impedance
Write VPP VCC L H L Data input
Legend
L: Low level
H: High level
VPP:V
PP level
VCC:V
CC level
X: Don’t care
Command
write
616
Table 18-21 PROM Mode Commands
1st Cycle 2nd Cycle
Command Cycles Mode Address Data Mode Address Data
Memory read 1 Write X H'00 Read RA Dout
Erase setup/erase 2 Write X H'20 Write X H'20
Erase-verify 2 Write EA H'A0 Read X EVD
Auto-erase setup/ 2 Write X H'30 Write X H'30
auto-erase
Program setup/ 2 Write X H'40 Write PA PD
program
Program-verify 2 Write X H'C0 Read X PVD
Reset 2 Write X H'FF Write X H'FF
PA: Program address
EA: Erase-verify address
RA: Read address
PD: Program data
PVD: Program-verify output data
EVD: Erase-verify output data
617
High-Speed, High-Reliability Programming: Unused areas of the H8/3048F flash memory
contain H'FF data (initial value). The H8/3048F flash memory uses a high-speed, high-reliability
programming procedure. This procedure provides enhanced programming speed without
subjecting the device to voltage stress and without sacrificing the reliability of programmed data.
Figure 18-23 shows the basic high-speed, high-reliability programming flowchart. Tables 18-22
and 18-23 list the electrical characteristics during programming.
Figure 18-23 High-Speed, High-Reliability Programming
Start
Set VPP = 12.0 V ±0.6 V
Address = 0
n = 0
Program command
Program setup command
n + 1 → n
Wait (25 µs)
Program-verify command
Wait (6 µs)
Address + 1 → address
Verification?
Last address?
Set VPP = VCC
End Fail
n = 20?
No good
No
Yes
OK
Yes
No
618
High-Speed, High-Reliability Erasing: The H8/3048F flash memory uses a high-speed, high-
reliability erasing procedure. This procedure provides enhanced erasing speed without subjecting
the device to voltage stress and without sacrificing data reliability . Figure 18-24 shows the basic
high-speed, high-reliability erasing flowchart. Tables 18-22 and 18-23 list the electrical
characteristics during programming.
Figure 18-24 High-Speed, High-Reliability Erasing
Start
Program 0 to all bits*
Address = 0
n = 0
Wait (10 ms)
Erase setup/erase command
n + 1 → n
Erase-verify command
Wait (6 µs)
Address + 1 → address
Verification?
Last address?
End Fail
n = 3000?
No good
No
Yes
OK
Yes
No
Note: *Follow the high-speed, high-reliability flowchart in programming all bits.
619
Table 18-22 DC Characteristics in PROM Mode
(Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VPP = 12.0 V ±0.6 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta= 25°C ±5°C)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
Input high I/O7to I/O0, VIH 2.2 — VCC + 0.3 V
voltage A16 to A0,
OE, CE, WE
Input low I/O7to I/O0, VIL –0.3 — 0.8 V
voltage A16 to A0,
OE, CE, WE
Output high I/O7to I/O0VOH 2.4 — — V IOH = –200 µA
voltage
Output low I/O7to I/O0VOL — — 0.45 V IOL = 1.6 mA
voltage
Input leakage I/O7to I/O0, ILI ——2 µAV
IN = 0 to VCC V
current A16 to A0,
OE, CE, WE
VCC current Read ICC —4080 mA
Program ICC —4080 mA
Erase ICC —4080 mA
V
PP current Read IPP — — 200 µA VPP = 5.0 V
—1020 mAV
PP = 12.6 V
Program IPP —2040 mA
Erase IPP —2040 mA
Note: For details on absolute maximum ratings, see section 21-1. Using an LSI in excess of
absolute maximum ratings may result in permanent damage*.
*VPP peak overshoot should not exceed 13 V.
620
Table 18-23 AC Characteristics in PROM Mode
(Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VPP = 12.0 V ± 0.6 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta= 25°C ± 5°C)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
Command write cycle tCWC 120 — — ns
Address setup time tAS 0——ns
Address hold time tAH 60 — — ns
Data setup time tDS 50 — — ns
Data hold time tDH 10 — — ns
CE setup time tCES 0——ns
CE hold time tCEH 0——ns
V
PP setup time tVPS 100 — — ns
VPP hold time tVPH 100 — — ns
WE programming pulse tWEP 70 — — ns
width
WE programming pulse tWEH 20 — — ns
high time
OE setup time before tOEWS 0——ns
command write
OE setup time before verify tOERS 6——µs
Verify access time tVA — — 500 ns
OE setup time before status tOEPS 120 — — ns
polling
Status polling access time tSPA — — 120 ns
Program wait time tPPW 25 — — ns
Erase wait time tET 9—11ms
Output disable time tDF 0 — 40 ns
Total auto-erase time tAET 0.5 — 30 s
Note: CE, OE, and WE should be high during transitions of VPP from 5 V to 12 V and from 12 V to
5 V.
*Input pulse level: 0.45 V to 2.4 V
Input rise time and fall time ≤10 ns
Timing reference levels: 0.8 V and 2.0 V for input; 0.8 V and 2.0 V for output
Figure 18-25
Figure 18-26 *
Figure 18-27
621
Figure 18-25 Auto-Erase Timing
Figure 18-26 High-Speed, High-Reliability Programming Timing
Auto-erase setup Auto-erase and status polling
Address
Command
in
Status polling
Command
in
Command
in Command
in
5.0 V
12 V
5.0 V
VCC
VPP
CE
OE
WE
I/O
I/O to I/O
tVPS tVPH
tCEH tCES
tCES
tOEWS tWEP tCEH
tCES
tCWC
tWEP
tOEPS
tAET
tWEH
tDS tDH tDS tDH tSPA tDF
7
06
tVPH
tVPS
tCEH
tCES
tOEWS tWEP tCEH
tCES
tCWC
tWEP
tDS tDH tDS tDH
tAS tAH
tPPW
tCES
tWEH
tCEH
tWEP tOERS
tDH
tDS
tVA tDF
Command
in
Command
in
Data
in
Command
in
Command
in
Valid data
out
Valid data
out
Data
in
Program setup Program Program-verify
Valid address
Address
5.0 V
12 V
5.0 V
VCC
VPP
CE
OE
WE
I/O
I/O to I/O
7
06
Note: Program-verify data output values may be intermediate between 1 and 0 if programming is insufficient.
622
Figure 18-27 Erase Timing
Address
5.0 V
12 V
5.0 V
VCC
VPP
CE
OE
WE
I/O0 to I/O7
Erase setup Erase Erase-verify
Valid address
Command
in Command
in Command
in
Valid data
out
tVPS tVPH
tAS tAH
tOEWS tCWC
tCES tWEP
tCEH
tDH
tDS
tWEH
tDS tDH tDS tDH
tVA
tDF
tCES tWEP
tCEH tCES
tET tWEP
tCEH
tOERS
Note: Erase-verify data output values may be intermediate between 1 and 0 if erasing is insufficient.
623
18.10 Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions
(1) Program with the specified voltages and timing.
The programming voltage (VPP) of the flash memory is 12.0 V.
If the PROM programmer is set to Hitachi HN28F101 specifications, VPP will be 12.0 V. Applied
voltages in excess of the rating can permanently damage the device. Insure, in particular, that
peak overshoot at the Vpp and MD2 pins does not exceed the maximum rating of 13 V. Also, be
very careful about PROM programmer overshoot.
(2) Before programming, check that the chip is correctly mounted in the PROM programmer.
Overcurrent damage to the device can result if the index marks on the PROM programmer socket,
socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned.
(3) Don’t touch the socket adapter or chip while programming. Touching either of these can
cause contact faults and write errors.
(4) Precautions in turning the programming voltage (VPP) on and off:
(a) Apply the programming voltage (VPP) after the rise of VCC, when the microcontroller is in a
stable condition. Shut off VPP before VCC, again while the microcontroller is in a stable condition.
If VPP is turned on or off while VCC is not within its rated voltage range (VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V),
since microcontroller operation is unstable and flash memory protection is not functioning, the
flash memory may be programmed or erased by mistake. This can occur even if VCC = 0 V. The
same danger of incorrect programming or erasing exists when VCC is within its rated voltage
range (VCC = 2.7 to 5.5 V) if the clock oscillator has not stabilized, if the clock oscillator has
stopped (except in standby), or if a program runaway has occurred. After VCC power-up, do not
apply VPP until the clock oscillator has had time to settle (tOSC1 = 20 ms min) and the
microcontroller is safely in the reset state, or the reset has been cleared.
These power-on and power-off timing requirements should also be satisfied in the event of a
power failure and recovery from a power failure. If these requirements are not satisfied, the flash
memory may not only be unintentionally programmed or erased; it may be permanently damaged.
624
(b) The VPP bit in the flash memory control register (FLMCR) is set or cleared when the VPPE
bit in FLMCR is set or cleared while a voltage of 12.0 ± 0.6 V is being applied to the VPP pin.
After the VPPE bit is set, it becomes possible to write the erase block registers (EBR1 and EBR2)
and the EV, PV, E, and P bits in FLMCR. Accordingly, program or erase flash memory 5 to 10 µs
after the VPPE bit is set. VPP should be turned off only when the P, E and VPPE bits in FLMCR
are cleared. Be sure that these bits are not set by mistaken access to FLMCR.
Figure 18-28 Power-On and Power-Off Timing (Boot Mode)
tosc1
12±0.6 V
min 0 µs
tMDS
min 0µs
12±0.6 V
0 to Vcc V
0 to Vcc V
2.7 to 5.5 V
VppE
set VppE
cleared
min 10 ø
min 0 µs
0 to Vcc V
0 to Vcc V
tFRS
tVPS*
ø
VCC
VPP
MD2
RES
VPPE bit
Programming/
erasing
possible
Period during which flash memory access is prohibited
Period during which flash memory can be rewritten
(Execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify
operations prohibited)
* tVPS: 5 to 10µs
625
626
Figure 18-29 Power-On and Power-Off Timing (User Program Mode)
tosc1
12±0.6 V
0 to
Vcc V
2.7 to
5.5 V
VppE
set VppE
cleared
min 0 µs
0 to
Vcc V
tFRS
tVPS*1
ø
VCC
VPP
MD2
to 0
RES
VPPE bit
0 to
Vcc V
tMDS
0 to
Vcc V
*2*2
Programming/
erasing
possible
Period during which flash memory access is prohibited
Period during which flash memory can be rewritten
(Execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify
operations prohibited)
tVPS: 5 to 10 µs*1The level of the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) must be fixed from power-on to power-off
by pulling the pins up or down.
*2
Figure 18-30 Mode Transition Timing
(Example: Boot Mode →User Mode ↔User Program Mode)
627
tosc1
12±0.6 V
0 to
Vcc V
2.7 to
5.5 V
VppE
set
Clear
VppE
User program modeMode
switch-
ing*1
Mode
switch-
ing*1
Boot mode User program
mode
User
mode
User
mode
ø
VCC
VPP
MD2
to 0
RES
VPPE bit
0 to
Vcc V tMDS
12±0.6 V
min 0µs
min 0 µsmin 10 ø
tMDS*2
tFRS*2
Programming/
erasing
possible tFRS
Programming/
erasing
possible tFRS
tVPS Programming/
erasing
possible tFRS
tVPS Programming/
erasing
possible
tVPS
tVPS
Period during which flash memory access is prohibited
Period during which flash memory can be rewritten
(Execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify operations prohibited)
1
2
Notes When entering boot mode or making a transition from boot mode to another mode, mode switching must be carried
out by means of RES input. The pin output states change during this switchover interval (the interval during which
the RES pin is low), and therefore these pins should not be used as output signals during this time.
When making a transition from boot mode to another mode, the flash memory read setup time tFRS and
mode programming setup time tMDS must be satisfied with respect to RES clearance timing.
VppE
cleared
(5) Do not apply 12 V to the VPP pin during normal operation. To prevent microcontroller errors
caused by accidental programming or erasing, apply 12 V to VPP only when the flash memory is
programmed or erased, or when flash memory is emulated by RAM. While 12 V is applied, the
watchdog timer should be running and enabled to halt runaway program execution, so that
program runaway will not lead to overprogramming or overerasing.
(6) Disable watchdog-timer reset output (RESO) while the programming voltage (VPP) is turned
on. If 12 V is applied during watchdog timer reset output (while the RESO pin is low), overcurrent
flow will permanently destroy the reset output circuit. The watchdog timers reset output enable bit
(RSTOE) should not be set to 1.
If a pull-up resistor is externally attached to the VPP/RESO pin, a diode is necessary to prevent
reverse current from flowing to VCC when VPP is applied (figure 18-31).
(7) If the watchdog timer generates a reset output signal when 12 V is not applied, the rise and
fall of the reset output waveform will be delayed by any decoupling capacitors connected to the
VPP pin.
Figure 18-31 VPP Power Supply Circuit Design (Example)
0.01 µF1.0 µF
+12 V V /
RESO
PP
H8/3048F
+5 V Pull-up resistor and
a diode
628
(8) Notes concerning mounting board development—handling of VPP and mode MD2 pins
1. The standard 12 V high voltage is applied to the VPP and mode MD2 pins when erasing or
programming flash memory. The voltage at these pins also includes overshoot and noise, and
the following points should be noted to ensure that the 13 V maximum rated voltage is not
exceeded.
(a) Bypass capacitors should be inserted to eliminate overshoot and noise. These should be
positioned as close as possible to the chip’s VPP and mode MD2 pins.
1.0 µF: Stabilizes fluctuations in the low-frequency components, such as power
supply ripple.
0.01 µF: Bypasses high-frequency components such as induction noise.
(b) The VPP and mode MD2 pin wiring should be kept as short as possible to suppress
induction noise. When designing a new board, in particular, noise may be increased by
jumper wires, etc. In this case too, the power supply waveform should be monitored
and measures taken to prevent the maximum rating from being exceeded.
(c) The maximum rated voltage is based on the potential of the VSS pin. If the potential of
this pin oscillates due to current fluctuations, etc., the voltage of the VPP and mode
MD2 pins may reciprocally exceed the maximum rated voltage. Careful attention must
therefore be paid to stabilizing the reference potential.
Note: When the user system’s 12 V power supply is connected, attention must be paid to
the current capacity. A power supply with a small current capacity will not be able to
handle fluctuations in the chip’s operating voltage, resulting in voltage drops and
rises or oscillation that may make it impossible to obtain the rated operating voltage.
If the power supply has a large current capacity, or if the 12 V voltage is turned on
abruptly by means of a switch, etc., caution is required since a voltage exceeding the
maximum rating may be generated due to the inductance component of the power
supply wiring or the power supply characteristics.
Before using the power supply, check the power supply waveform to ensure that the
above problems will not arise.
629
2. 12 V is applied to the VPP and mode MD2 pins when programming or erasing flash memory.
When these pins are pulled up to the VCC line in normal operation, diodes should be inserted to
prevent reverse current from flowing to the VCC line when 12 V is applied.
Note: In normal operation, if the mode MD2 pin to which 12 V is applied is to be set to 0, it
should be pulled down with a resistor.
A sample circuit is shown figure 18-32.
Figure 18-32 Example of Mounting Board Design
(Connection to Adapter Board—When VPP Pin and Mode Pin Settings Are 1)
630
VPP
H8/3048F
MD2
0.01 µF 1.0 µF
VCC
VCC
0.01 µF 1.0 µF
12 V
12 V
mode
pin
Adapter board User system
VPP pin
Mode pin
(9) Do not set or clear the VppE bit during execution of a program in flash memory.
Flash memory data cannot be read normally when the VppE bit is set or cleared. After the VppE
bit is cleared, flash memory data can be rewritten after waiting for the elapse of the Vpp enable
setup time (tVPS: 5 10 [??] µs), but flash memory cannot be accessed for purposes other than
verification (verification during programming, erasing, or prewriting). After the VppE is cleared,
wait for the elapse of the flash memory read setup time before performing program execution and
data reading in flash memory.
(10) Do not use interrupts while programming or erasing flash memory.
When Vpp is applied, disable all interrupt requests, including NMI, to give the programming or
erase operation the highest priority.
(11) The Vpp flag is set and cleared by a threshold decision on the voltage applied to the Vpp pin.
The threshold level is approximately in the range from Vcc +2 V to 11.4 V.
When this flag is set, it becomes possible to write to the flash memory control register (FLMCR)
and the erase block registers (EBR1 and EBR2), even though the Vpp voltage may not yet have
reached the programming voltage range of 12.0 V ±0.6 V. Do not actually program or erase the
flash memory until Vpp has reached the programming voltage range.
The programming voltage range for programming and erasing flash memory is 12.0 V ±0.6 V
(11.4 V to 12.6 V). Programming and erasing cannot be performed correctly outside this range.
When not programming or erasing the flash memory, ensure that the Vpp voltage does not exceed
the Vcc voltage. This will prevent unintentional programming and erasing.
(12) After the Vpp enable bit (VppE) is cleared, the flash memory read setup time (tFRS)* must
elapse before the flash memory is read.
When switching from boot mode or user program mode to normal mode (Vpp ≠12 V, MD? ≠12
V), this setup time is required as the period from VppE bit clearance until the flash memory is
read.
When switching from boot mode to another mode, a mode programming setup time (tMDS) is
required with respect to the ~RES release timing.
Note: * The flash memory read setup time stipulates the interval before flash memory is read
after the VppE bit is cleared (figure 18-30). Also, when using an external clock
(EXTAL input), after powering on and when returning from standby mode, the flash
memory read setup time must elapse before the flash memory is read.
631
18.11 Notes on Ordering Masked ROM Version Chip
When ordering the H8/3048 Series chips with a masked ROM, note the following.
• When ordering through an EPROM, use a 128-kbyte one.
• Fill all the unused addresses with H'FF as shown in figure 18-33 to make the ROM data size
128 kbytes for all H8/3048 Series chips, which incorporate different sizes of ROM. This
applies to ordering through an EPROM and through electrical data transfer.
Figure 18-33 Masked ROM Addresses and Data
632
HD6433048
(ROM: 128 kbytes)
Address:
H'00000–1FFFF
H'00000
Note: * Program H'FF to all addresses in these areas.
H'1FFFF
HD6433047
(ROM: 96 kbytes)
Address:
H'00000–17FFF
H'00000
Not used*
Not used*
Not used*
H'17FFF
H'18000
H'1FFFF
HD6433045
(ROM: 64 kbytes)
Address:
H'00000–0FFFF
H'00000
H'0FFFF
H'10000
H'1FFFF
HD6433044
(ROM: 32 kbytes)
Address:
H'00000–07FFF
H'00000
H'07FFF
H'08000
H'1FFFF
Section 19 Clock Pulse Generator
19.1 Overview
The H8/3048 Series has a built-in clock pulse generator (CPG) that generates the system clock (ø)
and other internal clock signals (ø/2 to ø/4096). After duty adjustment, a frequency divider divides
the clock frequency to generate the system clock (ø). The system clock is output at the ø pin*1 and
furnished as a master clock to prescalers that supply clock signals to the on-chip supporting
modules. Frequency division ratios of 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, and 1/8 can be selected for the frequency
divider by settings in a division control register (DIVCR). Power consumption in the chip is
reduced in almost direct proportion to the frequency division ratio*2.
Notes: 1. Usage of the ø pin differs depending on the chip operating mode and the PSTOP bit
setting in the module standby control register (MSTCR). For details, see section 20.7,
System Clock Output Disabling Function.
2. The division ratio of the frequency divider can be changed dynamically during
operation. The clock output at the ø pin also changes when the division ratio is
changed. The frequency output at the ø pin is shown below.
ø = EXTAL × n
where, EXTAL: Frequency of crystal resonator or external clock signal
n: Frequency division ratio (n = 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, or 1/8)
19.1.1 Block Diagram
Figure 19-1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generator.
Figure 19-1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator
XTAL
EXTAL
CPG
ø pin ø/2 to ø/4096
Oscillator Duty
adjustment
circuit Frequency
divider
Division
control
register
Prescalers
Data bus
ø
633
19.2 Oscillator Circuit
Clock pulses can be supplied by connecting a crystal resonator, or by input of an external clock
signal.
19.2.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator
Circuit Configuration: A crystal resonator can be connected as in the example in figure 19-2.
The damping resistance Rd should be selected according to table 19-1. An AT-cut parallel-
resonance crystal should be used.
Figure 19-2 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example)
Table 19-1 Damping Resistance Value
Damping Resistance Frequency f (MHz)
Value 2 2 <f ≤44 <f ≤88 <f ≤10 10 <f ≤13 13 <f ≤16 16 <f ≤18
Rd For products 1 k 500 200 0000
(Ω) listed below*
HD64F3048 1 k 1 k 500 200 100 0 —
Note: A crystal resonator between 2 MHz and 18 MHz (between 2 MHz and 16 MHz for the flash
memory version) can be used. If the chip is to be operated at less than 2 MHz, the on-chip
frequency divider should be used. (A crystal resonator of less than 2 MHz cannot be used.)
*HD6473048, HD6433048, HD6433047, HD6433045, HD6433044
Crystal Resonator: Figure 19-3 shows an equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. The crystal
resonator should have the characteristics listed in table 19-2.
EXTAL
XTAL
C
L1
C
L2 C = C = 10 pF to 22 pF
L1 L2
Rd
634
Figure 19-3 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit
Table 19-2 Crystal Resonator Parameters
Frequency (MHz) 2 4 8 10 12 16 18
Rs max (Ω) 500 120 80 70 60 50 40
Co (pF) 7 pF max
Use a crystal resonator with a frequency equal to the system clock frequency (ø).
Notes on Board Design: When a crystal resonator is connected, the following points should be
noted:
Other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator circuit to prevent induction from
interfering with correct oscillation. See figure 19-4.
When the board is designed, the crystal resonator and its load capacitors should be placed as close
as possible to the XTAL and EXTAL pins.
Figure 19-4 Example of Incorrect Board Design
XTAL
EXTAL
C
L2
C
L1
H8/3048 Series
Avoid Signal A Signal B
635
XTAL
LRs
C
L
C
0
EXTAL
AT-cut parallel-resonance type
19.2.2 External Clock Input
Circuit Configuration: An external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure
19-5. If the XTAL pin is left open, the stray capacitance should not exceed 10 pF. If the stray
capacitance at the XTAL pin exceeds 10 pF in configuration a, use configuration b instead and
hold the clock high in standby mode.
Figure 19-5 External Clock Input (Examples)
EXTAL
XTAL
EXTAL
XTAL 74HC04
External clock input
Open
External clock input
a. XTAL pin left open
b. Complementary clock input at XTAL pin
636
External Clock: The external clock frequency should be equal to the system clock frequency
(ø) when not divided by the on-chip frequency divider. Table 19-3, figures 19-6 and 19-7
indicate the clock timing.
When the appropriate external clock is input via the EXTAL pin, its waveform is corrected by
the on-chip oscillator and duty adjustment circuit. The resulting stable clock is output to
external devices after the external clock settling time (tDEXT) has passed after the clock input.
The system must remain reset with the reset signal low during tDEXT, while the clock output is
unstable.
Table 19-3 Clock Timing
VCC =
2.7 V to 5.5 V VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%
Item Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit Test Conditions
External clock input tEXL 40 — 20 — ns Figure 19-6
low pulse width
External clock input tEXH 40 — 20 — ns
high pulse width
External clock rise tEXr —10 — 5 ns
time
External clock fall tEXf —10 — 5 ns
time
Clock low pulse tCL 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 tcyc ø ≥5 MHz Figure
width 80 — 80 — ns ø < 5 MHz 21-7
Clock high pulse tCH 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 tcyc ø ≥5 MHz
width 80 — 80 — ns ø < 5 MHz
External clock tDEXT*500 — 500 — µs Figure 19-7
output settling
delay time
Note: *tDEXT includes 10 tcyc of RES (tRESW).
637
Figure 19-6 External Clock Input Timing
Figure 19-7 External Clock Output Settling Delay Timing
638
EXTAL
tEXr tEXf
VCC × 0.7
0.3 V
tEXH tEXL
VCC × 0.5
VCC
STBY
EXTAL
ø (internal or
external)
RES
tDEXT*
Note: * tDEXT includes 10 tcyc of RES (tRESW).
2.7 V
VIH
19.3 Duty Adjustment Circuit
When the oscillator frequency is 5 MHz or higher, the duty adjustment circuit adjusts the duty
cycle of the clock signal from the oscillator to generate the signal that becomes the system clock.
19.4 Prescalers
The prescalers divide the system clock (ø) to generate internal clocks (ø/2 to ø/4096).
19.5 Frequency Divider
The frequency divider divides the duty-adjusted clock signal to generate the system clock (ø). The
frequency division ratio can be changed dynamically by modifying the value in DIVCR, as
described below. Power consumption in the chip is reduced in almost direct proportion to the
frequency division ratio. The system clock generated by the frequency divider can be output at the
ø pin.
19.5.1 Register Configuration
Table 19-4 summarizes the frequency division register.
Table 19-4 Frequency Division Register
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FF5D Division control register DIVCR R/W H'FC
Note: *The lower 16 bits of the address are shown.
19.5.2 Division Control Register (DIVCR)
DIVCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the division ratio of the frequency
divider.
DIVCR is initialized to H'FC by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
DIV0
0
R/W
2
—
1
—
1
DIV1
0
R/W
Reserved bits Divide bits 1 and 0
These bits select the
frequency division ratio
639
Bits 7 to 2—Reserved: Read-only bits, always read as 1.
Bits 1 and 0—Divide (DIV1 and DIV0): These bits select the frequency division ratio, as follows.
Bit 1 Bit 0
DIV1 DIV0 Frequency Division Ratio
0 0 1/1 (Initial value)
0 1 1/2
1 0 1/4
1 1 1/8
19.5.3 Usage Notes
The DIVCR setting changes the ø frequency, so note the following points.
• Select a frequency division ratio that stays within the assured operation range specified for the
clock cycle time tcyc in the AC electrical characteristics. Note that øMIN = 1 MHz. Avoid
settings that give system clock frequencies less than 1 MHz.
• All on-chip module operations are based on ø. Note that the timing of timer operations, serial
communication, and other time-dependent processing differs before and after any change in
the division ratio. The waiting time for exit from software standby mode also changes when
the division ratio is changed. For details, see section 20.4.3, Selection of Waiting Time for
Exit from Software Standby Mode.
640
Section 20 Power-Down State
20.1 Overview
The H8/3048 Series has a power-down state that greatly reduces power consumption by halting
the CPU, and a module standby function that reduces power consumption by selectively halting
on-chip modules.
The power-down state includes the following three modes:
• Sleep mode
• Software standby mode
• Hardware standby mode
The module standby function can halt on-chip supporting modules independently of the power-
down state. The modules that can be halted are the ITU, SCI0, SCI1, DMAC, refresh controller,
and A/D converter.
Table 20-1 indicates the methods of entering and exiting the power-down modes and module
standby mode, and gives the status of the CPU and on-chip supporting modules in each mode.
641
642
Table 20-1 Power-Down State and Module Standby Function
State
Entering CPU Refresh Other ø clock I/O Exiting
Mode Conditions Clock CPU Registers DMAC Controller ITU SCI0 SCI1 A/D Modules RAM output Ports Conditions
Sleep SLEEP instruc- Active Halted Held Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Held ø output Held • Interrupt
mode tion executed • RES
while SSBY = 0 • STBY
in SYSCR
Software SLEEP instruc- Halted Halted Held Halted Halted Halted Halted Halted Halted Halted Held High Held • NMI
standby tion executed and and and and and and and output • IRQ0to IRQ2
mode while SSBY = 1 reset held*1reset reset reset reset reset • RES
in SYSCR • STBY
Hardware Low input at Halted Halted Undeter- Halted Halted Halted Halted Halted Halted Halted Held*3High High • STBY
standby STBY pin mined and and and and and and and impedance impedance • RES
mode reset reset reset reset reset reset reset
Module Corresponding Active Active — Halted*2Halted*2Halted*2Halted*2Halted*2Halted*2Active — High • STBY
standby bit set to 1 in and and and and and and impedance*2•RES
MSTCR reset held*1reset reset reset reset • Clear MSTCR
bit to 0*4
Notes: 1. RTCNT and bits 7 and 6 of RTMCSR are initialized. Other bits and registers hold their previous states.
2. State in which the corresponding MSTCR bit was set to 1. For details see section 20.2.2, Module Standby Control Register (MSTCR).
3. The RAME bit must be cleared to 0 in SYSCR before the transition from the program execution state to hardware standby mode.
4. When a MSTCR bit is set to 1, the registers of the corresponding on-chip supporting module are initialized. To restart the module, first clear the MSTCR bit to 0,
then set up the module registers again.
Legend
SYSCR: System control register
SSBY: Software standby bit
MSTCR: Module standby control register
20.2 Register Configuration
The H8/3048 Series has a system control register (SYSCR) that controls the power-down state,
and a module standby control register (MSTCR) that controls the module standby function. Table
20-2 summarizes these registers.
Table 20-2 Control Register
Address*Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value
H'FFF2 System control register SYSCR R/W H'0B
H'FF5E Module standby control register MSTCR R/W H'40
Note: *Lower 16 bits of the address.
20.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR)
SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register. Bit 7 (SSBY) and bits 6 to 4 (STS2 to STS0) control
the power-down state. For information on the other SYSCR bits, see section 3.3, System Control
Register (SYSCR).
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
SSBY
0
R/W
6
STS2
0
R/W
5
STS1
0
R/W
4
STS0
0
R/W
3
UE
1
R/W
0
RAME
1
R/W
2
NMIEG
0
R/W
1
—
1
—
Software standby
Enables transition to
software standby mode
RAM enable
Standby timer select 2 to 0
These bits select the
waiting time at exit from
software standby mode
User bit enable
NMI edge select
Reserved bit
643
Bit 7—Software Standby (SSBY): Enables transition to software standby mode. When software
standby mode is exited by an external interrupt, this bit remains set to 1 after the return to normal
operation. To clear this bit, write 0.
Bit 7
SSBY Description
0 SLEEP instruction causes transition to sleep mode (Initial value)
1 SLEEP instruction causes transition to software standby mode
Bits 6 to 4—Standby Timer Select (STS2 to STS0): These bits select the length of time the CPU
and on-chip supporting modules wait for the clock to settle when software standby mode is exited
by an external interrupt. If the clock is generated by a crystal resonator, set these bits according to
the clock frequency so that the waiting time will be at least 7 ms. See table 20-3. If an external
clock is used, any setting is permitted.
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
STS2 STS1 STS0 Description
000Waiting time = 8,192 states (Initial value)
1 Waiting time = 16,384 states
1 0 Waiting time = 32,768 states
1 Waiting time = 65,536 states
100Waiting time = 131,072 states
101Waiting time = 1,024 states
1 1 — Illegal setting
644
20.2.2 Module Standby Control Register (MSTCR)
MSTCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls output of the system clock (ø). It also
controls the module standby function, which places individual on-chip supporting modules in the
standby state. Module standby can be designated for the ITU, SCI0, SCI1, DMAC, refresh
controller, and A/D converter modules.
MSTCR is initialized to H'40 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in
software standby mode.
Bit 7—ø Clock Stop (PSTOP): Enables or disables output of the system clock (ø).
Bit 1
PSTOP Description
0 System clock output is enabled (Initial value)
1 System clock output is disabled
Bit 6—Reserved: Read-only bit, always read as 1.
Bit 5—Module Standby 5 (MSTOP5): Selects whether to place the ITU in standby.
Bit 5
MSTOP5 Description
0 ITU operates normally (Initial value)
1 ITU is in standby state
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
PSTOP
0
R/W
6
—
1
—
5
MSTOP5
0
R/W
4
MSTOP4
0
R/W
3
MSTOP3
0
R/W
0
MSTOP0
0
R/W
2
MSTOP2
0
R/W
1
MSTOP1
0
R/W
ø clock stop
Enables or disables
output of the system clock
Module standby 5 to 0
These bits select modules
to be placed in standby
Reserved bit
645
Bit 4—Module Standby 4 (MSTOP4): Selects whether to place SCI0 in standby.
Bit 4
MSTOP4 Description
0 SCI0 operates normally (Initial value)
1 SCI0 is in standby state
Bit 3—Module Standby 3 (MSTOP3): Selects whether to place SCI1 in standby.
Bit 3
MSTOP3 Description
0 SCI1 operates normally (Initial value)
1 SCI1 is in standby state
Bit 2—Module Standby 2 (MSTOP2): Selects whether to place the DMAC in standby.
Bit 2
MSTOP2 Description
0 DMAC operates normally (Initial value)
1 DMAC is in standby state
Bit 1—Module Standby 1 (MSTOP1): Selects whether to place the refresh controller in standby.
Bit 1
MSTOP1 Description
0 Refresh controller operates normally (Initial value)
1 Refresh controller is in standby state
Bit 0—Module Standby 0 (MSTOP0): Selects whether to place the A/D converter in standby.
Bit 0
MSTOP0 Description
0 A/D converter operates normally (Initial value)
1 A/D converter is in standby state
646
20.3 Sleep Mode
20.3.1 Transition to Sleep Mode
When the SSBY bit is cleared to 0 in SYSCR, execution of the SLEEP instruction causes a
transition from the program execution state to sleep mode. Immediately after executing the SLEEP
instruction the CPU halts, but the contents of its internal registers are retained. The DMA
controller (DMAC), refresh controller, and on-chip supporting modules do not halt in sleep mode.
Modules which have been placed in standby by the module standby function, however, remain
halted.
20.3.2 Exit from Sleep Mode
Sleep mode is exited by an interrupt, or by input at the RES or STBY pin.
Exit by Interrupt: An interrupt terminates sleep mode and causes a transition to the interrupt
exception handling state. Sleep mode is not exited by an interrupt source in an on-chip supporting
module if the interrupt is disabled in the on-chip supporting module. Sleep mode is not exited by
an interrupt other than NMI if the interrupt is masked by the I and UI bits in CCR and IPR.
Exit by RES Input: Low input at the RES pin exits from sleep mode to the reset state.
Exit by STBY Input: Low input at the STBY pin exits from sleep mode to hardware standby
mode.
647
20.4 Software Standby Mode
20.4.1 Transition to Software Standby Mode
To enter software standby mode, execute the SLEEP instruction while the SSBY bit is set to 1 in
SYSCR.
In software standby mode, current dissipation is reduced to an extremely low level because the
CPU, clock, and on-chip supporting modules all halt. The DMAC and on-chip supporting modules
are reset. As long as the specified voltage is supplied, however, CPU register contents and on-chip
RAM data are retained. The settings of the I/O ports and refresh controller* are also held.
Note: * RTCNT and bits 7 and 6 of RTMCSR are initialized. Other bits and registers hold their
previous states.
20.4.2 Exit from Software Standby Mode
Software standby mode can be exited by input of an external interrupt at the NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, or
IRQ2pin, or by input at the RES or STBY pin.
Exit by Interrupt: When an NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, or IRQ2interrupt request signal is received, the
clock oscillator begins operating. After the oscillator settling time selected by bits STS2 to STS0
in SYSCR, stable clock signals are supplied to the entire chip, software standby mode ends, and
interrupt exception handling begins. Software standby mode is not exited if the interrupt enable
bits of interrupts IRQ0, IRQ1, and IRQ2are cleared to 0, or if these interrupts are masked in the
CPU.
Exit by RES Input: When the RES input goes low, the clock oscillator starts and clock pulses are
supplied immediately to the entire chip. The RES signal must be held low long enough for the
clock oscillator to stabilize. When RES goes high, the CPU starts reset exception handling.
Exit by STBY Input: Low input at the STBY pin causes a transition to hardware standby mode.
648
20.4.3 Selection of Waiting Time for Exit from Software Standby Mode
Bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR and bits DIV1 and DIV0 in DIVCR should be set as follows.
Crystal Resonator: Set STS2 to STS0, DIV1, and DIV0 so that the waiting time (for the clock to
stabilize) is at least 7 ms. Table 20-3 indicates the waiting times that are selected by STS2 to
STS0, DIV1, and DIV0 settings at various system clock frequencies.
External Clock: Any values may be set.
Table 20-3 Clock Frequency and Waiting Time for Clock to Settle
DIV1 DIV0 STS2 STS1 STS0 Waiting Time 18 MHz 16 MHz 12 MHz 10 MHz 8 MHz 6 MHz 4 MHz 2 MHz 1 MHz Unit
0 0 0 0 0 8192 states 0.46 0.51 0.65 0.8 1.0 1.3 2.0 4.1 8.2 ms
0 0 1 16384 states 0.91 1.0 1.3 1.6 2.0 2.7 4.1 8.2 16.4
0 1 0 32768 states 1.8 2.0 2.7 3.3 4.1 5.5 8.2 16.4 32.8
0 1 1 65536 states 3.6 4.1 5.5 6.6 8.2 10.9 16.4 32.8 65.5
1 0 0 131072 states 7.3 8.2 10.9 13.1 16.4 21.8 32.8 65.5 131.1
1 0 1 1024 states 0.057 0.064 0.085 0.10 0.13 0.17 0.26 0.51 1.0
1 1 — Illegal setting
0 1 0 0 0 8192 states 0.91 1.02 1.4 1.6 2.0 2.7 4.0 8.2 16.4 ms
0 0 1 16384 states 1.8 2.0 2.7 3.3 4.1 5.5 8.2 16.4 32.8
0 1 0 32768 states 3.6 4.1 5.5 6.6 8.2 10.9 16.4 32.8 65.5
0 1 1 65536 states 7.3 8.2 10.9 13.1 16.4 21.8 32.8 65.5 131.1
1 0 0 131072 states 14.6 16.4 21.8 26.2 32.8 43.7 65.5 131.1 262.1
1 0 1 1024 states 0.11 0.13 0.17 0.20 0.26 0.34 0.51 1.0 2.0
1 1 — Illegal setting
1 0 0 0 0 8192 states 1.8 2.0 2.7 3.3 4.1 5.5 8.2 16.4 32.8 ms
0 0 1 16384 states 3.6 4.1 5.5 6.6 8.2 10.9 16.4 32.8 65.5
0 1 0 32768 states 7.3 8.2 10.9 13.1 16.4 21.8 32.8 65.5 131.1
0 1 1 65536 states 14.6 16.4 21.8 26.2 32.8 43.7 65.5 131.1 262.1
1 0 0 131072 states 29.1 32.8 43.7 52.4 65.5 87.4 131.1 262.1 524.3
1 0 1 1024 states 0.23 0.26 0.34 0.41 0.51 0.68 1.02 2.0 4.1
1 1 — Illegal setting
1 1 0 0 0 8192 states 3.6 4.1 5.5 6.6 8.2 10.9 16.4 32.8 65.5 ms
0 0 1 16384 states 7.3 8.2 10.9 13.1 16.4 21.8 32.8 65.5 131.1
0 1 0 32768 states 14.6 16.4 21.8 26.2 32.8 43.7 65.5 131.1 262.1
0 1 1 65536 states 29.1 32.8 43.7 52.4 65.5 87.4 131.1 262.1 524.3
1 0 0 131072 states 58.3 65.5 87.4 104.9 131.1 174.8 262.1 524.3 1048.6
1 0 1 1024 states 0.46 0.51 0.68 0.82 1.0 1.4 2.0 4.1 8.2
1 1 — Illegal setting
: Recommended setting
649
20.4.4 Sample Application of Software Standby Mode
Figure 20-1 shows an example in which software standby mode is entered at the fall of NMI and
exited at the rise of NMI.
With the NMI edge select bit (NMIEG) cleared to 0 in SYSCR (selecting the falling edge), an
NMI interrupt occurs. Next the NMIEG bit is set to 1 (selecting the rising edge) and the SSBY bit
is set to 1; then the SLEEP instruction is executed to enter software standby mode.
Software standby mode is exited at the next rising edge of the NMI signal.
Figure 20-1 NMI Timing for Software Standby Mode (Example)
20.4.5 Note
The I/O ports retain their existing states in software standby mode. If a port is in the high output
state, its output current is not reduced.
ø
NMI
NMIEG
SSBY
NMI interrupt
handler
NMIEG = 1
SSBY = 1
Software standby
mode (power-
down state)
Oscillator
settling time
(tosc2)
SLEEP
instruction
NMI exception
handling
Clock
oscillator
650
20.5 Hardware Standby Mode
20.5.1 Transition to Hardware Standby Mode
Regardless of its current state, the chip enters hardware standby mode whenever the STBY pin
goes low. Hardware standby mode reduces power consumption drastically by halting all functions
of the CPU, DMAC, refresh controller, and on-chip supporting modules. All modules are reset
except the on-chip RAM. As long as the specified voltage is supplied, on-chip RAM data is
retained. I/O ports are placed in the high-impedance state.
Clear the RAME bit to 0 in SYSCR before STBY goes low to retain on-chip RAM data.
The inputs at the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) should not be changed during hardware standby
mode.
20.5.2 Exit from Hardware Standby Mode
Hardware standby mode is exited by inputs at the STBY and RES pins. While RES is low, when
STBY goes high, the clock oscillator starts running. RES should be held low long enough for the
clock oscillator to settle. When RES goes high, reset exception handling begins, followed by a
transition to the program execution state.
20.5.3 Timing for Hardware Standby Mode
Figure 20-2 shows the timing relationships for hardware standby mode. To enter hardware standby
mode, first drive RES low, then drive STBY low. To exit hardware standby mode, first drive
STBY high, wait for the clock to settle, then bring RES from low to high.
Figure 20-2 Hardware Standby Mode Timing
RES
STBY
Clock
oscillator
Oscillator
settling time
Reset
exception
handling
651
20.6 Module Standby Function
20.6.1 Module Standby Timing
The module standby function can halt several of the on-chip supporting modules (the ITU, SCI0,
SCI1, DMAC, refresh controller, and A/D converter) independently of the power-down state. This
standby function is controlled by bits MSTOP5 to MSTOP0 in MSTCR. When one of these bits is
set to 1, the corresponding on-chip supporting module is placed in standby and halts at the
beginning of the next bus cycle after the MSTCR write cycle.
20.6.2 Read/Write in Module Standby
When an on-chip supporting module is in module standby, read/write access to its registers is
disabled. Read access always results in H'FF data. Write access is ignored.
20.6.3 Usage Notes
When using the module standby function, note the following points.
DMAC and Refresh Controller: When setting bit MSTOP2 or MSTOP1 to 1 to place the DMAC
or refresh controller in module standby, make sure that the DMAC or refresh controller is not
currently requesting the bus right. If bit MSTOP2 or MSTOP1 is set to 1 when a bus request is
present, operation of the bus arbiter becomes ambiguous and a malfunction may occur.
Internal Peripheral Module Interrupt: When MSTCR is set to “1”, prevent module interrupt in
advance. When an on-chip supporting module is placed in standby by the module standby
function, its registers are initialized.
Pin States: Pins used by an on-chip supporting module lose their module functions when the
module is placed in module standby. What happens after that depends on the particular pin. For
details, see section 9, I/O Ports. Pins that change from the input to the output state require special
care. For example, if SCI1 is placed in module standby, the receive data pin loses its receive data
function and becomes a generic I/O pin. If its data direction bit is set to 1, the pin becomes a data
output pin, and its output may collide with external serial data. Data collisions should be
prevented by clearing the data direction bit to 0 or taking other appropriate action.
Register Resetting: When an on-chip supporting module is halted by the module standby
function, all its registers are initialized. To restart the module, after its MSTOP bit is cleared to 0,
its registers must be set up again. It is not possible to write to the registers while the MSTOP bit is
set to 1.
MSTCR Access from DMAC Disabled: To prevent malfunctions, MSTCR can only be accessed
from the CPU. It can be read by the DMAC, but it cannot be written by the DMAC.
652
20.7 System Clock Output Disabling Function
Output of the system clock (ø) can be controlled by the PSTOP bit in MSTCR. When the PSTOP
bit is set to 1, output of the system clock halts and the ø pin is placed in the high-impedance state.
Figure 20-3 shows the timing of the stopping and starting of system clock output. When the
PSTOP bit is cleared to 0, output of the system clock is enabled. Table 20-4 indicates the state of
the ø pin in various operating states.
Figure 20-3 Starting and Stopping of System Clock Output
Table 20-4 ø Pin State in Various Operating States
Operating State PSTOP = 0 PSTOP = 1
Hardware standby High impedance High impedance
Software standby Always high High impedance
Sleep mode System clock output High impedance
Normal operation System clock output High impedance
T1 T2
(PSTOP = 1)
T3 T1 T2
(PSTOP = 0)
MSTCR write cycle MSTCR write cycle
High impedance
ø pin
T3
653
Section 21 Electrical Characteristics
21.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 21-1 lists the absolute maximum ratings.
Table 21-1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item Symbol Value Unit
Power supply voltage VCC –0.3 to +7.0 V
Programming voltage HD6473048 VPP –0.3 to +13.5 V
HD64F3048 –0.3 to +13.0 V
Input voltage Vin –0.3 to VCC + 0.3 V
(except for MD2and
port 7
Input voltage (MD2) HD6473048, Vin –0.3 to VCC + 0.3 V
HD6433048,
HD6433047,
HD6433045,
HD6433044
HD64F3048 –0.3 to +13.0 V
Input voltage (port 7) Vin –0.3 to AVCC + 0.3 V
Reference voltage VREF –0.3 to AVCC + 0.3 V
Analog power supply voltage AVCC –0.3 to +7.0 V
Analog input voltage VAN –0.3 to AVCC + 0.3 V
Operating temperature Topr Regular specifications: –20 to +75 °C
Wide-range specifications: –40 to +85 °C
Storage temperature Tstg –55 to +125 °C
Caution: Permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded.
Particularly, insure that peak overshoot at the VPP and MD2 pins does not exceed 13 V.
655
21.2 Electrical Characteristics of Masked ROM and PROM Versions
21.2.1 DC Characteristics
Table 21-2 lists the DC characteristics. Table 21-3 lists the permissible output currents.
Table 21-2 DC Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
Port A, VT–1.0 — — V
P80to P82,V
T
+——V
CC ×0.7 V
PB0to PB3VT+– VT–0.4 — — V
Input high RES, STBY, VIH VCC – 0.7 — VCC + 0.3 V
voltage NMI, MD2to
MD0
EXTAL VCC ×0.7 — VCC + 0.3 V
Port 7 2.0 — AVCC + 0.3V
Ports 1, 2, 3, 2.0 — VCC + 0.3 V
4, 5, 6, 9,
P83, P84,
PB4to PB7
Input low RES, STBY, VIL –0.3 — 0.5 V
voltage MD2to MD0
NMI, EXTAL, –0.3 — 0.8 V
ports 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 9,
P83, P84,
PB4to PB7
All output pins VOH VCC – 0.5 — — V IOH = –200 µA
(except RESO)3.5 — — V IOH = –1 mA
Output low All output pins VOL — — 0.4 V IOL = 1.6 mA
voltage (except RESO)
Ports 1, 2, — — 1.0 V IOL = 10 mA
5, and B
RESO — — 0.4 V IOL = 2.6 mA
Note: *If the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins
open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS.
Output high
voltage
Schmitt
trigger input
voltages
656
Table 21-2 DC Characteristics (cont)
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC ,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V*1, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
Input leakage STBY, NMI, |IIN| — — 1.0 µA VIN = 0.5 to
current RES,V
CC – 0.5 V
MD2to MD0
Port 7 — — 1.0 µA VIN = 0.5 to
AVCC – 0.5 V
Ports 1, 2, |ITS1| — — 1.0 µA VIN = 0.5 to
3, 4, 5, 6, VCC – 0.5 V
8 to B
RESO — — 10.0 µA
Input pull-up Ports 2, –IP50 — 300 µA VIN = 0 V
current 4, and 5
NMI CIN ——50pF
All input pins — — 15 pF
except NMI
ICC — 50 65 mA f = 16 MHz
— 55 75 mA f = 18 MHz
Sleep mode — 35 50 mA f = 16 MHz
— 40 55 mA f = 18 MHz
— 20 25 mA f = 16 MHz
— 25 27 mA f = 18 MHz
— 0.01 5.0 µA Ta≤50°C
— — 20.0 µA 50°C < Ta
Notes: 1. If the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins
open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS.
2. Current dissipation values are for VIHmin = VCC – 0.5 V and VILmax = 0.5 V with all output
pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up transistors in the off state.
3. The values are for VRAM ≤VCC < 4.5 V, VIHmin = VCC ×0.9, and VILmax = 0.3 V.
4. Module standby current values apply in sleep mode with all modules halted.
Current Normal
dissipation*2operation
Module
standby mode*4
Input
capacitance
Three-state
leakage
current
(off state)
VIN = 0 V
f = 1 MHz
Ta= 25°C
Standby
mode*3
657
Table 21-2 DC Characteristics (cont)
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
Analog power During A/D AICC — 1.2 2.0 mA
supply current conversion
During A/D — 1.2 2.0 mA
and D/A
conversion
Idle — 0.01 5.0 µA DASTE = 0
Reference During A/D AICC — 0.3 0.6 mA VREF = 5.0 V
current conversion
During A/D — 1.3 3.0 mA
and D/A
conversion
Idle — 0.01 5.0 µA DASTE = 0
RAM standby voltage VRAM 2.0 — — V
Note: *If the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins
open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS.
658
Table 21-2 DC Characteristics (cont)
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
VT–VCC ×0.2 — — V
VT+——V
CC ×0.7 V
VT+ – VT–VCC ×0.07 — — V
Input high RES, STBY, VIH VCC ×0.9 — VCC + 0.3 V
voltage NMI, MD2to
MD0
EXTAL VCC ×0.7 — VCC + 0.3 V
Port 7 VCC ×0.7 — AVCC + 0.3 V
Ports 1, 2, 3,4, VCC ×0.7 — VCC + 0.3 V
5, 6, 9, P83,
P84, PB4to PB7
Input low RES, STBY, VIL –0.3 — VCC ×0.1 V
voltage MD2to MD0–0.3 — VCC ×0.2 V VCC < 4.0 V
0.8 V VCC =
4.0 V to 5.5 V
All output pins VOH VCC – 0.5 — — V IOH = –200 µA
(except RESO)VCC – 1.0 — — V IOH = –1 mA
Output low All output pins VOL — — 0.4 V IOL = 1.6 mA
voltage (except RESO)
Ports 1, 2, — — 1.0 V VCC ≤4 V
5, and B IOL = 5 mA,
4 V < VCC ≤5.5 V
IOL = 10 mA
RESO — — 0.4 V IOL = 1.6 mA
Input leakage STBY, NMI, |IIN| — — 1.0 µA VIN = 0.5 to
current RES, VCC
– 0.5 V
MD2to MD0
Port 7 — — 1.0 µA VIN = 0.5 to
AVCC – 0.5 V
Note: *If the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF
pins open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS.
Schmitt Port A,
trigger input P80to P82,
voltages PB0to PB3
NMI, EXTAL,
ports 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 9,
P83, P84
PB4to PB7
Output high
voltage
659
Table 21-2 DC Characteristics (cont)
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V*1, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
Ports 1, 2, |ITS1| — — 1.0 µA VIN = 0.5 to
3, 4, 5, 6, VCC – 0.5 V
8 to B
RESO — — 10.0 µA
Input pull-up Ports 2, –IP10 — 300 µA VCC = 2.7 V to
current 4, and 5 5.5 V, VIN = 0 V
NMI CIN — — 50 pF
All input pins — — 15
except NMI
Current Normal ICC*4— 12 35 mA f = 8 MHz
dissipation*2operation (3.0 V) (5.5 V)
— 20 55 mA f = 13 MHz
(3.3 V) (5.5 V) (VCC = 3.15 V to
5.5 V)
Sleep mode — 8 25 mA f = 8 MHz
(3.0 V) (5.5 V)
— 12 40 mA f = 13 MHz
(3.3 V) (5.5 V) (VCC = 3.15 V to
5.5 V)
Module — 5 14 mA f = 8 MHz
standby mode*5(3.0 V) (5.5 V)
— 7 20 mA 13 MHz
(3.3 V) (5.5 V) (VCC = 3.15 V to
5.5 V)
Standby — 0.01 5.0 µA Ta≤50°C
mode*3— — 20.0 µA 50°C < Ta
Notes: 1. If the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins
open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS.
2. Current dissipation values are for VIHmin = VCC – 0.5 V and VILmax = 0.5 V with all output
pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up transistors in the off state.
3. The values are for VRAM ≤VCC < 2.7 V, VIHmin = VCC ×0.9, and VILmax = 0.3 V.
4. ICC depends on VCC and f as follows:
ICCmax = 3.0 (mA) + 0.75 (mA/MHz·V) ×VCC ×f [normal mode]
ICCmax = 3.0 (mA) + 0.55 (mA/MHz·V) ×VCC ×f [sleep mode]
ICCmax = 3.0 (mA) + 0.25 (mA/MHz·V) ×VCC ×f [module standby mode]
5. Module standby current values apply in sleep mode with all modules halted.
Three-state
leakage
current
(off state)
Input
capacitance VIN = 0 V
f = 1 MHz
Ta= 25°C
660
Table 21-2 DC Characteristics (cont)
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
AICC — 0.4 1.0 mA AVCC = 3.0 V
— 1.2 — mA AVCC = 5.0 V
— 0.4 1.0 mA AVCC = 3.0 V
— 1.2 — mA AVCC = 5.0 V
Idle — 0.01 5.0 µA DASTE = 0
AICC — 0.2 0.4 mA VREF = 3.0 V
— 0.3 — mA VREF = 5.0 V
— 0.8 2.0 mA VREF = 3.0 V
— 1.3 — mA VREF = 5.0 V
Idle — 0.01 5.0 µA DASTE = 0
RAM standby voltage VRAM 2.0 — — V
Note: *If the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF
pins open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS.
During A/D
conversion
During A/D
and D/A
conversion
Analog
power
supply
current
Reference During A/D
current conversion
During A/D
and D/A
conversion
661
Table 21-3 Permissible Output Currents
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit
Ports 1, 2, 5, and B IOL ——10mA
Other output pins — — 2.0 mA
Permissible output Total of 28 pins in ΣIOL ——80mA
low current (total) ports 1, 2, 5, and B
Total of all output pins, — — 120 mA
including the above
Permissible output All output pins IOH — — 2.0 mA
high current (per pin)
Permissible output Total of all output pins ΣIOH ——40mA
high current (total)
Notes: 1. To protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 21-3.
2. When driving a darlington pair or LED, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the
output line, as shown in figures 21-1 and 21-2.
Permissible output
low current (per pin)
662
Figure 21-1 Darlington Pair Drive Circuit (Example)
Figure 21-2 LED Drive Circuit (Example)
H8/3048
Series
Ports 1, 2, 5,
and B
LED
600Ω
H8/3048
Series
Port 2 kΩ
Darlington pair
663
21.2.2 AC Characteristics
Bus timing parameters are listed in table 21-4. Refresh controller bus timing parameters are listed
in table 21-5. Control signal timing parameters are listed in table 21-6. Timing parameters of the
on-chip supporting modules are listed in table 21-7.
Table 21-4 Bus Timing (1)
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition B: VCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.15 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 13 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 18 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition B Condition C
8 MHz 13 MHz 16 MHz 18 MHz
Item Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Unit
Clock cycle time tCYC 125 1000 76.9 1000 62.5 1000 55.5 1000 ns
Clock pulse low width tCL 40 — 20 — 20 — 17 —
Clock pulse high width tCH 40 — 20 — 20 — 17 —
Clock rise time tCR —20—15—10—10
Clock fall time tCF —20—15—10—10
Address delay time tAD —60—50—30—25
Address hold time tAH 25 — 20 — 10 — 10 —
Address strobe delay tASD —60—50—30—25
time
Write strobe delay time tWSD —60—50—30—25
Strobe delay time tSD —60—50—30—25
Write data strobe pulse tWSW1*85 — 40 — 35 — 32 —
width 1
Write data strobe pulse tWSW2*150—90—65—62—
width 2
Address setup time 1 tAS1 20 — 15 — 10 — 10 —
Address setup time 2 tAS2 80 — 45 — 40 — 38 —
Read data setup time tRDS 50 — 30 — 20 — 15 —
Read data hold time tRDH 0—0—0—0—
Test
Conditions
Figure 21-7,
Figure 21-8
664
Table 21-4 Bus Timing (cont)
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition B: VCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.15 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 13 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 18 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition B Condition C
8 MHz 13 MHz 16 MHz 18 MHz
Item Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Unit
Write data delay time tWDD —75—75—60—55ns
Write data setup time 1 tWDS1 60 — 20 — 15 — 10 —
Write data setup time 2 tWDS2 5 — –10 — –5 — –10 —
Write data hold time tWDH 25 — 15 — 20 — 20 —
Read data access tACC1*—120—60—60—50
time 1
Read data access tACC2*— 240 — 140 — 120 — 105
time 2
Read data access tACC3*—70—30—30—20
time 3
Read data access tACC4*— 180 — 100 — 95 — 80
time 4
Precharge time tPCH*85 — 55 — 45 — 40 —
Wait setup time tWTS 40 — 40 — 25 — 25 — ns Figure 21-9
Wait hold time tWTH 10—10—5—5—
Bus request setup ime tBRQS 40 — 40 — 40 — 40 — ns Figure 21-21
Bus acknowledge tBACD1 —60—50—30—30
delay time 1
Bus acknowledge tBACD2 —60—50—30—30
delay time 2
Bus-floating time tBZD —
70
—
70
—
40 — 40
Note is on next page.
Test
Conditions
Figure 21-7,
Figure 21-8
665
Note: At 8 MHz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time.
tACC1 = 1.5 ×tCYC – 68 (ns) tWSW1 = 1.0 ×tCYC – 40 (ns)
tACC2 = 2.5 ×tCYC – 73 (ns) tWSW2 = 1.5 ×tCYC – 38 (ns)
tACC3 = 1.0 ×tCYC – 55 (ns) tPCH = 1.0 ×tCYC – 40 (ns)
tACC4 = 2.0 ×tCYC – 70 (ns)
At 13 MHz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time.
tACC1 = 1.5 ×tCYC – 56 (ns) tWSW1 = 1.0 ×tCYC – 37 (ns)
tACC2 = 2.5 ×tCYC – 53 (ns) tWSW2 = 1.5 ×tCYC – 26 (ns)
tACC3 = 1.0 ×tCYC – 47 (ns) tPCH = 1.0 ×tCYC – 32 (ns)
tACC4 = 2.0 ×tCYC – 54 (ns)
At 16 MHz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time.
tACC1 = 1.5 ×tCYC – 34 (ns) tWSW1 = 1.0 ×tCYC – 28 (ns)
tACC2 = 2.5 ×tCYC – 37 (ns) tWSW2 = 1.5 ×tCYC – 29 (ns)
tACC3 = 1.0 ×tCYC – 33 (ns) tPCH = 1.0 ×tCYC – 28 (ns)
tACC4 = 2.0 ×tCYC – 30 (ns)
At 18 MHz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time.
tACC1 = 1.5 ×tCYC – 34 (ns) tWSW1 = 1.0 ×tCYC – 24 (ns)
tACC2 = 2.5 ×tCYC – 34 (ns) tWSW2 = 1.5 ×tCYC – 22 (ns)
tACC3 = 1.0 ×tCYC – 36 (ns) tPCH = 1.0 ×tCYC – 21 (ns)
tACC4 = 2.0 ×tCYC – 31 (ns)
666
Table 21-5 Refresh Controller Bus Timing
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition B: VCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.15 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 13 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 18 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition B Condition C
8 MHz 13 MHz 16 MHz 18 MHz
Item Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Unit
RAS delay time 1 tRAD1 —60—50—30—30ns
RAS delay time 2 tRAD2 —60—50—30—30
RAS delay time 3 tRAD3 —60—50—30—30
Row address hold time*tRAH 25 — 20 — 15 — 15 —
RAS precharge time*tRP 85 — 55 — 45 — 40 —
CAS to RAS precharge tCRP 85 — 55 — 45 — 40 —
time*
CAS pulse width tCAS 100—55—40—35—
RAS access time*tRAC —160—80—85—70
Address access time tAA —105—45—55—45
CAS access time*tCAC —50—30—30—25
Write data setup time 3 tWDS3 50 — 20 — 15 — 10 —
CAS setup time*tCSR 20 — 10 — 15 — 10 —
Read strobe delay time tRSD —60—50—30—30
Note is on next page.
Test
Conditions
Figure 21-10
to
Figure 21-16
667
Note: At 8 MHz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time.
tRAH = 0.5 ×tCYC – 38 (ns) tCAC = 1.0 ×tCYC – 75 (ns)
tRAC = 2.0 ×tCYC – 90 (ns) tCSR = 0.5 ×tCYC – 43 (ns)
tRP = tCRP = 1.0 ×tCYC – 40 (ns)
At 13 MHz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time.
tRAH = 0.5 ×tCYC – 19 (ns) tCAC = 1.0 ×tCYC – 47 (ns)
tRAC = 2.0 ×tCYC – 74 (ns) tCSR = 0.5 ×tCYC – 29 (ns)
tRP = tCRP = 1.0 ×tCYC – 22 (ns)
At 16 MHz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time.
tRAH = 0.5 ×tCYC – 17 (ns) tCAC = 1.0 ×tCYC – 33 (ns)
tRAC = 2.0 ×tCYC – 40 (ns) tCSR = 0.5 ×tCYC – 17 (ns)
tRP = tCRP = 1.0 ×tCYC – 18 (ns)
At 18 MHz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time.
tRAH = 0.5 ×tCYC – 13 (ns) tCAC = 1.0 ×tCYC – 31 (ns)
tRAC = 2.0 ×tCYC – 41 (ns) tCSR = 0.5 ×tCYC – 18 (ns)
tRP = tCRP = 1.0 ×tCYC – 16 (ns)
668
Table 21-6 Control Signal Timing
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition B: VCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.15 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 13 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 18 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition B Condition C
8 MHz 13 MHz 16 MHz 18 MHz
Item Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Unit
RES setup time tRESS 200 — 200 — 200 — 200 — ns Figure 21-18
RES pulse width tRESW 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 — tCYC
Mode programming tMDS 200 — 200 — 200 — 200 — ns
setup time
RESO output delay tRESD — 100 — 100 — 100 — 100 ns Figure 21-19
time
RESO output pulse tRESOW 132 — 132 — 132 — 132 — tCYC
width
NMI setup time tNMIS 200 — 200 — 150 — 150 — ns Figure 21-20
(NMI, IRQ5to IRQ0)
NMI hold time tNMIH 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 —
(NMI, IRQ5to IRQ0)
Interrupt pulse width tNMIW 200 — 200 — 200 — 200 —
(NMI, IRQ2to IRQ0
when exiting software
standby mode)
Clock oscillator settling tOSC1 20 — 20 — 20 — 20 — ms Figure 21-22
time at reset (crystal)
Clock oscillator settling tOSC2 7 — 7 — 7 — 7 — ms Figure 20-1
time in software standby
(crystal)
Test
Conditions
669
Table 21-7 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition B: VCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.15 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 13 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 18 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition B Condition C
8 MHz 13 MHz 16 MHz 18 MHz
Item Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Unit
DMAC DREQ setup tDRQS 40 — 40 — 30 — 30 — ns Figure 21-30
time
DREQ hold tDRQH 10 — 10 — 10 — 10 —
time
TEND delay tTED1 — 100 — 100 — 50 — 50 Figure 21-28,
time 1 Figure 21-29
TEND delay tTED2 — 100 — 100 — 50 — 50
time 2
ITU Timer output tTOCD — 100 — 100 — 100 — 100 ns Figure 21-24
delay time
Timer input tTICS 50 — 50 — 50 — 50 —
setup time
Timer clock tTCKS 50 — 50 — 50 — 50 — Figure 21-25
input setup time
Single tTCKWH 1.5 — 1.5 — 1.5 — 1.5 — tCYC
edge
Both tTCKWL 2.5 — 2.5 — 2.5 — 2.5 —
edges
SCI Asyn- tSCYC 4—4—4—4—t
CYC Figure 21-26
chronous
Syn- tSCYC 6—6—6—6—
chronous
Input clock rise tSCKr — 1.5 — 1.5 — 1.5 — 1.5
time
Input clock fall tSCKf — 1.5 — 1.5 — 1.5 — 1.5
time
Input clock tSCKW 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 tSCYC
pulse width
Test
Conditions
Timer
clock
pulse
width
Input
clock
cycle
670
Table 21-7 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules (cont)
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition B: VCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.15 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 13 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 18 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition B
Condition C
8 MHz 13 MHz 16 MHz 18 MHz
Item Symbol Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Unit
SCI Transmit data tTXD — 100 — 100 — 100 — 100 ns
Figure 21-27
delay time
Receive data tRXS 100 — 100 — 100 — 100 —
setup time
(synchronous)
Clock input tRXH 100 — 100 — 100 — 100 —
Clock output 0 — 0 — 0 — 0 —
Output data tPWD — 100 — 100 — 100 — 100 ns
Figure 21-23
delay time
Input data tPRS 50 — 50 — 50 — 50 —
setup time
Input data tPRH 50 — 50 — 50 — 50 —
hold time
Figure 21-3 Output Load Circuit
CR
H
5 V
RL
H8/3048 Series
output pin
C = 90 pF: ports 4, 5, 6, 8, A (19 to 0), D (15 to 8), ø
C = 30 pF: ports 9, A, B, RESO
Input/output timing measurement levels
• Low: 0.8 V
• High: 2.0 V
R = 2.4 k
R = 12 k
L
H Ω
Ω
Test
Conditions
Receive data
hold time
(synchronous)
Ports
and
TPC
671
21.2.3 A/D Conversion Characteristics
Table 21-8 lists the A/D conversion characteristics.
Table 21-8 A/D Converter Characteristics
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition B: VCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.15 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 13 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 18 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition B Condition C
8 MHz 13 MHz 16 MHz 18 MHz
Item Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Unit
Resolution 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 bits
Conversion time — — 16.8 — — 10.4 — — 8.4 — — 7.5 µs
Analog input — — 20 — — 20 — — 20 — — 20 pF
capacitance
——10
*
1
——10
*
1
——10
*
3
——10
*
3
kΩ
——5
*
2——5
*
2——5
*
4——5
*
4
Nonlinearity error — — ±6.0 — — ±6.0 — — ±3.0 — — ±3.0 LSB
Offset error — — ±4.0 — — ±4.0 — — ±2.0 — — ±2.0 LSB
Full-scale error — — ±4.0 — — ±4.0 — — ±2.0 — — ±2.0 LSB
Quantization error — — ±0.5 — — ±0.5 — — ±0.5 — — ±0.5 LSB
Absolute accuracy — — ±8.0 — — ±8.0 — — ±4.0 — — ±4.0 LSB
Notes: 1. The value is for 4.0 ≤AVCC ≤5.5.
2. The value is for 2.7 ≤AVCC ≤4.0.
3. The value is for ø ≤12 MHz.
4. The value is for ø >12 MHz.
Permissible signal-
source impedance
672
21.2.4 D/A Conversion Characteristics
Table 21-9 lists the D/A conversion characteristics.
Table 21-9 D/A Converter Characteristics
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition B: VCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.15 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 3.15 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 13 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 18 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition B Condition C
8 MHz 13 MHz 16 MHz 18 MHz
Item Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Unit
Resolution 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Bits
Conversion — — 10 — — 10 — — 10 — — 10 µs 20-pF capaci-
time tive load
Absolute — ±2.0 ±3.0 — ±2.0 ±3.0 — ±1.0 ±1.5 — ±1.0 ±1.5 LSB 2-MΩ
accuracy resistive load
— — ±2.0 — — ±2.0 — — ±1.0 — — ±1.0 LSB 4-MΩ
resistive load
Test
Conditions
673
21.3 Electrical Characteristics of Flash Memory Version
21.3.1 DC Characteristics
Table 21-10 lists the DC characteristics. Table 21-11 lists the permissible output currents.
Table 21-10 DC Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
Port A, VT–1.0 — — V
P80to P82,V
T
+——V
CC ×0.7 V
PB0to PB3VT+– VT–0.4 — — V
Input high RES, STBY, VIH VCC – 0.7 — VCC + 0.3 V
voltage NMI, MD2to
MD0
EXTAL VCC ×0.7 — VCC + 0.3 V
Port 7 2.0 — AVCC + 0.3V
Ports 1, 2, 3, 2.0 — VCC + 0.3 V
4, 5, 6, 9,
P83, P84,
PB4to PB7
Input low RES, STBY, VIL –0.3 — 0.5 V
voltage MD2to MD0
NMI, EXTAL, –0.3 — 0.8 V
ports 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 9,
P83, P84,
PB4to PB7
All output pins VOH VCC – 0.5 — — V IOH = –200 µA
3.5 — — V IOH = –1 mA
Output low All output pins VOL — — 0.4 V IOL = 1.6 mA
voltage (except RESO)
Ports 1, 2, — — 1.0 V IOL = 10 mA
5, and B
RESO — — 0.4 V IOL = 2.6 mA
High voltage RESO/VPP VHVCC + 2.0 — 11.4 V VCC = 4.5 V
(12 V) appli- MD2 to 5.5 V
cation criterion
level*5
Note: *If the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins
open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS.
674
Output high
voltage
Schmitt
trigger input
voltages
Table 21-10 DC Characteristics (cont)
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC ,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V*1, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
Input leakage STBY, NMI, |Iin| — — 1.0 µA Vin = 0.5 to
current RES, MD1, VCC – 0.5 V
MD0
MD2— — 10.0 µA Vin = 0.5 to
VCC + 0.5 V
MD2— — 50.0 µA Vin = VCC +
0.5 to 12.6 V
Port 7 — — 1.0 µA Vin = 0.5 to
AVCC – 0.5 V
Ports 1, 2, |ITS1| — — 1.0 µA Vin = 0.5 to
3, 4, 5, 6, VCC – 0.5 V
8 to B
RESO/VPP — — 20.0 mA VCC to 5 V <
Vin ≤12.6 V
— — 10.0 µA 0.5 V ≤Vin ≤
VCC to 0.5 V
Input pull-up Ports 2, –IP50 — 300 µA Vin = 0 V
current 4, and 5
NMI Cin ——50pF
All input pins — — 15 pF
except NMI
ICC — 50 65 mA f = 16 MHz
Sleep mode — 35 50 mA f = 16 MHz
— 20 25 mA f = 16 MHz
— 0.01 5.0 µA Ta≤50°C
— — 20.0 µA 50°C < Ta
Notes: 1. If the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins
open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS.
2. Current dissipation values are for VIHmin = VCC – 0.5 V and VILmax = 0.5 V with all output
pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up transistors in the off state.
3. The values are for VRAM ≤VCC < 4.5 V, VIHmin = VCC ×0.9, and VILmax = 0.3 V.
4. Module standby current values apply in sleep mode with all modules halted.
5. The high-voltage application criterion level is as shown above. However, in boot mode
and during flash memory write and erase it should be set at 12.0 V to 0.6 V.
675
Current Normal
dissipation*2operation
Module
standby mode*4
Input
capacitance
Three-state
leakage
current
(off state)
VIN = 0 V
f = 1 MHz
Ta= 25°C
Standby
mode*3
Table 21-10 DC Characteristics (cont)
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
Analog power During A/D AICC — 1.2 2.0 mA
supply current conversion
During A/D — 1.2 2.0 mA
and D/A
conversion
Idle — 0.01 5.0 µA DASTE = 0
Reference During A/D AICC — 0.3 0.6 mA VREF = 5.0 V
current conversion
During A/D — 1.3 3.0 mA
and D/A
conversion
Idle — 0.01 5.0 µA DASTE = 0
VPP pin Read output IPP ——10µAV
PP = 5.0 V
current —1020mAV
PP = 12.6 V
Program — 20 40 mA
execution
Erase — 20 40 mA
RAM standby voltage VRAM 2.0 — — V
Note: *If the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins
open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS.
676
Table 21-10 DC Characteristics (cont)
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
VT–VCC ×0.2 — — V
VT+——V
CC ×0.7 V
VT+ – VT–VCC ×0.07 — — V
Input high RES, STBY, VIH VCC ×0.9 — VCC + 0.3 V
voltage NMI, MD2to
MD0
EXTAL VCC ×0.7 — VCC + 0.3 V
Port 7 VCC ×0.7 — AVCC + 0.3 V
Ports 1, 2, 3,4, VCC ×0.7 — VCC + 0.3 V
5, 6, 9, P83,
P84, PB4to PB7
Input low RES, STBY, VIL –0.3 — VCC ×0.1 V
voltage MD2to MD0–0.3 — VCC ×0.2 V VCC < 4.0 V
0.8 V VCC =
4.0 V to 5.5 V
All output pins VOH VCC – 0.5 — — V IOH = –200 µA
VCC – 1.0 — — V IOH = –1 mA
Output low All output pins VOL — — 0.4 V IOL = 1.6 mA
voltage (except RESO)
Ports 1, 2, — — 1.0 V VCC ≤4 V
5, and B IOL = 5 mA,
4 V < VCC ≤5.5 V
IOL = 10 mA
RESO — — 0.4 V IOL = 1.6 mA
Note: *If the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF
pins open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS.
677
Schmitt Port A,
trigger input P80to P82,
voltages PB0to PB3
NMI, EXTAL,
ports 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 9,
P83, P84
PB4to PB7
Output high
voltage
Table 21-10 DC Characteristics (cont)
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
High voltage RESO/VPP VHVCC + 2.0 — 11.4 V VCC = 2.7 V
(12 V) appli- MD2 to 5.5 V
cation criterion
level*6
Input leakage STBY, NMI, |Iin| — — 1.0 µA Vin = 0.5 to
current RES, MD1, VCC – 0.5 V
MD0
MD2— — 10.0 µA Vin = 0.5 to
VCC + 0.5 V
MD2— — 50.0 µA Vin = VCC +
0.5 to 12.6 V
Port 7 — — 1.0 µA Vin = 0.5 to
AVCC – 0.5 V
Ports 1, 2, |ITS1| — — 1.0 µA Vin = 0.5 to
3, 4, 5, 6, VCC – 0.5 V
8 to B
RESO — — 10.0 µA
Input pull-up Ports 2, –IP10 — 300 µA VCC = 2.7 V to
current 4, and 5 5.5 V, Vin = 0 V
NMI Cin — — 50 pF
All input pins — — 15
except NMI
Note: *If the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF
pins open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS.
678
Three-state
leakage
current
(off state)
Input
capacitance Vin = 0 V
f = 1 MHz
Ta= 25°C
Table 21-10 DC Characteristics (cont)
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V*1, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
Current Normal ICC*4— 12 35 mA f = 8 MHz
dissipation*2operation (3.0 V) (5.5 V)
Sleep mode — 8 25 mA f = 8 MHz
(3.0 V) (5.5 V)
Module — 5 14 mA f = 8 MHz
standby mode*5(3.0 V) (5.5 V)
— 0.01 5.0 µA Ta≤50°C
— — 20.0 µA 50°C < Ta
Notes: 1. If the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF pins
open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS.
2. Current dissipation values are for VIHmin = VCC – 0.5 V and VILmax = 0.5 V with all output
pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up transistors in the off state.
3. The values are for VRAM ≤VCC < 2.7 V, VIHmin = VCC ×0.9, and VILmax = 0.3 V.
4. ICC depends on VCC and f as follows:
ICCmax = 3.0 (mA) + 0.75 (mA/MHz·V) ×VCC ×f [normal mode]
ICCmax = 3.0 (mA) + 0.55 (mA/MHz·V) ×VCC ×f [sleep mode]
ICCmax = 3.0 (mA) + 0.25 (mA/MHz·V) ×VCC ×f [module standby mode]
5. Module standby current values apply in sleep mode with all modules halted.
6. The high-voltage application criterion level is as shown above. However, in boot mode
and during flash memory write and erase it should be set at 12.0 V ±0.6 V.
679
Standby
mode*3
Table 21-10 DC Characteristics (cont) —Preliminary—
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V*, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
AICC — 0.4 1.0 mA AVCC = 3.0 V
— 1.2 — mA AVCC = 5.0 V
— 0.4 1.0 mA AVCC = 3.0 V
— 1.2 — mA AVCC = 5.0 V
Idle — 0.01 5.0 µA DASTE = 0
AICC — 0.2 0.4 mA VREF = 3.0 V
— 0.3 — mA VREF = 5.0 V
— 0.8 2.0 mA VREF = 3.0 V
— 1.3 — mA VREF = 5.0 V
Idle — 0.01 5.0 µA DASTE = 0
VPP pin Read output IPP — — 10 µA VPP = 5.0 V
current —1020mA
Program — 20 40 mA VPP = 12.6 V
execution
Erase — 20 40 mA
RAM standby voltage VRAM 2.0 — — V
Note: *If the A/D and D/A converters are not used, do not leave the AVCC, AVSS, and VREF
pins open. Connect AVCC and VREF to VCC, and connect AVSS to VSS.
680
During A/D
conversion
During A/D
and D/A
conversion
Analog
power
supply
current
Reference During A/D
current conversion
During A/D
and D/A
conversion
Table 21-11 Permissible Output Currents
Conditions: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular specifications),
Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit
Ports 1, 2, 5, and B IOL ——10mA
Other output pins — — 2.0 mA
Permissible output Total of 28 pins in ΣIOL ——80mA
low current (total) ports 1, 2, 5, and B
Total of all output pins, — — 120 mA
including the above
Permissible output All output pins IOH — — 2.0 mA
high current (per pin)
Permissible output Total of all output pins ΣIOH ——40mA
high current (total)
Notes: 1. To protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 21-11.
2. When driving a darlington pair or LED, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the
output line, as shown in figures 21-4 and 21-5.
681
Permissible output
low current (per pin)
Figure 21-4 Darlington Pair Drive Circuit (Example)
Figure 21-5 LED Drive Circuit (Example)
682
H8/3048
Series
Ports 1, 2, 5,
and B
LED
600Ω
H8/3048
Series
Port 2 kΩ
Darlington pair
21.3.2 AC Characteristics
Bus timing parameters are listed in table 21-12. Refresh controller bus timing parameters are
listed in table 21-13. Control signal timing parameters are listed in table 21-14. Timing parameters
of the on-chip supporting modules are listed in table 21-15.
Table 21-12 Bus Timing (1)
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition C
8 MHz 16 MHz Test
Item Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit Conditions
Clock cycle time tCYC 125 1000 62.5 1000 ns Figure 21-7
Clock pulse low width tCL 40 — 20 — Figure 21-8
Clock pulse high width tCH 40 — 20 —
Clock rise time tCR —20—10
Clock fall time tCF —20—10
Address delay time tAD —60—30
Address hold time tAH 25 — 10 —
Address strobe delay time tASD —60—30
Write strobe delay time tWSD —60—30
Strobe delay time tSD —60—30
Write data strobe pulse width 1 tWSW1*85 — 35 —
Write data strobe pulse width 2 tWSW2*150 — 65 —
Address setup time 1 tAS1 20 — 10 —
Address setup time 2 tAS2 80 — 40 —
Read data setup time tRDS 50 — 20 —
Read data hold time tRDH 0—0—
683
Table 21-12 Bus Timing (cont)
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition C
8 MHz 16 MHz Test
Item Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit Conditions
Write data delay time tWDD — 75 — 60 ns Figure 21-7
Write data setup time 1 tWDS1 60 — 15 — Figure 21-8
Write data setup time 2 tWDS2 5—–5—
Write data hold time tWDH 25 — 20 —
Read data access time 1 tACC1*— 120 — 60
Read data access time 2 tACC2*— 240 — 120
Read data access time 3 tACC3*—70—30
Read data access time 4 tACC4*— 180 — 95
Precharge time tPCH*85 — 45 —
Wait setup time tWTS 40 — 25 — ns Figure 21-9
Wait hold time tWTH 10 — 5 —
Bus request setup time tBRQS 40 — 40 — ns Figure 21-21
Bus acknowledge delay time 1 tBACD1 —60—30
Bus acknowledge delay time 2 tBACD2 —60—30
Bus-floating time tBZD —
70
—
40
Note: At 8 MHz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time.
tACC1 = 1.5 ×tCYC – 68 (ns) tWSW1 = 1.0 ×tCYC – 40 (ns)
tACC2 = 2.5 ×tCYC – 73 (ns) tWSW2 = 1.5 ×tCYC – 38 (ns)
tACC3 = 1.0 ×tCYC – 55 (ns) tPCH = 1.0 ×tCYC – 40 (ns)
tACC4 = 2.0 ×tCYC – 70 (ns)
At 16 MHz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time.
tACC1 = 1.5 ×tCYC – 34 (ns) tWSW1 = 1.0 ×tCYC – 28 (ns)
tACC2 = 2.5 ×tCYC – 37 (ns) tWSW2 = 1.5 ×tCYC – 29 (ns)
tACC3 = 1.0 ×tCYC – 33 (ns) tPCH = 1.0 ×tCYC – 28 (ns)
tACC4 = 2.0 ×tCYC – 30 (ns)
684
Table 21-13 Refresh Controller Bus Timing
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition C
8 MHz 16 MHz Test
Item Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit Conditions
RAS delay time 1 tRAD1 — 60 — 30 ns Figure 21-10
RAS delay time 2 tRAD2 —60—30 to
RAS delay time 3 tRAD3 —60—30 Figure 21-16
Row address hold time*tRAH 25 — 15 —
RAS precharge time*tRP 85 — 45 —
CAS to RAS precharge time*tCRP 85 — 45 —
CAS pulse width tCAS 100 — 40 —
RAS access time*tRAC — 160 — 85
Address access time tAA — 105 — 55
CAS access time*tCAC —50—30
Write data setup time 3 tWDS3 50 — 15 —
CAS setup time*tCSR 20 — 15 —
Read strobe delay time tRSD —60—30
Note: At 8 MHz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time.
tRAH = 0.5 ×tCYC – 38 (ns) tCAC = 1.0 ×tCYC – 75 (ns)
tRAC = 2.0 ×tCYC – 90 (ns) tCSR = 0.5 ×tCYC – 43 (ns)
tRP = tCRP = 1.0 ×tCYC – 40 (ns)
At 16 MHz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time.
tRAH = 0.5 ×tCYC – 17 (ns) tCAC = 1.0 ×tCYC – 33 (ns)
tRAC = 2.0 ×tCYC – 40 (ns) tCSR = 0.5 ×tCYC – 17 (ns)
tRP = tCRP = 1.0 ×tCYC – 18 (ns)
685
Table 21-14 Control Signal Timing
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition C
8 MHz 16 MHz Test
Item Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit Conditions
RES setup time tRESS 200 — 200 — ns Figure 21-18
RES pulse width tRESW 10 — 10 — tCYC
Mode programming tMDS 200 — 200 — ns
setup time
RESO output delay tRESD — 100 — 100 ns Figure 21-19
time
RESO output pulse width tRESOW 132 — 132 — tCYC
NMI setup time tNMIS 200 — 150 — ns Figure 21-20
(NMI, IRQ5to IRQ0)
NMI hold time tNMIH 10 — 10 —
(NMI, IRQ5to IRQ0)
Interrupt pulse width tNMIW 200 — 200 —
(NMI, IRQ2to IRQ0
when exiting software
standby mode)
Clock oscillator settling tOSC1 20 — 20 — ms Figure 21-22
time at reset (crystal)
Clock oscillator settling tOSC2 7 — 7 — ms Figure 20-1
time in software standby
(crystal)
686
Table 21-15 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition C
8 MHz 16 MHz Test
Item Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit Conditions
DMAC DREQ setup time tDRQS 40 — 30 — ns Figure 21-30
DREQ hold time tDRQH 10 — 10 —
TEND delay time 1 tTED1 — 100 — 50 Figure 21-28,
TEND delay time 2 tTED2 — 100 — 50 Figure 21-29
ITU Timer output delay time tTOCD — 100 — 100 ns Figure 21-24
Timer input setup time tTICS 50 — 50 —
Timer clock input setup time tTCKS 50 — 50 — Figure 21-25
Timer clock Single edge tTCKWH 1.5 — 1.5 — tCYC
pulse width Both edges tTCKWL 2.5 — 2.5 —
SCI Input clock Asynchronous tSCYC 4—4—t
CYC Figure 21-26
cycle Synchronous tSCYC 6—6—
Input clock rise time tSCKr — 1.5 — 1.5
Input clock fall time tSCKf — 1.5 — 1.5
Input clock pulse width tSCKW 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 tSCYC
687
Table 21-15 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules (cont)
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition C
8 MHz 16 MHz Test
Item Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit Conditions
SCI Transmit data tTXD — 100 — 100 ns Figure 21-27
delay time
Receive data tRXS 100 — 100 —
setup time
(synchronous)
Receive data Clock input tRXH 100 — 100 —
hold time Clock output tRXH 0—0—
(synchronous)
Ports Output data tPWD — 100 — 100 ns Figure 21-23
and delay time
TPC Input data tPRS 50 — 50 —
setup time
Input data tPRH 50 — 50 —
hold time
Figure 21-6 Output Load Circuit
688
CR
H
5 V
RL
H8/3048 Series
output pin
C = 90 pF: ports 4, 5, 6, 8, A (19 to 0), D (15 to 8), ø
C = 30 pF: ports 9, A, B, RESO
Input/output timing measurement levels
• Low: 0.8 V
• High: 2.0 V
R = 2.4 k
R = 12 k
L
H Ω
Ω
21.3.3 A/D Conversion Characteristics
Table 21-16 lists the A/D conversion characteristics.
Table 21-16 A/D Converter Characteristics
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition C
8 MHz 16 MHz
Item Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Unit
Resolution 10 10 10 10 10 10 bits
Conversion time — — 16.8 — — 8.4 µs
Analog input capacitance — — 20 — — 20 pF
Permissible signal-source — — 10*1——10
*
3kΩ
impedance ——5
*
2——5
*
4
Nonlinearity error — — ±6.0 — — ±3.0 LSB
Offset error — — ±4.0 — — ±2.0 LSB
Full-scale error — — ±4.0 — — ±2.0 LSB
Quantization error — — ±0.5 — — ±0.5 LSB
Absolute accuracy — — ±8.0 — — ±4.0 LSB
Notes: 1. The value is for 4.0 ≤AVCC ≤5.5.
2. The value is for 2.7 ≤AVCC <4.0.
3. The value is for ø ≤12 MHz.
4. The value is for ø >12 MHz.
689
21.3.4 D/A Conversion Characteristics
Table 21-17 lists the D/A conversion characteristics.
Table 21-17 D/A Converter Characteristics
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, ø = 1 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta= –20°C to +75°C (regular
specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition A Condition C
8 MHz 16 MHz Test
Item Min Typ Max Min Typ Max Unit Conditions
Resolution 888888Bits
Conversion time — — 10 — — 10 µs 20-pF capacitive
load
Absolute accuracy — ±2.0 ±3.0 — ±1.0 ±1.5 LSB 2-MΩresistive
load
— — ±2.0 — — ±1.0 LSB 4-MΩresistive
load
690
21.3.5 Flash Memory Characteristics
Table 21-18 lists the flash memory characteristics.
Table 21-18 Flash Memory
Condition A: VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VREF = 2.7 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, VPP = 12 V ± 0.6 V, ø = 1 MHz to 8 MHz, Ta= –20°C to
+75°C (regular specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Condition C: VCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, AVCC = 5.0 V ± 10%, VREF = 4.5 V to AVCC,
VSS = AVSS = 0 V, VPP = 12 V ± 0.6 V, ø = 1 MHz to 16 MHz, Ta= –20°C to
+75°C (regular specifications), Ta= –40°C to +85°C (wide-range specifications)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Test Conditions
Programming time*1tP— 50 1000 µs
Erase time*1tE— 1 30 s
Erase-program cycle NWEC — — 100 time
Verify setup time 1*1tVS1 4—— µs
Verify setup time 2*1tVS2 2—— µs
Flash memory read tFRS 50 — — µs VCC ≥4.5 V
setup time*2100 — — µs VCC < 4.5 V
Notes: 1. To specify each time, follow the appropriate algorithm.
2. Before reading the flash memory, wait at least for the read setup time after clearing the
VPPE bit; lowering the voltage supplied to VPP from 12 V to 0–5 V; turning on the power
when the external clock is used; or returning from standby mode. When the VPP voltage
is cut off, tFRS indicates the time from when the VPP falls below VCC + 2 V to when the
flash memory is read.
691
21.4 Operational Timing
This section shows timing diagrams.
21.4.1 Bus Timing
Bus timing is shown as follows:
• Basic bus cycle: two-state access
Figure 21-7 shows the timing of the external two-state access cycle.
• Basic bus cycle: three-state access
Figure 21-8 shows the timing of the external three-state access cycle.
• Basic bus cycle: three-state access with one wait state
Figure 21-9 shows the timing of the external three-state access cycle with one wait state
inserted.
692
Figure 21-7 Basic Bus Cycle: Two-State Access
T1T2
tCYC
tCH tCL
tAD
tCF tCR
tAS1
tAS1
tASD tACC3
tASD tACC3
tACC1
tASD
tAS1
tWDD tWDS1
tWSW1
tSD tAH
tPCH
tSD tAH
tPCH
tRDH
tRDS
tPCH
tSD tAH
tWDH
ø
A23 to A0,
CS to CS
AS
RD
(read)
D15 to D0
(read)
HWR,LWR
(write)
D15 to D0
(write)
30
t
cyc
693
Figure 21-8 Basic Bus Cycle: Three-State Access
T1T2T3
tACC4
tACC4
tACC2
tWSW2
tWSD
tAS2 tWDS2
ø
A23 to A0
AS
RD (read)
D15 to D0
(read)
HWR,LWR
(write)
D15 to D0
(write)
tRDS
694
Figure 21-9 Basic Bus Cycle: Three-State Access with One Wait State
T1T2TWT3
tWTS tWTS tWTH
ø
A23 to A0
AS
RD (read)
D15 to D0
(read)
HWR,LWR
(write)
D15 to D0
(write)
WAIT
tWTH
695
21.4.2 Refresh Controller Bus Timing
Refresh controller bus timing is shown as follows:
• DRAM bus timing
Figures 21-10 to 21-15 show the DRAM bus timing in each operating mode.
• PSRAM bus timing
Figures 21-16 and 21-17 show the pseudo-static RAM bus timing in each operating mode.
Figure 21-10 DRAM Bus Timing (Read/Write): Three-State Access
— 2WE Mode —
ø
A9 to A1
AS
CS (RAS)
RD (CAS)
HWR (UW),
LWR ( )LW
(read)
HWR (UW),
LWR ( )LW
(write)
RFSH
D15 to D0
(read)
D15 to D0
(write)
T1T2T3
tAD tAD
tRAH
tRAD1
tAS1 tASD
tAS1
tRAC
tASD tAA tCAC
tRAD3
tRP
tSD
tCRP
tSD
tWDH
tRDS tRDH
tWDS3
tCAS
3
696
Figure 21-11 DRAM Bus Timing (Refresh Cycle): Three-State Access
— 2WE Mode —
Figure 21-12 DRAM Bus Timing (Self-Refresh Mode)
— 2WE Mode —
ø
A9 to A1
AS
CS3 (RAS)
RD (CAS)
HWR (UW),
LWR (LW)
RFSH
T1T2T3
tASD
tCSR
tASD tRAD2
tRAD2
tCSR
tRAD3
tSD
tRAD3
tSD
ø
CS (RAS)
RD (CAS)
RFSH
tCSR
tCSR
3
697
Figure 21-13 DRAM Bus Timing (Read/Write): Three-State Access
— 2CAS Mode —
)
T1T2T3
tAD tAD
tRAH
tRAD1
tAS1
tASD
tAS1
tAA
tRAC
tASD tCAC
tWDS3
tRDS
tWDH
tRDH
tSD
tSD
tRAD3
tCRP
tRP
tCAS
RFSH
ø
A9 to A1
AS
CS (RAS
HWR (UCAS),
LWR (LCAS)
RD (WE)
(read)
RD (WE)
(write)
D15 to D0
(read)
(write)
D15 to D0
3
698
Figure 21-14 DRAM Bus Timing (Refresh Cycle): Three-State Access
— 2CAS Mode —
Figure 21-15 DRAM Bus Timing (Self-Refresh Mode)
— 2CAS Mode —
ø
A9 to A1
AS
CS (RAS)
RD (WE)
HWR (UCAS),
LWR (LCAS)
RFSH
T1T2T3
tASD
tCSR
tASD tRAD2
tRAD2
tCSR
tRAD3
tSD
tRAD3
tSD
3
tCSR
tCSR
UCAS
ø
CS (RAS)
HWR
LWR (
(),
RFSH
LCAS)
3
699
Figure 21-16 PSRAM Bus Timing (Read/Write): Three-State Access
Figure 21-17 PSRAM Bus Timing (Refresh Cycle): Three-State Access
ø
A23 to A0
AS
CS3
RD (read)
D15 to D0
(read)
HWR,LWR
(write)
D15 to D0
(write)
RFSH
tAD
T2T3
tRAD1
tAS1
tRSD
tWSD
tWDS2
tRAD3 tRP
tRDH
tSD
tRDS
tSD
T1
ø
A23 to A0
AS
CS3,HWR,
LWR,RD
RFSH
T2T3
T1
tRAD2 tRAD3
700
21.4.3 Control Signal Timing
Control signal timing is shown as follows:
• Reset input timing
Figure 21-18 shows the reset input timing.
• Reset output timing
Figure 21-19 shows the reset output timing.
• Interrupt input timing
Figure 21-20 shows the input timing for NMI and IRQ5to IRQ0.
• Bus-release mode timing
Figure 21-21 shows the bus-release mode timing.
Figure 21-18 Reset Input Timing
Figure 21-19 Reset Output Timing
øtRESS tRESS
tRESW
tMDS
RES
MD2 to MD0
ø
RESO
tRESD
tRESOW
tRESD
701
Figure 21-20 Interrupt Input Timing
Figure 21-21 Bus-Release Mode Timing
ø
NMI
IRQ
IRQ
E
L
tNMIS tNMIH
tNMIS tNMIH
tNMIS
tNMIW
NMI
IRQ
j
IRQ : Edge-sensitive IRQ
: Level-sensitive IRQ (i = 0 to 5)
E
L
i
i
IRQ
(j = 0 to 2)
BREQ
BACK
ø
A23 to A0,
AS,RD,
HWR,LWR
tBRQS tBRQS
tBACD1
tBZD
tBACD2
tBZD
702
21.4.4 Clock Timing
Clock timing is shown as follows:
• Oscillator settling timing
Figure 21-22 shows the oscillator settling timing.
Figure 21-22 Oscillator Settling Timing
21.4.5 TPC and I/O Port Timing
Figure 21-23 shows the TPC and I/O port timing.
Figure 21-23 TPC and I/O Port Input/Output Timing
ø
VCC
STBY
RES
tOSC1 tOSC1
T1T2T3
ø
Port 1 to B
(read)
Port 1 to 6,
8 to B
(write)
tPRS tPRH
tPWD
703
21.4.6 ITU Timing
ITU timing is shown as follows:
• ITU input/output timing
Figure 21-24 shows the ITU input/output timing.
• ITU external clock input timing
Figure 21-25 shows the ITU external clock input timing.
Figure 21-24 ITU Input/Output Timing
Figure 21-25 ITU Clock Input Timing
ø
Output
compare*1
Input
capture*2
tTOCD
tTICS
Notes: 1. TIOCA0 to TIOCA4, TIOCB0 to TIOCB4, TOCXA4, TOCXB4
2. TIOCA0 to TIOCA4, TIOCB0 to TIOCB4
øtTCKS
tTCKS
tTCKWH
tTCKWL
TCLKA to
TCLKD
704
21.4.7 SCI Input/Output Timing
SCI timing is shown as follows:
• SCI input clock timing
Figure 21-26 shows the SCK input clock timing.
• SCI input/output timing (synchronous mode)
Figure 21-27 shows the SCI input/output timing in synchronous mode.
Figure 21-26 SCK Input Clock Timing
Figure 21-27 SCI Input/Output Timing in Synchronous Mode
SCK0, SCK1
tSCKW
tScyc
tSCKr tSCKf
tScyc
tTXD
tRXS tRXH
SCK0, SCK1
TxD0, TxD1
(transmit
data)
RxD0, RxD1
(receive
data)
705
21.4.8 DMAC Timing
DMAC timing is shown as follows.
• DMAC TEND output timing for 2 state access
Figure 21-28 shows the DMAC TEND output timing for 2 state access.
• DMAC TEND output timing for 3 state access
Figure 21-29 shows the DMAC TEND output timing for 3 state access.
• DMAC DREQ input timing
Figure 21-30 shows DMAC DREQ input timing.
Figure 21-28 DMAC TEND Output Timing for 2 State Access
Figure 21-29 DMAC TEND Output Timing for 3 State Access
T1T2
tTED1 tTED2
ø
TEND
T1T2T3
tTED1 tTED2
ø
TEND
706
Figure 21-30 DMAC DREQ Input Timing
tDRQH
tDRQS
ø
DREQ
707
Appendix A Instruction Set
A.1 Instruction List
Operand Notation
Symbol Description
Rd General destination register
Rs General source register
Rn General register
ERd General destination register (address register or 32-bit register)
ERs General source register (address register or 32-bit register)
ERn General register (32-bit register)
(EAd) Destination operand
(EAs) Source operand
PC Program counter
SP Stack pointer
CCR Condition code register
N N (negative) flag in CCR
Z Z (zero) flag in CCR
V V (overflow) flag in CCR
C C (carry) flag in CCR
disp Displacement
→Transfer from the operand on the left to the operand on the right, or transition from
the state on the left to the state on the right
+ Addition of the operands on both sides
– Subtraction of the operand on the right from the operand on the left
×Multiplication of the operands on both sides
÷ Division of the operand on the left by the operand on the right
∧Logical AND of the operands on both sides
∨Logical OR of the operands on both sides
⊕Exclusive logical OR of the operands on both sides
~ NOT (logical complement)
( ), < > Contents of operand
Note: General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L) and 16-bit registers
(R0 to R7 and E0 to E7).
709
Condition Code Notation
Symbol Description
↕Changed according to execution result
*Undetermined (no guaranteed value)
0 Cleared to 0
1 Set to 1
— Not affected by execution of the instruction
∆Varies depending on conditions, described in notes
710
Table A-1 Instruction Set
1. Data transfer instructions
Condition Code
Mnemonic Operation I H N Z V C
MOV.B #xx:8, Rd B #xx:8 →Rd8 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
MOV.B Rs, Rd B Rs8 →Rd8 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
MOV.B @ERs, Rd B @ERs →Rd8 2 — — ↕↕0— 4
MOV.B @(d:16, ERs),
B @(d:16, ERs) →Rd8 4 — — ↕↕0— 6
Rd
MOV.B @(d:24, ERs),
B @(d:24, ERs) →Rd8 8 — — ↕↕0— 10
Rd
MOV.B @ERs+, Rd B @ERs →Rd8 2 — — ↕↕0— 6
ERs32+1 →ERs32
MOV.B @aa:8, Rd B @aa:8 →Rd8 2 — — ↕↕0— 4
MOV.B @aa:16, Rd B @aa:16 →Rd8 4 — — ↕↕0— 6
MOV.B @aa:24, Rd B @aa:24 →Rd8 6 — — ↕↕0— 8
MOV.B Rs, @ERd B Rs8 →@ERd 2 — — ↕↕0— 4
MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, B Rs8 →@(d:16, ERd) 4 — — ↕↕0— 6
ERd)
MOV.B Rs, @(d:24, B Rs8 →@(d:24, ERd) 8 — — ↕↕0— 10
ERd)
MOV.B Rs, @–ERd B ERd32–1 →ERd32 2 — — ↕↕0— 6
Rs8 →@ERd
MOV.B Rs, @aa:8 B Rs8 →@aa:8 2 — — ↕↕0— 4
MOV.B Rs, @aa:16 B Rs8 →@aa:16 4 — — ↕↕0— 6
MOV.B Rs, @aa:24 B Rs8 →@aa:24 6 — — ↕↕0— 8
MOV.W #xx:16, Rd W #xx:16 →Rd16 4 — — ↕↕0— 4
MOV.W Rs, Rd W Rs16 →Rd16 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
MOV.W @ERs, Rd W @ERs →Rd16 2 — — ↕↕0— 4
MOV.W @(d:16, ERs),
W @(d:16, ERs) →Rd16 4 — — ↕↕0— 6
Rd
MOV.W @(d:24, ERs),
W @(d:24, ERs) →Rd16 8 — — ↕↕0— 10
Rd
MOV.W @ERs+, Rd W @ERs →Rd16 2 — — ↕↕0— 6
ERs32+2 →@ERd32
MOV.W @aa:16, Rd W @aa:16 →Rd16 4 — — ↕↕0— 6
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d, ERn)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d, PC)
@@aa
—
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
Normal
No. of
States *1
Advanced
Operand Size
711
Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont)
Condition Code
Mnemonic Operation I H N Z V C
MOV.W @aa:24, Rd W @aa:24 →Rd16 6 — — ↕↕0— 8
MOV.W Rs, @ERd W Rs16 →@ERd 2 — — ↕↕0— 4
MOV.W Rs, @(d:16,
W Rs16 →@(d:16, ERd) 4 — — ↕↕0— 6
ERd)
MOV.W Rs, @(d:24,
W Rs16 →@(d:24, ERd) 8 — — ↕↕0— 10
ERd)
MOV.W Rs, @–ERd W ERd32–2 →ERd32 2 — — ↕↕0— 6
Rs16 →@ERd
MOV.W Rs, @aa:16 W Rs16 →@aa:16 4 — — ↕↕0— 6
MOV.W Rs, @aa:24 W Rs16 →@aa:24 6 — — ↕↕0— 8
MOV.L #xx:32, Rd L #xx:32 →Rd32 6 — — ↕↕0— 6
MOV.L ERs, ERd L ERs32 →ERd32 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
MOV.L @ERs, ERd L @ERs →ERd32 4 — — ↕↕0— 8
MOV.L @(d:16, ERs),
L @(d:16, ERs) →ERd32 6 — — ↕↕0— 10
ERd
MOV.L @(d:24, ERs),
L @(d:24, ERs) →ERd32 10 — — ↕↕0— 14
ERd
MOV.L @ERs+, ERd L @ERs →ERd32 4 — — ↕↕0— 10
ERs32+4 →ERs32
MOV.L @aa:16, ERd L @aa:16 →ERd32 6 — — ↕↕0— 10
MOV.L @aa:24, ERd L @aa:24 →ERd32 8 — — ↕↕0— 12
MOV.L ERs, @ERd L ERs32 →@ERd 4 — — ↕↕0— 8
MOV.L ERs, @(d:16, L ERs32 →@(d:16, ERd) 6 — — ↕↕0— 10
ERd)
MOV.L ERs, @(d:24, L ERs32 →@(d:24, ERd) 10 — — ↕↕0— 14
ERd)
MOV.L ERs, @–ERd L ERd32–4 →ERd32 4 — — ↕↕0— 10
ERs32 →@ERd
MOV.L ERs, @aa:16 L ERs32 →@aa:16 6 — — ↕↕0— 10
MOV.L ERs, @aa:24 L ERs32 →@aa:24 8 — — ↕↕0— 12
POP.W Rn W @SP →Rn16 2 — — ↕↕0— 6
SP+2 →SP
POP.L ERn L @SP →ERn32 4 — — ↕↕0— 10
SP+4 →SP
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d, ERn)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d, PC)
@@aa
—
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
Normal
No. of
States *1
Advanced
Operand Size
712
Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont)
Condition Code
Mnemonic Operation I H N Z V C
PUSH.W Rn W SP–2 →SP 2 — — ↕↕0— 6
Rn16 →@SP
PUSH.L ERn L SP–4 →SP 4 — — ↕↕0— 10
ERn32 →@SP
MOVFPE @aa:16, B Cannot be used in the 4 Cannot be used in the
Rd H8/3048 Series H8/3048 Series
MOVTPE Rs, B Cannot be used in the 4 Cannot be used in the
@aa:16 H8/3048 Series H8/3048 Series
2. Arithmetic instructions
Condition Code
Mnemonic Operation I H N Z V C
ADD.B #xx:8, Rd B Rd8+#xx:8 →Rd8 2 — ↕↕↕↕↕ 2
ADD.B Rs, Rd B Rd8+Rs8 →Rd8 2 — ↕↕↕↕↕ 2
ADD.W #xx:16, Rd W Rd16+#xx:16 →Rd16 4 — (1) ↕↕↕↕ 4
ADD.W Rs, Rd W Rd16+Rs16 →Rd16 2 — (1) ↕↕↕↕ 2
ADD.L #xx:32, ERd L ERd32+#xx:32 →6 — (2) ↕↕↕↕ 6
ERd32
ADD.L ERs, ERd L ERd32+ERs32 →2 — (2) ↕↕↕↕ 2
ERd32
ADDX.B #xx:8, Rd B Rd8+#xx:8 +C →Rd8 2 — ↕↕(3) ↕↕ 2
ADDX.B Rs, Rd B Rd8+Rs8 +C →Rd8 2 — ↕↕(3) ↕↕ 2
ADDS.L #1, ERd L ERd32+1 →ERd32 2 —————— 2
ADDS.L #2, ERd L ERd32+2 →ERd32 2 —————— 2
ADDS.L #4, ERd L ERd32+4 →ERd32 2 —————— 2
INC.B Rd B Rd8+1 →Rd8 2 — — ↕↕↕—2
INC.W #1, Rd W Rd16+1 →Rd16 2 — — ↕↕↕—2
INC.W #2, Rd W Rd16+2 →Rd16 2 — — ↕↕↕—2
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d, ERn)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d, PC)
@@aa
—
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
Normal
No. of
States *1
Advanced
Operand Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d, ERn)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d, PC)
@@aa
—
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
Normal
No. of
States *1
Advanced
Operand Size
713
Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont)
Condition Code
Mnemonic Operation I H N Z V C
INC.L #1, ERd L ERd32+1 →ERd32 2 — — ↕↕↕—2
INC.L #2, ERd L ERd32+2 →ERd32 2 — — ↕↕↕—2
DAA Rd B
Rd8 decimal adjust
2—*↕↕*—2
→Rd8
SUB.B Rs, Rd B Rd8–Rs8 →Rd8 2 — ↕↕↕↕↕ 2
SUB.W #xx:16, Rd W Rd16–#xx:16 →Rd16 4 — (1) ↕↕↕↕ 4
SUB.W Rs, Rd W Rd16–Rs16 →Rd16 2 — (1) ↕↕↕↕ 2
SUB.L #xx:32, ERd L ERd32–#xx:32 6 — (2) ↕↕↕↕ 6
→ERd32
SUB.L ERs, ERd L ERd32–ERs32 2 — (2) ↕↕↕↕ 2
→ERd32
SUBX.B #xx:8, Rd B Rd8–#xx:8–C →Rd8 2 — ↕↕(3) ↕↕ 2
SUBX.B Rs, Rd B Rd8–Rs8–C →Rd8 2 — ↕↕(3) ↕↕ 2
SUBS.L #1, ERd L ERd32–1 →ERd32 2 —————— 2
SUBS.L #2, ERd L ERd32–2 →ERd32 2 —————— 2
SUBS.L #4, ERd L ERd32–4 →ERd32 2 —————— 2
DEC.B Rd B Rd8–1 →Rd8 2 — — ↕↕↕—2
DEC.W #1, Rd W Rd16–1 →Rd16 2 — — ↕↕↕—2
DEC.W #2, Rd W Rd16–2 →Rd16 2 — — ↕↕↕—2
DEC.L #1, ERd L ERd32–1 →ERd32 2 — — ↕↕↕—2
DEC.L #2, ERd L ERd32–2 →ERd32 2 — — ↕↕↕—2
DAS.Rd B
Rd8 decimal adjust
2—*↕↕*—2
→Rd8
MULXU. B Rs, Rd B Rd8 × Rs8 →Rd16 2 —————— 14
(unsigned multiplication)
MULXU. W Rs, ERd W Rd16 × Rs16 →ERd32 2 —————— 22
(unsigned multiplication)
MULXS. B Rs, Rd B Rd8 × Rs8 →Rd16 4 — — ↕↕—— 16
(signed multiplication)
MULXS. W Rs, ERd W Rd16 × Rs16 →ERd32 4 — — ↕↕—— 24
(signed multiplication)
DIVXU. B Rs, Rd B Rd16 ÷ Rs8 →Rd16 2 — — (6) (7) — — 14
(RdH: remainder,
RdL: quotient)
(unsigned
division
)
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d, ERn)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d, PC)
@@aa
—
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
Normal
No. of
States *1
Advanced
Operand Size
714
Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont)
Condition Code
Mnemonic Operation I H N Z V C
DIVXU. W Rs, ERd W ERd32 ÷ Rs16 →ERd32 2 — — (6) (7) — — 22
(Ed: remainder,
Rd: quotient)
(unsigned division)
DIVXS. B Rs, Rd B Rd16 ÷ Rs8 →Rd16 4 — — (8) (7) — — 16
(RdH: remainder,
RdL: quotient)
(signed division)
DIVXS. W Rs, ERd W ERd32 ÷ Rs16 →ERd32 4 — — (8) (7) — — 24
(Ed: remainder,
Rd: quotient)
(signed division)
CMP.B #xx:8, Rd B Rd8–#xx:8 2 — ↕↕↕↕↕ 2
CMP.B Rs, Rd B Rd8–Rs8 2 — ↕↕↕↕↕ 2
CMP.W #xx:16, Rd W Rd16–#xx:16 4 — (1) ↕↕↕↕ 4
CMP.W Rs, Rd W Rd16–Rs16 2 — (1) ↕↕↕↕ 2
CMP.L #xx:32, ERd L ERd32–#xx:32 6 — (2) ↕↕↕↕ 4
CMP.L ERs, ERd L ERd32–ERs32 2 — (2) ↕↕↕↕ 2
NEG.B Rd B 0–Rd8 →Rd8 2 — ↕↕↕↕↕ 2
NEG.W Rd W 0–Rd16 →Rd16 2 — ↕↕↕↕↕ 2
NEG.L ERd L 0–ERd32 →ERd32 2 — ↕↕↕↕↕ 2
EXTU.W Rd W 0 →(<bits 15 to 8> 2 — — 0 ↕0— 2
of Rd16)
EXTU.L ERd L 0 →(<bits 31 to 16> 2 — — 0 ↕0— 2
of ERd32)
EXTS.W Rd W (<bit 7> of Rd16) →2——↕↕0— 2
(<bits 15 to 8> of Rd16)
EXTS.L ERd L (<bit 15> of
ERd32
) →2——↕↕0— 2
(<bits 31 to 16> of
ERd32)
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d, ERn)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d, PC)
@@aa
—
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
Normal
No. of
States *1
Advanced
Operand Size
715
Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont)
3. Logic instructions
Condition Code
Mnemonic Operation I H N Z V C
AND.B #xx:8, Rd B Rd8∧#xx:8 →Rd8 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
AND.B Rs, Rd B Rd8∧Rs8 →Rd8 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
AND.W #xx:16, Rd W Rd16∧#xx:16 →Rd16 4 — — ↕↕0— 4
AND.W Rs, Rd W Rd16∧Rs16 →Rd16 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
AND.L #xx:32, ERd L
ERd32∧#xx:32 →ERd32
6——↕↕0— 6
AND.L ERs, ERd L
ERd32∧ERs32 →ERd32
4——↕↕0— 4
OR.B #xx:8, Rd B Rd8∨#xx:8 →Rd8 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
OR.B Rs, Rd B Rd8∨Rs8 →Rd8 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
OR.W #xx:16, Rd W Rd16∨#xx:16 →Rd16 4 — — ↕↕0— 4
OR.W Rs, Rd W Rd16∨Rs16 →Rd16 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
OR.L #xx:32, ERd L
ERd32∨#xx:32 →ERd32
6——↕↕0— 6
OR.L ERs, ERd L
ERd32∨ERs32 →ERd32
4——↕↕0— 4
XOR.B #xx:8, Rd B Rd8⊕#xx:8 →Rd8 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
XOR.B Rs, Rd B Rd8⊕Rs8 →Rd8 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
XOR.W #xx:16, Rd W Rd16⊕#xx:16 →Rd16 4 — — ↕↕0— 4
XOR.W Rs, Rd W Rd16⊕Rs16 →Rd16 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
XOR.L #xx:32, ERd L
ERd32⊕#xx:32 →ERd32
6——↕↕0— 6
XOR.L ERs, ERd L
ERd32⊕ERs32 →ERd32
4——↕↕0— 4
NOT.B Rd B ~ Rd8 →Rd8 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
NOT.W Rd W ~ Rd16 →Rd16 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
NOT.L ERd L ~ Rd32 →Rd32 2 — — ↕↕0— 2
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d, ERn)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d, PC)
@@aa
—
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
Normal
No. of
States *1
Advanced
Operand Size
716
Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont)
4. Shift instructions
Condition Code
Mnemonic Operation I H N Z V C
SHAL.B Rd B 2 — — ↕↕↕↕ 2
SHAL.W Rd W 2 — — ↕↕↕↕ 2
SHAL.L ERd L 2 — — ↕↕↕↕ 2
SHAR.B Rd B 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
SHAR.W Rd W 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
SHAR.L ERd L 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
SHLL.B Rd B 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
SHLL.W Rd W 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
SHLL.L ERd L 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
SHLR.B Rd B 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
SHLR.W Rd W 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
SHLR.L ERd L 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
ROTXL.B Rd B 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
ROTXL.W Rd W 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
ROTXL.L ERd L 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
ROTXR.B Rd B 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
ROTXR.W Rd W 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
ROTXR.L ERd L 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
ROTL.B Rd B 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
ROTL.W Rd W 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
ROTL.L ERd L 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
ROTR.B Rd B 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
ROTR.W Rd W 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
ROTR.L ERd L 2 — — ↕↕0↕2
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d, ERn)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d, PC)
@@aa
—
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
Normal
No. of
States *1
Advanced
Operand Size
MSB LSB
0C
C
MSB LSB
MSB LSB
0C
0C
MSB LSB
C
MSB LSB
C
MSB LSB
C
MSB LSB
C
MSB LSB
717
Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont)
5. Bit manipulation instructions
Condition Code
Mnemonic Operation I H N Z V C
BSET #xx:3, Rd B (#xx:3 of Rd8) ←1 2 —————— 2
BSET #xx:3, @ERd B (#xx:3 of @ERd) ←1 4 —————— 8
BSET #xx:3, @aa:8 B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ←1 4 —————— 8
BSET Rn, Rd B (Rn8 of Rd8) ←1 2 —————— 2
BSET Rn, @ERd B (Rn8 of @ERd) ←1 4 —————— 8
BSET Rn, @aa:8 B (Rn8 of @aa:8) ←1 4 —————— 8
BCLR #xx:3, Rd B (#xx:3 of Rd8) ←0 2 —————— 2
BCLR #xx:3, @ERd B (#xx:3 of @ERd) ←0 4 —————— 8
BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8 B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ←0 4 —————— 8
BCLR Rn, Rd B (Rn8 of Rd8) ←0 2 —————— 2
BCLR Rn, @ERd B (Rn8 of @ERd) ←0 4 —————— 8
BCLR Rn, @aa:8 B (Rn8 of @aa:8) ←0 4 —————— 8
BNOT #xx:3, Rd B (#xx:3 of Rd8) ←2 —————— 2
~ (#xx:3 of Rd8)
BNOT #xx:3, @ERd B (#xx:3 of @ERd) ←4 —————— 8
~ (#xx:3 of @ERd)
BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8 B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ←4 —————— 8
~ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
BNOT Rn, Rd B (Rn8 of Rd8) ←2 —————— 2
~ (Rn8 of Rd8)
BNOT Rn, @ERd B (Rn8 of @ERd) ←4 —————— 8
~ (Rn8 of @ERd)
BNOT Rn, @aa:8 B (Rn8 of @aa:8) ←4 —————— 8
~ (Rn8 of @aa:8)
BTST #xx:3, Rd B ~ (#xx:3 of Rd8) →Z 2 ——— ↕—— 2
BTST #xx:3, @ERd B ~ (#xx:3 of @ERd) →Z 4 ——— ↕—— 6
BTST #xx:3, @aa:8 B ~ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) →Z 4 ——— ↕—— 6
BTST Rn, Rd B ~ (Rn8 of @Rd8) →Z 2 ——— ↕—— 2
BTST Rn, @ERd B ~ (Rn8 of @ERd) →Z 4 ——— ↕—— 6
BTST Rn, @aa:8 B ~ (Rn8 of @aa:8) →Z 4 ——— ↕—— 6
BLD #xx:3, Rd B (#xx:3 of Rd8) →C 2 ————— ↕2
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d, ERn)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d, PC)
@@aa
—
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
Normal
No. of
States *1
Advanced
Operand Size
718
Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont)
Condition Code
Mnemonic Operation I H N Z V C
BLD #xx:3, @ERd B (#xx:3 of @ERd) →C 4 ————— ↕6
BLD #xx:3, @aa:8 B (#xx:3 of @aa:8) →C 4 ————— ↕6
BILD #xx:3, Rd B ~ (#xx:3 of Rd8) →C 2 ————— ↕2
BILD #xx:3, @ERd B ~ (#xx:3 of @ERd) →C 4 ————— ↕6
BILD #xx:3, @aa:8 B ~ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) →C 4 ————— ↕6
BST #xx:3, Rd B C →(#xx:3 of Rd8) 2 —————— 2
BST #xx:3, @ERd B C →(#xx:3 of @ERd24) 4 —————— 8
BST #xx:3, @aa:8 B C →(#xx:3 of @aa:8) 4 —————— 8
BIST #xx:3, Rd B ~ C →(#xx:3 of Rd8) 2 —————— 2
BIST #xx:3, @ERd B ~ C →(#xx:3 of @ERd24) 4 —————— 8
BIST #xx:3, @aa:8 B ~ C →(#xx:3 of @aa:8) 4 —————— 8
BAND #xx:3, Rd B C∧(#xx:3 of Rd8) →C 2 ————— ↕2
BAND #xx:3, @ERd B
C∧(#xx:3 of @ERd24) →C
4 ————— ↕6
BAND #xx:3, @aa:8 B C∧(#xx:3 of @aa:8) →C 4 ————— ↕6
BIAND #xx:3, Rd B C∧ ~ (#xx:3 of Rd8) →C 2 ————— ↕2
BIAND #xx:3, @ERd B
C∧ ~ (#xx:3 of @ERd24) →C
4 ————— ↕6
BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8 B C∧ ~ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) →C 4 ————— ↕6
BOR #xx:3, Rd B C∨(#xx:3 of Rd8) →C 2 ————— ↕2
BOR #xx:3, @ERd B
C∨(#xx:3 of @ERd24) →C
4 ————— ↕6
BOR #xx:3, @aa:8 B C∨(#xx:3 of @aa:8) →C 4 ————— ↕6
BIOR #xx:3, Rd B C∨ ~ (#xx:3 of Rd8) →C 2 ————— ↕2
BIOR #xx:3, @ERd B
C∨ ~ (#xx:3 of @ERd24) →C
4 ————— ↕6
BIOR #xx:3, @aa:8 B C∨ ~ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) →C 4 ————— ↕6
BXOR #xx:3, Rd B C⊕(#xx:3 of Rd8) →C 2 ————— ↕2
BXOR #xx:3, @ERd B
C⊕(#xx:3 of @ERd24) →C
4 ————— ↕6
BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 B C⊕(#xx:3 of @aa:8) →C 4 ————— ↕6
BIXOR #xx:3, Rd B C⊕~ (#xx:3 of Rd8) →C 2 ————— ↕2
BIXOR #xx:3, @ERd B
C⊕~
(
#xx:3 of @ERd24) →C
4 ————— ↕6
BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 B C⊕~ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) →C 4 ————— ↕6
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d, ERn)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d, PC)
@@aa
—
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
Normal
No. of
States *1
Advanced
Operand Size
719
Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont)
6. Branching instructions
Condition Code
Mnemonic Operation I H N Z V C
BRA d:8 (BT d:8) — Always 2 —————— 4
BRA d:16 (BT d:16) — 4 —————— 6
BRN d:8 (BF d:8) — Never 2 —————— 4
BRN d:16 (BF d:16) — 4 —————— 6
BHI d:8 — C ∨Z = 0 2 —————— 4
BHI d:16 — 4 —————— 6
BLS d:8 — C ∨Z = 1 2 —————— 4
BLS d:16 — 4 —————— 6
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8) — C = 0 2 —————— 4
BCC d:16 (BHS d:16) — 4 —————— 6
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8) — C = 1 2 —————— 4
BCS d:16 (BLO d:16) — 4 —————— 6
BNE d:8 — Z = 0 2 —————— 4
BNE d:16 — 4 —————— 6
BEQ d:8 — Z = 1 2 —————— 4
BEQ d:16 — 4 —————— 6
BVC d:8 — V = 0 2 —————— 4
BVC d:16 — 4 —————— 6
BVS d:8 — V = 1 2 —————— 4
BVS d:16 — 4 —————— 6
BPL d:8 — N = 0 2 —————— 4
BPL d:16 — 4 —————— 6
BMI d:8 — N = 1 2 —————— 4
BMI d:16 — 4 —————— 6
BGE d:8 — N⊕V = 0 2 —————— 4
BGE d:16 — 4 —————— 6
BLT d:8 — N⊕V = 1 2 —————— 4
BLT d:16 — 4 —————— 6
BGT d:8 — 2 —————— 4
BGT d:16 — 4 —————— 6
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d, ERn)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d, PC)
@@aa
—
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
Normal
No. of
States *1
Advanced
Operand Size
Z ∨(N⊕V)
= 0
If condition
is true then
PC ←
PC+d else
next;
Branch
Condition
720
Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont)
Condition Code
Mnemonic Operation I H N Z V C
BLE d:8 — 2 —————— 4
BLE d:16 — 4 —————— 6
JMP @ERn — PC ←ERn 2 —————— 4
JMP @aa:24 — PC ←aa:24 4 —————— 6
JMP @@aa:8 — PC ←@aa:8 2 —————— 8 10
BSR d:8 — PC →@–SP 2 —————— 6 8
PC ←PC+d:8
BSR d:16 — PC →@–SP 4 —————— 8 10
PC ←PC+d:16
JSR @ERn — PC →@–SP 2 —————— 6 8
PC ←@ERn
JSR @aa:24 — PC →@–SP 4 —————— 8 10
PC ←@aa:24
JSR @@aa:8 — PC →@–SP 2 —————— 8 12
PC ←@aa:8
RTS — PC ←@SP+ 2 —————— 8 10
Z ∨(N⊕V) = 1
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d, ERn)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d, PC)
@@aa
—
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
Normal
No. of
States *1
Advanced
Operand Size
If condition
is true
then PC ←
PC+d else
next;
Branch
Condition
721
Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont)
7. System control instructions
Condition Code
Mnemonic Operation I H N Z V C
TRAPA #x:2 — PC →@–SP 2 1 ————— 14 16
CCR →@–SP
<vector> →PC
RTE — CCR ←@SP+ ↕↕↕↕↕↕ 10
PC ←@SP+
SLEEP — Transition to power- —————— 2
down state
LDC #xx:8, CCR B #xx:8 →CCR 2 ↕↕↕↕↕↕ 2
LDC Rs, CCR B Rs8 →CCR 2 ↕↕↕↕↕↕ 2
LDC @ERs, CCR W @ERs → CCR 4 ↕↕↕↕↕↕ 6
LDC @(d:16, ERs), W @(d:16, ERs) → CCR 6 ↕↕↕↕↕↕ 8
CCR
LDC @(d:24, ERs), W @(d:24, ERs) → CCR 10 ↕↕↕↕↕↕ 12
CCR
LDC @ERs+, CCR W @ERs → CCR 4 ↕↕↕↕↕↕ 8
ERs32+2 → ERs32
LDC @aa:16, CCR W @aa:16 → CCR 6 ↕↕↕↕↕↕ 8
LDC @aa:24, CCR W @aa:24 → CCR 8 ↕↕↕↕↕↕ 10
STC CCR, Rd B CCR →Rd8 2 —————— 2
STC CCR, @ERd W CCR →@ERd 4 —————— 6
STC CCR, @(d:16, W CCR →@(d:16, ERd) 6 —————— 8
ERd)
STC CCR, @(d:24, W CCR →@(d:24, ERd) 10 —————— 12
ERd)
STC CCR, @–ERd W ERd32–2 →ERd32 4 —————— 8
CCR →@ERd
STC CCR, @aa:16 W CCR →@aa:16 6 —————— 8
STC CCR, @aa:24 W CCR →@aa:24 8 —————— 10
ANDC #xx:8, CCR B CCR∧#xx:8 →CCR 2 ↕↕↕↕↕↕ 2
ORC #xx:8, CCR B CCR∨#xx:8 →CCR 2 ↕↕↕↕↕↕ 2
XORC #xx:8, CCR B CCR⊕#xx:8 →CCR 2 ↕↕↕↕↕↕ 2
NOP — PC ←PC+2 2 —————— 2
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d, ERn)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d, PC)
@@aa
—
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
Normal
No. of
States *1
Advanced
Operand Size
722
Table A-1 Instruction Set (cont)
8. Block transfer instructions
Condition Code
Mnemonic Operation I H N Z V C
EEPMOV. B — if R4L ≠0 then 4 —————— 8+
repeat @R5 →@R6 4n*2
R5+1 →R5
R6+1 →R6
R4L–1 →R4L
until R4L=0
else next
EEPMOV. W — if R4 ≠0 then 4 —————— 8+
repeat @R5 →@R6 4n*2
R5+1 →R5
R6+1 →R6
R4–1 →R4
until R4=0
else next
Notes: 1. The number of states is the number of states required for execution when the instruction and its
operands are located in on-chip memory. For other cases see section A.3, Number of States
Required for Execution.
2. n is the value set in register R4L or R4.
(1) Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 11; otherwise cleared to 0.
(2) Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 27; otherwise cleared to 0.
(3) Retains its previous value when the result is zero; otherwise cleared to 0.
(4) Set to 1 when the adjustment produces a carry; otherwise retains its previous value.
(5) The number of states required for execution of an instruction that transfers data in
synchronization with the E clock is variable.
(6) Set to 1 when the divisor is negative; otherwise cleared to 0.
(7) Set to 1 when the divisor is zero; otherwise cleared to 0.
(8) Set to 1 when the quotient is negative; otherwise cleared to 0.
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d, ERn)
@–ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d, PC)
@@aa
—
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
Normal
No. of
States *1
Advanced
Operand Size
723
A.2 Operation Code Map
AH AL 0123456789ABCDEF
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NOP
BRA
MULXU
BSET
BRN
DIVXU
BNOT
STC
BHI
MULXU
BCLR
LDC
BLS
DIVXU
BTST
ORC
OR.B
BCC
RTS
OR
XORC
XOR.B
BCS
BSR
XOR
BOR
BIOR
BXOR
BIXOR
BAND
BIAND
ANDC
AND.B
BNE
RTE
AND
LDC
BEQ
TRAPA
BLD
BILD
BST
BIST
BVC
MOV
BPL
JMP
BMI
EEPMOV
ADDX
SUBX
BGT
JSR
BLE
MOV
ADD
ADDX
CMP
SUBX
OR
XOR
AND
MOV
Table A-2 Operation Code Map (1)
Instruction when most significant bit of BH is 0.
Instruction when most significant bit of BH is 1.
Instruction code:
Table A-2
(2) Table A-2
(2) Table A-2
(2) Table A-2
(2) Table A-2
(2)
BVS BLTBGE
BSR
Table A-2
(2)
Table A-2
(2)
Table A-2
(2)
Table A-2
(2)
Table A-2
(2)
Table A-2
(2)
Table A-2
(2)
Table A-2
(2)
Table A-2
(2) Table A-2
(2) Table A-2
(3)
1st byte 2nd byte
AH BHAL BL
ADD
SUB
MOV
CMP
MOV.B
724
AH ALBH 0123456789ABCDEF
01
0A
0B
0F
10
11
12
13
17
1A
1B
1F
58
79
7A
MOV
INC
ADDS
DAA
DEC
SUBS
DAS
BRA
MOV
MOV
BHI
CMP
CMP
LDC/STC
BCC
OR
OR
BPL BGT
Table A-2 Operation Code Map (2)
Instruction code:
BVS
SLEEP
BVC BGE
Table A-2
(3)
Table A-2
(3) Table A-2
(3)
ADD
MOV
SUB
CMP
BNE
AND
AND
INC
EXTU
DEC
BEQ
INC
EXTU
DEC
BCS
XOR
XOR
SHLL
SHLR
ROTXL
ROTXR
NOT
BLS
SUB
SUB
BRN
ADD
ADD
INC
EXTS
DEC
BLT
INC
EXTS
DEC
BLE
SHAL
SHAR
ROTL
ROTR
NEG
BMI
1st byte 2nd byte
AH BHAL BL
SUB
ADDS
SHLL
SHLR
ROTXL
ROTXR
NOT
SHAL
SHAR
ROTL
ROTR
NEG
725
AH
ALBH
BLCH
CL
0123456789ABCDEF
01406
01C05
01D05
01F06
7Cr06
7Cr07
7Dr06
7Dr07
7Eaa6
7Eaa7
7Faa6
7Faa7
MULXS
BSET
BSET
BSET
BSET
DIVXS
BNOT
BNOT
BNOT
BNOT
MULXS
BCLR
BCLR
BCLR
BCLR
DIVXS
BTST
BTST
BTST
BTST
OR XOR
BOR
BIOR
BXOR
BIXOR
BAND
BIAND
AND
BLD
BILD
BST
BIST
Table A-2 Operation Code Map (3)
Instruction when most significant bit of DH is 0.
Instruction when most significant bit of DH is 1.
Instruction code:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
BOR
BIOR
BXOR
BIXOR
BAND
BIAND
BLD
BILD
BST
BIST
Notes: 1.
2. r is the register designation field.
aa is the absolute address field.
1st byte 2nd byte
AH BHAL BL 3rd byte
CH DHCL DL
4th byte
LDCSTC LDC LDC LDC
STC STC STC
726
A.3 Number of States Required for Execution
The tables in this section can be used to calculate the number of states required for instruction
execution by the H8/300H CPU. Table A-4 indicates the number of instruction fetch, data
read/write, and other cycles occurring in each instruction. Table A-3 indicates the number of states
required per cycle according to the bus size. The number of states required for execution of an
instruction can be calculated from these two tables as follows:
Number of states = I ×SI+ J ×SJ+ K ×SK+ L ×SL+ M ×SM+ N ×SN
Examples of Calculation of Number of States Required for Execution
Examples: Advanced mode, stack located in external address space, on-chip supporting modules
accessed with 8-bit bus width, external devices accessed in three states with one wait state and
16-bit bus width.
BSET #0, @FFFFC7:8
From table A-4, I = L = 2 and J = K = M = N = 0
From table A-3, SI= 4 and SL= 3
Number of states = 2 ×4 + 2 ×3 = 14
JSR @@30
From table A-4, I = J = K = 2 and L = M = N = 0
From table A-3, SI= SJ= SK= 4
Number of states = 2 ×4 + 2 ×4 + 2 ×4 = 24
727
Table A-3 Number of States per Cycle
Access Conditions
External Device
8-Bit Bus 16-Bit Bus
On-Chip 8-Bit 16-Bit 2-State 3-State 2-State 3-State
Cycle Memory Bus Bus Access Access Access Access
Instruction fetch SI2 6346 + 2m23 + m
Branch address read SJ
Stack operation SK
Byte data access SL3 2 3 + m
Word data access SM6 4 6 + 2m
Internal operation SN1
Legend
m: Number of wait states inserted into external device access
On-Chip Sup-
porting Module
728
Table A-4 Number of Cycles per Instruction
Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal
Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation
Instruction Mnemonic I J K L M N
ADD ADD.B #xx:8, Rd 1
ADD.B Rs, Rd 1
ADD.W #xx:16, Rd 2
ADD.W Rs, Rd 1
ADD.L #xx:32, ERd 3
ADD.L ERs, ERd 1
ADDS ADDS #1/2/4, ERd 1
ADDX ADDX #xx:8, Rd 1
ADDX Rs, Rd 1
AND AND.B #xx:8, Rd 1
AND.B Rs, Rd 1
AND.W #xx:16, Rd 2
AND.W Rs, Rd 1
AND.L #xx:32, ERd 3
AND.L ERs, ERd 2
ANDC ANDC #xx:8, CCR 1
BAND BAND #xx:3, Rd 1
BAND #xx:3, @ERd 2 1
BAND #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1
Bcc BRA d:8 (BT d:8) 2
BRN d:8 (BF d:8) 2
BHI d:8 2
BLS d:8 2
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8) 2
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8) 2
BNE d:8 2
BEQ d:8 2
BVC d:8 2
BVS d:8 2
BPL d:8 2
BMI d:8 2
BGE d:8 2
BLT d:8 2
BGT d:8 2
BLE d:8 2
729
Table A-4 Number of Cycles per Instruction (cont)
Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal
Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation
Instruction Mnemonic I J K L M N
Bcc BRA d:16 (BT d:16) 2 2
BRN d:16 (BF d:16) 2 2
BHI d:16 2 2
BLS d:16 2 2
BCC d:16 (BHS d:16) 2 2
BCS d:16 (BLO d:16) 2 2
BNE d:16 2 2
BEQ d:16 2 2
BVC d:16 2 2
BVS d:16 2 2
BPL d:16 2 2
BMI d:16 2 2
BGE d:16 2 2
BLT d:16 2 2
BGT d:16 2 2
BLE d:16 2 2
BCLR BCLR #xx:3, Rd 1
BCLR #xx:3, @ERd 2 2
BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8 2 2
BCLR Rn, Rd 1
BCLR Rn, @ERd 2 2
BCLR Rn, @aa:8 2 2
BIAND BIAND #xx:3, Rd 1
BIAND #xx:3, @ERd 2 1
BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1
BILD BILD #xx:3, Rd 1
BILD #xx:3, @ERd 2 1
BILD #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1
BIOR BIOR #xx:8, Rd 1
BIOR #xx:8, @ERd 2 1
BIOR #xx:8, @aa:8 2 1
BIST BIST #xx:3, Rd 1
BIST #xx:3, @ERd 2 2
BIST #xx:3, @aa:8 2 2
BIXOR BIXOR #xx:3, Rd 1
BIXOR #xx:3, @ERd 2 1
BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1
BLD BLD #xx:3, Rd 1
BLD #xx:3, @ERd 2 1
BLD #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1
730
Table A-4 Number of Cycles per Instruction (cont)
Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal
Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation
Instruction Mnemonic I J K L M N
BNOT BNOT #xx:3, Rd 1
BNOT #xx:3, @ERd 2 2
BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8 2 2
BNOT Rn, Rd 1
BNOT Rn, @ERd 2 2
BNOT Rn, @aa:8 2 2
BOR BOR #xx:3, Rd 1
BOR #xx:3, @ERd 2 1
BOR #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1
BSET BSET #xx:3, Rd 1
BSET #xx:3, @ERd 2 2
BSET #xx:3, @aa:8 2 2
BSET Rn, Rd 1
BSET Rn, @ERd 2 2
BSET Rn, @aa:8 2 2
BSR BSR d:8 Normal*21
Advanced 2 2
BSR d:16 Normal*21 2
Advanced 2 2 2
BST BST #xx:3, Rd 1
BST #xx:3, @ERd 2 2
BST #xx:3, @aa:8 2 2
BTST BTST #xx:3, Rd 1
BTST #xx:3, @ERd 2 1
BTST #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1
BTST Rn, Rd 1
BTST Rn, @ERd 2 1
BTST Rn, @aa:8 2 1
BXOR BXOR #xx:3, Rd 1
BXOR #xx:3, @ERd 2 1
BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1
CMP CMP.B #xx:8, Rd 1
CMP.B Rs, Rd 1
CMP.W #xx:16, Rd 2
CMP.W Rs, Rd 1
CMP.L #xx:32, ERd 3
CMP.L ERs, ERd 1
DAA DAA Rd 1
DAS DAS Rd 1
Note: * Not available in the H8/3048 Series.
731
Table A-4 Number of Cycles per Instruction (cont)
Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal
Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation
Instruction Mnemonic I J K L M N
DEC DEC.B Rd 1
DEC.W #1/2, Rd 1
DEC.L #1/2, ERd 1
DIVXS DIVXS.B Rs, Rd 2 12
DIVXS.W Rs, ERd 2 20
DIVXU DIVXU.B Rs, Rd 1 12
DIVXU.W Rs, ERd 1 20
EEPMOV EEPMOV.B 2 2n + 2*2
EEPMOV.W 2 2n + 2*2
EXTS EXTS.W Rd 1
EXTS.L ERd 1
EXTU EXTU.W Rd 1
EXTU.L ERd 1
INC INC.B Rd 1
INC.W #1/2, Rd 1
INC.L #1/2, ERd 1
JMP JMP @ERn 2
JMP @aa:24 2 2
JMP @@aa:8 Normal*121 2
Advanced 2 2 2
JSR JSR @ERn Normal*121
Advanced 2 2
JSR @aa:24 Normal*121 2
Advanced 2 2 2
JSR @@aa:8 Normal*1211
Advanced 2 2 2
LDC LDC #xx:8, CCR 1
LDC Rs, CCR 1
LDC @ERs, CCR 2 1
LDC @(d:16, ERs), CCR 3 1
LDC @(d:24, ERs), CCR 5 1
LDC @ERs+, CCR 2 1 2
LDC @aa:16, CCR 3 1
LDC @aa:24, CCR 4 1
Notes: 1. Not available in the H8/3048 Series.
2. n is the value set in register R4L or R4. The source and destination are accessed n + 1 times each.
732
Table A-4 Number of Cycles per Instruction (cont)
Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal
Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation
Instruction Mnemonic I J K L M N
MOV MOV.B #xx:8, Rd 1
MOV.B Rs, Rd 1
MOV.B @ERs, Rd 1 1
MOV.B @(d:16, ERs), Rd
21
MOV.B @(d:24, ERs), Rd
41
MOV.B @ERs+, Rd 1 1 2
MOV.B @aa:8, Rd 1 1
MOV.B @aa:16, Rd 2 1
MOV.B @aa:24, Rd 3 1
MOV.B Rs, @ERd 1 1
MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, ERd)
21
MOV.B Rs, @(d:24, ERd)
41
MOV.B Rs, @–ERd 1 1 2
MOV.B Rs, @aa:8 1 1
MOV.B Rs, @aa:16 2 1
MOV.B Rs, @aa:24 3 1
MOV.W #xx:16, Rd 2
MOV.W Rs, Rd 1
MOV.W @ERs, Rd 1 1
MOV.W @(d:16, ERs), Rd
21
MOV.W @(d:24, ERs), Rd
41
MOV.W @ERs+, Rd 1 1 2
MOV.W @aa:16, Rd 2 1
MOV.W @aa:24, Rd 3 1
MOV.W Rs, @ERd 1 1
MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, ERd)
21
MOV.W Rs, @(d:24, ERd)
41
MOV.W Rs, @–ERd 1 1 2
MOV.W Rs, @aa:16 2 1
MOV.W Rs, @aa:24 3 1
MOV.L #xx:32, ERd 3
MOV.L ERs, ERd 1
MOV.L @ERs, ERd 2 2
MOV.L @(d:16, ERs), ERd
32
MOV.L @(d:24, ERs), ERd
52
MOV.L @ERs+, ERd 2 2 2
MOV.L @aa:16, ERd 3 2
MOV.L @aa:24, ERd 4 2
MOV.L ERs, @ERd 2 2
MOV.L ERs, @(d:16, ERd)
32
MOV.L ERs, @(d:24, ERd)
52
MOV.L ERs, @–ERd 2 2 2
MOV.L ERs, @aa:16 3 2
MOV.L ERs, @aa:24 4 2
733
Table A-4 Number of Cycles per Instruction (cont)
Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal
Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation
Instruction Mnemonic I J K L M N
MOVFPE MOVFPE @aa:16, Rd*21
MOVTPE MOVTPE Rs, @aa:16*21
MULXS MULXS.B Rs, Rd 2 12
MULXS.W Rs, ERd 2 20
MULXU MULXU.B Rs, Rd 1 12
MULXU.W Rs, ERd 1 20
NEG NEG.B Rd 1
NEG.W Rd 1
NEG.L ERd 1
NOP NOP 1
NOT NOT.B Rd 1
NOT.W Rd 1
NOT.L ERd 1
OR OR.B #xx:8, Rd 1
OR.B Rs, Rd 1
OR.W #xx:16, Rd 2
OR.W Rs, Rd 1
OR.L #xx:32, ERd 3
OR.L ERs, ERd 2
ORC ORC #xx:8, CCR 1
POP POP.W Rn 1 1 2
POP.L ERn 2 2 2
PUSH PUSH.W Rn 1 1 2
PUSH.L ERn 2 2 2
ROTL ROTL.B Rd 1
ROTL.W Rd 1
ROTL.L ERd 1
ROTR ROTR.B Rd 1
ROTR.W Rd 1
ROTR.L ERd 1
ROTXL ROTXL.B Rd 1
ROTXL.W Rd 1
ROTXL.L ERd 1
ROTXR ROTXR.B Rd 1
ROTXR.W Rd 1
ROTXR.L ERd 1
RTE RTE 2 2 2
Note: *Not available in the H8/3048 Series.
734
Table A-4 Number of Cycles per Instruction (cont)
Instruction Branch Stack Byte Data Word Data Internal
Fetch Addr. Read Operation Access Access Operation
Instruction Mnemonic I J K L M N
RTS RTS Normal*21 2
Advanced 2 2 2
SHAL SHAL.B Rd 1
SHAL.W Rd 1
SHAL.L ERd 1
SHAR SHAR.B Rd 1
SHAR.W Rd 1
SHAR.L ERd 1
SHLL SHLL.B Rd 1
SHLL.W Rd 1
SHLL.L ERd 1
SHLR SHLR.B Rd 1
SHLR.W Rd 1
SHLR.L ERd 1
SLEEP SLEEP 1
STC STC CCR, Rd 1
STC CCR, @ERd 2 1
STC CCR, @(d:16, ERd) 3 1
STC CCR, @(d:24, ERd) 5 1
STC CCR, @–ERd 2 1 2
STC CCR, @aa:16 3 1
STC CCR, @aa:24 4 1
SUB SUB.B Rs, Rd 1
SUB.W #xx:16, Rd 2
SUB.W Rs, Rd 1
SUB.L #xx:32, ERd 3
SUB.L ERs, ERd 1
SUBS SUBS #1/2/4, ERd 1
SUBX SUBX #xx:8, Rd 1
SUBX Rs, Rd 1
TRAPA TRAPA #x:2 Normal*212 4
Advanced 2 2 2 4
XOR XOR.B #xx:8, Rd 1
XOR.B Rs, Rd 1
XOR.W #xx:16, Rd 2
XOR.W Rs, Rd 1
XOR.L #xx:32, ERd 3
XOR.L ERs, ERd 2
XORC XORC #xx:8, CCR 1
Note: *Not available in the H8/3048 Series.
735
Appendix B Internal I/O Register
B.1 Addresses
Data
Address Register Bus
(low) Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module Name
H'1C
H'1D
H'1E
H'1F
H'20 MAR0AR 8
H'21 MAR0AE 8
H'22 MAR0AH 8
H'23 MAR0AL 8
H'24 ETCR0AH 8
H'25 ETCR0AL 8
H'26 IOAR0A 8
H'27 DTCR0A 8 DTE DTSZ DTID RPE DTIE DTS2 DTS1 DTS0 Short
address
mode
DTE DTSZ SAID SAIDE DTIE DTS2A DTS1A DTS0A Full
address
mode
H'28 MAR0BR 8
H'29 MAR0BE 8
H'2A MAR0BH 8
H'2B MAR0BL 8
H'2C ETCR0BH 8
H'2D ETCR0BL 8
H'2E IOAR0B 8
H'2F DTCR0B 8 DTE DTSZ DTID RPE DTIE DTS2 DTS1 DTS0 Short
address
mode
DTME — DAID DAIDE TMS DTS2B DTS1B DTS0B Full
address
mode
Legend
DMAC: DMA controller
(Continued on next page)
DMAC
channel 0A
DMAC
channel 0B
Bit Names
736
(Continued from preceding page)
Data
Address Register Bus
(low) Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module Name
H'30 MAR1AR 8
H'31 MAR1AE 8
H'32 MAR1AH 8
H'33 MAR1AL 8
H'34 ETCR1AH 8
H'35 ETCR1AL 8
H'36 IOAR1A 8
H'37 DTCR1A 8 DTE DTSZ DTID RPE DTIE DTS2 DTS1 DTS0 Short
address
mode
DTE DTSZ SAID SAIDE DTIE DTS2A DTS1A DTS0A Full
address
mode
H'38 MAR1BR 8
H'39 MAR1BE 8
H'3A MAR1BH 8
H'3B MAR1BL 8
H'3C ETCR1BH 8
H'3D ETCR1BL 8
H'3E IOAR1B 8
H'3F DTCR1B 8 DTE DTSZ DTID RPE DTIE DTS2 DTS1 DTS0 Short
address
mode
DTME — DAID DAIDE TMS DTS2B DTS1B DTS0B Full
address
mode
H'40 FLMCR 8 VPP VPPE — — EV PV E P Flash
H'41 — — ———————— memory
H'42 EBR1 8 LB7 LB6 LB5 LB4 LB3 LB2 LB1 LB0
H'43 EBR2 8 SB7 SB6 SB5 SB4 SB3 SB2 SB1 SB0
H'44 — — ————————
H'45 — — ————————
H'46 — — ————————
H'47 — — ————————
H'48 RAMCR 8 FLER — — — RAMS RAM2 RAM1 RAM0
H'49 — — ————————
H'4A — — ————————
H'4B — — ————————
Legend
DMAC: DMA controller
(Continued on next page)
Bit Names
DMAC
channel 1A
DMAC
channel 1B
737
(Continued from preceding page)
Data
Address Register Bus
(low) Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module Name
H'4C — — ————————
H'4D — — ————————
H'4E — — ————————
H'4F — — ————————
H'50 — — ————————
H'51 — — ————————
H'52 — — ————————
H'53 — — ————————
H'54 — — ————————
H'55 — — ————————
H'56 — — ————————
H'57 — — ————————
H'58 — — ————————
H'59 — — ————————
H'5A — — ————————
H'5B — — ————————
H'5C DASTCR 8 ———————DASTE
H'5D DIVCR 8 ——————DIV1 DIV0
H'5E MSTCR 8 PSTOP —
MSTOP5 MSTOP4 MSTOP3 MSTOP2 MSTOP1 MSTOP0
H'5F CSCR 8 CS7E CS6E CS5E CS4E ———— Bus controller
H'60 TSTR 8 — — — STR4 STR3 STR2 STR1 STR0
H'61 TSNC 8 — — — SYNC4 SYNC3 SYNC2 SYNC1 SYNC0
H'62 TMDR 8 MDF FDIR PWM4 PWM3 PWM2 PWM1 PWM0
H'63 TFCR 8 — — CMD1 CMD0 BFB4 BFA4 BFB3 BFA3
H'64 TCR0 8 — CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0
H'65 TIOR0 8 — IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 — IOA2 IOA1 IOA0
H'66 TIER0 8 —————OVIE IMIEB IMIEA
H'67 TSR0 8 —————OVFIMFB IMFA
H'68 TCNT0H 16
H'69 TCNT0L
H'6A GRA0H 16
H'6B GRA0L
H'6C GRB0H 16
H'6D GRB0L
H'6E TCR1 8 — CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0
H'6F TIOR1 8 — IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 — IOA2 IOA1 IOA0
Legend
ITU: 16-bit integrated timer unit
(Continued on next page)
Bit Names
ITU
(all channels)
D/A converter
System
control
ITU channel 0
ITU channel 1
738
(Continued from preceding page)
Data
Address Register Bus
(low) Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module Name
H'70 TIER1 8 —————OVIE IMIEB IMIEA
H'71 TSR1 8 —————OVFIMFB IMFA
H'72 TCNT1H 16
H'73 TCNT1L
H'74 GRA1H 16
H'75 GRA1L
H'76 GRB1H 16
H'77 GRB1L
H'78 TCR2 8 — CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0
H'79 TIOR2 8 — IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 — IOA2 IOA1 IOA0
H'7A TIER2 8 —————OVIE IMIEB IMIEA
H'7B TSR2 8 —————OVFIMFB IMFA
H'7C TCNT2H 16
H'7D TCNT2L
H'7E GRA2H 16
H'7F GRA2L
H'80 GRB2H 16
H'81 GRB2L
H'82 TCR3 8 — CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0
H'83 TIOR3 8 — IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 — IOA2 IOA1 IOA0
H'84 TIER3 8 —————OVIE IMIEB IMIEA
H'85 TSR3 8 —————OVFIMFB IMFA
H'86 TCNT3H 16
H'87 TCNT3L
H'88 GRA3H 16
H'89 GRA3L
H'8A GRB3H 16
H'8B GRB3L
H'8C BRA3H 16
H'8D BRA3L
H'8E BRB3H 16
H'8F BRB3L
H'90 TOER 8 — — EXB4 EXA4 EB3 EB4 EA4 EA3
H'91 TOCR 8 — — — XTGD — — OLS4 OLS3
H'92 TCR4 8 — CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0
H'93 TIOR4 8 — IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 — IOA2 IOA1 IOA0
Legend
ITU: 16-bit integrated timer unit
(Continued on next page)
Bit Names
ITU channel 2
ITU channel 1
ITU channel 3
ITU
(all channels)
ITU channel 4
739
(Continued from preceding page)
Data
Address Register Bus
(low) Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module Name
H'94 TIER4 8 —————OVIE IMIEB IMIEA
H'95 TSR4 8 —————OVFIMFB IMFA
H'96 TCNT4H 16
H'97 TCNT4L
H'98 GRA4H 16
H'99 GRA4L
H'9A GRB4H 16
H'9B GRB4L
H'9C BRA4H 16
H'9D BRA4L
H'9E BRB4H 16
H'9F BRB4L
H'A0 TPMR 8 ————G3NOV G2NOV G1NOV G0NOV TPC
H'A1 TPCR 8
G3CMS1 G3CMS0 G2CMS1 G2CMS0 G1CMS1 G1CMS0 G0CMS1 G0CMS0
H'A2 NDERB 8 NDER15 NDER14 NDER13 NDER12 NDER11 NDER10 NDER9 NDER8
H'A3 NDERA 8 NDER7 NDER6 NDER5 NDER4 NDER3 NDER2 NDER1 NDER0
H'A4 NDRB*18 NDR15 NDR14 NDR13 NDR12 NDR11 NDR10 NDR9 NDR8
8 NDR15 NDR14 NDR13 NDR12 ————
H'A5 NDRA*18 NDR7 NDR6 NDR5 NDR4 NDR3 NDR2 NDR1 NDR0
8 NDR7 NDR6 NDR5 NDR4 ————
H'A6 NDRB*18————————
8————NDR11 NDR10 NDR9 NDR8
H'A7 NDRA*18————————
8————NDR3 NDR2 NDR1 NDR0
H'A8 TCSR*28 OVF WT/IT TME — — CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 WDT
H'A9 TCNT*28
H'AA — ————————
H'AB RSTCSR*38 WRST RSTOE ——————
H'AC RFSHCR 8 SRFMD
PSRAME
DRAME CAS/WE M9/M8 RFSHE — RCYCE
H'AD RTMCSR 8 CMF CMIE CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 — — —
H'AE RTCNT 8
H'AF RTCOR 8
Notes: 1. The address depends on the output trigger setting.
2. For write access to TCSR and TCNT, see section 12.2.4, Notes on Register Access.
3. For write access to RSTCSR, see section 12.2.4, Notes on Register Access.
Legend
ITU: 16-bit integrated timer unit
TPC: Programmable timing pattern controller
WDT: Watchdog timer (Continued on next page)
Bit Names
ITU channel 4
Refresh
controller
740
(Continued from preceding page)
Data
Address Register Bus
(low) Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module Name
H'B0 SMR 8 C/A/GM CHR PE O/ESTOP MP CKS1 CKS0 SCI channel 0
H'B1 BRR 8
H'B2 SCR 8 TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0
H'B3 TDR 8
H'B4 SSR 8 TDRE RDRF ORER
FER/ERS
PER TEND MPB MPBT
H'B5 RDR 8
H'B6 SCMR 8 ————SDIR SINV — SMIF
H'B7
H'B8 SMR 8 C/ACHR PE O/ESTOP MP CKS1 CKS0 SCI channel 1
H'B9 BRR 8
H'BA SCR 8 TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0
H'BB TDR 8
H'BC SSR 8 TDRE RDRF ORER FER PER TEND MPB MPBT
H'BD RDR 8
H'BE — ————————
H'BF
H'C0 P1DDR 8 P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR Port 1
H'C1 P2DDR 8 P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR Port 2
H'C2 P1DR 8 P17P16P15P14P13P12P11P10Port 1
H'C3 P2DR 8 P27P26P25P24P23P22P21P20Port 2
H'C4 P3DDR 8 P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR Port 3
H'C5 P4DDR 8 P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR Port 4
H'C6 P3DR 8 P37P36P35P34P33P32P31P30Port 3
H'C7 P4DR 8 P47P46P45P44P43P42P41P40Port 4
H'C8 P5DDR 8 ————P5
3
DDR P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR Port 5
H'C9 P6DDR 8 — P66DDR P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR Port 6
H'CA P5DR 8 ————P5
3
P52P51P50Port 5
H'CB P6DR 8 — P66P65P64P63P62P61P60Port 6
H'CC — ————————
H'CD P8DDR 8 ———P8
4
DDR P83DDR P82DDR P81DDR P80DDR Port 8
H'CE P7DR 8 P77P76P75P74P73P72P71P70Port 7
H'CF P8DR 8 ———P8
4
P83P82P81P80Port 8
H'D0 P9DDR 8 — — P95DDR P94DDR P93DDR P92DDR P91DDR P90DDR Port 9
H'D1 PADDR 8 PA7DDR PA6DDR PA5DDR PA4DDR PA3DDR PA2DDR PA1DDR PA0DDR Port A
H'D2 P9DR 8 — — P95P94P93P92P91P90Port 9
H'D3 PADR 8 PA7PA6PA5PA4PA3PA2PA1PA0Port A
Legend
SCI: Serial communication interface
(Continued on next page)
Bit Names
741
(Continued from preceding page)
Data
Address Register Bus
(low) Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module Name
H'D4 PBDDR 8 PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR Port B
H'D5 — — ———————— —
H'D6 PBDR 8 PB7PB6PB5PB4PB3PB2PB1PB0Port B
H'D7 — — ———————— —
H'D8 P2PCR P27PCR P26PCR P25PCR P24PCR P23PCR P22PCR P21PCR P20PCR Port 2
H'D9 — ————————
H'DA P4PCR 8 P47PCR P46PCR P45PCR P44PCR P43PCR P42PCR P41PCR P40PCR Port 4
H'DB P5PCR 8 ————P5
3
PCR P52PCR P51PCR P50PCR Port 5
H'DC DADR0 8 D/A converter
H'DD DADR1 8
H'DE DACR 8 DAOE1 DAOE0 DAE —————
H'DF — ————————
H'E0 ADDRAH 8 AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 A/D converter
H'E1 ADDRAL 8 AD1 AD0 ——————
H'E2 ADDRBH 8 AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2
H'E3 ADDRBL 8 AD1 AD0 ——————
H'E4 ADDRCH 8 AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2
H'E5 ADDRCL 8 AD1 AD0 ——————
H'E6 ADDRDH 8 AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2
H'E7 ADDRDL 8 AD1 AD0 ——————
H'E8 ADCSR 8 ADF ADIE ADST SCAN CKS CH2 CH1 CH0
H'E9 ADCR 8 TRGE ———————
H'EA — ————————
H'EB — ————————
H'EC ABWCR 8 ABW7 ABW6 ABW5 ABW4 ABW3 ABW2 ABW1 ABW0 Bus controller
H'ED ASTCR 8 AST7 AST6 AST5 AST4 AST3 AST2 AST1 AST0
H'EE WCR 8 ————WMS1 WMS0 WC1 WC0
H'EF WCER 8 WCE7 WCE6 WCE5 WCE4 WCE3 WCE2 WCE1 WCE0
H'F0 — ————————
H'F1 MDCR 8 —————MDS2 MDS1 MDS0 System control
H'F2 SYSCR 8 SSBY STS2 STS1 STS0 UE NMIEG — RAME
H'F3 BRCR 8 A23E A22E A21E ————BRLE Bus controller
H'F4 ISCR 8 — — IRQ5SC IRQ4SC IRQ3SC IRQ2SC IRQ1SC IRQ0SC
H'F5 IER 8 — — IRQ5E IRQ4E IRQ3E IRQ2E IRQ1E IRQ0E
H'F6 ISR 8 — — IRQ5F IRQ4F IRQ3F IRQ2F IRQ1F IRQ0F
H'F7 — ————————
H'F8 IPRA 8 IPRA7 IPRA6 IPRA5 IPRA4 IPRA3 IPRA2 IPRA1 IPRA0
H'F9 IPRB 8 IPRB7 IPRB6 IPRB5 — IPRB3 IPRB2 IPRB1 —
(Continued on next page)
Bit Names
Interrupt
controller
742
(Continued from preceding page)
Data
Address Register Bus
(low) Name Width Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Module Name
H'FA— ————————
H'FB — ————————
H'FC
H'FD — ————————
H'FE — ————————
H'FF — ————————
Bit Names
743
B.2 Function
TSTR Timer Start Register H'60 ITU (all channels)
Register
name Address to which
the register is mapped Name of on-chip
supporting
module
Register
acronym
Bit
numbers
Initial bit
values Names of the
bits. Dashes
(—) indicate
reserved bits.
Full name
of bit
Descriptions
of bit settings
Read only
Write only
Read and write
R
W
R/W
Possible types of access
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
STR4
0
R/W
3
STR3
0
R/W
0
STR0
0
R/W
2
STR2
0
R/W
1
STR1
0
R/W
Counter start 0
0 TCNT0 is halted
1 TCNT0 is counting
Counter start 3
0 TCNT3 is halted
1 TCNT3 is counting
Counter start 1
0 TCNT1 is halted
1 TCNT1 is counting
Counter start 2
0 TCNT2 is halted
1 TCNT2 is counting
Counter start 4
0 TCNT4 is halted
1 TCNT4 is counting
744
MAR0A R/E/H/L—Memory Address Register 0A R/E/H/L H'20, H'21, DMAC0
H'22, H'23
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
30
1
—
28
1
—
26
1
—
24
1
—
22
R/W
16
R/W
20
R/W
18
R/W
31
1
—
29
1
—
27
1
—
25
1
—
23
R/W
17
R/W
21
R/W
19
R/W
MAR0AR
Source or destination address
MAR0AE
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
R/W
12
R/W
10
R/W
8
R/W
6
R/W
0
R/W
4
R/W
2
R/W
15
R/W
13
R/W
11
R/W
9
R/W
7
R/W
1
R/W
5
R/W
3
R/W
MAR0AH MAR0AL
Undetermined
Undetermined Undetermined
745
ETCR0A H/L—Execute Transfer Count Register 0A H/L H'24, H'25 DMAC0
• Short address mode
I/O mode and idle mode
Repeat mode
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
Transfer counter
ETCR0AH
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
Initial count
ETCR0AL
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
R/W
12
R/W
10
R/W
8
R/W
6
R/W
0
R/W
4
R/W
2
R/W
Transfer counter
Undetermined
15
R/W
13
R/W
11
R/W
9
R/W
7
R/W
1
R/W
5
R/W
3
R/W
746
ETCR0A H/L—Execute Transfer Count Register 0A H/L H'24, H'25 DMAC0
(cont)
• Full address mode
Normal mode
Block transfer mode
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
R/W
12
R/W
10
R/W
8
R/W
6
R/W
0
R/W
4
R/W
2
R/W
Transfer counter
Undetermined
15
R/W
13
R/W
11
R/W
9
R/W
7
R/W
1
R/W
5
R/W
3
R/W
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
Block size counter
ETCR0AH
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
Initial block size
ETCR0AL
747
IOAR0A—I/O Address Register 0A H'26 DMAC0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Short address mode:
Full address mode:
Undetermined
source or destination address
not used
748
DTCR0A—Data Transfer Control Register 0A H'27 DMAC0
• Short address mode
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
DTE
0
R/W
6
DTSZ
0
R/W
5
DTID
0
R/W
4
RPE
0
R/W
3
DTIE
0
R/W
0
DTS0
0
R/W
2
DTS2
0
R/W
1
DTS1
0
R/W
Data transfer enable
0 Data transfer is disabled
1 Data transfer is enabled
Data transfer size
0 Byte-size transfer
1 Word-size transfer
Data transfer increment/decrement
0 Incremented:
1 Decremented:
Data transfer select
DTS2
Data transfer interrupt enable
0 Interrupt requested by DTE bit is disabled
1 Interrupt requested by DTE bit is enabled
0
1
Data Transfer Activation Source
Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU channel 0
Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU channel 1
Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU channel 2
Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU channel 3
SCI0 transmit-data-empty interrupt
SCI0 receive-data-full interrupt
Bit 2 DTS1
0
1
0
1
Bit 1 DTS0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Bit 0
Repeat enable
Description
I/O mode
Repeat mode
Idle mode
RPE
0
1
DTIE
0
1
0
1
If DTSZ = 0, MAR is incremented by 1 after each transfer
If DTSZ = 1, MAR is incremented by 2 after each transfer
If DTSZ = 0, MAR is decremented by 1 after each transfer
If DTSZ = 1, MAR is decremented by 2 after each transfer
Transfer in full address mode (channel A)
1Transfer in full address mode (channel A)
749
DTCR0A—Data Transfer Control Register 0A H'27 DMAC0
(cont)
• Full address mode
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
DTE
0
R/W
6
DTSZ
0
R/W
5
SAID
0
R/W
4
SAIDE
0
R/W
3
DTIE
0
R/W
0
DTS0A
0
R/W
2
DTS2A
0
R/W
1
DTS1A
0
R/W
Data transfer enable
0 Data transfer is disabled
1 Data transfer is enabled
Source address increment/decrement (bit 5)
Source address increment/decrement enable (bit 4)
Data transfer interrupt enable
Data transfer select 0A
0 Normal mode
1 Block transfer mode
Data transfer select 2A and 1A
Set both bits to 1
Data transfer size
0 Byte-size transfer
1 Word-size transfer
Increment/Decrement Enable
MARA is held fixed
MARA is held fixed
Decremented:
0
1
0
1
0
1
SAID
Bit 5 SAIDE
Bit 4
Incremented:
0 Interrupt request by DTE bit is disabled
1 Interrupt request by DTE bit is enabled
If DTSZ = 0, MARA is decremented by 1 after each transfer
If DTSZ = 1, MARA is decremented by 2 after each transfer
If DTSZ = 0, MARA is incremented by 1 after each transfer
If DTSZ = 1, MARA is incremented by 2 after each transfer
750
MAR0B R/E/H/L—Memory Address Register 0B R/E/H/L H'28, H'29, DMAC0
H'2A, H'2B
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
30
1
—
28
1
—
26
1
—
24
1
—
22
R/W
16
R/W
20
R/W
18
R/W
31
1
—
29
1
—
27
1
—
25
1
—
23
R/W
17
R/W
21
R/W
19
R/W
MAR0BR
Source or destination address
MAR0BE
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
R/W
12
R/W
10
R/W
8
R/W
6
R/W
0
R/W
4
R/W
2
R/W
15
R/W
13
R/W
11
R/W
9
R/W
7
R/W
1
R/W
5
R/W
3
R/W
MAR0BH MAR0BL
Undetermined
Undetermined Undetermined
751
ETCR0B H/L—Execute Transfer Count Register 0B H/L H'2C, H'2D DMAC0
• Short address mode
I/O mode and idle mode
Repeat mode
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
R/W
12
R/W
10
R/W
8
R/W
6
R/W
0
R/W
4
R/W
2
R/W
Transfer counter
Undetermined
15
R/W
13
R/W
11
R/W
9
R/W
7
R/W
1
R/W
5
R/W
3
R/W
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
Transfer counter
ETCR0BH
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
Initial count
ETCR0BL
752
ETCR0B H/L—Execute Transfer Count Register 0B H/L H'2C, H'2D DMAC0
(cont)
• Full address mode
Normal mode
Block transfer mode
IOAR0B—I/O Address Register 0B H'2E DMAC0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
R/W
12
R/W
10
R/W
8
R/W
6
R/W
0
R/W
4
R/W
2
R/W
Not used
Undetermined
15
R/W
13
R/W
11
R/W
9
R/W
7
R/W
1
R/W
5
R/W
3
R/W
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
R/W
12
R/W
10
R/W
8
R/W
6
R/W
0
R/W
4
R/W
2
R/W
Block transfer counter
Undetermined
15
R/W
13
R/W
11
R/W
9
R/W
7
R/W
1
R/W
5
R/W
3
R/W
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Short address mode:
Full address mode:
Undetermined
source or destination address
not used
753
DTCR0B—Data Transfer Control Register 0B H'2F DMAC0
• Short address mode
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
DTE
0
R/W
6
DTSZ
0
R/W
5
DTID
0
R/W
4
RPE
0
R/W
3
DTIE
0
R/W
0
DTS0
0
R/W
2
DTS2
0
R/W
1
DTS1
0
R/W
Data transfer enable
0 Data transfer is disabled
1 Data transfer is enabled
Data transfer size
0 Byte-size transfer
1 Word-size transfer
Data transfer increment/decrement
0 Incremented:
1 Decremented:
Data transfer select
DTS2
Data transfer interrupt enable
0 Interrupt requested by DTE bit is disabled
1 Interrupt requested by DTE bit is enabled
An interrupt request is issued to the CPU when the DTE bit = 0
0
1
Data Transfer Activation Source
Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU channel 0
Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU channel 1
Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU channel 2
Compare match/input capture A interrupt from ITU channel 3
SCI0 transmit-data-empty interrupt
SCI0 receive-data-full interrupt
Falling edge of input
Bit 2 DTS1
0
1
0
1
Bit 1 DTS0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 0
Repeat enable Description
I/O mode
Repeat mode
Idle mode
RPE
0
1
DTIE
0
1
0
1
0Low level of input1
DREQ
DREQ
If DTSZ = 0, MAR is incremented by 1 after each transfer
If DTSZ = 1, MAR is incremented by 2 after each transfer
If DTSZ = 0, MAR is decremented by 1 after each transfer
If DTSZ = 1, MAR is decremented by 2 after each transfer
754
DTCR0B—Data Transfer Control Register 0B H'2F DMAC0
cont
• Full address mode
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
DTME
0
R/W
6
—
0
R/W
5
DAID
0
R/W
4
DAIDE
0
R/W
3
TMS
0
R/W
0
DTS0B
0
R/W
2
DTS2B
0
R/W
1
DTS1B
0
R/W
Data transfer master enable
0 Data transfer is disabled
1 Data transfer is enabled
Destination address increment/decrement (bit 5)
Destination address increment/decrement enable (bit 4)
Increment/Decrement Enable
MARB is held fixed
MARB is held fixed
Decremented:
0
1
0
1
0
1
DAID
Bit 5 DAIDE
Bit 4
Incremented:
Transfer mode select
0 Destination is the block area in block transfer mode
1 Source is the block area in block transfer mode
Data transfer select 2B to 0B
DTS2B
0
1
Normal Mode
Auto-request
(burst mode)
Not available
Auto-request
(cycle-steal mode)
Not available
Not available
Not available
Falling edge of
Bit 2 DTS1B
0
1
0
1
Bit 1 DTS0B
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 0
0Low level input at1
Data Transfer Activation Source
Block Transfer Mode
Compare match/input capture
A from ITU channel 0
Compare match/input capture
A from ITU channel 1
Compare match/input capture
A from ITU channel 2
Compare match/input capture
A from ITU channel 3
Not available
Not available
Falling edge of
Not available
DREQ
DREQ
DREQ
If DTSZ = 0, MARB is incremented by 1 after each transfer
If DTSZ = 1, MARB is incremented by 2 after each transfer
If DTSZ = 0, MARB is decremented by 1 after each transfer
If DTSZ = 1, MARB is decremented by 2 after each transfer
755
MAR1A R/E/H/L—Memory Address Register 1A R/E/H/L H'30, H'31, DMAC1
H'32, H'33
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
30
1
—
28
1
—
26
1
—
24
1
—
22
R/W
16
R/W
20
R/W
18
R/W
31
1
—
29
1
—
27
1
—
25
1
—
23
R/W
17
R/W
21
R/W
19
R/W
MAR1AR MAR1AE
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
R/W
12
R/W
10
R/W
8
R/W
6
R/W
0
R/W
4
R/W
2
R/W
15
R/W
13
R/W
11
R/W
9
R/W
7
R/W
1
R/W
5
R/W
3
R/W
MAR1AH MAR1AL
Undetermined
Undetermined Undetermined
Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0.
756
ETCR1A H/L—Execute Transfer Count Register 1A H/L H'34, H'35 DMAC1
IOAR1A—I/O Address Register 1A H'36 DMAC1
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
R/W
12
R/W
10
R/W
8
R/W
6
R/W
0
R/W
4
R/W
2
R/W
15
R/W
13
R/W
11
R/W
9
R/W
7
R/W
1
R/W
5
R/W
3
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0.
Undetermined
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
ETCR1AH
ETCR1AL
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0.
757
DTCR1A—Data Transfer Control Register 1A H'37 DMAC1
• Short address mode
• Full address mode
MAR1B R/E/H/L—Memory Address Register 1B R/E/H/L H'38, H'39, DMAC1
H'3A, H'3B
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
DTE
0
R/W
6
DTSZ
0
R/W
5
DTID
0
R/W
4
RPE
0
R/W
3
DTIE
0
R/W
0
DTS0
0
R/W
2
DTS2
0
R/W
1
DTS1
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
DTE
0
R/W
6
DTSZ
0
R/W
5
SAID
0
R/W
4
SAIDE
0
R/W
3
DTIE
0
R/W
0
DTS0A
0
R/W
2
DTS2A
0
R/W
1
DTS1A
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
30
1
—
28
1
—
26
1
—
24
1
—
22
R/W
16
R/W
20
R/W
18
R/W
31
1
—
29
1
—
27
1
—
25
1
—
23
R/W
17
R/W
21
R/W
19
R/W
MAR1BR MAR1BE
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
R/W
12
R/W
10
R/W
8
R/W
6
R/W
0
R/W
4
R/W
2
R/W
15
R/W
13
R/W
11
R/W
9
R/W
7
R/W
1
R/W
5
R/W
3
R/W
MAR1BH MAR1BL
Undetermined
Undetermined Undetermined
Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0.
758
ETCR1B H/L—Execute Transfer Count Register 1B H/L H'3C, H'3D DMAC1
IOAR1B—I/O Address Register 1B H'3E DMAC1
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
R/W
12
R/W
10
R/W
8
R/W
6
R/W
0
R/W
4
R/W
2
R/W
15
R/W
13
R/W
11
R/W
9
R/W
7
R/W
1
R/W
5
R/W
3
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0.
Undetermined
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
ETCR1BH
ETCR1BL
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
R/W
6
R/W
5
R/W
4
R/W
3
R/W
0
R/W
2
R/W
1
R/W
Undetermined
Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0.
759
DTCR1B—Data Transfer Control Register 1B H'3F DMAC1
• Short address mode
• Full address mode
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
DTE
0
R/W
6
DTSZ
0
R/W
5
DTID
0
R/W
4
RPE
0
R/W
3
DTIE
0
R/W
0
DTS0
0
R/W
2
DTS2
0
R/W
1
DTS1
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
DTME
0
R/W
6
—
0
R/W
5
DAID
0
R/W
4
DAIDE
0
R/W
3
TMS
0
R/W
0
DTS0B
0
R/W
2
DTS2B
0
R/W
1
DTS1B
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for DMAC0.
760
FLMCR—Flash Memory Control Register H'40 Flash memory
761
Bit
Initial value
R/W
7
0
VPP EV
6543210
0000000
R — — R/W R/W R/W R/W
V E — — PV E P
Program mode
****
*
0
1
R/W
Exit from program mode (Initial value)
Transition to program mode
Erase mode
0
1Exit from erase mode (Initial value)
Transition to erase mode
Program-verify mode
0
1Exit from program-verify mode (Initial value)
Transition to program-verify mode
Erase-verify mode
0
1Exit from erase-verify mode (Initial value)
Transition to erase-verify mode
0
1VPP pin 12 V power supply is disabled (Initial value)
VPP pin 12 V power supply is enabled
V enable
PP
Programming power
0
1Cleared when 12 V is not applied to V (Initial value)
Set when 12 V is applied to V
PP
PP
PP
Note: *The initial value is H'00 in modes 5, 6, and 7 (on-chip flash memory enabled). In modes
1, 2, 3, and 4 (on-chip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be modified and is
always read as H'FF.
EBR1—Erase Block Register 1 H'42 Flash memory
EBR2—Erase Block Register 2 H'43 Flash memory
762
Bit
Initial value
R/W
7
0
LB7
6543210
00000
R/W R/W R/W R/W
*00
LB6 LB5 LB4 LB3 LB2 LB1 LB0
****
R/W R/W R/W
***
R/W*
Large block 7 to 0
0
1Block LB7 to LB0 is not selected (Initial value)
Block LB7 to LB0 is selected
Note: *The initial value is H'00 in modes 5, 6 and 7 (on-chip flash memory enabled). In modes
1, 2, 3, and 4 (on-chip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be modified and is always
read as H'FF.
Bit
Initial value
R/W
7
0
SB7
6543210
00000
R/W R/W R/W R/W
*00
SB6 SB5 SB4 SB3 SB2 SB1 SB0
****
R/W R/W R/W
***
R/W*
Small block 7 to 0
0
1Block SB7 to SB0 is not selected (Initial value)
Block SB7 to SB0 is selected
Note: *The initial value is H'00 in modes 5, 6 and 7 (on-chip flash memory enabled). In modes
1, 2, 3, and 4 (on-chip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be modified and is always
read as H'FF.
RAMCR—RAM Control Register H'48 Flash memory
763
Bit
Initial value
R/W
7
0
FLER
6543210
10000
R — — R/W R/W R/W R/W
———
*
RAMS RAM2 RAM1 RAM0
11
—
RAM select, RAM 2 to RAM 0
Bit 3
RAMS
0RAM Area
Bit 2
RAM 2
1/0
Bit 1
RAM 1
1/0
Bit 0
RAM 0
1/0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
H'FFF000 to H'FFF1FF
H'01F000 to H'01F1FF
H'01F200 to H'01F3FF
H'01F400 to H'01F5FF
H'01F600 to H'01F7FF
H'01F800 to H'01F9FF
H'01FA00 to H'01FBFF
H'01FC00 to H'01FDFF
H'01FE00 to H'01FFFF
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
Flash memory error
0
1
Flash memory is not write/erase-protected (Initial value)
(is not in error protect mode)
Flash memory is write/erase-protected
(is in error protect mode)
DASTCR—D/A Standby Control Register H'5C System control
DIVCR—Division Control Register H'5D System control
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
DASTE
0
R/W
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
D/A standby enable
0 D/A output is disabled in software standby mode
1 D/A output is enabled in software standby mode
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
DIV0
0
R/W
2
—
1
—
1
DIV1
0
R/W
Divide 1 and 0
DIV1 Frequency
Division Ratio
DIV0
Bit 0
Bit 1
0
1
1/1
1/2
1/4
1/8
0
0
1
1
7
—
1
—
764
MSTCR—Module Standby Control Register H'5E System control
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
PSTOP
0
R/W
6
—
1
—
5
MSTOP5
0
R/W
4
MSTOP4
0
R/W
3
MSTOP3
0
R/W
0
MSTOP0
0
R/W
2
MSTOP2
0
R/W
1
MSTOP1
0
R/W
Module standby 0
0 A/D converter operates normally (Initial value)
1 A/D converter is in standby state
Module standby 3
0 SCI1 operates normally (Initial value)
1 SCI1 is in standby state
Module standby 1
0 Refresh controller operates normally (Initial value)
1 Refresh controller is in standby state
Module standby 2
0 DMAC operates normally (Initial value)
1 DMAC is in standby state
Module standby 4
0 SCI0 operates normally (Initial value)
1 SCI0 is in standby state
Module standby 5
0 ITU operates normally (Initial value)
1 ITU is in standby state
ø clock stop
0 ø clock output is enabled (Initial value)
1 ø clock output is disabled
765
CSCR—Chip Select Control Register H'5F System control
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
STR4
0
R/W
3
STR3
0
R/W
0
STR0
0
R/W
2
STR2
0
R/W
1
STR1
0
R/W
Counter start 0
0 TCNT0 is halted
1 TCNT0 is counting
Counter start 3
0 TCNT3 is halted
1 TCNT3 is counting
Counter start 1
0 TCNT1 is halted
1 TCNT1 is counting
Counter start 2
0 TCNT2 is halted
1 TCNT2 is counting
Counter start 4
0 TCNT4 is halted
1 TCNT4 is counting
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
CS7E
0
R/W
6
CS6E
0
R/W
5
CS5E
0
R/W
4
CS4E
0
R/W
3
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
Chip select 7 to 4 enable
(n = 7 to 4)
Output of chip select signal CSn is disabled (Initial value)
Output of chip select signal CSn is enabled
Bit n
0
1
DescriptionCSnE
766
TSTR—Timer Start Register H'60 ITU (all channels)
TSNC—Timer Synchro Register H'61 ITU (all channels)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
SYNC4
0
R/W
3
SYNC3
0
R/W
0
SYNC0
0
R/W
2
SYNC2
0
R/W
1
SYNC1
0
R/W
Timer sync 0
0 TCNT0 operates independently
1 TCNT0 is synchronized
Timer sync 3
0 TCNT3 operates independently
1 TCNT3 is synchronized
Timer sync 1
0 TCNT1 operates independently
1 TCNT1 is synchronized
Timer sync 2
0 TCNT2 operates independently
1 TCNT2 is synchronized
Timer sync 4
0 TCNT4 operates independently
1 TCNT4 is synchronized
767
TMDR—Timer Mode Register H'62 ITU (all channels)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
MDF
0
R/W
5
FDIR
0
R/W
4
PWM4
0
R/W
3
PWM3
0
R/W
0
PWM0
0
R/W
2
PWM2
0
R/W
1
PWM1
0
R/W
PWM mode 0
0 Channel 0 operates normally
1 Channel 0 operates in PWM mode
PWM mode 3
0 Channel 3 operates normally
1 Channel 3 operates in PWM mode
PWM mode 1
0 Channel 1 operates normally
1 Channel 1 operates in PWM mode
PWM mode 2
0 Channel 2 operates normally
1 Channel 2 operates in PWM mode
PWM mode 4
0 Channel 4 operates normally
1 Channel 4 operates in PWM mode
Flag direction
0 OVF is set to 1 in TSR2 when TCNT2 overflows or underflows
1 OVF is set to 1 in TSR2 when TCNT2 overflows
Phase counting mode flag
0 Channel 2 operates normally
1 Channel 2 operates in phase counting mode
768
TFCR—Timer Function Control Register H'63 ITU (all channels)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
CMD1
0
R/W
4
CMD0
0
R/W
3
BFB4
0
R/W
0
BFA3
0
R/W
2
BFA4
0
R/W
1
BFB3
0
R/W
Buffer mode A3
0 GRA3 operates normally
1 GRA3 is buffered by BRA3
Buffer mode B4
0 GRB4 operates normally
1 GRB4 is buffered by BRB4
Buffer mode B3
0 GRB3 operates normally
1 GRB3 is buffered by BRB3
Buffer mode A4
0 GRA4 operates normally
1 GRA4 is buffered by BRA4
Combination mode 1 and 0
Channels 3 and 4 operate normally
Channels 3 and 4 operate together in complementary PWM mode
Channels 3 and 4 operate together in reset-synchronized PWM mode
Bit 5
0
1
Bit 4
0
1
0
1
Operating Mode of Channels 3 and 4CMD1 CMD0
769
TCR0—Timer Control Register 0 H'64 ITU0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
CCLR1
0
R/W
5
CCLR0
0
R/W
4
CKEG1
0
R/W
3
CKEG0
0
R/W
0
TPSC0
0
R/W
2
TPSC2
0
R/W
1
TPSC1
0
R/W
Timer prescaler 2 to 0
Clock edge 1 and 0
Counter clear 1 and 0
TCNT is not cleared
TCNT is cleared by GRB compare match or input capture
Synchronous clear: TCNT is cleared in synchronization
with other synchronized timers
Bit 6
0
1
Bit 5
0
0
1
TCNT Clear SourceCCLR1 CCLR0
TCNT is cleared by GRA compare match or input capture1
Rising edges counted
Both edges counted
Bit 4
0
1
Bit 3
0
—
Counted Edges of External ClockCKEG1CKEG0
Falling edges counted1
TPSC2
1
TCNT Clock Source
Internal clock: ø
Internal clock: ø/2
Internal clock: ø/4
Internal clock: ø/8
External clock A: TCLKA input
External clock B: TCLKB input
External clock C: TCLKC input
Bit 2 TPSC1
0
1
0
1
Bit 1 TPSC0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 0
0External clock D: TCLKD input1
0
770
TIOR0—Timer I/O Control Register 0 H'65 ITU0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
IOB2
0
R/W
5
IOB1
0
R/W
4
IOB0
0
R/W
3
—
1
—
0
IOA0
0
R/W
2
IOA2
0
R/W
1
IOA1
0
R/W
I/O control A2 to A0
IOA2
1
GRA Function
GRA is an output
compare register
GRA is an input
capture register
IOA1
0
1
0
1
Bit 1 IOA0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 0
0
1
0
Bit 2
No output at compare match
0 output at GRA compare match
1 output at GRA compare match
Output toggles at GRA compare match
GRA captures rising edge of input
GRA captures falling edge of input
GRA captures both edges of input
I/O control B2 to B0
IOB2
1
GRB Function
GRB is an output
compare register
GRB is an input
capture register
IOB1
0
1
0
1
Bit 5 IOB0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 4
0
1
0
Bit 6
No output at compare match
0 output at GRB compare match
1 output at GRB compare match
Output toggles at GRB compare match
GRB captures rising edge of input
GRB captures falling edge of input
GRB captures both edges of input
771
TIER0—Timer Interrupt Enable Register 0 H'66 ITU0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
IMIEA
0
R/W
2
OVIE
0
R/W
1
IMIEB
0
R/W
Input capture/compare match interrupt enable A
0 IMIA interrupt requested by IMFA flag is disabled
1 IMIA interrupt requested by IMFA flag is enabled
Input capture/compare match interrupt enable B
0 IMIB interrupt requested by IMFB flag is disabled
1 IMIB interrupt requested by IMFB flag is enabled
Overflow interrupt enable
0 OVI interrupt requested by OVF flag is disabled
1 OVI interrupt requested by OVF flag is enabled
772
TSR0—Timer Status Register 0 H'67 ITU0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
IMFA
0
R/(W)
2
OVF
0
R/(W)
1
IMFB
0
R/(W)
Input capture/compare match flag A
0 [Clearing condition]
Overflow flag
***
Read IMFA when IMFA = 1, then write 0 in IMFA
1 [Setting conditions]
TCNT = GRA when GRA functions as an output compare
register.
TCNT value is transferred to GRA by an input capture
signal, when GRA functions as an input capture register.
Input capture/compare match flag B
0 [Clearing condition]
Read IMFB when IMFB = 1, then write 0 in IMFB
1 [Setting conditions]
TCNT = GRB when GRB functions as an output compare
register.
TCNT value is transferred to GRB by an input capture
signal, when GRB functions as an input capture register.
0 [Clearing condition]
Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF
1 [Setting condition]
TCNT overflowed from H'FFFF to H'0000 or
underflowed from H'0000 to H'FFFF
Note: Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.*
773
TCNT0 H/L—Timer Counter 0 H/L H'68, H'69 ITU0
GRA0 H/L—General Register A0 H/L H'6A, H'6B ITU0
GRB0 H/L—General Register B0 H/L H'6C, H'6D ITU0
TCR1—Timer Control Register 1 H'6E ITU1
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
0
R/W
12
0
R/W
10
0
R/W
8
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
Up-counter
15
0
R/W
13
0
R/W
11
0
R/W
9
0
R/W
7
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
Output compare or input capture register
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
Output compare or input capture register
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
CCLR1
0
R/W
5
CCLR0
0
R/W
4
CKEG1
0
R/W
3
CKEG0
0
R/W
0
TPSC0
0
R/W
2
TPSC2
0
R/W
1
TPSC1
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
774
TIOR1—Timer I/O Control Register 1 H'6F ITU1
TIER1—Timer Interrupt Enable Register 1 H'70 ITU1
TSR1—Timer Status Register 1 H'71 ITU1
TCNT1 H/L—Timer Counter 1 H/L H'72, H'73 ITU1
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
IOB2
0
R/W
5
IOB1
0
R/W
4
IOB0
0
R/W
3
—
1
—
0
IOA0
0
R/W
2
IOA2
0
R/W
1
IOA1
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
IMIEA
0
R/W
2
OVIE
0
R/W
1
IMIEB
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
IMFA
0
R/(W)
2
OVF
0
R/(W)
1
IMFB
0
R/(W)
Notes:
***
*
Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
0
R/W
12
0
R/W
10
0
R/W
8
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
15
0
R/W
13
0
R/W
11
0
R/W
9
0
R/W
7
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
775
GRA1 H/L—General Register A1 H/L H'74, H'75 ITU1
GRB1 H/L—General Register B1 H/L H'76, H'77 ITU1
TCR2—Timer Control Register 2 H'78 ITU2
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
CCLR1
0
R/W
5
CCLR0
0
R/W
4
CKEG1
0
R/W
3
CKEG0
0
R/W
0
TPSC0
0
R/W
2
TPSC2
0
R/W
1
TPSC1
0
R/W
Notes: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
When channel 2 is used in phase counting mode, the counter clock source selection by
bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 is ignored.
1.
2.
776
TIOR2—Timer I/O Control Register 2 H'79 ITU2
TIER2—Timer Interrupt Enable Register 2 H'7A ITU2
TSR2—Timer Status Register 2 H'7B ITU2
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
IOB2
0
R/W
5
IOB1
0
R/W
4
IOB0
0
R/W
3
—
1
—
0
IOA0
0
R/W
2
IOA2
0
R/W
1
IOA1
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
777
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
IMIEA
0
R/W
2
OVIE
0
R/W
1
IMIEB
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
IMFA
0
R/(W)
2
OVF
0
R/(W)
1
IMFB
0
R/(W) ***
Note: Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
*
Overflow flag
[Clearing condition]
Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF.
[Setting condition]
The TCNT value overflows (from H'FFFF to H'0000)
or underflows (from H'0000 to H'FFFF)
0
1
The function is the same as ITU0.
TCNT2 H/L—Timer Counter 2 H/L H'7C, H'7D ITU2
GRA2 H/L—General Register A2 H/L H'7E, H'7F ITU2
GRB2 H/L—General Register B2 H/L H'80, H'81 ITU2
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
0
R/W
12
0
R/W
10
0
R/W
8
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
Phase counting mode:
Other modes:
15
0
R/W
13
0
R/W
11
0
R/W
9
0
R/W
7
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
up/down counter
up-counter
778
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
TCR3—Timer Control Register 3 H'82 ITU3
TIOR3—Timer I/O Control Register 3 H'83 ITU3
TIER3—Timer Interrupt Enable Register 3 H'84 ITU3
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
IOB2
0
R/W
5
IOB1
0
R/W
4
IOB0
0
R/W
3
—
1
—
0
IOA0
0
R/W
2
IOA2
0
R/W
1
IOA1
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
779
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
CCLR1
0
R/W
5
CCLR0
0
R/W
4
CKEG1
0
R/W
3
CKEG0
0
R/W
0
TPSC0
0
R/W
2
TPSC2
0
R/W
1
TPSC1
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
IMIEA
0
R/W
2
OVIE
0
R/W
1
IMIEB
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
TSR3—Timer Status Register 3 H'85 ITU3
TCNT3 H/L—Timer Counter 3 H/L H'86, H'87 ITU3
GRA3 H/L—General Register A3 H/L H'88, H'89 ITU3
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
0
R/W
12
0
R/W
10
0
R/W
8
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
Complementary PWM mode:
Other modes:
15
0
R/W
13
0
R/W
11
0
R/W
9
0
R/W
7
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
up/down counter
up-counter
780
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
Output compare or input capture register (can be buffered)
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
IMFA
0
R/(W)
2
OVF
0
R/(W)
1
IMFB
0
R/(W) ***
Overflow flag
0 [Clearing condition]
Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 1 in OVF
1 [Setting condition]
TCNT overflowed from H'FFFF to H'0000 or underflowed from
H'0000 to H'FFFF
Bit functions are the
same as for ITU0
Note: Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.*
GRB3 H/L—General Register B3 H/L H'8A, H'8B ITU3
BRA3 H/L—Buffer Register A3 H/L H'8C, H'8D ITU3
BRB3 H/L—Buffer Register B3 H/L H'8E, H'8F ITU3
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
Used to buffer GRB
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
781
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
Output compare or input capture register (can be buffered)
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
Used to buffer GRA
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
TOER—Timer Output Enable Register H'90 ITU (all channels)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
EXB4
1
R/W
4
EXA4
1
R/W
3
EB3
1
R/W
0
EA3
1
R/W
2
EB4
1
R/W
1
EA4
1
R/W
Master enable TIOCA3
0 TIOCA output is disabled regardless of TIOR3, TMDR, and TFCR settings
1 TIOCA is enabled for output according to TIOR3, TMDR, and TFCR settings
Master enable TIOCB3
0 TIOCB output is disabled regardless of TIOR3 and TFCR settings
1 TIOCB is enabled for output according to TIOR3 and TFCR settings
Master enable TIOCA4
0 TIOCA output is disabled regardless of TIOR4, TMDR, and TFCR settings
1 TIOCA is enabled for output according to TIOR4, TMDR, and TFCR settings
Master enable TIOCB4
0 TIOCB output is disabled regardless of TIOR4 and TFCR settings
1 TIOCB is enabled for output according to TIOR4 and TFCR settings
Master enable TOCXA4
0 TOCXA output is disabled regardless of TFCR settings
1 TOCXA is enabled for output according to TFCR settings
Master enable TOCXB4
0 TOCXB output is disabled regardless of TFCR settings
1 TOCXB is enabled for output according to TFCR settings
4
4
4
4
3
3
4
4
4
4
3
3
782
TOCR—Timer Output Control Register H'91 ITU (all channels)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
1
R/W
3
—
1
—
0
OLS3
1
R/W
2
—
1
—
1
OLS4
1
R/W
Output level select 3
0 TIOCB , TOCXA , and TOCXB outputs are inverted
1 TIOCB , TOCXA , and TOCXB outputs are not inverted
Output level select 4
0 TIOCA , TIOCA , and TIOCB outputs are inverted
1 TIOCA , TIOCA , and TIOCB outputs are not inverted
External trigger disable
0 Input capture A in channel 1 is used as an external trigger signal in
reset-synchronized PWM mode and complementary PWM mode
1 External triggering is disabled
XTGD
Note:*When an external trigger occurs, bits 5 to 0 in TOER are cleared to 0, disabling ITU
output.
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
*
783
TCR4—Timer Control Register 4 H'92 ITU4
TIOR4—Timer I/O Control Register 4 H'93 ITU4
TIER4—Timer Interrupt Enable Register 4 H'94 ITU4
TSR4—Timer Status Register 4 H'95 ITU4
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
CCLR1
0
R/W
5
CCLR0
0
R/W
4
CKEG1
0
R/W
3
CKEG0
0
R/W
0
TPSC0
0
R/W
2
TPSC2
0
R/W
1
TPSC1
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
IOB2
0
R/W
5
IOB1
0
R/W
4
IOB0
0
R/W
3
—
1
—
0
IOA0
0
R/W
2
IOA2
0
R/W
1
IOA1
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
IMIEA
0
R/W
2
OVIE
0
R/W
1
IMIEB
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
IMFA
0
R/(W)
2
OVF
0
R/(W)
1
IMFB
0
R/(W) ***
Notes: *
Bit functions are the same as for ITU0.
Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
784
TCNT4 H/L—Timer Counter 4 H/L H'96, H'97 ITU4
GRA4 H/L—General Register A4 H/L H'98, H'99 ITU4
GRB4 H/L—General Register B4 H/L H'9A, H'9B ITU4
BRA4 H/L—Buffer Register A4 H/L H'9C, H'9D ITU4
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
0
R/W
12
0
R/W
10
0
R/W
8
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
15
0
R/W
13
0
R/W
11
0
R/W
9
0
R/W
7
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU3.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU3.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU3.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU3.
785
BRB4 H/L—Buffer Register B4 H/L H'9E, H'9F ITU4
TPMR—TPC Output Mode Register H'A0 TPC
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
1
R/W
12
1
R/W
10
1
R/W
8
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
15
1
R/W
13
1
R/W
11
1
R/W
9
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for ITU3.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
G3NOV
0
R/W
0
G0NOV
0
R/W
2
G2NOV
0
R/W
1
G1NOV
0
R/W
Group 3 non-overlap
0 Normal TPC output in group 3
Output values change at compare match A in the selected ITU channel
1 Non-overlapping TPC output in group 3, controlled by compare match
A and B in the selected ITU channel
Group 2 non-overlap
0 Normal TPC output in group 2
Output values change at compare match A in the selected ITU channel
1 Non-overlapping TPC output in group 2, controlled by compare match
A and B in the selected ITU channel
Group 1 non-overlap
0 Normal TPC output in group 1
Output values change at compare match A in the selected ITU channel
1 Non-overlapping TPC output in group 1, controlled by compare match
A and B in the selected ITU channel
Group 0 non-overlap
0 Normal TPC output in group 0
Output values change at compare match A in the selected ITU channel
1 Non-overlapping TPC output in group 0, controlled by compare match
A and B in the selected ITU channel
786
TPCR—TPC Output Control Register H'A1 TPC
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
G3CMS1
1
R/W
6
G3CMS0
1
R/W
5
G2CMS1
1
R/W
4
G2CMS0
1
R/W
3
G1CMS1
1
R/W
0
G0CMS0
1
R/W
2
G1CMS0
1
R/W
1
G0CMS1
1
R/W
Group 3 compare match select 1 and 0
TPC output group 3 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 0
TPC output group 3 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 2
TPC output group 3 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 3
Bit 7
0
1
Bit 6
0
0
1
ITU Channel Selected as Output TriggerG3CMS1 G3CMS0
TPC output group 3 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 11 15
15
15
15
12
12
12
12
Group 2 compare match select 1 and 0
TPC output group 2 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 0
TPC output group 2 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 2
TPC output group 2 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 3
Bit 5
0
1
Bit 4
0
0
1
ITU Channel Selected as Output TriggerG2CMS1 G2CMS0
TPC output group 2 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 11 11
11
11
11
8
8
8
8
Group 1 compare match select 1 and 0
TPC output group 1 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 0
TPC output group 1 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 2
TPC output group 1 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 3
Bit 3
0
1
Bit 2
0
0
1
ITU Channel Selected as Output TriggerG1CMS1 G1CMS0
TPC output group 1 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 11 7
7
7
7
4
4
4
4
Group 0 compare match select 1 and 0
TPC output group 0 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 0
TPC output group 0 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 2
TPC output group 0 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 3
Bit 1
0
1
Bit 0
0
0
1
ITU Channel Selected as Output TriggerG0CMS1 G0CMS0
TPC output group 0 (TP to TP ) is triggered by compare match in ITU channel 11 3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
787
NDERB—Next Data Enable Register B H'A2 TPC
NDERA—Next Data Enable Register A H'A3 TPC
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
NDER15
0
R/W
6
NDER14
0
R/W
5
NDER13
0
R/W
4
NDER12
0
R/W
3
NDER11
0
R/W
0
NDER8
0
R/W
2
NDER10
0
R/W
1
NDER9
0
R/W
Next data enable 15 to 8
TPC outputs TP to TP are disabled
(NDR15 to NDR8 are not transferred to PB to PB )
TPC outputs TP to TP are enabled
(NDR15 to NDR8 are transferred to PB to PB )
Bits 7 to 0
0
1
DescriptionNDER15 to NDER8
15
15
8
8
7
7
0
0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
NDER7
0
R/W
6
NDER6
0
R/W
5
NDER5
0
R/W
4
NDER4
0
R/W
3
NDER3
0
R/W
0
NDER0
0
R/W
2
NDER2
0
R/W
1
NDER1
0
R/W
Next data enable 7 to 0
TPC outputs TP to TP are disabled
(NDR7 to NDR0 are not transferred to PA to PA )
TPC outputs TP to TP are enabled
(NDR7 to NDR0 are transferred to PA to PA )
Bits 7 to 0
0
1
DescriptionNDER7 to NDER0
7
7
0
0
7
7
0
0
788
NDRB—Next Data Register B H'A4/H'A6 TPC
• Same trigger for TPC output groups 2 and 3
Address H'FFA4
Address H'FFA6
• Different triggers for TPC output groups 2 and 3
Address H'FFA4
Address H'FFA6
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
NDR15
0
R/W
6
NDR14
0
R/W
5
NDR13
0
R/W
4
NDR12
0
R/W
3
NDR11
0
R/W
0
NDR8
0
R/W
2
NDR10
0
R/W
1
NDR9
0
R/W
Store the next output data for
TPC output group 3 Store the next output data for
TPC output group 2
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
NDR15
0
R/W
6
NDR14
0
R/W
5
NDR13
0
R/W
4
NDR12
0
R/W
3
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
Store the next output data for
TPC output group 3
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
NDR11
0
R/W
0
NDR8
0
R/W
2
NDR10
0
R/W
1
NDR9
0
R/W
Store the next output data for
TPC output group 2
789
NDRA—Next Data Register A H'A5/H'A7 TPC
• Same trigger for TPC output groups 0 and 1
Address H'FFA5
Address H'FFA7
• Different triggers for TPC output groups 0 and 1
Address H'FFA5
Address H'FFA7
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
NDR7
0
R/W
6
NDR6
0
R/W
5
NDR5
0
R/W
4
NDR4
0
R/W
3
NDR3
0
R/W
0
NDR0
0
R/W
2
NDR2
0
R/W
1
NDR1
0
R/W
Store the next output data for
TPC output group 1 Store the next output data for
TPC output group 0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
NDR7
0
R/W
6
NDR6
0
R/W
5
NDR5
0
R/W
4
NDR4
0
R/W
3
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
Store the next output data for
TPC output group 1
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
NDR3
0
R/W
0
NDR0
0
R/W
2
NDR2
0
R/W
1
NDR1
0
R/W
Store the next output data for
TPC output group 0
790
TCSR—Timer Control/Status Register H'A8 WDT
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
OVF
0
R/(W)
6
WT/
0
R/W
5
TME
0
R/W
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
CKS0
0
R/W
2
CKS2
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Overflow flag
Timer mode select
IT
0 [Clearing condition]
Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF
1 [Setting condition]
TCNT changes from H'FF to H'00
0 Interval timer: requests interval timer interrupts
1 Watchdog timer: generates a reset signal
Clock select 2 to 0
0
1
ø/2
ø/32
ø/64
ø/128
ø/256
ø/512
ø/2048
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0ø/40961
Timer enable
0 Timer disabled
•
1 Timer enabled
TCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted
•
•TCNT is counting
CPU interrupt requests are enabled
Note: Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.*
*
791
TCNT—Timer Counter H'A9 (read), WDT
H'A8 (write)
RSTCSR—Reset Control/Status Register H'AB (read), WDT
H'AA (write)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
Count value
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
WRST
0
R/(W)
6
RSTOE
0
R/W
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
Reset output enable
0 External output of reset signal is disabled
1 External output of reset signal is enabled
Watchdog timer reset
0 [Clearing condition]
• Reset signal input at RES pin
• When WRST= "1", write "0" after reading WRST flag
1 [Setting condition]
TCNT overflow generates a reset signal
Note: Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag.
*
*
792
RFSHCR—Refresh Control Register H'AC Refresh controller
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
SRFMD
0
R/W
6
PSRAME
0
R/W
5
DRAME
0
R/W
4
CAS/
0
R/W
3
M9/
0
R/W
0
RCYCE
0
R/W
2
RFSHE
0
R/W
1
—
1
—
Self-refresh mode
0 DRAM or PSRAM self-refresh is disabled in software standby mode
1 DRAM or PSRAM self-refresh is enabled in software standby mode
Refresh cycle enable
Refresh pin enable
PSRAM enable, DRAM enable
0 Refresh cycles are disabled
1 Refresh cycles are enabled for area 3
Address multiplex mode select
0 8-bit column mode
1 9-bit column mode
WE
M8
Strobe mode select
0
1
0 2 mode
1 2 mode
Can be used as an interval timer
(DRAM and PSRAM cannot be
directly connected)
PSRAM can be directly connected
Illegal setting
Bit 6
0
1
Bit 5
0
0
1
RAM InterfacePSRAME DRAME
DRAM can be directly connected1
Refresh signal output at the pin is disabled
Refresh signal output at the pin is enabled
RFSH
RFSH
WE
CAS
793
RTMCSR—Refresh Timer Control/Status Register H'AD Refresh controller
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
CMF
0
R/(W)
6
CMIE
0
R/W
5
CKS2
0
R/W
4
CKS1
0
R/W
3
CKS0
0
R/W
0
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
Compare match flag
Compare match interrupt enable
0 [Clearing condition]
Read CMF when CMF = 1, then write 0 in CMF
1 [Setting condition]
RTCNT = RTCOR
Note: Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.*
0 The CMI interrupt requested by CMF is disabled
1 The CMI interrupt requested by CMF is enabled
Clock select 2 to 0
CKS2 Counter Clock SourceCKS1
Bit 4 CKS0
Bit 3
Bit 5
0
1
Clock input is disabled
ø/2
ø/8
ø/32
ø/128
ø/512
ø/2048
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0ø/40961
*
794
RTCNT—Refresh Timer Counter H'AE Refresh controller
RTCOR—Refresh Time Constant Register H'AF Refresh controller
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
Count value
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
Interval at which RTCNT and compare match are set
795
SMR—Serial Mode Register H'B0 SCI0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
C/A GM
0
R/W
6
CHR
0
R/W
5
PE
0
R/W
3
STOP
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
2
MP
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Parity enable
Clock select 1 and 0
CKS1 Clock SourceCKS0
Bit 0
Bit 1
0
1
ø clock
ø/4 clock
ø/16 clock
ø/64 clock
0
0
1
1
7
O/
0
R/W
E
0 Parity bit is not added or checked
1 Parity bit is added and checked
Parity mode
0 Even parity
1 Odd parity
Stop bit length
Multiprocessor mode
0 Multiprocessor function disabled
1 Multiprocessor format selected
0 One stop bit
1Two stop bits
Character length
0 8-bit data
1 7-bit data
Communication mode
(when using a serial communication interface)
0 Asynchronous mode
1 Synchronous mode
GSM mode (when using a smart card interface)
0 Regular smart card interface operation
1 GSM mode smart card interface operation
796
BRR—Bit Rate Register H'B1 SCI0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
Serial communication bit rate setting
797
SCR—Serial Control Register H'B2 SCI0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
TIE
0
R/W
6
RIE
0
R/W
5
TE
0
R/W
4
RE
0
R/W
3
MPIE
0
R/W
0
CKE0
0
R/W
2
TEIE
0
R/W
1
CKE1
0
R/W
Transmit interrupt enable
0 Transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) is disabled
1 Transmit-data-empty interrupt request (TXI) is enabled
Receive interrupt enable
0 Receive-data-full (RXI) and receive-error (ERI) interrupt requests are disabled
1 Receive-data-full (RXI) and receive-error (ERI) interrupt requests are enabled
Transmit enable
Clock enable 1 and 0
CKE1
Multiprocessor interrupt enable
0
1
Clock Selection and Output
Asynchronous mode
Synchronous mode
Asynchronous mode
Synchronous mode
Asynchronous mode
Synchronous mode
Asynchronous mode
Bit 1 CKE0
0
1
0
1
Bit 0
Receive enable
Synchronous mode
0 Multiprocessor interrupts are disabled (normal receive operation)
1 Multiprocessor interrupts are enabled
0 Receiving is disabled
1 Receiving is enabled
Transmit-end interrupt enable
0 Transmitting is disabled
1 Transmitting is enabled
0 Transmit-end interrupt requests (TEI) are disabled
1 Transmit-end interrupt requests (TEI) are enabled
Internal clock, SCK pin available for generic I/O
Internal clock, SCK pin used for serial clock output
Internal clock, SCK pin used for clock output
Internal clock, SCK pin used for serial clock output
External clock, SCK pin used for clock input
External clock, SCK pin used for serial clock input
External clock, SCK pin used for clock input
External clock, SCK pin used for serial clock input
798
TDR—Transmit Data Register H'B3 SCI0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
Serial transmit data
799
SSR—Serial Status Register H'B4 SCI0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
TDRE
1
R/(W)
6
RDRF
0
R/(W)
5
ORER
0
R/(W)
4
FER/ERS
0
R/(W)
3
PER
0
R/(W)
0
MPBT
0
R/W
2
TEND
1
R
1
MPB
0
R
*****
Multiprocessor bit transfer
Transmit end
0 [Clearing conditions]
1 [Setting conditions]
Reset or transition to standby mode.
TE is cleared to 0 in SCR and FER/ERS is
cleared to 0.
TDRE is 1 when last bit of 1-byte serial character
is transmitted.
Read TDRE when TDRE = 1, then write 0 in TDRE.
The DMAC writes data in TDR.
Multiprocessor bit
Parity error
0 [Clearing conditions]
1 [Setting condition]
Parity error: (parity of receive data does
not match parity setting O/E bit in SMR)
Reset or transition to standby mode.
Read PER when PER = 1, then write 0
in PER.
Framing error (for SCI0)
0 [Clearing conditions]
1 [Setting condition]
Framing error (stop bit is 0)
Reset or transition to standby mode.
Read FER when FER = 1, then write 0 in FER.
Error signal status (for smart card interface)
0 [Clearing conditions]
1 [Setting condition]
A low error signal is received.
Reset or transition to standby mode.
Read ERS when ERS = 1, then write 0 in ERS.
Overrun error
0 [Clearing conditions]
1 [Setting condition]
Overrun error (reception of next serial data
ends when RDRF = 1)
Reset or transition to standby mode.
Read ORER when ORER = 1, then write 0 in
ORER.
Receive data register full
0 [Clearing conditions]
1 [Setting condition]
Serial data is received normally and transferred
from RSR to RDR
Reset or transition to standby mode.
Read RDRF when RDRF = 1, then write 0 in
RDRF.
The DMAC reads data from RDR.
Transmit data register empty
0 [Clearing conditions]
1 [Setting conditions]
Reset or transition to standby mode.
TE is 0 in SCR
Data is transferred from TDR to TSR, enabling new
data to be written in TDR.
Read TDRE when TDRE = 1, then write 0 in TDRE.
The DMAC writes data in TDR.
0 Multiprocessor bit value in
receive data is 0
1 Multiprocessor bit value in
receive data is 1
0 Multiprocessor bit value in
transmit data is 0
1 Multiprocessor bit value in
transmit data is 1
Note: Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.*
800
RDR—Receive Data Register H'B5 SCI0
SCMR—Smart Card Mode Register H'B6 SCI0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
0
R
6
0
R
5
0
R
4
0
R
3
0
R
0
0
R
2
0
R
1
0
R
Serial receive data
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
SDIR
0
R/W
0
SMIF
0
R/W
2
SINV
0
R/W
1
—
1
—
Smart card interface mode select
0 Smart card interface function is disabled (Initial value)
1 Smart card interface function is enabled
Smart card data invert
0 Unmodified TDR contents are transmitted (Initial value)
Received data is stored unmodified in RDR
1 Inverted TDR contents are transmitted
Received data are inverted before storage in RDR
Smart card data transfer direction
0 TDR contents are transmitted LSB-first (Initial value)
Received data is stored LSB-first in RDR
1 TDR contents are transmitted MSB-first
Received data is stored MSB-first in RDR
801
SMR—Serial Mode Register H'B8 SCI1
BRR—Bit Rate Register H'B9 SCI1
SCR—Serial Control Register H'BA SCI1
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
C/
0
R/W
6
CHR
0
R/W
5
PE
0
R/W
4
O/
0
R/W
3
STOP
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
2
MP
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0.
AE
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
TIE
0
R/W
6
RIE
0
R/W
5
TE
0
R/W
4
RE
0
R/W
3
MPIE
0
R/W
0
CKE0
0
R/W
2
TEIE
0
R/W
1
CKE1
0
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0.
802
TDR—Transmit Data Register H'BB SCI1
SSR—Serial Status Register H'BC SCI1
RDR—Receive Data Register H'BD SCI1
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
TDRE
1
R/(W)
6
RDRF
0
R/(W)
5
ORER
0
R/(W)
4
FER
0
R/(W)
3
PER
0
R/(W)
0
MPBT
0
R/W
2
TEND
1
R
1
MPB
0
R*****
Notes: *
Bit functions are the same as for SCI0.
Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
0
R
6
0
R
5
0
R
4
0
R
3
0
R
0
0
R
2
0
R
1
0
R
Note: Bit functions are the same as for SCI0.
803
P1DDR—Port 1 Data Direction Register H'C0 Port 1
P2DDR—Port 2 Data Direction Register H'C1 Port 2
P1DR—Port 1 Data Register H'C2 Port 1
Bit
Modes
1 to 4 Initial value
Read/Write
Initial value
Read/Write
Modes
5 to 7
7
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
7
6
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
6
5
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
5
4
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
4
3
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
3
2
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
2
1
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
1
0
P1 DDR
1
—
0
W
0
Port 1 input/output select
0 Generic input pin
1 Generic output pin
Bit
Modes
1 to 4 Initial value
Read/Write
Initial value
Read/Write
Modes
5 to 7
7
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
7
6
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
6
5
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
5
4
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
4
3
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
3
2
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
2
1
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
1
0
P2 DDR
1
—
0
W
0
Port 2 input/output select
0 Generic input pin
1 Generic output pin
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P1
0
R/W
7
6
P1
0
R/W
6
5
P1
0
R/W
5
4
P1
0
R/W
4
3
P1
0
R/W
3
2
P1
0
R/W
2
1
P1
0
R/W
1
0
P1
0
R/W
0
Data for port 1 pins
804
P2DR—Port 2 Data Register H'C3 Port 2
P3DDR—Port 3 Data Direction Register H'C4 Port 3
P4DDR—Port 4 Data Direction Register H'C5 Port 4
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P2
0
R/W
7
6
P2
0
R/W
6
5
P2
0
R/W
5
4
P2
0
R/W
4
3
P2
0
R/W
3
2
P2
0
R/W
2
1
P2
0
R/W
1
0
P2
0
R/W
0
Data for port 2 pins
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P3 DDR
0
W
7
6
P3 DDR
0
W
6
5
P3 DDR
0
W
5
4
P3 DDR
0
W
4
3
P3 DDR
0
W
3
2
P3 DDR
0
W
2
1
P3 DDR
0
W
1
0
P3 DDR
0
W
0
Port 3 input/output select
0 Generic input pin
1 Generic output pin
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P4 DDR
0
W
7
6
P4 DDR
0
W
6
5
P4 DDR
0
W
5
4
P4 DDR
0
W
4
3
P4 DDR
0
W
3
2
P4 DDR
0
W
2
1
P4 DDR
0
W
1
0
P4 DDR
0
W
0
Port 4 input/output select
0 Generic input pin
1 Generic output pin
805
P3DR—Port 3 Data Register H'C6 Port 3
P4DR—Port 4 Data Register H'C7 Port 4
P5DDR—Port 5 Data Direction Register H'C8 Port 5
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P3
0
R/W
7
6
P3
0
R/W
6
5
P3
0
R/W
5
4
P3
0
R/W
4
3
P3
0
R/W
3
2
P3
0
R/W
2
1
P3
0
R/W
1
0
P3
0
R/W
0
Data for port 3 pins
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P4
0
R/W
7
6
P4
0
R/W
6
5
P4
0
R/W
5
4
P4
0
R/W
4
3
P4
0
R/W
3
2
P4
0
R/W
2
1
P4
0
R/W
1
0
P4
0
R/W
0
Data for port 4 pins
Bit
Modes
1 to 4 Initial value
Read/Write
Initial value
Read/Write
Modes
5 to 7
7
—
1
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
1
—
3
P5 DDR
1
—
0
W
3
2
P5 DDR
1
—
0
W
2
1
P5 DDR
1
—
0
W
1
0
P5 DDR
1
—
0
W
0
Port 5 input/output select
0 Generic input
1 Generic output
806
P6DDR—Port 6 Data Direction Register H'C9 Port 6
P5DR—Port 5 Data Register H'CA Port 5
P6DR—Port 6 Data Register H'CB Port 6
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
P6 DDR
0
W
6
5
P6 DDR
0
W
5
4
P6 DDR
0
W
4
3
P6 DDR
0
W
3
2
P6 DDR
0
W
2
1
P6 DDR
0
W
1
0
P6 DDR
0
W
0
Port 6 input/output select
0 Generic input
1 Generic output
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
P5
0
R/W
3
2
P5
0
R/W
2
1
P5
0
R/W
1
0
P5
0
R/W
0
Data for port 5 pins
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
P6
0
R/W
6
5
P6
0
R/W
5
4
P6
0
R/W
4
3
P6
0
R/W
3
2
P6
0
R/W
2
1
P6
0
R/W
1
0
P6
0
R/W
0
Data for port 6 pins
807
P8DDR—Port 8 Data Direction Register H'CD Port 8
P7DR—Port 7 Data Register H'CE Port 7
P8DR—Port 8 Data Register H'CF Port 8
Bit
Modes
1 to 4 Initial value
Read/Write
Initial value
Read/Write
Modes
5 to 7
7
—
1
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
1
—
3
P8 DDR
0
W
0
W
3
2
P8 DDR
0
W
0
W
2
1
P8 DDR
0
W
0
W
1
0
P8 DD
0
W
0
W
0
4
P8 DDR
1
W
0
W
4
Port 8 input/output sePort 8 input/output select 0 Generic input
1 Generic output
0 Generic input
1 outputCS
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
0
P7
—
R
*
Note: Determined by pins P7 to P7 .*
0
1
P7
—
R
*
1
2
P7
—
R
*
2
3
P7
—
R
*
3
4
P7
—
R
*
4
5
P7
—
R
*
5
6
P7
—
R
*
6
7
P7
—
R
*
7
Read the pin levels for port 7
70
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
P8
0
R/W
4
3
P8
0
R/W
3
2
P8
0
R/W
2
1
P8
0
R/W
1
0
P8
0
R/W
0
Data for port 8 pins
808
P9DDR—Port 9 Data Direction Register H'D0 Port 9
PADDR—Port A Data Direction Register H'D1 Port A
P9DR—Port 9 Data Register H'D2 Port 9
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
P9 DDR
0
W
5
4
P9 DDR
0
W
4
3
P9 DDR
0
W
3
2
P9 DDR
0
W
2
1
P9 DDR
0
W
1
0
P9 DDR
0
W
0
Port 9 input/output select
0 Generic input
1 Generic output
Bit
Modes
3, 4, 6 Initial value
Read/Write
Initial value
Read/Write
Modes
1, 2,
5, 7
32104
7
PA DDR
1
—
0
W
7
6
PA DDR
0
W
0
W
6
5
PA DDR
0
W
0
W
5
4
PA DDR
0
W
0
W
4
3
PA DDR
0
W
0
W
3
2
PA DDR
0
W
0
W
2
1
PA DDR
0
W
0
W
1
0
PA DDR
0
W
0
W
0
Port A input/output select
0 Generic input
1 Generic output
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
P9
0
R/W
4
P9
0
R/W
4
3
P9
0
R/W
3
2
P9
0
R/W
2
1
P9
0
R/W
1
0
P9
0
R/W
0
Data for port 9 pins
5
809
PADR—Port A Data Register H'D3 Port A
PBDDR—Port B Data Direction Register H'D4 Port B
PBDR—Port B Data Register H'D6 Port B
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
0
PA
0
R/W
0
1
PA
0
R/W
1
2
PA
0
R/W
2
3
PA
0
R/W
3
4
PA
0
R/W
4
5
PA
0
R/W
5
6
PA
0
R/W
6
7
PA
0
R/W
7
Data for port A pins
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
PB DDR
0
W
7
6
PB DDR
0
W
6
5
PB DDR
0
W
5
4
PB DDR
0
W
4
3
PB DDR
0
W
3
2
PB DDR
0
W
2
1
PB DDR
0
W
1
0
PB DDR
0
W
0
Port B input/output select
0 Generic input
1 Generic output
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
0
PB
0
R/W
0
1
PB
0
R/W
1
2
PB
0
R/W
2
3
PB
0
R/W
3
4
PB
0
R/W
4
5
PB
0
R/W
5
6
PB
0
R/W
6
7
PB
0
R/W
7
Data for port B pins
810
P2PCR—Port 2 Input Pull-Up MOS Control Register H'D8 Port 2
P4PCR—Port 4 Input Pull-Up MOS Control Register H'DA Port 4
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P2 PCR
0
R/W
7
6
P2 PCR
0
R/W
6
5
P2 PCR
0
R/W
5
4
P2 PCR
0
R/W
4
3
P2 PCR
0
R/W
3
2
P2 PCR
0
R/W
2
1
P2 PCR
0
R/W
1
0
P2 PCR
0
R/W
0
Port 2 input pull-up MOS control 7 to 0
0 Input pull-up transistor is off
1 Input pull-up transistor is on
Note: Valid when the corresponding P2DDR bit is cleared to 0 (designating generic input).
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
P4 PCR
0
R/W
7
6
P4 PCR
0
R/W
6
5
P4 PCR
0
R/W
5
4
P4 PCR
0
R/W
4
3
P4 PCR
0
R/W
3
2
P4 PCR
0
R/W
2
1
P4 PCR
0
R/W
1
0
P4 PCR
0
R/W
0
Port 4 input pull-up MOS control 7 to 0
0 Input pull-up transistor is off
1 Input pull-up transistor is on
Note: Valid when the corresponding P4DDR bit is cleared to 0 (designating generic input).
811
P5PCR—Port 5 Input Pull-Up MOS Control Register H'DB Port 5
DADR0—D/A Data Register 0 H'DC D/A
DADR1—D/A Data Register 1 H'DD D/A
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
P5 PCR
0
R/W
3
2
P5 PCR
0
R/W
2
1
P5 PCR
0
R/W
1
0
P5 PCR
0
R/W
0
Port 5 input pull-up MOS control 3 to 0
0 Input pull-up transistor is off
1 Input pull-up transistor is on
Note: Valid when the corresponding P5DDR bit is cleared to 0 (designating generic input).
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
D/A conversion data
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
D/A conversion data
812
DACR—D/A Control Register H'DE D/A
ADDRA H/L—A/D Data Register A H/L H'E0, H'E1 A/D
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
DAOE1
0
R/W
6
DAOE0
0
R/W
5
DAE
0
R/W
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
D/A output enable 1
0DA
1
analog output is disabled
1 Channel-1 D/A conversion and DA1 analog output are enabled
D/A output enable 0
0DA
0
analog output is disabled
1 Channel-0 D/A conversion and DA0 analog output are enabled
D/A enable
DAOE1
0
1
Description
D/A conversion is disabled in channels 0 and 1
D/A conversion is disabled in channel 0
D/A conversion is enabled in channel 1
D/A conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1
D/A conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1
Bit 7 DAOE0
0
0
1
Bit 6 DAE
—
0
1
Bit 5
D/A conversion is enabled in channel 0
D/A conversion is disabled in channel 1
10
D/A conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 11
—
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
AD8
0
R
12
AD6
0
R
10
AD4
0
R
8
AD2
0
R
6
AD0
0
R
0
—
0
R
4
—
0
R
2
—
0
R
15
AD9
0
R
13
AD7
0
R
11
AD5
0
R
9
AD3
0
R
7
AD1
0
R
1
—
0
R
5
—
0
R
3
—
0
R
A/D conversion data
10-bit data giving an
A/D conversion result
ADDRAH ADDRAL
813
ADDRB H/L—A/D Data Register B H/L H'E2, H'E3 A/D
ADDRC H/L—A/D Data Register C H/L H'E4, H'E5 A/D
ADDRD H/L—A/D Data Register D H/L H'E6, H'E7 A/D
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
AD8
0
R
12
AD6
0
R
10
AD4
0
R
8
AD2
0
R
6
AD0
0
R
0
—
0
R
4
—
0
R
2
—
0
R
15
AD9
0
R
13
AD7
0
R
11
AD5
0
R
9
AD3
0
R
7
AD1
0
R
1
—
0
R
5
—
0
R
3
—
0
R
ADDRBH ADDRBL
A/D conversion data
10-bit data giving an
A/D conversion result
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
AD8
0
R
12
AD6
0
R
10
AD4
0
R
8
AD2
0
R
6
AD0
0
R
0
—
0
R
4
—
0
R
2
—
0
R
15
AD9
0
R
13
AD7
0
R
11
AD5
0
R
9
AD3
0
R
7
AD1
0
R
1
—
0
R
5
—
0
R
3
—
0
R
ADDRCH ADDRCL
A/D conversion data
10-bit data giving an
A/D conversion result
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
14
AD8
0
R
12
AD6
0
R
10
AD4
0
R
8
AD2
0
R
6
AD0
0
R
0
—
0
R
4
—
0
R
2
—
0
R
15
AD9
0
R
13
AD7
0
R
11
AD5
0
R
9
AD3
0
R
7
AD1
0
R
1
—
0
R
5
—
0
R
3
—
0
R
ADDRDH ADDRDL
A/D conversion data
10-bit data giving an
A/D conversion result
814
ADCR—A/D Control Register H'E9 A/D
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
TRGE
0
R/W
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
—
1
—
0
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
Trigger enable
0 A/D conversion cannot be externally triggered
1 A/D conversion starts at the fall of the external trigger signal ( )ADTRG
815
ADCSR—A/D Control/Status Register H'E8 A/D
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
ADF
0
R/(W)
6
ADIE
0
R/W
5
ADST
0
R/W
4
SCAN
0
R/W
3
CKS
0
R/W
0
CH0
0
R/W
2
CH2
0
R/W
1
CH1
0
R/W*
Note: Only 0 can be written, to clear flag.*
Channel select 2 to 0
CH2
1
Single Mode
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
CH1
0
1
0
1
Channel
Selection
CH0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
00
1
2
3
4
5
6
AN7
Scan Mode
AN
AN , AN
AN to AN
AN to AN
AN
AN , AN
AN to AN
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
AN to AN
4
1
5
2
3
6
7
Description
Group
Selection
A/D end flag
A/D interrupt enable
A/D start
Clock select
Scan mode
0 [Clearing condition]
Read ADF while ADF = 1, then write 0 in ADF
1 [Setting conditions]
Single mode:
Scan mode:
0 A/D end interrupt request is disabled
1 A/D end interrupt request is enabled
0 A/D conversion is stopped
1 Single mode:
Scan mode:
0 Single mode
1 Scan mode
0 Conversion time = 266 states (maximum)
1 Conversion time = 134 states (maximum)
A/D conversion ends
A/D conversion ends in all selected channels
A/D conversion starts; ADST is automatically cleared to 0 when
conversion ends
A/D conversion starts and continues, cycling among the selected
channels, until ADST is cleared to 0 by software, by a reset, or by a
transition to standby mode
816
ABWCR—Bus Width Control Register H'EC Bus controller
ASTCR—Access State Control Register H'ED Bus controller
Bit
Read/Write
7
ABW7
1
0
R/W
6
ABW6
1
0
R/W
5
ABW5
1
0
R/W
4
ABW4
1
0
R/W
3
ABW3
1
0
R/W
0
ABW0
1
0
R/W
2
ABW2
1
0
R/W
1
ABW1
1
0
R/W
Initial
value Mode 1 , 3 , 5 , 6
Mode 2 , 4 , 7
Area 7 to 0 bus width control
Areas 7 to 0 are 16-bit access areas
Areas 7 to 0 are 8-bit access areas
Bits 7 to 0
0
1
Bus Width of Access AreaABW7 to ABW0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
AST7
1
R/W
6
AST6
1
R/W
5
AST5
1
R/W
4
AST4
1
R/W
3
AST3
1
R/W
0
AST0
1
R/W
2
AST2
1
R/W
1
AST1
1
R/W
Area 7 to 0 access state control
Areas 7 to 0 are two-state access areas
Areas 7 to 0 are three-state access areas
Bits 7 to 0
0
1
Number of States in Access CycleAST7 to AST0
817
WCR—Wait Control Register H'EE Bus controller
WCER—Wait-State Controller Enable Register H'EF Bus controller
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
WMS1
0
R/W
0
WC0
1
R/W
2
WMS0
0
R/W
1
WC1
1
R/W
Wait count 1 and 0
WC1 Number of Wait StatesWC0
Bit 0
Bit 1
0
1
No wait states inserted by
wait-state controller
1 state inserted
2 states inserted
3 states inserted
0
0
1
1
Wait mode select 1 and 0
WMS1 Wait ModeWMS0
Bit 2
Bit 3
0
1
Programmable wait mode
No wait states inserted by
wait-state controller
Pin wait mode 1
Pin auto-wait mode
0
0
1
1
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
WCE7
1
R/W
6
WCE6
1
R/W
5
WCE5
1
R/W
4
WCE4
1
R/W
3
WCE3
1
R/W
0
WCE0
1
R/W
2
WCE2
1
R/W
1
WCE1
1
R/W
Wait-state controller enable 7 to 0
0 Wait-state control is disabled (pin wait mode 0)
1 Wait-state control is enabled
818
MDCR—Mode Control Register H'F1 System control
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
0
—
4
—
0
—
3
—
0
—
0
MDS0
—
R
*
2
MDS2
—
R
1
MDS1
—
R
**
Note: Determined by the state of the mode pins (MD to MD ).*
Mode select 2 to 0
20
MD2
0Operating mode
—
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Bit 2 MD1
0
1
Bit 1 MD0
0
1
0
1
Bit 0
1Mode 4
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7
0
1
0
1
0
1
819
SYSCR—System Control Register H'F2 System control
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
SSBY
0
R/W
6
STS2
0
R/W
5
STS1
0
R/W
4
STS0
0
R/W
3
UE
1
R/W
0
RAME
1
R/W
2
NMIEG
0
R/W
1
—
1
—
Software standby
0 SLEEP instruction causes transition to sleep mode
1 SLEEP instruction causes transition to software standby mode
Standby timer select 2 to 0
STS2
0
1
Standby Timer
Waiting time = 8,192 states
Waiting time = 16,384 states
Waiting time = 32,768 states
Waiting time = 65,536 states
Waiting time = 131,072 states
Waiting time = 1,024 states
Bit 6 STS1
0
1
0
Bit 5 STS0
0
1
0
1
1Illegal setting1—
Bit 4
RAM enable
0 On-chip RAM is disabled
1 On-chip RAM is enabled
NMI edge select
0 An interrupt is requested at the falling edge of NMI
1 An interrupt is requested at the rising edge of NMI
User bit enable
0 CCR bit 6 (UI) is used as an interrupt mask bit
1 CCR bit 6 (UI) is used as a user bit
0
820
BRCR—Bus Release Control Register H'F3 Bus controller
ISCR—IRQ Sense Control Register H'F4 Interrupt controller
IER—IRQ Enable Register H'F5 Interrupt controller
Bit
Modes
1, 2,
5, 7
Initial value
Read/Write
Initial value
Read/Write
Modes
3, 4, 6
7
A23E
1
—
1
R/W
6
A22E
1
—
1
R/W
5
A21E
1
—
1
R/W
3
—
1
—
1
—
2
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
1
—
0
BRLE
0
R/W
0
R/W
4
—
1
—
1
—
Bus release enable
Address 23 to 21 enable
0 The bus cannot be released to an external device
1 The bus can be released to an external device
0 Address output
1 Other input/output
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
0
R/W
6
—
0
R/W
5
IRQ5SC
0
R/W
4
IRQ4SC
0
R/W
3
IRQ3SC
0
R/W
2
IRQ2SC
0
R/W
1
IRQ1SC
0
R/W
0
IRQ0SC
0
R/W
IRQ to IRQ sense control
0 Interrupts are requested when IRQ to IRQ inputs are low
1 Interrupts are requested by falling-edge input at IRQ to IRQ
50
5
5
0
0
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
0
R/(W)
6
—
0
R/(W)
5
IRQ5E
0
R/(W)
4
IRQ4E
0
R/(W)
3
IRQ3E
0
R/(W)
2
IRQ2E
0
R/(W)
1
IRQ1E
0
R/(W)
0
IRQ0E
0
R/(W)
IRQ to IRQ enable
0 IRQ to IRQ interrupts are disabled
1 IRQ to IRQ interrupts are enabled
50
5
5
0
0
821
ISR—IRQ Status Register H'F6 Interrupt controller
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
—
0
—
6
—
0
—
5
IRQ5F
0
R/(W) *
4
IRQ4F
0
R/(W) *
3
IRQ3F
0
R/(W) *
2
IRQ2F
0
R/(W) *
1
IRQ1F
0
R/(W) *
0
IRQ0F
0
R/(W) *
IRQ to IRQ flags
Bits 5 to 0
0
1
Setting and Clearing ConditionsIRQ5F to IRQ0F [Clearing conditions]
Read IRQnF when IRQnF = 1, then write 0 in IRQnF.
IRQnSC = 0, input is high, and interrupt exception
handling is carried out.
IRQnSC = 1 and IRQn interrupt exception handling is
carried out.
[Setting conditions]
IRQnSC = 0 and IRQn input is low.
IRQnSC = 1 and a falling edge is generated in the IRQn input.
(n = 5 to 0)
IRQn
50
Note: Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.*
822
IPRA—Interrupt Priority Register A H'F8 Interrupt controller
• Interrupt sources controlled by each bit
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IPRA7 IPRA6 IPRA5 IPRA4 IPRA3 IPRA2 IPRA1 IPRA0
Interrupt IRQ0IRQ1IRQ2, IRQ4, WDT, ITU ITU ITU
source IRQ3IRQ5Refresh chan- chan- chan-
Con- nel 0 nel 1 nel 2
troller
IPRB—Interrupt Priority Register B H'F9 Interrupt controller
• Interrupt sources controlled by each bit
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IPRB7 IPRB6 IPRB5 — IPRB3 IPRB2 IPRB1 —
Interrupt ITU ITU DMAC — SCI SCI A/D —
source chan- chan- chan- chan- con-
nel 3 nel 4 nel 0 nel 1 verter
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
IPRA7
0
R/W
6
IPRA6
0
R/W
5
IPRA5
0
R/W
4
IPRA4
0
R/W
3
IPRA3
0
R/W
0
IPRA0
0
R/W
2
IPRA2
0
R/W
1
IPRA1
0
R/W
Priority level A7 to A0
0 Priority level 0 (low priority)
1 Priority level 1 (high priority)
Bit
Initial value
Read/Write
7
IPRB7
0
R/W
6
IPRB6
0
R/W
5
IPRB5
0
R/W
4
—
0
R/W
3
IPRB3
0
R/W
0
—
0
R/W
2
IPRB2
0
R/W
1
IPRB1
0
R/W
Priority level B7 to B5, B3 to B 1
0 Priority level 0 (low priority)
1 Priority level 1 (high priority)
823
Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams
C.1 Port 1 Block Diagram
Figure C-1 Port 1 Block Diagram
Reset
R
P1 DDR
n
Mode 1 to 4
WP1D
QD
C
Reset
R
P1 DR
n
WP1
QD
C
RP1
Mode 7
Mode
1 to 6
Internal data bus (upper)
Internal address bus
WP1D:
WP1:
RP1:
n = 0 to 7
Write to P1DDR
Write to port 1
Read port 1
P1
n
External bus
released
Hardware standby
Software
standby Mode 7
824
C.2 Port 2 Block Diagram
Figure C-2 Port 2 Block Diagram
Reset
R
P2 DR
n
WP2
QD
C
Reset
R
P2 DDR
n
WP2D
QD
C
Reset
R
P2 PCR
n
WP2P
QD
C
Mode 7
Mode
1 to 6
Internal data bus (upper)
Internal address bus
P2
n
RP2P
RP2
WP2P:
RP2P:
WP2D:
WP2:
RP2:
n = 0 to 7
Write to P2PCR
Read P2PCR
Write to P2DDR
Write to port 2
Read port 2
External bus
released
Hardware standby
Software
standby Mode 7
Mode 1 to 4
825
C.3 Port 3 Block Diagram
Figure C-3 Port 3 Block Diagram
P3
n
Reset
R
P3 DDR
n
WP3D
QD
C
Reset
R
P3 DR
n
WP3
QD
C
RP3
Mode
1 to 6
Internal data bus (upper)
WP3D:
WP3:
RP3:
n = 0 to 7
Write to P3DDR
Write to port 3
Read port 3
Mode 7
Write to external
address
Mode 7
Hardware standby
External
bus released
Read external
address
Internal data bus (lower)
826
C.4 Port 4 Block Diagram
Figure C-4 Port 4 Block Diagram
P4
n
RP4P
RP4
WP4
WP4D
WP4P
Reset
Reset
Reset
QD
R
C
P4 PCR
n
QD
R
C
P4 DDR
n
QD
R
C
P4 DR
n
WP4P:
RP4P:
WP4D:
WP4:
RP4:
n = 0 to 7
Write to P4PCR
Read P4PCR
Write to P4DDR
Write to port 4
Read port 4
Write to external
address
Read external
address
Internal data bus (upper)
Internal data bus (lower)
8-bit bus
mode
Mode 7 Mode
1 to 6
16-bit bus
mode
827
C.5 Port 5 Block Diagram
Figure C-5 Port 5 Block Diagram
P5
n
RP5P
RP5
WP5
WP5D
WP5P
Reset
Reset
Reset
QD
R
C
P5 PCR
n
QD
R
C
P5 DDR
n
QD
R
C
P5 DR
n
WP5P:
RP5P:
WP5D:
WP5:
RP5:
n = 0 to 3
Write to P5PCR
Read P5PCR
Write to P5DDR
Write to port 5
Read port 5
Mode 7
Mode
1 to 6
Internal data bus (upper)
Internal address bus
External bus
released
Hardware standby
Software
standby Mode 7
Mode 1 to 4
828
C.6 Port 6 Block Diagrams
Figure C-6 (a) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P60)
WP6D:
WP6:
RP6:
Write to P6DDR
Write to port 6
Read port 6
RP6
input
WP6D
Reset
QD
R
C
P6 DDR
0
WP6
Reset
QD
R
C
P6 DR
0
P6
0
Internal data bus
Bus controller
WAIT
input
enable
Bus controller
WAIT
Mode 7
829
Figure C-6 (b) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P61)
P6
1
WP6D:
WP6:
RP6:
Write to P6DDR
Write to port 6
Read port 6
WP6D
Reset
QD
R
C
P6 DDR
1
WP6
Reset
QD
R
C
P6 DR
1
RP6
Internal data bus
Bus
controller
Bus release
enable
BREQ input
Mode 7
830
Figure C-6 (c) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P62)
WP6D
Reset
QD
R
C
P6 DDR
2
WP6
Reset
QD
R
C
P6 DR
2
RP6
P6
2
WP6D:
WP6:
RP6:
Write to P6DDR
Write to port 6
Read port 6
Internal data bus
Bus controller
Bus release
enable
BACK
output
Mode 7
831
Figure C-6 (d) Port 6 Block Diagram (Pins P66to P63)
P6
n
Reset
R
P6 DDR
n
WP6D
QD
C
Reset
R
P6 DR
n
WP6
QD
C
RP6
Mode
1 to 6
Internal data bus
WP6D:
WP6:
RP6:
n = 6 to 3
Write to P6DDR
Write to port 6
Read port 6
Mode 7
AS output
RD output
HWR output
LWR output
External bus
released
Hardware standby
Software
standby Mode 7
Mode 7
832
C.7 Port 7 Block Diagrams
Figure C-7 (a) Port 7 Block Diagram (Pins P70to P75)
Figure C-7 (b) Port 7 Block Diagram (Pins P76and P77)
P7
n
RP7
RP7: Read port 7
n = 0 to 5
Internal data bus
A/D converter
Analog input
Input enable
P7
n
RP7
RP7: Read port 7
n = 6 and 7
Internal data bus
A/D converter
Analog input
D/A converter
Analog output
Output enable
Input enable
833
C.8 Port 8 Block Diagrams
Figure C-8 (a) Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P80)
P8
0
RP8
WP8D
Reset
QD
R
C
P8 DDR
0
WP8
Reset
QD
R
C
P8 DR
0
WP8D:
WP8:
RP8:
Write to P8DDR
Write to port 8
Read port 8
Internal data bus
Refresh
controller
Output
enable
output
Interrupt
controller
input
RFSH
IRQ
0
Mode 7
834
Figure C-8 (b) Port 8 Block Diagram (Pins P81, P82, P83)
P8
n
WP8
Reset
QD
R
C
P8 DDR
n
WP8
Reset
QD
R
C
P8 DR
n
RP8
WP8D
WP8:
RP8:
n = 1 to 3
Write to P8DDR
Write to port 8
Read port 8
Internal data bus
Bus controller
output
Interrupt
controller
IRQ
IRQ
IRQ
CS
CS
CS
1
2
3
1
2
3input
Mode 7
Mode 1 to 6
835
Figure C-8 (c) Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P84)
P8
4
WP8D
QD
S
C
P8 DDR
4
WP8
Reset
Reset Mode 1 to 4
QD
R
C
P8 DR
4
RP8
WP8D:
WP8:
RP8:
Write to P8DDR
Write to port 8
Read port 8
Internal data bus
Bus controller
output
0
CS
Mode 6/7
Mode 1 to 5
R
836
C.9 Port 9 Block Diagrams
Figure C-9 (a) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P90)
WP9D:
WP9:
RP9:
Write to P9DDR
Write to port 9
Read port 9
P9
0
RP9
WP9D
Reset
QD
R
C
P9 DDR
0
WP9
Reset
QD
R
C
P9 DR
0
Internal data bus
SCI0
Output
enable
Serial
transmit
data
Guard
time
837
Figure C-9 (b) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P91)
WP9D:
WP9:
RP9:
Write to P9DDR
Write to port 9
Read port 9
P9
1
RP9
WP9D
Reset
QD
R
C
P9 DDR
1
WP9
Reset
QD
R
C
P9 DR
1
Internal data bus
SCI1
Output
enable
Serial
transmit
data
838
Figure C-9 (c) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pins P92, P93)
WP9D:
WP9:
RP9:
n = 2 and 3
Write to P9DDR
Write to port 9
Read port 9
P9
n
WP9D
Reset
QD
R
C
P9 DDR
n
WP9
Reset
QD
R
C
P9 DR
n
RP9
Internal data bus
Input enable
Serial receive
data
SCI
839
Figure C-9 (d) Port 9 Block Diagram (Pins P94, P95)
WP9D:
WP9:
RP9:
n = 4 and 5
Write to P9DDR
Write to port 9
Read port 9
WP9D
Reset
QD
R
C
P9 DDR
n
WP9
Reset
QD
R
C
P9 DR
n
RP9
P9
n
Internal data bus
SCI
Clock input
enable
Clock output
enable
Clock output
Clock input
Interrupt
controller
or
input
IRQ
4IRQ
5
840
C.10 Port A Block Diagrams
Figure C-10 (a) Port A Block Diagram (Pins PA0, PA1)
WPAD:
WPA:
RPA:
n = 0 and 1
Write to PADDR
Write to port A
Read port A
PA
n
WPAD
Reset
QD
R
C
PA DDR
n
Reset
QD
R
C
PA DR
n
RPA
WPA
Internal data bus
TPC
output
enable
TPC
Next data
Output
trigger
Output
enable
Transfer
end output
DMA controller
Counter
clock input
ITU
841
Figure C-10 (b) Port A Block Diagram (Pins PA2, PA3)
WPAD:
WPA:
RPA:
n = 2 and 3
Write to PADDR
Write to port A
Read port A
PA
n
RPA
WPA
WPAD
Reset
QD
R
C
PA DDR
n
Reset
QD
R
C
PA DR
n
Internal data bus
TPC
output
enable
TPC
Next
data
Output
trigger
Output
enable
Compare
match
output
Input
capture
Counter
clock
input
ITU
842
Figure C-10 (c) Port A Block Diagram (Pins PA4to PA6)
WPAD:
WPA:
RPA:
n = 4 to 6
Write to PADDR
Write to port A
Read port A
PAn
WPAD
Hardware
standby
Software standby
External bus released
Reset
PRA
WPA
QD
R
C
PAnDDR
Reset
QD
R
C
PAnDR
Internal address bus
Internal data bus
Bus controller
TPC
ITU
Chip select
enable
TPC output
enable
Next data
Output trigger
Output enable
Compare match
output
Input capture
Address
output
enable CS4
CS5
CS6 output
843
Figure C-10 (d) Port A Block Diagram (Pin PA7)
WPAD:
WPA:
RPA:
Write to PADDR
Write to port A
Read port A
PA7
WPAD
Hardware
standby
Software standby
External bus released
Reset
PRA
WPA
QD
R
C
PA7DDR
Reset
QD
R
C
PA7DR
Internal address bus
Internal data bus
Bus controller
TPC
ITU
TPC output
enable
Next data
Output trigger
Output enable
Compare match
output
Input capture
Address
output
enable
844
C.11 Port B Block Diagrams
Figure C-11 (a) Port B Block Diagram (Pins PB0to PB3)
PB
n
WPBD:
WPB:
RPB:
n = 0 to 3
Write to PBDDR
Write to port B
Read port B
Reset
QD
R
C
PB DDR
n
WPBD
Reset
QD
R
C
PB DR
n
WPB
RPB
Internal data bus
TPC output
enable
TPC
Next data
Output trigger
Output enable
Compare
match output
Input
capture
ITU
845
Figure C-11 (b) Port B Block Diagram (Pins PB4, PB5)
PB
n
WPBD:
WPB:
RPB:
n = 4 and 5
Write to PBDDR
Write to port B
Read port B
WPB
RPB
Reset
QD
R
C
PB DDR
n
WPBD
Reset
QD
R
C
PB DR
n
Internal data bus
TPC output
enable
Next data
Output trigger
Output enable
Compare
match output
TPC
ITU
846
Figure C-11 (c) Port B Block Diagram (Pin PB6)
WPBD
Reset
Reset
QD
R
C
PB DDR
QD
R
C
PB DR
6
RPB
WPB
DMAC
DREQ0
input
TPC
Bus controller
WPBD:
WPB:
RPB:
Write to PBDDR
Write to port B
Read port B
TPC
output
enable
Next data
Output
trigger
Chip select
enable
CS7
outpu
Internal data bus
6
PB
6
847
Figure C-11 (d) Port B Block Diagram (Pin PB7)
PB
7
WPBD
Reset
Reset
QD
R
C
PB DDR
QD
R
C
PB DR
7
RPB
WPB
DMAC
TPC
WPBD:
WPB:
RPB:
Write to PBDDR
Write to port B
Read port B
TPC
output
enable
Next data
Output
trigger
Internal data bus
7
ADTRG
input
A/D converter
DREQ1
input
848
Appendix D Pin States
D.1 Port States in Each Mode
Table D-1 Port States
Hardware Software Bus- Program
Pin Standby Standby Released Execution,
Name Mode Reset Mode Mode Mode Sleep Mode
ø — Clock output T H Clock output Clock output
RESO —T*TT T RESO
P17to P101 to 4 L T T T A7to A0
5, 6 T T keep T Input port
(DDR = 0)
TT A
7
to A0
(DDR = 1)
7 T T keep — I/O port
P27to P201 to 4 L T T T A15 to A8
5, 6 T T keep T Input port
(DDR = 0)
TT A
15 to A8
(DDR = 1)
7 T T keep — I/O port
P37to P301 to 6 T T T T D15 to D8
7 T T keep — I/O port
P47to P401 to 6 8-bit bus T T keep keep I/O port
16-bit bus T T T T D7to D0
7 T T keep — I/O port
Legend
H: High
L: Low
T: High-impedance state
keep: Input pins are in the high-impedance state; output pins maintain their previous state.
DDR: Data direction register bit
Note: *Low output only when WDT overflow causes a reset.
849
Table D-1 Port States (cont)
Hardware Software Bus- Program
Pin Standby Standby Released Execution,
Name Mode Reset Mode Mode Mode Sleep Mode
P53to P501 to 4 L T T T A19 to A16
5, 6 T T keep T Input port
(DDR = 0)
TTA
19 to A16
(DDR = 1)
7 T T keep — I/O port
P601 to 6 T T keep keep I/O port
WAIT
7 T T keep — I/O port
P611 to 6 T T keep T I/O port
(BRLE = 0) BREQ
T
(BRLE = 1)
7 T T keep — I/O port
P621 to 6 T T keep L I/O port
(BRLE = 0) (BRLE = 0)
H or BACK
(BRLE = 1) (BRLE = 1)
7 T T keep — I/O port
P66to P631 to 6 H*3TT T AS, RD,
HWR, LWR
7 T T keep — I/O port
P77to P701 to 7 T T T T*Input port
P801 to 6 T T keep keep I/O port
(RFSHE = 0) (RFSHE = 0) (RFSHE = 0)
RFSH H or RFSH
(RFSHE = 1) (RFSHE = 1) (RFSHE = 1)
7 T T keep — I/O port
Legend
H: High
L: Low
T: High-impedance state
keep: Input pins are in the high-impedance state; output pins maintain their previous state.
DDR: Data direction register bit
Note: *The bus cannot be released in mode 7.
850
Table D-1 Port States (cont)
Hardware Software Bus- Program
Pin Standby Standby Released Execution,
Name Mode Reset Mode Mode Mode Sleep Mode
P83to P811 to 6 T T T keep Input port
(DDR = 0) (DDR = 0) (DDR = 0) or
HHCS
3
to CS1
(DDR = 1) (DDR = 1) (DDR = 1)
7 T T keep — I/O port
P841 to 6 L T T keep Input port
(DDR = 0) (DDR = 0) (DDR = 0)
L H or CS0
(DDR = 1) (DDR = 1) (DDR = 1)
7 T T keep — I/O port
P96to P901 to 7 T T keep keep*1I/O port
PA3to PA01 to 7 T T keep keep*1I/O port
PA6to PA43, 4, 6 T*4TH HCS6 to CS4
(CS output) (CS output) (CS output)
T (address T (address A23 to A21
output) output) (address
keep keep output)
(otherwise) (otherwise) I/O port
(otherwise)
1, 2, 5, 7 T*4T keep keep*1I/O port
PA73, 4, 6 L*4TT TA
20
1, 2, 5, 7 T T keep keep*1I/O port
PB7, PB5to 1 to 7 T T keep keep*1I/O port
PB0
PB63, 4, 6 T T H H CS7
(CS output) (CS output) (CS output)
keep keep I/O port
(otherwise) (otherwise) (otherwise)
1, 2, 5, 7 T T keep keep*1I/O port
Legend
H: High
L: Low
T: High-impedance state
keep: Input pins are in the high-impedance state; output pins maintain their previous state.
DDR: Data direction register bit
Notes: 1. The bus cannot be released in mode 7.
2. Output is low only for reset by WDT overflow.
3. During direct power supply, oscillation damping time is “H” or “T”.
4. During direct power supply, oscillation damping time differs between “H”, “L” and “T”.
851
D.2 Pin States at Reset
Reset in T1 State: Figure D-1 is a timing diagram for the case in which RES goes low during the
T1 state of an external memory access cycle. As soon as RES goes low, all ports are initialized to
the input state. AS, RD, HWR, and LWR go high, and the data bus goes to the high-impedance
state. The address bus is initialized to the low output level 0.5 state after the low level of RES is
sampled. Sampling of RES takes place at the fall of the system clock (ø).
Figure D-1 Reset during Memory Access (Reset during T1 State)
Access to external address
ø
Address bus
CS0
AS
RD (read access)
HWR, LWR
Data bus
I/O port
RES
(write access)
(write access)
H'000000
High impedance
High impedance
High impedance
High
High
High
Internal
reset signal
T1 T2 T3
CS7 to CS1
852
Reset in T2 State: Figure D-2 is a timing diagram for the case in which RES goes low during the
T2 state of an external memory access cycle. As soon as RES goes low, all ports are initialized to
the input state. AS, RD, HWR, and LWR go high, and the data bus goes to the high-impedance
state. The address bus is initialized to the low output level 0.5 state after the low level of RES is
sampled. The same timing applies when a reset occurs during a wait state (TW).
Figure D-2 Reset during Memory Access (Reset during T2 State)
ø
Address bus
CS0
RD (read access)
HWR, LWR
Data bus
I/O port
RES
AS
H'000000
High impedance
High impedance
High impedance
Internal
reset signal
Access to external address
T1 T2 T3
(write access)
(write access)
CS7 to CS1
853
Reset in T3 State: Figure D-3 is a timing diagram for the case in which RES goes low during the
T3 state of an external memory access cycle. As soon as RES goes low, all ports are initialized to
the input state. AS, RD, HWR, and LWR go high, and the data bus goes to the high-impedance
state. The address bus outputs are held during the T3 state.The same timing applies when a reset
occurs in the T2 state of an access cycle to a two-state-access area.
Figure D-3 Reset during Memory Access (Reset during T3 State)
ø
Address bus
CS0
RD (read access)
HWR, LWR
Data bus
I/O port
RES
AS
High impedance
High impedance
High impedance
Internal
reset signal
Access to external address
T1 T2 T3
(write access)
(write access)
H'000000
CS7 to CS1
854
Appendix E Timing of Transition to and Recovery from
Hardware Standby Mode
Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode
(1) To retain RAM contents with the RAME bit set to 1 in SYSCR, drive the RES signal low 10
system clock cycles before the STBY signal goes low, as shown below. RES must remain low
until STBY goes low (minimum delay from STBY low to RES high: 0 ns).
(2) To retain RAM contents with the RAME bit cleared to 0 in SYSCR, or when RAM contents
do not need to be retained, RES does not have to be driven low as in (1).
Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode: Drive the RES signal low approximately
100 ns before STBY goes high.
855
t1≥ 10tcyc t2≥ 0 ns
STBY
RES
STBY
RES
t≥100 ns tOSC
Appendix F Product Code Lineup
Table F-1 H8/3048 Series Product Code Lineup
Package (Hitachi
Product Type Product Code Mark Code Package Code)
H8/3048 PROM 5 V HD6473048TF HD6473048TF 100-pin TQFP
version version (TFP-100B)
(ZTAT) HD6473048F HD6473048F 100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
3 V HD6473048VTF HD6473048VTF 100-pin TQFP
version (TFP-100B)
HD6473048VF HD6473048VF 100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
Mask 5 V HD6433048TF HD6433048(***)TF 100-pin TQFP
ROM version (TFP-100B)
version HD6433048F HD6433048(***)F 100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
3 V HD6433048VTF HD6433048(***)VTF 100-pin TQFP
version (TFP-100B)
HD6433048VF HD6433048(***)VF 100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
Flash 5 V HD64F3048TF HD64F3048TF 100-pin TQFP
memory version (TFP-100B)
version HD64F3048F HD64F3048F 100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
3 V HD64F3048VTF HD64F3048VTF 100-pin TQFP
version (TFP-100B)
HD64F3048VF HD64F3048VF 100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
H8/3047 Mask 5 V HD6433047TF HD6433047(***)TF 100-pin TQFP
ROM version (TFP-100B)
version HD6433047F HD6433047(***)F 100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
3 V HD6433047VTF HD6433047(***)VTF 100-pin TQFP
version (TFP-100B)
HD6433047VF HD6433047(***)VF 100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
856
Table F-1 H8/3048 Series Product Code Lineup (cont)
Package (Hitachi
Product Type Product Code Mark Code Package Code)
H8/3045 Mask 5 V HD6433045TF HD6433045(***)TF 100-pin TQFP
ROM version (TFP-100B)
version HD6433045F HD6433045(***)F 100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
3 V HD6433045VTF HD6433045(***)VTF 100-pin TQFP
version (TFP-100B)
HD6433045VF HD6433045(***)VF 100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
H8/3044 Mask 5 V HD6433044TF HD6433044(***)TF 100-pin TQFP
ROM version (TFP-100B)
version HD6433044F HD6433044(***)F 100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
3 V HD6433044VTF HD6433044(***)VTF 100-pin TQFP
version (TFP-100B)
HD6433044VF HD6433044(***)VF 100-pin QFP
(FP-100B)
Note: (***) in mask ROM versions is the ROM code.
857
Appendix G Package Dimensions
Figure G-1 shows the FP-100B package dimensions of the H8/3048 Series. Figure G-2 shows the
TFP-100B package dimensions.
Unit: mm
Figure G-1 Package Dimensions (FP-100B)
858
0.10
16.0 ± 0.3
1.0
0.5 ± 0.2
16.0 ± 0.3
3.05 Max
75 51
50
26
125
76
100
14
0° – 8°
0.5
0.08 M
0.22 ± 0.05
2.70
0.17 ± 0.05
0.12+0.13
–0.12
1.0
0.20 ± 0.04
0.15 ± 0.04
Dimension including the plating thickness
Base material dimension
Unit: mm
Figure G-2 Package Dimensions (TFP-100B)
859
16.0 ± 0.2
14
0.08
0.10 0.5 ± 0.1
16.0 ± 0.2
0.5
0.10 ± 0.10
1.20 Max
0.17 ± 0.05
0° – 8°
75 51
125
76
100 26
50
M
0.22 ± 0.05
1.0
1.00
1.0
0.20 ± 0.04
0.15 ± 0.04
Dimension including the plating thickness
Base material dimension
H8/3048 Series, H8/3048F-ZTATTM Hardware Manual
Publication Date: 1st Edition, January 1995
3nd Edition, October 1997
Published by: Semiconductor and IC Div.
Hitachi, Ltd.
Edited by: Technical Documentation Center
Hitachi Microcomputer System Ltd.
Copyright © Hitachi, Ltd., 1995. All rights reserved. Printed in Japan.
